TheTagalogLanguage 10067120

T H E TA G A L O G L A N G U A G E .
.
A C
C M R R E I—I E N S I V E G R A M IvI A T I C A L TR E AT ISE A ATD P ED To
SELF -
I NS TR CT I
U ON AN D PA RT I CU LA R LY DE S I GN ED FO R
USE OF T OS H E ENG A G ED IN GOV ER N M E N T SE R C VI E,
0
DR IN BU S I N E SS OR T RA DE IN TH E P HI L I PP I N ES
CC N STA N TI N C -
LEN D O V RO ,
FO R TW T EN Y S IX
-
YE AR S I NTI M AT E LY C O N N EC T ED WI T TRAH DE
AND C O MME RC E IN T HES E I SL A N D S .
SE C ON D ED I T ION .
( ALL R IGH TS RE S ERVED ) .
T R
,
a
P RIN ED .
BY JUA N FA J A DO .
M AN I LA P . I .
TH E TA G A L O G L A N G EIsAG E
’ ‘
3 3 ) J )
J ) 7
1
3 a )
A C OM P R EHE N RA M M AT I CA L TR AT I S A A T
S IVE G E E D P ED TO
SELF I N
-
S TR CT I U ART I C L AR L
ON AN D PSI U Y DE G N ED FO R
USE OF T S A
HO E ENG G EDR T S R ICIN G OV E N M EN E V E,
OR IN S I SS
BU TRA
NE OR ILI SDE I N THE P H P PI N E
C C N STA N TI N C L EN D O V R O ,
FO R TW TEN Y S I X YE
-
AR S I T I AT L C
N M E Y O N NE CT ED WI T TRA
H DE
AN D C M M RC
O E T S E IN HE E I S LA ND S .
SE CON D ED I T ION
( A LL R I TS RGH ES E R VED .
)
P RIN T ED BY J U A N FA J A R DO .
M AN I L A, P I . .
19 09 .
purchaser i s hereby i nfor m ed
that although the G ra m m ar
N otic e . The
m
tex t and th e Tagalog k e y are here co m bi ned i n o ne volu e he m a
y ,
have the m bou nd i n se p arate volu m es the arrange m ent at the point
,
m
of contract being such as to allow th e se paration wi th out detri ent to
the boo k .
l N T HD U U C I I U N
LI N E
E R R OR SH OUL D BE
I PA G E F RO M
1
. .
TOP .
language
I ndian
words an d the
too there exists
, .
de m onstrative
sei n
or
Ta g a le n
these
Dictionary
friar
TE X T
n ot
th a n
t u n g co d
p ronouns affo rd pronoun s an d the article f o r

proper noun s o f pe rson s affo rd
associated with pre fi xed to
an an d
vent
i rregular
equality
M a g ta g p f
an d
breadth
do
or
express e d
a ction
this
Pa n a y i m ti m
be
however
i m m ed iate
I n d ta n g .
taught
for
(I; to t he pers on y to t he instru m ent a n d that ,
with a n to th e perso n
event
paton o g
M a g b ay a d
67 498 3
TE X T .
ER R O R . SH O UL D BE
TOP .
gi lded
niI a
Ybi n i bi g dy
M a ca la laca d na
M a ca ha ha p i s na
m a ra m i n g
i s a fool
en sna re
cautious
pronounce a bl e
It
and
as if there we re
TA B L E OF C O N T E N TS .
( A n alpha etical b i ndex will be found j ust follo i ng the end w

of the G r a m m ar)
S
.
P AG E .
PR E F A C E
ITO
N R D UCT I O N .
THE G R A M M A R
P reli m inary R e m ark
The A rti cle

F irst E xercise .
G ender Declension
. of the A rticle
Second E xercis e
b
N u m er , an d the A dj ective . Declension of the
A rticle
Thi rd E xercise .
The L iga m ents an d ,

the R enderi n g of th e
Verb To be
“
F ourth E xercise
De m on strative P ronou ns
F ifth E xercise .
I nterrogative P ronoun s .
Sixth E xercise .
P ersonal an d P ossessive P ronoun s .
0 Seventh E xercise .
The Substantive
E ighth E xercise .
R elative P ronoun s .
N inth E xercise .
Intensives
Tenth E xercise .
N u m eral A dj ectives ; Cardi nal an d Ordinal Num

e ra ls .
E leventh E xercise .
N u m eral A dj ectives ; A dverbial ,

Distributi ve , an d
Parti tive N u merals
w
.
T elfth E xercise
LEs SON s THE TAGA LO G L A GU A G N E .
Degrees of Co m parison ; Co m parati ve of E quality .
Thirteenth E xercise .
XI V . Degrees of Co m parison ; Co m paratives of Su p

e ri o r i ty,
o f I nferiority and the Superlative ,
.
F ourteenth E xercise
Di m inutives
F ifteenth E xercise
VI b b
.
X . The Ve r . U m Ver s Conj ugation . .
Sixteenth E xerci se
X VII b
.
. M a g Pa y Ver s
-
Co nj ugation The Subj uncti ve
.
Seventeenth E xercise .
X VIII . M a
Ca
m Ver s b . Conj ugation . 103 107
-
E ighteenth E xercise
I
.
X X . The P assive Voice . Conj ugation .
N ineteenth E xerci se .
The Passive Voice ( continued ) . Conj ugati on .
Tw entieth E xercise
I
.
XX . I nstru m ental P assive M iddle Voice . Conj ugation .
Twenty F i rst E xerci se

-
XX II
.
. L ocal Passive M iddle Voice . Conj ugation .
Tw enty Second E xercise

-
XX III
.
Us e of the Ver b al Particle Um

d
.
Twenty Thir E xercise

XX IV b
.
. U s e of the Ver al Particle U m ( co nti nued ) .
Twenty F ourth E xercise

-
b
.
XXV . Irre g ularities i n the Conj ugation of Um Ver s .
Conj ugation .
Twenty F ifth E xercise

VI b
.
XX . U s e of the Ver al P article M a g

Tw enty Sixth E xercise
-
XX VII b
.
. U s e o f the Ver al Particle M a g ( continued ) .
Twenty Seventh E xercise

-
X X VIII
.
. U s e o f the P article P a y i n the Pa ssi ve .
Twenty E ighth E xercise

-
XX I X
.
. U s e o f the Verbal P article M a Conj ugatio n . .
Twenty N i nth E xercise .
XXX . The Partici ple .
Thirtieth E xercise
I
.
XXX . The P ast P arti ciple .
Thirty F i rst E xercise

-
XXX II
.
. I n Passive M eaning and U s e

-
Thirty Second E xercise

-
.
X XX I I I . Y Passive M eaning and U s e—
Thirty Thi rd E xe r cise

-
IV
.
XXX . A n P assive M ean ing and U s e—
Thi rt y F ourth E xercise

-
XXX V b
.
. The P roper U s e of either Voice of the Ver .
Thirty F ifth E xercise

-
XXX VI . M o di fi ca ti v e Verbal Particle M a n = Pa n Co n .
j ugation Verbal Co m pounds

. .
Thirty Sixth E xercise

-
SSO S
LE N . TA B L E OF C O N TE N T S . P A GE S
.
XXX V I I . M o di fi ca ti v e Ver al b Particle M a ca

% Co n
j ugation
I hi rty Seventh E xercise
‘
M o d i fi ca ti v e Ver al b Particle M a gma —

Pa . Co n
j ugati on
Thi rty E ight h Exerci se
-
XXX I X . b
M o di fi ca ti v e Ver al P article M a q u i z Pa qa i Co n .
j ugation A ny A t
.
,
Th i rty N i nth E xerci se

XL M o d i fi ca ti v e Ver al Particle P a bPa Co n : .
j ugation A 72 0 . .
F ortieth E xerci se .
M o d i fi ca ti v e Verbal Particle M a g ca zP a g ca Co n r .
j ugation B ag a y B a go
.
, .
F orty F irst E xercise

II b
.
XL . M o di fi ca t i v e Ver al Particle M a g u i nz P a g n
u i .
Conj ugation Ca y a Cod a

.
, .
F orty Second E xercise .
XL III b
M o d i fi ca ti v e Ve r al P article M a g s i zP q s i Co n a
z
. .
j ugatio n Ca s i D i D li B éu a D é on
.
, , , , .
F o rty Thi rd E xercise

I
.
XL V . M o d ifi ca ti v e Verbal P arti cle M a g s a zPa gs a Co n .
j ugation I ba I cao
.
, ,
Forty F ourth E xerci se .
XLV . M o difi c a ti v e Verbal Particle M a n hi z zP a nhi Co n .
j ugation L 000 Ocol P 0710 t i td zCa td

.
, , ,
.
F orty F i fth E xerci se .
XL VI . M o d i fi ca t i v e Verbal P article M a gp a ca
P a ca
Conj ugation Sa a n Sa n a.
,
.
F orty Sixth E xerci se

II
.
X LV . M o d i fi c a ti v e Verbal P article M a gp a ti r —
P a gp a li .
Conj ugation Si la , Si g/ d Su ca t
.
, .
F orty Seventh E xercise

XL VIII . M o difi ca ti v e Verbal P article M a g cap a __P a g cap a
Conj u g atio n Ta bi Ta g a , Ta la g a Ta mbm g
.
, , .
F orty E ighth E xerci se

XL X I . M od i fi ca ti v e Verbal Particle M a g ca n zP a g ca n .
Conj u gation Tap a t Ti la , T0103

.
] , Tong aat , .
F o r ty N inth E xerci se
z
-
.
The G erund Tom Ua la Ya r

' ’
. .
, ,
F iftieth E xerci se .
Us e and I nterchange of Tenses .
F i f ty F irst E xerci se .
Verbal Peculiarities Di m inu tive Ver s . b .
F i fty Secon d E xercise

III
.
L . U s e o f N a ng an d Sa i n the Obj ective Case

F ifty Third E xercise
T
.
L IV . The A dverb A dverbs of M a nner lace and i m e

.
,
P , .
F ifty F ourth E xercise .

L SSO S
E N . THE TAG ALO G L A N GUA G E . . PAG E
-
S .
The A dverb of Degree and A ffir m ation

A dverb s
b
. ,
N egative an d Dubitative A dver s .
F ifty F ifth E xercise

-
.
VI
L . The P reposition
F ifty Sixth E xercise
Copulative Adversative A l
.
L VI I . The Conj unction .

, ,
t e rn a ti v e Causative Conditional and I llati ve

, , ,
Conjunctions ,
F ifty Seventh E xercise .
L VIII . The I nterj ection

F ifty E ighth E xercise .
R ecapitulation of Pa 1ti c le s A n and Ca . .
F ifty N inth E xerci se .
R ecapitulation of P articles I n M a and M a ca .

, , .
Sixtieth E xerci se .
R ecapitul a tion of Pa rticles JII a g M a n and M ap a g .

, , .
Sixty F i rst E xercise

-
II
.
LX . R ecapi tulati on of P articles Pa Pag P a g ea .

, , ,
P a la an d P a n
,
.
Sixty Second E xercise

-
III
.
LX . R ecapi tulation of P articles P i n a ca Sa ng Ta g .

, , ,
Ta g a Ti g and Ye a
, ,
.
Si xty Th1rd E xercise

IV
.
LX . How to E xpress I deas n ot Having N ative Ter m s .
Sixty F ourth E xercise

LX V . How to E xpress I deas not Having N ative Ter m s .
( continue d )
Sixty F ifth E x e rcl s e
-
VI
.
LX . F igures of Dictio n P aragoges E p e the n s e s In

.
, ,
v ersions an d Contraction s
,
Si xty Sixth E xercise

VII
.
LX . Syntax R egi m en
—
Sixty Seventh E x e r ci s e
-
L X VIII . Syntax Constructio n of Sentences

—
Sixty E ighth E xercise

-
.
LXI X . The Colloquial L a nguage

Sixty N inth E xercise
-
.
LXX . The L iga m ents

Seventieth E xercise .
A PPE N D I X P roverbs
R eading and T
.
ranslati ng E xe r ci se
I N DE X
P R E F A C E .
Thetreatise hereby sub m itted to th e j udg m ent of the pu li c b ,
though ushered i n a s the secon d editio n of that pub lishe d i n 1902 m igh t , , ,
ho w eve r be properly ter m ed a n e w b ook The title excepted there i s

, .
,
scarcely a chapte r o f th e for m er editio n which was n o t ch anged o r

recast in the present o ne Wi thout m aterial ly chan gi n g the for m er
d
.
general plan all u nnecessary o r clu m sy m atter ha s bee n discar ed

b
, ,
while so m e n e w and we elieve i nteres ting m aterial has been added

, , .
This will be found to b e m ore particularly the case with the I n

t ro d u c ti o n Orthography a nd P rosody each O f which h as been enti rely
, , ,
re w ritten ; wit h the Syntax wh ic h i s en tirely n e w a n d constitutes the

,
m ost i m portant addition ; and wit h the alphabetical i ndex which has also ,
been added and which ren ders the treatise valuable as a book of reference
, .
I n a nswer to those who m a y feel inclined to fin d fault with

the present editio n for not being m ore condensed than the p revious
one we have to say that this has been done o n purpose I f a
,
'
treatise o f a language which strictly Speaking has neither di ctionaries

b
, ,
nor other li terature i s to fulfil its m issio n i t m ust , e gra m m ar , ,
dictionary an d li terary work at the sa m e ti m e

,
Whe n the p eculiar .
character o f the language an d the age and class o f person s m ost

likely to undertake i ts study are taken into account certai nly the , ,
o nly s u ccessf u l way e ither to p resent the language adequa t ely o r to

assist the student m aterially i s to p ut forth a treatise which wi ll be ,
co m prehensive enough to cover the field whi ch a pauci ty of l iterature

has left u ncovered We are conscious however that the validi ty of
.
, ,
the preceding state m ent wi ll not be well perceived a p r i or i an d we will ,
ab ide by the opi nio n of d i s s e n te rs ON L Y A F TE R TH EY H A V E

I
A CQU R E D THE L A N GU A G E .
.The author has here to acknowledge his obligation s to R e v A E . . .
Chenoweth M A ,
of the M ethodist Publishi ng H ouse i n thi s city
. .
, ,
an ear nest Tagalog student h i m self for h is genero us a nd valu a ble ,
assistance i n go w g over th e m anuscri pt and m re v isi ng the final ,
proof s heets an d offering such suggestions and m aking such changes

-
as w e r e require d to bring th e book up to its prese n t i m p roved shape

w
.
In a ord neither pai ns nor expense have bee n spared to i ncrease

,
the usef u lness and typograph ic correc tness o f the i ssue whic h i s now
offe e to the p ublic a nd wit h this predicatio n the author throws
,
h i m self on t he m ercy of h is readers .
M anila ,
P . I . . Septe m b er , 1909 .
I N TR O D U C TI O N .
The language whi ch t he following p ages purpose to i llustrate

i s that spoken by the F i lip i n os of M anila and su rroun d in g p rovin ces
extending i n every direction fro m wh at i s called the P rovi nce o f R i z
,
al ,
to the N orth through the central an d n orthern parts of the P rovi n ce

,
o f Bulac an i nto th at of N ueva E cij a ; to the east and n ort heast i nto the
, ,
districts of I nfanta an d P ri ncipe on the Pacific C oast ; to the west ,
across M anila Bay i nto the P rovi nce of Bataan ; and to th e south
, ,
throug h the extensive tract occupied by the provi nces of Cavi te

b
,
L aguna ,
Batangas and Taya as This language i s known as th e .
Tagalog ,
a deno m in atio n which distinguish es i t fro m th e Ibanag ,
P angasinan P a m pangan ,
I locano and Bicol the n a m e s of the ot h er
, ,
five principal vernaculars spoken i n thei r respective districts by the

’
re m aining portion of the Ch ri stia n pop u lation o f th e I slan d of L u z

, ,
on
z
.
Ou ts ide L u on Tagalog i s also spoken i n the adj ac ent i slands

,
of M indoro an d M ari nduque i n t he China Se a an d i n P olillo a n d ,
so m e other m ino r i slets i n the Pa cifi c I ts i nfluence m a y also be .
n oti ced m o re to the south i n the Speech o f the i nhabita n ts of th e

i slands which for m what i s kno n as the District o r Sub provi nce of w
R o m blon whi ch are recko ned geographically a nd politically as
b
, , ,
elonging to the Bisayan group

z
.
On the I sland of L u on the languages adj acen t to Tagalog ,
are approxi m ately as follows : On the northe rn m o st bor der of N ueva

E cij a i s found the I banag or Cagay an a dialect m o re o r less m ixed
z
,
with I locano which i s spoken th roughou t the provi nces of N uev a Vi caya
, ,
I sabela and Ca gay an In the sa m e direction bu t so m ewh at to the

.
,
west i s m e t the I locano spoken i n the eastern h alf of Pangasinan

, ,
an d on n orth thr oughout the provi nces Of U nion I loco s Su r an d ,
N orte ,
and so m ewhat throughout Benguet an d the other m ountai n
p rovin ces On the west of N ueva E cij a Ta g alog en counters to so m e
.
,
exten t the Pa ngasi nan dialect Spoken i n th e western half of th e ,
p rovi nce of the sa m e na m e and m ore o r less i n the n ort hern part , ,
of Tarlac province Co m ing south alo n g t he western line of N u eva

.
E cij a and also o n the sa m e side of Bulac an the P a m pa n gan i s m e t , ,
whi ch i s al m ost exclu sively the d ialect o f th e provi nce o f th at n a m e ,
and a ls o extends up i nto the southern h alf of Tarlac p rovi nce To .
the southeast of M an ila Tagalog encounters the Bicol S po k en th roughout

, ,
-
the p rovi n ces of A m bos Ca m a rin es A lb a y an d Sorsog on , .
The deli m itati on of the langu a ge boundaries of Ta galog es p eci ally ,
to the north of M ani la ca n be m ade with b u t very s m al l degree

w
,
Of p recisi on i n vie ,of the n u m erous cases of i ts encroach m ent i nto

the territory of o ther dialects o r of other dialects into its own Thus
b
, ,
along the anks of th e wate r course known as R i o G rande de la “
P a m panga where i t flows th rough the provi n ce of the sa m e na m e i t

, ,
would be difficult fo r a stranger to say whether Tagalog or Pa m pan g an

i s the vernacular as natives kno w an d use i ndi scri m inately t h e one
,
and the other On the other han d P a m pangan i s spoken i n do or s by

.
,
-
m any a native fa m ily i n southern N ueva E cija whi le there are even ,
m unicipalities in the sa m e provi nce as that of Sa n Juan d e G ui m ba , ,
a n d p a ri i a lly that of A li a ga w he re owi n g to ancient s ettle m ents of

, ,
IV . THE TAGA LO G L A N GUAG E .
people fro m I locos I locano co m es to be th e prevailing tongue

,
At .
the present ti m e also I locanos are settling all over the northern po rt io n
, ,
of N ueva E cij a and thus thei r tongue m a y co m e to be the p re v a i lm g

,
one over this part of the p rovince On the southern boundary a . ,
re m arkable i ns tance o f the e ncroach m ent by Tagalog i s found i n i ts

being s poken i n an d about the to w nships of M a m bulao and Paracale ‘
o f the P rovi nce of Ca m ari nes N orte and therefore far i nto th e j uris
d iction o f the Bicol The gold m ines. i th whic h the district abounds
,
w , ,
attracted fro m the earliest ti m es of Spani sh rul e a curren t of i m m i

, ,
g ra t i o n of people fro m Tayabas m ore especially fro m ,

the town of
L ucb an who co m m unicated thei r language to their descendants and
,
t he other i nhabitants .
Beyond its natural bounds Tagalog i s u nderstood by every native

,
I
I
of average educati on througho ut th e I slands A lthough the people of .
who m Ta galog i s the vernacular the Tagals as they are called are
I
, , ,
esse ntially o ne an d the sa m e race wi th the othe r sections of the

Christian nati ve i nhabitants of the A rchi pel a go still they for m ho ever , , w ,
the m ost e nergeti c and cultured po rtion of the whole population li ve ,
i n the m ost thic k ly populated distri ct and thei r language i s the m ost ,
I
euphonious the m ost ho m ogen eous and the m ost developed by con tact
,
with Span ish and t he o the r P hilippine tongues '
Shortly befo re the collapse of the Span i s h rule over the I slands ;
the Ta gals ca m e i nto special p ro m i nence by thei r up ris ing i n 1896
“
,
f o llow e d by outbreaks whic h al m ost a m ounted to a per m anent state

of i nsurrectio n against thei r rulers A fter the collapse ; by thei r .
m arc hing 1n m ilitary array through the territory of the o ther prov
i n ce s ; by their establish m ent of the F i li p i n o R ep u bli c at M alolos
z
,
whic h at once assu m ed control over all L u on ; and by subsequen t

fighting against the A m ericans ; the Tagals secured a political pre
do m inance over the o ther section s of the country which they s till
retain to a large extent an d which i s so m ewhat si m i lar to tha t which
.
, ,
difference of race aside the Bu gi s of Celebes the Kay a n s o f R o m e o

, , ,
and the Hovas of M adagascar exercise over the othe r t i i b e s of

those i slands .
When the rebellio n having been su ppressed the princi ples of

, ,
A m eri can rule w e re a llo w e d free play Tagalog j ournali s m and li t e ra ,
tu re were brought in to exi stence to such a n exten t that although ,
no t con tributing to the puri fi catio n and stability o f the language ,
n evertheless did largely contribute to i ts diffusion so that the Tagalog ,
ha s co m e to be al m ost the o n ly public ve hicle fo r co nveying t he

native thought
‘
This diffusion i s still furt her p ro m oted by the

.
language h aving its natural seat an d place o f cultivation in M ani la ,
the Capital of t he A rchipelago whe re there are centered all the ,
principal of fi cial bureaus G ov e rn ment an d p rivate i nstitutions and

, ,
o ther busi ness establi s h m ents which d raw la rg e c ro w d s of professional

'
m e n students and business people fro m a ll other sections of the I sland s ;

,
people who on finding thei r local tongues superseded by Tagalog i n

,
the transaction of thei r busi ness carry bac k a long with the m i nto ,
thei r respective provinces a disposi tion which i s as t he ger m which

.
will m ake Tagalog soon to beco m e the q u a s i official native language

fro m A parri to Z a m boanga .
A ccording to the census of 1903 the popul a tion of the prov

i n L uz
,
l uces on and of the other I slands i n which Tagalog i s th e

vernacular a m ounted to a figure n either su rpassed n o r
even reached by any o ther dialect o f t hose s poke n i n L u z
,
on
b z
.
The lan g u age spoken y the Christian population outside L u on ,

I N TR O D U TI C O N .
Marinduque and M indoro i s with the exc eptio n of those S poke n i n

,
th e Babuyan an d Sulu groups k nown by th e generic term o f Bisayan , ,
a designati on howe v er which i s geograph ic ra ther than li ngui stic

b
.
, ,
Here i t i s true a greater pop u latio n i s encountered n u m erin g over

, , ,
three m illio n people ; bu t i f the m atter i s v iewe d fro m the standpoi nt

of the u nity of language and the fact i s taken i nto consideration that ,
the differences of Bisayan as i t i s spoken i n Sa m ar or R o m blon and ,
the sa m e as spoken i n Ceb u o r M indanao a re i n so m e cases greater .
than those whi c h we find between Pa m pangan and Tagalog for i n sta nce f
b
,
t here m a y e eve n so m e reason fo r p ro cla i m i n g Ta g a lo g a s the P '
language m ost widely spoken i n t he whole A rchi pelago .
The ter m ta g alog i s by n atives applied e q u ally to the people

an d to t he language and n atu rally offers to the m i nd the suggestion
b w
, , ,
of wh at i ts origi n m a y hav e een a poi nt hich h itherto has by no

b
, ,
m eans een established

, .
The d i f fi c u lty o f ascertaining the real origi n of t he te r m s b y

‘
which the races a n d tri bes i nhabiti ng thi s part Of the orld a re w
designated m a y be seen i n the arren discussion en te red i nto and
, b ,
different Opi nions rendered by so high a u ho ri ti e s on all m atters of the

M alay A rchipelago as M arsden Cra w f u rd A b be F avre and others ; , ,
abou t the or i gin o f the wo rds ma la y n and ja w i or rather ba ha s a ma ,
la yn and ba ha s a j a w i as applied to the M alay language, .
The Ph ilippine philology cannot boast of such e m inent cha m pion s

nor could I t h ave ha d recours e to any h istori c or literary source s for
its m aterials and u na ble to do other w ise i t m ade the structure of
, , ,
‘
the ter m and its supposed meaning i n relatio n to ce rtai n local ci r

,
c u m s ta n é e s the basis fo r the theory of the o rigin of the word F ro m

, .
this diving i nto the waters of the gra m m atical pond of the language
w
,
ta g a log h as e m erged as a co ntrac ted co m p o u nd fo r m ed ith the p refi x ,
m a i n y used i n for m ing co m po und nouns i ndicat i ve of th e plac e

‘
to g a
,
“
of bi rth o r residence of any pe i sou and th e n ou n i log
,
ri ver , , ,
thus ta g a i log contracted to ta g ci log m eaning natives fro m th e r ive r

“ ’
b
-
, , ,
’
“
borderers ; i n reference i t see m s to the Pasig river o n the , anks ,
of which a large portion of the p eople speaking t he langua ge lives ,

.
Despite all analogies o f for m and locality i t i s however very

b
,
dou tful that this m a y be the real o rigi n o f the wo rd I t i s true .
that the t wo co m po nents ta g a and i log exist i n the language w ith

the above m entio ned i m po rt b u t i t i s difficul t to see any reaso n ,
why they should co m bi ne in such an ano m alous way for a designatio n

of thi s ki nd A lthoug h the s o lderi ng o f a p refix an d a root i nto a
.
co m pound i s frequently attende d with syncopatio n an d othe r phon eti c

changes at the oi nt o f con tact we fail ho w ever to discove r a single , , ,
i nstance i n which th is takes p lace with the prefix ta g a e ithe r i n Tagalog or ,
i n Bicol where ta g a i s u sed no t only for the sa m e p urpose as in the

for m er but as a verbal particle as well
,
I n point o f significatio n . ,
we fi nd ta g a n ever applied to the root i log as a ter m of gen eral

designatio n fo r peo p le living about any o ther wate r cou rse ove r th e
I slands as we naturally mi ght be led to expect fro m t he
, ell known w ’
habit of F i lip i no s and generally M alays of settling along the banks

Of river s an d strea m s The roots having a significatio n m ore o r less
connected wi th that of i log to which ta g a i s a pplied are : p a ngp a ng , , ,
d a la mp as i g z d a la mp a s i g a n ba y bay z ba y ba y i n
” ”
“
bank ; ,
“
beach ; holo , ,
“ “ ” “
head , beginning of a ri ver ; i la y a uplan d a nd generally that tr act , ,
o f land lyi ng i n the d i rectio n of the source of any wa t er cou rse ; an d

I t ma y be
”
ua aa , ba r “
the p oint where a rive r enter s i n to the sea
,
“
.
,
an d i s frequen tly said : ta g ap a ngp a ng ta g a cla la ngp as i y zta g a da la ngp a s i g a n , ,

VI . THE TAGA LO G L A N GUAG E .
= ta a ba ba y i n ta g a i la y a a n d ta g a n a n a to designate people
‘
ta g a ba / be?
g f gm g i
, ,
is s uin r ,
0 re s d i ng at so m e of the places i ndicated by the above roots ;
,
b i tt the genius of the lang u age shows i tself averse to the launc hi ng
forth of the co m pou nd ta g a i log refusing so to say to r e co g m z ,
e , ,
the river as affo ding the basis fo r the b u i ld1n g of any e x p re s s 1o n

r
having anything to do with b irth o r residence therea t I t m a y p er .
haps be a lleged with apparent good reaso n that the language has
, ,
sea ; t Ch see m s “ ’
the co m pound ta g a r ag a t sea m an ; fro m d ag a t
“
, , .
to contradi ct the above state m ent ; b ut we are here o n another gro und
an d on e showing th e use of the pre fi x for a different purpose na m ely t hat , ,
o r for m ing frequentative noun s i ndicati ve of the perso n engaged I n

a t rade for a m oney consi deration The sense i n ta g a r ci g a t 18 not
’
,
‘
th erefore one i n referen ce to the descen t o r residence b u t on e o f
, ,
life support an d one whi ch refers to t he person as engaged I n th e

-
,
sea faring business for a salary or as l1v 1n g o n the p roducts of the

.
-
,
.
sea The language Offers nu m erous co m pounds of the sa m e k i n d W i th

.
roots expressi ng v a r i o u s w a y s o f getting a living A m ong m any others .
”
m enti on is here m a d e on ly of ta g a p a g ba n tay sentry “
watch m an ; , ,
" ”
fro m ba ntct y “
to wat ch; ta g ap a q s ci i ng “
cook m an “
person i n charge
’ ’
, , ,
”
of t he boiling of ri ce for food .
Tagalog being for purposes of philological research, m erely ,
an oral la n gu a ge and the Ph ili ppi nes having only been b rou ght to
light by discovery and conquest within co m paratively recent ti m es n o ,
d i rect testi m ony of course c a n be adduced i n evidence for the

, ,
elucidation of the ori g i n of the na m es borne by the various tribes

foun d living therein ; but we m a y however i n the absence of any , ,
other historic data assu m e with so m e degree of confidence that i f

,
t he ter m ta g alog were ever derived fro m ta g a i log in the sense of

“
borderers or people settling along the banks o f a ri ver ; there
w
,
wo u ld not be anting so m e tradition recorded by the early Spani sh

friars as to i ntercourse wit h thei r si m ilarly designated neighbors the
z
,
“
ta g ap ar a ng those of the plain ; ta g a b i q a i d “
highlanders ; etc of
’
, , .
,
the sa m e tribe as there exist records of their feuds and quarrels

,
wi th Pa m pangan s P a n gasin ans etc , N o r i s ta g alog or ta g a i log i n

, .
thi s sense a geographical designation which m ight not have been

applied with equal p ropriety to the sa m e or any other people living
in analogous conditions of locali ty throughout the I slands .
The hypothesis then built for explaining the o rigin of thi s

, ,
name does not see m to be founded on any solid gra m m atical trad .
i ti o n a l or geographical ground
, I t s e e m s rather the result of e m
.
ploying only those m eans at hand pro m pted by the exigency of giving
m o m entary solution to a dif fi cult question thus avoiding the trouble , ,
or palliating the inabili ty o f searching else w here , .
Beyond thi s patching of the d iffi culty no other research es that

w
,
e are aware of have ever bee n m ade public ei ther to strengthen o r ,
t o rectify or a m en d what i n all p robabili ty i s an e rroneous d e rivation, , ,
an d t he question see m s i n solvable or one that wi ll baffle all efforts

to solve i t with only the m eans afforded by the resources at ho m e .
I t i s only when going i nto the geography and history of th e

M alay A rchipelago that the possi bili ty offers i tself to the m ind of the
word t a g i
c lo g havi g been received fro m Java
n The ter m s for “
d ry .
“ "
field culture and field i n the Javanese and M alay languages are
, , ,
ta g a l and a na l The expression ta g a l y a d a for

.
“
battle field occu rs -
’
frequently i n Javanese literature Ta g a l i s also found i n Ta galog .
the si gni fi cation “ " ”

v i th per m anency “
persi s ting ” “
endurance “
las t
w
, , ,
i ng ; hich notwithstanding i ts dissi m i lari ty wi th that i t has i n the

,
THE T G A ALO G L A G A G N U E.
syllable ,
b
eing the Ta galog equivalent for to have wh ich as i n the “
, , ,
case of M a y ti i bi g M a y ca u a y a n etc renders sel f ex p lanatory all co m

’
, ,
.
,
-
pounds of this kind .
Seeing the frequency with which Javanese coloni sts tran sferred n a m es
of places i n their own i slan d to those of thei r settle m ents abroad o ne ,
feel s even i nclined to look to th e word Ta la g a a corruption of the ,
San skri t ta r a g a “
a pond ; which i s the na m e o f a district i n Java
, ,
as a ffordin g also the possibility of having given rise t o the ter m

ta g alog What i n so m e degree see m s t o lend support to this hypo
.
-
thesis i s the presence i n the part w hich we m a y regard as the ho m e ,
of ta g a li s m and not far away fro m the Capi tal of th e A rchipelago Of ,
such an extensiv e p on d as the L ake of Bay m a y be considered to b e ”

which m atches well wi th the original sig nificatio n o f the word The .
transpositio n of the last syllable as seen i n ta g a la for ta la g a 1s m ,
the sa m e way as the appending of 09 wh ich has been s poken o f i n

a foregoing para gr a ph of thi s so m e chapter of frequent occurrence
i n the ta g a li z
,
i n g of Javan ese words Si m ilar t ranspositio n s m a y be .
seen i n the fo llowing : J a v li da hz Ta g di la “

tongu e "
J a v d a r i hi . .
,
.
”
Ta g d a li r i
.
“
fi nge r ; J a v top onn
,
ag p 0t0 n g crown ; and i n others . .
, .
The a b o y e data o f course are no t i ntended as conclusive evidence

, ,
of the origin of ta g alog but only as a tentative effort m ade i n honesty ,
to guess at the right derivatio n of the ter m Whi le i t i s readily .

’
ad m itted that fur t her research m a y disclose facts leading to theories

at variance with the o ne here exposed o r even furnishing us wit h
b
,
a solute certai nty we h owever i n the m ean t i m e and i n vi ew of the

, , ,
so m e
of the origi n
out the di rec t m ean s of ascertai ning the antiquity

of Ta galog but we m a y confidently assu m e that i t i s of a very re m ote
,
o rigin nay , if what i s predicated of it in t hi s Sketch proves true one far

, ,
m ore re m ote t han M alay perhaps even m ore than Sanskri t What
b
, .
see m s even m ore pro able i s that i t di d not o riginate with the
race that now speaks i t N o original m onu m ents i nscriptions or .
,
any other written records being here available we m ust h ave ,
recou rse to ci rcu m stantial eviden ce i n esti m ating the epoch of this
o rigi n What speaks already i n favo r of a high degree of antiquity ,
according to the standard of M alay philology i s the presence of ,
words take n fro m the Kawi the ancient language of Java: Kawi ,
( )
1 w ords are m ore nu m erous i n T a galog than p erhaps i n any other
language of the M alay A rchi pelago t he Javanese excepted ; but i t ,
m a y be obj ected that they have been i m ported through the latte r
language at a later period That thi s i s generally the case an d that .
-
,
Javanese was the largest recipien t an d distributor Of the Kawi lexical

i nheritance i s not here denied The fact however of Tagalog h a vi ng , .
, ,
i n so m e i nstances borrowed fro m t he o riginal source i s proved by

,
“
such Kawi words as p a rt leg an d foot “
the Sanskrit p a d a fro m ,
’
, ,
the Kawi p a dha ; a la p cloud ; fro m lolcap

“ ”
“
cloud ; tig as “
, heart ,
’
, ,
” “
“
core fro m ty a s
, heart ; an d others which are not found i n
,
’
Jav a nese A m ong the Kawi words co mm o n to the two languages

.
,
“ ” “ ” “
a y ao ,refusing caring not , not choosing ; affo rds a p roof o f ,
( 1) The w or d ca u i ,
p o n d i n g i n o r ho g ra p h y t o t ha o f ka w i , i s f o u n d
c o r re s t t
i n P J u a n d e N o c e d a s Sp a n i s h ra g a lo g D i c t i o n a r y ( s e e p a g e 58 , e d i t 1860 w i t h t he
'
z )
-
.
.
m e a n i n g q er i g on a , ja r g o n
“
The r e ca n b e n o d o u b t ha t he re t he r e a l ka wi s p e e c h
. t
i s m e a n t , c lo t he d w i t h a s i gn i fi ca t i o n w hi c h a g r e e s w e ll w i t h t he p oor n o t i ce w hi ch
t he a u thor , no do u b , ha d o f ha t
J a a n e s e la n g u a ge t t v .
I N TR O D UCT I ON . I X .
Ta galog having d rawn words di r ectly fro m the Kawi an d not fro m
the Kawi through the Javanese U nder the orth ogr a phical scope and .
phoneti c character of the two languages a y ao agree s both i n fo r m , ,
an d signi fica tion m ore with th e kawi a y u w a

, Had i t been i m ported .
-
fro m m odern Javanese i t would h ave then to a ppea r shaped m ore i n , ,
a ccordance with the for m aj n i n which a y a w a i s found i n the latter ,

.
O pini on of H um boldt bearing on the poi nt Of the close

'
g Th e
‘
r e la t i On of Tagalog with that an cient dead la n guage of ava as given ,
i n h i s work U eber d ie Kawi Sp rach e auf d e r / I fi s e l J ava

“
-
m ay ,
fi nd here adequa t e p la c e The n on Sanskri t portion ( o f the Kawi )

.
“
agrees i n t he m ost wo nderful m an ner wi th the Ta galog of t he P hili p

pi nes . Th i s accord will n ot b e foun d to consi st i n m erely general
gra m m atical relations only but goes deepe r i nto the thought castin g
,
-
m ethods of the people .

( 2 n d book page 2 8) He even ventures th e ,
hypothesi s Of a p ossible derivatio n of the structure of Javanese fro m Taga

log which i s by no m ean s i m probable
,
A t any rate h e i s authority ,
for the state m ent tha t Ta galog i s the m ost perfect living speci m en of
“
that G rea t M alay P olynesian L anguage which i s conside red as the paren t
stock fro m which all the other tongues of the M alay b r a n c h ha v e
sprung Thi s m a y be true but n ot per haps i n the sen se i ntended
w
f
.
,
by the great ph ilologi st n o t at least unti l i t i s m ade clear ho thi s

, , ,
"
G re a t M alay P olynesian L angu a ge i s to be understood ’
.
It i s no t proposed here to d iscuss further th e i n m aterial poin t

of th e an ti quity of th e l a n guage Ta galog it will be seen consists .
, , ,
m a i nly of an ele m ent clearly derived fro m M alay an d of another which

, , ,
n o t being traceable to any M alay sou rce w a y be regarded a s abor ,
i g i na l . A n atte m pt wi ll be m ade further o n i n this outlook to

ollect in tables thi s M al y and all othe r fo reig ele m ents so as to
'
c a n
i solate the aboriginal on e an d thereby ren der by contrast i ts , , ,
respecti ve of fi ce i n the la n guage m ore m anif est I n the co m parison .
with each other and with other foreign tongues such theories wi ll be ,
advanced an d such data adduce d i n evi dence to Show ho w th ese vari ous
ele m ents ca m e to be soldere d i nto a co m pact fra m e as it i s believed , , ,
to enable the reader to j udge for h i m self of the re m ote origin of the
la n guage .
The M alay race that we see i nhabiting besides the p enin sul a ,
of thi s na m e i n the southern m ost extre m i ty Of th e A siati c conti nen t ,
the vast i nsular region fro m M ad a gascar i n the west to E aster I sla n d
i n the east N e w G uin ea excepted an d fro m H a wai i a n d F or m osa
, ,
i n th e n orth to N e w Z ealan d i n the south appeals to our m i nds ,
as on e th at m ust have acco m plished great deeds i n the re m ote past .
I f we only pause to consider that the conquest an d possession Of .
th e i m m ense ins ular extension whi ch the race al m ost exclusively now , ,
occupie s and holds su bj ect to forei g n yoke is the work of the

, ,
M alay effort we m ust at once concede to these peo ple so m e of the

,
ability and daring wh ic h i n h istori c ti m es have m ade other m ari ti m e

, ,
peopl e s great .
We m a y i m agine the re m ote ancestors of the presen t M alays

co m ing for th i n swar m s fro m the unknown confines of th ei r cradle
land i n A sia and sp reading the m selves over the adj acent i slands o f t he
archi pelago to t he al m o st co m plete eli m inatio n o f the aboriginal i h
habitants possi bly by exter m ination of t he latter in thei r o n ho m es
,
w ,
or perhaps by driving the m away an d loc k in g the m u p i n th at

, ,
1
( ) N i m m t m a n d a s h i e r G e s a gt e z us a m me n s o s c he i n t d a ra u s e u f o lge n
,
,
da s s das Jav u r s p r u u g li c h s ei ne n F o r m e n b a u v o m Ta g a b l e i t e te
.
( 3r d b oo k . . .
,
Pa ge
X . THE T GA A L G
O LA N G UAG E .
Papuan d
stronghol of N e w Guine a ; an d then a gai n onward an d
onward i n every direction over the vast Pacifi c into th e i n nu m e r
, ,
able i slands of the M icronesian and the P olyn esian archi pelagos nay , ,
perhaps even i nto th e A m eri can continent i tself .
When the distance i s m easured fro m Su m atra to M adagascar ,
an d fro m t here to E aster I sland an d H awaii covered by thes e people ,
i n thei r ranges over suc h a vast extension of sea wi th the very ,
i m perfect m ean s we m ust suppose they possessed at a period leavin g

no traces i n history nor any tradition s a m ong the race ; whe n the
extent of skill and hu m an labor put forth for the enterprise i s
fatho m ed and the i ndo m itable spiri t a nd length of ti m e which m ust
,
have been requi red for the adventure and i ts execution i n so vast
a scale are considered i t i s i m possible n ot to feel ad m iratio n fo r
,
the people that acco m pli shed this great exploi t N o r ca n b e doubt .
ed the capaci ty which t he race on ce exhibited for i m prove m ent ,
when we consider to what high degree i t i m bib ed a nd carri ed

out Hindoo civili z
.
atio n i n qui te historical ti m es as shown by the ,
nu m erous i nscriptions and te m ple ruins over the I slan d of Java ,
m ore especially those of B ra m b a n a m G u n o m P rau an d B o ro b o do of , , ,
which Wallace i n i ts reference to the latter says : ( Wallace Th e M alay

, , ,
A rchi pelago page 8 1) The a m ount of hu m an labor an d skil l expended

“
,
o n the G reat Pyra m ids of E gypt s inks i nto i n s i g n i fi c a n c e hen co m w

pared with that required to co m plete t h is sculp tured hi ll te m ple i n -
the i nterior of Java ; while o n the other h and sparks of the pri m i tive
, ,
energy m a y partially be seen i n later ti m es i n th e courage wi th which

the now al m os t barbarous A c he e n e s e tribes o f the no rth of Su m at ra
‘
i n the l 6th century bi d de fi ance to and threatened to e v e rthro w the

, ,
establish m ents and the m ari ti m e power of Po rtugal i n this part of th e

worl d .
But the race i s now o n the wane fai nt with exhaustio n after ,
the gigantic effort and see m s to have lost i n co m pactness as m uch

,
as it gained i n expansion .
Such a p r qf o u n d Observe r of the M ala y character as M arsden ,
calls attentio n to the fact of t he race s decli ne i n the followi ng ter m s : ‘
o ry of Su m atra by M arsden ) M alays have an appearance of de

“
( S e e Hist ~
g e n e ra cy They
. see m rather to be si n k ing i nto Obscurity though with ,
opportunities of i m prove m ent than e m erging to a state of civi l o r

,
political i m por tance .
There can be little doub t that M alays with thei r present aversion ,
to work and nonchalant disposition and thei r i m perfect notion of ,
honor an d e q u lty are renderi ng even m ore precarious the inferior

position they hold a m ong th e other races with which they live i n
the sa m e territories thei r forefathers con quered wi th person al effort
and which the latter occupi ed as m asters .
The intellect an d capacity of M alays fo r th e acqui re m ent of

knowledge see m s on the whole rather deficien t They are b right i n
, ,
.
youth and Show a ready disposition for i m bi bing knowledge which

chiefly depends o n m e m ory an d for the practice of m any m anual arts ;
,
but thi s early acuteness and q u ickness of m ind ceases wi th th e m and

they beco m e m ere auto m aton s i nc a pable alike of i m prove m ent an d
,
m istake at an a g e whi ch fi nds o ther races still advancing toward a

,
h igher develop m ent of both m ental an d physical abili ty .
E ven i n that part of the M alay A rchipelago where the race

has co m e into e a rly contact with m ore advanced nations M alays ,
have Shown the m selves i ncapable not only o f m aintai ning the s tandard
z b
,
of the civili atio n thus acquired ut of p re s e rvin g s u ch histo ri c r e lic s

,
I N TR OD UCTI oN . XI .
of sa m e as woul d have created a m o n g th e m a s tr on g t ra di ti on a l r a ce

'
spi rit an d for m ed a n u cleo n s o f feeling to serv e a s a b a sis for future

national life They even los t all tradition o f the two greatest m on u
m ents of Hi ndoo civi li z
a
.
ation the Kawi language d epositary of a ll t he

, ,
hi story and l iterature of t he n ation ; an d t he te m ples of Buddha ,
the on ly records foun d of a p a st Java n ese gra ndeu r R affles ( accord .
i ng t o Hu m boldt s t esti m ony ) ( 1) i n 1817 could fin d only one person

’
, ,
i n th e I sland who knew so m eth in g of th e la n gu a ge A n d i t w a s not .
unti l 17 97 t ha t a Dutch e n gin eer detailed to con struct a fort d i scovered , ,
t hes e architectural te m ple ruin s i n t he n eighbourhood of B ra m b a n a m so ,
deeply we re they covere d wi th vegetation .
N o t on ly i n Java do we fi n d the sa m e i n s ou ci a n ce of the race ,
but everywhere e lse The M alay i s la nder m a y o n so m e partic u lar

.
,
o ccasion by irrespon sible i m pu lse run a m u ck an d perpetrate th e m ost

, ,
atrocious acts o r do t he g reatest feats of herois m ; but i n th e m ain , ,
h e i s an i m passive creature Thi s with t he gen eral absen ce of v i go

.
,
rous though t a n d strongly m arked ten d en cies i n hi s c haracter an d w ith ,
a lack of sou nd o ri entation i n hi s a spi ratio n s m akes hi m an e a sy prey ,
of races wh ich whi le con sidered by hi m as inferior are of m uch m ore

, ,
a ggressive an d i ndustrious di sposi tion .
The confidence h eld by so m e i n hi s alleged a ptitude for s elf

‘
govern m ent see m s to be m isplaced when we see th e assi duou s care

he besto w s u pon hi s fighti n g cock or hi s chewi n g of etel w hi le he ,
b ,
pays no atten tion to hi s crop bei ng encroach ed u pon or taken i n pay m en t

of debts by the cun ni ng Chinese m erc han t o r h i s conde m ned property ,
held up for sale by the sh eriff the M alay re m aini n g a pparen tly un co n cerned
,
i n t he whole tran sacti o n a s lo ng as those cheri shed o bj ec t s of hi s affection

are not i nterfered with
b b
.
I n the P hilip pin es w h ere y a poli cy w h ich see m s to e less

, ,
wi se than well m eant the race ha s been a fforded the best Opportuni ty for
-
a d i splay of its alleged n ative q u alificatio n s the c a ses are fre q uen t of
ei th er an utter fai lure i n th e reali z
,
ation of the expectatio n s held o r ,
of the turni ng of o f fi ce tenure i n to a c hann el o f perso n al el a tion o r

-
i n th e display of that tricky disposition whic h setti n g aside every ,
regard for the publi c welfare i n the discharge o f official duties seeks ,
o nly th e satisfaction of such racial prej udices an d individual i n clina

tion s as m a y b e calculated t o bring the race o r t he perso n in to
n oto ri ety o r u ndue pro m inen ce Th ere are n o doubt in s t ances of .
, ,
sou nd an d con scien tio u s d i sc harge of d u ty but i t wo u ld be very

h az
,
ardou s to take th i s as conclu sive eviden ce of the apti tude of the

race Despi te all past an d p resen t trai ni n g i n the Islan ds it see m s
.
, ,
however certai n that the race can not m ai n tai n its u n ity as such
d
,
a gai ns t the ten ency of the people for inter m arry in g with other
races t hat cannot b e i ncorpora t ed i nto t heir own .
A t any rate the study of the la n gu a ges n o w i n u s e over

b
,
the I slands see m s to bear testi m ony of th e race s past a ility a n d of ‘
Ob g le i ch a b e r d a s Ka w i s i c h a u f d i e s e W e i s e i m J a va n i s che n Pu p p e n
( l)
s p i e le i n le b e n d i g e m G e b r a u ch e r h a lt e n h a t , s o i s t d i e e i g e n t li c he Ke n n t n i s s
d e s s e lb e n d o ch a u t d e r I n s e l a ls e r lo s c he n a n z u s e h e n W a s b e i d e n Pu p p e n s p i e le n .
h e r g e s a g t w i r d , i s t d u r c h a lte U e b e r li e f e r u n g a u s w e n d i g g e le r n t , u n d e b e n s o d i e
z z
hi n u g e f fi g t e J a va n i s c he U e b e r s e t u n g , s o d a i s d e r h e r s a g e n d e D a la n g k au m e t w a s
s e lb s t z
d a vo n u v e r s t e h e n b r a u c h t D i e s m u s s w e n i g s t e n s d a r a u s s ch li e s s e n , d a s s
z
.
R a f fl e s ve r s i c h e r t , d a s s u s e i ne r Ze i t nu r e i n e in z ige s I n d i v i d u u m a ls d e r Sp r a ch e
w i r k li c h k u n d i g a n g e s e he n w e rd e n k o n n te ( U ( 1 K S a . d I JT 2 nd
. b oo k ,. . . . . , .
6 D e n n R a f fl e s f a n d n u r e i ne n e i n z i g e n M a n n , a e lc he r i m St a n d e w ar ,
z
p a ge s
d e n B Y ( B ra t a Y u dd ha ) a u s z u le g e n , 11n d a u ch d i e s e r m u s s t e d och o f t u r b lo s s e n
. .
E rra t b u n g d e s Si nne s s e i n e Z u fl nc ht n e hm e n ( I d , 2 nd b oo k, p a ge 2 01
.
THE TA G AL G LA
O N GU GE A
its presen t ecli ne d
Ta galog the one here con s i ere . sho s s ig n s ,
d d , w
of a language i n decay o nly resc u ed fro m co m plete rui n by Sp a m s h
,
,
which revived it by furni shing i t with n e w m atter to think u p on ,
an d by the diligence of t he Spani sh f riars who pi c k ed i t up fro m ,
its grave gave i t th e R o m an ch a rac ters wrote out i ts gra m m ar an d

, , ,
m ade i t k nown to the world outside ( 1) .
Thi s m a y be inferred fro m the lack i n i t s present s y ste m o f

certai n consonants which there i s reaso n to be lieve once e xisted an d fro m ,
the disappeara n ce fro m t he lan gu a ge of a nu m ber of verb buildi ng -
particl es the past existence of which i s revealed b y the fact of t he m

,
being still found t herei n conglo m erated with the root o r i n thei r i n ,
dependent verb building condition i n other P hilipp i ne t o n gues

-
.
The language ha s only th ree funda m en tal vowels whi ch in ,
p ronunciation are expanded i nto fi v e sounds by a process so m ewhat

,
si m ilar to that of the g a n a i n Sanskri t The con sonan t syste m i s .
found to con sist of fifteen sou nds which m a y be thus classified :
ST R O N G . MI L D . NA SA L .
absen ce of f classes Ta galog a m ong the m ost developed

The
languages Of the P hili ppi nes for it i s a well known fact that this ,
consonan t i s only found i n the ruder langu a ges of the wi ld tribes an d

i n the I banag .
The vowel an d con sonan t syste m s th e la n gu a ges co m bines well

into syllables o f a distinct and a greeab le sound the strong an d the ,
m ild labial and the strong dental at the beginning of words and
, ,
syllables co m bined wi th th e shar p vo w els a i a prevai ling

, , , ,
.
The language for m s usually by i ncorporatio n i n various ways of one,
or m or e particles wi th a generally dissyllabi c k ern el or ste m a co m pound

, , ,
which besides e m bodying t he radical signi fi cation adds so m e other acces

, ,
s ory relation deter m ini ng i ts gra m m atical office o r the par t o f s peech i nto ,
which i t should be classified So m eti m es too the wo rd building power ; .

, ,
I n a t i m e w he n t h e m e r i t s a n d s e r v i c e s , i n t h i s a n d o t he r r e s p e c t s ,
( 1)
t z
o f h e s e e a r ly p i o n e e r s o f c i v i li a t i o n i n t h e s e I s la n d s a r e b e li t t le d t h r o u g h i g n o r a n c e o r
p r e ju d i ce , t he a u t ho r m a y b e e x c u s e d i f h e q u o t e s h e r e t he w o r d s i n w hi c h H u m b o ld t ,
f o r h i s c o m p a r i s o n o f t h e J a v a n e s e a n d t h e Ka w i la n gu a g e s , g r e a ly la m e n t e d n o t t o t
t
f r i a rs . u nd w e nn m a n v on ava s o J
fi n d he r e t h e v a lu a b le a n d a b u n d a n t i n f o r m a t i o n h e f o u n d i n t h e w o r k s o f t he Sp a n i s h
a u s f ti hr li c h e u n d i n s E i n e n e g e he n d e
Ke nn t n i s s b e s a s s e a ls m a n d e m s o r g s a m e n F le i s s d e r Sp a n i s ch e n M i s s i o n a r e v o n
,
z l
d e n D i a le k t V e r c h i e d e n he i n t e n d e r P h i li p p i n i s c he n I n s e ln , b i s a u f d i e
-
L a u te i g e n
z
t h fi m l i ck e i t e n e i n e ln e r O rt s c ha f e n h e ra b t
v e r d a n k t, s o w ii r d e
, s i ch h i e r ii b e r m i t
t
G e w i s s h e i e n t s h e i d e n la s s e n ”
( U , ( 1 KS a d I J , 2 n d b o o k , p a g e s 2 00
. . . . . .
A n d f u r t he r o n s p e a k i n g o f t h e la n g u a g e s o f M a d a g a s ca r a n d r e f u i n g Cra w f u r d s
, t ’
“
t he o r i e s , h e s ays : a u c h h I e r s i n d d i e F r u c ht e d e r G r d n d li c h k e i t u n d d e s u ne r m u d li c he n
F le i s s e s d e r S p a n i s c h e n G e i s t li c hk e i t s i c h t b a r U e b e r a ll w o s i e i m 17 u n d n o c h
.
i m 18 J a hr hu n d e r t b e i A u s s e r E u r Op a i s c h e n N a ti o n e n t h a t i g g e w e s e n i s t , g i e b t e s
‘
z
-
.
H ulf m i tt e l, d i e s c ho n d a r i n e i n e n u ns c h a t b a r e n W e r t h h a b e n , d a s s s i e a lle m a l
e i n e n s e h r g r o s s e n The i l d e r i n d e n Sp ra ch e n i e ge n d e n Tha t s a c he n e n t ha t e n l l .
( 3t a b ook , p a ge
O O
I N TR DUC TI N . XI I I .
of thes e p art i cles go es far b eyon d the deter minat i o n

o f t he ra ical idea d
i nto such m odi fi cation s o f the Original m ean i ng as generally require the
u se of adverbs o r qualifiers of the sa m e kind i n other languages To .
“
t he process of a f fi x a t i o n that of reduplication and of phoneti c chang e, ,
are added which see m to be as the fi rs t steps taken by the languag e

,
towards the acqu ire m en t of a de fi nite i n fl e c ti o n a l character o r perhaps ,
these are vestiges of i ts on ce h aving possessed a m ore developed one .
There i s a pa rticle set aside for the expression of the p lural with
n on n s ; also distinct nu m ber for m s wi th the personal an d the possessive
‘
pronoun s o ne dual on e incl u sive an d another exclusive ; a n d agai n

, ,
the p rocess o f redupli c ation coupled with several others with the , ,
i nterrogative an d de m onstrati ve p ronouns and under certai n c i rcu m , ,
stances wi th th e verbs as well

/ Fhe re i s n o i nflectio n fo r gender there existing only words ln
.
,
. ,
d i c ati v e of sex but there i s so m e reason to beli eve that the language
,
ha d on ce a kin d o f i nflection fo r personal noun s and in a certai n ,
sense too for the ex pression of perso n with verbs

b
, , .
The verbal :conj ugative m echani s m i s of re m ar k a le i ngen ui ty

an d on e as far a s our knowledge enables u s to j ud g e not to e
, ,
b
foun d i n any o t her M alasian o r P olynesian language Voice i s m ade .
known by particles an nexed to the root an d tense is expressed by ,
a f fi x a t i o n couple d w ith per m utation and redupl ication while m ood i s ,
only i ndicated by the use of di rectives o r p reposition s or by the

syntacti cal arra n ge m ent .
The radical ele m ent con tain s n o m ore substantive ter m s than
a few wh ich i n t hei r crude state m a y be classi fi ed as n ouns a d
b
,
j e c ti v e s o r ver s ; but even i n this thei r pri m i tive condition they m ay
be an d are generally confir m ed i n thei r resp ecti ve characters y as

, ,
b
soci ation with certai n parti c les There are f e w abstract n ouns a m ong .
the radicals but the language affo rds the m ean s of easi ly for m ing
,
as m any a s m a y b e requi red .
The sa m e radical ele m ent provides ei ther i n a p u r e o r i n a

b
,
c o m i ned state one ar ticle for co m m on ,

an d another fo r perso nal n ouns ; ,
personal possessive de m on stra tiv e a n d i nterrogative pronouns and a

, , , ,
large n u m ber of i n t e n sives an d directives .
The nu m erals as wel l as th e syste m of n u m eratio n are m ai nly

th e sa m e as i n the o ther languages of the M alay A rchipelago fro m ,
whi ch i t i s believed they have been i m p orted ; but there i s sa m e

b
, , ,
eason to elieve that the adoption of th e o ne n ow i n use superseded

an an cient native syste m .
There i s n o substanti ve verb nor any well defined relative p ro

nou n but there exist various ways of palliating these de fi cienci es or
,
“
,
i t m a y be said t hat wi thi n the peculi a r character an d structure of

,
the la n gu a ge s u ch i m portant ele m ents as these are not to i t as e s

,
.
s e n ti a l or necessary as they are to other lan guages .
The s y ntax i s free an d well adapted for the precisio n of though t

an d m usical cad ence The loose and apparently rough pitched s p eec h
w
.
which e so m eti m es n otice i n the native talk see m s rather attributable to

ignorance a n d la z iness i n the native m ind than to any deficiency i n the
'
la n gu a ge .
The logic with wh ich the language proceeds i n fo r m ing co m pounds ,
m a y be see n i n s d a n = s a + a n “ “ “ ” ”
“
where fro m s a I n at an d a n
,
a , , , , ,
“ “
suf fi x denotin g place ; s i n 0 wh o ? fro m s i the article of
z
,
p ersona l n ouns ; an d o n e what? a n om a n zza n o I n a n

” “ ”
, a li n - —
,
m a n = a li n + ma n i no ma n z s i n 0 + ma n ,
‘
s
-
w who ?
,
” “
f ro m , res p ectively “
what ? hich ? and s i n o, an d ma n
“
a li n ,
’
, a no, ,
XI V . THE TAGA L G L A N GU GE O A .
"
though al thoug h ; etc Worthy of m entio n also i s the figurative
,
“
.
sense found i n the expressio n of certai n abstract notion s Th us fro m .

,
“
debt and leob i n w ard the expression i i ta ng loo b fo r grati
’
“
I li a ng
-
, , , , ,
" ” “
tude i s for m ed ; fro m bong a fruit
,
“
product an d lolog sleeping
’
,
“
, , , ,
" “ “
bon g ang té log
'
drea m ; fro m p a ti d
,
parting asunder
'
disuniting , , ,
and ca “
,
a p re fi x used i n fo r m i ng n ou n s Of co m pa n io n shi p an d i ndi
“ ” “
cating one only of th e parties i s for m ed cap a ti d brother ,
one set loose , ,
of those that were tied with t he sa m e stri n g There a re other expres

’
.
“
sions of a knavish i m po rt as m a ca ll a ng ca may literally itchy hand , , ,
“ “
han d affected with i t c h for petty thief pickpocket ; etc and
’
“ ’
.
, ,
quite a n u m ber of euphe m is m s for such things an d actions as i t woul d

be indecorou s to m ention .
The language see m s to h ave undergo n e li ttle c hange for centuri es .
This u nchangeabili ty m a y b e expl ained on one side by that i m m u , ,
table character o f all oriental i nstitution s an d o n the other side by

the s m al l progress which the people h ave m ade i n c ivili z
, ,
ation No .
i m portant c hange can b e appr e ciated for the three cen turies of whi ch
we a re i n p ossession of wri tten speci m en s an d other records for th e ,
'
fi rst religiou s b ooks co m posed by t he Spani sh friars could well serve
for th e present day The differen ces foun d i n th e lan gu a ge of t he
.
L ord s P rayer a n d ot her for m s of pra y e r between the early and late
’
editions are d u e chiefly to a better un derstanding of th e n ative i dio m

and n o t to any Obsolescence or archai s m i n the exp ression .
A ltho u gh the A m erican occupation w i th th e boundless liberty ,
it brough t to every m anifestatio n of the native life d id n ot fai l to

i nvolve an d revolutioni z
,
e the language p u tting i t i nto the hand s of ,
the presen t innovators by who m i t i s being con verted i nto an al m ost

unin t elligible hig hly elaborate j argon still we refuse to consider thi s as ,
a practical and per m anent m ove a s i t i s not the cou rse that t he language
w
,
ould take o f i tself i f left to the good sense of the co m m on people .
But with all thi s apparent s tationary character there m ust have ,
been an epoch i n a very re m ote past when the M alay ele m ent now
, ,
found i n the la n guage did not exist Other c ha n ges m ust have taken .
p lace at a later period which we can o n ly p resu m e by certai n facts

whi ch th e co m p a rison with the o ther di a lects spoken i n t he I slands
discloses We m a y confidently assu m e that the palatal strong sound of
.
t he E ngli sh ch as found still i n the words ma chi n m onkey ;

“
hi cho
’
, , ,
“
chewing betel ; an d a few other Ta galog as well as i n certain Bi sa
’
yan words a n d the palatal n asal of t he Spanish n as still found i n

, ,
“
i ny o and n i n g o your ( s ) ( plural )
, ; were for m erly m ore nu m erous i n t h e
language We m a y a lso believe that the palata l m ild sound of the F ren ch
j
, as foun d i n th e I ban a g m a y on ce h ave been co m m on to Tagalog
, .
F ro m th e con sideratio n of certai n words i n the la n guages of

M adagascar which have corresponding ones i n Tagalog we m a y also ,
infer tha t t he soun d of v n ow vani shed was u sed i n m any word s , ,
an d co m binations now written with b We m a y go back to a ti m e .
when the language ha d not yet acqui red th e guttural sound of h ,
wanti n g i n the I ban a g I locano Pa n p a ng a n and P angasin an an d wh en

, , ,
m was i n certai n words replaced by p as shown by the presen t bi has a , ,

“
ta m e ; i n respect to the ancient mi ka s a There was no doubt a ti m e .
, ,
i n which 7 was used i n m any wo rds which we find n ow written with

'
, l as the Bicol and B isayan o r an z Ta g n lct n “

ra i n ; and m any .
’
other words show The l anguage shows also signs of h aving exch anged
, .
for m er labial and liquid consonants for present n asal ones Th at .
develop m ent an d per m utation of con so nan t sounds i s still goi ng on

i n the lan guage v a riation s of the fol lo in g kin
, i n one an the w d d
THE TAG AL O G LA N GU G E A .
are of sporadi c o rigin ; an d so great a con f usion r eigns as to the rea l

” ”
m eaning and scope Of such words as “
i n fl e c ti o n a l “
aggluti nativ e ,
and m onosyllabi c
“
i n reference to language ; he m a y be excused fo r
,
not m aking the atte m pt He o nly asks per m i ssion to i ntroduce here a .
brie f state m ent Of the af fi nities which he beli eves to h ave detected between
Tagalog and those two bases of philological classi fi cation the Hebrew ,
a nd the Sanskrit languages leaving the reader to classify the sa m e i f h e , ,
pleases according to h is parti cular theories as Se m itic or as A rian

‘
, , ,
o r else to cast i t into that A llop hy li a n g rou p which see m s to have

been created for the r eception of all oth er languages whi ch are
i m perfectly known an d i n which Tagalog i s i n cluded by philologi sts .
A s i n Tagalog so i t is found i n H ebre w that w hen the adj ective ,
i s put before t he n oun t here i s a su p pression Of the substan tive ,
verb o r rather of the particle which i n Tagalog m a y be sai d to

,
s tan d fo r the substantive verb The co m para tive and to a certai n .

,
extent also t he superlative are in both languages ex pressed i n th e

, ,
sa m e way N o true relative pronoun i s found i n ei ther language

.
~
.
The nearest affinities of the Tagalog verb see m to be with that o f

the Hebre w and other Se m iti c languages The tenses i n the two .
are o nly three present past a n d f u t u r e I n Heb rew as i n Tagalog

‘
.
, , , , ,
the i nfinitive and th e i m perative are a like the n egative i m perative ,
i s expressed by t h e future an d a lso so m eti m es the past tense I n , .
H ebrew too the participle re fers to th e th ree ten ses of the verb
, , .
N O real si m ilarity however m a y be s aid to exist i n the phoneti c

, ,
syste m as no traces are found i n Tag a log of the characteri s t ic three

,
consonant word ste m of the Se m i tic languages -

Students of Hebrew .
,
however m a y find so m e o ther af fi nities

,
.
I n th e co m pariso n with Sans k ri t we fi nd i n the phonetic syste m ,
of the two languages besides a syllabic alphabet the three pri m ary , ,
vowel s ou n d s the d i p t ho n g s a t and an th e absen ce of the short

, ,
v owel e the paucity of a sounds and the prevalen ce of the sound

,
a ( a h ) . F o r the m odification an d expan sion o f the sound of certai n

vowels Ta galog u ses frequen tly what m a y be considered the San skri t
,
g u n a ti on a n d w r i d dhi ti on I n the consonant syste m i s found the .
a nu s v a r a which bears close rese m blan ce to the liga m ent or n asal

,
.
ending peculiar to Tagalog We m a y m ention too a ki nd o f .

,
w r i d dhi ti on o f the fe m i nine Sans k rit ter m ination i i nto the Tagalog
term ination a y of fe m ini ne collo q uial pretty n a m es A dual person al .
pronoun i s also found i n San s krit The posse s sive case of personal .
pronouns serves i n both languages for t he expres sio n of the posses ’
s ivc e
. The i ndefini te p ronoun s are i n both languages fo r m ed fro m , ,
the interrogatives by m ean s o f a suffix corresponding to the E ngl ish

” “
“
ever , soever Close rese m blan ce exists also between the Sa nskri t
.
a ya m i y a m i da m ( i s i d i n L atin ) and the Tagalog de m on

‘
,
-
ea ,
-
, ,
“ " “
s t ra ti v e i y an that that n ear you
, ,
.
The reduplication which i n Ta galog plays such an i m portant ,
role i n the conj ugative m echanis m fo r discri m i nating the variou s

tenses i s found also i n Sanskrit u sed fo r one of the aorist fo r m s w i th
,
so m e ver b s of the third class We fi n d too th at the suffi x i n i s .

, ,
i n the latter applied to so m e of the sa m e various purposes to whi ch

i t i s applied i n Ta galog A s noticed by Hu mboldt ( 1) the Sanskri t .
,
no m inal verbs to which class all Tagalog verbs belong have a, ,
re m arkabl e analogy with the Ta galog conj ugati ve for m .
F inally we find i n both languages the sa m e great freedo m i n

,
t he synt a x .
( 1) u .
a KS d .
-
. I . J .
, 2 n d b o o k , p a ge 367 .
ITO N R D UCT I O N . X VII .
Of m uch
greater i m portance for philology and eth nology th a n , ,
the point o f classi fi cation i s the q uestion of the real de r i vation a n d

,
o rigin of the language an d an atte m pt wi ll be m ade i n thi s outlook

,
to S how t hat the theory of its M alay paren tage although co m ing ,
fro m high autho rity does n ot see m t o be supported by facts and

, ,
that i ts origi n see m s to be traceable to a far m ore distant source

than the presen t habitat o r supposed past cradle of the race ,
.
Ta galog has bee n describe d as a language i n decay an d such

i t i s i ndeed ; but o n the other h and i t i s a language of very n oble
, ,
ancestry an d o f great philological value for the elucidation of i mpor

tant poin ts con nected wi th the question of population an d race i n
thi s part of the world Thi s decay i s not so m uch d iscerni ble i n i ts
.
p resent relative degree of i m poveri sh m ent as i n the m anifold traces i t

shows of a re m ote flourishi ng p a st E verythi n g see m s to poi nt back to .
a language of a high grade structure an d Of great power and eupho ny

-
origi nally spoken by a class Of people who as far as m ental power can ,
be m easured by language structure m ust have atta ined a high degree

of civili z
,
ation .
Certai n well ascertain ed affinities foun d to exi st i n the langu ages

S p o ken wi th th e excep t io n of N e w G uinea fro m M adagascar to E aster
,
'
,
I sl a n d an d H awaii together with the occupatio n of such a vast area

,
by a ki nd of p eopl e wh o fo r ethnological purposes a r e p ra cti cally , ,
one and t he sa m e race led to the belief or rath er to the supposi

, ,
t ion ,
of the existence of an ancient parent language fro m which all
those n ow s p oken i n such a vast region are derived This ancient .
parent speech i s generally designated as the G rea t M alay P olyne si an

“ -
”
L a n guage and variously s ubdivided i nto t he M alayan proper the ,
I ndo n esian an d t he P olynesi an groups ; i n the fi rst of whi ch Ta galog

,
i s classed by Hu m bold t ( U d K S d I J I n d ro d u c ti o n pages I I I )

. . . .
, ,
Th e assertion of t he sa m e deri vation for all these languages i s *
m ade i n the face of and rendered consi stent with the theory t hat con
, ,
siders M alays as m ere colonists i n t he count ries they now occupy and ,
wi th t he exis tence i n these sa m e co u n t ries of an autochthoni c Papuan

race whose re m nants a re still seen i n the P hili ppin es a n d elsewhere .
This p a rent language i s a lso described as belo n ging to t he M a lay

stock that i s to say as the o n e origi n ally spoke n by th e M alay
, ,
people an d the possibility of th e race havi ng ado p ted that of the

, ,
aborigin al islande rs i n so m e part of the extensive area has received ,
little i f any considera t ion

, ,
I t i s m uch i n this way tha t M arsden .
says : ( Hi story o f Su m atra p a ge 35 foot note ) I h ave els ewhere re , ,

-
“ ~
m arked t hat one gene ral lang u a ge prevai led however m utilated an d ,
cha n ged i n the course of ti m e th roughout all th i s portio n of the ,
worl d ; fro m M ad agascar to the m ost eastern discoveri es eastward o f

which the M alay i s a dialect m uch corrupted o r refined b y a m i x tu re
" ’
of other langu a ges F avre see m s to share M arsden s opi nion if we
.
,
are to j udge fro m what h e says i n th e I ntroductio n to hi s Javanese

G ra m m ar ( 1) H u m boldt goes even farther i n hi s application of t he ter m
.
“
M alay to the languages spoken by the race i n contradi sti nction t o
’
a ny other of th e N eg r i to o r P ap u a n stocks A fter going _to so m e .
“
length i n explai ni n g the i nconveni ence of adopting the ter m s P oly
( l) W
M a r s d e n f u t le p r e m i e r q u i r e m a r q u a e t i n d i q u a cc p r e m i e r la n
.
g a g e q u i a p r é v a lu d a ns t o u t
l a r c hi p e l, e t a m e m e é t e n d u s o n i n fl u e n c e
‘
d un
‘
,
c o te, j q
u s
‘
a M a d a g a s c a r , e t ,
d e l a u t r e ,
a la n o u v e l le G
‘
u i n é e ,
a u x i Ies d e la m e r
d u Su d , e t m e m e ju s q u a c e lle s d u Pa C I fi q u e , a u x Sa n d w i c h, e tc
‘
Ce la n g u a g e 8 .
m en la n o m d e g r a n d la ng ag e p oly né s i e n ( G ra m m a i r e J a a na i s e , I n ro d u c ti o n ,
. v t
p a ge X X I ) .
XV I I I . THE T A A O LA G L G N GU GE A .
ne s i a n L anguage an M alay L anguage d

fo r designating the fa mil y
“
o r group of those Spoken i n the hole i n s ular region ; the for m er w

b b
,
ecause i t would see m to i nclude a lso those s poke n y the N eg r i t )

,
d
o r P a p u a n race an the latter because of the exclusio n i t see m s to ,
i m ply of those of M adag a scar and the Phi li ppi n es which acco rding ,
to hi m ought to be considered as belonging t o the sa m e trunk h e

, ,
says that he ca m e to the ter m M alay Tru n k of L a ng u ages

“
becau se ,
’
“
he thereby ha d i n m ind m ore t he people than the language .
Thus the belief i s prevalen t that the various la ngu a ges s poke n by the
,
race are derived fro m t hi s M alay trunk and that they therefore stand , , ,
to i t i n the sa m e relatio n that the R o m ance languages stand to L ati n .
Only Cra w f u rd who early i n his History of the M alay A rchi

,
pel a go practically expressed the s a m e Opi nio n as that ex p ressed by

Hu m boldt ca m e later to disclai m any such relationship o f the lan
,
‘
g uages o f the M alay A rchipelago with the alleged parent trunk He .
wrote a very able dissertatio n filling not less than 2 9 1 pages o f the ,
“
G ra m m ar and Dictiona ry o f the M alay L anguage whic h he pub ’
li s he d i n 185 2 devoted to the co m parative s t udy of t hese vario us

,
languages ; but with all this it does no t appear that he succeeded ,
in changing the opposite views as Hu m boldt s theory sti ll holds ,

’
i ts ground I t was also that of the author i n a less m ature state

.
of acquaintance with the subj ect an d under the fo r hi m di stressing , ,
circu m stances whic h led to a hasty p ublication Of the first editio n ,
of this book i n 1902 but he n o w believes that there exists no ,
soun d foundatio n for the theory .
It i s because the i m m edi ate or direct derivation of these lan

guages fro m on e an d the sa m e parent stock as understood by ,
Hu m boldt does not see m to be applicable to Tagalog ; and because

, ,
to all appearance we are here con f ro nted with the case o f a s m all
,
part o f a large race that speaks a language belonging to a d ifferent

stock than that to which the other languages spoken by the whole or ,
at least by the m aj ority of the sa m e co m m un ity belong that an , , ,
atte m pt i s here m ade at S ho w ing the d ifferent origi n o f the Philippine

b
tongues y going into such a co m parative study and state m ent of
facts as i n our opinion m a y support thi s hypothe s is
, , .
There can be no valid o bje c n o n s raised agai nst this view of

the s u b je ct either o n historical or on ethnologi cal grounds
, The Phi l .
i p p l n e A rchi pelago i s perhaps that portio n o f the whole i nsular regio n
where the race assu m es the m ost variegated character an d on e of ,
the few places where living speci m en s o f the aboriginal inhabitants

are still found We find i n the m idst of the I n d o g e r m a n i c language
.
Sp e a k ln g nations a tongue so distinct and peculiar as the Basque ;

,
and the present r ace of gypsies speak a j argon which still betrays
the i r descent f r o m I ndia The sa m e case of the descendants of a .
conquer i ng people as those of the ancient N or m ans who upon descending

, ,
fro m Scandinavia i nto G allic te rritory lost thei r own language and ,
adopted that o f the conquered people m a y have taken place also ,
I n the P hl ll l A s n oticed by Cra w f u r d ( Dissertation page X )

O
pp e S
n .
, ,
even W 1tho u t going beyond the bo u nds of the M alay A rchipelago and
m t he r e s e n t day we find for exa m ple o n the West coas t of Bo r
p , , ,
neo t u bes of aborigi nal i nhabi tants gradually losing t hei r own lan
,
guages by the ad m i ssion of m uch M alay an d fi nally adopti ng the .
( 1) I b i n a b e r n i c ht u m u m e i n e n A u s d ru c k u w ahle n , d e r s i c h ii o n
ch ,
d e n g e w o hn li c he n m m d e r e n t f e r n t e s o n d e r n d a r u m b e i d e m N a m e n M a la i s c he r
z ‘
y
,
Sp ra c hs ta m m g e b he b e n w e i l i c h d a b e i n i ch t a n d i e S r a c he
o
s o n de r n a n d a s V o lk
‘
,
p ,
e da ch t b a be
g ( U ( 1 K S a d I J 2 nd b oo k p a g e
. . .
-
.
-
. . . .
I RO D UCTI O N
NT .
latter , s o that n o thing re m ain s to distinguish a tri e but its n a m e b .
The reverse of thi s Would n ecessarily be the case where M alays were
f e w i n nu m ber and m ere settlers They would gradually lose t h ei r .
own tongue ado ptin g that of the do m i nan t race b u t at the sa m e ti m e

, ,
co m m unicating to the latter so m e po rtion of thei r own .
The p resent race conditions i n these Islands a fi o r d n o m ean s

of a pp r e c i a ti n g s e p a ra t e ly t he aboriginal and the M alay ele m en t s of
'
Tagalog ; for the language o f the wild tri bes see m s to e es b

s e n t i a lly the sa m e wi t h that o f the other section s of the Ch ri stian
po pulation ; and that of the N eg m to tribe w hich i s the only one w e
'
m igh t suppose to be that of the aborigines i s either unknown o r i t ,
ha s lost its va lue fo r co m parati ve research There can be n o doubt that .

,
although perhaps with so m e m ixtu re of P apuan blood t he other tri bes ,
known by th e general t er m of I g or r o tes who are n ow wild beca m e so

fro m a m ore advan ced state of civili z
,
ation A s noticed by Hu m bo ldt .

,
the n a m e Tu m ja s as applied t o certai n wild t ribes of Celebes sounds a s

,
“
on e of un m istakable Sanskri t origi n and served once to designate

one of the civili z ed M alay branches ; and i n the Ph i lippi nes too the , ,
word Ta ba mca as applied to a wild tribe i n the Ca la m i a n e s sugges t s

’
, ,
a M alay origin
b
.
The languages spoke n i n Cele es where a m ong th e native pop ,
u la t i o n there is foun d great diversity of race are descri bed a s co n ,
taining a Celebes M alay ele m en t and a Papuan e le m e n t which alo n g

-
,
with other p eculiari ties foun d also i n the languages of the Philip pines
, ,
give so m e no tion of thei r p robab le origin Thi s fact an d that of

z b
.
,
‘
the h igh degree of civili atio n wh ich i s known to h ave een attained
i n the past by the Bugis race together ith thei r alpha et and an cient li t
‘
,
w b
e ra t u re ,
m a y lea d to the d iscovery o f m any i m p ortan t facts beari ng on
the point o f the relation sh i p of thei r language and those Of the
P hilippi nes w i th the others of the M alay an d the P apu an stocks ; ut i n b
vie w of the i m possibility of utili i ng thi s sou rce fo r the p resent in quiry z
w w
,
e m ust have recourse to the co m pariso n ith other la n guages .
The plan here followed wi ll a i m at separating fro m Tagalog

al l foreign ele m ents foun d therei n so as to isolate consider apa rt , ,
and appreci a e t he i m portance of that o th er ele m ent wh ich m ust be

t
b b
,
regarded a s a origin al ; or i f i t i s not ad m itted to be a ori ginal at ,
least i t m ust b e co nsidered as p ri m i t ive since it i s n o t traceable to ,
the M al a y or any other foreign source I t m a y b e howeve r traceab le .

, ,
to the Bugi s fo r there is sa m e re ason to beli eve tha t the Bugi s once
,
for m ed with Tag a log on e an d the sa m e la n guage .
"
But before going fur t her i nto the subj ect it i s believed n e ce s ,
sary to state here clearly what th e n atu re an d scope of thi s inquiry

w ill be I t s ho u td be Wel l understood that a co m plete rej ec t ion of the
.
prevalent theory i s n ot here i n tended o r ai m ed at a nd that the possi bi lity ,
i s not here denied that the oth er languages of the M al a y A rchi pelago
and o f the Po ly ne s m reviewed by Hu m bold t m a y not be d i re ctly o r
, ,
«
i mm ediately derived fro m s u ch a G reat M alay Polynesi an L angua g e ; -
no r that Ta g a log m a y n ot stand to the sa m e source i n a degree of

relationshi p as th at i n which E nglish an d Spani sh for i n s ta nc e , ,
stand to Sa nskrit What i s h ere contended i s : that Tagalog does

not stand to M alay i n the degree o f relations hi p which H u mboldt
wishes u s to believe or speakin g m ore strictly that i t i s not a dialect
, ,
of M alay But as there i s perhaps n o ter m i n linguistic science

.
so uncertai n o f m eaning an d so arbitrary i n application as the term

“
dialect i t beco m es necess a ry to fix the boun aries o f t he signification d
d
,
in wh i ch i t i s u s e f or the p ur p os e s of the p re s e nt i n q uiry F or, i n .

TH E TA G A L O G L A N G U A GE .
a s e ns e i f t li e the ory of one a n d the sa m e p ri mi tive O rigin o f a ll

‘
'
the languages i s accepted a ll of the m are dialects of t he aboriginal ,
one ; while i n another sense it m a y be eve n sai d that eve ry m a n

, ,
has h i s o w n dialect as he has his face and his other personal ,
c haracteristics w hich distinguish h i m i n divid ually fro m all hi s other , ,
fellow creatures The ter m i s n o t used here i n t he narrow se nse

.
of the special m ode of speaking o ne language peculiar to so m e

locali ty o r clas s of peo ple as that which i s found to exist for , ,
i nstance i n E nglish and Sp anish as s poke n i n E uro pe and i n

,
A m erica ; nor i n that i n which i t m a y be applied to the corru pt

E nglish spo k en by the uneducated I rish m an o r by the average i ndi
vidual of other races i n the E ng li sh Colonies ; nor i n the sense e ith er
o f the di fference found at p resent to ex i s t bet w een the tongues of the
various localities o r ancient States of I taly and the Toscan o r li ng u a
v o lg a r e whic h is now the I talian official language ; n o r too i n that , ,
of the diverse for m s in which anci en t ly G reek was spoken i n A the ns , ,
-
and i n other pa rts o f G reece or the G reek Colo nies which are d e s ,
i g n a t e d as A ttic Dorian I oni an etc The ter m i s u sed here i n the

, , , .
broad sense of a language related to another i n s uch a way that

the ta k i ng away fro m t he offshoot o f that portion known as havi ng
b een i nherited fro m t he parent would r ender i t useless a s an i n s tr u ,
m ent fo r t he conveyance of i ntelligi ble tho ught This conditio n i s no t .
found i n the E nglis h wi th regard to t he L ati n language I t i s quite .
cer ta i n that i f i t were stri pped fro m its L ati n ele m ent t he language
would still re m ai n p ractically the sa m e Thi s however could not be .
, ,
done with Spanish for i nstance w i t ho u t r e n d e r i n g i ts other consti tuents

, , ‘
Celtic and A rabi c etc i nca p able of being twi sted i n to i ntelligi ble
, ,
speech I n point o f f a c t under the actual condi t io n o f languages o nly

.
, , ,
those would be considered as o f co m m o n paren tage whic h possess a

co m m on structure since structure has proved t o be a m ore i m p o rt an t
,
f actor for classification than the ra w m a terial Wha t i s there fore i n , ,
tended to s how here i s thi s : that Tagalog i s not a d i alect O f th e ,
M alay i n the sense i n which dialect i s here considered ; and that

,
i t co u ld not h a ve been deri ved i m m ediately fro m the sa m e source

as that fro m which the present M alay is supposed to have been
derived ; also that i ts n ative or aborigina l ele m ent is to it what t he
,
Saxon ele m ent i s to th e present E nglish ; and that i f the language

were sho rn fro m the other ele m ents traceable to a M alay source .
,
still i ts effi ciency as an i nstru m ent O f speech would practically re m ai n

t he sa m e .
The grounds on which H u m boldt built the theory o f a c o m

m o n parentage o f al l the langua g es s p oken b y the M alay race and
that o f thei r di rect derivation fro m one and the sa m e paren t lan
gua g e as stated by hi m are : ( U ( 1 KS d I J 3rd b oo k page
, , . . .
,
“
2 17 ) the uni f or m ity i n their words roots and gra m m atical con ,
struction and ( ch a pters 7 10 p a ges 2 5 7 2 82 o f t he sa m e book )

,
-
,
“
thei r accord i n pronouns i n nu m erals i n word bui lding and i n , ,
-
”
word decle n sion But as he however noticed i n Tagalog so m e
‘
-
.
, ,
thing peculiar and not found i n the other languages which see m ed to ,
destroy t hi s a cc o rd h e held i t to be the gra m m atical for m s and

‘
,
\
relics o f those assu m ed in i ts o rigi n by the co m m o n paren t lan

g uage . Thus the sa m e peculiarities which others considered vali d
.
,
e nough fo r a new subdivision and the creation of a Tagalog “
Gr oup of the M alaya n L anguages are by h i m referred to t he

'
parent language and h e finds the m to be out of use and replaced by

,
, circu m locutory phrases and other separate f o rms of e xp ressi on i n t he

I NT RO D U CTI O N . XX I .
present M alay ( 1) A s the wo rds q uote i n th e foo t n ote show he

. d ,
did no t e ntirely fail h oweve r to perceive that these pecu liarities m ight
, ,
warran t th e classification o f Tagalog i n a differen t grou p fo r b e further ,
says : ( 3rd book page 2 88) W i th Tagalog o ne believes at fi rst sight

“
, .
to h ave arrived i n a n ew t erri tory ( )

2 I t s v a lue for pu rposes of .
’
co m parati ve research i n the other l a nguages of the M alay b ra nch he

places a t tha t of San skri t i n regard to G reek ( 3) .
N o w i f the state m ents of a retentio n by Tagalog of the for m s of

,
the parent language and that of thei r replace m ent by ci rcu m locutory for m s
i n the present M alay are true we m ust i n v i e w o f the i ndi sputable , ,
superiori ty o f Tag a log ove r M alay gather up a goo d lot o f p hi lo lo ,
g i c a l subtleness to account fo r the causes which brought abo ut the

‘
~
rare pheno m eno n o f th e declin e o f a language j ust i n the place
where the people attained the highest degree O f culture an d where i t ,
recei ved the earliest an d m os t i nvigorati ng i nfluen ce O f th e co ntact with ,
an d i nfu s ion o f other m ore highly deve loped ones I t wi ll be i m possible

, .
for Hu m boldt to i ndi cate i n the M alay these ci rcu m locutory ph rases i nto
which he thinks the peculia r for m s o f Tagalog were res olved
b
.
, ,
I t i s i m possible to read th e w Or k s o f Cl a U I d and Hu m oldt ‘
w ithout feeling ad m i ration fo r th e m e n who went so deeply i n t o the

real m o f philological researc h ; b u t with all due regard fo r thei r
‘
labo rs i n what respects Tagalog at least one i s le d to regret that

, ,
they could n o t have wri tten o n the spot but had to depend on gra mm ars ,
and d ictionaries fo r thei r inquiries Cra w f u rd althoug h he discovered .

,
deviations O f Tagal o g fro m M alay fai led to perceive the p hi lolog ica l ,
value o f the language Hu m boldt o n the contr a ry d i d perceive the

.
, ,
value b ut thus far h e faile d to classi fy p roperly the language

, , , .
Cra w f u rd was too m uch influenced b y race culture ; Hu m boldt b y ,
race u nity The errors found i n thei r books are i n part o f th e

.
, ,
nature o f those which are unavoidable when gra m m ars are m ad e

the only b a si s o f phi lological research an d i n pa rt due to deficiencie s ,
of the sources fro m which they d rew the data fo r thei r i nqu i ries .
Hu m boldt Totanes gra m m ar ; whi le

’
Cra w f u r d used Sa n A gusti n s
’
, ,
each o f the m depended on P Juan de N oceda s Dictionary for

’
lexical co m parison .
A lthoug h such a b ri e f consideratio n of thei r works a s i s re

q uired fo r the purposes o f th e present inqui ry i s to e given i n b
fu rthe r chapters o f thi s outlook i t i s well however to m ake here , , ,
a few re m ar k s o n that o f Hu m bold t Had the great philologi s t .
ac q ui red orally his knowledge o f Tagalog he would p robably have ,
arrived at different con clusi on s as to the character and origi n o f the

language A t least quite Opposi te i nfe rences as h is a reader a o
'
.
, ,
q i n te d wi th Tagalog i s apt to d raw fro m hi s profoun d research

u a
( 1) D e nn d i e S p r a c he a u f M a la c c a i s t g e r a d e d i e , a n s W e lc he r s i c h d e r G e
s a m mt b a u d e s S t a m m e s a m w e n i g s t e n e r s c hOp f e n d e r k la r e n las s t, d a d i e s e S p ra c he
s i c h u n t e r a lle n i h i e n Sc h w e s t e r s p r a c h e n a m m e i s t e n v o n g r a m m a t i s c he n F o r m e n
lo s g e m a c h t d i es e lb e n a b g e s c h li f f e n u n d d u r c h u m s c h r e i be n d e R e d e n s a r t e n e rs e t z t
,
ha t . A u s d i e s e m G e s i c ht s p u n k t e m u s s m a n d e n St a m m e h e r d e n Ta g a li s c he n n e n
ne n .
( U ( 1 B S a d I J , 3r d b o o k p a g e s 2 10
. . . . . . .
( 2 ) Be i d e r fl a g g la u b t m a n a u f d e n e r s te n A n b li c k i n e i n g a n z n e u e s
z
.
Ge b ie t u kom me n .
( 3) Di e Ta g a li s c h e Sp ra c he i ts a b e r g e ra d e i n d i e s e n U n te rs u c hu nge n v o n
-
d e r hoc hs t e n W i c h t i g k e i t , I w e i l s i e e i n e fi b e ra u s
.
g ro s s e U e b e r e i n s t i m m u n g m i t
d e m M a la y i s c he n z e i g t 2 w e i l s i e u n t e r d i e s e n S p ra c he n d i e r e i c hs t e g ra m m a
’
z
.
,
t i s c he A u s b 1ld u n g b e s 1t t , u n d d i e G ra m m a t i k d e r fi b r i g e n e r s t a u s i hr v o llko m m e n
z
-
v e r s ta nd e n w e r d e n k a n n Si e s t e h t d a r i n i hn e n i n e i ne m g a n z fi hn li c he n
z
. u
V e hfi lt n i f s , a ls d i e Sa n s kr i t G r a m m a t i k ( 3rd bo o k , p a ge s
’
i
'
ur -
.
2 1 2 1fi-
XXII . Tri s TA G A L OG L A N GU A GE .
ma de i nto th e l a n gu a ge Very properly h e says : .

( 3rd oo k p a g e . b ,
“
Wi th the d is m e m bering o f t he langu a ge whi ch gra m m ar
e ffects goes away m uch o f what serves to bind the speech i n i ts
,
enti rety and Often j ust the finest an d m o st essential portion o f i t

,
i s lost ”
.
“
A lso i s foun d so p redo m inan t i n the gra m m ar the gener a l
l anguage type that the s pecia l or peculiar on e i s th ereby obscured ,
and by reading the b are gra m m ar one i s m isled into classi fyi ng a”s
kindred langu a ges so m e of those which are of a ve r y differen t ki n d .
A nd a g ai n ( 2 n d book i ntroduction page ,

“
N o r can the study of ,
lan guages be separated fro m t h at of their literature for the gra m m ar

w
,
and the d ictionary sh o w only the dead skeleton while li terary orks , ,
the live con struction show ,

.
I t was i n t hi s way that such an i m portant factor as the

Tagalog accent always i m perfectly understood an d n ev e r well ex
,
p lained by the S pani sh friars escaped successful c o n sideration There,

.
are foun d i n t he book s o m e n ot i m portan t but very curious lexical ,
e rrors as for i nstance the one which appears i n the co m parati ve

, ,
w o rd ta b le of th e secon d volu m e i n page 2 4 9 con sisting i n giving , ,

"
.
as a synony m of bt t qu i d hill ; ( Berg) the Ta galog word Za g a r i saw ;

“ ’
,
“
,
he having i n thi s been i nduced i nto e rro r b y th e Spanis h s i e r r a" ,
”
which m ea n s p ri marily a saw ; an d secondarily a ridge of m ountains ;
“ “
another i s found i n the sa m e volu m e page 2 82 w he r e t he Tagalog

'
, ,
” “ “
word di q u i t to glue “
to stick ; i s given as t he equivalen t of to
z
, ,
stri ke schlagen because i n the dictionary i s given as a

’
’
( ); d i q u t , ,
“ “
translation for pegar p e q a r i n Spanis h m ean ing to strike
“
,
a nd to ,
I n page 337 i s found d a g o t ( instead of

"
glue ,
“
to stick ; as well ’
.
d u cot ( the wrong s pelling i s n o doubt a m i sprint

.
fo r t he word i s
, , ,
rightly s p elled i n the i m m edi ately followi ng co m pou nd ca r a cot) a s the

” "
counterpart of cuff “ “
a blo w ad m ini stered with t he fist ( F a u s t chla g);
,
i nstead of that of handful “

because i n Span i sh p u fl a d a z cu ff ; but
“
,
’
p u fi a d O m a
Z n d f ‘
u l
”
A ll of wh . ich goes to prove t h e feeble guidan ce
books a fl o r d ( 1) Other lexic a l errors whi c h a p pear i n conn ecti on with
.
theori es refuted here will be n oticed i n the prope r place But by far .
, ,
the largest a n d t he m ost serious cause of error i s the source fro m whi ch
he d rew th e m at erials for his wor k Totanes G ra m m ar m a y be
’
.
’
considered a good trea t i s e for the clergy ; but J Juan de N oced a s .
Dictionary i s by rea s on of i ts very superabund a nce of lexi cal m atter

, ,
greatly c o n f using and m i sleading for those wh o n ever had the occasion
of he a ring n atives s peak the language It i s also well not to .
lose sight of the i nti m ate and circu m scribe d c haracter of such bo o ks .
They have been co m p osed of ten co m pulso rily for use a m on g i n di v i , ,
duals of the sa m e calling as th e au tho r not i n order to i ni tiate the m ,
i n the m ysteries nor to guide the m i n the ac q uire m ent of the la n

b
, ,
gu a ge ; ut to ai d a n d to co m ple m ent the knowledge of i t they ha d

first t o acqui re by direc t observation i n t heir oral in tercourse wi th
natives There exists no well d e fi n e d scientific plan i n thei r arra n ge m e n t
.
-
.
gra mm ars are n arrow sco ped and a i m chiefly at presenting the -
vocabulary m ostly required for the d i cha rg e o f the sacerdotal busi ness
Of the pupil The authors filled with religious e a l an d pieti s m use the
.
,
z ,
L ati n ter m i nology i n giving t he m eani ng of such ter m s as refer to
( 1) Th e re a d e r w i ll e a s i ly u n d e rs ta n d t ha t i f th e s e e r ro r s a re he re m e n
v t
'
t i o n e d i t i s o n ly f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f u n a o i d a b le mi s i llu s t r a t i n g t h e a k e s w hi c h
v
e v e n t he c le e re s t s c h o la r i s li a b le t o m a k e b y d e p e n d i n g e x c lu s i v e ly o n g r a m
v t
m a rs f o r hi s i n e s i g a t i o n s a n d b e c a u s e t he s e e r r o r s a r e n o t d u e t o a n y i m p e r f e c
, t
c q n i nta nce o f the w ri t e r w i t h Sp a n i s h, b u t t o hi s i m p e r f e c a cq u a i n ta nce w i t h t
a
ra ag
ge
. 0 .
XXI V . THE TA G A L O G L A N G U A GE .
population i n the I slands divided i nto clan s a nd tribes of he re to g e n e o u s

vari ously m ixed ra ces and Of a very di fferent degree O f rudeness
‘
S o m e of t h e m were found to live i n co m m unities and were i n a

sta te of rudi m entary civili z ation ; others i solate d i n fa m i lies o r clan s , ,
led a sav a ge life i n the woods

.
The languages s p oken .
two sections were a s di ff eren t as the people were different

and culture fro m each other I t was the earnest effort of th e
'
.
f ri a r s a t those early days t o b ring these wild tri bes of ti ng u es or r e

m on ta d os i nto the plai ns and m ake t he m settle i n co m m uni ties a rou nd a
church that they m ight thus be m ore easily chri stiani z
,
ed an d watch ed
over F o r thi s purpose they had to go deeply i nt a t hei r langu a ges
.
and the kn owle d ge thus ac q uired was late r i ncorporated by the m i n

gra m m ars an d di ctionaries Th us P N oceda s ca m e to be the m eltin g . .
’
po t i n t o w hich the residuu m of these t w o diverse languages together ,
wi th a ll thei r localis m s were cast fo r fusion and i t i s j us t i n thi s

, ,
t hat both i ts philological v a lue for the study of the two ele m ents an d
its m isleading character fo r t he foreign student consists On e of the .
ele m ents i n thi s m ixture i s t he M alay or an ele m ent whic h m ore , , ,
o r less adulterated we sti ll m a y trace to th e langu a ges of th e M alay

,
A rchi pelago ; th e other i s quite a different ele m en t which i n so far

, , ,
as i t i s not t raceable to the above source we m a y regard as a b o ri g ,
i nal Both these ele m ents are found co existent and variously m ixed
.
i n actual Tagalog so m eti m es the M alay being the u sual o r h avin g

,
displaced t he aboriginal so m eti m es the abo riginal being the usual or,
having displaced t he M alay ter m A s to whi ch of the t w o ele m en ts i s the , .
predo m inant one i s a m atter for thos e only who have acquired the lan
,
guage orally to appreciate according to the frequen cy or rarity with which ,
either the one o r the o th er appears i n t he speech of n a tives The study .
and co m parison of bot h ele m ents based o n t he dead a n d i n d i f e re n t ,
condition i n whi ch they are found i n a dictionary i s very confusing ,
and m a y lead to ent i rely opposite conclusion s '

Despite t he i nti m ate .
and narrow SOOp e d character of P N oceda s Dictionary as described i n

-
.
‘
t his c hap ter and des p ite t he fact of i ts being par t i cularly i ntended
,
for u s e of m e n whose b usiness i t was to ad m ini ster to th e religious

wants of the people of who m Tagalog was the vernac u la r i t was ; ,
however though t n ecessary i n order to preclude the possibility o f the

, ,
m isconception to which its m otley contents m ight give rise to have wh at ,
was con sidered to be loc a lis m s an d a rchai s m s printed i n bolder type in

t he Spanish Tagalog p art Of t he edi tion of 1860 an d to h ave a notice
-
,
in serted at th e en d infor m ing the reader of t hei r local or obsolescen t

character ( 1) This Spani sh Ta galog par t O f t he dictionary we m ust
.
-
,
suppose w a s t he on e H u m boldt m a de use of for hi s research as

.
,
i t w a s only by hi s previo u s k n owle dge of Sp a ni sh t hat he went

into acquaintance with Ta galog A pparently n o n otice was ta ken by .
,
hi m of the a bove m entio n ed note or m ost probab ly such a n ote , , ,
n ever appeared i n t he previous edi tion s of th e book an d thus ,
Hu m bol dt could no t ta k e advan ta ge of t he warn i n g Fo r every

Spanish t er m there are given i n t he boo k several Ta galog translation s ,
on e or m ore of which were i n general u s e and u nderstood th roug ho u t

the Ta galog co m m unity others were Comi n ta ng speech or localis m s , ,
‘
N OTA
( 1) Co n e l fi n d e q u e n o s e c o n f u n d a n lo s p r i n c i p i a n e s e n e l t
z
.
i di o m a t a g a lo g a l v e r ari a s ra i e s v
O t é rm i n o s a g a lo s p a r a c a d a p a la b r a c a s t e lla n a t ,
‘
s i n s a be r cu a l d e b e n n e a r s e ha c r e i d o nt i l p o n e r e s t a n o t a
, a c la r a t o r i a p a ra a d
v e r t i r le s q u e lo s t é rm i n o s q u e e s t an c o n le t r a b a s t a r d i lla s o n d e u s o g e n e ra l y
re g u la r m e n te lo s t
e n i e n d e n to d o s , p e ro lo s q u e v a n c o n le r a d i s ti n t a o s o n a n t
t i c u a d o s , 6 s e u s a n s o lo o n a lg u n o s p u e b lo s o p r o i n c i as d e l t a ga li s m o v .
I N TRO DU CTI O N . XX V .
w hile t here are o thers wh i ch at p resent are n either used nor under
stood That the latter were h owever i n use a m ong one or the other
.
, ,
section of the n ative i nhabitants at the early day i n wh ich the

dictionary was co m posed cannot wel l be doubted wi thout i m peac h ing
,
the veracity and diligence of the Spanish friars an d when the sa m e ,
or the correspondi ng ter m s a re found i n languages ab road o r i n the

others sp oken i n t he P hi lippi nes th ey are of gr eat ph ilological value ,
fo r deter m ining t he o rigin of Ta galog The delusive effec ts of t hi s .
double vocabulary m a y be se e n i n th e fac t that i t served to Hu m boldt

an d Cra w f u rd for the building of qui te Opposi te theories and for ,
d rawi ng quite Opposite conclusion s as to the origi n and deriva tion of the
langu a ge . b
To show tha t thi s a original ele m en t i s the m os t substantial
constituent of those found i n actual Tagalog i s one Of the purposes ,
of t he present inqui ry .
The n ature and scope having thus been stated whi ch this sketch
is to cover i t only re m a i n s to say what the starting poi nt i s for
,
the sa m e That M alays are m ere settlers i n the countries they n o w

.
occupy is generally ad m itted an d i t ha d to be so ad m itted i n vi ew o f

, ,
th e re m nants w hi ch could not other w i se have been accounted fo r o f

, '
,
a for m er Papuan race still found i n so m e of these M alay countries ,
an d of thei r p resence to the exclusion of any other race i n N e w

, ,
G ui nea .The country of origin O f M alays o r the place fro m which they ,
originally e m igrated to the A rchi pelago has been a m atter of m uch ,
speculation ; but if th e characteri stics o f th e race and the i nsular co n

dition of the regio n they n ow i nhabi t are take n i nto account thei r ,
descensio n fro m the A siatic con tinent i nto Su m atra co m es as a n e c e s

sary i n ference A ccording to Hu m boldt Su m atra ; acco rding to Cra w f u rd
.
,
“
Java ; are the places whe re that G rea t M alay P olynesi an L anguage ,
the paren t stock of all the languages spoken by the race o r i ginated
and th e focuses f o m which M alay ci vi li z
, ,
r
ation an d M alay language
i rradiated and were disse m i nated over th e vast region n o w i nh a b i ted
by these people Outside those influences wh ich we kno w hi stori cally
to have altere d the conditions of civili z
.
, ,
ation and language an d those ,
changes which m a y be traced to the course by which speech i s develop ed

i n the hu m an m i nd we are aware of n o o thers that ha v e disturbed
,
the philological unity an d the o riginal character of the ele m ents

,
still re m a ining of the parent s p eech i n the languages n o w spoke n

i n the two places assigned for i ts origi n I n fact fo r the p urpose
z
.
,
of deter m ining the deg ree o f ma la y i a ti on of Tagalog the re are n o ,
others to which we m a y have recourse Such a brief co m pari son ,
th erefore of Tagalog with M alay an d Javanese a s i s consistent

,
with the bound s of a n outlook of this kind and with the m eagre ,
knowledge which the autho r has been able to a c q u i I e of those two

languages i s here u ndertaken wi th a view to ascertain as exactly
, ,
as possible the degree of relation sh i p Of Ta galog to those s o u rc

, ,
es Tables are given hereafter of words of a M alay Javanese

b
.
, ,
Sanskrit an d A ra ic origi n found i n Tagalog as far as the autho r ,
“
ha s been able to detect by going carefully over the Dictionnai re
" ”
M a la i s F ra n ca i s par L A b b é P F avre G ra m m ai re Javanai se and
’ ‘
.
, ,
“
G ra m m ai re de l a L angue M alai se of the sa m e autho r ; M arsden s ’
“
“
M alay G ra m m a r and Cra w f u rd s G ra m m ar and Dict i o nary of
'
the M alay L anguage after h aving added so m e ter m s n ot found

,
i n the works Of the above wri ters an d rej ected others which
were evidently e rroneous ; the orthography being as far as pos ,
sible the sa m e as that used by Cra w f u rd i n his di ctionary N ot

w
, .
to s ell the lists i nto u ndue proportions all words co m m on to the ,

XX VI . THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
M a lay an d J
avanese are included i n the M alay ta le thei r avanese b J
b w
,
fellowshi p ei n g i ndicated by the sign ( J ) whi le Javanese or ds not ,
found i n M alay are given i n a separate list I n the M alay table the .
,
o rthography of the Javanese words h ad Of cour s e to be so m ewhat

disregarded ; but as for the purpose of this i nquiry o nly the nu m
, ,
,
ber ,
and the m eaning of the words are of v a lue i t i s believed that a m ore ,
regular orthography can be d ispensed wi th inas m uch as the n atu re of

w
,
t he conclusions to be derived fro m th e p resence of these ords in

Ta galog would not thereby be aff ected
b
.
I t being i m por tant to show what changes oth i n m eaning ,
an d i n spelling the wo rds u nder w ent o n thei r bei ng adopted i nto the
,
language and i n o rder that it m a y be seen whet her they were i m ported
,
fo r the expression of n ew i deas or m erely fo r additio n to the vocabulary ,
both their spelling and m eaning are given on the Tagalog side while ,
o n a fifth co lu m n an d r i ght opposi te the adopted word the list i s

b
,
gi ven of su ch n ative words as are foun d i n Tagalog to e synony m s

of those which h ave been i m ported .
The following i s the list of the M alay words i ncluding also those ,
which are co m m on to M alay an d Javan ese .
Malay ( I )
. Signification . Tagal og . Slgnification . Synonyms .
B uhat .
D a loy o n .
Sm oke .
F i nished .
( 1) F o r t he s a m e w o r d s w r i tt e n i n A r a b i c J a v a ne s e a nd Sa n s k r i
, w h i ch t ,
a re v
g i e n he re t r a n s li t e 1a t e d i n t o t he R o m a n c ha ra c te r , s e e t h e “ D 1c t i o n n a i r e
M a la i s F r a n c a i s ’
p a r L A bb é F a v re M a ni la n o t a ff O I d i n g t h e m e a ns of
, h a v i ng
t he s a m e p r i n te d i n t he i r r e s p e ct i v e
p ro p e r c ha r a c te r s
I N TR O DUCTI O N . xxv n .
Malay . Slgnlfioatlon . T
agalog . Significatlon
. Syno
nyms .
A kin d of
Ba cu n g A)
I B aco n g
flower
. .
g
.
Bangun .
AJ ) To ari se . Ban on .
Batu .
A)
J Stone . Bat h .
Bataug . Ste m . B atang .
Bapa .
A)
J F ather . Bapa .
Babi . J)
A Hog . B abuy .
Bara n g . J
A) A ny . Balang .
Bara . L ive coal . Baga .
Ba rOn gb a
Barti ng .
( J Booth .
rong .
Baris .
(J) St reak . B a rli s .
Balu . Wi dow . Balo .
Balik . To return . Bal i c .
Balut . To wrap . B alot .
Ba s ah . Wet . Bas a .
Baharu . N ew . Ba g b
Bini . Wife . B in i b i n i .
Beluk . TO tack . Bi loo .
Bilang .
( J ) T o count . Bilang .
Buaya J
( ) A lligator Boaya
g
. . .
Buwah .
( )
J F ruit . Bon a .
n
Bohung TO lie B ulaan

'
. . .
Buka .
(J) To open . Buca .
Bukit .Hill . B uquid

Buta .
( )
J
»
Blind . Bota .
B u t il . G rain . Bu ti l .
Budu P i c k led fish . B u rO .
Bu n oh To kil l . .
Bono .
A l d of fish
( ) t lg
B ubu J .
g Bob o . Ya n g i o .
Bubung ( )
J House roof . . Bobong . Ba la n g cas .
Down the hai r ,
Bulu . tegu m e nt of Bolo . Down . Balah ibo .
ani m als .
M oon . M a n i lo n g .
Bow .
I ndentation i n
Bak am B a ca m
thle flesh
. .
B akas ( J ) Tra ee
. .
Bankai ( )
J C orpse . .
Y o u n g es t
Bongsu B ungs o Sa n gol
child
.
. .
B adil ( J ) F ire ar m s Baril

b
. . .
B li. To uy . Bi ll . Bandala .
Bingtang ( J ) Star .
Bi t o u f n .
Bunting P regnant Bun tis

J
.
. .
B ab ad ( ) G i rd le . . B a b at
Batu brani -
L oadstone . . Batobalan i .
B ark as B undle . . Bala . Bogong .
Brat .
( J ) Heavy . Bigat
Bras . R ice . B i g as .
Bal a l e n g L o cu s t .
. Balan g .
THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
Signlfioallon . Tagalog .
Signifioatlon .
Synonyms :
S 1d er
B a li ka t .
()
J
ha i ii: B a li c a t . Shoulder .
P iebald . R ain bow . Babag .
To p l u c k
To pluck Bo a g
grass
. .
To p 1erce the
TOs o c Bo s s
ears
. .
To t ry . B alac .
F inger ring . Si m p a c .
Jealousy . Pa n i b o c ho -
.
M i r ro r B ubog .
To soak . B abad .
Oa r . Sagu an .
M iss . Dalag a .
L eaf
z
.
To sei e .
To trade .
Chieftain .
TO arrive . Sapi t .
B reas t .
L ake . L aut .
To be per m it Sucat , m ang

To be able
ted yari
.
. .
Oven Calan .
Blood .
Hig h a r a b l e B a c o o d, m i
Darat . Conti nen t .
land . n an o n g .
D ala m . Palace .
To s o u n d w i th
Taroc s u b oc
the lead , .
L oc -
loc .
TO sea t . Op O li c m O
, .
A kind of ta
D Ola n g . L atoc
ble
.
Denden g ( J) . Din gdi n g P a r t i t i o 11

.
wall .
Gading . G aring .
I vory .
Th e s a m e
G ala -
gala .
G ala -
gala . co m positio n . Capul .
a s i n M alay .
To b ite . Oca b .
TO m i ll rice .
To m ove .
Cutlass .
To roll .
Sa p .
TO reward P alit
b
. .
To hang . L au i t , sa it .
Scissors . G opit .
G anda M ultiple P rofit accru

. . G and a ,
Ta m o
cd
.
J
.
Ganap .
( ) Co mp lete . Ganap . To f ulfill . Tu p a d .
I N TR D UCTI O ON . XXI X .
Malay . Significatlon .
Tagalog .
Significatlon .
Synonyms .
J ) To tic k l e . Quiliquili .
J
( ) B racelet . G alang .
Duck . Iti c .
He s he , . Siy a .
TO tie G a co t
g
. .
( )
J T o heed I n at .
B r o ther -
in
I par .
( ) law
J Hi p a g . Si ster i n -
law . Di so ,
bay ao .
To a cco m p a
I ring .
( J ) To follow . I lin g .
ny .
SOn o d , sa m a .
TO i ncline . H i li g . To lean .
G reen unri G reen u n ri

,
H i lao .
,
M a n i b a la n g .
p e pe .
Black . Iti m . Black .
N ose . I long N ose .
To shred . Hilis . To slice .
To such H i gop To si p
b b
. . .
To asse m le Ipon To asse m le

w
. . .
TO se Tah i . To sew .
Fa r . L ayo . Fa r .
To touch . Da m a To t ouch .
N eedle . Ca ray o m . N eedle .
R oad . Daan . R oa d . L an s an g an .
To tie rattan s
J aling . F i sh ing net Dali n g . to fi sh i n g Bitan a .
enclosures .
Jangka .
Space
ure
m eas
Da n ca l .
t Span
u re )
( m eas.
J a ggut
. .
n Beard . Beard .
J aru nna t Sewed . To repai r .
J aruk . Ci tron . P ickled .
J arat . Snare . To deta i n .
M edicin e Da m p i 5 M e d i c a t e d
Tapal
t fo m entation ‘
. . .
J ara n g . Scarce . Dalang .

R a r e
co m pact
11 o t
L a b n ao
.
.
Av
-
Tree Tree
t
fi . .
To hook F i shing hook

t
Nt -
/ v
-
. .
d Ca ldron Caldron
Av c . .
H erd
t
AL v
-
. Herd .
Av - To wa t ch Bant ay
A
c G uard . .
- E lder broth er
c
v
o r sister .
— R ight hand
a
v c .
a
’
L i me . P i rali .
C
’
We .
C Ye .
- A ffection G uil io li y a g
v
i
c .
‘
.
,
” v F ile
a A l al
-
. .
-
4
Ae We .
A
f
e To think . A cala .
THE TA GA LO G LA N GUA GE .
Signlflcatlon . T
agalog . Signlfioation . Synonym
s .
To carry u n To carry u n
Kilik Q u i li c
der the a r m der the a rm
. .
. .
( J ) L ightning Q u ila t .
,
L igh tning .
( )
J I ro n pan C anali .
.
I ron pan . Ca ra haY
N ail ( of the
Kuku .
3
( ) fingers
J
) . i
}
T c o w as a
Kukuk ( J) p o cli
Coc o oc Cock s crow Tal aoe
’
. . .
.
L ouse .
F rog .
K upo n g .
A
ney
co PPer mo l
j Cupa n g .
K uping . E a r ring .
Kura n g . To want .
Kuru n g .
( J Ca ge .
Kulit . Ski n .
H u n d r e dth
part or a
p i c cu l .
K aning . E y e brow .
Kanching ( J ) . Clasp .
Ku fi a h To chew
.
.
To carry an
Sa l p o ’ sac
Kand ung ( J) Obi e Ct on the
wa i st
.
.
Oa mdo n g TO lap .
lo i g
Keban Chest. .
Ch est .
K am uning A kin d of tree .

. A kin d of tree .
ap o n a
N ephew P a m a ng q u i n N ephew
kan . J
( )
.
.
.
Ka m pung To asse m ble .

. TO side wi th . G u i bi c .
Ko m b a li ( J) To g i ve back To sprai n th e
.
0 11 °
ankle
.
Ka m bi n g . J
( ) Goat .
G oat
Kai n b a n g
.
. J
( ) A flower .
TO stretch .
K am bar .
( J) Twin s . Twins .
K arbau J A nuan g da
.
( ) Buffalo .
B uffalo .
5
) m i i la g
'
.
,
Kra s . J
( ) G alas .
Kri s . J
( ) Cali s .
L aya .
L aya .
La ng 13
Swallow
iig Ca m p a p a hs
‘ ' ’
.
Swallow . .
ya
Di ff eren t . L ai n lai n
-
. Different .
Sa i l of a sh 1p . L ayag . Sail of a ship .
Ocean . L aot . Ocean

M ale person L alaqui M ale person
g
.
. .
Sk L an i t . Sky .
Black pepper . L ara . Black pepper .
To cut u p a To cut u p a
carcass .
} L apa .
carcass .
La b lb
a a a . Sp i d er .
L alaua ,
l aua .
laua
Sp i d er .
Cag e m a b .
X X XI I . THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
Signifioatlon .
Tagalog .
Signifioation .
Synonyms
Bitter . P ait . Bitter .
( J ) U m brella . P ayo n g . U m brella .
( J ) Spike nai l , . P aco . Spike nail ,
J
( ) Sui t able . P atot . U sefulness . Ocol .
U n h u l l e d
( )
J R ice .
( ri ce )Quin e las .
g
.
Panas .
( )
J E ager . Panas . F ati g u e d . Han ad .
A k i n d of
P arang . J
( ) Cleaver . P alang .
blunt knife . )P ung i
J S
( ) hi p . Ship . Dauong .
J
( ) T o beat To beat Ha m p as
'
. . .
( T O t u r n l F ace turned
P al i ng P ali n g L ib i s
away i away
. .
T0 drive So g a s a g , ca
P a sak ( ) i nto
J P asac \V e dg e
lang
. . .
.
.
P asang . F lood tide P i san . . F lood tide Taog .
Chip or s m all
Pi hak .
( J) Side . P iha o . portion set
asi de .
P eta k . P i tac . Separati on .
Silver .
To choose . H irang .
Ca pi tal . B a t a u an .
Drag net . L a m bat .
To strike . Balasb as .
I sland .
G reen pigeon . F ouay . G r een pigeo n .
P uluh .
( J ) Te n . Te n .
P us a t . J
( ) N avel .
N avel .
To ta k e i n S i n a p o p o
P angku J
( ) L ap Pa n g co
o ne s ar m s
'
nan
. .
To r o a s t
P a n ggang J
( ) To roas t P a n gan
m eat
. . .
P ingan .
( J) Bowl . P ing an . Plate ( vesse l) H u m a n g a r . .
G a m pon qui
P anggal To lop P oncol M ai m ed ,
m ao
. . . .
The m ariner s
'
P adu m an ( J)
(
Pa ra lu m a n
co m p a ss
.
A k i n d o f
P anu .
( )
J
tortoi se .
P ago n g .
P i ntu .
( )
J Door .
P antas . E xpert .
Pandan (J) Pandanus .
P risai J
( ) Shield .
P arc hi ck . TO spri nkle .
B a k at .
( )
J TO adhere .
R ahun . J
( ) Poi son .
R atos .
(J) Hundred .
R ibu J
( ) Thousand .
R usa . Deer . .
I N TRO DU CTI O N . X XXIII .
Malay . Slgnifioation . Tagalog . Signification . Synonyms .
To d r O p H ol o g l a g
To tu m ble G uib a ,
. .
do wn . pac .
Spro ut .
Buc k .
P i ty.
Si ck .
Sago .
To bes m ear
To sweep U al i s
’
wi th ocher
. .
Sa b ung .
( )
J Ga m e cock . Sabon g .
To let cocks
figh t
Sarung .
( ) heath
J S . Salong . To sheath . B a li n da n g .
Salah .
( )
J Wron g . Sala . \V r o n g . M ali .
Ferru le in
Salut .
( J ) To Overlay . Salot . the k n i f e ,
P a b id .
handle .
Sali n J T
( ) o transcribe Sali n To transcri be H ip n o
o
. . . . .
P article pre Th e a r t i c l e
Si .
( )
J fi x e d t o Si . of personal
nouns . na m es .
( ) lbow
J E Sico . E lbow .
( J) R a y . Si n a g . R ay . A n agay .
M e as u ring To m ark out

3
( ) li n
J
e .
Sl p a t .
a l ine .
Dorol .
( )
J To s qua t . Si la . To squat . Ti n g ca y a d
Co m b . Si si l . F lax co m b .
( )
J One fourth . Soco . H a lf a p o u nd .
M easure
M eas ure of
Si i ca t
’
i
length
.
l .
Surung Go ahead . L os ob .
Torch .
To e m b ro id e r . Soo t
Dug
To r a nge i n
Sapi n
layers
.
Th e s a m e
San tan
kind of deli
Sant an
cacy as i n
. .
M alay
s rfg a r
.
‘
.
L adle . L adle . Ca u o t .
R efuse of the
betel m ixture . i Chewed betel .
P i ncers . Si pit Bi g t in g .
Oa t h . Su m p a .
N arrow . Su m pit .
Ta lay . Si m p an .
E xcre m ent . Ta e .
To kn ow . Taotao .
To abide . Tahan .
Yea r . Ta On .
Ta hil Tahil
g is i
. .
To laugh . Tan a . L ag a a c, n .
5
XXXIV . TE E TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
Malay . Slgnltloatlon . T
agalog . Slgnlfioatlon . Synonyms .
Tawar .
(J ) To
bargai n Tauad . To
bargai n . Os 1l .
Takut .
( )
J To
fear . Tacot . F ear . A li n gi n .
To m e a s u r e )TO m easure
Taka i .
( )i by c a a c i t
J
J
Tacal
by capacity
p y .
T h old
Tangan .
( )
J Hand . Tang an
g gp as
gi s
.
Tangis . To weep . Tan . To wee p s

l k,
3f i i
f ln
Tana To ask . Tanong .
ou i
Tatal .
( )
J Chip of wood . Ta tal . Ch i p
of wood
‘
Tana k .
( )
J T o boi l . Tanac . TO roast ri ce . Col o .
Tan am .
( J ) T o plant . Tani m . To plant .
The 1a l11 of
Tapak .
( )i the 1
J 121113 F oot p r i nt .
P alad .
To b e s catter Hasic s am
Tabur ( )l e d
J Sa b o g To sow ,
b ulat
. . .
Taru m .
( )
J I ndigo .
Tali ( )
J R ope L i i bi d
'
. .
Tasik .
( J) Se a . Tasic .
}H
N Of a
{ fifi
e
Ti y u n g Si y o l TO chi rp
b
. . .
Ti y u p . To blow . i hi p , h i y i p . To blow .
Tipi s . J
( ) Thi n . N i pi s . Thi n .
Ti m un . J
( ) Cucu m ber . Ca t i m o n . C ucu m ber . P o co tp o c o t .
Ti m ur . E ast . Ti m og . South . I bab a .
Tungan . A n in sect . Tongao . An insect .
T la y hands
Tutup . J
( ) To shut . To to p .
{ g n
O m pa .
Tutur J
( )
. T o i nfor m T otol . . To i n for m . Toos .
Tuba . J
( ) A plant T uba . . A plant .
Tu m a J
( )
. L ouse T o m a . . Cr a b lo u s e .
Tulak (
. J ) T o push T olac . To push
Tulung J
( ) H elp To long . . To h elp .
Tagar . I l ard Tig as . . Hard .
Tangah ( )
J M idday . T angb ali . . N oon .
A peculi ar
hel
kyd
A Of
Tang ku lu k for m of tur Ta n g co lo c
. .
l
ban .
Tongk a t S t aff . .
Ta n g ka p ( J ) To grasp
i
. .
Tangkis J
( ) P ushed away Ta n gq u l . . To pu sh away .
T3 ? ata nga L hand

1
g
Tangga H a n da n a n
de r
.
11 3 .
U nique . To n gg a li . On e by on e . Ca s a lay .
To
cut . Ta ta c . To cut m etals . Tag a .
To
penetrate
Tatas . the s k i n wi th )T as tas . To unsew .
o ut wounding
Tantu ( )
J C ertain Ti i n a y
’
. . .
Tanda . M
( ) ark
J . Quintal ,
tala ,
I N TRO DU CTI ON . XXXV .
Malay .
Signlfioallon . T
agalog .
Signification .
Synonyms .
F i shing line
(
To nda To b e towed Tonda at the ste rn Hil a
i of a shi p
. . . .
Tan dang ( J ) To kick . Ti n d a c . To kick . Si ca d .
Tabu .
( )
J Sugar cane . Tub o . Sugar can e . Ti b os .
Tabas .
2T 3
2 1 th e
33:
0 1
Tab as To cut out . Cain g in .
Tabus .
( J) o ranso m . Tu b es . To ranso m . Baui .
T‘
f
r e a k
Tam p u h .
( J ) To fall u pon . Ta m pol .
u g m
Tu m puk ( J ) To heap . . To m p o c . Hea p . Bo ng tOn .
Tu m pan g ( J ) To lodge . . Tu m pang . L ai n over . P a to lOy .
Ta m par ( J ) Slap . . Ta m pal . Slap . So n to c .
Tu m pas ( J ) E xti rpated . . Tapus . F inished . L i pol .
Ti m ba J
( ) Bucket . . Ti m ba . Bucket . Tanin g .
Tu m buh ( J ) To grow Tubo To grow Olar

b
. . . . .
Ta m bak ( )
J Dike . . Ta m ac . Trench Cali .
Tu m ak b .
( J ) Sp ear . To m boc .
To s tr i ke w i th
a spear
Si bat .
b
.
Ti m bang ( J ) T o weigh . Ti m ang . To weigh .
Ti m bun ( J ) To pi le Ti m bon TO pile

b
. . .
Ti m ul . J T
( ) o float . Ti m b o la n . Buoy
Tra . S ta m p . Tala . M ark .
Taraj u .
( )
J S ca le b a la n ce , Talaro . Scale
Trus .
( J ) Th rough . Taos . To p ierce . L i m p as .
Talinga .
( )
J E a r . Ta i n ga . E ar .
Taluk Cove L ooc Cove Sogod

w
. . . .
Tal an . To swallow . L o u l ou . To swallo . L a go c .
Talor . E gg . I tlog . E gg
U tus .
(J) .
To send Otos . To order Sugo .
U tac ( J) B rai n . Otac . B rain

U pah .
( )
J Wages . Op a . Wages . Hi m a gal .
U bi.
( )
J Ya m Ob i . Ya m
U bat . G un powder . Ob a c . G unpowde r .
U ba n .
( )
J G rey hai r . U ban . G rey h ai r .
U rat ( )
J R oot . Ogat . R oot
U s ir . J
( ) T o pursue . Os i g . TO pursue . H abol .
To bear b e To he a r b e
tween two Osong twee n two Touang
i
.
wi th a p ole . with a pole .
U ntung .
( )
J G a i n Onto n g . L uck . Pa q u i n ab a ng
U j an ( J ) R ai n . Ol an . R ai n On es
U t ang ( )
J Debt . Otang . Deb t
TO p 1 k o n i
U n us T
( ) o d raw
J . Ho n o s
{T of a n i i mb er i Palit
Ha ngo ‘
U rup ( )
J T.o exc h ange H Ol i p o replace . . .
U lu ( )
J Head 0 1
8) Hea d .
The f ollo w m g i s a list of the exclusively avanese J w or d s fou n d

i n Tagalog .
Javanes e .
Signifioation . Tagalog .
Slgnifioatlon .
Synonyms
A ya m , b an a
Dog Dog
gan
. .
K i ng
.
. King .
XXXVI . THE TA GA L O G LA N GUA GE .
Javanes e . Signifloatlon . Tagalog . Slgnification .

Synonym
s .
N am e .
Tore fuse Hou ag . .
Virtuous Tapat . .
To read L a lOs . .
Sh e l l o f a
crab .
R ear .
F inger .
I tch .
To do .
R ice flour .
M e dicate d
Da m p i Tapal
' .
fo m ent a tion
.
Scarce Dalang . R are scarce ,L a b n ao . .
A kin d of
Co p y a .
hel m et .
To m e r c h
Ba li u a s
a n di s e
.
M onkey . Ba cula o .
Seven . M a nap it .
Skate fish . P aol .
Silver m oney .
Three . M a m pat
To sleep . G o p i li n g .
To talk Sab i
b s)
. .
E ight . Saga ( o .
The
following i s t he list of Sanskrit words i n Tagalog wh ich ,
probably foun d their w a y i nto the language through the Kawi and
,
the Javanese F o r the purpose of better ap preciating the orthographi cal

.
changes the for m which m a y be consi dered that of the o riginal

,
spelling i s given together wi th that of thei r M alay spelling i t being ,
necessary of course to put each i n the R o m an character

, , .
Sans krit . Malay . Slgnification . Tagalog . Significatlon . Synonyms .
A n i ya Tyranny
D ab as ta m
To
~
A n y aya A nyay a h ar m ,
ya (J)
.
palasan
. .
.
.
Sixth part
M asa . A m as ( J) G old . A m as . Of a tahi l G uint o .
of gold .
To hope . Ti n a la .
Su n day , . Bay an .
P rice
b
.
K acha . G lass .
G lass ra
c e le t .
Kota . F ort . F ort .
Te n m i l l Te n m i
i
ll
Ke o i .
ion Cat i .
1 ion
. .
K asturi . M usk . Ca s to li . M usk .
Kasu m ba Sa f fl o w e r . Ca s u b ha . Saffron . Dil ao .
G ajah . E lephant . G adia . E lephant .
Chuka . Vinegar . Suca . Vi negar . L ala

Chita . F eeling . Sint a . L ove . l bi g .
I N TRoDUCTI oN . XXXVI T .
Sanskrit . Malay . Signifioatlon . T

agalog . Signlfioatlonx Synonyms .
Ch a m p a
Cha mp a ka Sa m p a ga
ka
. .
Cari ta . Char i ta . Story . Salit a .
A na m e O f
m
Ja bu . Ja m u b . ce rta i n Da mb o .
fruit .
G reeting . Sa n g ta b l . To respect . A ba .
Ti n . Ti n ga . Ti n .
Copper . Tu m baga . Copper .
P on d . Talaga . P o nd .
Trick . Day a . F raud .
A god . Diua . Sp i r i t .
Tw o . Dalan a . Tw o .
I ncense . Dupaan . Censer .
Si n . D us a P enance .
F alse . Dust a . To curse .
Bo w . Pana . A rrow .
White P uti . White . B u silac .
To i nquire . Tocs o . To te m pt .
P igeo n . Sa la m p a t i . Pigeon .
TO d i Stri b 2 ‘
To divide B a ha g i To m b a hi .
u te
.
V ya y a . Bi y a y a . E xpenses . Biyay a . G ift .
H a b i t u at l H a b i tu a t
i
-
Bi y a s a Bi b asa D am ag
5 ed
.
ed
. .
Seed Ei nbi Seed B atag

b
. . . .
Dita a o
P oison Bisa Poi son
,
ab
. . .
On e of the
p r i nci pal
Battara . Batara .
Ba thala .
( Hin doo
go ds .
Bandaga B a n d a ha
Ba n da a ri Steward Steward
IIC
. . .
ra .
l .
V a r rta . Brita . N ews . Bali ta . N ews .
I n h e rl ta n ‘
M ana ; M anah . R elic . M an a . Bé b Ot .
08 .
M a n i ky a . M a n ika m . Ge m . M an ic . Pearl seed .
M asa . M asa Ti m e . M asa . Ti m e .
M ega . M ega . Cloud . Bigh a Cloud .
M uka . M uka . F ace . M u c ha -

. F ace .
Beginnin g Bti b at
'
M ula . M ula Begi nning . M ula . . .
La ba P rofit La ba . Fl o fi t
'
.
Pa quina
bang .
Te n thous Te n t hou s
L aksa L a 0s a
.
and .
.
and
F ello w . Sa m a .
To
pany
a c co m
.
Ca la g o m al .
Si lk . Su tla . Silk . Husi .
Wi tness . Sacs i . Witne s s .

XXXVI I I THE TA GA LOG LA NGU A GE
'
. .
Sans krit . Malay .

Signifioation . Tagalog . Slgnificatlon .
Synonyms .
ii
n dé la
Sadya . Sa di y a . P repared . Sa d y a
-
. To prepare .
’
Sa jja . San ja ta . Weapons Sandat a . Weapon . Sapiao

5 C a
fis
oc
Sandi Sandi Joint Fa n d i g A ny j oi nt
! s
. . . .
n '
Tu lasi . Su la s i . Sw e e t b a s il . So la s i . Sweet basil .
The
following i s t he li st of th e few words o f A rabi c o rigi n
foun d i n Ta galog having evidently been i ntroduced th rough M alay
, ,
and showing the sligh t degree of i nfluence whi ch M oha m m edani s m ha d

i n the s e I sland s .
I t i s well to no te that the ter m r i bu “

thou san d i s also gi ven , ,
i n th e M alay Javanese table This i s on accou nt o f i ts doub tfu l .
origin for while Cra w f u rd i n h is dic tionary gives n o indicatio n of

,
what i t m a y b e F av r e o n th e con trary believes i t to b e A rabic ( 1)

, , ,
.
“
U ta r n erve ;
, wil l also be fou nd i n the M alay tab le because it ,
m a y be that i t was through Javanese an d n ot through M alay i t h as

been i ntroduced .
Slgnlflcatlon .
Brai n
To s it cross leg -
Sub m i ssion , ob e Pa n in g cay a d g e d ( the respect

~
I n ki y ad
.
,
dien e s . ti ngcaya d , ful postu re i n

churc h) .
Opiu m . O p iu m .
L iquor . Wi ne li quor , .
Divine . N ob ili ty .
Sluggi sh . D ull stupi d , .
Savory . To relish .
M easuring string To m ark out wi th

o r rule . a lin e
Writing . Writing
To prostrate . To k n eel down .
A m en peace b e ,
Sa lam . to you ( a sal u Sal am at . Than ks

t a ti o n ) .
Trousers Sa la u a l Tro u sers

j
. . .
Judge u dg m ent , . H Oc o m . Judge .
l i m i di t y Hiya Blush ash a m ed

'
. .
.
,
M arri ed p a rty . A s aua M arried par ty .
Occult sci en ce . A li m oan . A wful dark place ,
Before g om g furthe r i nto an exa m ination of these li sts attention ,
i s i nvi ted to th e fairly general accord which the result sh ows wi th th at

give n by Cra w f u rd despite b oth having been Obtai ned by quite different
,
p rocesses The totals are : ( 2 )

( l ) A u cu n d i ct i o n a i r e n e d o n n e l é ty m o lo g i e d e os m o t m a la i s ; m a i s o n
’
tr ou v e e n H eb r i bb o.,
'
d o u p r o b a b le m e n l A r r i bu Ces t
la q u i l f a u t a lle r c h e r
’ ’
. .
'
t
c h e r l o r i g i n e d u r i bu m a la i s
'
I I f a u t r e m a r q u e r c e p e n da n
‘
.
q u e n He b
’
et en t .
A r , 11 s i gn i fi e di x m ille ( 2 n d v o l , p a g e s 435
. . .
( 2 ) The Ta g a la D i c t i o n a r y w i t h i t s a p p e n d i c e s , c o n t a i n s , w o r d s a m o ng
w hi ch I ca n d e t e c n o m ore t t ha n 442 t
h a t a r e f o r e i g n , b e lo n g i n g t o t h e f o llo w i n g
la n gu a g e s v
M a la y 113, J a a n e s e 2 7 , co m m o n t o t h e M a la y a n d J a a n e s e 2 5 9,
. v
Sans kr i t 33 A ra b i c 7, Pe r s i an 2 a n d Te li n g a l ( Cra w f u rd , Di s s e r a ti on , p a g e cx i ) . t v .
XL . THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
Wi th the exception therefore of personal p ro noun s nu merals

b
, , , ,
the p article at and the adve r p a for m ost of whi ch h owever there , , ,
exist native synony m s all o ther borrowed ter m s are of the n atu re ,
of those which have no power to ch ange the characte r of the lan

guage no r do th ey add appreciably to i ts lexical s t ock
,
They have .
-
no syntactical value and i n o ther res pects they fall short even of , ,
the i m portance of F rench words i n E nglish or of A rabi c wo rds i n

S pan ish or P o rtuguese The M alay lexical ele m ent therefore although .
, ,
nu m erou s enough i s however extri nsic an d unesse n tial , , ,

.
I t m a y be obj ected th at the wo rds here give n are n ot all ;

w
and we k no well thi s to be the case We are however convinced .
,
that for whatever others m ight be de tected the language will furnis h ,
synony m s i n t he sa m e proportio n and that therefore the above co n , ,
clu s i o n would thereby sti ll re m ai n p ractically unshaken .
We m ust n ot however s tay exclusi vely by lexical co m pari son , , ,
b ut rather go i n t o t he other depar t m ents of gra m m ar A language should .
not be considered as an aggregate of words b u t as an asse m blage ,
of for m s The study of t h e gra m m atical constructio n leads deeper

.
i nto the language and accord i n gra m m ati cal for m s i s the m ost ,
-
reliab le evidence of parenta ge B u t as for m s are fewer than words .

,
the pur p oses for which tho ught co m m unicati o n i s establish ed are
essentially t he sa m e throughout m anki nd the probabili ty i s here ,
g reater of co m ing across for m s apparently co m m on an d the ri sk i s ,
a lso greater of classifying as ki ndred languages which i n fact have ,
sprung fro m di fferen t trunks .
The co m parison w ith M alay i s here fi rs t take n u p an d will

cover briefly the sa m e points which m ore extensively were covered
, , , ,
by Hu m boldt i n h is i nquiry A s already s tated these poi nts are : .

,
a general unifo r m ity of their words roo s and g ra m m atical con ,

‘
struction ; or m ore s p ecifically thei r acco rd i n the p ronouns i n n u m , ,
e ra ls ,
i n word building and i n word declension On t his s u p p o s s e d , .
accord i s founded by hi m the theory of the di rect deri v a tio n fro m

o ne and the sa m e s tock of all languages s poken by th e M alay race
.
.
But before going further i n to the exa m ination o f the gra m m atical
for m s i t is well first to co m p a re brie fly the alphabet an d the p honetic
,
character of the two languages

The M alay alphabet i s described as co nsisti ng of the six vo wels :
a e e i o u
, , , a é i o s o h aving generally the sound they h ave i n
, , , , , , ,
Spanish and the sound Of é and é correspo nding with that of the sa m e
,
vowels i n F rench The v owel syste m o f th e M alay affo rds no a p p re

.
c i a b le deviation fro m that of the Tagalog except perhap s i n the ,
p resen ce of a flat é corresponding i t see m s to th e Javanese p ep e t , , , ,
which i s not found i n Tagalog The sound h oweve r of thi s and .

, ,
the other vowels i s bu t very i m perfectly m arked i n M alay not so ,
m uch owing to a ny special tendency i n the language but owing rather ,
to the application to the sa m e of the A rabic characte r for here too , , ,
exists good reason to believe that the three vowel syste m of Tagalog
i s also at the basis of that of M alay
b
.
G reater difference exists i n the consonants which m a y b e etter ,
appreciated by contrasti n g th e two syste m s :
M alay b , ch , d , g , h, j ,
k , l ,
m, n ,
in
g , a, p r s
, , . t ,
w ,
y .
Ta galog b , d , g , h , o= k l, m, 11, ng , p
,
s ,
t ,
I Ta galog
there are wan ting th e ch j a n d at R r which
n , , , .
also appears to be wanti n g is found i n clu d e d i n the a m bi g u Oi is sound

,
,
I N TRO D U CTI O N . X LI .
Of d, the latte r being used a s in itial a n d fi n al r as li quid an d m e ,

:
dial or as i niti al of any other than the fi rs t syllable i n the word

,
.
The sound of the M alay ch i s describe d to be that of the sa m e con

sonant in the E nglish wo rd “
church t hat of j the sa m e as the ,
E ngli sh ( 1 i n
“
soldier an d tha t of a the o n e which this consonan t
,
ha s i n Spani sh The sound of ch i s sti ll found though n o t frequently i n

.
, ,
”
Bi sayan and i n the Ta galog words ma chi ne m onkey ; hi cho c hewed
,
“ “
, ,
”
b etel ; th e first of which i s the Javan ese m a cha n tiger ; th a t of j “
,
i n the I banag The soun d represented i n M alay by at i s found i n

.
“ ”
Tagalog asi de fro m Spani sh words i n i n y e an d n i n y o yours
,
“
to , , ,
”
you ( plural ) as t he p ro per way of pronoun cing the co m bin a ti on ny
, ,
but wi th no character fo r i t i n th e alph abet t hi s see m s t o i ndi cate

that the la n guage once m ade greater use o f these M alay sounds but ,
later fell back to t he p ri m itive syste m .
By fa r t he greatest d ifferen ce i n t he con son an t sys t e m of the

two languages i s foun d i n the soun d of h whi ch i n M alay i s described ,
as that of a si m ple aspi rate while i n Ta galog it i s a guttural o r if , , ,
t hi s be no t ad m i t t ed a very stro ng aspirate , .
I n the pho netic character there i s found so m e fai r accord i n

wha t respec ts the prevalent d issyllabic for m basi s of the radi cals and ,
i n t he general accentuation of the penulti m ate syllable ; ( m onosyllabic

roots are ho w ever m uch m o re n u m erous i n M alay and wo rds accente d
, , ,
o n the last syllable m uch m ore nu m erous i n Tagalog ); bu t the accord

goes no further A s noted by Cra w f u r d ( Di ssertation pages cviii ci x ) ( 1)
.
,
-
,
the case of syllables en d ing i n a consonant neither a liquid nor a ,
n asal i s of m ore frequent occurrence i n Tagalog than i n M alay and

, ,
he m en tion s the frequency with w hi c h g i s foun d ending a syllable

i n the for m er Words beginn ing with the guttural o r strong aspi rate
.
con sonant h are not found i n M alay while those beginn in g wit h nag ,
”
a re m ore n u m erous i n Ta galog than i n M alay He could count only .
fifteen word s i n the latter which begi n with thi s guttural nasal
consonan t Were h e better acqu ainted wi th hi s subj ect o r had he ever
.
,
he a rd Tagalog sp oken by n atives he wou ld n o t then have failed to n ote ,
th e prevalen ce o f the endings a y and oy nor would he have fai led ,
to m ark the m as distinctly belonging to the language i n view of t he

fact of the i m portan t use to which th e for m er especially a re put , ,
.
A nother prosodial Tagalog peculiarity to be n oted i n the c o m

parison wi th M alay i s the i n frequency with which t he liquid s l an d
r are found i n the for m e r coalesci ng with othe r consonants In n o
genuin e Tagalog word that we know of a ppears any o f thes e two
li quid s co m bi ned with another conson ant and a vowel i n the first ,
w h ile i t i s very rarely foun d i n the l a st syllable Of a wo rd

. Thi s , .
absence of a co mbi natio n which i s frequently m e t wi th i n Javanese ,
and a lthough not so frequently also i n M alay does not see m ho u

b
, , , ,
eve r to e due to any well d efined repugnance of the la n guage for

,
syllables of this ki nd no r to any deficiency i n t he native organ for

an d si m il ar Span is h wo rds are t a g a li z
, ,
cla r o tr a bajo g r a ci a
, , , ed with
out any change Of the consonan t sound and also e a si ly pronounced
by natives Bu t cu ri ous enough Tagalog wh en borrowing f ro m the
.
, , ,
M alay o r th e Javanese refuses to allo w these co m bi nation s to beco m e

naturali z b
,
ed wi th out fi rs t h avi ng the m expanded to two sylla les by

ho w s h i m s e lf p o o r ly a c q u a i n t e d w i t h t he Ta g a lo g a n d t he
( 1) Cra w f u r d s
S p a n i s h a lp ha be t s w h e n he s a y s : ( p a g e C V C V I )
“
I t ha s , ( Ta g a lo g ) h o w e e r, t h e
-
. v
co n s o n a n ts v and f, s o u n ds u n k no w n t o t he J a a n e s e a n d t he M a la y v
a lt ho u g h I ,
s t r o n g ly s u s p e ct t ha t t he Cha ra c t e r c a lle d b y t he Sp a n i s h ri e rs v is r e a lly n o w t

o t he r t ha n t h e E n g li s h w .
Ti i E TA G A L O G L AN G U A GE .
b
inserting etween t he other co n s ona n t a n d t he liq u i d a v o wel o f th e
sa m e kind a s t hat found i n the original ter m i n th e way the ,
M a l bli = Ta g bi li
“
to buy ; M al p r a s “
shi p ; etc sh ow
‘ ’
. .
,
a g p a r cw .
,
.
,
.
The a cco rd t he re fore which i s clai m ed to exist i n th e phon eti c

, ,
character o f the Tagalog and the M alay do es not see m to b e such as

to support the theory o f a co m m o n i m m edia te derivatio n O f the two
languages fro m one a n d th e sa m e parent stock .
Having th us revi ewed t he di fferences i n the al p habet a n d i n

t he phon e t i c character the co m pariso n i s n ow carrie d ove r to the
,
o ther depart m ents of the la n guage

d
.
That cert a i n necessary a ccor m ust exi st i n th e for m an d m ean

ing Of the words acqui red by a language with those o f the language
fro m which they have been acqui red i s o nly Obvi ous On e c a n see , .
thi s accord i n E ngli s h with regard to the n u m erou s word s borrowed ,
either directly or i ndirectly fro m L a tin wi thout thereby t he rela t i o n , ,
i n which i t stands to that sou rce being i n the lea s t a ltered The .
value which for the support of the theo ry O f a di rect derivation o f

,
Tagalog fro m M alay i s to be attache d to the n u m be r an d class ,
of m ost of the wor d s given i n foregoi n g li s t s ha s a lr e ady been ,
To th e persona l pronoun s an d n u m erals fo und therei n

‘
e sti m ated .
,
m ore value no doub t should b e attach ed an d i t was i n con siderati o n

, , ,
of this that H u m boldt ha s m a d e of each class of th ese words a ba si s fo r

hi s i nquiry ; but while ac k nowledging thei r greater i m portan ce sti ll ,
we m a y be per m itted to m entio n the substantive char a cter of thes e

words whi ch brings th e m n earer to the n ature of n oun s than to that
of preposi t i on s or di rectives The m ere accord o f th e person a l p ro .
n oun s i n two different langu a ges doe s n ot see m however to affor d , ,
suf fi cient re a so n to regard the m as h aving s prung di rec t ly fro m o ne

”
and the sa m e trunk The case m a y be cited o f the E n glis h I
. and
“
”
“
thou , and the Span i s h yo and tu both o f whi ch are tr a ced
“ “
, \
” ” ”
th rough t he L atin an d G ree k ego an d tu 8 Yt 0 and on to t he San s
“ “ “ “
, ,
kri t a ha m and te a m not w it hstan ding th e fact o f the differen t degree O f

,
relationshi p i n w h ich th e two la n guages stan d to L ati n H u m b oldt hi m sel f .
( 3 r d book page,
2 5 7 ) dis c overed that the M a la g i a he
a s a ha whi ch , .
is the for m of the Obj ective case of the personal pronou n de p rived
z
of the initi al o i s the sa m e as the San s k ri t a ha m a n d he beli eves
, ,
( 2 n d book page, 3 3 ) that the poin t as to whether o r not the Kawi

borrowed personal pronoun s dire ctly fro m Sansk rit requi re s fu rth er
investigation E ven h e once thought of the Ka u tw a n bein g id en
.
v
tical with the Sans k ri t tw a n ( 1)an d h e surely woul d no t have cha n ged ,
hi s con clusion s ha d he foun d thi s to be the case .
But aside fro m the above facts i t does no t appear th a t th ere exists
, ,
the general accord which i s predicated o f the persona l p ronoun s i n

the t w o langu a ges A s f ar as structure i s con cerned we found t ha t
.
,
the ending g o of ta y o one of the fo r m s of the Ta galog fi rs t pe rso n ,
pronoun i n the plura l and of ca y r) the fo r m of the se con d pers o n

’
pronoun also i n the plural could not well be accounted fo r by

, ,
Hu m boldt ; n o r a s far as our knowledge goes coul d th ey yet b e

, ,
re la ted o r traced to any ot her langu a ge of those spoken b y the race .
That y a i n ca y é and n ot ca belo ngs to t he radic a l and i s therefore , , ,
t he m ore i m portant of the two portion s of the wo rd m a y be seen ,
i n t he f a c t of its persistency i n an y ?) an d n i ny é the for m s of the

.
y
p o s s e s s w e case .
( 1) 2 n d b o o k , p a g e 33 .
I N TRO DU CTI O N . XL II I .
As the f orm s of
the personal p ronoun s are m ore nu m erou s i n
M alay th an i n Tagalog
i n order to rende r th e differences m ore p e r ,
c e p t i b le to t he eye those of t he one and th e other language a re

,
shown s ide by si de i n the followi ng table :

TA G A L O G M A LA Y .
Pe rs o n. S i n g u la r . P lu r a l . S i n g u la r . P lu r a l
A k u, d a ku ,
ku ; h a m ba
Ca m i tayo ,
s a ha y a z Kita ka m i
,
s a
q u i t az c a ta
, .
ya b eta p a
.
, ,
t e k gu na , .
A n g ka w , di
kaw d eng
I c ao ca Ca y o ca m e
,
Ka mu mu
ka w ka w ; t u
.
,
. .
, ,
,
wan zt u a n .
I ya i a .
,
di a ,
i n i ya ,
: M ari ka -
itu .
fi a .
th e Tagalog pro nou n of t he second person i n the si n gu lar

Of ,
i s the fo r m whi ch i coro generally assu m e s when co m in g af t er t he ’
z
ca
ve rb Of the th ree plur a l for m s of t he fi rst perso n p ronoun ca m i s

’
.
,
exclusi ve ta p/ o i nclusive an d g room or c a td dual

, On th e M al a y
, ,
.
side we fi n d t hat d aku i s a n euphoniou s fo r m an d ku a c o n t ra c ti o n of

, , ,
”
fi l m; a ll t he others which m ore o r less m ean sl a ve serv a n t are “ “ ’
, , ,
“
fo r m s of sub m iss io n whi ch a lso serve for th e plur a l wi t h s eg a la all , , ,
e very one ; o r any o t her word i ndic a ting plu rali ty added The ,
.
si m ple plural fo r m s a r e ka m a an d ki ta the for m e r correspondin g

’
exactly i n m eani ng wi th i ts Ta g a log coun terpart ; ki ff t however co r

’
, , ,
respo nding no t wi th q u i té b ut wi th ta y o i n Ta galog a l t hough its

, , ,
m eaning i n M alay co rresponds wi t h t hat of t he sa m e for m i n othe r

languages of the Ph i li ppi nes I n a way si m ilar to that fo u nd i n .
th e M alay p ro nou n O f t he first perso n d i ka w d e n g ka w are th e eu

‘
, ,
p h o nio u s k a w the ,co ntracted for m s o f a n ka w ;

g t w a n t ua n bei ng t h e ,
x
sub m i ssi ve fo r m which like w ise i s u sed fo r th e pl ural wi th the addi tio n -
o f so m e word indi cating plur a li ty The si m ple plural for m i s lacm m . ,
with i ts contraction m u c orrespon ding wi th t he but loc a lly used , ,
Ta galog fo r m ca me an d wi th th e general o n e used i n Bicol an d

, ,
Bisayan F o r t he full and well fi xed Ta galog fo r m s i y d of th e th i rd

. ,
perso n pronoun i n the si ngular there a re fou nd t he loosely sprea d ,
fo rm s Ey a t o d ata ami g o i nt o an d f act i n M alay ; while for t he Ta

, , , , ,
~
galog plural s old there exists n o p roper corres pond in g fo r m i n M a lay

, ,
”
the si ngula r fo r m s wi th t h e w ord a mong “
people ; o r t he ex pressio n ,
m a r i ka atu “
these people here ; serving to palliate th e de fi ci en cy
’
-
.
,
When co m pari so n i s m ad e O f t he c lean co m pact an d well d e fi n e d ,

-
for m s of the Ta galog personal pronoun s and of thei r power fo r th e

ex p ressi o n of every shade of m ea n ing i n respect to p e rson n u m ber ,
and case wi th the b ro k en dispe rsed an d a m biguou s fo r m s of th os e

, ,
of the M alay fai nt and purposeless i n thei r reference t he m ind

, ,
receives a fi rst i m pressio n of the su periori ty of the Ta galog for m s

over those o f M alay Fo r t he fact m u s t b e apparen t to any
.
,
u nbiased m ind t hat th e M alay pe rsonal p ronoun s could n o t wel l

develope the powe r of e x p ressi n g c a se an d n u m ber i n as m u ch a s
d w d
,
cas e i s d e pen e n t o n t h e i r positi on i th re g ar to t he no u n a n d ,

X L IV . THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A G E .
n u m be r on their association wi th certai n other wo rds On e feels

z
.
,
therefore so m ewhat a m a ed at Cra wf u rd s Opin ion to the effect

'
that : “
The n eares t approach of th e Tagalog gra mm a r to the M a
lay and Javanese i n so far as the m ere words are concerned
, ,
exists i n the pe rsonal pronouns ; ( Di ssertation page CX I I I ) for i t i s ,
rather : the widest difference that he shou ld h ave said

“
T hi s i s the .
m ore surprising as i n th e G ra m m ar ( page S pea king o f the M alay

personal pronoun s he says : With exceptions to be presen tly n a m ed
,
“
,
the p ronouns like the nouns are devoid of n u m ber of gender and , ,
of case a state m ent which except i n respect to the gender could not
, , ,
be a pplied to the Tagalog prono uns He was n o t i t see m s i n a .

, ,
positio n to appreciate well not o nly the far greater syntactic a l value ,
of the Tagalog personal pronouns bu t also the weight whi ch i n the ,
d ifferentiation i s to b e attributed to th e en ding y o a disti nctly aboriginal ,
ele m en t found i n the fi rst person i nclusive plural and i n the seco nd person
, ,
plural pro nouns ; an d to th e a} an d s i foun d i n the fi rst syllables of

,
s can s i y ct a nd s old wh ich are peculiar Tagalog word building prefixed

’
-
, ,
particles A s to y o sufficient has already been stated A s to i it i s foun d by

.
,
.
,
H u m boldt o r rather by his continuer Busch m an n ( 3rd book page 7 97)that

b
, , , ,
i t for m s th e asi s of the thi rd perso n pronoun i n the languages of the Sa n

s k r i t fa m ily I t i s also found that i n Tagalog i t for m s the first syllable
.
of the d e m o s tra t i v e no i y d n wh ile the sound 0 of nod e m a y be related

, ,
to that of the d e m o s tra ti v e of the fa r away Obj ect y a é n a n d to the adverb , ,
of the te r mi nu s co q u a dé o n Si i s a p refixed particle also fo u nd i n

’
.
,
t he tea m horse ;
“
M alay before n oun s as i n s i ku da ,
but usually ,
'
b efore those of persons to denote fa m iliarity or conte m pt ,

I t is .
,
" ”
besides found i n s i dp a
,
“
who ? 32 mm “
suc h a o ne
-
This parti cle
, , .
i s i n Tagalog the article i ndicati ng personality and i s neve r used wi th

co m m o n nouns except with those i ndica t ive of pe rson s stan ding i n
,
the nearest deg ree of relationshi p to th e speaker I t i s likewi se found

i n gs i n o ? “
w ho ?
,
an d i n th i s therefore m a y be sai d to bear the greatest , ,
analogy i n the use to that it has i n the M alay ; but the analogy goes no further .
F a r fro m denoting fa m iliarity o r conte m pt i n Tagalog i t denotes on

"
, ,
the contrary such a great respect for the perso n i n conn ecti on wi th
,
whose n a m e o r t i tle i t i s used a s even to e m body a reference to the latter ,
being un ique i n kind and exclusi vely belonging to the speaker Thi s .
m a y be seen for i nstance i n the o m ission o f t he possessi ve p ronou n

i n the ph rase s za m tt ( m y ) father
, ,
“
the fath er ( of m ine ); and i n
“
'
‘
the fact that if anybody were addressed o r referred to i n thi s way

who was no t the speaker s real parent the expressio n would be
’
understood to be one of an i roni c ki nd o r o ne lacki ng i n respect .
But where the p a rti cle i s used i n a way not t he sligh test a p proach
to which can be found i n any other language ( exce pt perhaps i n th e ,. ,
m a of the language of H awai i and of those of N e w Z ealand o r perhaps , , ,
i n th e i la y = i ley o f t h e M a la g a s i ) o f those spo k en by the M alay race ,
and which recalls to m e m ory the G reek expressio n x a i O i n e p i a Ur Ov ,
i s i n th e plural s i n co ( s i n dct i n Bicol s i r co i n Bisayan ) whi ch i n so

’ ’
, ,
far as i t requires a s sociation wi th a n ou n i s distinctly an article ,
i ndicative o f co m panionshi p so that the ex p ression s an d M a r ti n de ,

.
,
spite the fact of M a r t m being i n the singular will be understood as ,
M a r ti n s fa m ily or M a r ti n together with h is associates i n any othe r

’
kind o f relation .
The M alay ki ta although n ot differi ng i n s tructure fro m th e

,
sa m e pronoun i n Tag a log di ff ers however widely i n sense an d u s e , , , .
( gu i tci = ca tct i s but seldo m used i n Ta galog i n

'
the no m i n ati ve case ,
and when so used i t is decidedly d ual for i t m eans ,

“
thou and I , ,
I O
N TR DU CTI ON . XL V .
alone and n o t “ all o f u s a s i t i s t he case i n M alay Qu i td zca td ,

.
,
w hile still retai ni ng i ts d ual character i s m ore freq u ently used as ,
referrin g to the S peake r i n th e possessive an d to th e person s po k en ,
to i n the no m inative case with v erbs i n the passive and i n sen , ,
te n ce s the subj ect of whic h i s the second perso n p ronoun i n the

sing u lar and the agent that of the fi rst person p ron ou n also i n the
1 2
singular . It would n ot be possi ble i n M alay to say thou ( art cudgeled )
“
3
by m e ) i n the sa m e way as i n Tagalog
( The construction i n M alay
w
.
,
as fa r as ou r acquaintance with this lang u age enab les us to k no

, ,
1 3 2
would be thi s : a ng lca w d i p u kn l ku , while i n Tagalo g i t . would b e :
2 13 -
hi n a ha mp ds q u i td z ca td which shows well the differen t m ean in g an d

’
u se of the Tagalog p ronou n

,
Cra w f u rd d id n ot fail to record these .
differen ces ( I ) but u n a ble to account for the m i n a ny o th er way he

, ,
gives i t as h is opin io n that M alays and Javanes e probably borrowed fro m

Tagalog these for m s of the pronoun s Just what way thi s could be .
done h e leaves the reader to conj ecture al thou gh such a borrowi ng ,
as th is would see m to go agai nst h is theo ry of the in fe riori ty of

Tagalog and of a focus o f M alay civi li z ation whi ch i rradiating ,
fro m Java exte nded i tself i n every di rection o ver the wh ole I ndian
,
A rchi pelago His opi ni on therefo re although co m ing fro m such , ,
a high authori ty i n m atters pertaining to the I n dian A rchi pelago ,
wi ll h ave no e ffect i n changing o r o the rwise altering the course o f ‘
the p resent i nqui ry .
I t wi ll be seen that certai n fo r m s o f so m e Ta galog perso na l

p ronouns and certai n ele m en ts o f o the rs bear close rese m blance o r
a re even i dentical with th e sa m e i n M alay ; the re a re howeve r for m s , ,
of the Ta galog perso n a l prono u n s a nd ce rtai n ele m en ts i n o thers

whi ch are d i s t n c tly a b original Thi s fac t t ends to sho w that the .
language here as e lse whe re while adopti ng i n so m e cases the M al ay

. ,
fo r m re tained ho w ever the o ri gi nal m eaning declension use etc ;

, , , , , ,
.
o r perha ps i f we are to j udge fro m what i s still foun d i n other

,
P hili p pine tongues i t fi rst adopted the m a nd the n f e ll back agai n

,
to t he p ri m iti ve p ronouns ( 2 ) The accord shows i tself m o s t i n .
the fi r s t an d seco nd perso n p ronouns i n the singular I t falls sho rt .

,
h oweve r o f the o ne that we fi nd to exist between th e Spani sh y o an d

,
m e th e E ngli sh I and me a nd the G er m an t ch m i r and m i ch whi ch are

, , , ,
not languages s prun g i m m ediately fro m th e sa m e trunk ; wh ile the

differences i n othe rs i n the declensio n and i n th e use and m ean ing
, ,
o f all m ark the m as disti nctly aboriginal wo rds and do n ot see m to

,
warran t the assu m ptio n of havi ng bee n di rectly derived fro m th e sa m e

source as those of th e M alay .
The fo r m s of the possessive p ronouns i n Ta galog a s i n m ost ,
( 1) The Ta g a lo g d u a l p r o n o u n , a n d p r o n o u n o f t he fi rs p e r s o n p lu r a l e x t
clu d i n g t h e p e rs o n a d d re s s e d , v
h a e n o s u c h m e a n i n g i n M a la y a n d J a v a n e s e i n
w hi c h t he y c a n b e u s e d a s s i n g u la r s o r p lu ra ls , a lt h ou g h p e r h a
p s , m o r e f re q u e n t ly ,
as t h e la t t e r ( D i s s e r ta ti o n , p a g e CX I I I )
. .
t
( 2 ) Tha i n t he Phi li p p i n e A r c h i p e la g o a s i t i s a t p r e s e n a n d h a s f o r , t
lo n g t i m e p a s t b e e n c o n s i t u t e d t h e r e e x i s t t w
ho lly a b o r i g i n a l f o r m s o f p e r s o n a l
,
p r o n o u n s , t he Ti ru r a y a d i a le c t s p o k e n b y a t r i b e i n t h e s o u t h w e s t e r n c o a s t
.
”
o f M i nd a n a o I s la n d p r o v e s The p e rs o na l p ro n o u n s t he re i n a r e : beg u e rt u “
I ;
’
. . .
bce n o
“
t ho u ;
,
”
be en z en
“
he " “
s he
;
"
,
z
be to m tom ,
“
we ” “
both of u s ; be g u ey
-
, ,
z q u ey “ w e , " n ot “ t ho u a nd I ;
,
z
be to to , “
we ( d u s k) b eg n
o o m “
y e ;
” be rr o '
,
= r 0 “ t he y ” .
X L VI . THE TA GA L O G L A N GUA GE .
oth er langu a ges are ei ther t he sa m e with or deri ved fro m the ge n
, , ,
e
i ti v e case of the person a l pro n oun s and t he refore if t hi s were a l so t he , , ,
case i n M a lay i t would su ffice to refe r to th e differen ces foun d i n

,
the person al p ronoun s of the two langu a g e s and then to d ra w th e sa m e , , ,
conclu si o n ; but M a lay has not succeede d i n d eveloping any poss e ss ive
pronoun s a d efici e n cy whi ch t he l a n guage palli ates by placing t he per
,
son a l pron ou n af t er the nou n of the obj ect pos s essed o r by u sing w ords ,
belongi n g to other p a rts o f speech as p u n y a z a i np u ny a owni ng ; a , ,

“ ’
f a ct which independe n tly fro m an y o t her shows clearly enou g h its

, ,
i nferiori ty i n respect to Tagalog .
A m ore substanti al accord than i n the personal will be found ,
to exist i n the d e m o s t r a t i v e pronoun s of th e two languages and to a ll . , ,
appearan ce at least the i nfluen ce Of t he M alay see m s to be h ere pre

, ,
do m inant Still there exi st certai n features b o th i n t he for m and i n

.
, .
'
thei r applic a ti on whi ch g o to i m pai r this accord and see m to i n d icate

tha t t he Ta g a log aboriginal ele m en t refused here too to be d isplaced , ,
.
The fo llowi n g t a b le shows these p ronouns i n the two langu a ges :

TA G A L O G . M A LAY .
Th i s he re . This . Th a t ( n e a r y o u
, ) That ( far ,
away ) Th is . That .
D ini . I tO Z
ya r i . I y an . Ya é n .
Spea king properly t he M alay i n i i s n o t found a t presen t i n ,
Ta galog . That i t h owever on c e existed i n the langu ag e i s proven

, , ,
by the obsolete v ariatio n s d i n t and i r i by subsisti ng i n identi cal ,
for m i n the verb nn r i ni “

to co m e here wh i ch i s s till i n use and by
, , ,
existi g also with the sa m e s ig n i fication i n the Bicol lang uage The
, ,
.
Ta galog y a r i now o b solesce n t i s not fou nd i n M alay a m ong the

, ,
d e m onstr a t ives but it i s p robabl y the j a di of the latter an d d a d i

, ,
of the Ja v anese langu a g es m e a ni n g to beco m e,

“
The m eanin g of ,
.
t he M alay i n i i s ther e fore divided i nto two accessory o nes i n Tagalog ,

,
n a m ely d i n i and i to di n i i ndicating gre a ter proxi m ity t han i ts On

‘
, .
the o ther hand i t m a y be see n th a t i t?) i n Tagalog d oes no t poi nt

,
out t he far away obj ect as it does i n M alay b u t i t ha s th e m e a ni ng , ,
of i ni i n t he latter language I t i s found a s already stated i n Bicol .

, , ,
h owever with th e sa m e sig ni fi cati on as i n M alay

, A nother peculiarity .
o f Ta galog as f a r a s t he d e m o n strati ve prono u n s are concerned an d

, ,
one not to be found i n M alay no r even i n E ngli sh i s th at of t he , ,
d i vision i t m a kes o f th e wide range of m eani ng fou n d i n the M alay

i tu and i n the E ngli sh tha t i nto i y an for the referen c e to an obj ect
,
, ,
lying nearer to t he perso n s p o k en to th a n to the spea k er an d y a r m

’
for reference to an obj ect far away fro m both i nterlocutor s as i s ,
also the case i n Sp ani sh wi t h e s e an d a q u e l A nothe r di fference .
worthy of notice i s t hat of the i m possibility of u si ng the M alay ‘
d e m onstratives substan tively a s can be done i n Tagalog they being , , ,
i n this sense replaced by the p ersonal p ronouns i n M alay

, It .
does not see m t ha t t he co m pari son of t h e de m o nstrative pronoun s

requi res a n y furth e r di scussi on f r a suffi cient n u m ber of facts i t ,
o
,
i s believed ha s been b rought to li gh t to s how th eir acco rd and di sa

,
g re e m e n t i n t h e two language s an d to e n able the reader to j udge ,
as to the de g ree of a ffi nity an d as to t he weight they m a y have o n

the poi n t here at i ssue .
The lo n g struggle a language carries o n b efore i t succeed s

i n acqu iring a clean separate ter m fo r the expressio n of the relati ve
p ronoun is a
, e ll w
kno n fac t a s i s al s o kno n t he c i rcu m lo w ,
w
X LVI I I . THE TA GA L O G L A N G U A G E .
TA G A L O G . M A L AY .
A n 0?, “
wh ich ? Ap a ?,
“
wh a t? s i ap a ?
3 "
one r ( discri m inative ); gai n o ? who ? who ? “ “
Si a p a i s i n M a lay fo r m ed as s i no i n Tagalog fro m s i a particle , ,
used p re fi x e d ly wit h n ou n s ; an d a p a “
what ; and thus s i r a p a , , ,
“
who ? an d the Tagalog pronoun fro m s i
’
the article o f personal , ,
“
" ”
n ma es ,
and g é
a-
n ? wh at ? th us s i a
,
ft e “
contracted g s i n o ? “
who ?
, r r -
,
In the sa m e w y
a as g s i n o ? i n T agalog s i ap a i s i n M alay used ,
for persons ; but i t can also be used adj ectively i n the latter as
'
,
”
s i ap a mr a ng i tu ? “
w ha t ( who ) perso n i s this ? sh ows while i t ,
can not be so used i n Tagalog ; the M alay ap a u sed for things , ,
correspondi n g with the Tagal o g a n d I n M alay th erefore a p roper .

, ,
d i scri m inati ve interrogati ve for person s an d things as the Tagalog

” "
a li n ? “
which ? “
whi ch one ? i s wa nti ng and the word s n a ma “
n am e , , ,
"
a n d ma n a
“
w here ? have to b e resorte d to for palliati ng th is d e fi
,
ci s ney I t ap pears t hat the VI a la y i nterrogati ve pronoun s are i nvariable

.
i n t hei r reference to n u m ber an d i ncapable there f ore of assu m ing th e , , ,
reduplicative plu ral for m o f t he Ta galog on es ‘
This togeth er wi th .
,
t he absence of a di scri m inative in terrogative correspo nding to the E ngli sh

” "
“
which ? which on e ? an d with t he dependence i n which they stand,
“
i n M al a y to other parts Of speech for p recise reference place th e m

, ,
belo w the sa m e i n Tagalog and render thei r accord with the latte r a ,
so m ewhat precarious one .
The following i s t he li st of those other pronou n s generally ter m ed ,
reflective indefinite di stributive etc which are found i n the t w o

, , ,
.
,
languages : .
TA G A L O G . MALAY .
“
self ; i ba oth er ; a n om an , D i r i s e n di r i kcn di r i self ;
“ “
Sa r i li , , , la y i n , ,
“
a li n ma n , s i n oman ; ot her ; a p a ba a ng r bar a ng ma n a ,
'
ba ba
la ng na
”
,
“
any ; Ma m as ,
“
each ,
”
r a ng s
“
i ap a , -
’
bar a ng ,
“
every . any ; ti g ap , mZi s i ng mas i ng s a s a tu , -
,
" ”
s a s a br a ng each ,
“
every .
’
The
closest rese m blance i t wi ll be noted i n this kind of , ,
.
“
p ronoun s i s between th e reflective fo r self an d t he i nde fi nite fo r
,
"
any i n the two languages The M alay la y i n i s found i n Bicol wi th .
th e sa m e m ea n i ng The Tagalog i nde fi ni te p ronouns a n o man a li n man ,
an d s i n o man corresponding wit h wh ich there are i n M alay but loose

,
round about expressions are for m ed fro m the i nterroga t ives j ust i n the
-
sa m e w a y as i n E nglish w ha t + e v e rzza n o + m a n etc A lthough the ,
v a lue O f this k ind of p ronoun s fo r co m parative rese a rch is less th an

that o f those of t he ot her classes i t d eserves h owever to be noti ced , , ,
that here also the aborigina l Ta galog ele m ent shows i tsel f as predo m inant .
The co m parison of the pronoun s i s her e closed and deviati on s

eno u gh i t i s believed have been noticed to show th at the acco rd on
, ,
this poi n t of Ta galog a n d M alay i s not such as to warran t thei r

classi fi cation as sister languages .
The poi nt co m ing next of those cove red by H u m boldt s i h ,

’
q ui ry a n d one of t he base s for hi s theo ry of a co m m on parentage

of all these languages is the accord wh i c h he clai m s they all sho w , , ,
i n the expression of the nu m erals .

I N TRO DU CTI O N . XL IX :
N u m e rals are descri b ed
to be the m ost a stract thing of the b
hu m a n m in d a n d on e not to be a fi e c te d by any other surroundings ‘
Thus i t has been suggested that the syste m s of enu m eration i n the
, ,
languages of tw o different peoples i s a m ore solid basi s of co m par ,
i son of thei r languages

I f n u m erals do n ot vary i n expressio n i n the sa m e degree
w ith oth er kin d of words i t i s because of all Word s they a re
‘
, , ,
those whic h m ost obstinately m aintai n thei r i dentity of value .
Of course i t i s a well known fact that not all of the m m aintai n

b
,
thi s uni ty of expression with the sa m e o s tinacy The expr ession of .

,
t he unity for i nstance varies i n relation to the diff erent kin d of obj ects
, ,
with which i t i s considered associated while on the o t her hand

b
, , ,
”
the wide range of d i spersio n which the nu m ers three and seven “ “
h ave attai ned i s well known .
Whi le ad m i tting generally an d for purposes of the co m p ari son

, ,
h ere m ade th e truth of the above s tate m ent still we m a y b e per

'
, ,
m i tt e d to d raw s o m e d i stinction between this tenacity of nu m eral s

considered as words o r language ele m ents and thei r tenacity con ,
s i d e r e d as c i p hers o r a ri th m etical ele m en ts of the people i nto whose

“
b
, ,
The E uropean syste m of n u m e r J

‘
la nguage they have een adopted

b
.
atio n ha s ee n take n fro m t he A rabs but i n Spanish the E uropea n , ,
la n guag e which has b orrowed m ost largely fro m th e A rabic , the

b
nu m bers are design ted y ter m s derived fro m the L ati n l anguage 1 We .
m a y confi dently assu m e that thi s would never have been the case ha d
n ot th e n atio n had a wel l developed ari th m etical syste m i nto which
b
the n um ers were deeply fixed and established before the infusion o f
'
b
A ra ic ter m s With r u de nations o r wi th those that although
z
,
not enti rely u ncivili ed have m ade n o appreciab le advance i n

,
,
m athe m ati cal science the contrary takes place and we have a
, ,
good exa m ple thereof i n Tagalog an d i n the oth er tongues spoken i n

these I slands Though the native syste m s of n u m eration a n d
b
y which the n u m bers were known were we must supp os e
.
'
the n a m es , ,
s trongly fixed i n the people s m ind they easily gave way to those ’
d
,
i n Spani sh an d we find at presen t these n ative sy s te m s supersede

b
.
,
by the Spani sh one to such a large extent that i nnu m era le people
who are wholly unacquainted wit h t he latte r m ake use h oweve r , , ,
of the Spani sh n u m erals i n all th eir co u n t i n g s Thi s i m pa r s t he

i
b
.
relia ility o f the n u m erals as a basis for co mp a ri ng the d i fferen t

b
)
l anguages spoken y uncultu red tribes and the c o m p a ri s on l n o th e r ,

o ;
respects does n ot show the full accord which i s clai m ed to e x us t i n t he

o
syste m of nu meration of the Tagalog o n on e s rd e and that o f the ,
M alay an d the other languages spoken by the M alay people on t he

,
, .
other The nu m be rs i n Tagalog a nd i n M alay wh i ch off er the greatest

.
i m por ta nce for co m parison are rought si de by side i n the follow b

ing ta le :
.
b
EN GL I SH . TA G A L OG . M A LAY .
TE E TA CA L OG L A N GUA GE .
E N G L I S H. TA G A L O G . M A L AY .
Si y a m . Sa m ilan b .
P ouo , polo ( local ) Sa puluh -

.
L ab i ng i s a . Sa blas -
.
Sang d aan Sa ra tus

b b
-
. .
Sang li o . Sa ri u -
.
There exists i t m a y e seen i entity o nly i n the n”u m er b d b

b
, ,
and
” “ ” “ “
and rese m lance i n thos e of four six ten
'
“
fi ve , , ,
“ thous nd ”
a A ll the others m a y be r e garde d as enti rely di f feren t or
b
.
cont a ining so m e a original T a galog ele m en t Th e M alay s a see m s

b
as . ,
p ractic a lly to e the sa m e wi th the the Tagalog i s a b u t the fact

w
,
should n ot be lost sight of ho ever that the i of the fi rs t s y lla b le , , , ,
which we have already n oticed i n i cao and i n other wo rd s i s also ,
I s a has a subs tan tive character w hi le the

'
here a Tagalog ele m ent . , l
M alay s a s a tu which according to Hu m boldt m a y be a co rrupt i o n
b
-
,
of s a ba tu i s used adj ectively as its m eaning

,
“
o ne pe ble see m s ,
to indicate and m a y be referr ed to s a r é i n Bicol Busch m ann H u m

b
. ,
,
b o ldt s
'
continuer has a tte m pted

, ( 3r d ook page 2 6 5 ) to expla i n .
,
the Tagalog d a la u a as a reduplicatio n Of du a o r lu a sayin g that ‘
b
,
”
ra ths e lha f t )
“
the last i t see m s to be e ni g m atic ( ; ut thu s far no
w b
, ,
one can see for hat p urpose s uch a reduplication could h ave een
done and we have goo d reason to regard thi s n u m eral although o ri
, ,
i n a ll derived
“
fro m S an skri t a s one co ntaining i n its n ew for m
y
g
b
, , ,
an aboriginal Tagalog ele m en t The Ta galog ta tlo i s referre d .y

Hu m boldt to the Sanskri t tr i and h as therefore no value for th e , ,
co m parison here m ade wi th M alay The ter m fo r “

eight i n Ta .
,
.
“
galog u a lo i s referred to the Javanese w olu while that f o r n i ne ;
, ,
s i ga m i s clearly an exclusively Tagalog o ne

,
A m ong the t er m s fo r .
high nu m bers th e Tagalog d aa n ,

“
hu n dred ; i s not found i n a ny ,
other language of those spoken by the race a singulari ty which ,
has been acknowledged by H u m boldt ( I ) To i ts m eaning way .

, ,
“
p a ssage ; so m e ethical idea no do ubt was at tached by the peo ple , , ,
and B u s chm a n n s a rgu m ent; therefore referri n g it ( 3rd book page

’
, ,
to the word d a hon leaf ; i s without the least foundation The other
,
“
.
ter m s for high nu m bers la cs a an d y ota ,

hav e , ,
been borrowed fro m the Sanskrit and h ave therefore n o value for , ,
co m parative purposes .
I n t he counti ng of those tri bes that h ave adopted the deci m al

syste m of nu m eration the m an ner i n which they express the n u m ber ,
"
“
eleve n and n i ne i s of i m portance fo r e thnological and philological
“
research The for m la bi ng i s a i n Tagalog i s peculiar and dissi m ilar

b
.
fro m that used i n M alay I n the latter the en ding bla s m a y . e

considered as a suffix correspondi ng to th e E nglish teen “
I n the .
Tagalog la bi ng i s ct la bi i s the a l v e r b “
m ore and the m eanin g co m es
‘
, ,
“
to be o ne m ore “
one i n excess ,
’
( than o r of “
ten u ndersto od ) , .
I n the M alay s a mbi la n “

nine ; s a the fi rst syllable i s the ter m used
‘
, , ,
for the uni ty and bi la n i s according to Cra wf u r d t he word a mbe l

, , ,
”
“
to t ake ; the m eaning therefo re being on e taken “
, ( fro m ten “
, , ,
’
u nderstood T
) “ h us the. M alay “
n i ne is form ed by subtraction fro m ’
,
" ”
t he Ta g alog eleven on the contrary by addition to ,
“
ten , ,
.
Hu m boldt ( 3rd book pages 2 77 2 7 8)has atte m pted to explai n

.
,
—
i n the sa m e way as the M alay s a m bi la n the for m ation of the Taga
( 1) D a s Ta g da a n e hs i n t.
,
e in g an z a nd e r e s Wor t zi u s n. ( 3rd bo o k p a ge
.
,
I NT RO DUCTI O N . LI .
lo g s bu t ther e i s not the slightest foun atio n for s uch a n

i ga m , d
identity o f for m ati on of the mu m b e r i n the two la n gu ages and s i g a m , ,
thus f a r still re m ain s a genui ne Ta g a log word

, .
A s a p roof of th e ease with whic h i n the counti n g of rude ,
tribes n e w syste m s are adopted it m a y be m en t ioned tha t i n

, , ,
F a the r F rancisco de Sa n Jose s ti m e ( about th e m iddle part of the

’
17 th century ) the for m s m a y ca tlr mg i s a for “ ’
2 1; m a y ca li m ci ng
w
,
‘
“
i s a for 4 1; etc ere still i n use The sa m e was the case still later
. .
,
i n F r G aspar d e Sa n A gusti n s ti m e ( 1703) while so m e other

.
,
m ethods were also used showing a lack of fi x e d n e s s w hich m ade

,
hi m exclai m : “
But Tagals are in th e m a nner of cou nting fickle
‘
, ,
a n d poor arith m etici ans ( ) These for m s cannot well be i den tified
1 .
w i th the special M alay on e s a li ha r a n d s a n bi la ng li kn r an d “ ’

21
b
-
,
“
2 9; fo r the latter is i n M alay applied only to the nu m ers between
2 0 an d 30; no r with t he other tang a h ti g a p u loh “
2 5; fo r the con -
, ,
s tructi on an d m eaning are different i n th e two la n guages t hat of the ,
Tagalog bei ng there i s on e for th ree for five score etc

“
and that , .
,
of M alay “
half of three score
,
The for m ca g s a r é for i s still .
,
used i n th e Bico l
b
.
A l though the a ove noted di screpancies m a y appear sufficient

to Show that the accord which exists i n the Tagalog an d M alay
n u m eral s i s not of such a kin d as to support t he theory of thei r
‘ '
co m m o n parentage it still re m ain s to be noted that to a ll a p , ,
p e a ra n ce th e adoption of that part of this syste m of n u m eratio n

,
wh ich we m a y regard a s having been taken fro m the M alay super ,
In N oce d a s Di ctionary on treati n g o f the

’
s e de d a native o ne
w
.
,
o rd I s a i n the following passage is found : Thei r ancien t m anner of

“
w
,
“ “
counti ng as thus : I s a i n one ; D u n a i n “
two ; M a mp a t th ree ; , ,
” “
A gy o “
fou r ; Tond ong
,
“
five ; Ga la “
six ; M a n ap i t seven ; Sa g a, , , ,
"
m
“ ’
“
eight ; B u la i r n ine ; Tar o
“
ten ( )
2 A lso i s found i n the sa e
d
.
, ,
ictionary ( page 2 5 ) th e express ion s a ng ba ha la for

w J
,
hi ch i s perh aps the sa m e as the avanese s a ba r a -

.
The differen ce s fou nd i n t he fo r m of expression o f the ca r

d i n a ls i n th e two la n guages are of course also foun d i n t he other , ,
n u m era ls In the for m ing of the ordinals i t i s to be noted that here

. ,
also t he p refi x i = y found i n i cao i s a etc i s p r e fi x e d i n Ta galog

‘
, , , , ,
“
to th e M alay ha and that therefore the M alay ka li ma ,
”
fifth ; for , , ,
i nstance des p ite i ts si m ilarity of for m i s very d i fferent fro m t he

, ,
”
Tagalog y ca li mtt The ter m for
“
fi rst ‘
i n M alay p ar ta ma i s taken
. ,
.
,
fro m Sa nskrit ; while th e Tagalog u n it i s a n ati ve word .
I t does no t appear then fro m a co m pari son of th e n u m erals

s
, ,
i n Tagalog an d i n M alay that there exi s t s a n y so li d ground f or

.
b elieving the m to be one an d the sa m e langu a ge or langu a ges ha v m g

,
sp rung directly fro m the sa m e trunk .
The n ext point covered by Hu m boldt s i n qu i ry o n w hi ch he

’
b , ,
ases hi s theory of an i m m ediate d erivation of al l th ese lang u ages fro m

one a n d the sa m e parent stock i s the alleged accord i n the word ,
b ui lding of the m all In Speaki ng of the gra m m at i cal for m s we have

.
a lready m entioned ( see p a ge X L ) t he poss i b i l i ty of co m i ng across

apparently i dentical for m s i n two d i fferent langu a ges an d t he ri sk
( 1) Pe ro lo s Ta ga lo s e n e l co n a r , t s on va r i o s y ma lo s a ri t m é ti c o s . ( G ra m
m ar, ch a p t er V I , p a r a g
t m t t b i I s ain uno D a i n, do s M a mp a t t r e e
2
( ) A n i u a e n e c o n a a ri a s
a
.
g
. .
, ,
.
cua t ro s eis M a n ap i t t Sag a , o cho B u la i r ,

z
A gyo . Ton dong . ci n co Ga la .
.
,
. . Si e e . .
une v e . Taro di e ,( D i c t i ona r y.

p a ge ,
LI I . THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
w hi ch t he z
searche r is liable to i ncur of e rro n eously class ifyin g the m "
as s i sters to each othe r

b
.
The first i te m m enti oned by Hu mboldt ( 3r d

i
ook page 2 80)

d
.
,
“
of ac cor i n the word building o f t he t w o lang u ages i s t hat o f ~

, ,
the f or m a tion of abstract nouns fro m verbal o r adj ectival roots .
I t i s a f a ct that both M alay and Tagalog m ake u s e of the p refix ,
M a l ka; Ta g ca and the suffix M a l a n =Ta g a h ha n for the pur p o se

. .
, , . .
-
, .
Thi s a ccord m a y be seen fo r i nstance in the M alay ka ma ti a n an d the , ,

-
Tagalog ca ma ta y a n “
death ; fro m respectively mati a n d m a tay “
to ’ ‘
- -
, , , ,
but we do not find m entioned by Hu m bold t the fact that t h is

m an n er of for m ing abstracts i s n o t exclusive i n Tagalog an d that , ,
coupled thereto the language has a ls o t he for m with the ve rbal prefix
,
.
p ga c a ; t hus p ga ca m a tay = c a,m a ta y a n

“
death I n the c o m parison of the , .
two langu a ges and in connectio n with the atte m pt here m ade at s e p i r «
ati ng fro m all foreign ele m en t s i n Tagalog that o ther ele m ent which i s ,
regarded as aboriginal reference has often bee n m ade to t he language,

-
ha v ing so m eti m es adopted the M alay ter m an d rej ected the M alay .
for m ation and so m eti m es o n the contrary of adopti ng the M alay word
b uilding method and rej ecting the native ter m etc Here i t see m s while
, , ,
"
, .
, ,
the lang u age adopted the M alay m ethod i t ho w eve r p reserved at , , ,
the s a m e t i m e its own f N o r can the M alay suffix a n when u sed;

. .
wi thout the prefix ka be i den tified wi th the s a m e i n Tagalog

, ,
.
I n .
,
»
M alay i t for m s nouns ex p ressive o f the actio n i n Tag alog n o uns ,
expressive of the place o r i nstru ment fo r the acti on o f the ver b ,
This m a y be seen i n the M alay mi nn ma n “

wh at i s drunk " “
the , ,
"
kin d of d ri nk ; and the Tagalog i n u man the d ri nki ng ves s el
“
,
.
I t i s to be regre tted that Hu m bold t did no t m en tio n othe r

b
n oun ui ldi ng processes of Ta galog which are not fou nd i n M alay an d
-
cannot be fully descri bed i n a sketch of thi s ki nd The reader is .
referred to the proper chapters i n t he G ra mm a r for further a c q u a i n

w
,
ta nce ith this subj ect as only th e brief notice of so m e which i s f o u nd

b b
,
i n the following ta le can e given here , .
Significalion .
Compound .
Slgnlflcation
Co m panion .
Yesterday .
Bit .
Thread .
G odfather .
F ather and child

Thief .
Writer .
Jester .
Tying rope .
The
adj ective building Ta galog prefix ma i s not found used
'
for this purpose i n any other language of the M alay people the ,
M a la ga s i ex cepte d I n M alay ad j ectives except t hose for m ed with

.
, ,
the verbal p refix he r and a noun as be r ba di “

wise ; fro m bu di , ,
-
,
“
.
wi s do m g are d istinguishable fro m the nouns only by their position

’
Thus p u ti h ka y i n m eans : the w hitenes s of cloth ; " and ka y i n u ti h

“
“
,
p ,
wh i te cloth ; while i n Tagalog the exp ressions are res pectively a ny , ,
ca p u ti a n n a n g ca g e and a ny ca y ong map u ti a fact which shows the

b w d
, ,
Ta galog construction as eing that of a language hich ha s atta i ne

a g rea te r d
e v elo p me n t t h an t h at of M a l a
y .
IN TRO DU CTI O N . LII I .
in M alay n o r i n any other language of those spoken

N eithe r
b y the race nay perhaps not even i n any other spoken i n t he
, , ,
world at la rge i s there anyth in g i dentica l with t he Tagalog verb a

, ,
n ear approach to whi ch i s found only i n that o f the language s of

M ad a gasca r The review whi ch i s intended to give to thi s pa rt o f
b
.
speech i n th e presen t outlook will e found further on i n the chapter ‘
devoted to word declen sion and i n the co m pari son of sa m e w i th t ha t

-
bb
,
of the Javanese lan guage the ver uildi ng processes i n the two lan
b
-
,
g u a ges eing h ere only con sidered

b
.
I t will be foun d that i n both M alay an d Tagalog the ver

i n the in finiti ve o r rather i n the secon d person of the i m perati ve
'
b b
, ,
may e a rad ical or a co m pound word and that radical ver s a re -

,
fewer i n co m pari son with those for m ed fro m other parts of speec h
b y t he a pplication of pa rticles
b
. .
A s f a r as co m pari so n can e m ade here so m e hint of the ,
verb bu i lding p ro c e s s e s s i n the two languages is given i n the

w
-
follo in g ta ble :
TA G A L OG ; M A L AY
“ “ ”
R oot S oa y ,
dispute . R oot B a n ta h , dispute
Part . Verb . K
ind . Significalion . Part Verb . K
ind . Slgnilltallon
be e n To
h m
M an Ma -
soay . I ntran s g a ged i n B cr
di spute
.
.
N eut .
p 11 e ,
i
ban
M
n
act To dispute M e m i
-
S um
- -
oay . 0f . Of a c t To . dispute .
M ag -
soay Tran s n
both n
M em i -
M e m an -
b Trans
contra To t
parties tah i dict

.
. .
-
. .
.
M a g pa To c a u s e M e m M e m ban -
To d ispute
Ca n s Caus
soay .
.
dispute ka n .
’
tah kan -
. over .
To d i spute M e m M e m ban -
To dispu te
M an M an -
oay F req freq u e n t an d re .
t a h ka n F req
freque ntly
.
.
ly . dup . tah .
M e m
th e TO d i s p u te i n
M ag -
ao
R eflect with each s e c o n d Ba n ta h
b
.
a y -a h .
other m e m .
m e m an
To be co n he r and ta b
To di s ut
.
in So a y an Pass e
Eh
- -
{fig a
t ra d i c te d t
. . .
R efl . with ac
Pa g -
soa y r
other
i ntens .
dic l Be ban
.
m a ,
r
To contra or be r t a h ban ,
-
I tns
Y -
S oay
.
d i c t b e red of tah a n -
.
-
.
.
pass .
cause o f the rad . .
+ ah .
Pa g so a y L oc To contra D i -
ban Pass
-
.
.
an pass . dict at . tah .
i s requi red i n order to Sho the ver buildi ng:process

Th i s is : w ha t w b - s
es i n th e t w o languages ; but the verb i n Tagalog m a y adjo i n other

particles an d assu m e other s i g n i fi ca ti o n s and has bes i des , a m uch m ore , ,
co m plex conj ugative m echanis m which there i s n o r oo m s k etch of

t hi s kin d to de scri be so the reader i s i n th i s connect i on refe rred
w bj w
,
. .
,
,
t o the e te n s e v
x iv i e of the s u ect hich i s g i v e n i n t h e G r a m m a r: -
LI V THE TA GA L O G LA N GUA GE
'
. .
To the d w
n s fo r hich the co m parison i s here m a e i t may s uf fi c e
e d
b
,
to say that the accord i n th e verb uilding pro cesses of Tagalo g -
b
and M alay lies only i n oth la n guages generally requiri n g the a sso
c i a ti o n o f certai n parti cles to develope the verbal power fro m the root .
The p a r ti c le s e m p loy e d fo r the p urpose an d the sense wh ich they

i m par t to the ac t i on of the verb are gen erally different i n the two languages .
The M alay verbal particle m cm wi th its various fo r m s m e m e ng m e n

, , .
,
.
an d many which see m s t o b e so m ewhat s i m ilar I i i structu re to t he Ta
,
galog m a g i s used i n M alay to for m verb s of action whi le the for m

, ,
atio n of thi s kind of verbs i s generally i i i t ru s te d i n Tagalog to t h e

p article u m T he particle of i ntransitive verbs i s i n M alay h er an d i n
b
. ,
Tagalog m a ; also all other particles a n d senses i m parted as the ta le ,
shows differ i n the t w o languages

,
The dissi m ilarity appears to be
.
greater i n the par ticles used in each language for the passive voice .
The M alay passive par ti cle i s di so m eti m es bar an d te r an d i s

, ,
alway s a prefix ; the Tagalog parti cle i s i n either prefixed i n fi x e d o r , ,
s u f fi xe d ,
alone o r associat ed wi th other particles Th e su f fix i it will .
,
be seen i s i n M alay used to for m tran si tive verb s ; while i g i s i n

,
—
Tagalog a prefix for m i ng a s pecial kind of passi ve and i m parti ng

senses very di ff erent fro m th e o ne i t i m parts i n M a lay I t will b e .
an error to i de ntify the M alay suffix ka n wi th the Tagalog a n Ka n .
S used i n M alay to fo r m causative verbs ; a n i n Tagalog to for m a , ,
Special kind of passive Thi s aside fro m t he fac t that there i s so m e reaso n
.
to believe that loa n i s the M alay prepositio n a ka n s u f fi x e d to the verb

w
,
hile a n i n Tagalog cannot be traced to any such o rigin

b
.
I n M alay t he use o f the various i nsepara le particles i s m ostly

confined to the written language They a re but rarely used i n speech
.
,
an d there is greater reaso n for believing that the Si m ple radical was
once foun d sufficient for al l ideas of a rude people than for believing
w
,
i th Hu m boldt that these particles have been origi nally m or e n u

m eron e and beca m e later either conglo m erated with the root or replaced
, ,
by oth er separate for m s of expression .
The co m parison of the word building m etho ds i n M alay an d -
Tagalog m ight be carried further to the o ther pa rts o f s peech bu t ,
n o other points are covered by the review which Hu m bold t giv es to

th e subj ect i n the third book pages 2 79 2 82 , Thus far the accord .
,
which i s clai m ed to exist o n th is poin t between M alay and Tagalog

does not see m to be such as to warrant their classificatio n a s lan
guages derived i m m ediately fro m one and the sa m e p arent stock
d
.
L ess than the space of on e page i s devote by Hu m boldt t o '
sho w the accord o f these languages i n word declension the fourth

b b
-
,
an d last a si s for hi s theory He co mm ences by sayi ng : ( 3rd ook

w
. .
,
“
page A lso the co m parison of the scanty ord declen sion
’
found i n these languages shows by re m arkable accord their cl ose

parentage an d especially that of M alay wi th all the other re m ai ni ng
,
languages ( ) This i s the point i n which m ost p robably Tagalog

1 .
, ,
students can hardly co ncur w ith th e great philolog ist Ou r own o pin
'
i on i s to t he effect that had not Tagalog s hown any other devi atio n s
,
fro m M alay than that which i s found to exist i n the word deelen
'
b
-
me n of the two languages still i t would be e ntitled to e classified

,
as a d istinct language and o ne of a disti nct p arentage fro m M alay .
“
Wo rd declension o r w ord i nfl e x i o n ( Wortbeugung ) as un de r
-
“ ’ ’
A u ch d i e V e r g le i chu n g d e r w e n i g e n W o r tb e u g u n g , w e lche d ie s e Sp r a che n

zz ( l)
be s i t e n e i g d u rc h a u f f alle nd e U e b e re i n s t i mmu nge n i hr e na he V e r wa n d s chaft , u nd
, t
o
m me ntlxch di e de r M al. mi t de n fi b ri ge n .
LVI . THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
d
pr e ce ing state m ent depends largely o n what ideas one en ter ta in s ~
'
.
about i n fl e x i o n an d on what construction o ne places o n the wri te r s

-
,
.
words i n i tself
“
Hu m boldt surely never pretended that wh a tever
.
, ,
i s found of i nfl e x i o n i n Tagalog should have atta i ned the degree of :
d
.
evelop m ent whi ch i t attained i n L ati n for in stance nor could he pre e n d , ,
:
ei ther that the Spani sh friars of the sixteenth century sh ould have ,
t he sa m e philological knowledge a n d th e sa m e i de as about i n fl e x i o n ~
as he ha d i n the nineteenth I t i s a fact that they were not wholly

’
. .
successful i n the adaptation of the Spanish alph abet to Tagalog no r ,
i n the m anner in whi ch th ey atte m pted to express by the accen t

linguistic peculiarities whi ch would have been better expressed by o the r i
Orthographical sign s The facts are : that th e second person pro nou n i n
b
.
t he singular h as i n Tagalog t w o for m s i cdo an d c a the for m er eing , ,
used alo ne o r before and the latter being used after the verb ; that , , .
:
i n the possessive case thi s an d a ll other p ronoun s have t w o for m s ,

.
on e p repositive an d the other postpositive N o w i f i t i s considered .

,
t ha t t he for m s of t he possessive case a re those by wh ich the agent o f

'
the actio n expressed by the verb i n t he passive voi ce i s i ndicate d ; .
that ca the postpositive for m o f the second person p ro noun S ingu lar
,
i n the no m i native and the postpositive for m s o f the possessi ve case

,
of the sa m e an d t he other p ronoun s are generally m on osyllabic and , ,

‘
there f ore shor ter than the prepositive ones ; one cann ot refrai n fro m
,
:
a sking : F o r what purpose these double m onosyllabi c postpositive for m s

b
, ,
ut for that of being s u f fi x e d to the verb ? A n d what else was requi red
bu t that the fi rst Span ish friars Should have wri tten fo r i ns tan ce , ,
’
“ ”
thou ca m est here ; ( p a)p a ta g i n co
'
n ap a r i to ca i nstead of n ap a m to ca
, , ,
“ ”
i nstead of ( p a)p a ta y i n co I will kill i t ; i bi g a y mo i nstead of i bi g ay
, ,
" "
mo ,
give i t etc to have here also what i s generally called i n fl e x i o n
, , ,
i n other languages ? In fact thi s has been done by the m to So m e ‘
w b
,
ex tent i n the riti ng of t he I anag and the P angasi nan an d was

w b
,
also done i n M alay i th kn mu am y those who later transliterate d

‘
, , ,
the language i nto the R o m an character That the p resence of these .
shorter for m s could have no other purpose but that of a f fi x a t i o n the ,
language shows clearly i n the fact th a t i t leaves the postposi tive .
constructio n without any liga m ent or tying parti cle of those i t requires :
i n the case of any other two words m utually related and followin g each
o ther Thus i n the case of a pre p ositive cons truction O f the exa m ples gi ven
.
,
above i t could not b e said : i cao n a p a ri tc but i cao a g n ap a r i tr); a g a i n

, ,
( p )p i but i g (p p ) i i y g ay but i g rmg y b g ay

i
’
t t O b I n
‘
n a n n i
a a a y q u a , a a y ; g , .
the active voice i t is found also that the p ostpositive constructio n i s

the one m ore generally used That Hu m oldt hi m self has so m e w hat . b
taken th e sa m e vi ew with regard to the s u f fi x i ng nature of these
postpo sitive for m s of the possessive case of the person al p ronouns the
'
f o llo w m g passage see m s to i ndicate ( 2 nd book p age “

The Tagalo g .
,
ann e xes to the passive for m i n cases when the agent i s expressed by ,
a pronoun the sa m e always i n the genitive a n d wh ere thi s genitive

, ,
beco m es a contracted su ffix i n thi s for m On e is thereby co m pelle d to , .
consider the passive for m as a substa ntive connected with the suffix o f
the possessive pronoun etc ( 1) He acknowledges ( 3rd book page 373) . .
,
that the ma n conj ugation i s founded chiefly on phonetic changes .
( 1) D i e Ta g a li s c h e f ti g t d e r Pa s s i v f o r m , d i e ha n d e ln d e Pe r s o n d u r c h
‘
w e nn
e i n Pr o n o m e n a u s g e d r ii c k t w i r d , d a s s e lb e i mm e r i m G e n i t i v , a nd w e d i e s e r G e n i ti v
z z
u m a b g e k fi r te n S u f fi x w i r d , i n d i e s e r G e s ta lt a n M a n w i r d a l s o d a d u rc h z
ge w u n
z
.
ge n, d i e Pa s s i v f o r m a ls e i n mi t Su f fi x d e s B e s i t p r o no m e ns ve rb u nd e n e s S u b s t .
a n z u s e he n , e t c .
( 2 ) D i e e i g e n th ti m li c hk e i t d e r _3 Co nju g ( ma n) b e ru h t g rOs s te n th e i ls a ii t
,
. .
d e r mi t i hr ve rb u nd e ne n Bu c s ta b e nv e rande r u ng , u nd i s t i ns o f e r n p ho ne ti s h
h .
I N TRO DU CTI O N . L VII .
b
Hu m oldt refuses i n ano ther part of his work ( 3rd b ook , page
346) to
'
regard these postpositi ve for m s as s uffixes ; because he s a y s , ,
I n the case o f a ge nuine s uffix the accen t c ha n g e s l f r o m a radical ,
paroxytone to an oxyto ne co m pound thus giving to understand that ,
no such chan g e ta k es place i n Tagalog I n thi s he i s so m ewhat .
m istaken fo r there exists the ox y toni ng of the co m pound with m any

,
i m peratives .
P roceeding with t he review of th e Ta galog verb h e i m m e di ,
ately says : ( 3rd book page 34 9 parag “

N ei ther i s the nu m ber
w
, , .
connected with t h e perso n i ndi cated i n any other ay ( I ) Still this '
.
i s true only with certai n condition s We h ave seen i n the preceding

.
.
paragraph that by a f fi x a t i o n of the postpositive for m s of the pers onal

pronoun s i t would be possible to give a certai n ki nd of person and
n u m ber i n fl e x i o n to the Tagalog verb i n the passive voice Thi s .
,
however ; could n ot well be done i n the active voice for h ere t he ,
no m i native i s the case required and as a double no m inative for m i s found ,
to exist only i n the second person pronou n singular the use of the personal ,
p ron oun with all the others m a y therefore appear indi spensable for , ,
the expression of nu m ber The language however which frequently .

, ,
leaves the subj ect understood has also i n thi s point taken a fi rst step
‘
to the ac q uisitio n to a defini te verbal nu m ber for m A m ong the .
n u m e ro u s v e r ba l partic les there i s one m a g s i that i t wi ll b e seen has n o

'
, , , ,
o the r p rov ince th an tha t of expressing m ultitude of subj ects an d i s not

u sed i n the passive an d that th e particle ma g denotes too so m eti m e s
, , , ,
the plural a nd so m eti m es the dual n u m ber M ost frequently ho w ever

t he plurali z
.
, , , ,
n ga ing particle ma ng a i n disg u ise i s i ntroduced to den ote

' ’
, ,
plurality s o that for instance n a g a ar a l wi ll denote that so m ebody or

, , ,
so m e people i s o r are studying ; but n a ng a g a ara l will denote that i t i s

‘
neither I no r thou no r he but t hat i t i s we or ye or they that are

, , , , ,
studying wi thout the use of a plural noun or pro nou n being requi red
,
.
The above particles refer to t he subj ect b ut t he language has besides

b
, , ,
a ver al particle ma g ca to denote th e m ultitude o r p lurality i n t he

, ,
obj ect Th us the expressio n ma y i i ta ng a ng a li la co will si m ply

’
.
, ,
i ndicate that m y servant owes so m e m oney ; but n a g ca ca i t ta ng a ng

“
’
a li la co wil l i n d icate that he has m any m o ney debts that h e i s

“
,
”
deeply i n debt Speaki ng o f th e Ta g a lo g v e r b Hu m boldt ad m its i n
b
-
. ,
another place ( 3rd ook page 395 ) that n u m ber i s so m eti m es denoted
b
.
y the conj ugatio n or by the verba l particle ( 2 ) .
Whatever m a y b e said i n thi s respect of Tagalog applies with

'
equal f o rc e to the other languages of the Philippines whose unity

and co m m on p arentage h ave been called i n questio n only by Craw
f u rd We fi n d that th e Bi sayan o r rather the P a n a y a no has
.
, ,
go ne further i n th e differentiatio n of n u m ber with th e ver b fo r i n ,
the passive we fi n d fo r i nstance that g u i m baha t co m eans : i t was

, , , ,
”
m ade by m e ; an d g u i mp a mi i ha l n a mon
’ “
it was m ade by us As
’
,
.
an atte m pt to tense differen ti atio n i n the sa m e to n gue by rej ecting the ,
reduplicative process the for m s n a g a bi t ha t =n a g bu bit ha t I “

ma
z
, ,
g a b i t ha
’
tz m a g a b u bi i ha tz m a g ba b i hat
“
I shall w ork m a y be m ent i oned
’
,
’
.
B ut where th e wide stride m ade by Tagalog i n the way of

acqui ring a definite i n fi e x i o n a l conj ugation i s Shown i s i n the peculiar ,
for m s the verb assu m es for the expressio n of voice and tense .
( )
1 E b e n s o w e n i n g w i r d d e r m i t d e r Pe r s o n e rb u n d e n e N u m e r u s v a u f a nde re
W e i s e a n ge d e u te t .
2
( ) E r w i r d i m fl e c t i r t e n V e r
:
b u m d u r ch d a s P ro n o m e n a n ge d e u e t t . B i s b e i le n
ab e w i d s r a nch d u r e h di e co nju ga t i o ns f o r m a n g e ge b e n
r r ‘
-
.
L VIII . TU E TA GA LOG L AN GU A GE .
re i nfle xi o n
Thi s i nfl e xi o n al con ug a tion or rather ten ency to j d a cq u i
'
d b
, ,
i s un e rstood to e the atte m pt a language m akes at providing i ts elf

w it h new or m ore p recise gra m m atical for m s by soldering ready m ade -
ste m s with m eaningless particles o r wi th sounds in to on e co m pound , , ,
and then at h aving the latter altered by enlarging o r otherwise

,
changing its i nternal structure i n order to add so m e accessory o r at ,
m bd ifi e d signification to the radical i dea Whether th e alteratio n t ake s .
place at the beginning at the m i ddle or at th e end or whether at two or , , ,
at all these points at the sa m e t i m e f t ha t i s to say whether p refixes , ,
i n fi xe s o r suffixes one o r two at the sa m e ti m e are used fo r th e

, , ,
purpo se the atte m pt i s not i m pai red ; nor even when there i s foun d i n
,
the language a separately coined word fo r the expressi o n of the sa m e

accessory or m odified idea which the i nternal m odifi catio n has a dded
to the co m pound .
Tagalog i n thi s respect far surpasses any other language of

, ,
tho se spoken by the race an d i n so m e of i ts co m plex gra m m a tical ,
for m s perhaps even t he San skrit i tself i t being a m at ter Of doubt wheth e r
, ,
the language Should n o t be class i fied as belonging to the San skri t fa m ily .
To show how the la n guage proceeds i n pressi ng a nu m ber of

a ccessory ideas i nto one gra m m atical for m t he de m onstrati ve i ts , ,
has here been selected for th e pu rpos e I t?) at o nce suggests a p ri m i

dw
.
tive form to no longer foun d i n the la n guage co m bi ne i th the

actual prefix yzi
, , ,
We have therefore :
R A D I CA L .
Di v e r s i fi c a t i o n of t he radica l s i g ni fi c a t i o n .
m
N o inal and adj ectival . b
Ver al and adver ial
“ ”
b .
“
I tO, this . D i tc he re —
, .
P r i ma ry ve rb a l c o m p o u nd .
Pa —
r
—
i to .
“
to co m e h ere .
Pa —
r —
i to hi n —
Y —
p a
—
r
—
i t6 Pa —
i to ha n
r
- —
b e ordered
~
. . .
To to place “
To co m e here o n ac
“
To co m e here to pay
~
Oneself here . count of . a visi t to .
Se c o n d a r y v e rb a l d e ri v a ti v e .
M ag p a — —
i to
r
—
.
“
To order to co m e he re .
P ay p a — —
r
—
i to hi n
—
.
( kIp p
—
ca ag —
a —
r P a g na — —
r -
i to ha n
—
.
“
To be ordered to co m e “
To order to co m e here “
To order to co m e here
” ”
here . for the sake of . to pay a vi sit to .
P o t e n ti a li zt ia on of t he s e c o nd a ry v e rb a l d e ri v ati v e .
M a ca p ag p a r i tt)
be
— — — —
.
“
To able to order to co m e here .
M a ca — d u m_ i to =ma ca r M a ca — p a— r
b bl
— —
”
“
To b e a l e to p lac e on e sel f here “
To b e to o me h e r e
’
. a e c .
I N TRO DUCTI ON .
LI X .
M a ca _p a g p a =d u m— i tc M i td
'
a #— r -
b e a b le to p ag
- —
a ca p
—
b
~ -
.
“
To order to place one “
To be a le to order to co m e here .
s elf here .
N i tof hi n
b een
a p a r
b e able to b e
— — —
.
“
To have able to place onesel f “
To ordered to plac e
here .
oneself here .
0
N a —
p ag p a— d u m i td Na pa i to ha n
b d
— —
r
— —
be
.
— — —
.
t
“
To have been a le to o r er to place “
To able to co m e here to pay
on eself here . a v isit to .
N a y p ag d i té N a p i to hi n
b een be
a g— pa
—
r
— — — —
d
. — — —
.
“
To have able to placed “
To be able to be or ered to co me
here .
here .
N a y p ag p a d i to N aL y ca p p i td
b be
—
ag
—
a — r—
— — — — — -
.
.
“
To have been a le to order to “
To be able to order to co m e here
” ”
placed here . for the sake of .
N a p a g p a r i to ha n
b e a b le
— — — — —
.
To
to pay a visi t to o rder to co m e here to .
Th ese are o nly the for m s corresponding with the E nglish i n

fi n i ti v e and they m ust still undergo o ther changes for the express i on
w
,
of tense Thus . e have : ,
Y qu i n
— — —
a —
p a —
p a —
r— i td .
“
To co m e here for the sake of .
( present
Y ca p a p a r i to
— — — — —
.
The sa m e as above ( future ) . .
N a p ag p a p a— r i to ha n
b e a b le
— — — — —
.
“
To to co m e here to pay a vi sit to .
( prese n t )
N one
of these parti cles i s fou n d to exist eithe r as a su '
b
s ta n ti v e w d
or or as a directive i n the language no r can they b e
,
b b
,
s epara ted fro m the ver as is the case wit h the separa le particles
i n G er m an They have the sa m e properties the
. e ro ha s i n our z
8 ste m of n u m eration ; are without si gnificance if alone an d highly ,
Si gnifican t i f co m b ined with the radical

w
.
Those passi ve for m s of the Tagalog verb hich are f o rm s

w ith the parti cles i n = hi n and a n z ha n are i n the infini tive i m p era , ,
tive an d future i n fl e cti v e i n n early the sa m e sense thi s ca n b e

,
said o f L ati n Thus L a t a m or zTa g sinta hi n sinta ha n L a t a m

.
, .
—
.
—
,
-
, .
a bor = Ta g s i s i n ta hi n s i s i n ta ha n
. etc The other tense for m s con s i st
-
,
-
, .
i n phonetic change a nd i n reduplication that i s to say i n certain

d
,
i nternal mo i fic a tion s i n the structu re of the ra dical or the co m pound

,
a n d thu s the process i s one , whi ch app roaches nearest t o the i n fl e c t i v e

as i t is u nders tood of the Sanskri t G reek and L a ti n l anguages It , , .
i s m ainly th i s t ha t renders Tagalog qui t e a differen t la n gu a ge fro m

w
all o thers i th wh ich i t was i n tended to class i fy i t as ein g a llied or b
s is te r there to N o ne of t he o thers sp oke n y t he race uses thi s proce s s b
d
.
,
a n d ou tsi e the race i t i s found tha t th ose hav ing i n t hei r conj u gati v e .
m echan is m reduplica tion use it for the pas t t ens e Only Ta galog uses
w
.
,
reduplication for the p resent and the fu ture tenses an d i n thi s i t sho s ,
i tself m o re logica l th a n th e o thers ; for i f wi th reduplica tion con ti nuance

d
or further evelop m en t of the ac tion is i ndica ted these ideas ag ree
w
,
m ore wi t h the presen t and i th the fu ture than wi th the pas t , ,
t ense Hu m bol d t acknowledges thi s s ingulari ty of Tagalog i n various

w
.
la ces of hi s ork Speaki ng of verb tense for m s he says :

ho ok page
-
.
,
“
The Tagalog i s i n th is th e m os t r e gular ; i t i s
'
d b
, ,
t he onl y one w h i c h uses the re u plic a t i o n of s ylla les for t he e x

THE TA GA LO G LA NGUA é ii .
p ressio n o f tense ( 1) In ano t her place

.
( 2 n d b oo k p age 7 9) h e , ,
says : “
In Tagalo g the expressi on o f t ense by a cha nge of le t ters
an d b
y redu plicatio n for m s i n this poi n t an excep t i on ( 2 ) I t .
see m s t herefore tha t so m e inconsisten cy exis ts b e tween hi s views of

, ,
the m a t ter as contai n ed in the p receding re m arks and wha t i s found

fu rther on when speaki ng of the Tagalog lan guage he says : ( 3rd
, , ,
.
book page 316)

,
“
I n the gra m m a ti cal for m an d a t th e fi rst glance ,
i t see m s as if the dissi m ilari ty ( of Tagalog) fro m t he o the r languages

were exceedingly grea t I n th e essen ti als of i t however o ne soo n
.
, ,
discovers that t he accord h ere i s o ne even m ore re m arkable The .
co m m o n charac teris ti c of th e word no t al teri ng fo r declensi on o r

conj uga tion an d t ha t of t he expressio n by p ar ti cles of t he adj oi ned
,
m odificat ions are h ere th e sa m e an d such i s a lso the case '
w
,
‘
I
i th the soldering o f t hese p ar ticles a t the begi n ni n g of the ,
word ( )
3 . A nd a gain ( pages 2 88
“
I t ( T agalog ) possesses long
an d ingeniously elaborate for m s and has a gra m m ar co m plex and ,
difficult of reviewi ng B u t upon closer exa m ination . i s found here , ,
also the sa m e syste m of the Polynesian language ; looseness of i u fl e x i o n

,
an d e x p re s s i ou of the gra m m a ti cal rela ti on by separa te par ticles ( )

4 .
N o w these views of the great philologist are so m ewhat d ifficult to

,
u nderstand That the re are case for m s i n the two articles a n d i n the
.
,
.
personal de m onstrati v e an d i nterrogative p ro nouns ; tha t all of th e m

, ,
except the article of co mm on nouns and the de m onstrative p ronouns ,
hav e also plural for m s ; that th e passive voice i n m any cases i s , ,
expressed by a particle adhering to th e end and n o t to the begi n

n ing of the root has been s hown i t i s believed i n thi s and for m er
b
, , ,
chapters of thi s outlook Hu m oldt i t see m s could n ot well under .

, ,
stand the nature of these parti cles n o r accurately appreciate ,
thei r i m portance and office i n the language F o r hi m th is particle

w
.
ord bui lding syste m lies at the basi s of all these languages an d i s
the for m which they all have o rigi nally assu m ed the particles hav ing
b
,
een later worn away and replace d by other separate for m s of ex ,
pression His theory i n th i s point i s that Tagalog has m ore than

.
,
any other preserved the fo r m of the parent language and that ,
these particles therefore a re liable to b e discarded i n a m o re

, ,
advanced stage of develop m ent With al l due regard fo r an .
opinion co m ing fro m such a hi gh authori ty w e beg to say that ,
facts see m to poi nt out a different course The decay w hi c h w e . .

~
. appreciate i n Tagalog i s largely due to i ts co m paratively p resen t

particle i m poverish m en t I t i s a fact that these particles are less
.
nu m e rous i n other P hi lippi ne tongues wh ich are known to be i n a ,
stage of develop m ent less ad v an ce d tha n Ta galog E very particle .
going out of use i s a n et loss to the lang u age T hat thi s i s the .
A m r e g e lm fi s s i g s te n i s t a u c h h i e r i n d i e Ta g
(I ) Sp r a che ; s 1e i s t d i e
z
.
z
e i n i ge , w e lche d i e Sy lb e n v e r d o p p lu n g u r Te m p u s a n d e u t u n g g e b ra u ch t .
z
( 2 ) I m Ta g m a cht d i e Be e i ch n u ng d e r Te m p o ra d u r ch B u ch s ta b e n v e ra n
.
1
t
d e r u n g u n d R e d u p li ca i o n hi e r o n e i n e A u s n a hm e v .
I n d e r g ra m m a i s che n F o r m s c h e i n t t w a r a u f d e n e r s e n A n b li ck d e r z t
!
0
t
_ U n e r s ch i e d g e g e n je n e ti b e ra u s g r o s s , i m W e s e n li ch e n m i m mt m a n a b e r b a ld - t
d i e , n oc h m e r k w u rd i g e r e U e b e r e i n s ti m m u n g w a h r D e r a llg e m e i n e Cha r a k te r,
z
.
d a s s d a s W o r t s i c h n i ch t v e r an d e r t , u m d e c li n i r t o d e r co n ju g i r t
O
u w e rd e n , u n d
d a s s d i e i h m b e i g e g e b e n e n M o d i fi c a t i o n e n d u r c h P a r i k e ln a u s g e d ruck t s i n d , i s t t “
‘
a u ch hi e r d e r n am li che u nd e b e ns o d i e A n h e f t u n g d i e s e r Pa r ti k e n a n d e n
, l
A n f a n g d e s W or s t .
tz
( 4) Si e b e s i t la n g e u n d k un s tli ch g e b i ld e e F o r m e n, u n d ha t e i n e s chw e r t
uz fi b e r s e he nd e , v
e r w i c k e lte G ra m m a ti k A lle i n g e n a u e r u n te r s u c h , fi n d e t s i c h
. t
t
d a s s e lb e Sy s e m d e r P o ly n Sp r a c he w i e de r , F le x i o n s los i g k e i t i n D e c li na i o n u nd
. t
«A nde u un
g der gr a mma i s che n V e rb altni e s e du t ch ab ge s onder e Parti k e n.
t t t l
LXI b as e ment s . .
c as e the p ar t i c les ta g a a n d p a ra w hi ch w e m us t s u p o s e once ex i ste

,
p
‘
d
i n the language si nce they are still foun d i n other Phi lippi ne to n
w b
,
g ues w 1ll, sho T aga i s i n Bicol the particle form ing ver s denoti n g
.
t he occasional p a r a the frequentative perfor m ance of an actio n

, It, ,
i s possible ; therefo re to say i n Bi col : ,
2 2 3 1
z
.
2 2 3 1
n a g ta ( ta g a)s t m t a cé
’
.
n a gp a ( p a m )s ur a t a cé
3 2 1 3 2 1
“
I w r1te o c ca s mn a lly
.
.
“
I ( a m ) ( constantly )( writing ) .
A n d i t will e equally p oss i le to b b say the s a m e by m eans of adver b s

as i h E ngli sh ,
.
1 2 3 1
2 3
z
n a g s u s rr a t cm; ( c a n boo t ca n mi n s d n
'
) n a g s u s t m t a cé z '
gu i m r a y
2 3 2 1 3 1
“
I .
w rite o ccasionally .
“
I am constantly w riting .
While i n Tagalog i t cou l d onl y be said :

1 2 3 1 2 3
t
b z
’
hi r cm g s u ng m u s ala t a cé p a ra ti ng s z
u ng mu s d a t
’
a cé
3 1 2 3 2 1
“
I sel o m wri te d .
“
I am co n stantly w ri ting .
and we
cannot conceive of Tagalog being m ore develo p ed i n this
poi nt t han Bicol because i t possesses ut one of the two different
,
"
, b ,
for m s foun d i n the latter for the expressio n of the sa m e idea We are
w
.
a are however of a theory i n language scie nce to the e fi e c t that gram

, ,
m a t i ca l for m s are m ore n u m erous and synthetic i n pr oportio n as _

w e ap
proach the origi n of the language and that these later are resolved i nto
‘
b
, , ,
b ri efer and m ore analytic form s an d expressions ; ut we conten d that the

theory i s n ot a pplicable to Tag a log for h ere there are found both , ,
the o ne an d th e other fo r m Thus the apparently cu mbrous fo r m .

,
1 2 3
( m m) a ( p agp a) of the foregoing exa m ples ( see page L I X )
( r i te)
‘
can b e resolved i nto the si m pler and m ore analytic one si m i lar to ,
1 2 3 1
the sa m e i n the E nglish language ; ma ngy a m ma g otos
‘
( to e a le )
’
p u r i to,
“
b b
3
l to o rder m
( )( to co e here ; ) and equally so fo r the others there g 1v e n
‘
an d a ll si m i lar co m pou nds We fi nd so m ething of thi s kin d i n the .
E hg li s h langua e when we say , for i nstance “

to overdo i nste a d of
b
, ,
“
to do too m oh and we cannot see why the language should e ,
m ore develope d if i t possessed only o ne of the t wo for m s .
A s to Hu m bold t s th eory of the word i n Tagalog u ndergoing n o

’
change f o r conj ugation , a ch aracteristic according to hi m , whi ch renders ,
i ts origi n an d parentage to be the sa m e as that of M alay and the other

la n guages spoken by the race ; i n so far as the Tagalog tense for m s are -
concerned an d i n regard to the influence which this m a y have fo r pu r

,
poses o f language d ifferentiati on we believe that the fact of sayi ng i n : ,
Ta g a lo g . M a la y .
ma g s us ala t -
a c6 a ku '
d nd a k s u ra t
for
w rite ;
.
”
“
I shall
c w
uts as i de a di fferen ce i n th e degree of relatio nshi p of the two l a ngu a
g e s w i
, th re g d
a r to the su p p ose parent langua e as t he fa ct o f s a i n
g y g i n : d , .
i
LXI I . T1111 TA GALO G LA NGUAGE .
S p a ni s h .
Yo e s cm bi r é
'
lt a lla n . G e rma n .
I o s cr i v e r o I ch v er d e s chr e i ben
cuts b w et een Span ish and Italian o n one side an d E nglish an d ,
G er m an o n the oth er with regard te the L ati n s cr i ba m ,

.
The co m parison of Tagalog with the Javanese i s n o w taken

u p; b ut i n o rder to avoi d the unnecessary length which a di rect
co m pari son as that m ade with M alay would require an d i n vie of , w
the fact of freque nt i dentity o r close analogy of t he M ala y an d th e
J avanese i t i s thought convenient to use occasionally the co m pari so n
,
of th ese two _ languages as a point of reference for the co m pari son

with Tagalog On points th erefore where i dentity or rese m lance i s b
d
.
, ,
sai d to exist of the M alay and the Javanese the reader shoul under
stan d that the sa m e diffe rences hich have been n oticed betwe en w ,
M alay an d Tagalog exi st too between the latter an d the avanese J

w
.
, , ,
Beginnin g wi th t he alphabe t we fin d tha t t he vo el syste m

b J
,
is essen tially the sa m e i n o th languages A s i n Ta g a lo g so i n ava .

,
n ese the soun d of é ( taling) and i those of o an d u are frequentl y

d
, ,
i nterchange or confounded W 1t h each othe r The peculiarity m ost

b b
.
.
deserving to e notice d of the Javanese vowel co m ini n g syste m an d -
one i n which i t shows the wi dest deviation fro m Ta galog i s the ,
absence of the di phto n gs a y and c m which are of so frequen t occur ,

.
rence i n the latter '

.
I t i s far beyon d the scope of the p resent sk e tch to go i nto

b
.
t he i ntricacies of the Javanese alphab e t It i s only to e n oted that

w
.
i ts present co m plex an d highly elabo rate arrange m ent i n hich alth ough
z
, :
n ot disposed in the m etrical o rde r of the D ew a n a g r sti ll th e i n

'
fl u e n ce of Sanskrit i s m anifes t see m s to be the conti nuation o r per ,
f e c ti o n of an ancient si m pler writing character i n which ; prob ably , ,
n o t only the Javanese but also th e M alay were written This an cient
b
, .
Javanese alphabet there i s so m e reaso n to elieve was the sa m e as

, , ,
or v e ry si m ilar to t he ancient Tagalog one I f th e f act of all

w
.
,
sy llables i n Javanese beginn in g ith a con son ant an d the on e of

b
,
syllables i n Ta galog freq u ently begin nin g with a vowel or ei ng

otherwise co m plex are taken i nto a ccoun t the lack of so m ething as
b
, ,
the v i m ma i n the Tagalog alpha et and its i nadequateness for express

i ng the sounds of the la n g u a g e s u gg e s ts the belief that this a nci en t , ,
alphabet could have been i nvented fo r the Javanese language o nly .
The sa m e general accord which i s found to exist i n the

vowel exists also i n the consonan t syste m s of the two languages
b
, , .
The presence of the consonants ch j and fl and the a sence of the , ,
strong aspi rate h which in Javanese ma y b e sai d to be a m ere sign

.
for the eye render the d i fi e re n ce s with Tagalog the sa m e as have

,
been appreciated of the latter with M alay A s noticed by Cra w f u rd .
( Dissertation page xix ) the phonetic character of the Javanese

w
, ,
although i t m uch rese m bles th a t of the M alay still sho s so m e con ,
s i d e ra b le differences The pronun ciati on of the Javan ese i s less soft

.
than that of the M alay and th erefore co m es nearer to that of , ,
Tagalog .A no the r d ifi e re n c e affecting th e p ron unciation i s the greater

recurre nce of nasal sounds and of the sou nd at an d the m ore frequent ,
coalescence of l and r with the o ther con sonants an d a vowel i n the

b
s ll a le
y . It ha s b
already een notice ( see p a ge X LI )t h a t Craw f u rd co uld d
L XIV . Ta r: TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
f or m s d
are use a s a ectives an d the for m s ma ku la w a n d ki y e in dj , ,
the popular w a hu p u nt/ m an d p a n i ki i n th e cere m onial langu a ge

J
, , ,
are used as substantives Of course these and the oth er avanese ,
pronouns are likewi se devoi d of gender n u m be r and case as i n M alay , , .
The ter m s s w y l n th e popular i ng ka ng i n the cere m onial an d , ,
ka m i n either language serve i n Javane se to rende r the relative p ro

n oun ; b ,
,
ut the sa m e here with these wor d s as i n M alay wi th y a ng ,
the J avanese ter m s have no defi nite relative character nor well fi x e d
‘ '
o ffice i n the language they being also use d fo r the sa m e purposes ,
fo r which the defi nite article i s used i n E nglish an d i n m ost other

E uropean languages .
A s i t i s generally the case wi th any other word s i n Javanese ,
the i nterrogatives have for m s for the popular an d for the cere m onial
‘
, ,
language ; bu t i n every o t her respect they do n ot u po n th e whole , ,
differ especially those used i n th e co m m on langu a ge fro m th e sa m e i n

, ,
M alay Si n te n i n the cere m onial an d s ap a i n the popular language

. , ,
correspond with the M alay s ea p a an d the ter m i n the popular lan ,
guage i s for m ed i n th e sa m e way as t hi s l ast i s for m ed i n M alay ,
while the ter m p u nap a i n the cere m onial and ap a i n the popular , ,
la n guage correspond to the sa m e for m in M alay A s i n th e latter .

,
s o i n the Javanese the i nte rrogative for person s i s used adj ectively
and all of the m are esi des used as m erely a m ark of i nterro g ation
'
, b , .
,
A s to the other p ronoun s we h ave seen that the reflective ,

“
fo r self de w e and p i y a mba k are u sed as substitutes for the pronoun
, ,
of the third person The for m fo r the i ndefinite “

any i s as i n
.
,
“ ”
M alay ba r a ng a n d that fo r the E nglis h distributive
, ,
each although ,
peculiar i n i tsel f o fi e r no i nteres t fo r the purpo se of this co m pari son

, .
N o co m pound p ronouns are given i n Javanese .
The accord then found to exist o f the pro noun s i n Javanese

, ,
‘
and Tagalog i s the de m onstratives excepted either the sa m e as o r

, , ,
even s m aller than that found to exist betwee n the sa m e i n Ta galog

,
an d i n M alay Thus far i t does n ot see m to be such as to support

b b
.
,
the theory of ot h languages h aving ee n derived directly fro m th e

sa m e parent stock .
Tha t the diff erences i n the Co m pari son o f the nu m erals m a y

b e m ore easily appreciated the for m s of expres sion fo r the sa m e i n
w
,
M alay and i n the popular Jav a nese language are o fi e re d to vie in

w
the follo i n g table :
E N G L I SH . M A L AY J A V A N ESE .
Sa , s a w a tu , w
su atu , Sa , s a Wl , s 1j 1 .
satu .
Duwa .
Tiga .
A m pat .
L ima .
A n am .
Tuj uh .
D a la p a n , d u la p a n .
Sa m bilan , salapan .
Sa puluh -
.
Sa blas
w
-
.
Du a puluh .
Duwa puluh satu -

.
R a tn s .
I N TRO D U CTI O N . LXV .
The di fference whi ch one m a y be inclined to appreciate i n th e

expressio n of the u nity i s not a real o ne The true nu m eral is 3a
‘
i n bo th languages b ut the u nity i n M alay i s consi dered i n ref e rence

z
,
“
to ba tu , a peb b le ; while i n Javanese the reference i s to w ij ( the '
,
Tagalog bi rt !) a seed h “
The for m lo r o =r or o fo r two
“
offers so m e
b
.
,
deviation fro m the general for m d u a F o r reckoning the n u m ers .
between twenty and thi rty the Javanese has a no m enclature of its ,
o w n not found i n Tagalog and only occasionally foun d i n M alay

widespread M alay deci mal syste m of n u m eratio n
, .
I n adopti ng t he ,
Ta galog incli ne d m ore to the Javanese than to the M alay n o me n ,

“ ” ”
c la t u r e for the nu m bers
“
three seve n and eigh t“
It also i nclined ,
to th e Javanese i n rej ecting the nu m erous M alay adj unc ts The .
cardinals i n Javanese are adj ectives and not nouns as i n M alay an d ,
so i n the constr u ctio n they follow the noun i nstead of preceding i t .
The ordi nals are for m ed with the prefix p i ng of which n o ,
traces are foun d in Tagalog s ap i s a n “

first ; b eing for m ed so m ewhat
, ,
i rregularly
J
.
The co m pari so n of the nu m erals i n Tagalog an d i n avanese

discloses the fact that there exists a greater accord of th e c a rdi ha ls
i n th e tw o la n g u a g e s than that hi ch i s found to exis t of the sa m e w ,
nu m erals in Tagalog and i n M alay ; but i n the ordi nals i t i s foun d

that Tagalog i nclines m ore to the M alay syste m i n so far as it uses ,
a prefix w hich although containing a native ele m ent i s the sa m e

, ,
as that used i n M alay To the fact however that the n u m bers fro m
.
, ,
eleven to twenty a re for m ed i n Ta galog i n a m anner differen t both ,
i n word an d i n sense fro m the sa m e i n M alay an d Javanese i s

w
, ,
accorded m o re i m portan ce for co m pa rative research than that hich

b
m a y e attached to a n y degree o f accord existing i n the m e re structure
o f these words N or i s i t necessary to state a gain here the reasons we
b
.
h ave for elieving that th e i m portance of n u m erals i n thi s con nection has
b een so m ewha t overrated or to go further i nto arguing the case i n order
,
to conclude that the accord i n t h i s point i s n ot such as to m ak e

'
the two languages appear as derived directly fro m o n e an d the sa m e

trunk . What is fou n d peculiar i n the Tagalog n u m erals has been
already stated an d the rea der i s refer r ed to the p roper Chapter for
,
.
any addition a l data h e m a y require

b w
.
A s to t he wo rd uilding m ethods of the two languages

-
e fi nd tha t ,
the n o un bui ldi ng o ne of is co mm o n to both The sa m e

‘
-
.
as i n M alay we have i n Javanese ka mu m ha n i n the popular language

, ,
"
m eani ng li berality ; f ro m mu r a h liberal
“ “
But Javanese has othe r ,
.
n ou n building pr oce sses ( non e however corresponding with th e Ta galo g

-
, ,
a
p g ca f r o o t ) whi ch i n this point
,
a t least brings it nearer to T agalog , .
The significatio n o f t he Ja v anese n o m inal co m pound i s so m eti m es

identical wi th so m eti m es diff erent fro m the sa m e i n Ta galog
, , .
E xa m ples of identi ty are :
Slgnification . J v nes e aa . Signification .
The doing . Pan g gawa

-
. The conducting .
Bathing place . Pa ( a ldus an . Bathing p lace .
Thin g stolen . Begal -

an . Thing s tolen .
E xa m ples of di ssi m ilarity are :

Tk
lBroogdgi fi ffi
l i ng
Pa m é got Pa fi a m b e le h
o
Butcher .
j
. .
s e
A nac -
an . litter , . A nak -
ah .
LXVI . TE E TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
The
greater analogy which th e precedi ng facts show to exist
b
i n the n oun uilding processes Of Javanese an d Tagalo g over t hos e
-
of the latter an d M alay i s o f i m portance ; for as t he above c o m

‘
, ,
pounds are fo r the m ost derived fro m verb s si m i lar analogy wil l
, , ,
b e foun d to exist i n the verb bui lding m ethods The fact ho wever ; -
.
,
that Javanese has n o adj ective building particle and that adj ectives , ,
therefo re are as i n M alay on ly know n by their position i n regard

, , ,
to the noun greatly i m pai rs the value which fo r pu rposes of parentage

, , ,
m ight b e attached to affiniti es of thi s kind .
As i n M alay so i n Java n ese a word be i t a noun or a

, ,
pronoun i s deter m i ned to th e significatio n of a verb by th e applicatio n

b
,
of particles and tense i s expressed

,
y adverbs o r m o dals the ,
Javanese auxi liary for the past being w a s w hich corresponds ,
to the M alay s u da h ta la h etc ; a n d those for the future a r dp a n d

, ,
.
,
ba de which correspon d to ma u an d a n da k i n M alay ; but the

,
verb i n Javanese deserves h owever m ore careful con si deration th an , ,
t he sa m e i n M alay as it shows greater analogy wi th th e sa m e part

,
o f speech i n Tagalog than that which has been noticed with M alay .
N o t that there are i n Javanese the n u m erous v erbal parti cles foun d i n
'
Tagalog nor even all tho se which are found i n M alay ; but there
,
are so m e which there i s so m e reason to beli eve Ta galog ha s borrowe d

fro m the Javanese la n gu a ge
J
.
The particles which the avanese popu lar language has i n

co mm on wi th i n M alay are : ,
The suffixes l for t ra n sitive ver s b .
52:
‘
6
The prefixe s
7 j fo r the passive vo ice .
A
p roper Javanese particle i s th e p refix a fo r tran sitive ver s b .
The particles which the language ha s i n co m m o n wi th Tag alog ,
are : The i n fi x e s m p receded by the s u ku thus for m i ng u m for

, , ,
-
neuter verbs an d i n fo r the passive voi ce

,
-
The parti cles wh ich .
Javanese has i n co m m on w i th M alay an d th e peculi ar Javanese

prefix a have n o value fo r the co m pariso n here ; but th e others
which the lan g uage has i n co m m o n wit h Tagalog have an i m porta nce
th at can hardly be exaggerated
b b
.
Tagalog i s found to con tai n a greater n u m er of ver al pa r

t i c le s than any othe r language o f those su pposed to be of the
sa m e parentage These particles i t will be seen begi n all of the m
.
, , ,
except o ne with m an d have two f o r m s one beginn ing wi th m

, , ,
for the ac tive an d another generally begin n ing with p f o r t he

, , ,
passive voi ce of the verb The particle which m akes the except
b
.
i on i n this general accord of m eginni ng prefixe s i s u m which -

, ,
besides has n o proper for m for the passive voi ce

, Ov er and above .
its oddity o f for m the particle has i n the language n o definite office ;
,
it so m eti m es i ntr u d es upon the f u nctions assigned to other parti cles ,
o r i s i tself vague o r a rbitrary i n i ts appli cation as the u m verb has ,

-
frequen tly the sa m e m eaning a s the m a y or sa m e other m b e g i n n i n g

one E verything see m s to i ndicate its exoti c and superfluou s character
.
,
and thus the parti cle m igh t well b e discarde d without great loss to
the language I t m a y be however that casual observers fi n d th at u m , ,
i s nec essary for the for m ation o f certai n i ntransi ti ve v erbs and for
others wh ich d eno te acquisitive acts al leging perhaps that i n the case , , ,
of roots of a n a m biguous i m port as a lts m oving ; bi li “

bartering ; ,
“
,
etc fro m which i ntransi tive verbs o r v e rb s de n oti n g an acqui sitive acti on
.
, , ,
I N TRO DU CTI O N . L X VII .
d
on on e si e and tran si ti ve ver s or verbs denoting action s of an a li e n a to ry
, b
kind on the other are for m ed as : a ma li s “ ”
to go away ; bu mi li “ to buy ;
z
, , , , ,
an d m l t
“
to take u t ; ma g bi l to sell ; etc the action d e noted by
,
“ ‘
a y a s , o , .
,
the a m verb could n o t well be expressed otherwise ; but if t he genius

of the langu a ge an d t he m e thods i t e m ploys wi t h othe r si m ilar
roots are carefully considered i t will soo n be foun d that as i n
the ca s e of ma g z z
,
,
“ ’
t ta ng to borrow a great deal ; and m agp a cta ng ’ '
,
,
“
to lend ; fro m ata ng ; de b t ; if u m did not exist the for m s would
“ ’
b z
,
e m li “
to go out “
m to take o ut ”
to buy
z
“
l
z
’
a g a s ; a gp a m bi li
“
z
a s ; a
,
g ; , ,
m a gp a b l “
'
‘
to sell ; etc I fact n atives say : m a gp a s a l for to ’
n “
, .
, ,
take a walk ; ma g o mp r a r for to purchase ; fro m the Spani sh p a

’
“
c
z
,
an d comp r a r which hav e the sa m e m eaning a s u ma l s an d

z
s ea r ,
’
bu m li
'
It i s also true that o utside M an ila i n dis tri cts wh ere

z
.
,
little o r n o u s e is m ade o f the particle people say n u l s ,

'
,
“ “
for gone out and purchased ; and i n t he Bi sayan th e , ,
using of a m o r ma i s altoge the r voluntary A s the par ticle i s neither .
foun d i n M alay no r i n any language o f the others reviewed by

b
Hu m oldt the M a la g a s i excepted we m a y assu m e that i t as i m ported
, ,
w
fro m J avanese i nto Ta galog
b
.
E ven greater i m portance than to th e presence o f a m 18 to e attached ,
t o the p resen ce of the passive particle i n A lthough Tagalog has two m ore .
particles fo r the passive voice of th e verb sti ll i n i s the p rinci pal , ,
as i t enters i nto th e co m posi tio n of certai n tenses with th e o t her two

b z
.
I t is to e noted carefully th at n i s i n Javanese always an i n fi x

'
whi le i n Tagalo g i t i s so m eti m es a prefix so m eti m es an i n fi x and , ,
so m eti m es a s uffix That i t cannot beco m e a prefi x i n Javanese i s

. .
explained by th e fact that i a requires a vowel with which to be

co m bined and as n o word i n the langu a ge begin s wi th a vowel th e .
particle finds n o m eans of applica ti on a s a prefix The fact that i t .
can not beco m e a suffix lies i n the different n ature o f the Javanese con ,
j ugatio n fro m th at of the Tagalog and i s of i m portan ce _i n th e

z
,
presen t co m parative study I n z h n ( i n I locan o e n i n P angasin an m

’
.
, ,
and i n Bi col and Bisayan on an d a n) i s i n Tagalog s u f fi x e d for the i m pe r ,
ti ve an d fo r the si m ple futu re but as i n Javanese th e i m p e ra tl v e i s ,
for m ed i n a s peci al v a y by appen d ing the vowel a to the v erb and ,
as the futu re i s as i n Malay expressed by adverbs or m odals the p a r tl cle

, , ,
also here finds n o u se as a suffix I n poin t of fact n o feature can .

,
.
show bette r than thi s th e peculi a r character of t he Ta galog v erb for , ,
as an ,th e oth er Ta galog p assive par ti cle i s s u f fi x e d i n the i m pera ,
tive an d i n the si m ple future so the langu a ge on 1m p o rt1n g the , ,
Javanese l D fi f i f b u sed i t a s a suffix for those two t enses

-
, .
I n th e co m pari so n h ere m ade o f Ta galog an d Javanese n o

‘
notice of course i s taken of Hu m boldt s hypo t h esis of a poss i ble

.
, ,
derivation of th e structure of t he latter fro m the for m er ; o r of what

see m s m ore probable Cra w f u rd s o pinion o f Javanese ha v 1n g borrowed
,
’
p ronoun s and po ssibly so m e other words an d for m s fro m Tagalo g

, , .
Bo th these conj ectu res m a y be wel l grounded but 1n so far as t he ,
fact can no t be hi stori cally verified we refuse to have th i s ele m e n t ,

.
of doub t i ntroduced i nto the p resent i nqui ry N o r has 1t bee n al owed

to be influen ced by what Hu m boldt says ( 2 nd book page 12 3) of
l .
the Javanese h aving b orrowed fro m Ta galog an d n o t Ta galog fro m

H i s O p i n i o n o n th i s p om t W 0 11“
.
the Javanese the particle i n , .

,
( 1) D i e Pa s s i v f o r m d u r ch E i n s c hi e b u n g d e s i n i s t d e m J a v m i t de m
z
.
Ta g a li s c he n g e m e i r s cha f t li ch : D e r U r s p r u ng s c h e n t a b e r i n d e m le ta te r e n
z z
u
i
_li e g e n , w e i l d i e F o r m d o r t w e i te r e nt w i ck e l t u nd m1t w e 1 a n d e r e n , ga n a hn lrche n
i n V e rb i ndu ng ge b racht i s t .
LXVIII . THE TA G A L O G L A N GUA GE .
be en ti tle d
to m ore con si eration th an t he a ove t o con ectu res d b w j
ha d h e n ot indicated i n anoth er part o f the sa m e book ( p age 198)
that thi s and the parti cle u m had been h anded down fro m the Kawi .
A t any rate i f thi s suppositio n proves true n o furthe r p roof i s

, ,
requi red for accepting Cra w f u rd s Opi nion to th e effect th at what ’

.
ever i s found co m m on to any two of these languages they have ,
acqui red by long i nterchange between the m selves not that they have ,
received it fro m a thi rd language .
Having i n foregoing chapters referred to the peculiar character

of the Ta galog verb and so m ewhat in dicated th e i m portance which ,
for purposes of co m parative research we a ttach to whatever has ,
a nything t o do with thi s part of speech the reader will

.
perhaps , , ,
feel i ncli ned to regard the p resence i n Tagalog of two verbal particles
which i n all pro babi lity have bee n take n fro m J a vanese as an
, , ,
i nd i cation o f a probable co m m o n origi n of b oth languages We

z
.
fully reali e the i m portan ce of th i s fact and we even should be ,
d riven to ad m it of one an d the sa m e i m m ediate parentage were ,
i t n o t for the fact that these two particles although very i m po rtant , ,
are not essen tial to Tagalog The i ndefi ni te character an d superfluous

o ffice of the particle u m have already been m enti oned a n d i t i s o nly ,
p ertinent to quote here what To t anes ( A rte de la L en gua Tagala page ,
41 , writin g one hundred years ago says about thi s poi nt : ,
I t is only to be n o ticed t hat i n the m ou ntain region the u se i s

v ery freq u ent o f only the roo t wi th n a p refixed for the present ,
tense of thi s kind of verb ( )

a m Th e passive p a f t i c
,
le i n i s .
m uch m ore necessary ; bu t i t i s n ot however i ndispensable The , ,

.
language possesses other for m s and m ean s of exp ression whi ch though ,
with loss i t i s true practically dispense wi th i ts use N o t to m e n

, ,
.
tion the frequency with whi ch the o ther two passi ve for m s wi th the ,
prefix y and wi t h suffix a n take the place of that for med wi th i n

w b
, ,
by referri ng to hat i s the direct obj ect of the ver i n the active
voice the m ethod frequently resorted to of using n a for the presen t
, , ,
and the past and ma fo r th e f u ture tense prefixed to the 1 oot o r to

, , ,
the passive verbal co m pound a nd th e use of the root or of the latter , ,
prefixed with ma for the i m perati ve i s e m ployed as a s ubstitu te fo r

, ,
the for m with i n Thus the f or m s ( mafi a ng ap CO n a ta ta ng ap co n a ta ng ap

.
, , ,
co , m a ta ta ng a p co “
b e i t i t i s was wi ll be received by m e ;
, ,
m ay , ,
be an d are frequently used for ta ng a p i n co ti n a ta ng ap co ti na ng a p

z z
, , , ,
ta ta ng a p i n co an d p a g a li s m o n a p a g a a l s mo nap aga l s m o ma
’
z
CO , , , , ,
“
p a g a a l s mo be i t it is was will be taken out by thee m a y be
’
, , , , ,
u sed for ( p a g ) ( p a g)a a li s é n mo

'
a 7t s i n mo ,
.
On e m a y be i nclined to fi nd i n the occasional use of a n for

‘
the p a ssive voice i n Javanese so m e analogy to the sa m e suffix

i n Tagalog ; but i n so far as thi s i s the case only i n poetry a nd
see m s to be done rather for euphon y s sak e than for any word ’
building purposes we m a y assu m e that the rese m blan ce to the

,
sa m e Tagalog passive par ticle is m erely accidental

b
.
I n the Word uilding m ethods then especially i n verb building , ,

-
the Javanese shows greater affi nity to Tagalog than that which ha s
been noticed of the latter to M alay ; but as those ele m ents and for m s
‘
which we m a y suppose Tagalog borrowed fro m Javanese although ,
i m portant are n ot however essential to the latter si nce if they

b
, , , ,
were taken away s till the language will be avai la le as an i n
( 1) So lo ha y q ue n o ta r q ue en lo s m o n te s u s an m u cho d e s 6lo la ra i z
con na , a nt e p u e s ta p a ra el p re s e nts de e s ta e s p e ci e .
( um ) .
I N TRO DUCTI O N . L XI X:
s tru m ent f o r th e conveyance of thought we m a y conclude that the ,
two languages are not related i n the sa m e degree as I talian and

Sp anish fo r i n stance are to each other
, , .
I n Javanese th e i m perative excepted i t i s found that word

, ,
d eclensio n i n other respects i s the sa m e or nearly the sa m e as that

which ha s been n oti ced i n M alay t he gra m m ar i n both languages being ,
for m ed on the s a m e general pri nci pal of the expression by prepositio ns

of the relation i n n ouns the for m atio n of the verb by the an nex ation
,
o f parti cles and the absence of any i nfl e x i o n for gender A s i n M alay

, .
,
t here i s p roperly speaki n g n o article i n Java nese and therefore n o

, , , ,
declen sion of thi s part of speech as we have seen to be t he case wi t h ,
Tagalog . P ronoun s are likewi se devoid of case en dings and generally of

plural f or m s these latter i n What regard s the personal pro noun ev en
b
, , ,
to a greater extent than the sa m e i n M alay I n the Javanese ver i t

w ,
.
i s found tha t the fo r m ati on of the i m perative i s effected by hat m a y

be regarded a true i n fi e c ti v e process w hich i s not foun d i n Tag alog , ,
the a ppendage o f a to the verb ( 1) This and and th e presence of the .
i nfi x e s um
-
and «i n m ade Hu mboldt believe ( 3rd boo k page 32 1) that
.
Javanese ha s m ore than any o ther the appearance of an i n fl e xi on a l

, ,
language . We sh ould readily concu r i n thi s Opini on of the great

w ri ter ,
i f there were foun d i n Javan ese present an d future i n fi e c t i v e
ten se for m s and i f t he language b a d case and plural i n fi e c ti v e for m s
,
fo r t he article an d fo r the p ronouns as the Tagalog has I n what , .
regards tho se fo r m s which both languages have i n co mm on the

w
,
co m parison shows h ere a s elsewhere that Tagalog whi le borro i n g

, , , ,
i f i t really e ver borrowed words for m s an d m ethods fro m the J a v , ,
anese and the M alay h as h owever preserved i ts own , Suc h W ords ,

.
,
fo rm s an d m ethods a s app ear to b e peculiar to i tself are essential

to the language Wi thout t he m a sen tence co u ld not well e co n
.
’
,
b
structed an d thei r eli m i nation would certainly result i n destroying the
efficien cy of th e l anguage as a vehicle of th ough t We m ust therefore .
, ,
conclude th at Tagalog i s a language different fro m t he other two

To the co m pari so n j ust m ad e between M alay Javanese and Tagalog , ,
o n th ose points covered b y Hu m boldt s i nquiry of the sa m e and the ’
o ther la n guages spoken by the M alay race a f e w n otes o n syntax ,
are added he re w hi ch i t i s believed m a y go t o strengthen the

,
'
, ,
theory of the di fferent origin and of th e superiori ty of Tagalog , ,

.
N othing can b e tt e r expose to vie w the true character of a

la n guage than i ts syn tax ; and n oth ing can sho w better the different
con stitution of Tagalog fro m M alay a nd Javanese and its supe riori ty
o ver t hese t wo languages than synt a x co m pariso n The syntactica l '
value of words i n Tagalog i s n o t dependent on thei r position wi th

r egard t o other words i n th e sen te nce as i t is largely the case with ,
the sa m e i n M al a y an d Javanese ; b u t i n thei r for m o r i n the pre

posi tion which p recedes th e m and m akes known what thei r office i s i n
the sente nce A n adj ecti v e wi ll al w ays be an adj ecti ve a possess ive
.
,
always a possessive whether co m ing before or after the noun o r

, ,
after the obj ect of p ossession I n n o case i s the agen t or the sub
.
j e c t m ade known by the place i t occup ies with r e latio n to the verb .
( )
1 T r a c e s o f a p r oce s s s i m i la r t o h i s h e t
re m e n i o n e d , h o w e v e r , m a y b e t
t
f o u nd i n t he i n q u i s i i v e lo n g s o u n d a h? a n d eh? u te r e d b y Ta g a ls a f e r the e rb , t t v
a n d i n t he t e n s e b u i ld i n g m e t h o d s
- of o t he r Ph i li p p i n e t o n g u e s .
m u nd u m
‘
2 d i S i t d r c h d i e E i n s ch i e b u n g d e s
( ) S i e h a t a u f e r e n e n e e u
u nd d nrc h d i e L a u t v e r a nd e r u n g d e s
'
V e r b u m s , d i e s i ch n i cht d e u li ch a ls d i e t
F o lg e e i n e s a n g e b fi ng te n Pr aflxe s da r t hu t , d e n Sche i n , de n fl e c t i r e nd e n Sp ra che n
nae ne r z
u s ta hn .
L XX . THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
The distinction bet w een the adj ecti ve used as epithet an the sa m e d
u sed a s predicate i s m ade clear by e m ployi ng ce rtai n e ndi ngs or
se p arate p a rticles not to b e found i n the other t w o languages
Thus a ny m a r z
.
“
t n a ng n a ta u O o r a ny ta mi ng ma ri cr mng m eans : the
wise m a n ; whi le a ny ta u O a y ma r z
, , ,
“ ”
m u ng m eans : the m a n i s wi se
’
.
,
I t i s i n this way that the lack o f a specific ter m for the expressio n
of the copulative verb is cou n terbalanced and the n otio n of being “
is con veyed i n quite as clear a way by a y as it i s by a d a an d j a ti '
i n M alay or by mm a n d d a d i i n Java nese o r e v en so m e ti m es i n L a ti n

, ,
a s the following p assage take n fro m the Bible ( F i rs t E pi stle of St Paul .
to the Corinthians chapt 4 vers ,

shows .
, . .
N os spro pter Ch ri s tu m ; vos

t u lti Ca m i a y m an a m a n g m a n g d a hi l g '
aute m p rudentes i n Chri s to ; nos cay Cris to n gnn i t c a y o i m arur u

, , , , ,
~
i n fi r m i vo s aute m fortes ; vos n o

, n ong s a p a q u i s a m a cay Cri sto ; ca m i
bi les vos aute m i g n o b i le s ( where ,
a y m a hi hi na n gn n i t c a y o i m ala
, , , , ,
s u mu s and e s t i s are u nders tood ) lac as ; c a y o i , m a y c a p u ri han data

, ,
m m capulaan
’
p o na ,
t ca 1 a y,
a y .
The p resence i n Tagalog of a plurali z ing particle an d t hat of o ne

article of co m m on n ouns and anothe r o f p ro per nou ns of perso ns and the
, ,
greater syntactical value of t he Tagalog adj ectives pronoun s an d verb s over ,
the sa m e i n the other t w o languages h ave already bee n m entio ned .
I t i s also to be n oticed that a m ong the variou s ways o f for m ing the
co m parative of equali ty a nd the superlative i n Tagalog that of
“
a ffi xa tio n i s p referably resorted to .
A lthough reduplicatio n i s m ai nly fou nd i n language to be a

sign of rudeness Ta g alog e m ploys i t h owever i n s m aller d egree than
, , , ,
and for purposes d ifferent fro m M alay and Javanese The way i n,
.
whi ch it i s u sed for the expression o f tense i s tan ta m ou n t to an ,
i n fl e x i o n an d i t rarely affects the whole w ord

, b ut the fi rst two ,
syllables and m ost freque ntly only th e fi rst syllable o f t he root o r par ticle
,
.
But the m ost peculiar syntacti cal ele m ents i n Tagalog are
t he liga m ents that i s to say ,
certai n particles adhering to t he fi rs t
, ,
o r placed after the fi rst o f t w o wo rds bet w ee n which so m e gra m

, ,
m a t i c a l relation exists The relation bet w een the th i ng posse ssed

.
and the possessor i s expressed by a pre p osition ; t he o n e betwe en

t he verb a n d the subj ect o r the agent w hen the latte r follo w s the ,
verb and that of the predicate and the subj ect when the latter
, , ,
precedes are expressed without any liga m ent o r o ther di recti ve ; all
,
other relations requi re th e use of the liga m ents Thei r Office i n the
sentence m a y be seen for i nstance i n t he exp ressions : a li n ma ng
, ,
-
”
ta u O ma g ca s a la s a D ie s “
every m a n si ns agai ns t G o d ; and a li nma ng
,
ta mi ng ma g ca s a la s a Di e s any m a n wh o si ns agai nst G o d ; i tOng

,
“
ba ba y e s i n i s i n ta CC “
I love thi s wo m an ;
, i tOng ba ba y e ng s i n i s i n ta s o ,
this wo m an who m I love ; i y ang ma ng a ta mi n g m a y a ( y a)ma n

‘
,
“
those rich people ; i y ang ma ng a ta u O a y ma y a ( y a)ma n those p eople '
The liga m ent

.
are rich H u m boldt ( 3rd boo k

. page 2 9 1) say s “
,
connecting m etho d o n the o ther han d see m s i n all the M alay

, .
, ,
fa m ily o f la n g u a g e s peculiar only to the Tagalog

, ( )
1 .
The secon d peculiar syntactical ele m ent lies i n th e rela

tions which th e passive for m s with y and a n of the verb i n
Ta galog establish wi th thei r subj ect These for m s not foun d i n any .
,
z
( 1)
D i e V e r k n ii p f u n g s m e th o d e s c h e i n t ti b r i g e ns d e r Ta g . Sp ra che i m M a l .
Sp ra chs ta mm a e i n e i ge nthumli ch u s e i n.
ll
L XXI I . THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
Javanese i t i s true there exi s ts the m etho d of i nserting a

I n , ,
particle between the two words si m ilar t o that fo un d i n Tagalog ; but ,
i n n o case can the Tagalog con structio n of p utting the noun o f the
possessor before that of th e obj ect of possession be used i n either of
th e other two lang u ages N o one we believe wil l fail to percei ve .
, ,
the superiority i n thi s too of the Tagalog m ethod

, , ,
.
Hu m boldt s p e a k i n g o f the various ways of usin g th e perso n

,
’
of t he verb says : ( 2 n d book page 162 ) M oreove r it i s wo rthy

,
“
, ,
o f notice that i n Tagalog the p ronoun follows the verb while i n Java
"
n ese an d regularly i n M alay p recedes it ( 1) Hu m boldt shou ld have
, ,
.
.
sai d that i n Ta galog th e p ronou n o r rather the subj ect m a y co m e , ,
either before or after the verb which i s not the case i n any of the ,
other two languages Co m pare the sentence “

I ea t in: .
,
.
Ta g a lo g . M a la y .
A co, i , cu ng m a ca i n , or , Ha m a santap b .
c u n g m a ca m a co .
Over and above th e greater flexibi lity i n thi s respect o f t he Ta galog , ,
construction i t deserves to be noticed that cu ng ma ca i n i s the for m

,
which cu ma i n assu m es for the present tense whi le s a n ta p and ma n ,
g a n are the sa m e for m with th e i nfi n iti ve a fac t wh ich sh ows well ,
the greater syntactical value of the Tagalog v erb

Of course thi s freedo m is m uch greater f o r the constructio n of the
,
sentence with the ve rb i n the passive voice The careful attention of the .
re a der i s i nvited to the rendering of the following co m plex senten ce :

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3
Th i s l e t t e r ( i s w r i t t e n ) b y m e upon this ta ble
9 10 11 12 13 14
with this pen t o= f o r m y father .
T a g a lo g . M a la y . J a v a ne s e .
i 3
2 2 1 3 4 3 2 1
I t on g s ulat ( a y s i n u s ula t) Surat i ni te r tu li s oleh Ti n u li s d a k s e ra t ik i
4 5 6 7 5 6 8 6 8 7
c o ( s a i b a ao )n i t On g b
sabaya di atas m ej a s a duwu r papan - -
iki
8 9 11 7 9 11 10 9 11 10
la m esa nang p a n ula t i n i dengan kala m i ni s a m b i kalam i ki
10 12 .
13 14 12 14 13 12 14 13
( na i tO)s a a q u i n g a m a papada bapa k u karana b a fi u k u
.
-
. .
We u nder s tand that the M alay and the Javanese co n stru ctio n
could not well be changed while the sen tence i n Tagalog wi ll ad m i t ,
of the i n m u m e ra b le constructions which the synopsi s h ereafter shows .
Befor e showing these m ani fold fo r m s of cons t ructio n i n Ta galog ,
i t i s necessary to give so m e i dea of certai n peculiarities of the lan

gua ge wi thou t w hich t he reader can not well understan d the m a t
,
ter of the freedo m i n the syntax which i t i s i ntended h ere to

i llus trate The no m inative case for m of the co m m o n ar t icle i s a ny ;
.
that of the d e m o s tra ti v e p ronoun for the near obj ect i s i ts I f i ts , .
co m es before the noun n o a rticle i s to be used fo r the de m onstrati ve ,
is Understood to take i ts place ; but i f i t co m es after the noun the ,
ar ticle should then b e u sed before the latter Thus i n the above .
,
( 1) E s i s t u b r i g e n s m e r k w u rd i g d a s . s im Ta g d a s P r o n d e m V e r b u m
. . n a chf o lg t ,
da es i m J a v u n d e i g e n li ch M a l i h m
. t . vora nge ht .
I NT RO DU CTI O N . L XX III .
,
z
senten ce to say : i tOny s d a t i s the sa m e i n m eaning as to say : a ny s clat
’
z ’
75a ( 1) i ts an d thi s latter constructio n being n ecessary for the illustration

‘
below i n order to i ndicate th e sa m e an a will be added to the

n u m ber
,
b
orne by th e noun Thus 1 2 = 2 a 1 o r i n the wo rds of .
,
- -
,
1 2 2a 1
th e sentence , s ala tz ( a ny s nla t)
i tong r-
'
z
The o lique cases m a y
’
b
be i ndicated , ei ther by the d e m onstrative , o r by t he a r ti cle applied to
the n oun Thus , m tOny la mes a z n a ny la mes a ng i ts , an d , n a ny p a md a t
'
’
— n i té n
y p a m t la t ,
or i n n
’
u m bers 7 8 z,8 a 7 ,
a n d 1 1a ,
- -
The possess ive case of the perso nal pronou ns a n d , therefore , t he

‘
po s sessive pronoun s derived therefro m , it wi ll be re m e m bere d , h ave

t wo for m s , on e prepositive an d the other postpositive Thu s , to say :
z
.
s i n u s t la t s o i s
'
the sa m e i n m ean ing as to say : a qu i ny s i nu s ala t two ,
different con struction s wh ich will b e i ndicated by adding the letter b to

"
the nu m ber borne by the prepositive , and the le tter c to that of t he
postpositive , for m In this m ann er we have i n the sentence s i nus ala t
.
,
ca z a q u i ny s i n u s ala t ,
an d ,
s a a q u i n y a maz s a a m a co, or , i n nu m bers ,
5 ( b) ) 3 ,
and -
, 13 b 14 14 13 c T hus ,
-
we h ave :
—
-
.
E n g li s h .
1
Ta g a lo g .
1
The cons truction
may als o be: Q l
a
t
1 2 3 ( 4 5 0)
-
I
s
(4 5b)
-
3 2a
i 1
1 l 2 3 ( 4 5 0)
-
6 7 s 9 10 11 1 »
_ 1_ I
( 4 5-
b ) 3 1
I 2
l
~
0)
2a l 3 ( 4 5 -
6 7 8
Still t he senten c e m ight begin with : ( Sa i baba o) u t té y la me s a
a
etc an d the other ele m ents m ight be constructed m the s a n e v a rl o u s ways
é
.
,
1 11
of t he s y n op si s ; or i t m ight begi n with gain t he : N a ny p a m da t nto
’
an d a
o
other e le m ents m ight be turned i nto the other various pos 1t i on s of the table ;
12 13 14
or finally wi th :
, ,
Sa a q u i ny a ma and the sa m e various cons truc t o ns as i
( 1) N a , he r e , i s a li g a m e n t .
LXXIV . THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
w
for the other t o N o exa m ples of the sa m e are given not to tax too
.
,
m u ch th e attention of the reader .
The preceding synopsis sho w s only the Tagalog sentence co n

structed wit h the verb i n that ki nd of p a ssive whi ch rese m bles m os t
the s a m e i n the E nglish language ; but as i t has been already hi n te d
b
, ,
the v er i n Tagalog m a y assu m e two other for m s i n the pass ive a n d ,
the ref erence then i s not to what i s the d irect o bj ect of the verb i n
, ,
the active voice which i n the passive i s the gra m m ati cal subj ect
, , ,
“
that i s to say to thi s letter ; b u t to so m e divi sio n o f the i ndi rect
,
’
obj ect whic h i n the above sentence m a y b e for i nstan ce the perso n
, , , , ,
“
“
m y father ; the in stru m ent “
thi s p en ; or the place this table , , .
”
Thus if it he i ntended to lay m ore stres s o n
“
this table than o n
“
a n y of the other ele m en ts i n the sentence this table then should
d
, , ,
be m a e the gra m m atical s ubj ect and put in the no m inative case ,
8
wi th the verb used i n the passive of a n sayi ng : I tOny la mes a ,
36 ( )
4 5 1 2 9 1 1 -
10 12 1 3 14
( a ny p i n a y s u s u la ta n) CO n i lOny s i t la i n a n y p a n nla t i ts s a a q u i n y a m a , .
The sentence c o n s ! r u c te d i n th is way will ad m i t of the sa m e tran s

position s which were explain ed for the one constructed wi t h the verb
i n the general passiv e But h e acti on of wri ting m a y also be .
considered i n reference to the person the senten ce con structed with ,

”
“
m y father as the gra m m ati cal subj ec t and the verb used i n a ,
13 14
di fferen t for m of the sa m e an passive ,
saying : ( a ny a q u i ny) a ma, ( i ,
3 12-
. 4 5 -
1 2 6 8 7 9 10 -
i n us u la i a n ) n i lO i t la t ( i baba O) ( na ng la mes a ng) i ts , n i lO

’
a ny s co ny s s a ny
11
p a nid a t . Still
here the constructio n ad m its of the sa m e transposi tion s
whi ch have b e e n explai ned Or finally the action of writing m a y be .
, ,
consi dere d as to the i nstru m e nt the sentence construc ted wi th thi s

“
,
pen as the gra mm atica l subj ect and th e verb used i n th e passive ,
10 11 39 -
4 5 1 2 6
o f y , saying : I tOny p a ni da t ( ay ys i nu s nla t) co n i lOny s i cla t ( s a i baba n)
7 8 12 13 41
n i lOny la me s a s a a q u i ny a maHere too the transposition s m a y be the .
,
sa m e as those given i n t he synopsis which practi cally a m ounts to a

b
, , ,
n u m er of construction s al m o st i nexh austible We beli eve that n o .
furth er data a re requi red to show th e di ssi m ilari ty of Tagalog fro m ,
and its superi ority over M alay a n d Javanese , .
We wi ll not d rop the co m pari son here m ade of Ta galog wi th

the M alay and the Javanese wi thou t calling attentio n to certai n ethical
expression s and peculiari ties i n th e latter t w o langu a ges wh ich one
m ight expect to fi n d also i n Tagalog di d t he latter stan d i n the ,
degree o f relationshi p i n which i t i s clai m ed i t stand s to those sources .
We find fo r i nstance that i n M alay and although i n a s m aller

, , ,
degree i n Javanese also the re exist what i s called n u m eral adj uncts
, , ,
t hat i s to say certai n specific or technical t er m s used i n counting as

,
c o efficients to the nu m erals the ter m bein g selected according t o the ,
class to which the obj ect belongs Thus M alay e m ployes the follow .
,
"
i ng ter m s : Ora ny ma n fo r persons ; clea r tai l for ani m als ;
, , ,
“
,
’
“ "
bna h , fruit ,
“
for f ruit etc ; bij i seed fo r round obj ects ; ha le i lei
, .
, , , ,
”
fibre ,for tenuous obj ects as feathers etc ; ba ta ny ste m fo r lo n g , ,
“
,
obj ects ; and others each for so m e other different thi ng

,
,
I n Javanese .
we find le m ba r for large flat obj ects ; le r for h ai r feathers etc a s , ,

.
,
i n M alay lei ; an d hij i for t he sa m e ki nd of obj e cts ? for which biji ‘

I N TRODUCTI oN . LXXV —
.
i s use d
i n M ala y In avanese too there are collective nu m erals i n J
z
.
, , ,
“
t he sa m e way as do en i n E nglish for 12 so in Javanese for 7 , ,
10 etc
,
.
A noth er feature to call attention to is the fact that i n M alay

th ere i s o ne set of adj ectives la ki la ki “
m ale ; p e r a mp u a n
“
fe m ale ; ,
-
, ,
for dis tingui sh ing sex i n m a n an d another set j a n ta n “

m ale ; be ti n a , , , ,
“
fe m ale ; for distingui s hing sex i n the lo wer ani m als I n Javan ese
'
these a d j ectives are for both m a n and the lowe r a ni m als as i n Ta galog ;
but i nstead of on e fo r each gender e fi n d la n a ny d r i y a ka lau ng an d , w , ,
ja la r for t he m asculi ne and w a d on and os tr i for the fe m i nine , .
The fact that i n Tagalog there are n ative ter m s for th e ex

pression of the four cardinal p oints ha s an i m porta nt bearin g o n th e
t heory of its supposed M alay derivation ; for these poi nts would not
fail to be designated i n Tagalog by words taken fro m the M alay syste m
if the M alay ele m ent were fo und to be predo m inant i n the language .
The following are the t e r m s for the fou r cardinal poin t s i n :
E n g li s h . Ta g a lo g . M a la y . J a v a ne s e .
H i la g a U tara
g
. .
Si lan an Ti m or
ba
.
Ti m o g a n , i ba . Salatan .
Ca lo n o r a n . Barat .
The M alay ti me r an d the Tagalog ti moy a n are pro a ly i n , bb ,
refere nce to the i slan d of Ti m or Thi s na m e w a s given by M alays 3

.
,
t o the i sland because i t l ies eastward s i n the d i rection fro m Java

,
“
and Su m atra while Tagals use d ti m oy ( a n ) for south
,
because i t i s ’
to th e south that the i slan d lies i n the direction fro m the P hi lippi nes
d
‘
.
I n Ta galog there i s not found i n th e sa m e egree that ki nd

b
of a straction o r gen eralisati on p racticed i n M al ay which r e s u lts i n ,
v
c lassifyi n g a nu m ber of Obj ects un der one head and then t o use
so m e e pith ets for the other i ndividuals of the fa m ily So for i nsta n ce .
, ,
“
t he M alay n a m e for
“
a ra t i s ti ku s ; ( 1) bu t it i s equally so for a ’
" ” “
m ouse with the epithets large“
s m all added according t O w he the r , , ,
f
"
“
rat o r m ou se i s m ea n t I n Tagalog there exis ts a di s ti n ct w o rd
“ ‘ '
d a y a bu lz
.
, li t respectively for each of the two in dividuals

, ,
J amie i s .
i n M alay a generi c ter m fo r the citro n fa m ily

“
an d the word w ith ,
:
“ ” “
an epi thet for each i s e q ually a pplied to the Citron the o ra n ge , ,
”
an d th e le m on ; but i n Tagalog there exi sts a specific te r m re s p e c t
“
,
*
i v e ly lu cban ga la n d an d ay ap fo r each of these v a ri e t i e s w 1t h a n : '
. , , ,
”
addi tional t er m ca bi ty a o fo r the so u r o r wild orange
,
’
,
“
Devi ations of t hi s kind i t i s believed are not withou t value , ,

-
i n sh owi n g the di fferent origin of Ta galog and its superiori ty over ‘
the other two la n guages

b
.
I t only re m ains to say so m e th ing a out two o ther f o r e 1g n ele

~
m ents foun d i n T agalog which although h avi ng no bearing on the ,
question of origin still t he reviewing of sa m e m a y serv e t o s ho w

,
x
t h e i m po rtan ce of that other aboriginal o r n ative ele m ent t he I sola ,
ti on of w hich i s i ntende d i n the presen t i nquiry We thereby m ean

‘
.
, ,
Chinese an d Spani sh By reaso n o f i ts i n s i g n i fi ca n ce n o review wou ld

.
.
, ,
,
have perhaps been m ade her e of th e fi rst of these ele m e n ts were I t n o t ,

.
for the f act t ha t s u ch hi gh autho riti es as P rof Dr R e i n w a ld Bra n d s t e tter

’
'
. .
an d H boldt hi m self thi nk h h detected traces o f a m onosyll b e

( )
2 u m t e y a v e a 1
” “
( t) I cu s , in ~
Bi c o , m
l e a n s ca t .
"
Ta ga lfi
"
u nd M a la ga s e n , a p a mphle t . I nward 1902
(2)
'
-
.
L XX VI . THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
origin and o f a m on osyllabi c tendency i n the la ng ha g e The fi rst .
of these wri ters believes that certai n fi nal sounds occu rring wi th a
nu m ber o f roots are suggestive of one and the sa m e m eaning ; but
th e exa m p les h e brings for w ard do not b ear out h i s assertion He -
.
m enti ons a m ong others the endings hot i n kotkot and s i ng ka t as sug
, , , ,
g e s t i v e of the actio n of “
sippi ng ; 6 0 0 i n a bo o g a boc a la boc bo o bo a , , , ,
-
,
That the action of sipping

“ ”
as suggestive o f the notion o f dust . -
could rather be identified with other en dings if the theory of e ndings ,
suggestive of certain m eanings were true the following te r m s sho w : ,
“ ”
ha g u i rg m r ha cha c hi q op
“
to si p ; hi thi t s ip s ip s oar) to s u ck
’
, , , , , , .
That the endi ng hot is found with words having a m eaning different
"
fro m that whic h i t i s clai m ed that i t suggests s a bo t v o w ; ca hot “
, , ,
“
to slide ; s ohot
“
to appease ; and m any othe rs sho w
,
The sa m e ,
.
“ "
m a y be said of the endi ng bo c I t i s found i n ta boo . bucket ; ,
”
1 962 30 0
“
to,
enter ; s a lo c
“
ladle ; etc the m eaning of whi c h has noth
, .
“
i ng to do with th e i dea of dust I t has been already i ndicated
( see pages X I V X V ) tha t develop
-
m ent and p er m utation of consonant
sounds are stil l going o n i n the language and these f o r m s then m a y , , ,
be variations of the sa m e word whi le ko tkot hi thi t s ip s ip and , , ,
m a y be consi d ered as ono m atop oeias .
Hu m boldt al so i n the ch a pter he devotes to the m onosyllabic

,
o rigi n of every language ( pages c ccc i v c c cc v i i of the I ntroduction

b
-
‘
to h is work) i m agines h e fi nds i n the recurrence of certai n sylla les

, ,
trace s of a m onosyllabic tendency i n the language He says i n this

respect : ( first book I ntroduction p a ge c ccc i i ) ,
“
I n t he M alay la n
, .
guages afte r taking OR the affixes frequently n ay m ost frequently we

, , , ,
m ight say a dissyllabic radical re m ai ns which i n i ts gra m m atical rela

, ,
tion to the cons truction i s no t fur ther divi sible There too where ,
.
, ,
it i s a m onosyllable i t i s then frequently i n Tagalog even usually , , ,
reduplicated The dissyllabi c structure of these languages i s o n th i s

.
,
account often m entioned , A further dis m e m ber m ent of the radical

.
word has to m y knowledge h itherto never been atte m p ted I have

, ,
.
m ade the a tte m pt m yself and although I have not succeeded in p roperly ,
accounting for the real n ature of the ele m en ts of all these words I
-
am , however convi nced that i n a g reat nu m ber of i nst ances each

, , ,
of the two u nited syllables can be traced to a m o nosyllabic ste m i n

‘
the language a nd that the reason for the unio n can be explai ned
,
-
.
N o w a s thi s co m es to be the case despite our deficient m ean s a nd

,
inco m plete knowledge so we m a y wel l therefro m conclude the g r eate r ,
extensio n of thi s prin c iple and t he m onosyllab ic o rigi n o f these lan

guages ”
( 1) I t is greatly to be regretted t hat Hu m oldt did n ot
. b
furnish us wi th a sa m ple of any m onosyllabic Tagalog s te m which ha s
been reduplicated for the pu rpose of rendering i t confor m able to the
general di ssyllabi c s tr u cture of the language A s stated elsewhere w e .
,
-
( 1) I n d e n M a la y i s Sp r a ch e n b le i b t , n a c h A b le s u n g d e r A f fi x a , s e hr
c he n
hau fi g , i a m a n k a nn w o h l s a g e n m e i s t e n t h e i ls , ein w e i s y lb i g e r i n g ra m m a t i s c he r z .
B e z i e hu ng a u f d i e R e d e f fi g u n g n i c h t w e i t e r t he i lb a r e r , S ta m m fi b r i g A u ch d a , w o .
d e rs e lb e e i n s y lb i g i s t , w i r d e r h au fi g , i m Ta g a li s c he n s o g a r g e w ohn li ch ve rd o p p e lt
z
. .
M a n fi nd e t d a h e r of t e r d e s
, w e i s y lb i g e n B a u e s d i e s e r Sp r a c he n e r w ahn t E i ne .
Z e r g li e d e r u n g d i e s e r W o r t s t a m m s i s t i n d e s s b i s je t z t , s o v i e t i ch W e i s s , n i r g e n d s
v o rg e n o m m e n w e rde n I c h h a b e s i e v e rs u c h t ; u n d w e n n i ch a u c h n o c h n i c h t
.
d a h i n g e la n g t b i n , vo llko m m e n e R e che n s cha f t fi b e r d i e N a t u r d e r E le m e n t s a lle r

d i e s e r W or te r u z
g e b e n , s o ha b e i c h m i c h d e n n o c h fi b e r e u g t d a s s i n s e hr v i e le n z ,
F alle n je d e d e r b e i d e n ve r e i n i g t e n Sy lb e n a ls e i n e i n s y lb i g e r St a m m i n d e r Sp ra c he
n a ch g e w i e s e n w e d e n k a n n u nd d a s s d i e U r s a c he d e r V e r bi n d u n g b e g re i fi i e h w i r d
r , .
W e nn _ d i e s n u n b e i u n s r e n u n v o lls t a nd i g e n H ii lf s m i t t e ln u n d u n s re r m a n g e lh a f te n
Ke n nt ni s s d e r F a ll i s t , s o la te t s i c h w o hl a u f e i n e g r o s s e r e A u s d e hn u ng d i s s e s
Pri n ci p e u n d a u f d i e u r s p rfi ng li c he E i n s y lbi g ke i t a u c h d i e s e r Sp ra che n s c hli e f s e n .
I N TRO DU CTI O N . L XX V I I .
do not kn ow that the langu a ge ever affords any m onosyllabic sub

s ta n t i v e ste m A ll m onosyllabic ords therei n found are m eani n gless ;
. w
and the dissyllables consisting of two equal co m ponen ts are rathe r to
b e considered as ono m atop oeias He further m entions quite a nu m ber .
of -
words bu t t he re i s n o roo m i n thi s sketch t o revie w the m all

,
.
,
"
and t hus only the ter m Za bas ,
“
out “
outside ; will be here con , ,
sider ed L a bas is by Hu m boldt divided thus : la ba s

. an d la b i s the ,
“
syllable which he thi nks to b e suggestive of the m eaning ou t and
o f derivatio n fro m a m onos yllabi c language L a bas , as pronou nced .
at present should b e di vided la bas and n ot la b as but ad m itting

,
- -
“
that la b as i s the o ri gi nal an d co rrect division and that the p r o nu n

-
,
c i a t i o n la bas i s on ly due to the i nfluence of Spanish la b i n la b as ,

-
,
-
should be considered as an ano m aly Were i t the n orm al fo r m . ,
la b then would not fail to appear i n so m e tongue o f those spoken i n

, ,
these I sla nd s which i t does not The ter m i n Bicol is g ou a lu a s ; ( 1)

, .
, ,
i n Bi sayan g a u a s ; i n I locano m a r a a a y ; i n I ban a g ta l la a a n ;

, , , , ,
i n P angasinan ou a y ; an d i n P a m pangan lu u a l L oa a l is another ter m

b
, , .
”
for outside i n Ta galog ; and Hu m boldt u ses it ( 3rd ook page 62 1)
“
,
for th e purpo se of showi ng the accord of a dverb s i n Tagalog with

those i n M alay an d Javanese I t i s j ust i n this latter plac e that he .
should h ave used la bas an d n ot loa a l for lou a l i s rather a nou n than an
w
,
"
adverb He traces the first syllable of la b as to la b la b s a m p ; an d the
.
“ - -
second to ( ts a s to rub away ; but o ne fails to see what th e reaso n fo r

“ -
thi s m a y be L a b i s n ot foun d as a p refix i n any language of the

.
P hili p pines the only case i n which within the word buildin g m ethods
, ,
-
o f th ees languages such a d e ri v a ti o n m ight appear as po ssible ; an d i n

,
default of thi s i t ha s first to be proved that i t once existed as such

,
i n Tagalog or i n so m e of th e other tongues of these Islan ds These are .
not h owever the only errors fou nd i n connection with the ter m L a ba”s
, ,
.
i s given by hi m as the equivalen t of s e me n s a i s ip s i u s m a m ba s e li cer e

’
“ .
The source fro m which he d rew this fanciful equivalence i s n o t

stated but we m a y assu m e that i t w as so m e bo ok of those co m posed
,
by t he Sp a n i s h friars althoug h n ot N oceda s Dictionary certa i n ly

’
'
l
, ,
n ot the edition of 1860 I n the latter a m ong the uses of la bct s i s

’
. ,
,
found ( p age 16 1) the followi ng phrase : p i n a la ba s a n m o a ng ca

“
The transl a tion o f t hi s ex

“ ”
ta oa n m o es t habere p o llu t i o n e m
, '
pression as give n i n the dictionary i s i ndirect for the d i rect one

, , ,
should have been ha b u i s ti p ollu ti o n e m

“
si nce p i n a la ba s a n i s pas t ,
tense and the whole exp ression m us t be on e us ed i n inqui ring at the

,
con fessional I n other books there are given for th e sa m e thi n g

.
the expressio ns : n i la ba s a n ca y a a ny ca ta ou a n mo n a ng ma r u mi I m a ,
ba s a n ca n a ng p a ti p a ti ; bu t Hu m boldt see m s t o b elieve that th e

‘
idea of self pollution lies i n I a bas which i s not the case

-
In the ,
above expressio n this n otio n lies i n ca ta oa n “

body ; m a r u me , ,
”
“
dirtiness ; p a tip a ti “
se m en The expression i s i ntended as a
,
.
.
euphe m is m a nd i s such as only a nati ve could h ave u sed i n con

versing with a Spanish friar to avoid the p unish m ent wh i ch the
using of the cr u de ter m would p robably bring u po n hi m Speak i ng .
wi t h hi s fellow country m en he then would use bu s i e r} or li g hg an d , , ,
n ot la bas Thi s i s another i nstance of the errors l iable to be i n

.
curred i n by usin g gra m m ars as the only m ean s of deter m i n i n g

the character of a language .
d D i i y (p g 1 96 ) t h f m f’
or
( ) L o as , o u ; d i N “
1 u t i s f o u n n o c e a s c t o n a r a e a s e o r
“
ou t u s e d i n t he Com n ta ng
i ( G o m i ma ng w a s t h e n a.m e o f t h e r e g i o n t he p r o v i n c e s
o f L a gu na a n d B a ta n g a s no w o cc u a n d a l s o t h a t o f t he d i a le c ti ca l va r i a t i o n Of
py ,
Ta ga log a s s p o ke n t he r e i n t he e a r ly d a y s o f Sp a n i s h ru le ) . .
L XX V I I I . Tri s TA G A Loe LA N GUA GE .
b
if y the m o n osyllabic tendency said to ex i s t i n Ta
N ow ,
galog i s to b e u nderstood that for m which so m e b elieve speech has
assu m ed as a first st a ge i n i ts develop m en t no o bj ection will be ,
here raised I f howeve r direct deri vation of Tagalog i s m eant fro m

.
, ,
so m e M ongoli a n source we m a y be per m itted to say that n o other ,
langu a ge of those spoken by t he r a ce shows itse lf m ore a dverse to ,
cast t houghts i nto a m on osyllabi c m old n o r does a n y other m ake

-
,
greater sacri fi ces to preserve i ts di ssyllabi c character A root which .
i s t o be reduplicated i s redupli cated i n f i i ll if i t i s di ssyllabic a n d only

, ,
i n i ts fi rst two syllables if i t i s polysyllabic I n the for m ation of pretty .
little n a m es wh ere there are always both suppression and addition of

, ,
ce rtai n syllables i n r egard to the si m ple root the for m ati on i s i nvariably ,
m ade i n such a way a s to have alwa y s a dissyllable resulting A lthough .
e u phony an d s m oothness of p ron unciati on a r e things very fastidio u sly

attended to i n Ta galog th ey are however often sacri ficed to syllabic , , ,
q uan ti ty Th e contracti
. o n of th e co m pound s e frequen t ly u sed i n , ,
t he language ha s n o ot he r pu rpose than the p reserva tion of i ts

,
dissyllabic characte r Thus fro m m p i g “

fi ne ; n i p S an
“
rendered
z
.
, , ,
” “
t hinner an d not n i p i s a n i s for m ed ; fro m a s n sa lt ; a s n an salted
“ ’
w
- - -
.
,
an d not a s i n a n i s for m ed ; etc -

cases i n hi ch i t m a y be seen .
, , ,
the pu rity of the syllables n i and a has been sacri ficed for the
sake of a di ssyllabi c co m poun d A lthough Tagalog has thi s dissyllabic .
character i n co mm o n with the M alay and the Javanese attent i on ,
was called to the fact that m onosyllabic wo rds are m ore n u m erous
i n th e latte r two languages N o substantive wo rd and no directive .
of those wh ich can stand a lone i n th e sentence i s i n Ta g alog

m onosyllabi c E ven the negative and a fi rm a ti v e ad v erbs which in ,
m os t other la n gu a ges are m onosyllabi c are dissyllabic i n Tagalog , .
I f any of these d issyllabic words as fo r i n s tance ba g ct ki ndt etc

' ’
.
, , , , ,
is after th e n ative fashion shortened i nto ba an d di an d these

, , ,
ter m s are to be u sed th e m onosyllabic ter m will be u sed an d ,
pronounced as i f i t for m ed th e fi rst syllable of the following word ;

but if any o f th ese ter m s i s to be used a lone o r i s to close the
senten ce th e full fo r m w ill th en b e used
, N atives will say fo r .
,
instance g I ccw ba a ny “
art t hou perchance he who
’
but th ey wil l say : gi odo ba g d a rt thou percha n ce

? “
They say : di s i la n a g
s a bi
“ “
th ey did not say ; but i f th ey wan t to reply n o they will say : hi n di
, , ,
and if the use of the con traction i s by the m preferred they t hen will
say : d z
, , ,
’
p a and not d i alon e I t i s to th is aversion of the langu a ge .
for m on osyllables tha t the in si g ni ficant o r en ti r e ly lackin g influen ce

exerci sed by Chinese th ereon i s to be attributed Ta galog yielded .
easily to Spanish a language with which the polysyllabic character

.
,
excepted i t ha s n othi n g i n co m mon ; but i t ha s sternly resisted the e n

,
c r oa c hm e n t of Chi nese refusin

g to a m alga m ate or i nter m ix wi th it a n d thi s
, ,
only by reason of the m onosyllabi c character of the latter Chinese people .
h ave fro m the earliest t i m es of the Spanish c onquest settled i n great

, ,
nu m bers thro u ghout these I slands an d i nter m arried w i th n ative in habi t ants ;
yet there are certainly i n the language n ot m ore tha n the odd do en
, z
of Chinese words which h ave been collected i n the following table .
t hlnes e .
Cha o r s a . Te a .
Pi -
sau .
P i s ao . Sm al l k n i fe .
LXX X . THE TA G A L O G L A N G U A GE .
i n the language which are u n ders tood y the whole p opulation i s b ‘
v ery trifling when co m pared with th e nu m ber m ade use o f by people .
with a pretense to literary o r scientific education M ost of these .
Spanish words were used fro m necessity ; but so m e which are s y n o ; ,
ny m s of n ative ter m s fro m caprice and the passio n o f i m itatio n

,
aided by the s tructure an d assi m ilative character of the language .
which allows a ready i ntro duction of fo reign ter m s A m ong the .
t er m s i ncorporated and thoroughly o r partly understood by co m m o n

an d professi onal people are those i nci dent to the Catholi c religi on ,
which were i n tro duced by the Spani sh fri ars for here there could be ,
neither refusal to th e ad m issio n o f sa m e nor supersedu re of native

'
ter m s . I n con ve rsati on Spanish word s are often used i n ignorance

,
or for a useless di splay of acquai ntance with foreign o r i nfrequent

words . The Spanish words u se d i n the written language are generally
th e sa m e as those used i n speech ; b ut i n fact any n u m ber m a y sti ll , ,
b e i ntroduced at the w i ll or caprice of the writer with th e p robabi lity ,
however that m any of the m wi ll not b e u nd erstoo d by the ge neral

,
reader an d o ften i ndeed n ot even by the writer h i m self

, ,
.
I t i s not here intended either to exhaust the nu m ber of Spanish

wor d s i n Tagalog o r to go deeply i nto a m atter that i s treated m ore
at length i n the G ra mm ar where every Spanish word used therei n has
,
bee n noted an d explained an d rules fo r t hei r pro per u se are gi ven I t

b
.
,
i s only as an illustration that we subj oi n the following ta le of so m e

b
ter m s orrowed fro m Spani s h .
Significatlon .
Go d . Dios . God .
The Holy Vi rgin . Vi rgen . The H oly Vi rgin .
Holy G host . E spi ritu Santo -

. Holy G host .
A p p le . M a n s a n a (s ) . A pple .
To butt Topa . Sheep , r a m .
Horse . Cabay o . Horse .
Clog ( a k in d of
b
.
shoe worn y
Chapin
people i n the
.
l 6 th century ). .
To con f ess to the To confess to the

Co mp i s a l
l p riest priest
.
. .
P hi losophy Pi lo s o p i a P hiloso p hy
’
b
. . .
G la s s tu m ler
, Baso or vaso .
, . G lass tu m ble r
, .
M ass . M isa . M ass .
Ca s ti la ( Corru pt
Spaniard Span Sp n i ard Span
.
E span ol ion of the Sp

a
a
, ,
i sh
. .
ls
word Ca s ti lla )
.
Dollar , P i so s m isos
b
.
,
To acco Tabaco . .
F ather p riest P are,

. .
Cu rate Cura . .
Cen sus P ad r on. .
A nd now t hat the review or t he appor tion to thei r respe cti ve

sources ha s been m ade o f all foreign ele m ents foun d i n Tagalog i t ,
will be wel l to pause a little and consider the quality and quanti ty
of what re m ain s i n th e langu a ge That the re m aini ng portio n sh ould .
belong to th e langu a ge of the a borigines wh oever they m a y have been , ,
co m es as a necessa ry inference or as a te m porary or working hypothesi s ,

I N TRO D U CTI O N . L X X XI .
d
ser ving as s tan poi nt fo r furthe r re earch o r m a y e h eld i n suspense s
,
b
unti l i t be verified or d isproved by other facts To thi s portion .
’
belo n g m ore o r less e nti rely the articles an d i n so far as t hese

, , ,
serve to establish the rela tion of case with nouns the p r eposition s
as well ; the plu rali ing particle ; the p ronoun s ; certain peculi ariti es of z ,
the sys te m of nu m eratio n; the conj ugative m echan i s m ; the word

buildi ng an d declension m ethods ; and the enti re syn t actical fra m e .
The si ne ws th e liga m ents th e arti cles the preposi tion s and con
, , ,
j unctio ns all s m aller words which serve to kni t an d b in d the larger

,
i nto sen tences belong t herefore to th i s aboriginal ele m en t Thi s

b
, , .
ele m ent th en i s th e asi s not th e superstructu re th e core the ra

I t i s thi s ele m
, , , , ,
di ca l consti tution so to say of the langu a ge , e nt , .
that causes Tagalog t o be a different language fro m t he M alay an d

the Javanese for i n so far as i t i s co m posi t e or m ingled as i t m u s t
, ,
freely be ad m itted to be i t i s only such i n respect of i ts words n ot , ,
i n respec t of i ts cons t ruction i n fle x i o n s and generally gra m m atical fo r m s , , , , .
The f ra m e work i s aboriginal only a par t of the filling i n i s foreign , .
These fac ts see m t o p rove : First that Ta galog i s a P hi lipp i n e bor n ,
la ng u a g e Secon d that the people wi th who m the langu a ge origina ted

m ust have atta i ne d a t olerably advanced state of civi li z
.
,
ation A nd .
third that thei r descend an ts o r con ti nuers i n the use of langua g e

z
, ,
n ot only d id not m aintai n the civili a t io n of the parent people but ,
h ave even falle n into the lower C nditio n i n which they were foun d o
by the Spaniards
w
.
A s a m atter wh ich so m e student m a y perhaps consider orthy

o f i nvesti ga tion an d by reaso n of whe ther i t ha s so m e bearing o n
,
the poin t here at i ssue such a m eagre in for m ation as i s found i n ,
Hu m boldt s work abou t the relics wh ich are fo und of a n an cient

’
o r reco ndite language i n th e tradition s and rites of the M alay people :
i s give n here b efo re clos ing th e chapter I n the first book I n trOd u c .
,
tion page I I I the following passage i s found :

, ,
“
A m ong the m ( M alays ) ,
i s foun d i n severa l places frag m ents of a sacred language whi ch ,
even they n o longer u nderstand and t he custo m of res toring to life

b
,
o solete expressio ns on certai n sole m n occasion s speaks not only of ,
exu b erance antiquity an d profundity i n th e language but also of

, ,
a tte ntio n to t he changeable designation s of t he obj ects i n the cou rs e

of ti me ( 1) I n refe rence to what Cra w f u rd s ays i n his work Histo ry
.
“ -
of th e I ndi an A rchi pelago we find the following i n Hu m boldt ( 3rd ,

“
book page , A ccording t o Cra w f u rd t here see m s to exist a m ong th e ,
Bugi s an an cien t recond ite language s ti ll known to f e w which h e

‘
, ,
”
co m pare s w i th the Kawi an d the P ali
i
( )
2 A n d i n the sa m e book .
,
page 2 95 speaking of the languages o f the So u th Se a I slands he says :

, , ,
-
I n m any of those I slands there exists a sacred language n o longer ,
at all understoo d which m us t be considered as no other tha n th e on e ,
whi ch wa s for m erly s poken A n d i n a foot no te appen ded to this

Cha m isso i n the 3rd vol of Kot z
-
'
words i t i s said : ,
“
ebue s voyage ,
. .
o f discovery page 4 5 M ariner ( I I 2 17 ) gives a sa m ple but a very

, . .
,
s m all one of thi s language as i t i s stil l used i n funeral servi ces

, ,
.
( 1) M a n fi n d e t b ei i hn e n ,
an m e hr e r e n Or t e n , je t z t i h ne n s e lb s t nov er
s t and li che Br u chs t i i cke

‘
e i ne r h e i li g e n Sp r a ch e , u n d d e r G e b r a u c h v e ra l e tet A u s d rti ck e
‘
b e i g e w i s s e n G e le g e n he i te n f e i e r li c h i n s L e b e n u r u ck u r u f e n, z z z eu gt n i c ht b lo s s
v o n R e i c h t h u m , A lte r u n d Ti e t e d e r Sp r a c he , s o nd e rn a u ch v on A u t me r ks a m ke i t
au f di e i m L a u f e d e r Z e i t w e c hs e lnd e B e z e i chn u n g d e r G e g e n s t a nd e .
(2) E s s o ll, D a ch Cra w f u r d , u n te r de n Bug i s e i n e v e r b o r g e ne , a lt e , n o ch
v on . We ni ge n gekan nt e Sp ra che ge b e n, we l che er mi t d e m K a wi a nd Pa t

h v e rg e c t l i it .
11
L XXX I I . THE TA G A L O G L A N G U A G E
The r e a r e f ou n d ther e i n ea s i ly r e cog ni zbl a e Ta g a log w or ds w hi ch a re
s ti ll i n (I)
'
I t Will b e hi g hly desirable that so m e one better qualified th an the

'
”
,
author for researches of thi s ki nd should i nquire i n to t he relation wh i ch ,
t he m a tte r i n
‘
the abo ve quotation s m a y have wi th thi s aboriginal

F i li p i no language which has been so often spo k e n o f i n this outlin e .
Su ch a review of the work of Cr a w f u r d as was sai d ( page X X I )

would be given herei n follows : Cra w f u rd as al ready stated published , , ,
”
185 2 his G ra m m ar and D ictionary of the M alay L anguage i n two
“
'
in
volu m es the firs t o f whi ch contain s a Dissertation and the G ra m m ar
, ,
an d the second the Dictionary I t was i n t he Dissert a ti on that h e

,
.
"
w ent into a co m parative study of the M alay with the other languages
of
'
the M alay archipelago ; and a m ong those spoken i n these I slan ds , ,
with the Tagal og and the Bisayan ; usi ng for th e co m pari son of Tagalog , ,
as already i ndicated Sa n A g u s ti n s G ra m m ar an d N oce da s Dic ti onary

,
’ ’ ’
.
A s was to be expecte d o f this great authori ty i n m atters p ertai n

'
i ng to the I ndi an A rchipelago his study i s a very able o ne i n

1
,
re s pect to th e languages of the western portion of M alaysia the ,
M alay an d Javanese especially That part however i n his Di ss erta .

, ,
tion devoted to Tagalog an d Bisayan shows that hi s acquai ntance

"
w ith t he sa m e was m uch poore r than that evinced by Hu m oldt b .
A s ide fro m what he says i n ref u tation of the theory of the M alay
"
parentage of the two P h i lippi ne tongues there i s little m ore th at a ,
Tagalog student m a y s hare wi th hi m i n hi s o ther views Hi s discovery .
of thi s di f ferent parentage howeve r see m s rather the result of a n act , .
of co m plia nce wi th a hypothesis lai d down a p r i or i than a conclu s .
ion arriv ed at as the result of a logi cal deductive p roce ss Hi s .
revi ew a bou nds i n errors both of exp ression and of appreciation

w
, ,
b eginn i ng ith that of referri ng to the l anguage as th e Ta g a la b e ,
c ause i t is so n a m ed by the Spanish fri ars m erely as a m atter of

“ "
gr am m atical a gree m ent with the fe m inine n oun le ng u a tongu e ; i n ,
Spanish On this pa rti cular poi nt he says : ( p a ge cv ) The Tagala

“
b
.
,
may e considered t he p ri ncipal language of t he i s la n d o f L u co n

' ’
The native word i s Tagalog an d i s as usual i n s uch cases t he , ,
na m e both of th e na t io n an d of th e language He the n pases over .

’
to the alphabet i n the descri ptio n of w hi c h he , co m m i ts the e rro r ‘
m entioned i n the foot note of page X L I Speaki ng o f t he ancien t

-
.
Tagalog alphabet ( 2 ) h e says : ( page cvii ) The Ta gala alphabet i s s till

“
i n use i n a f e w parts of the island of L u con , although the Sp a niards

( not I think wi thout reason ) discourage i t That th is ancient
b
,
alpha et could n ever have been used for any practical purposes n o .
,
written native speci m en of sa m e besi des having eve r been produced , , ,
i s explained i n the chapter devote d t o Orthography i n thi s book

‘
I n pages cvi ii cix Cra w f u rd exa m ines with various fortun e t he

'
—
,
'
, ,
Tagalog phonetic character an d i n the co m parison whic h h e i n ak e s

‘
'
of sa m e with those of the M alay and th e Javanese there are found ,
a ccurate re m a rks so m e of which have bee n noted when trea ting ,

'
of the sa m e subject i n thi s outlook The gra mm atica l structure of

‘
M alay an d Tagalog i s next by hi m co m pared ( pages cix cxiv ) and ,

—
A u f m e hr e re n d e r d o r ti g e n I n s e ln g i e b t e s e i n e , je t d u rcha u s u n v e r
( 1) tz
s t a nd li ch e , h e i li g e Sp r a ch e , d i e m a n s i c h d o c h a u c h n i cht a n d e rs a ls e h e m a ls ,
g e s p r o c he n d e n k e n , ( 1) Cha m i s s o i m d ri t e n B a n d s
. v on Ko e b u e s E n td e c k
. t «
tz '
u n g s re i s e S 45 M a ri n e r ( I I
. . 2 17) g i e b t e i n e , d o c h s e hr k e i n e Pr o b e d i e s e r
. l
,
Sp r a che , w i e s i e b e i B e g r a b n i s s e n g e b ra u ch t w i r d I n d i e s e r b e fi nd e n s i c h e i n i g e .
l e i ch k e n nt li ch e n o ch he u te g e b r au chli c he Ta g a li s che W e t t e r
t .
2
( ) Se e d e i
s c p i o n of thi s
r t
a lp h ab e t i n t h e
“
Or h o g r a p h y
'
t .
I N TRO DU CTI O N . L X XX I II .
a lthough he appreciates upon the whole properly the d iffe rence s , , .
b etween the t wo languages stil l there are so m e errors b oth i n ; hi s

:
, , .
conception of Tagalog and i n his n o m en clatu r e R eferri n g to the

, .
latter he says :,
“
The adj ecti ve which i n co m position follows the ,
n ou n A s far as our knowledge enables u s to say such a rule a s ,
thi s Cra w f u rd could fi n d i n n o Spanish Tagalog gra m m ar certainly n ot

,
-
,
i n Sa n A gusti n s
'
I f this were true th e adj ective then i n Ta galog

.
, , , ,
would differ fro m the sa m e part of speech i n M alay on ly i n t he for m ;

bu t al though i t can take the po si tion that Cr a w f u r d assigns to i t .
after the noun still that of co m i ng before the sa m e i s far m ore co mm o n

b
, , .
N or can any reaso n e assigned for Cra w f u r d having m isquoted Sa n

A gustin i n thi s and i n other m atters I nstead of a s cri bin g t h e co n
'
s onan t f to Tagalog ( see agai n foot note page X L I ) the Sp a n i s h w ri te r

'
b
, , ,
o n th e contrary calls attention to i ts a sence fro m the language i n

w z
,
the followi ng ords : x and strong 7 are not foun d i n thi s

j
,
language ( )
1 A s to the positi on of the ad ecti ve nothing i s said i n
w
.
,
Sa n A gustin n or as i t necessary that he should say anything o n

, ,
this point i nas m uch as he wrote i n Spanish and for Spania rds wh o
w
,
were conversan t ith L a t i n a n d it was u nderstood therefore that ,

.
,
.
,
the positio n of the adj ective was in Tagalog the sa m e as i n those

other t wo languages ; but Cra w f u rd should not ho ever fail to h ave
“
,
”
w ,
noti ced the two exa m ples a ng ta nong ma g a li ng “

vel a ng ma g a li ng,
"
na ta n b
“
the m a n good
, or “
the good m a n ; found a m ong , ,
others i n the short Ch apter wh i ch the A ugusti nian friar devotes to

,
the subj ect

b
.
Cra w f u rd goes on saying : “

There is ut one de m on strati v e ,
“ “ ” "
i ta this o r th a t I t i s not easy to see how Cra wf u rd ca m e
b
.
,
to thi s belief It was not certai nly . y an y; o m i s s i o n or m i stake i n , , ,

”
Sa n A gusti n s G ra mm ar I n Chapter 1s t Parag 6 i s foun d the
’
w
. .
, ,
follo ing : A dj ective and de m onstrative prono uns " I to Ya on I g an

“ “ ”
w
.
, , ,
of hich h e gives the declension I t i s not surprising therefore that .

, ,
Cra w f u rd co ncei ved an erro neous opi nio n o f the i nferiority of Tagalog ;
for there i s perhaps n o language i n the world which does n ot possess
d
,
at least two de m onstrative pronouns an d two a verbs of place

, .
“ "
Tagalog possesses three o ne for this “
an d two for that h avi n g
, ,
,
, ,
beside s so m e i nter m ediate ones an d traces m oreover of the nu m erous

, , ,
oth ers still fou nd i n the M a la g a s i and to so m e extent i n the Bisayan

b
, ,
( P an ayano ) and the I a n ag as well .
I n hi s review of the Tagalog verb Cra w f u rd has thi s m uch ,

"
'
to say : “
The Tagala verb is i n i tself sufficiently co m plex an d ha s
been m ade t m appear m ore so y the the vai n efforts o f the Span ish b
gra mm arian s to force i t i nto a parallel i th the L ati n w
There are no m ean s of distinguishing bet een the transitive a nd i n w
transitive verb as i n M alay and Javan ese “
The optative an d
b b
.
,
su j unctive m odes ( sic ) are for m ed y the auxiliary n a v a ( mi nd i s

b
.
the correct spelling ) which is descri ed as equivalent i n m eaning to

“ ”
the L a ti n uti n a m .
There is perhaps as m uch of truth as of error i n the

b
a ove state m ents We agree with Cra w f u rd i n believi n g that the
. . .
Span ish ecclesiastics Sa n A gus tin however less than others allow
b w
, , , ,
ed the m selves to e too m u ch influenced by L atin i n .

ri tin g
the gra m m ars of th e tongues spoken i n these I slands ; but t hei r
conception of the verb could hardly be poorer than Cra w f u rd s ’
( 1) N o s e ha ll a en es ta le n g u a f m y , , z r f u e r te . Comp e ndi o de l A rte

de la L e ngu a Ta ga l a , Pros c di a . Capttulu VI I 2 . -
L XX X I V . THE TAGAL O G L A N GUA G E .
e y e d ad m itting that that of the for m er was n ever the cl e are s t ; f er i t i s a : '
fact that the nature of the Ta galo g verb has been rightly and thoroughly
unders tood only by Hu m boldt What Cra w f u rd says of th e language .
n ot affording th e me an s of di stinguish ing between tran sitive a n d i n

tra n si t ive causal an d p assive verbs ; o f ti m e being expressed by the
'
a pplication o f i nseparable particles with o ut m ention ing the peculia r ,
f eature of the reduplication o f syllables ; h is giving of m a i n la g i nstead

of ma tu tu lng as the future tense of ta lng
“
s leeping ; hi s state m ent to ,
the effect t hat there i s only one word for the expressio n of m ood ; an d
then s a ying that the a n ( by hi m written n a ) passi ve i s th at of m ost
general application shows well h ow superficial his knowledge of t he
,
Tagalog verb was ; while on the other hand errors ( whether m i sprints , ,
o r m isconceptions n o one knows ) i n the s pelling as i ka n for i cao

, , ,
s a g a fo r s a i g o n i ng a for n i ny b 3a i ng a for 3a i ny b etc render hi s

, , , .
,
nom encla ture disagreeable to every reader acqu a i nted with Tagalog .
I n what he says of the Optative and s ubj unctive m oods being

for m ed by n a a a ( this word is by no m eans a n auxiliary ) he does
,
n ot m isquote hi s Spanish guide for i t i s so stated by the latter I t ,

.
i s true that n a n a m a y be use d fo r a ki n d of optative m o od i n

Ta galog ; but i t i s no t the only wo rd as t here are o thers b oth for , ,
thi s a n d for the true subj unctive or con ditional m ood and th e fact ,
that Sa n A gustin di d not m enti on the m i s probably due t o th e ex

ces s i v e co m pendiousness of hi s G ra m m ar .
A fter revi ewing the Tagalog verb Cra w f u rd c oncludes : ,

“
F ro m thi s sketch o f Tagala gra m m ar it will appear t hat there ,
i s very li t tle i n co m mon between it and t h e gra m m ars of the M alay

'
and Javanese I n Ta gala the relation s of the noun are expressed

'
.
,
by a Class of articles appro priated t o t he purpose ; a nd i n th e M alay ,
Javanese an d other l an gua ges o f the West by prepositio ns a s i n the

, , ,
m odern languages o f E urope I n the Ta ga la a plural i s fo r m ed

.
,
b y a specific particle appropriated to t h is speci al purpose ; i n M alay

and Javanese by o rd inary adj ectives expressing plurality
,
G ender .
i s expressed i n M alay by wo rds expressing the sexe s of whi ch

, , .
there i s one s e t fo r m a n an d a distinct one for the lower ani m a ls ,

.
I n the Ta galog there i s b ut one se t e qually applicable to both ,

.
Cra w f u r d next exa m ines the Tagalog personal pronouns an d

'
, , ,
m akes re m arks so m e of which h ave been m e ntione d i n this sketch

,
( see p a ges X L I V and X L V ) an d then he brings the m a t ter to

,
a
cl ose by saying :
“
I n the Tagala verb there i s ha rdly anything to re m i n d us o f ,
the M alay o r Javanese We m i ss i n i t the for m s of these two lan

.
guages for m ar k ing th e i ntran sitive t he transiti v e causal and passive

b
, ,
ver . Ti m e is expressed i n Tagala by i n separable particles ; i n M alay

, ,
a nd J a vanese by auxi liaries which are adverbs I n M alay and Javanese .

,
m ood is expressed by several different auxiliaries and i n Tagala ,
also by the sa m e m eans ; there b eing but o ne word and that di f fer , ,
ing enti re ly fro m any of those used i n the two wes t e rn languages .
“
I t does n ot then appear f ro m a co m pari so n of the p h o n e t i e =
, , ,
character a nd gra m m atical structure of the Tagala wi th those o f

, ,
~
M alay and Javanese that t here i s any ground for fancyi n g the m
,
t o be one an d the sa m e la n guage or languages sprung fro m a ,
co m m on parent an d only diversified by the effects of ti m e and

,
:
di sta nce .
The preceding conclusio ns thoug h arrived at throu g h a c hai n ,
of fi p a r ti a ll
y m i sconceived facts an d t h r o u g h a so m ew hat d e f ecti v e ,
.
reasoni ng a re i n the m ain sound and accep ta b le What follo w s i m

, , ,
.
,
I N TRO DU CTI O N . L XXX V .
d
m e i a tely and Su b sequently i s plai nly a m i s take ; b u t i t mu st b e s ai d ,
'
'
i n j ustificatio n o f Cra w f u rd that he was i n duce d i n to e rro r b y t he ~
m isle ading signification re ndering method used in F Juan d e N o c e d a s '

'
.
Di ction ary .
I n pages cxrx Cxx h e says : -
b
,
The l angua ges o f th e P hilippine I slands m a y be descri e d ,
n ot as COp i o u s b u t wordy I n the s tate of society i n w hi ch the

‘
.
,
~
n ati ves of the Ph ili ppines were for m ed i deas are co nsidered m o re
b
,
i n concrete than i n abs t ract and by a n i m portance ei ng attached ,
to tri vi al m atters a p rofusion springs u p which i n a m ore advanced

, , ,
state of socie ty a re co nsidered u nwo rthy o f reten tion o r whi ch i f

b
, ,
retain ed would o nly e productive o f perplexity an d distraction

, .
Cra w f u rd s assu m ption to the effect that a p ro q i o n o f s peci fi c

'
ter m s i n a la n guage i s th e n at u ral grow th of a rude state of civi li

z a t i o n i s s o m e w hat strange an d see m s to call for furth er proo f than
b
,
hi s are asse rtion I t m a y be co m pared t o t he o ne wh ich an agri

b
.
,
c lt u r i s t would m ake i f fro m the presence o f a thick ushy u nder

e
growth i n a p ri m eval forest he would conclude the barrenness of
b
,
'
the soil As to the deducti on n ecessarily to

. e m ade fro m hi s ,
s ta te m ent of th e specific bei ng fi rst and then the generic ter m and
, ,
“ “ ” ”
that there f ore
, P ete r was earlier than m a n
,
“
oak “
than tree , , ,
“
fi rst than one
,
“
etc i n the hu m an mi nd aside fro m bei n g con
,
’
.
,
t ra ry t o sound reason i s n ot supported by th e hi story an d the early

,
use of si m ilar ter m s i n the E nglish lan g uage The i nstance s a re .
n u m er ou s of a ter m at first of a generi c signification being later , .
restric ted to m ea n so m e m ore s pecific th i ng We h ave f o r exa m ple .

, ,
that al l foo d was once calle d m ea t an d i t i s n ot i nfrequent to fi nd ,
i t so used i n the Bi ble c h ile m eat i s n ow restricted to m ea n a ,
partic u lar ki nd of foo d The sa m e contraction o f m eaning u nder .
we nt the once m ore genera l ter m s of w e e d z he rb s c orp s e = b o dy v o , ,
y g a e = j o u r n e y of any ki nd starve ( fro m the G er m an di e .
any ki n d of death etc We are told however of a force i n every

, , ,
l anguage worki ng i n a contrary di rection which expanded the for m e r

b
,
“ ” “ ”
m eaning of polite to that of the present polished etc ; ut the ,
.
in stances here are m uch fewer and have l ittle pro m ise fo r the future
of the lang u a ge a n d fo r that of the people who speaks i t ; for it -
i s certai nly a proces s of deco m positio n which if allowed to go o n ,
u nchecked wi ll even tually bring the langu a ge down to decay an d

,
rui n That a proces s of thi s kind was g o i ng o n i n Tagalog a t the

'
ti m e i n which i t ca m e in contact with Sp anish is perhaps co n

'
, , ,
c e iy a b le but the language having bee n revived by its associatio n

, ,
w it h th at of the r ulers a n d having si nce been reduced to the

b b
,
p ri nciples of gra m m a r has later recovered an d has een rough t u p

, , ‘
to its presen t state of dev elop m ent .
Cra w f u r d next goes i nto to the exa m ina ti o n o f that porti o n of

the B isayan v ocabulary wh i ch can best support hi s theory e m i ttin g ,
opi n i on s which t here i s n o roo m here to refute an d th en he says : , ,
“
In Tagala there are 12 n a m es fo r t he cocoa nut i ncluding i ts -
,
di fferen t varieti es an d con dition s as to m aturity and pr e paration fo r

,
use . Of these on e only is M alayan t he word n i ng

,
‘
whic h i s o h , ,
v i o u s ly a
‘
corr u p tio n of fl u x the M alay but not the Javanese n a m e

w
, , ,
fo r the coco pal m I n the sa m e language

-
. there are 11 o r ds to ,
” “
e x pr ess the v erb to boil “
and 7 5 fo r the verb to go I n thi s
,
.
langu a ge also th e re are 17 words to ex p ress t he various acti o ns of

b w
.
“
earing o r ca rrying one o f hich o nly is M alayan as to carr y
'
, ,
L X XX VI . THE TA GA L O G L AN GUA GE .
o n the head
“
to carry under th e ar m s
”
,
"
to carry “
et ee n t wo
'
'
,
" “
b w ,
to c arry a ch i ld etc ’
b
.
,
The m i sleading character of th e language ooks co m po s ed by

the Spani sh friars especially that of N oce da s Dictionary havi ng been ’
d
, ,
often referred to i n this ou tlin e an m ade accountable for the errors

co m m i tted by Hu m b oldt an d Cra w f u rd an for their o pposi te theories ,
d
as to the origi n an d derivati o n of Tagalog the author n o w takes
'
advantage of thi s opportunity for showing practically how Cra wf u rd

w a s led i nto the erroneous belief of th ese 12 n a m es for the cocoa nut -
,
b
frui t y giving here as exactly as possi ble b oth i n the type a nd , ,
.
i n t he words the m atter pertaining to thi s subj ect as f o u n d i n

, l
the Tagalog Spani s h portion pages 4 67 4 68 of N oceda s Di cti onary

’
- -
, , ,
edition of
D i c t i o na r y . Tr a n s la t i o n .
Coco tie rno B oco p p . . Tender cocoa n ut -

. B oco . pp .
( 1)
Coco caido b o g n o y p c D ro p p e d o fi co co a
w
. .
Coco grande e n que beben Big cocoa nut o ut of h ich people . lo m b o .

-
,
p c dri nk l o m b o p C
w
. . . .
Coco que s e co m e con Cascara y Cocoa nut eatable alon g ith the -
,
todo p a n go s i n p e shell p a n go s i n p c . . . . .
Coco h echo j arro P a n a bb p c Cocoa n u t m a d e i n to a ja r P a na bb p c

. . .
-
. .
Coco co m o ta z ( Cocoa nut i n the way of a cup -
a a na b a b a n
.
c .
p y .
p .
b a b a n
p a n a y .
pc .
Coco t ierno c a c a lo y i n . p p . . Tender cocoa n ut c a c a lo y i n pp -

. . .
Coco p e q u e ti o q u e se co m e con c as Sm all cocoa n u t which is e ate n alo ng

’
cara y t odo t a b a l p p . . . wi th the rind t a b a l pp '
. . .
Coco N i og p c . . . Cocoa nut N i og p c . . .
Coco que si rve de j arro b o n go t . . Cocoa nut serving as a j ug h o ,

.
.
pc . fi go t p c . .
Cocos peque nos de c ascara dulce y Sm all Coc oanuts the rind of which ~
blanda t a p y a s i n pp i s sweet and soft t a p y a s i n p p

b
. . . . . .
Cocos dulces que se co m en con s u Sweet cocoa n u ts eata le along with ~
c ascara t a m y s a n pp . . . the ri n d t a m y s a n pp . . .
Of
the equivalents i n bold type ( whi ch are also so pri nted i n
t he D i ct i o n a ry for the p u rpose m entioned o n page X X I V
‘
tex t and ,
foot note ) only bog n og an d lo mbb are at p rese nt understood t he

-
,
for m er i n the sa m e significatio n of drop ped off

.
“ “
fallen cocoa n u t ,
”
fruit ; and the latte r i n that of a “

dri nking vessel ; thi s m erely -
’
becaus e the shell o r nut after scraped Clean i s m ai nly devoted to ,
th i s purpose Bu t considering the m anner i n which

. nati ves aided ,
b y the special Character of the language m ake applicatio n of cer ta i n ,

o
act i ons to t he places o r instru m ents o n which o r with which the

act i on i n perform ed we m a y trace p a ng os i n to p a ngbs “
to suck
,
'
sugar cane ; and consider th at the ter m m ight have been appli e d
-
to such speci m en s of the cocoa nut fruit as the tenderness of which -
W u ld allow of perfor m ing therewith t he sa m e actio n as p erfor m ed

9
Wi th the sugar cane Ta mys a n is not a radical but a gra mm atical for m
-
.
,
1 2 .
ha v i ng m e an
‘
also a sense of application . Ta mils -

an s, properly ,
l 2
w
s eeten -
ed . It is also given i n the Sp a ni sh Tagalog -
portion of the .
( l ) p p = p e n ulti m a p r o du c t a o r ha v i n g t he a cc e n t o n t he p e nu lti ma e t s y la b le;

l
=
,
pc p em i lti ma correp ta , or havi ng the a cce nt on the las t s yll a b le .

L X X XV I I I . THE TA GA L O G L A N G U A GE .
: loco but eventually h e s ticks to the Bisaya n fo r hi s co m pari son Of

I . . .
the Bisayan h e says : That the phoneti c character co rresponds le tter

f or letter w ith the sa m e i n Tagalog ; that th e cases of n oun s are t he
sa m e i n b oth languages t he ar t i cles of co m m o n an d p roper n ou ns
,
being identical ; that t he plu ral o f th e Bisayan n ou n i s fo r m ed b y

-
J a n appropriat e word which i s t he sa m e as i n Tagalog ; that gender

i s ex p ressed i n Bisayan by the very sa m e two words s ignifying
m asculine a n d fe m ini ne i n Ta galog ; that the Bisayan p ronouns are
the sa m e as and a re decli ned as i n Tagalog ; that th e de m o nstrative
,
pronoun s are the sa m e i n the t w o languages ; that the Bis aya n verb
i s for m ed o n t he sa m e princip le as the Tagalog an d n early by the
sa m e ter ms ; th at there exists n o substan ti ve ver i n both languages ; b
that tense an d m ood are in Tagalo g an d Bi sayan expressed n o t b y ,
auxi liari es but by i nseparable parti cles whi ch are generally t he sa m e

, ,
i n the two languages ; and th at th e pass ive verb an d t he verb a l n oun

a re a lso for m ed by i nseparab le particles i n Bi sayan an d i n Tagalog .
E verybody we believe wi ll con clude fro m the above id enti ties t he

, ,
co m m uni ty of th e parentage an d deriv a tio n of the two lan gu ages ; but

Cra w f u rd does n o t fo r he ends by saying : ,
“
Judging t hen by the identity of the ph oneti c character of the
, ,
'
B isaya an d Tagala an d the close parallel which run s th rough thei r

,
. whole gra m m atical structure we m ight b e disposed to co m e at once , , ,
to the c onclusion that th ey are m ere d ialects o f a co m m on tongue

,
.
Thi s i s however opposed by the stubbo rn fact that th e great m aj ority

, ,
of thei r nouns ad j ectives an d e specially particles are wholly d i fi e re n t

, , .
I n suppo rt of th i s vi e w he the n gives the fol lowi ng list of ,
w hat he c alls particles i n th e two languages saying : ,

“
I s hall e x hi b i bi t a few of each of th ese classes of word s as
”
e xa m ples beginn ing with the parti cles :
,
E N G L I SH TA G A L A . B I SA YA .
Bagu A tu b a n g a i i .
Daku . N ayun d e pi t , .
P a s a b a li . Sa tu n g u d .
D i y a ta . Sa hn g s u b u n g , , i ngu n .
Vala . Sauala .
Sa a n . Hai n .
Ditu . Dini di nb i
,
.
Taas . I baban itaas ,
Bab au . Ta lu tu g kuta , .
P alak . Ha la g u .
G unaguna . Sauala p a -
.
N uon nuun , . Sa d tu .
Hapu n Ola i e b apuu

ba
.
,
.
G ayu n . Sili ng si ni su , n g s ini

-
.
Da li an . Hinai hinai -
.
N a m an . Sa b u n g m a n .
Da i n i . M ara m u , d agaya .
Dal i an , iku t ayu ayu
Suka t A yau ,
sarang .
Pa . Pa .
L am a n g . A ik a n , bala ,
. nah a .
Di Dili i ndi .
K andi
,
On ly , but . . Di .
t d i sapp
l
I is a matte r o f much o i nt me n t f o r thos e w ho ha v e

I n no nu cn ox .
ad mi re d th e p r o f u n d i ty w h ch
i
Cra w f u r d showed i n hi s r e s e a rc h
'
i n to
ethnolo gy of t he Mala y A r chi pela go , an d of re gre t f or thos e w ho ha ve “
th e P hi li ppine ph i lo lo gy at hea rt , t o fi n d hi m s o poo rly pr e pa re d to
a g fl og
z p ‘
dol i z i a d a n d di i n t he Bis a y a n, co lu mn whi ch m a y be si b
'
a d to , e
”
p a r ti cl e s i n the s e n s e i n w hi ch
“
p a rt i c le i s u n d e r s t o o d by Cra w f u rd ,
a ll t he ot her te rms are ei the r co m p ou n ds a nd e ven phra s es or m l)
s t a n ti v e w ord s t he la tt e r be i n g s u s c ept i ble of ec omi n g v e r bs a nd b ,
d
.
,
of be in g con ju gate i n th e res pe cti ve la n gua ge s Thu s di gi a ta i s .

,
a c o m po u n d of di + ya ta , m an , o f Tra m ; M of “ I f ( ii,
'
b
- — -
. ,
o t h ele m en t s o f w hi c h exi s t a ls o se pa ra te ly i n th e la n gua ge B og a,

"
me a ns “
ne w i n Ta ga lo g a n d Cra w f u rd hi m s elf giv es it i n t he lis t
d
,
i mm e i ate ly follo w i n g o f a d j e c ti v e s i n the tw o la n g ua ges ; m ba u gc u ,

gi v en by Cra w f ur d a s i ts Bim y a n cou n te r pa rt m ea n s a nd ,
"
“
i n the p res e n ce o f
'
an a u ba a ga n b e f o re
“
, t ha t i s to s a y ; i n re f ,
"
m e nc e to p lac e , w hi l e ba go m ea n s
- “
be f or e
, i n r efe r en ce to ti m e .
Bo t h Ja ne a n d da p it are gi ve n i n N oce d a s Di ct i o na r y as the e qui ’
v a len t e o f t he Sp a ni s h
“
ha ci a
"
= E u g li s h “
to w a r d; b u t do p a} ha s b ee n
’
omi t te d b y Cra wf u rd i n t he Ta ga lo g co lu m n a n d gi ven o nly i n t ha t ,
P a s a ba h ( th e ri gh t s pe lli ng i s gi m ba ls ] m ea ns
'
o f t he B i s a y a n
“
. to ,
"
to e x clu de ?
“
e x cep t,
“
bu t n e i t he r
“
i ns te a d of n or a nyt hin g i n
b
,
co nn ec t i o n w i t h the i d ea o f a su s ti t u te Sa t u rn- g od (i t i s i m p o rta nt t o

note t ha t i n w ha t Cu wf u rd g i v e s as o ne w or d t he r e a re tw o s a an d ,
“
b u lge d) w hi c h appea r s i n the lis t a s t he B is a y a n c ou nte r pa r t f or
. ia
”
s te a d o f o fie rs s i m i lar s tr a n ge w a nde r in g of m ea ni ng Tu g ud i s i n
’
.
,
" “
Bis a y a n a w a d o f w i d e si gn ifi ca ti o n I t m ea n s to belong to
“
. to ,
" ”
b e i n f ro nt o f , “
to a s s i gn
“
t o li e ,
an d ha s , b y exte n si on t h e co n
, ,
"
to w a rd e tc ; bu t i t i s n ot fo und
"
di ti o na l i m po rt o f w ere i t n o t f o r
“ “
d
, ,
"
t ha t i t ca n ev er b e ma de to co rres po n w i th
“
i n ste a d of i n E ng li s h
"
D i y a ta m ea n s i n Ta ga log “
t he refo r e ;
“
if s e ; an d ou t of the t hr ee
w d or s cu li a g “ bu g i ng -n give n by Cra w f ur d a s eq u i v a len t s o f t he
,
"
, .
E n gli sh a cco rdi n g to i n B i s a y a n on ly “ bu y a n d th i s : are f on n d

“
,
i n t he la n gua ge Sa bra - i d l i ll il a ud i a gu m “
t
‘
n n o o ea n s o
” “ "
g . s us e o y ”
, ,
ha v in g o nly b y exte nsi o n t he s g n i fi ca ti o n o f as “

'
i mi ta t e , to do a s , ,
Ua lé i s i n bot h la ngu ag es t he t e r m b y W hi ch
“ ” “ "
lik e, acc o r di n g to .
“
nega ti on of the e xi s te n ce is exp re s s ed an d i ts co rre s p o ndence i n
’
w
,
i t hou t i s m ore a m a tte r of e thi e s tha n o f _g ra m

"
s igni fi c ati on w i t h
“
ma r
b
.M a ki ng a pp lica ti on o f th e n e ga ti v e i m port f ou n d m s a i d i t
1 2 3 1 2
= w i t i o u t) ta i l;
ay ,
m
e sa id : ( mug a gony) a c hi ng bu lle t ( th dog) ( h v g i l
“
e a n n o
,
and we ma y i n t hi s w a y co nsi d er tha t mo ld i s t he e q u i valen t f or

“
w
i thou t "
but w e a re n o t to re cko n t his i n the co m pa ri s on as a
sign of a di fi e re n t pa re n ta g e o f t he two la n guag es Se ri a ls
g i y en .
,
b y Cra w f u rd i n t he B i sa y an c o lum n i s n ot o n e wo rd b ut tw o di s ti nc t , ,
wo r ds s o an d u d a ha v i ng s o m ewhat t he m ea m ng of the E ngli s h

,
' ’
z
“
phra s e a t a ti m e w he n th e r e wa s n o t
d
.
N o t t o swell th i s I n tr o uc ti on to the si e an d cha ra cte r o f a

g ra mm ar ,
furt her ex a mi na ti on of C r a w f ur d s ta bl e i s h e r e o m i t te ; b u t d
the rea d er m a y res t s a ti sfi e d tha t s i m i l a r er ro rs ex i st i n th e ot her w or ds
of hi s lis t .
Cra w f u rd ha s m ade a ba s i f hi co m p ti ve t e m a n d a
s o s ar a
s ys
d
co n i ti o n fo r di sc ove ri n g the co m m on o ri gi n an d deri v a ti on pf a ny .
“30 la nguag es , the a ccor d o f bo t h i n the p re p on taon s ; a d I t t s a

-
p
-
g
XC . THE TA GA L oc L A A N GU GE .
m att e r of surpri se to see tha t he ha s o m i tted to use this m eth o d

f or hi s
,
c ompariso n of Tagalog and Bisayan Had he do ne this o r .
,
rather had he been i n a positio n to do this properly he would the n

, ,
have falle n upon the to uch stone for ascertaining the u ni ty of the
,
-
Fi lip i no tongues .
Of preposition s i n th e sense i n whi ch th is word is applied to

the E u ro p e a n languages only the following are found i n Tagalog : ,
for the no m inative case singular ; of co m m o n noun s or

posse s sive p rOp e r
nouns of things .
obj ectiv e
no m inative
possessive of p rOp e r n ouns of person s .
obj ective
no m i native plural ;
of co m plex person al na m es
o s s e s s rv e
p indicati ng co m p a m o n s hi p
ca n d zqm nd '
, obj ective
.
A ll
the o ther direc ti ves or particles called prepositions i n our
languages a re i n Tagalog words belonging to o ther parts of speech ,
which are used ei ther alon e o r i n connec t i on wi t h the p receding particles

f or t he o ther r e lations which m a y exi st between t w o nouns Thus .
,
ca s a m ci
“ “
co m pan ion
‘
,
i s so m eti m es used for with ; c a 1006 i n the
“
,
’
,
“
i n terior of fro m loob the i nside “
fo r i h “
with i n hu m p
’
, , 8a , , ,
” “ “
“
i n the presence of fro m ha m p fron t for before ; b ut the true
, , ,
preposi t io n i n th e latter two cases i s s et an d th e adj u n cts a re m erely

c om pletive ter m s N o w these par ticles are
. i th so m e vari ation of
, ,
w
for m , co m m on t o all th e languages spoken by the Chri s tian n ative
i n habitan ts i n these I slands .
I t m a y perhaps be asked how langu a ges sai d to b e of such a

co m plex stru cture an d for wh ich such a high superiori ty ove r M alay
d
,
i s clai m e can get along well wi th this paucity of such i m portan t

,
ele m ents as prepositions are con s idered to be They however do .

, , ,
and this fact i s t he m ost i m portant charac teristic o f their co m m o n

parenta ge an d of thei r dissi m ilarity fro m the M alay th e Javanese an d ,
the ot her languages of the M alay arc hipelago I t i s wi th the prepositions .
i n Tagalog as with the relative pronoun o nly o n a m uch larger and ,
m ore i m portant scale The above di rectives are m ainly to be used i n

.
sen t ences the verb of which i s i n the active voi ce ; but i t m u st be

born e i n m i nd that the u se of the one o r th e o ther voi ce of the
verb i s not arbi trary i n Tagalog The active voi ce i s to e used . b
w hen th e action i s represented i n ab stract o r as i n reference to an ,
i ndeter m inate obj ect I f the reference i s to a de ter m inate obj ect
-
o r if ti m e m anner place i n stru m ent cause etc i s to be denoted ,

, , , , , .
,
t he verb i n Tagalog shou ld be used i n the passive voice I t i s then .
that those Tagalog verbal passive for m s which generally refer to the
i nstru m ent cause p la c e etc for the action connote the relation which
, , , , ,
i s the p rovince of the prepositio n to establis h i n other l anguages .
I t will be seen th erefo re that whi le for exa m ple bu mi li m eans to “
z
, , , , ,
” “ ”
buy ; that i s to say the act of a person who buys , y bi l m eans ,
‘
,
“
to buy wi th and to buy i n beh a l f o r for th e s a ke of
, accord ,
i ng to th e nature o f subj ect ; an d that on the other hand bi li ka n , , ,
contracted i nto bi lhd n m ean s to buy fro m H u mcm ap i s to “

'
, .
.
,
“
look for ; but y hdn a p
’
is to loo k fo r wi th ; w h ile ha n ap a n
d
,
“
is to b e s earche fo r o n a person ; p a gha nap a n
. to loo k fo r ,
"
f
la n g u a g e co m m enting on the chara cter of the words which
. A fter
Tagalog borrowed fro m M alay and after assuring his readers th at in th e
‘
m aj ority of cases i n which the M alay word i s fou nd wi thout a synony m

i n Tagalog the borrowed word is a generic ter m Cra w f u rd says :
, ,
“
The absen ce i n the t wo leadin g P hi lippin e la n gua g es of such ,
generi c ter m s as these n o w enu m erated i ndicates a rude state of ,
society an d language a m ong the Phi li ppi ne i slanders previous to th ei r

i ntercourse with th e m ore advanced n ations of the estern part of w
t he I ndian A rchipelago ; an d poi nts at the sa m e ti m e to the cause ’
, , ,
w hi ch gave ri se to the i ntroduction of a consi derable class of M alay

and Javanese ords w .
F urther on i n his Dissertation ( page ccxxvii i ) i n an atte m pt ,
at showi ng th e i m portance of the M alay ele m ent i n the languages

spoken i n these Islands i s foun d the followi ng list ‘
, .
E ng li s h . Ta g a la . Bis a ya . M a la y a n .
As u j
bw j
.
,
Babi m a i , , .
M anuk j , .
Ka m bing m
b
.
,
K arbau m f; k a u j , ,
.
G aj ah s ,
Itik m , .
Kuching c , .
“
He then says : ,
A m ong these words there can scarcely be
,
sai d to b e any that are no t either M alay or that h ave not co m e .
through th e M alayan ; n or can I fi n d th at any o f th e m h ave n ative

syn ony m s A si de fro m t he fact that i n th e a ove list a y a m i s a
.
“ ”
b
synony m of a m an d that th ere i s also a M alay ter m for ca t
, ,
i n the list below th e synony m s are given for the other M alay
ter m s ka mbi ng and g aj a h excepted
,
hich Cra w f u r d could n o t fin d , w
i n Tagalog .
E n g li s h . M a la y . Ta g a lo g . S y n o ny m s .
Dog . As u .
( )
1 As o . A ya m , banagan .
Hog Babi B abuy Pa g i l

w
-
. . . .
Do m estic fo l . M anuk . M a nu c . Ibon .
Buffalo Ka ra ba w Calab ao A n u ang d a m ula g

b
. . .
, .
Duck . I ti k . I ti c . P apan ib i , .
Ca t . Ku chin . P usa . Coting .
Cra w f u rd s conclusio n i s to the effect that , sin ce there are n o

’
s y non y m s i n the la n gu a ge , a ll the do m estic ani m als denoted by the

M alay words were i m ported i nto th e P hilippi nes an d h e includ e s ,
therei n also the elephant , which i s known bo th i n M alay a nd ,
i n Tagalog by a n a m e take n fro m Sanskri t I n the sa m e

‘
way as that for do m esti c ani m als , he gives li sts for words
of plants m etals for ter m s r e latin g to the m echani c a rts , to the
, ,
art of navigation , e tc , i n order to s how that a rude s ta te of civil i

( 1) A m is g i e n i n o u r li s t s v
( s e e o n p a g e X X X V ) a s a n e x c lu s i v e ly
J a v a n e s e w o r d , w hi le i n t he a b o v e t a b le C r a w f u r d g i e s i t a s o n e c o m m o n t o t h e v
M a la y a n d t he J a v a n e s e ; b u t he hi m s e lf d e s c r i b e s i t i n hi s M a la y Di c ti o n a r y
( p a g e 10) i n t he f o llo w i n g w a y :
“
Am ( J ) The d og I t i s u s e d i n t he M a la y o n ly . .
i
i n t he w o rd g g i aau , “
t he d og or ca n i ne
-
e e th t .
I N TRO D U CTI O N . XCIII .
zi
a t on m ust
have p revai led i n these I slands prio r to the infusio n of M alay ,
and to show also the i nfluence exercised by the latter over th e lang u age .
Of course we canno t go i nto the exa m inatio n of all h is lis t s

,
wi tho ut trespassing upon the li m its fixed fo r this outli ne but the reader , ,
here to o m a y be sure t hat errors si m ilar to those whi ch h ave been

,
noti ced i n the preceding paragraph s run through out the m all N a y o ne i s .
,
eve n led to believe that Cra w f u r d has t a ken advantage of the double
’
vocabulary i n N oceda s Dictionary to create i n the reader s m i n d the
'
i m pressio n o f a poverty of generic ter m s i n Tagalog by gi ving , ,
so m eti m es the obsolete o r native and o m itting th e usual or M alay ,
word a n d by giving other t i m es the latter an d o m itting th e n ative

, , ,
ter m In the long l is ts of pages ccxxxii ccxxxii i this h a s been do n e

.
,
“ “ “
i n the case of d u g a to sou n d ; a la g ou a c ti d e ; ,s a uo an cho r ; , ,
words no longer understoo d l n Tagalog but contai ned however i n N oceda 8

b
, , ,
Dicti onary a nd apparently g i ven y Cra w f u rd fo r the purp ose of sho w

, , ,
ing that these ter m s had to b e i m po rte d fro m M alay ; a thing wh i ch

could not hav e been done if the usual n ativ e ter m s ta r oc ta ob a n d
d
, ,
Si p i t had bee n given ; while the vocabulary was turne th e o ther way
w
,
”
i n the case of bon doc
“
m ountain ; where the giving of bi i q u i d ould
’
w
,
sho d erivati on fro m t he M alay bu qu i t

b
.
Speci m en s as these exhi bited i n h is work y Cra w f u rd see m

to be m ere selection s of the ords of that ki nd which m a y best w
serve his hypoth esis 1
w
.
A s to the ch aracter and i m portance of the ords whi ch Ta

galog borrowe d fro m M alay sufficien t i t i s eli eved has been sai d ,
b ,
elsewhere i n hi s sketch as to dispen s e wi t h further co m m en t agai n

h ere A s to Cra w f u rd s assertion Of the F i lip i n o tongues being devoi d ’
b
.
of such generic term s as the lack of which i ndica tes a ackwa rd

z
state of civi li a ti o n of the i nhabitants of the s e I slan ds p rior to th e i r
i ntercourse with th e m ore advanced n a tio ns of th e western p ortio n
of the I ndian A rchipelago the f o llowing lists of exclusively Ta galog ,
te r m s m a y perhap s be of use i n co ntradi cti ng hi s state m ent .
A dj ectives :
Ma b uti M asa m a . .
Busilac M apul a
g
. .
M a ri q u i t Pan it . .
M ainit M ala m ig
. .
M ahaba M ai oli . .
M alaqu i , daquila M aliit . .
M iscellaneou s ter m s :
Wate r E arth . . Tubi g . L upa .
M an . Wo m an . Tau o . Baba y e .
Body Soul . . Ca t a ou a n Ca lo lo u a . .
Hand M outh . . Ga m ay Bi b i g . .
L ife. P ro perty . B li ha y A ri . .
Honey F ish Cotton . . . P ulot I s da

. Bulac . .
B roth er B roth e r i n law - -

.
Ca p a ti d Bay ao . .
Banana . Wax . Saguing Pa c q u i t . .
Ter m s rela ti ng to the m oral and i ntelectual po ers : w

M e m ory U nderstanding . . A laa la Bai t . .
Will R eason
. . L oob , i big Catuiran . .
X CI V . THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
Te r m s relating to social condition .
M aster Slave . . Pa ngi n o o n A lipi n . .
L ineage N obi lity . . A n g c a n L ipi . .
L a w Tyranny
. . Otos Ca b a g s i ca n
. .
Ter m s relati ng to the art of -
w ar .
Wa r Con quest
. . Bac a Di g m a
. .
E ne m y A lly . . Ca a u a y Ca m pi . .
Captive Co rs a l r . . Blha g M oso . .
Ter m s fo r the designatio n of m etal s :

Iron Steel
. . B acal . ,
P a ta li m .
Cast steel . Copper . B i n a lo n . Ta n g s o .
Gold Ore . . G uint o . Tu m baga .
Ter m s for the desig natio n of agric u ltural i m ple m ents .
Plo u g h Yoke . . So d s o d Si n g c ao . .
Hoe M oun d
. . Pa n g huca y P ilapi l .
,
Ter m s rela ti ng to house building -
,
c lo th ~
w e a v i ng , fis hi ng ,
etc .
Tile Thread Tis a Si n uli d

b
. . . .
N et Casting -
net . L a m at P e cot . .
Warp Woof . . H a na y i n H i li g u i n . .
Shuttle N eedle Si cu an , bol os Ca ray o m

Chi sel A d z
. . . .
e . . L ocob Dar as . .
P lane Sa w . . Cata m L agari . .
Ter m s relating to the art of navigation .
P row Stern . . Doon g Huli . .
Paddle Hel m . . Sagu an Og u i t . .
F lood E bb . . Taog Cati. .
M outh of a river , bar . U au a .
Sound lead R iver -

. . Se a . P a n a ro c I log D agat . .
Cove Stor m
. . L ooc On os
. .
I t ha s
already been no ticed th at the four c ardin al p oi nts a re
known by native and n ot by M alay ter m s .
Ver s : b
see m s I t
ell not to let the revie of Cra w f u rd s bo ok go w w ’
W i thout giving h ere th e ords ith hi ch he closes his i nqui ry i n to w w w ‘
t he Phili p pi ne ton g ue s .
X CVI . Tu n TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
th e alphabet he say s : F i nally I will give here thei r ancient syste m

,
“
,
of wri ting at present u sed i n the Co m i n ta ng ( provinc e s of L aguna

,
and Batangas ) an d elsewhere The characters they have l earned fro m .

,
the M alays an d are seventee n ( )

1
,
That C ra w f u rd should h ave thu s .
rebuked the Span i sh gra m m arian s ( o r rather Father Sa n A gus ti n for ,
no other before hi m ever treated of the subj ect) for entertaining i n ,
1703 an opi nio n as to the derivatio n of Tagalog which i n 185 2

’
, , ,
everybody entertained but Cra w f u rd an d which even a t the p rese nt , ,
day i s perhaps entertained by everybody excep t th e autho r of this

, ,
book see m s really too hard

. N o r does i t see m fai r to trea t the .
p a s s i n g re m a rk of the S pan ish fria r i n the way of an asser tio n or

i n that of the exposition of a theory as Cra w f u rd does ,
.
As to th e Tagalog alp habe t Cra w f u rd i s cer tainly i n the , , ,
wro n g The charge he brings for w ard against the Span ish writer i s
.
based o n a gratuitous a ssu m ption ; that of Sa n A gustin s igno rance

of M alay being written i n the A rabi c character N o w thi s can no t with .
,
a shadow of truth be supposed of any Spani sh friar Of the seventeenth

century i n this part o f the world whe n Spai n was still engage d i n war
and league with t ri es t o the south of L u z b
,
on an d ecclesias t ics were , ,
m ain ly sent i n p reference to civi l officials o r civilians o n erran ds of

, , ,
peace and treaty t o those places where the M alay language and the
M alay w
ri ting character were u sed as the general m eans of c o m m u
n i c a ti on But least of all can this be suppose d of Sa n A gustin who
.
,
besides hi s vast philological knowledge was t w ice appoi nted provi ncial ,
of his orde r an d as such could not fai l to be p resent at the G overn

,
m en t councils where al l m atters of war and peace with other M alay

tribes were treated N either was Hu m boldt ignorant of this when i n
J
.
,
“
hi s letter to M r acquet he said : I entirely agree with you Si r as
.
, ,
to the Bugi s alphabet The conson ants are nearly the sa m e as i n

w
.
the Tagalog alphabet no r was F avre ignorant ei ther hen , ,
speaking o n th i s subj ect he says : M r W Hu m boldt s opi nio n see m s

“ '
b
. .
to solve al m ost the point ; fo r i n his letter to M r Jacquet a out the , .
alphabets of th e A siatic P olynesia he believes that the one o f the ,

'
p resent San skrit m igh t wel l b e the perfectio n of an ancient alphabet ;

to which the fi rst alphabets of the A siatic Polynesia s uch as the ,
Tagalog Bugi s etc belong

, ( )
3 T h e refere
,
n ce here i s
. there f ore .
, ,
to a n an cient alphabet whic h m u st have existed i n wh ich probably

b
, , ,
oth M alay and Javanese were wri tt e n before acq u iri ng thei r p resent ,
syste m s and also the one referred to by the Spanish frear could be
,
n o other Cra w f u rd hi m sel f i n the passage j us t q uoted says ;

.
“
The , ,
M alays as already stated have a t p r e s en t n o native

, thus ,
i m plying that they o nce had one Cra w f u r d s criticis m o f Sa n A gust i n

’
, , .
i s therefore unj ust and see m s to be a stri ki ng in stance o f t ha t

, , ,
‘
aberration into which the hu m an m ind i s liable to fall when i nfluenced ,
by prej udice i t fi nds i t n ecessary to derive facts fro m the hypothesi s

,
and not to deri ve the hypo th esi s fro m facts .
( 1) Po r t
ul i m o p o n d r é e l m o d o , q u e e u i a n d e e s c ri b i r a n i g u a m e n e y ai t t t ,
p re s en e t v
lo u s a n e n e l Co m i n t a n ( p r o i n c i a s d e la L a g u n a y B a ta n g a s ) y o r a s p a r t
te s . L os t ca r ac e re s s on a p r e ndi d o s z t
d e lo s m a la y o s , y s on d i e y s i e e Pr os od i a .
PAr ra f o 6 .
( 2 ) J e s u i s e n t i e r e m e n t d a c co r d a ve c vou s , M o n s i e u r , s u r l a lp ha b e t d e s
’ ’
Bu gi s L e s co n s o n n e s s e n t a p e n p r es le s m eme s q u e d a n s l a lp h a b e t
'
.
( 3) L Op i n i o n d e M W d e H u m b o ld t s e m b le p r e s q u e r é s o u d re c e tt e q u e s
’
. .
t i o n . c a r d a n s s a le t t r e a M
, J a c q u e t s u r le s a lp ha b e t s d e la P o ly n es i a a s i a t i q u e
.
,
i l e q u e lo a n s cr i t a c t u e l p o u r ra i t b i e n e tre le p e r f e ct i o n n e m e n t d u n
’
p e n s s a nci e n
a lp ha b e t , a u q u e l a u r a i e n t a p p a r te n u le s p r e m i e r s a lp ha b e t s d e la P o ly n é s i e a s i a ti q u e
te ls q u e lo t a ga la , la b u g is e t c F a vre G ra m m ai re J ava nai s e I n trod u cti o n, p a ge X
. . . .
I NT RO D U CTI O N . X CVII .
Cra w f u r d greates t error was t hat of t he Ta g a log alp habet

s
b eing of local i nvention a beli ef wh i ch as far as our knowledge goes

, , ,
n o other wri ter shares with hi m F o r the m atter of t he relati on s of

.
th e Tagalog alph abet with other alphabets of those used i n Su m atra

an d Cele bes the rea d er i s referred to wh at i s said i n the Orthograp hy
,
~
,
as n othi ng else i s thoug ht n ecessary to say h ere again st thi s v iew

of t he E ngli sh writer I t see m s only pertinent t o m ention that i f
.
alphabets are i nven ted to m ee t the r e q u 1re m e n t s of the langu a ges to

whi ch they are to be a pplied a n d tha t i f due consideration is b ad of ,
the p hone ti c characters of Tagalog on on e side an d of M alay an d ,
Jav a nese on the oth e r such an alphabet as the Tagal o g could hav e
b
,
een i nven t ed only for one of the latter two languages .
“ ”
On th e charge o f p rac t i cal unacquai n t ance which Cra w f u rd
m a k es a gain st H u m boldt the au thor i s th e person least qualified t o
,
pass co m peten t j udg m ent fo r f the n u m erous languages reviewed b y

, ,
O
both write rs he i s ac q uainted only with Tagalog

, N o r be i t under .
s t ood that he m akes any pretence to special authority i n t he la tt e r ; b u t

‘
Hu m boldt s profundity an d Cra w f u rd s s u p e rfi c i a li ty m ust be apparen t

’
n o t only to the Tagalog scholar but also to the co m m on reader ; not

.
w i thstanding the f a ct that Cra w f u r d to all appearance succeeded an d , , ,
Hu m bold t erred i n classi fy ing properly the language Both of t he m

, .
wrote ad m i rable wo rks ; that of H u m bold t i n al m ost every respect ; that ,
o f Cra w f u r d also excellen t as to the languages of the M alay A rchipelago

, ,
the M alay an d Javanese es p ecially To say the sa m e as to hi s research .
i nto those of the P hi lippi nes would be grea tly s atis f actory ; but t he
errors here are too gross an d too flagran t to be overlooked Cra w f u rd s .
’
acco m plish m en ts i n the ethnology and hi story o f the M alay A rchi pelago
d
,
and hi s philo logical research i nto the Kawi the presen t Javanese an ,
t he M alay a r e m uch m ore m eri torious and free fro m error I n co n .
sider a ti o n of th is a n d i n honor of the m e m ory of this grea t W riter i t ,
m ight a p pear fai r to p ass m ore leniently on hi m ; but we do not know

that any other scholar e ver e m barked on a controversy for deter m ining
th e cha racte r an d derivation o f a language as Craw f u rd did for Ta g a ,
log so lightly ba llasted wi th real knowledge an d so heavi l y loaded

.
with a rrog a n ce .
The last atte m pt i n thi s sketch will be at tracin g t he o rigi n of

t he language ,
o r rathe r at m ark ing an o ri e nta t io n of the cou rse i n
,
whic h to steer for landing at the place fro m whi ch p robably i t ori , ,
g i n a lly spru n g .
The rare pheno m eno n has been m entioned o f such a pec uliar
’
language as t ha Bas q ue shu t u p i n the m idst of I n do g e r ma n i c langu a

,
ges ; and to all appearan ce we are here confronted wi th Wha t se e m s

,
to be if n ot a n identi cal at least a si m i lar case

, ,
On e i s naturally .
le d to believe t hat the closest af fi nity of Tagalog m igh t b e with so m e

Chinese dialect of those s poke n o ver the vas t e m pi re with in such a
sho rt di stance fro m these I slands o r else to fi nd the language i n closer ,
relati o n than i t stands to those spo k en i n an d about that part of the

I ndia n A rchi pelago i n which i t i s believed M alay h a s o riginated ; but
, , ,
strange enough the closest affinity h ere i s with t he la n guages spoken

,
i n the far a w a y i s la n d of M adagasca r a fact whi ch m a y lead to i m ,
portant di scoveries as t o the origin a nd race of the pri m itive i nhabi tants
of these I sla n ds i f so m e othe r geni u s u ses t he Ta galog fo r t he sa m e
,
pu rposes that Hu m boldt used the Basque language .
I n several part s of h is work to quote which would be too .
pro li x Hu m boldt calls atten ti o n to these affin ities i n th e gra m m ar of

b
,
the two languages ; ut the deficiency by hi m fre qu ently m p la i n e d

pg
,
XCVIII . Tan TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
of i n the m ean s at han for the study o f th e M a la g a s i at the ti m e i n

, d
which he wrote m ade hi m beli e ve that the si m ilarity found i n the t w o
d
,
langu ages so wi ely separated was another proof of the deri vation fro m ,
o ne and the sa m e paren t lan guage of all those spoken by the M alay race
The m atter ha s since received the attentio n of so m e disti n
g u i s he d wri ters a m ong who m Mr A M arre an d P rof Dr R ei n
d z
. .
.
,
.
wal Brandstetter of L u ern should be m entioned ,

The author has .
been fortu nate enough to secure a copy Of each of the l ittle p a m

p hl e t s
“
,Des N o m s de N o m bres en us a ge dans la M a la i s i e e t dans
”
la Po ly n é s i e “
P roverbes M axi m es e t Conseils tradu its d u Tagalog
, , ,
a nd
“
M ad a gas car e t les P hili ppines wri tten by the first of the ,
above m e n tioned gentle m en an d addressed to the R oya l A cade m y of

Scie nces a t Turi n “
and o ne copy of the Pr é cis th é orique e t prat i que
,
de L angue M algache by M r G ustave Julien P aris 1904 The autho r ,

.
,
—
.
ha s also been able to peruse the excellen t pa m phlet Ta g a le n un d

“
M a la g a s e n L u ern 1902
,
z
co m posed by the other above m e ntion ed
“
— —
writer Prof Dr R ein w ald ; and a copy of the G ra m m ai re M algache

, . .
re d i g é e par les M issio nnair e s Catholiques de M adagascar 185 3 fro m — —

,
which and fro m the wo rk of Hu m boldt h e could d raw the data

Ofi e re d i n the following pages To quote fro m a m ong these various .
sources th e on e fro m which i n each case the data have been derived
b
, ,
woul d e p ro per This however the autho r i s u nable to do no t

b b
.
, , ,
only ecause of the tediousness which would result therefro m ut

b ecause he has no longer at hi s disposal the p a m phlet of P rof
,
w
.
R einwald having only been able to peruse i t h urriedly fo r a fe

,
h o urs and t ake so m e n otes no r can any other copy of i t be

z
,
obtainable i n ti m e to be util i ed fo r the prese n t editio n of the book .
Thi s i s the m o re to be regretted and the quo ting of the source the
m ore requi red i n thi s case as i t i s m ainly fro m this excellent pa m phlet , , ,
that t he largest p o rtion of t he co m pa rati ve m atter ha s been ta ken .
I n the foregoing co m pariso n with the M alay an d the Javanese

languages the a i m ha s bee n to s ho w all that Tagalog ha s peculiar to
,
i tself that i s to say i te m s not found i n any o f the other two languages
, , .
I n the co m pariso n wh ich i s to f e llo w of Ta g alog a nd M a la g a s i the

b
, , ,
a i m will e to show all that the two languages have peculiar to

the m selves leavi ng o ut w hatever o ther m atter they have i n co m m on
,
wi th M alay o r Javanese Thus i n the lexical co m pari son such

.
,
words given i n the lists of pages X X VI X X X VI I I as are co mm o n -
also to the M a la g a s i will be h ere o m i tted and the list only given o f , ,
thos e found exclusi vely i n the latter and i n Tagalog ( 1) Before doing .
this however i t i s believed n ecessary to say so m e t hi ng concerning ‘
w
, ,
the M a la g a s i alphabe t and th e M a la g a s i phonetic characte r i th a ,
view to s how certa i n peculiari t i es and phonetic changes wi tho u t whic h

the analogy i n m ost cases of th e wo rds found i n the two languages
b b
, ,
could not e well understood y th e reader

b
.
The M a la g a s i alpha et i s described as consisting o f the follo w ing

V o w e ls .
a, pronounced as the sa m e letter i n the E nglish word “

far ;
6; n n be “
bill and the adv
,
e r b i a l ter m in a tio n lg ;
“ ”
O, m ove a nd e m
, ,
p ha t i c a llv as that of the sa m e in “

doll
Cra w f u rd , i n p a g e s 0 111 c lv 1 o f hi s
( l) Di s s e r ta ti o n, g i ve s a li s t of 16 5
M ala y a n d J a va ne s e w o r d s f o u nd i n M a la g a s i .
THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
Co n s o n a nt s a nd Co m b i n a t i o n s .
h= Ta g h o h o = Ta g
”
M a la g a Si M alag n ai l u
. C: qu ,
. c oco , .
“
y i t la ng grown up
V
hom n a
z
, .
i ,
“ ”
o a tr a u ga t elu , .
s a ri : y a m ,
“
fi n 1s he d .
'
a g ri o ,to defend “
.
“
li bo thousand ,
“
p u ti whi te ,
.
“
s or o ladle ,
d i bd i b
“
breast ,
.
“
di la tongu e ,
“
fire
’
ap i i y , .
ba te ston e ,
“
.
z
“
n ga lcm n ame
'
'
.
,
i
p / g i n cicatrix ,
“
p i ma y turtle ,
“
ti m e day , .
ra n ci d
“
m ark ,
li m ri “
five , .
tong co tripod ,
.
l
l
i mp on ” t o b e t o g e t he r
, .
“
s u lu ta n written u pon ,
.
a n i mi n "
di v i de d i n t o SI X
, .
At th e end of words i t i s fo und :

‘
M alag li a .
r - Ta g . c, as i n M alag o / a c a z Ta g . op a c ,
“
bark .
“
tr a a f r i ka hu m p , i n front .
na l
a on a a lo n ,
“
b 1llo w
“
y a , di my li m it , five .
The follo w ing Tagalog sou nds vani sh so m et i m es i n M a la g a s r
g, as in Ta g . ba g s a la g . ba o ,
“
new ;
y a ym g ma i na
“
to be parche d
,
with heat ;
la r b la ola o ,
to play ‘
s u mp ci om p a ,
“
oath ;
p u n ki e u n i /ca ,
“
to go upstai rs ;
ba g s a y bi v ey , harpoon ;
i n la y a g la y,
“
sail ;
la y a s la y,
“
fugi t i v e ;
“
s , lip ds lef a , to pa ss off .
A fte r the
preceding account of the changes i n s ounds th e ,
reade r will be i n a posi tion to perceive bet ter the af fi ni ti es b etween

the M a la g a s i and Tagalog wo rds given i n the following lis t .
Malagi s i . Significai ion .
Hai r .
M outh .
E ye b row .
L eg .
Tooth .
L iver .
Cal f of the leg .
N ape ( Of the neck ) .

I RO D U CTI O N CI
‘
NT . .
Malagas i . Signification .
F ela ka . P alad . P al m of the hand .
V ovo m aso -
. Bobong n ang m a ta . E y e lid ( E y e
-
.
-
roof) .
Volo . Buto . Down hair ,

.
F i hi r i f a n a . P i li p i s an . Te m ples ( o f . t he f o re hc a d )
V av y . Babaye . F e m ale .
Hi m a °
Qui m a . L arge shell .
G o a ka . Ou a c . R aven .
Ora n g a Olang Sp ra w n
li z
. .
Ts a t s a ka . Sa s a c . A s m all ard .
Oli t ra Olay . Wor m .
Totok a Toca Bill of a bird

'
. . .
Hara . Cala . Tortoi se sh ell -

.
M anga . M a ng a . M ango .
Ts a b o . s aho g . To scatter seeds .
Bo ry = v o ry . Bol a . F roth .
Ko tro ka z k o r o ka . Colog . Th u ndering .
F a la f a . P alap a g . Hurdle r
Sotro Soro Spoon
g
. . .
F a n a p a ka . P a n apas . Sic k le .
A k a lo = ha lo . Halo . R i ce pestle-
.
L amba . L a m b On . R obes .
F eta ka . P u t ic . M ud .
Z o ro . Suloc . Corner , angle .
Ha t y . G alis . I tch .
M a la ky . M a li c s i . Swift .
M atavy . M atab a . Fa t .
Vao . Bag o . N ew .
Bingo . P i n g ca o . Cripple d
Fo m p o n a I pon . To asse m ble .
M andro . M am bo . To bathe .
Sara . Dal a . To take to .
R e ki t r a . Di cq u i t . To glue stick ,
.
M aha lala ,
. Quilala . To be acquainted wi th .
"
Sa f o t ra ( To . cover ) . Sapot ( Shrou d ) .
R a ra t ra . U a la t . To di sperse .
L i li t ra . L ili e . To twi ne .
A ntena . H i n tay . To wait .
V o a t ra f . B uh a t . Doing li f t 1n g ,
Teno . Tunao . To cast to found , .
Ko ho k o ho . Co c o o c . To cackle .
I ri t r a H ili s To h e w
'
. . .
Hilan a H i li g . To bend to l u bli n e , .
A ka i ra . A cq u i a t . To ascend .
L eha . L ac a d . To wal k .
R e k i t ra k i ky Cagat To bite
g g
. .
.
,
L an o . L an ey . To swi m .
A la . A lis . To take out .
Tind ri Ti ndi To p ress

ga
.
. .
A i na . Hin . To breathe .
To was h one s m ou th
'
Ho m ok o m ok a -
M o mo g
. .
clean .
To hi ss .
To see .
The plai n .
THE TA G A L O G L A N GUA G E .
Malagas i . Significalion .
Vovo . Bob é n . Well ,

fountain .
Diavolana ( M oonlight) L i u a y u a y ( Dawn )

. .
A lin a . Dili m . N ight dark , .
M araina U m a ga
. . M orning .
Tavo . Ta b o b og . P u mp kin .
Salohy . Sal ay . E a r spike

, of corn .
Vano . B anoy . Hawk .
L olo ( Butter fl y spi rit ) Ca lo lo u a ( Soul )

.
, . . .
Bi b i la v a B i b i ra n gi n A kin d of snake
z
. . .
Va a na . Babang . Chee k .
V o dy = f o ry . P oui t . A nus .
I ry . H i li . E nvy
F o ly Si I li d To spi n
’
. . .
Ohy . I I uca y . To dig out .
F arafara . P alapala . Scaffold ( fo r building )

Di m a L i m as To bale o u t
Ha z
. . .
a Caya ( ins t f o r h un t ) Hunti ng

z
. . . .
O a . H u g as . To cleanse .
Dio . L igo . To b a the .
L a lao . L ar o . To play
A b i ly . A lipi n Slave .
R aha ( Brother.or si ster ) Daga ( A un t ) .
B a ba ! B a p a! Oh ho w pretty !
Hab a l A b aa ! Oh!
Va . B a g a b a ( con t ) ,
. . The i n terrogative a dv .
The
preceding list with excep ti on of th e particle na and th e,
i nterjections ha ba an d M M affords i t i s true n o i nstance of any , , ,
w ord of t he kind of those wh ich are i ndi sp e nsable to the construction

of a gra m m atical senten ce an d i t i s well to say that the affiniti es ,
be tween M a la g a s i and Tagalog are least to be sough t i n the lexica l

c o m parison A ttention wi ll be called o nly t o the ethi cal relation found
.
i n connection with the m eaning of so m e of the words i n t he two lan

gu a ge s for i n ou r opinion both phi lologists an d ethnologist s have
, , ,
hitherto shown u ndue disregard fo r this kin d of ter m s i n their r e s e a r

ch es i nto the la n guages and race characteri stics of rude tribes E ven '
Hu m boldt w ho went so d eeply i nto deter mi ning t he origi n of th e

pri m itive i nhabita n ts of Spai n a n d th e tract t hey occupied on the
I beric P eninsula by u si ng the Basque language i n connection with
n a m es of places n eglected al m ost e n tirely to use thi s m ethod fo r the
, , ,
’
i n q ui ry he m ade i nto th e languages o f the p eople i nhabiting this
part of the world This ho w ever i s perhaps the best sou rce of
.
, ,
evidence where the direct testi m ony of hi story i s wanting I f i t .
were possi ble that a physi cal c a ta cli s m should sever d i rect i nter
course between thi s p a rt an d the other conti nents o f t he world or ,
to d rain off a ll source of hi stori cal record withou t however e x ti n , ,
g i s hi n g life and language still th e word J e s u cr i s to i n Tagalog or

z
u
, ,
words as N u ev a Vi ca y a Sa n B e r n a r di no etc would tell a_ tale of

-
, , .
a past Chri sti an Spanish influence E thical relations of this kind the .
E nglish “
to steal away and the G er m an w e g s te hle n the E nglish w
“ ” ”
to carry away and the I talian po rtare via“
etc show ,
. .
I n thi s connection na m es o f places co m m e m oratory of so m e h i sto

0
ri ca l event are o f the highest value It i s to be regretted that the na mes Of .

THE TA G A L O G L A N G U A G E .
i t see m s to the Tagalog , mnon p ro tecting ; and t hus M a l p e r a mmo a , , .

—
a n z Ta g i n a mp on the on e u nde r protectio n Despite the fact of

“
an —
—
.
,
Tagalog possessing the sa m e radical word and analogous noun building -
m ethod neither this no r any si m ilar co m pound exists for the designa
,
tio n of the fe m ale i ndivi dual o f m anki nd i t being also strange that ,
n othing so far as ou r knowledge goes of the word ba ba y e or of i ts

, ,
allegori c m eaning i s found in any o f the lang u ages of the western portio n
of the I ndian A rchi pelago I t is only i n t he languages o f M a dagascar .
t hat both t he ter m and the allego ry a re found I n the M a la g a s i .
G ra m m ar co m piled by the Catholi c m i ssionaries it i s said that whe n

“
i n M a la g a s i things are spoken of whi ch consist o f two parts the ,
s tronger o r p rincipal of the two i s designate d by n y la hy n y and the ,
weaker or secondary by n y na v y n y Thus f a ng a r i n a n p a r i

, fro m .
,
-
ha r i n a sugar m ill ; n y la hi mp a ng a r i na na the upper crushing cyli nde r ;

,
“ -
ny v a v i mp a n a r i na n a the lower stone o r cyli nder ( 1) ,

“
.
I n the personal pronouns i t i s found that only those o f the

fi rst and second perso n singular a ho and hi a n a o i n M a la g a s i see m , ,
to offer so m e rese m blance i n th e fo r m t o thei r Tagalog counterparts

a cb and i crro; b u t the peculiarity o f the M a la g a s i personal pro nouns
’
should be m entioned o f having al l o f the m p lural an d case fo r m s as

the sa m e i n Tagalog I n the co m parison wi t h M alay attention was .
c a lled ( page X L I V)to th e exi stence i n Tagalog of the article o r p ronoun

o f co m panion shi p s i n cr an d i t is well to note agai n he re that the
’
n ea rest approach to i t i s found i n the M a la g a s i i la y z i lcy I n both .
languages i t i s found that t he possessive p ronouns and the possessi ve

case of the personal p ronoun s are ali k e .
The de m onstra t ives are m uch m o re nu m erous i n M a la g a s i t ha n

i n Tagalog for i n the for m er there i s one fo r each of the various
, , ,
degrees of re m oteness i n the obj ect and for referring to the sa m e a s

being i n o r out of sight The fact m ost deserving notice i s that .
of these pronoun s being m ade plural by i nsertio n o f the syllable TB

.
i n M a la g a s i a thi ng whi ch i n Tagalog can only be done by u sing

z
,
the plurali i ng particle Traces however of the nu m erous M a la g a s i .

, ,
de m on s tratives a re found i n the Tagalog adverbial for m s d i han d a p to , ,
n a n di y an etc ; i n the I banag an d i n tha t variety o f Bisayan which i s

, ,
spoken i n Panay The fac t i s also to be m entioned that the de m o ns

.
tra t i v e s are i n both langu a ges related to the adverbs of place .
The nu m erals are i n M a la g a s i m uch the sa m e as i n M alay

an d Javanese and offer therefo re n o greater i m portance for the , ,
co m pari son A fea ture h owever wh ich i s of value i n appreciating

.
, ,
the affinities between t he two languages i s th e fact that the te r m f o r

t he expression of th e unity i n M a la g a s i is n o t ca as i n M alay and ,
Javanese but i s a as i n Tagalog Th e i m portance whi ch fo r purposes

, ,
.
,
of co m parison i s t o be attached to the presence of the p r e fi x i i n the

,
for m a ti on of th is nu m eral and i n that of t he ordinals has al ready

been m entioned A nother feature bearing o n the point o f the af fi nity
.
here under con si dera t ion i s foun d i n the m anner for the counting of ,
" “
the nu m bers between ten an d twenty which is the sa m e i n the
’ '
”
two languages except i n the equivalent of t e n ,
bein g expressed i n “
M a la g a s i while t he sa m e i s understood i n Tag a log

, Thus M alag .
, .
i r a y k a m bi n n y j olo = Ta g la bi ng i s ct ( 3a p on e) one i n excess ( of ten

‘
-
) .
I
( ) E n p a r la n t d e s c ho s e s c o m p o s é e s d e d e u x p i e ce s , la p lu s f o r t e e n la p r i n c i
l
p a e s a p p e lle n y la hy ny
‘
e t la p lu s f a i b le , n y v a v y n y E x a m p le s : F a ng a r i n a n p a r i
, .
-
d e ha r i n a , “ m o u h u a b r o c b e r la c a n n e ; n y la hi mp a g a r i fi a n a ,
n
“
la c i li n d re s u p é
"
i u r q u i é c ra s e n y v a v mp a n a r i ri a n a ,
i la p i e r re i n f é r i e u re G ra m m a i r e M a lg a c he
‘
r e , .
re d i gé e p a r le s M 1s s i o n n a i re s Ca tho li q u e s d e M a d a ga s c a r , p a ge 67 c ha p te r 2 17 , .
I NT RO D U CTI O N .
Fo r the o rdinals M a la g a s i uses the pre fi x j a ha while Tagalog uses ,
the p refix i ca I n this also so m e analogy m a y be found for the

.
, , ,
M a la g a s i f a ha corresponds to the Tag a log p a ca which i n the latter

m a y be considered as the no m inal for m Of m a ca
, ,
a prefix used i n ,
for m ing adverbial nu m erals .
The adverb i n th e two languages affords little groun d for

co m parison I t i s only w ell to say agai n here t hat adverbs of place
.
are i n both for m ed fro m the de m onstrative pronouns

, , Thus M alag .
, .
i ty =Ta g i to this ; M alag e ty =Ta g di to h ere ; an d so on for t he

“ ” “
, .
,
.
others The prefix i n M alag ha =Ta g ca i s found used i n both lan

. . .
guages fo r certai n adverbs indicati ng past ti m e as seen i n M al a g ,

.
ha li n a =Ta g ca g a bi last n ight ; etc “

.
, .
The affinities between Tagalog and M a la g a s i are chiefly i n t he

gra m m atical for m s Those word building Tagalog p rocesses not foun d
.
-
i n M alay an d i n Javanese are generally fou n d i n M a la g a s i Begin ning , ,

.
with the abstracts i t i s found th at besides the widespread M alay an d ,
Javanese m ethod of I ra i n Tagalog ca and i n M a la ga s i ha + ro o t + i n M alay

, , ,
Javanese an d Tagalog a n a nd i n M a la g a s i a n a M a la g a s i possesses also

, , , ,
the special one of Tagalog p a g ca zM a la g a s i j a ha + r o o t not found i n the ,
other two languages Thus M alag f a ha li n a Ta g p a g ca la li m depth

.
“
,
.
r - .
, .
The m etho d Tagalog p a i n a s a l + r o o t M a la g a s i f a + n a s a l + ro o t i s used

,
-
:
fo r n o un s o f i n stru m ent an d i s i n b o t h la n g u a g e s attended wi th t he '
sa m e phonetic changes at the poi nt of contact of the prefix an d the root .
“ ”
Thus i n Ta galog we have p a n i rla t “
pen fro m s i rla t writing ; an d i n
’
z
, , , ,
"
M a la g a s i f a nja i tr a
,
“
n eedle fro m a i tra sewing
,
The Ta galog m etho d
, ,
.
ma p a g + ro o t used fo r frequen t ative verbal nouns indicative o f the

,
person who i ndulges i n certai n questionable acts m a y be i den tifi ed ,
wi th the M a la g a s i m +p a 1 n a s a l 4 root Thus we have i n Ta g a log . .

,
”
map a g a cs a y a
“
squanderer ,
fro m a cs a y a w aste ; an d i n M a la g a s i
, ,
“
“ ’
mp a n a s a washer
,
“
fro m m a n a s a to wash
, ,
.
A d j ectives i n M a la g a s i are as i n Tagalog si m ple o r co m pound , , .
The adj ective build ing pre fi x m a i s n o t found i n any other language
-
o utside the Tagalog an d the M a la g a s i Thus M alag m a ta v y z zTa g ma ta ba ,

. .
,
"
“
fat . A dj ecti ves are also for m ed i n both languages fro m the ve rbal
passive fo r m s as seen i n M alag le la n a z
,
zTa g di la a n “
charlatan ; . .
,
f ro m M alag I e la = Ta g d i la
. tongue ; i n M al a g v a o i n a z Ta g ba ba y i n i n
.
,
. .
,
“
effe m inate ; fro m M alag na vy = Ta g ba ba g/( e l wo m an "
I n both lan
.
-
.
,
.
guages too adj ectives of a certai n kin d are for m ed by using the ter m
, ,
b y whi ch possession i s i ndi cated before a r a dic a l denoting i n a b stract a n

assi m ilable quality Thus M alag m a n a nj a r a z Ta g m a y p ala d happy ; "
z
.
,
. .
,
”
fro m M a la g dr a Ta g p ala d hap piness
r - The di m i nutive sense of
.
,
“
.
a dj ectives i s expressed by th e reduplication ; i n Tagalog of the radi cal ; ,
i n M a la g a s i of the whole co m pound Thus M alag m a i n ti ma i n ty =Ta g

,
.
,
. .
” “
m a i ti mi ti m blackish ; fro m M alag m a i n ts a g m a i ti m blac k
“
.
,
.
,
But by far the m ost i m portant affinities are i n the verb buil d
, ,
-
i ng p rocesses o f th e two languages The radical is so m eti m es i n both .
a verb by i tself as th e M alag tong a Ta g g ali ng to co m e fro m shows ;

,
“
x .
, ,
but m os t frequently howev e r the verb i s for m ed fro m roots belongin g

, , ,
t o other parts of speech by the application o f particles A ll these

verbal particles begi n wi th m i n t he two languages and thi s consonant
changes to M alag j = Ta g p for the passive voi ce they besi des being . , , ,
i n both gene ra lly t he s a m e and also used for the sa m e o r analogo u s

, ,
purposes .
I t i s a m a rk of co m m o n parentage an d one m ore than any

other indicative of closer affinity i n languages of the Tagalog type ,
that o f the use of the sa m e particles for the expression of t he verbal .
l4
THE TA GA L O G L AN G U A GE .
relatio n a n d for the fo r m ation of identical o r analogous ki nds of ver s b

or o f analogous a c ti o n s .
The peculiarity to be n oted fi rst i s that of phonetic changes ,
si m ilar to those i n M alay an d Javanese of the i nitial consonant o f ,
the radical i n th e case of certai n k i nd s of verbs occu rri ng also i n ,
M a la g a s i an d Ta galog Beari ng i n m i nd that Tagalog c =q u t p =M a

.
, ,
l a gasi h t f we h ave i n :
, , ,
Malagas i .
Coha =m oha , to tak e “ '
to cs ot —
m ocs o, H a y z ma y to burn ; ta my z ma my
,
“
,
“ “ “
to cross e xa m i n e ; p aSOCZ mds oc, to sweeten ; f a ty ma ty to n
,
to en ter . di e .
A m orei m por t ant fea t u re o f analogy i s foun d i n the fact of

both languages requi ring the use of th e verb al p refix beginni ng i n
Tagalog with p and i n M a la g a s i wi th j fo r the verb whic h den otes
the su b ordinate actio n whenever two verbal p re fi xes co m bi ne fo r ex
p ressing different action s o r for denoti ng an actio n m ore co m plex t han
the one foun d i n the si m ple verb Thus we have th at M a la g a s i ma .
,
n o u lon = Ta g a lo g m a y ba y o to renovate ; an d that i t changes to M ala

“
,
gasi m a mp a n ou lou : Fa g a lo g m a gp ap a g ba g b fo r to cause to renovate “

'
I n the co m pari so n of the verbal prefixes i n the two languages

i t is found t hat the Tagalog verbal particle u m about th e origi n an d ,
use of whic h enough h as b ee n sai d i n the co m pariso n wi th Javanese ,
has also an equi valent i n the M a la ga s i o m although the i m portance of om ,
i n the latter language i s m uch less tha n that of a m i n Tagalog . .
A s a n i nstance of the analogy of the particle i n the t wo languages

.
,
the Ta galog cu ma i n and M a la g a s i koma n a “

to eat ; i s m entio ned ,
.
The Tagalog verbal particle ma g m a y be identi fi ed with the

M a la g a s i m i used fo r the fo r m ati o n of generally transitive verbs i n
, , ,
both languages Thus we have i n Tagalog m a g s a bi

.
,
to say ; and i n ,
“
M a la g a s i mi ka p oka “
to strike I t deserves to b e noticed that Ta g
, . .
m a g z M a la g mi agree i n for m i ng correla t ive par ties m eaning co m pounds

.
-
a k i nd o f co m plex nou n i n the sig nifica tion of which there i s i n cluded a

reference bo th to the p ri ncipal and t o th e secondary party with the ,
difference ho w ever that i n Tagalog m a g is prefixed to the nou n of the

, ,
p rinci p al an d m i i n M a la g a s i to that of the secondary p arty Thus

, .
,
we have i n Tagalog ma g a m a fath er and chi ld ; with ma g prefixed to

“
, ,
“
the noun of the princi p a l party a ma father ; and i n M a la g a s i mi a n a ka , , , ,
“
pa rent and child ; with m i prefixed to th e noun of the seco ndary party ,
“ ”
a n a ka
, child M i i s foun d i n that dialectical variety of Bisaya n which
i s spoke n i n Ceb u an d also so m eti m es i n the B icol tongu e .
The verbal p re fi x m a i s used i n Tagalog for i ntran sitive verbs ,
an d i t i s also so used though no t so frequently i n M a la g a s i Thu s , , .

,
we have i n Tagalog ma tacot “

to be a fraid ; fro m taco t fear ; an d
, , ,
“
”
i n M a la g a s i m a ta hotr a
, to beco m e frightened “
fro m ta hotr a
,
“ “
fright , ,
I n other respects the M a la g a s i m a so m eti m es contracted into m s hows , ,
analogy with the Tagalog m a n i n bo th p re fi xes being used for verbs

the actio n o f which denotes the use to which certai n i nstru m ents are
"
put by the agent Thus i n Tagalog ma m i n a s fro m bi u a s
.
,
“
h ook ; , , ,
"
and i n M a la g a s i ma mi n ta fro m o i n ta
,
“
hook ; “
to fi s h using a h ook
, ,
i n bo th languages .
M a n the verbal pre fi x wh i ch i n Tagalog i s use d for various

,
kinds of verbs i s found i n M a la g a s i used also for verbs denoting

d
,
a cti o ns o f t he s a me variou s ki n s a s i n Ta galog I t i s we l l t o note .

CVI I I . THE TA GA L O G L A N G U A GE .
m ay be regarded as i den ti cal with i n and a n i n Tagalog the fi n a l

'
a o f the M a la g a s i su f fixes being m ute or elidi ble while 0 11 th e othe r , ,

“
hand i n a an d a n a are still foun d i n i n a hblog for i hi n blog
,
fallen ;
ca s a la n a n fo r ca s a la a n sin ; an d i n oth er Ta galog co m pounds There
,
“
.
would b e also i denti ty as to their use i n bo t h languages were i t ,
n o t for the fact that i n M a la g a s i i rej ects i n a and i s u s ed only for , ,
t he i m perati ve while y z i i n Tagalog requires i n i n the p resent an d

,
the past an d i s u sed wi th any o ther ten ses That y =i was once .
also i n Tagalog s u f fi x e d to t he i m perati v e the occasi onal u se of ,

“
ba ca s i instead of ba cs an o pen i t ; p a ta p i i n stead of p a ta y i n ki ll ’
, , ,
”
it,
see m s to i ndicate The fact of i n a being i n M a la g a s i o n ly a s u f fi x
.
and that of i n being so m eti m es a prefix so m eti m es an i n fi x and ,
so m eti m es a suffix i n Tagalog i s due to differences i n the co n j ugative ,
m echanis m of th e two languages I n the co m parison we have : .
Signifioafi on . Signifioatlon .
M a g s ula t . Si n ula t . Wri tten . M a n o ra t ra . Si n o ra tra . Written .
To be length To b e le n g th :
M a g ha b a Ha bai n M alava Halavai na

ened ened
. . .
. .
To be i ns To be i ndi
M a g tu ro . Toruan .
§ t ru c t e d .
M a n o ro . M a h oro .
cat ed
'
The suffix i n a an d th e i n fi x i n h ave n o t i n M ala g a s i

passive
the sa m e fi x e dn e s s whi ch thei r counterpart i n ha s i n Ta g a log They .
so m eti m es beco m e hi n a on a n a n o on etc according to the ter

, , , , , ,
“
m inatio n of the root to which they are applied The suffix hi n for i n .
i s used i n Tagalog wi th roots ending i n an aspi rated vowel while ,
on i s i n other F i lipino tongues the passive particle wh i ch corresponds

with i n i n Tagalog .
The Tagalog i nstru m ental passive wi th th e p refix p =i i s

no t fou nd i n M a la g a s i fo r the re f erence to the in stru m ent i s i n the
, .
latter expressed by a n a The sa m e thing i s still found i n a f e w i n

.
sta nces i n Tag a log and frequently i n the other F i li p i n o tongues m ore
the n orth i n L u z on ( 1) The a nalogy h ere see m s to be with the
.
M a la g a s i prefix a ( M a la g a s i a i t ha s been shown changes so m eti m es , ,
to Tagalog i) which i s used for a ki nd of passi ve very si m i lar to that

for whi ch y z i i s u sed i n Ta galog The fol lowi ng co m parison of t he .
translation in Ta galog a n d i n M a la g a s i of the E ngli sh ph rase “

beat
”
the dog with the staff wi ll show thi s analogy i n a clearer way
,
.
Malagas i .
Yha m p as n ang aso tongcod A k a p o ca ny alika a m i n t e hi n a

’
ang . ny .
That i n Tagalog i i s occ a sionally s u f fi x e d to the i m perati ve has been

.
'
already in dicated
M a la g a s i s ee m s to h ave t w o o ther verbal passive p re fixes v a o ,
and taf a for which n o counterparts a re fou nd i n Tagalog On i n .
qui ry i t 18 found t hat v a o i s so m ewh at th e m odern for m assu m ed by

the passive with i n an d th at ta f a i s a particle used rathe r for r e fl e c t
,
ive verbs than used for the passive voi ce What i s m ore i m portant .
than this for the point of the affinity b etween the two languages
(I) A n i ns ta n ce of thi s is gi ve n in t he e x a m p le on p age X V .

I N TRO DU CTI O N . CI X .
i s t he fact that these h ere called m i ddle p assive and by the F rench ,
gra m m arians relative for m s of th e v erb are i n both u sed fo r practically

, , ,
the sa m e purposes A s i n Tagalog so i n M a la g a s i th ese for m s are e m p

, ,
loyed wh enever the sentence contains besides a di rect co m ple m en t so m e , ,
o t her refe rring to the purpose m eans i nstru m e n t ti m e place m ann er , , , , , ,
reason etc of the action The verb i n these passive for m s di spenses
, .
, .
i n both languages with the u se of adverbs preposi tion s o r circu m locutory ,
ways i m parting a wonderful con cision it o the expression I n both too

, .
, ,
these fo r m s palliate the lack of true relative pronoun s an d conj uncti o n s ,
fo r i t wi ll b e seen t hey con note t he sense whi ch i n E nglish i s

, ,
” “ ” “ ”
expressed by w here “
within which upon which “
wi th wh ich
, , , ,
“ “” ” ” ” ”
fo r , i n or d er that “
o f which by who m “
by what ,
because ,
“
, ,
“
,
’
” ”
wi t h who m “
i n wh at ,
“
fo r which by which “
by m eans of ,
’
,
’ “
, ,
”
fo r the reas o n of which “
that is the reason why etc their e m , ,
.
,
ploy m ent being n ot Optional but n eces s ary i n m any cases

,
Thi s i s ,
.
t he m ost striking feature of affinity i n both langu a ges and one m ore
than any other suggestive of thei r co m m on parentage as i t would not ,
fail to ap pea r i n so m e of th e others which are supposed to be si ster

to these two if th e theory o f the derivation of the m all fro m one
,
an d the sa m e parent language were true

To rende r the co m parison of the verb co m plete i t only
re m ai ns to revie w the co nj ugative m echani s m i n the two languages ,
an d i n o rder to show at a si m ple glance the greater analogy whi ch '
exists also here than tha t whi ch h as been noticed i n the co m pariso n wi th
, ,
th e M alay an d th e Javanese the Tagalog and the M a la g a s i m ethods ,
are b rough t face to face i n the followi ng table taken fro m the pa m phlet
o f Pro f R ei nwald : .
R oot . Tagalog s z
i l t =Ma a la g a s i s or a
'
tr a , w ri ting .
Te n s es . Ta g a lo g . M a la g a s i .
The
general analogy i n the conj ugative m etho ds of the two
languages i s tha : o f thei r i nflectio n rese m bling c harac t er The ten se for m ;
i t m a y be seen i s i n both a single co m po u n d word and n o t a ph rase

,
consisting o f the verb and a separate auxi li ary word o r adverb as ,
i n M alay and o i n Javanese The closest an d m ost i m portant analogy .
l ies i n the change of the i ni tial m of the verbal p a rticle i nto i t for .
the past tense a ten se bui lding process whi ch as already shown i s
,
-
, ,
fou nd i n n ei th er of the above m entio ned languages .
I n the use of the reduplicatio n of syllables for t he present an d f o r

the futu re ten se Tagalog stands alone ; b ut i t s ee m s that even i n
, ,
this partic u lar poin t M a la g a s i shows so m e m ore affi ni ty wi th Ta galog

,
than any other language o f those supposed to be of the sa m e paren

tage P rof R ei n w ald believes that the reduplica tive tense buil d ing p ro
. .
-
ce s s i s not al togeth er u nknown to the M a la g a s i an d he thinks t o fin d ,
traces thereo f i n th e co m pounds loloha “

to ca rry on the head ; m a i
,
n on of y
“
to d rea m ; as d isti nguished fro m the i m perative for m s ma n
,
’
d oha and m a n ofi a
'
s .
F o r the future tense M a la g a s i u ses a m ong o thers the pre fi xes , ,
ha an d ho whi le Ta galog e m ploys the redup lication The di ssi m ilarity

w w
.
,
i n this p oin t ould not be so great i f the co m parison ere m ad e

THE TA GA L O G L A N G U A GE .
with other P hilippine tongues with the I locano for i nstance where th e , , ,
suffix to i s used for the sa m e purpose o r with the Ti ruray where th e , ,
sa m e tense i s for m ed by a f fi x a t i o n O f f o .
The for m O f the i m perative o r rather the i nde fi nite for m of ,
the verb i s so m eti mes u sed also i n Tagalog as i n M a la g a s i fo r the , ,
p resen t ten se whi le i t i s m o re frequently so u sed i n Bisayan an d i n

,
other tongues O f the s e I slan d s .
I n the passive voice it i s foun d th at th e inserti on of i n i s i n

M a la g a s i as i t i s generally also the cas e i n Tagalog u se d for th e past
, ,
tense an d t hat i t frequently d i spen ses with the u se of t he prefix n o

,
o r of the auxiliary ef a i n the fo r m er language ; wh ile fo r the future , ,
ho i s u sed before t h e verb I n what i s called th e verbal relati ve.
for m s M a la g a s i p refixes a for t he p resen t 72 fo r th e p a st an d h for , ,
the future tense The M a la g a s i tense bui lding m ethod i n th e passive

,
-
,
then Offers g reater d iss i m ilari ty fro m that of Ta galog than tha t which
,
has been noti ced i n that o f the acti ve v oi ce

b
.
,
The co m pari son of what m a y be considered to e th e word

building m ethods closes here and i t only re m ai ns to a p p en d so m e ,
notes o n the syntax of the two langu a ges N otwi ths tan ding the .
close affinities i n other depart m ents of the gra m m ar of the two ,
Tagalog still sho w s i n th e syntax i ts su p erio rity over the M ala

g asi . Th ere i s i n the latter a defi n ite article my and what m a y be , ,
considered an articl e o r a particle 75 o f proper nouns of p erson s , , ,
as i n Tagalog an d anothe r m n o t found i n the la t te r ; bu t there i s

, , ,
n o declensio n of these a rti cles i n M a la g a s i The for m n y is wi tho u t .
change both for t he n o m i nati ve an d fo r the possessive case as m a y

, , ,
“
be seen for i n stan ce i n the ph rase ny te mp o m/ tr a n o
, , the owne r ,
"
of the house ; where the fi rst ny i s i n the no m in a tive and the last ,
i n the possessive case ; while i n Tagalog the constructio n would b e

1 2 3 4 1 2
as i n the E ngli sh langu age , a ny ( ma y a ri ) n a ng bdha y , “
th e owner
3 4
( Of the ) house N o r does this deficiency fail to b e n o ticed by the
n a tive inhabitants of M adagascar fo r the m ost i ntelligent Hovas con '
, ,
sider i t so m eti m es n ecessary to u se th e reduplicatio n ( and th i s shows

that reduplication i s the fi rst step to the acqui re m ent o f i n fi e x i o n )
i n order to m ar k the p ossessive sayi ng : n y tr a m) n y n y v a hi m s
’
, ,
“ ”
th e house of the fo reigners The arti cle i i s so m eti m es p refixed .
to p roper nouns of perso ns to i ndicate equality o r fa m i liarity an d ,
so m eti m es to those of pl a ces two different for m s of usage i n wh i s h ,
i t differs fro m the Tagalog 315 The o ther personal article m which .
, ,
expresses m o re respect corresponds be tter i n sense wi th the Ta galog

,
s i , although i t differs fro m the sa m e m ore widely i n the for m tha n

the other I n N oceda s Dictionary i s fo und h oweve r the word la cc m
.
’
, , ,
n o longer i n use at the presen t ti m e a s the equivalent of the Spani sh ,
title d on an d i t m a y be that i t corresponds to the M a la g a s i m

Ta galog plurali z
.
,
N oth i n g co rrespond i n g with t he in g p article -
m a nga i s foun d i n the M a la g a s i no r i s the reduplication u sed for ,
nu m ber as i t i s so m eti m es th e case i n M alay and Javanese wi th n oun s

, ,
an d so m eti m es too i n Ta galog wi th adj ectives t he p lu r a l in M a la g a s i

, , ,
bei n g only indicated by e m ploying words which have i n dep enden t

'
s i g n i fi ca ti o n s not strictly co m patible with the use m ade of the m to

denote plu rality .
The f a ct m ust b e n oti ced o f both la n g u a ges ha v i n g n o true

copulative v erb an d n o real relative pron ou n The m e a n s to whi ch .
Tagalog res orts for palliati n g the d e fi c i e ncy a s to the copula t ive ver b , ,
CX I I . THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
E n g li s h . Ta g a lo g . M a la g a s i .
12 3 4 5
I to i m abuti ,
iy a, i ,
1 2 3 4 5 6
Thi s i s good ,
t hat i s ( ab
m uti n i t O), or , 1 3 4 6
6 1 2 3 4 5 I ty ts a ra , iO tsara tsara
b etter
-
. i to i m abuti , i y a, i ,
6
( lalon g ma b uti ) ,
where i n Tagalog m a ba ti n i to m ean s goo d t han t hi s ; an d la lo m ore

, , ,
“
,
“
The presence i n Tagalog of certai n euphonic endings o r con

n e c ri v e s called liga m ents i ntended fo r th e linking of wo rds and s e n
,
ten oes to each other has been reco rded ( see page L X X ) as another
,
e culi arity of t h e langu a ge ; b ut P rof R ei nwal d beli eves to have dis

p .
covered traces o f the sa m e o r very si m i lar li y a ta r e s also i n M a la ga s i ,
an d h e gives the expressi on r a n on or a n a rai ny water ; whi ch h e

‘
“
,
describes as consisting of I n treating of

th e m ethod used i n M a la g a s i fo r ex pressing the relatio n Of possessio n
with nouns we h ave co m e across ( see th e exa m ple my a ka njO n n y
zz
-
a a in the preceding page ) an in stan ce O f th i s kind i n whi ch there ,
see m s to exist as a rudi m entary fo r m of what i s called li g a me n t i n

Tagalog ; but i t does n ot appear that the M a la ga s i append a ge has
ever t he force of a relative pronoun as i t i s the case with the Ta ,
galog liga m en t .
Of th e other parts of speech serving as di rectives fo r the cons

t r u c ti o n of wo rd s i nto sentences there are very few i n both lang u a ,
ges The nu m ber of true preposi tions an d conj un ctions is s m a ll the

.
,
m a j ority of these being words belonging to other parts of speech o r ,
directives appearing i n th e co m plex for m of preposi tion al e x p re s s mn s .
That the two languages can better than any others get o n well withou t
such i m portant ele m ents fo r the expression of i ntelligible thought as
these directives are co nsidered to be ha s been sho w n i n speaking of th e ,
m iddle passive voice or relative for m of the verb , The prepositions .

,
s a ca y i n
o
Ta galog an d a my i n M a la g a s i are found to stan d each fo r
,
" " “ ” “ “ “ “ “ ” ” ” “
a m ong
’
“
to ,
“
W ith
“
by in
,
at f ro m
, , u pon
“
,against , , , ,
etc i n the two la n gu a ges i n fact fo r these an d wh a tever o ther pre

, , ,
'
positions are i n E nglish used wi th the Obj ective case .
I n the al m ost unbounded freedo m O f th e synt a x Ta galog s t il l

re m ain s unique ; bu t the rules for the construction of the sentence show
a relative degree of freedo m i n M a la g a s i as well The subj ect i n t he .
active sentence m a y co m e before o r after m ost frequ ently h owever , , ,
after t he verb i n th e two languages ; whi le th e con structio n i n sen tences

,
With the verb i n a n y o f the variou s passive for m s i s the sa m e i n both .
Se e thi s i llustrated i n the followin g senten ces the subj ect of w hich ,
i s i n Tagalog an d M a la g a s i pri nted i n italics

, ,
.
Cu n g m a ca i n n a n g big as
The oxen are eating a n y m a n ya ba ca , or , Ho m an vary ny om by or , ,
rice a ny m a ny a ba ca i , cun g n y om by ho m an v a ry
’
.
, .
‘
m a ca i n nang big as .
N a q u i q u i ta co n a a ny H i ta ko saha d y ny tr a n o ,
The house ls already
baha y o r a ny bdha y or , ny tr a n o sahady
b y me , ,
s een
co na
o o o
n a q u i q u rta hl ta ko
.
ay . .
I NT RO DU CTI O N . CX I I I .
The pronoun subj ect of the p a s sive sentence , that i s to s ay , t he

agen t of th e verb i s i n both la n guage s put i n the possessive c a se
, .
The a d j ective u sed a s predicate co m es i n M a la g a s i a fter th e

subj ect while i n Ta galog i t m a y co m e before or after
, Se e .
this i n the f o llo w i n g sentence in whi ch the predicate i s i n the two ,
langu a ges pri nte d i n italics :

E n g li s h . Ta g a lo g M a la g a s i .
I t on g m an a t au o a y g
Th ese people
m ap u ti or , m ap n ti i tOn g olo na maf a ts z '
white
g
, .
m an a t au o
.
The
i nterrogativ e sentence is i n both lan gu a ge s i ndicated not ,
by th e syntacti cal arrange m ent bu t by the use of an i nterrogativ e

word i n Ta galog ba y ci z
,
,
ba and in M a la g a s i o a .
But by far th e m ost peculiar syntacti cal featu re and the o n e

, ,
whi ch binds the two languages to g eth er as m uch as i t separates the m

fro m al l others lie s in the word clause o r senten ce which denote s
, ,
the instru m en t wi th whi ch the ti m e o r place i n whi ch the reaso n , ,
fo r which etc the action i s perfo r m ed being put i n t he no m i native

,
.
, ,
case i n both languages and m ade the gra m m atical subj ect o f th e
sentence when t he verb i s used i n so m e of t he for m s o f the m iddle
,
passive o r relati ve voi ce

,
I n the followi ng illu s trations t he M a la g a s i.
,
being taken fro m Julien s G ra m m ar the printing i n italics i s used i n

’
the three languages to i ndicate the ele m ent which i s the gra m m atical
subj ect of the sentence i n Tagalog and i n M a la g a s i .
E n g li s h . T a g a lo g . M a la g a s i .
I t i s f or me that t he t A co ang y p i n a g ta ta b as
tai lo r cu t s out a sui t n ang m a n a n a hi nang l A n di di a n n y m p a n ja i
of cloth es . 1 i s ang p a n a n a m i t '

.
tra a k a njo a ho .
I t i s w i th s ha rp e dg e d A ny g u n teng n a 1 -
1a
H e ty m a r a n i tr a n o a ndi
s ci s s or s that the tai lo r ang y t i n a ta b as na n g
dian ny m p a n ja i tra n y
cuts out m y suit of m a n a n a hi n a n g a q u i n g
clothes a n n a m i t
a ka n o ko j .
z
.
p a .
lu
’
A ny s ah y ay ang
I t 18 onfl the oor that A m bo n y m ha n a no
gar n a p i n a g ta ta b a s a n
th e tailor cu ts out m y a n d i di a n n y m p a n ja i
na n g m a n a n a hi na n g
su i t of clothes tra n y a k a n jo k o
a qui n g p a n a n a m i t
. .
A n g p a y la mi y n a ng p a
I t is on f a ccou n t o
n a hé n a n g siy an g y ti M i a ka ny a n d r o
a ng a ts
cold w e a the f that th e
n a ta b as nang m ana ~
n a a n d i di a n n y m pan
tai lor cu ts ou t fo r m e
a sui t of clothes
n ahi n an g is ang pana ja i t r a a k a n jo h o ab y .
n a m i t s a aqui n
.
- The
sa m e analogy exi sts i n the t w o languages i n regard t o
th e partici pial nou n s d erived fro m th e above passive o r relative for m s ,
of the verb as the followin g i llustrations show :

,
The kn ife to kill it N

j y antsy a m on o a n a
wi th .
gA n g
‘
I t ac na y p a ta y .
az
y .
The k n ife wi th wh ich N y antsy n a m o n o an a
people have ki lled i t

Th e knife with which
.
} A ng I tac na yp m a t ay .
lN z
ay .
ha m on oa na
y an tsy
i t wi ll e killed b .
l A ng “a " ”a Yp a p a ta y '
az
y .
CX IV . THE TA G A L O G L A N G UA GE .
The co m parison b etwee n loses here The

Tagalog and M a la g a s i C .
c ases of analogy found i n the t w o languages are no t perhaps so n u

m ot ous as those found between Ta galog on one side and M alay an d , ,
Javanese o n the othe r ; but the quality and i m por tance of the a f fi n
.
i ties existing between the two la n gu a ges surpass anything found

i n th e co m parison with any other language of those S poken y the b
M alay people wh ich has h itherto been m ade an o bj ect Of research
, .
M ost O f what is peculiar to T aga log both i n the lexical an d i n word :
b
,
uilding depart m ents of gra m m ar is found also i n M a la ga s i A lthough ,

.
i n the co m pari so n Of the two languages special at t entio n w a s ,
called to certai n analogies foun d i n both an d n o t found i n a ny

o ther lan guage o f thos e spoken by th e race and parti cular stress has ,
been lai d on the peculiar co m m on features of the m i ddle pass ive o r

relative for m s O f the verb and on the change o f m to n fo r the
,
past tense sti ll the real i m portance Of these peculiariti es can only b e
,
p roperly appreciated by the reader after he has m ade h i m self fa m ilia r

with the language These a ffini ties are not explicable by any p ri nci ple
.
we can appeal to as habitually at work i n the hu m an m i nd and when ,
the fact o f th e singula rity of these m ethods and that Of thei r being
used exclusively i n the P hili ppi ne and M adagascar i slands are properly
e sti m ated ,
we m a y with perfect logic a nd i t h so m e degree of co n w
fi de n ce conclude the co m m o n pa rentage Of the two languages the long ,
distance of the two co untries fro m one an other notwi thstanding .
M a la g a s i i s described as consi sti ng of a M alay o r if th is des ignation ,
i s obj ected to of a P olynesian ele m e n t an d a nother ele m ent which i s traced

,
to th e A frican grou p of languages of the Bantu fa m ily I t i s stated that the .
la nguages of the Bantu group have a co m plex structure an d an elaborate

gra m m ar m uch above the require m ents and i ntellects Of the people who
speak the m The co m parison O f Tagalog wi th these languages and then
.
,
with those spoke n i n N e w G uinea m a y disclose facts o f great e thn o ~
logical and philological value I t i s to be expected th at an earnest

.
research i nto these languages m a y be attended wit h i m portant resul t s a s ,
everything see m s to i ndicate that Tagalog i s of Sout h A frican o rigin

b
.
A s Tagalog an d M a la g a s i then cannot e tra ced to M alay an d

, , ,
as the supposition of t he two languages having spontaneously sprung

up i n the m ind s of the i nhabi tants of such i solated an d re m ote
i s lands i s both unn atural and absurd i t follows that i nterco urse and , ,
therefore m igratio n m ust have existed Th ere re m ain then two dif
, .
, ,
fi cu lt questions for sol ution respecting which rational conj ectures only
can be O ffered H o w could the languages and the aboriginal i nha
.
b i ta n t s of these I slands fi nd thei r way i nto the island of M a d a da s ca r ,
or conversely ho w could the i n ha b i t a n s of M adagascar and thei r

, ,
languages find their way i nto these I slands ? Cra w f u rd an d Hu m b old t ,
with hi m believe that the con nectio n o riginated fro m the M alayan
, ,
and not fro m the A fri can s ide an hypothesi s whic h however m a y , , ,
be too rash The othe r que s tio n i s : A t what epoch then could s uc h
.
, ,
an event h a ve hap pened ? This last question can be answered by

saying that i t m ust have happened at a very re m ote epoch i n the
history of m a n .
A s the subj ect i s one of the greatest i m portance fo r the e thn o

logy O f this part the world we cannot well refrai n fro m givi ng here
,
Cra w f u rd s views o n the subj ect as contai ned i n pages cclxxvi cclxxvii
,
-
of hi s Dissertation A s his work has n o w beco m e rare an d a m e re

.
reference would be of difficult substantiatio n by the reader the author ,
m a y be accorded so m e excuse fo r this his last quotati on fro m th e

wor k of the E nglish writer He says thus : .
CX VI . THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
We cannot but believe that thi s hypothesi s i s brought forwar d

i n a n honest desi re Of givi ng solution to a m o m entous question ; but at .
t he sa m e ti m e we cannot help thi n kin g th at too m uch reliance ha s

,
b een placed on the m onsoons as to i ts execu tion and that i t is too f a r

, ,
s coped as to i ts effects The case of a M alay vessel or of a fleet

.
of p r a u s sailing i n the northern then driven by a te m pest into t he ,
southern h e m isphere then caught by the A ustral southeastern m o n

, ,
s oon,
then putting before the wind an d lastly reaching the shore s ,
o f M adagascar m ust h ave been very rare i n the hi story o f m ankind ;

but i t i s one which however i n the course of ages m a y n o t appear
, ,
:
a s i m possible That the adventurous enterprise should have bee n

.
attended with th e results Cra w f u r d puts to i ts credit m a y appear a s

so m ewhat m ore question able We have heard of le p i d o p te ri bein g
.
blown out to sea of m igratory bi rds having d ropped a seed i n thei r

,
fligh t and of branches o r seeds being taken by the G ulf Strea m that
, ,
g ave rise to t he exi stence of a n insect o r to that of a plant i n a spot ,
where i t otherwi se would never h ave existed ; but i t would be t he

, ,
fi rst case ever recorded of a te m pest driven crew landing at such a

‘
re m ote an d large i sland as M ad a gascar i s and co m m unicating so grea t ,
a portion of thei r langu a ge to th e aboriginal i slanders But we a r e

here confronted with circu m stances even m ore pu z z
.
ling than those

m entioned by Cra w f u r d which rendered n ecessary hi s i nventi o n o f .
a fleet Of p r a u s an d a te m pest for explaining the contact of the

i nhabitants o f the wester n portion of the I ndian archipelago and Of
thei r languages wi t h tho se of M adagascar i n th e greater di stance ,
o f the P hilippines and the greater affinities O f the P hilippi ne la nguage s
wi th those of the A fri can i slan d A n d i t m ust again be asked H o w . .
d oes i t h appen tha t there are n ow so few af fi nities found between

Tagalog and M alay while there are so m any an d these of so m uch
, ,
.
i m portance foun d between the t ongues of the P hilippines and those of

, ,
M a dagascar ? H o w could i ntercourse have existed between these t w o

c o u ntries far m ore widely separated tha n Su m atra an d M adagascar?
O n w hich side di d i t originate ? I n wh a t era di d i t take p lace ?
A lthough the question i s o n e of t he m o st i m portant ever b rough t
f orward for deter m i nin g the ethn ological characteris tics of a race le t ,
us n ot however allow ourselves to be carried away by our fancy

, ,
i n trying to solve thi s in t ricate proble m L e t the geologist the .

,
ethnologi st and the phi lologist by m ean s Of thei r respective sc i en ce s

, ,
s earch for such facts as m a y clear up the m ystery which envelope s

the past of one of the m ost char m ing an d m ost eautiful portion s b
o f the world .
THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE
d a mma hzdla mma h of the A ra ic called by M alays , respective ly , ba r i s
“ "
b
di ba w a h;
-
the stroke beneath ; an d ba ri s di a dap the stroke befo re -
or i n front ( 1) .
The S cope of th e three substantive vowels was that o f serving

as i nitials , or if m edials o r fi nals , to express the last vo w el o f the
,
diphthongs .
Con siderable discrepancy i s fou n d i n the accounts given as to

t he d i recti on of the writi n g so m e saying that i t was fro m below upwards
.
, ,
so m e fro m righ t to left while oth ers s ay t ha t i t was fro m left to r ight , .
What see m s m ost probable i s that t he direction o riginally was a s i n , , ,
the M al a y fro m right to left an d that i t c ha n g e d t o fro m l eft to

,
right after the arrival Of th e Spaniards i n c onfor m i ty with the usag e ,
i n t he Spanish Sanskri t and Javanese languages

b
, ,
Cra w f u rd speaking of thi s alphabet winds up hi s re m a rk s a ou t

b
.
i t y saying : ( D i s s er ta ti o n p a g e cv i i) The Tagala alphabet then ha s

“
,
.
, ,
all a p p e a ra n ce o f an o riginal and local i nve n tion ; and at all even ts

, , ,
there i s as s uredly n o e vidence to show that it has been derived fro m

a foreign source N otwi thstan ding this b road assertio n by Cra w f u rd
b
.
, ,
we fi nd that esides the above m ention ed vowel m arks for a t a n d a n

b
,
ei ng analogous to those i n the M alay syste m there exists a rese m blance ,
o f for m between the Tagalog n a h an d y a h an d th e sa me characters i n

M alay to g e ther wit h rese m blan ce s of fo r m i n other characters not corres
,
pon di ng i n the two syste m s which see m s to indicate t hat the A rabic ,
alphabet ha s not been stran g e to the i nvention We fu rthe r fi nd that .
the character for b i n Tagal o g i s t he s am e as i n the Batak th ose fo r .

,
p an d n nearly the sa m e i s i n th e Bugi s syste m s

, Th ese rese m blances ,
.
are between i dentical characters but there exist also rese m blances i n ,
dissi m ilar characters o f th e al phabets of th ese languages F o r i ns ta nce .

,
b l an d t i n Tagalog rese m ble respectively h y an d ny i n Bugis ;

'
, , , ,
.
an d h i n Ta galog rese m bles a i n Batak Besi des these there a re other .

,
s i m ilarities of a m ore substa n ti al n ature between the Tagalog syste m

on one side and that of the Batak and all other Su m atran s yste m s o n
the other and even g reater o nes between Tagalog an d Bugis all o f
.
, ,
w h10h p racti cally precludes t he possibi lity of the syste m being purely
a l ocal creation without rela ti on to a n y foreign source ; fo r n o such ana
log i es as these see m to happen as the result o f chance or accident ,
n or as t hat of any co m m on tendency i nherent i n t he hu m an m i nd The .
s 1m i la ri t
y bet w ee n the Ta g alog a l ph abet an d t ha t o f t he Bugis i s not
~
li m ited to a m ere rese m blan ce i n the for m an d general arra n ge m en t

o f the characters but goes farther i nto affi niti es i n other depart m ents ,
of the langu a ge that point to an ancien t and i nti m a te connection betwee n

the two n ation s .
The Bu g is a lphabet con sists O f t w e n ty three characters of whic h

'
e i ghteen are si m ple an d the re m ainder co m pou nd being co mbinations ,
O f t he consonants n k mp n r ch an d n ch I t ha s a sub sta nt iv e a but

'
‘ ' ‘
. _ .
, , , , ,
lacks the sub s tantive characters for t he vowel s e i and a n of the Ta

.
-
g alog Syste m ; possessing o n the other h and three others for t he con , ,
sona n ts j r and a not foun d i n the latter There are vowel m arks
'
, , .
for e i ’
o and ,u and o ne for the ter m ination ony five m ark poi nts
,
'
, ,
i n all The Bugis alphabet i s therefore m ore co m plex a n d less i m per

'
.
, ,
feet than was the Tag a lo g but the fact shoul d not be lost sight o f t ha t ;
bes i des t he Bugis alph abet n o w in use another obsolete one exists which ,
18 still to be found i n so m e ancie nt m anuscripts .
Se e th e a p p li ca t i o n of t he s e two m a rk s to t he M a la y w or d s d i n di ng , “
a
"
W 8 11 ; bu n ti ng . “
p r e g na n t ih M a rs de n
’
G r a mm a r 17
; s p a ge
'
, .
OR THO G R A PHY . 5
In both syste m s the vo w el a is i nherent in every consonant and vowel ,
m ark s e x i s t f o r thos e of t he Other vowels the Bugi s possessing five as

’
‘
, ,
a bove s tated there being distinct m arks fo r e and i and o and u with
, , , ,
an addition al one for th e ending ony th ree m ore therefore t han i n' '
w
, , ,
Tagalog In the l a tter ho e ve r there were substantive characters for the

.
, ,
s ounds e i an d o n -
when initials which i n Bugis can be exp ressed only ,
by applyin g to the substantive vo w el a the m arks for these various

:
s ounds i n the sa m e way as i t i s done to the co nsonants ; w hile i n

Ta galog n o such vowel dots were appli ed to i solated vowels for the ,
t w o additional vowel characters were supposed to supply thei r place .
The m ost striking feature of the alph abe t s o f the two languag es an d ,
on e which rendered the m m ore defective t han even so m e of those of

the ru der languages o f Su m atra lay i n n either affording a ny m ark ,
for eliding th e vowel a an d causin g th e syllabe or the wo rd to en d '
i n a consonan t Thi s la ck o f an eliding sign i s less i nj urious to the

.
Bugis language whe re n o consonan t n asal s excepted can fo llow a n

, , ,
o ther witho ut the i nterven tio n O f a v owel than could possibly be the ,
case to Tagalog wh i ch co ntain s nu m erous wor d s th at ter m inate i n co n

,
sonants that a re n either n asals n o r aspirates The liquids r so m eti m es .

, ,
an d I frequen t ly coalesce with other conso n ants and a vowel i n the

, ,
sa m e syllabe and as there exi sted no con trivance i n the alpha bet to
,
point o u t when this d id o r did no t occu r it i s not easy to see how ,
cer tai n words c ou ld find p roper m ean s o f expression i n w ri tti n g or ,
ho w they could co m e to be u nderstood if written On the other han d . ,
the sa m e and other conso na nts Ofte n Occurred as m edial s an d finals , ,
a n d the absence of a m ark fo r elidi n g the i nherent vowel an d for sep
a ra t i n g the soun d O f th e con sonan t fro m th a t of t he vowel could only

'
add to the confusion N o r d i d the alph abet possess any m ean s of

palliating the s e d eficiencies such as are found in those o f the languages '
o f Su m atra the R ej an g fo r instance which besi des having a m a rk f o r

, , ,
e lidin g the i nherent vo w el another to signify an a following the

w
,
i nh erent vowel t o others fo r the n asals n an d n y ha s also a di e t

i n ct character fo r the aspirate followi ng a v ow e l
,
A m ark for n y woul .

,
d
h ave been especially useful i n Ta g alog to express the sa m e endin g
which it will be seen plays so i m portan t a role as liga m ent and
b
, ,
relative prono un L acki ng these an d o ther su sta ntial ele m ent s the
. ,
alp habet was practically a useless d esign or in the words of F r G aspar , ,

.
de S A gustin
.
“
i t was a wri tin g as easy to read a s it was difficult
,
,
to u nderstand because the reader m ust guess at the pronunciation
,
a n d m eani n g TO s ho w thi s the two exa m ples which he gives an d

.
, ,
which are a ls m reproduced by Cra w f u rd will suffice A word or syll ,

.
able consisti ng of the t wo consonants b and t the i nherent vowel ,
being u nderstoo d would m ake ba ta only i n any o f th e l an g uage s

,
western portio n o f the I ndian A rchipe lago b ut i n Tagalog i t

'
O f the ,
m ight be read also as ba ta y ba n ta y ba ta r ba ta c ba n ta ba ta y i n all , , , , , , ,
seven different ways Tw o letters I which wi th a dot over each should .

, ,
express le le o r li li m ight also b e read as li li m li li p li li s li n i n li li c

, , , , ,
a n d I t li m a king eight d ifferent m odes O f pron unciation ; because the

y ,
alphabet affo rded i nitial but no t m edi al o r ter m i n al consonants I t i s ,

.
well further to Ob s erve th a t the sounds given a s those i n to whi ch by ,
reas on o f such an i m perfect syste m the two characters could b e read ,
a re not accidental co m bin ation s b ut on the contrary fi xed words of , , ,
the language h avin g all of the m i ndependent and widely differing

,
s i g n i fi c a ti o n s .
n o t possible to conceive how such a pitiable syste m o f

I t is
'
writi ng as this could ever have been adapted to a language Of such a

6 THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE
co m plex phone ti c character as that Of Tag alog an d h ave een m ade b

available for the conveying and recording of thought In all probabili t y .
,
i t was never m ade use of for any p ractical purposes being rather i n .
the way O f a toy than i n that of a u seful tool ; as it could never have
been so easily eradicated and superseded by the Span is h one had i t ,
ever acquired any appreciable hold o n the native m ind History th us .

,
far see m s to lend support to t he belief that i t was n ot a real alph a

,
bet for as far as ou r knowledge g o e s n o t a single in scription n o t a

, ,
.
, ,
‘
,
genuine speci m en wri tten with its characters has ever been produced '
Classed organ i cally , th e na t i ve con son an t s follows :

L abials b, p , m a .
, .
L ingual y. .
Dentals d, t . .
P alatals c y .
,
.
G uttural h . .
N asals m n .
, .
Cerebral nasal ny
'
L i quid s l r .
,
Sibil an t 3 . .
TO the Spaniards added the followin g :

these n a ti v e c o n s o n a n t s
ch f , i ll a d v x and
, Of their o wn syste m wit h the V l e W th at
,
’
, , , , ,
z ,
the Span ish w o rds whic h h ave been adop ted m igh t th us fi n d proper
m eans of expression a n d i n so m e cases th at certain rules of th e Span , , ,
i s h o rthography be fulfilled I n so far as the pronunciatio n o f n ative .
wo rds i s con cerned nearly all th ese added consonants m igh t be d ispen sed ,
'
with th ey being frequently reduced to o r substituted for othe rs o f

“
the n ative syste m but a correct ety m ology re nders thei r prese rvatio n
b
,
i ndispen sa le .
The language i s there fore written with the t w enty seven letters , ,
o f t he Spanish alphabet plus on e t h e n y which i s peculiar to Tagalo g , , , .
They are a s i n E nglish divid ed into vowels an d consonan ts the fo r

, , ,
m e r bein g the u sual five O f our language an d the latte r twenty thre e . ,
-
,
i nclud in g t he se m ivo w el y , .
I n t he order of the Span i sh a lphabet these are represent ed by ,
the following characters :
A -
a, B b, C - -
c, Oh -
e h, D d, E - -
e ,
-
1, H
E f , G g , 11 1 - -
, j j,
-
L I , L l ll, M m , N
- - - -
n,
N fi, -
N a n g, P p,-
Q -
q, R -
r, S -
s , T t, -
U -
u, V -v , x -
x, Y y,-
Z -
z .
so un d The
Of the O o, U
'
’
fi ve A
'
f
vo w el s -
a, - -
u ,
correspon ds n early with

t hat o f th e sa m e letters
i n t he Engl ish o rd s : w F ar, Ye s ,
M i ll, Oh ,
R u le ,
t he sound o f a b ei ng u ni fo r m an d i ncapable o f i nterchange with

that of any of other vowels The sounds e and i o n one side an d
“
. ,
thos e of o an d a o n the other h av ing i n the origin al n ative al pha

.
bet but on e character each t o represen t the m are Often con founded ‘
i n pronunciatio n an d largely i nterchanged so as to sui t euphony o r

the speakers taste i however being m uch and a so m ewh at m ore , , , , ,
p revalen t The pre feren ce for the s oi i n d o f i over t hat of e m a y b e

.
attributed to Tagalog having been i n thi s point i n fluenced by th e , ,
Javanese cere m onial lan guage , where as i t i s known a scale of a s , ,

‘
THE TA G A L O G L A N G U A C E
“
peculiar sound as m a y be see n for i nst a nce i n Wr i i n g p a ny o kerchief
, , ,
‘
,
fo r p a no cloth ,
“
The Spanish character q or rath er the co m b in ation q u which ha s , ,
t he sa m e sound o f c before a o or a but a di fferen t use i s generally

‘
, , ,
preserved an d on l y by natives u nacquainted with i ts proper use i n

Spanish is so m eti m es ch anged to c they wri ting for i nstance ce r i do o r , , ,
g er i do ( pron ke h r é e d a w ) i n stead Of q u e r i d o beloved

- -
“
, .
,
V 1) i s pronoun ced by m os t Spaniards as b an i m proprie ty i n ,
whi ch th ey a re also follo w ed by nati ves Thus fo r i nstance they .

, ,
W rite Li n e fo r v i n o wi ne etc
“
.
,
,
The palatal an d sibi lant sound o f the Spanish as i s variously

written i n Tagalog M ost frequently however i t i s changed to that o f .
, ,
“
the sibilant s I n thi s way e x a m e n . exa m ination m a y be spelled i n , ,
Ta galo g eith er es a m e n zey s a m e n or e cs a me n .
The dental lingual sound of the Spanish 2 i s softened i n to the

”
sibi lant one O f the Tagalog s an d thu s ap a to shoe ; i s written s ap a to
“
, , z ,
.
There a r e other per m utations of one co n sonan t for ano ther even
i n those which are co m m on to the two languages ; a li qui d for another
”
liquid as for i ns tance I fo r m i n lny a l for la y a r place ; of a liquid
, ,
“
, ,
for a n asal as l for n i n s on da lo for s old a d o soldier an d o f the

, ,
“
den t al d fo r the li q ui d I too i n this latter i nstance , ,

.
Changes as well take place i n th e Spani sh vowels e an d i o ,
and n the sound of whi ch n a tiv e s perpetually con found ( never how
, , ,
ever that of a ) there existing m arked prefere nce fo r those o f i and

'
, ,
“
a . So they write q n i s o for q u es o Cheese ca mp i s a l for conj es a r to ,
“
,
confess e t c
’
, .
3
Spanish word s appear so m eti m es i n the plura l for m o r are used ,
wi t h the article p refixed to the m and i t i s i n thi s way that we find ,
p i s os for p es o
“
dollar ; la me s a for me s a
,
“
table nati ves believing th a t ,
/
the spelling with s and with la i s th a t o f the si m plest for m of the
respective w o r ds j tle Often o n the contrary the o f a S panish word
i n the plural i s dropped and the si ngular for m i s u sed wi th the p lu ra li z
r s
y , ,
ing particle m a nya to i ndicate the plural SO they say a ny m a ny a

’
.
,
“
a m er i ca n o f or lo s a m e r i ca n os the A m erican s etc ,
H h has i n Spanish n o perceptible soun d an d i s therefore sup

-
pressed i n Tagalog to preclude the possibili ty o f b ei ng p ronounced as ,
i t would necessarily b e t he case if pres erved i n the la tter Thus hor a , , .

, ,
“
hour is written o r a s etc Suppressions of the vowel e also occur ,, , .
as for i nstance i n p a s ta fo r for p u es ta

, stake
,
“
wager mu lto for ,
“ “
,
"
mu er to “
cad aver ; spectre etc
,
“
,
.
I t o nly re m ai ns to be no ticed that all Spani sh words passing

i nto Tagalog are considered by natives as radi cals an d as such are m ade ,
b y the m to confor m to the rules of thei r gra m m ar whi ch so m e ,

'
ti m es require that the i nitial consonant o f the radical b e changed o r

elided wit h certai n particle s wh ich are a p plied to the latter f o r the
for m ation of derivat ive co m pounds Changes of thi s ki nd are exhibited .
i n the words m a n a ba co to raise tobacco o r to dea l in tobacco ; fro m

,
“ “
” ”
ta ba co
“
tobacco ; ma ny a ba y o to ri de ; fro m ca ba llo horse etc “ “
‘
, , ,
OR THO GR A PHY .
P R O N U N C I A TI O N .
V o w e ls A lthough
what has been s aid abov e of the vowels
:
m a y appea r sufficien t to give the student a fai rly a ccu rate i dea o f
thei r sound fo r the purpose however o f acquain ti ng hi m as thoroughly
, , ,
as possible with th e m atter i t i s here repeated an d so m e exa m ples ,
given which together wi th the metho d Of s y lla b i fi c a ti o n res pelling an d

’
, ,
accentu ation e m ployed wi ll it i s believed en able hi m to overco m e the , , ,
difficulties of p ro nu nciat io n li kely to be encountered i n h is ta s k .
A a i s by far the m os t i m portant an d prevalen t Of the vowels

-
.
having unifo r m ‘ly the sound O f t he sa m e letter i n the E nglish words ,

“ ”
“
har m father
,
I t so m eti m es a ppears a s the on ly vowel of the
.
wo rd and i ts uses as such and as i n itial m edial and fi n a l m a y b e

‘
, ,
”
seen i n the following words : a ba la ( pron a h bci h la h) “
occupatio n ; .
- -
a s o ( pron
“
ah s oe ) dog ba n tct ( pro n ba hn tci) “
design ; ba ta ( pron
’
-
.
, .
, .
“ ”
bah ta h)
-
child ,
.
E e if written should always be p ronounced as the sa m e letter

-
This vowel occurs b u t rarely as a m

,
“ “ “ "
i n bed tell pen , edial or a fina l
a n d n ever as a n i n i t i a l i n genui ne Tagalog words This i s on account
'
of i ts sound wh i ch na tives avoid as m uch a s possible an d i s by the m '
co nside red very disa g reeable E ven i n th e f e w words i n whi ch i t i s .
retained the p ronunciation with e o r with i i s so wavering as to re nder its

,
use al m ost superfluous The follo wing words are given here as exa m ples : .
“ ”
ta e ( pro n t ah e h) excre m ent ; m a s ei lan ( pro n m a h s a y
“
.
-
, prudis h ; '
.
-
"
ba ba e ba ba y e ( pro n ba h bah e h ba h bah y e h) “
wo m an “
fe m ale
.
- - - -
, ,
"
I t is the sound which fi n ds so m uch m ore favor with n ati ves

ove r that of e F o r the two e i there was as explai ned bu t a single
.
-
, ,
cha racter i n the native alpha bet This soun d has been before des .
c ri b e d a s nearly corresponding with that o f the sa m e vowel i n f m i ll

‘
“
b ut is perhaps m ore acc u rately represented by that of e i n eve or e e i n
“
feet there existi ng a good deal of latitude i n the m an ner i n which
i t i s p ro nounced by native people I t is frequently foun d as th e in itial .
letter for m ing alone the fi rst syll a ble of the wo rd ; as m edial between
, ,
consonants ; and as final of any word or syllable i n which i t i s p re he d e d ,
by a conso nant I f fi nal an d preceded by a vowel i n the s a m e syllable

.
,
i t has then to b e written y as i s the case too i n Spanish The followi ng .
exa m ples wi ll il lustrate its sound positio ns and change I bi g ( pron ,

. .
“
to wish ( pron once ( pron k
“
e é bi y m i a n s ahn) l l
-
) n s an m e y a i s y a e e s ) - -
.
,
.
, ,
“
i t ch ; p i li ( pron p e e le e ) to choose ; bcty a y ( pron bah yy ) m atter
“ “ ’
’
- -
.
.
, ,
( pro n cct h hooe) tree

“
cahu y
’
-
, ,
“ ” “ " “
0 0 i s p ronounced as the sa m e letter i n O h
-
oft not as i n hot , ,
got but the sound m a y b e expanded so as to include every gradation

“
lying between th e sa m e an d tha t o f a i n full 0 0 i s m ore frequently
“
-
found as an i nitial than i t ei ther for m ing by i tself or contributing to ,
for m the first syllable of the word and also ending the last syllab le ,
o f t he radical i n which la tter posi tion it generally changes to n i n

,
the derivative or co m pound for m ed by the appendage of a s u f fi xe d part '
i ole A s m edial in the syllable either between consonants or b etween , ,
consonants and vowels and as final of any other syllable than the last ,
i n the word 0 i s no t fo und so frequen tly as i t except in cas e s where

, ,
‘
a precedes for here a p reference see m s to exist the ending a o both

, ,
'
,
-
of t he syllable a n d of t he word being consi d ered m ore e u phoni c than a n ,

.
2
10 THE TA GA L O G L AN GUA GE
The f ollo i ng ex a m p le s w
are g i ve n to i ll u stra te the ma tt e r : clap ( pro n
oh lahp)
”
-
“ ”
clo u ; or lot ( pron on lé ht)
,
“
d “
re ou nd ; o lo ( pron ohl Oh)
“
.
"
, b ’
.
-
,
“
head ; loto ( pron lé h toe ) cooked ; bond oc ( pron bohn d oke ) m oun t
, .
-
, .
-
” “ "
ai n bé a a n ( pron hé a hn) m onth ba é n ( pro n ba h é hn)
.
“
-
the grave , , .
-
,
“ "
ca la bc i o ( pron ca h la h bah oh) buf falo .
- - -
, .
(7 14 i s the o ther alternative soun d i n so m e cases p r e d o m i n a t

-
,
i ng over that o f o Of the third and last vowel characte r of the

b
.
,
”
nati ve alp ha et being that o f the sa m e letter i n b u ll o r tha t of c o
,
“
,
in “
foot A s m edial i n the syllable or the word i t occurs m ore t re ,
quently than 0 for as above said t he latter when final i n the rad
b
, , , ,
i cal generally changes to a i n the de rivative or co m pound e f ore a

,
” “
s uf fi x as seen fo r in s tance i n olu ha n bolster ; fro m 016 hea d
“
b
, , , , ,
U a is always i nitial i f f ollowed

~
y i and form i ng with the la t ter .
. t he fi rst syllable of t he word I t i s also found although not so f re .

,
uen tly as an i nitial under the sa m e conditions as and m ore f

'
re
q o
b
.
, , ,
quently than thi s latter as m edial i n the sylla le and final Of syll
z
,
ables other than t he last of th e word E x a m p le s a i ca ( pron ooi c a h) .

’
.
-
,
”
“ language ; u bi ( pron oé be e )
“
y a m ; a ns i a m i ( pro n o o n s e a h .m e e
”
) -
,
”
.
' -
,
“
coon dé e ) but ; baba y ( pron bah booy ) hog ;
“ ~ -
.
,
to grow ‘
C o n s o n a n t s : E = h so unds as i n E nglish an d occurs as i ni tial

‘
a n d fi nal never a s m edial i n the syllable E xa m ples : ba ni y ( pron

, . .
” "
ba h n i g)
“
m a t ; ta bct ( pron ta h bah) fat ; di bdi b ( pro n d ee b di b) “
’
-
b
- -
.
, , .
,
"
“
re ast ; ha bla ( pron ha h blah) accu sation “ -
d
.
,
i
C c occurs either b efo re a o a and any o f the liqu s l or r
-
, , ,
or at the en d of the syllable or t he word i n an y o f these two posi t ,
i o n s ha v i n g the sa m e palatal sound only that i t ha s i n E nglish before

b
.
the sa m e vowels an d conso nants I t i s however ut rarely fo u n d .

, ,
coa lescing with the liquids and any o f the vowels and thi s n ever i n
b
,
t he first sylla le Of genuine Tagalog word s E xa m ples : ca g a t ( pron . .
” "
aa h y akt)
“
-
to b ite ; cog on ( pro n cé h y ohn)
,
“
thatching straw ; ca n .
-
,
“ ” “ ” “
( pron co o n )
“
if
”
. when ; s a c a (
, pron aa
“
h a a h ) , after ; lu c b a n ( pron .
-
”
, .
look bahn) Citron ; i tac ( pron e e tack) knife .

-
, .
Ch e h This double co nsonant i s foun d only i n Spa nish words

b
-
.
,
“ ”
where it is to e pro nou nced as the sa m e letter i n church ; bu t nat
iv es m ake n o atte m pt at its p ronu nciation softeni ng i ts sound i nto ,
t hat of s h and even i nto tha t o f 3 E xa m ples : chi n o ( pron s he n ah) . .

-
,
”
“Chi nese ; chap a ( pron chahma h) chi p “
.
, .
D d I t i s n ot so den tal in Tagalog as i n E nglish

-
. I ts sound i s .
“ ”
nearly that of the sa m e c onsonant i n t he wo rd draft ; but i t b eco m es
m ore and m ore cerebral as i t i s placed forward i n the word u nti l .
at the end i t vanishes i nto that of r with which i t i s confounde d

and i n fact used i ndiscri m inately by natives
, , As i n itial d i s .
,
.
exclusively used ( r i te “
here ; r i g/ an a n d r é on there ,
“
are ho wever
,
’
frequently u sed for eli te d i y an an d doon) and generally t o o at the , ,
m iddle whe n preceded by a con sonant ; but the i nitial o r fi nal

d o f the radical genera lly changes t o r i n the co m pound if
b ,
.
.
y vi rtue o f the p re fi x i n g o r s u f fi x i n g of particles its position i n the

~
,
word beco m es that Of a m edial bet w een vowels Thus for i nstance di to .
, , ,
“ “ “ ”
here but p a r i to to co m e he re p a la d o r p a la r ,
happy ; but ca ,
I f t he i nitial d beco m es m edial with a consonan t

“
p a la r a n
. happiness ,
“
preceding no change then takes place : d a la , conveying m a g d a la , ,
to co nvey etc The other uses of the con sonant m a y be seen i n da y o

z
. .
,
" ”
( d “
pron o o y e)
o blood
.
; b o n d o c -
( pron b o
,
h n d ok e)
“
m ountai n ; c ap a ti d .
-
cap a ti r ( pron b roth er

“
ca h p a h .
-
F y i s a letter wanting i n all the cultured languages Of the M a

‘
THE TA GA L O G LA N GUA GE .
an d w d or s i n Tagalog When at the end o f a or d ny m a y be . w ,
an i ntegral par t of it or a m ere euphonic e nding i n both cases y

b
,
“ ”
having the m ild u t still perceptible so und it has i n dignity ,
“
’
sig nal , ,
and si m i lar E nglish words s e é la ny )

“
E xa m ples : s i la ny ( pron . to ,
-
, .
u
rise ( the sun ); bali ng ( pron bah li ng ) to stagger .

-
,
“
H h is rather a guttural than an aspi rate consonan t but its ,
sound does not differ fro m the one i t has i n E nglish I t occur s .
only at the beginni ng o f the word o r syllable always before a vo w el , ,
an d never i n the position i n which i t should have been an aspi rate ,
that i s to say at the e nd of the word with a vowel pre ceding ( 1)

,
.
”
E xa m ples : ha la y ct p ron ( ha h la h y ah) “
pri ce ; ha la y hay ( pron ha h ly
‘
- - -
. .
,
“ ”
hahy) to pu t l inen to dry
, .
J i s found o nly i n Spanish words i f no alie nation fro m

the original orthography is m eant I t s soun d i s the strong hars h .
guttu ral of the G erm an ch which as abo ve s a i d natives co m m ute , , ,
to that of h J j although i n pronunciation m a y be soften ed is gen

.
-
, ,
e ra lly p reserved i n the o rthography of p roper na m es as J os e ( pron

J es i l s ( pron ha y s z
.
,
“
hoh s ay) Joseph i s s )
“
Jes us etc
’
- -
.
, ,
L l sounds as i n E nglish and i s found as ini tial m edial an d

‘
final A s m edial it i s so m eti m es foun d coalesci ng in the sa m e syll

.
,
able with ano ther consonant and a vowel b ut never i n the fi rst syll ,
able o f genu ine Tagalog word s E xa m ples : loc s o ( pron la ke oh)

“
-
. .
,
”
j u m ping ; ta la bci ( pron ta h s ols ol (p ro n s o hl s ohl)
“
“
oys t er
’
-
.
.
, ,
to goad ; ca mba l ( pron ca hm baht) t w m ; s a cli t ( pron s a h cli tt)

“ ~
.
.
, ,
“ "
sling .
L l ll i s a consonant peculiar to the Spanish language a nd

-
,
therefore to b e found o nly i n words borro w ed fro m i t

,
I ts sound .
“ "
rese m bles that of the sa m e co m bination i n the E nglish word brilliant ;
but i s as already said changed to that of y by natives E xa m ples :
lla v ez z z
.
, ,
y (
“
y a b e ( pron ly a h b e h y a h be h) key m a n te q
-
a i lla ma n ti q u i a pron
-
ma hn ta y ki h ly a hz
. .
,
“
-
ma hn tee ki h y a h)
- -
butter - - -
M m corresponds wi th the sound o f the sa m e consonant i n

-
E nglish I t i s found as i nitial and fi nal never as m edial of syll

.
, ,
ables or words Be fo re I) and p m an d n o t n should be used

.
,
.
“
E xa m ples : m a ha l ( pron m a h hahl) dear s a lama t ( pron s a h ltt h m a tt)
’
- - -
. .
, ,
“ “
than k s y é tom ( pron y é h to m) h unger ; s a m bi t ( p ron s a hm bi tt) - -
. .
, ,
”
ta hm p ahl) slap
“
m ourning ta mp a l ( pron .
-
,
“
N n has i n Tagalog the sa m e so und as i n E n glish occurring

-
,
at the beginning at the m iddle and at the en d o f the syllable o r the,
word an d i s writte n m before 6 an d p

,
E xa m ples : n aca o ( pro n n ah . .
ca h oh) -
“
steal ing ; ba ny ca ( pron bd ny ca h) any s peci m en of s m all
“
.
-
,
" ”
craft ta ndct ( pron ta hn
“
m ark ; ( tha n ( pron d ak e hn ) road “
‘
'
. . .
,
~
N n Th is i s another consonant pec u liar to the Spanish which

-
.
,
is found i n Tagalog o nly whe n wo rds borrowed fro m t hat la n g u age

'
appear wri t te n i n t he o riginal or thography fo r i f the sa m e are Ta g

a li z
~
, ,
ed are then written with n y by natives

,
I ts sou n d i s a palatal .
nasal the neares t approach to wh ich i s found i n th at of the letter n

,
( 1) The
f a c t t h a t h i s f r e q u e n t ly f o u n d p re ce d e d b y a o w e l a t t h e e nd v
i n f M a la y w o r d s w he n w r i t te n i n t he R o m a n c h a r a c t e r ( i n w h i c h p o s i t i o n i t i s
s i le n t a n d o n ly u s e d f o r t he p u r
p o s e o f r e n d e r i n g t he ow e l a s p i ra t e )
,
a n d t ha t o f v
t hi s c o n s o na n ne v e r t
b e i n g a fi na l le t t e r i n Ta g a lo g , c o n s t i t u t e s a d e f e c t i n t he
la t t e r c h a r g e a b le t o t h os e w ho fi r s t m a d e a p p li c a t i o n o f t h e Sp a n i s h a lp h a b e to t
t h e la n g u a g e Th e p r o p r i e t y o f u s i n g h a t t he e n d i n c e r t a i n w o xd s t o m a rk t h e
’
a s p i r a t i o n o f t h e la s t v o w e l doe s n ot s e e m to ha v e a p p e a r e d t o t h e i r m i n d s , n o r
z
di d t h e y s e e m t o r e a li e t h e n e c e s s i ty o f w r i t i n g , f o r i n s t a n ce y a n da h a n d n o t .
v
‘
y a nd a , a n d s a bi h a n d n o t s a bi f o r t he f o r m a t i on Of s u c h d e r i v a t i e s a s c a y a n a aha n ,
aabihi n , e tc , t hu s d o i ng a w a y w i t h o ne o f t h e g re a e s
. d if fi cu t i e s i n t he a ng u a g e t t l l .
Oar noe aA rii it . 13
w
i n Eng lis h he n i t i s follo ed y th e vo els i o a s i n the Wor w b
onion w d “
z
-
z
N f occurs only at the beginning of syllables other than the fi rs t of
'
the word E xa m ples : E s p a f a zE s p a n y a ( pron e s s p ahn y a h) Spai n ;

.
“ ”
.
- -
,
L os B a fi os ( pron l ba h a ks ) L Ba os ( a town )
‘
os s n y o s ri
.
, .
A Vq n g Thi s i s t he m ost peculiar Tagalog con sonant an d one for

‘
which there exists a dis tin ct character i n a ll the languages o f the

I ndi an A rchi pelago Its soun d i s a n asal cerebral one approaching t hat
.
“ “
o f mg i n kingly or that o f the final 72 i n the French word bien and
i s p roduced by strongly expelling the brea t h towards the roof of the
m outh so that a por tio n of the ai r should co m e forth through the
,
nostrils The studen t will do well however to have i t pronounced

b
.
, ,
y a n ative .
I n writing this con sonant the tittle above 9 o r above a n d m idway

" '
the two c haracters should not be forgotten for o therwise doubt m a y , , ,
ari se as to whether the mg or the co m bination ng i s m ean t to show

"
which t he two words m a nga ( d ivi ded thus ma my a ) a particle used i n “ ‘
, ,
”
Ta galog to signi fy the plural an d ma ng a ( divided thus ma n g a ) m ango ; “
b
, ,
will suffice N g ng co m es only at the beginning of t he sylla le or the

‘ ~
-
.
w ord always fol lowed by a vo wel E xa m ples : nga y on ( pron nga h y on)
'
b
-
.
,
“ "
s a ng ah)
“
now s a nga ( pro n b ranch When the e n ding ng elongs
.
-
, .
to the word i t changes to n g before the vowel o f t he particle added

’
z z
-
,
“
’
to the radical as fo r i nstance i n ca g a l ng a n s oundness ; fro m g a l ng

‘
’
, , , , ,
“
so u nd
P p has the sa m e soun d as i n E nglish and occurs only as i ni tial
-
“
o r fi nal E xa m ples ; p a r a ( pron p ath r a h) like a ep a e ( pron a ck
p p
z
-
. .
.
,
"
p ack) wing ; d a q u ip ( pro n d a h ké ep ) to sei e
“ “ -
, .
,
Q q This is another Spanish consonant which i s al w ays follow

.
ed by a silent u q a being used for a p urpose analogous to tha t for ,
whic h g u i s used before e and i that i s to say for t he i ndicating before , ,
said vowels o f the h ard soun d which 0 has before the othe rs a o , ,
"
as i n the E ngl i s h words antique “ “
conquer etc E xa m ples : q u e br a da
'
z
a , , ,
" "
( pron ka y br a/ d a k) wreck ga i la la ke y lah la h) acquaintan ce
“ “ o
, .
.
,
I n i nserting a be tween (1 and e o r i no departure i s m ade fro m the ,
S p anis h o rt hog ra p i ca l rules but as already i ndicated owing to ignorance , , ,
o n t he part of the natives an d to a differen t use of q i n Spanis h ,
when Tagalog fi rs t began to be written still q alone an d not q a is ,
used by so m e and i s fo un d e m ployed i n an cient books and dic tionaries .
Thus q u i bo i s written q i bo; q u i labo t gi labot; etc

, , ,
R r has the sa m e sound as i n the E nglish word “ very This

b
-
co nsonan t i s fr equently con founde d with d th e native alpha e t pro ,
v i d i n g but one character for the two sounds A s initial d i s al m ost .

, ,
exclusi vely used ; a t the e nd of the word d or r m a y be used but ,
the wri ting with d i s to be p referred A t the m iddle r i s used .

,
between vo w els ; d bet w ee n a consona n t and a vowel ,

.
R r i s eve n m ore rarely than I found as liquid coalescing

-
wi th another consonant and on e o f the vowels and this n ever i n the ,
first syllable o f t he words ( 1) E xa m ples : ma r a hi l ( pron ma lt r ah -
laca dz Zak ca dz
.
.
,
“ ”
hee l) “
,
perhaps laca r ( pro n ,
lah ca r ) walking ; 1507 0 -
,
" “
( pron toh . r oh) pointing
-
o ut ; a c r
,
as ( pron : a h c r ahs
) to go the shortest -
,
way .
( 1) I t d o u b t f u l w he he r r e e r c o a le s ce s a t a ll, f o r p e r ha p s s u ch
is e ven t v
w or d s as a or ti c m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d a s d i i d e d h u s a c r ats , a n d i t s e e m s a s i f t he
,
v t
i n fl u e n ce of S p a n i s h o nly w o u ld r e n d e r i t p r o n o u n c e d a cr a s , o r i t m a y b e t ha t
t he w o r d i n i t s p r e s e n f o r m i s b u t a c on t ra c ti o n o f s t
o me a nc i e n o ne w i th a t
v o we l e l i de d
14 THE TA GA L O G LA N GUA GE .
i n Tagalog the soun d it has i n the E nglish words

ha s
”
” "
“
si n “
this never that of th e E nglish 2 or that o f s i n these “
It
b
.
, , ,
occurs as i niti al or fin al no t as m edial i n the sylla le E xa m ples :

,
.
" ”
ai y a ( pron s e e y a k
.
)
“
he “
she b
-
a s a ( pro n ba s,ah )
“
wet ; p m s an
, .
-
,
"
( pron i h )
“
cousi n l ba ( pron l h b a )
“
ou tside T h
z
n s c n s e
p e e ; a a s s
b
-
. . .
.
,
soun d of the Spanish consonants a efore 6 or i and before the , ,
others a lingual one stronger than tha t o f the E nglish th i n t he word

,
“
thing is as indicated be fore changed to that o f 3 Thus Spanish
w z zz z
.
, ,
ords as ce bolla Ci ce r on L a a r o Z o lo u e co etc co m e to be Ta ga li e d

’
, , , , ‘
.
i nto s i ba y a Si s er on L as a r o Soi lo s u e co
.
, , , .
T t sounds as i n E nglish i n the word tape

-
“
and occurs o nly
at the beginning and at the end of words an d syllables never at the
E xa m ples : tz
,
” “ ”
m iddle of the latter ma y ( pron to
“
true real ; ’
.
,
. ,
”
co tco t ( pron cott cott). to excavate with the claws ; p a tay pron ( p a h
-
,
.
”
ti e) dead ; a t ( pron a tt ) an d
“ “
, .
,
U u l i ke y perfor m s in Tagalog the double office o f a con sonan t

-
b b
, ,
and a vowel being a consonant at the eginnin g of words and sylla les
, ,
and a vowel i n any other posi tion A s a consonant its soun d i s th e labial .
,
“
one of the E n g lish w i n way and i t wo u ld have been p robably so written ,
were i t no t fo r the fact that no such character i s found i n the Spa n

i sh alphabet I t m a y be co nsidere d as occurri ng only at the
. egin b
n ing of words and syllables al w ays followed by a vowel E xa m ples : .
“ ” ”
( pro n ooa h Cas s ) “ con su m m ation ; u i ca ( pron ooeé ca h) language ;
“
a u cas
z
-
,
.
,
bau a ( pron bah ooa h) every ( pron

’
ua s é
w
o
. .
,
V v i s another consonan t borrowed fro m Spanish to hich

b
-
,
Spaniards and natives alike give the sound of the la ial b I t oc

b
.
curs only at the eginning o f words an d syllables and i s s ti ll r e ,
ta i n e d i n certai n n a m es of places as for i nstance i n Ca v i te ( pro n ca h

z
.
, ,
”
beé teh) Cavite ; N u e v a Vi ca y a ( pro n n ooay ba h bi th cah y a h) N ueva
“ “
— o - -
, . ,
V i x ca y a
X another o f the conson an ts borrowed fro m the S panis h
-
x,
language i s also rarely used i n Tagalog I t s sound i n Spani sh i s

, .
,
as i n E nglish o ne that m a y be represented by t hat of th e co m binat

,
ions ks o r g s according respectively as to whether i t i s followed , ,
by a consonant o r by a vowel ; but n atives m ake no atte m pt at i t s

true pronunciation an d have substitu ted fo r i t that of s X x oc -
b
.
curs but a t the beginning o r at the en d of the sylla les E xa m ples

A li xz z
.
"
a li s
( m ) i
“
pron ah li ck s ah l c e s
) A lix the
( “ na-
e o f a s treet ; a u x
li oz z
.
,
” “ ”
a a s i li o
( pro n a o o g s e é li oh a o o s e é l
.i oh) help assist
-
a nce - - -
, ,
.
Yy as a consonan t co m es only at the beginning of the syll

-
,
able o r the word always followed by a vowel b oth of which m ust

b
, ,
then belong to t he sa m e syllable for although at the egin ning if

b
, , ,
alone and for m ing a syllable y itself i t is then a vowel an d should

z
,
be writ ten ( ) y Y as vowel not as consonan t co m es at the

'
1 .
-
, ,
end of the syllable or the word an d m ust i n thi s position b e pre

ceded by another vowel I t s sound is th e sa m e as tha t i t h as i n .
,
"
the E nglish word yes “
E xa m ples : g a cap ( pron y a h cdhp ) e m b ra c
“ -
b
.
.
,
“ ”
ing di g/ a ta ( pron d e e y ah ta h) therefore “
ba y bay ( pro n by by )
.
-
each
-
,
.
-
, .
anish ll as is illus ,
Tagalog an d is the
last consonant i n the alphabets of the two languages . As i nitial of
( l ) Y y , I i , a Ta g a lo g v e r b a l p a s s i v e p a r i cle , a l h o u g h f o r m i n g b y i t
- -
t t .
s e lf t h e fi r s t s y lla b le o f t he co m p o u n d w he n p r e fi x e d , i s , f or t e achi n g p u r po s e s
t
only. w ri t e n y a nd n o t i t hro u gho u t t hi s
g a mma r . r
b
exhi iting i n th e table belo w a n u m ber of words wri tten i n t hi s s o
‘
called m odern orthography an d co m paring the m with s a m e as wr1tten

th ro u ghout in this book .
W ord s .
As wri tten by modifiers . its written i n thi s Grammar.
The preceding table does no t cover perhaps al l for m s o f these

m odernis m s i n use nor can it b e sai d wi th any assurance tha t othe r
,
innovations m a y not spring u p i n the future due to the Spiri t of ,
p resu m ption which pervades a portion o f the n ative m ind ; but i t i s

believed that whatever others m a y exist or m a y he inven ted in the
future wil l be so m uch o n the line s o f the above ones as to be easily
understood by the s tudent witho ut further explanations to be given .
Sp e c i a l R e m a r k .
consulting Spanish Tagalog dictionaries should not fo r

Students -
get the i ndiscri m inate use of so m e letters ; 6 a n d i o and a c and

y y
, ,
s or g d and r
,
and ,
and ll j and p g a e g u i and g e g i , , , , , ,
q u and q When a word i s not found written wi th any of these

.
characters an atte m pt should be m ade to guess at its cognate affinity

, ,
an d to seek it el sew here I n such di ctionaries only radical words are

.
arranged alphabetically and as i n the case of certai n derivatives the

,
i nitials of the radical are so m eti m es changed or elided care should b e ,
taken therefore first to separate the root fro m all particles with whi ch
b
, ,
i t m a y have ee n co m bi ned and then to restore or to replace as

, ,
the case m a y be such initial letter or letters as m a y have been changed

,
or elided so as to arrive at the un m odi fi ed crude radical w ord

, .
Pno s onr . 17
P R O S O D Y .
th e di scussion of P rosody i s take n up at t his early stage

If ,
i t i s only for the purpose o f acquainting the student with the accent
an d m ethod of accentuation e m ployed for n o m eter o r rhy m e con ,
sideration i s o r can be i ntended with a la n guage possessing no poetry

and scarcely any p rose co m positions .
The p ronunci ation of Tagalog although soft enough an d at , ,
any rate m uch soft er than that o f an y of the other languages spoken
z
,
m ore to the n orth i n L u on i s howeve r not so so ft as that of M alay

, ,
a language i n which as a rule n o con sonant can follow another

, ,
wi thout a vowel co m ing between whi le i n Taga log two or three ,
conson an ts m a y co m e together coalescing with one o r m ore vowels i n

the sa m e syllable an d labials nasals dentals an d palatals also occur
, , ,
as finals i n the syllable o r the word thus b ringing for th a phonetic ,

.
character that co m es nearer to that of Spanis h and Javanese than to

that o f M alay .
The pronu nci ation however i s n ot so rough as the study of

, ,
the written form s m a y lead u s to believe ; for freedo m o f s y ntax does

m uch i n softening it an d t he roughness too is largely reduced b y
,
vari ous other contri van ces i n speech so th a t no on e who eve r heard ,
Tagalog spoken by fairly educated n a tives will fai l to classify i t as

one of the s m oothest languages i n the world .
A ltho u gh tri syllabi c a n d polysyll a bic roots are n ot wan ti n g ,
the lan gu age i s however m ainly di ssyllabic When a root i s foun d .
to con si st of three of m ore syllables i t m a y be presu m ed that the ,
wo rd i s either so m e an cien t derivative n o longer used as such or th at ,
the last syllable was elidible i n the language fro m which it originally
sprung Whateve r m a y be thought o f the th eory of a m onosyllabi c
'
origi n the fact i s however that n o uncontracted self s i g n i fi ca n t Ta galog

, , ,
-
word i s found to co n si st o f only one syllab le .
N o Spanish gr a m m arian s have ever atte m pted to turn away fro m

the p rosody of thei r o w n language i n explaining that o f Tagalog It
'
.
see m s as if they ha d proceeded o n the theory of a co m m on proso

d i c a l character or with an a i m to th e un ification of the two la n guages ;
, ,
for a few re m arks o n the accen t excepted n o further con sideration i s

, ,
q
g iven in their gr a m m a rs to the re m aining prosodical m atter thus i m plying ,
that al l othe r Spani sh rules of p ronun ci ation were equally applicable to

Tagalog To speak o f an identi ty of the prosody i n the two la n gu a ges
.
would certain ly b e to say too m uch ; but stil l n o sou n d reason see 8 to
exi st here for departing fro m t he rules i n Spani sh i n i ew 0 the , V
close si m ilarity i n the phone ti c ch arac ter of the two languages These .
rules m odified however i n the way which i t i s co nsi dere d to suit

,
Tagalog peculiarities are therefore hereinafter s tated :

, , ,
D iv i s i on of S y lla b i e s .
When a con sonant co m es between two vowels i t j oin s the ,

“ ” ”
secon d vowel E xa m ples : a ba “
oh ; ba ta child Co m bination s
b b w w b
- -
. .
,
of a l a ial o r a palata l and a liquid e t een t o vowels m a y e

18 THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A G E
d d
co nsi ere as co m i n g un er t his rule E x am ples : i cl shortnes s ? d z
’
“
z
-
.
,
g r a c a ( Sp ) grace
’
“
'
-
,
E xceptions :
a) R adicals ending in an asp irate vo w el i n so far as their las t
.
,
“ " “ ”
sy llable is concerned E xa m p les : ba s a to read ; ha la g a value
b
- ’
. .
,
“
) Dissyllables
“
consisting . of two equal
”
portio n s E xa m ples : .
ac ao -
notch ; ol ol m a d
,
-
When two co n sonants co m e between two vowels t o eac h vowel

z
,
” “ ”
a consona nt i s j oined E xa m ples : bu n 15219 p regnant ; hi n h n quiet “ ’
- -
. .
When three consonants co m e between two vowels the t wo fi rst ,
consonants are j oined to the first vowel E xa m ples : d a ng ca l “

span .
( length m easure ); ba ng ca vessel

“ -
E very final consonant j oi n s the preceding vowel E xa m ples : .

.
“ " “ ”
ta oh—
year lo a o
, cove ,
-
, .
‘
Devi ation s f ro m the above rules s hould b e m arked with a

hyphe n E xa m ples : ba l oh .
“
well fountai n ma c ha “
face bu la c -
,
“
-
,
-
“ "
la c flower ; p a g g a u a do ing ; e tc “ '
- -
, ,
Co m p o s i t i o n of S y lla b le s
sylla le i n Tagalog m a y consist :

A
“
b
a ) Of a sin gle vowel a s a i n a ca la
. to guess ,
- -
,
b ) Of on e vowel an d one consonant or conversely as i n i n

.
, ,
”
ih s ic “
chines e ; ha i n ha ba “
length ’
- -
, ,
c ) Of o ne vowel be tween two consonants as p a n i n p a n h e

.
, ,
to go up s tairs
d ) Of o ne vowel an d two con sonants provi ded o ne of th e
.
,
“ “ ” ”
latt er b e not a liquid a s a ny i n a ny ca m race ancestry ,
-
, ,
.
e ) Of one consonant one vowel an d two conso nants under the

.
,
sa m e condition s as i n as li ng i n li ng cod “
to wait upo n -
f ) Of two consonants and one vowel one of the for m er being

.
,
”
a li quid a s old i n ha cla ( 2 ) as tonish m ent
“
,
—
Words consisting o f two equal po rtions are excepted as see n i n ,
bu la c la c
-
“
flower —
g ) The sa m e co m binations as i n f ) followed by a consonant

. .
,
“
as cla r i n ba cla r fishing enclosure cr ot in s i cr ot a kin d o f ga m e
-
“
,
-
,
:
played with pebbles

h Of one con sonan t one vowel an d two conson ants i n certain ,
“ ”
condi tion s t o be explained under the accent as lo os i n lacs o j u m ping ,
-
,
.
This last divi sion m a y not appear un questi onable but at all events , , ,
this see m s the best m ean s o f m arking the aspiratio n of t he final vowel of
the radical an d o f thu s in dicating the for m ation o f certain co m poun ds ,
a thing the i m portance of which can on ly be app reciated by the stu

den t when he co m es to speak t he language .
( 1) De r i v a i v e s t in w hi c h a n y of t he p r e fi x e s m ay or p a y e n t e r s , i f f o llo e d w
by a v o w e l, as ,
f o r i n s t a n c e , m a g ar a l p a g ar a l, m a y b e ,
co n s i d e r e d di i s i b le ma v
g a r a l, p a y é r a l -
or ma g a r a l p ag a r a l Th e f or m e r i s m or e in us e no w - a - da y s
~ - - - -
, , .
a n d s ho w s t he i n fl u e n c e of t he Sp a n i s h p r o s o dy ; t he la tte r is m or e co nge n i a l
to th e la n g u a g e .
( 2 ) A n o t he r i n s ta n ce of t he i n fl u e n c e of Sp a n i s h .
( Se e f o o t
t p age-
no e
( 3) Co m b i n a t i o n s f) and g) . a re not f o u n d i n t he fi r s t s y ll a b le o f g e nu i ne
Ta g a lo g wo rd s .
THE TA GA L O G LA N GuA GfJ .
to another . The experience of the Span ish friars suf fi c i ently p t o V e s

this ; there are words i n thei r di ctionaries written with n o les s than
three different sorts of accent .
The u s e of the accent is in the m ean ti m e b eing m ade a m atter

of m uch arbitra ry p ractice .
The written Spani sh accent i ndicati ve of the syllable U pon wh ich

a particular stress i s laid ha s b een so m ewhat i nj udiciously applied t o
Tagalog . So m e gra m m arian s go so far as to ad m it o f seven differen t
m ann ers of accentuation ; so m e fo u r ; a n d so m e other s three ; which they
, ,
represen t by acute ,
grave and circu m flex ,
There are ,
even others who use on ly either t he first o r t he fi rst two ; while

most writers do not see m to acknowledge any for whatever they m a y , ,
think thereo f i n theory they a t least use none i n p r a ctice leaving

, , , ,
rather to the reader s p resupposed k n owledge to pronounce i n the proper

'
way o r i n the m anner that m a y best suit the local peculiarities The .
fact i s that the Spani s h accen t has been c a rried away fro m i t s province
i n an atte m pt to explai n lingui s t peculiariti e s whi ch could have foun d
better m ean s o f expressio n by o ther orthographi cal sign s .
But all these apparen t in consistencies an d i n t r i n ca ci e s of accen t

an d p ronunciation owe their difficul ty t o the rules by whi ch the
Spanish friars atte m pted t o defin e the m an d vani sh with p racti ce i n
t he language ; for i t was i ntended to explai n certai n m odification s o f
the vowel soun ds by a character which i n Spani sh i s solely e m ployed
fo r t he purpose o f m arki n g the vowel of the syllable o n which a
particular e m phasis is to be lai d .
What constitutes the real difficulty i s the fact that the accent ~
i s in Tagalog so m eti m es m ade dependent o n m odi fi cation s o f the ori -
g i n a l m ea n ing ( so m ewh a t as in to record

“ “
the record and other
E ng lish words ) and on the e m phasi s with whi ch the speaker wants to
draw a ttentio n to partic ular wo rds i n hi s speech So when natives
w
.
,
ant to speak e m phatically they use the accen t o n a syll able o n

,
which i t would not b e other w ise I t i s fo r this purpose that the

.
accent i s frequently changed wi t h the i m perative by rendering the

last s y llable o f the word conspicuous a n d students should n ot , ,
therefore be either surpri sed or di scouraged i f they fin d the sa m e

,
:
word so m eti m es accented one way an d so m eti m es ano t her i n the

gra mm ar ; for apart fro m what ha s j ust been s aid of a change o f
,
sense and indication o f e m phasis i n so m e cases eve n n atives could ,
not wel l say whi c h i s the accented syllable o f certai n words .
The o m i ts s i on o f accen t m arks m a y fi n d so m e excuse i n t he case

of natives writing to each oth er where a thorough fa m iliari ty of both
,
.
par ties wi th the la nguage can be safely re lied upon to re m ove any
doubt as to the m ean ing i ntended ; but i t beco m es so n ecessary for
guiding studen ts an d begin ners as even to j usti fy the author i n ,
creating a syste m of accentuation i f o ne were not already i n exi stence .
The Spani sh accent therefore will be used th roughout th i s

, ,
book t o i ndicate the vowel o f the syllable where a particular e m phasi s

i s placed . Thi s is not lik e the one o f which we shall speak later
,
o n a co nventional sign an d t he student i s reco m m ended to preserve

, ,
i t and to u se i t i n hi s writin g of the langua g e .
The resorting to the Spani sh syste m o f accen tuatio n m a y per

haps be thought by so m e to afford no adequate m ean s for the purpose
of explaining prosodial Tagalog peculiar i ties ; but o n t he other hand , ,
to go into the intricacies an d difficulties on ly known to those who

z z
,
m ade the atte mpt o f the j es m te s hd d ha m a n w e s ta me dd a h a ng ca

'
d d b
, , , , , ,
and a ll oth er o rt hograp h i cal i s ti nc ti ons u s e i n M alay o r to go a ck ,

Pa o s o hr . Ql
to the sof the Spanish friars could only g i ve ir th to confus
ys t em s b
w
,
ion i n t he student s m in d an d render his task even m ore ’

eariso m e .
We fi n d the Spanish syste m o f accentuatio n t o possess greater m eans

o f adaptation to the language than those m ore co m plicated syste m s
which wer e i nvented fo r a class o f languages wi th which n either Spanish
no r Tagalog has any radical conn ection .
The necessity or i f this i s nor ad m itted , the advan tages at

, ,
le a s t of the use o f thi s accen t m a y be seen a m ong m an y others i n

, ,
“ “ " ”
the followi n g words : g a ta s m ilk an d g a tas “
path ; g rilli ng
,
source , , ,
“ " ” ”
o rigi n an g a li ng sound,
“
,
“
healthy ; ta y o we and ta y o erecti n g
“ “
, , ,
'
etc where only by using a c c e n t m a rk s can it b e i ndicated i n t he

:
.
,
w ri tten language which o f the two words expressible with th e sa m e

,
lette rs i s m eant .
By thi s m ethod an d by p a ying attention to the foregoing rules ,
students i t i s believed will be assisted i n the attain m ent o f a desirable

, ,
pronu nciation I t should be n oticed h oweve r t hat there exists both

.
, , ,
i n pronunciation an d i n writing m uch latitude i n the use o f the accent , ,
and that learners m a y find these and other si m ilar words ei ther u nac
ce n t e d o r otherwi se accented i n other books .
Tw o of the m ost i m portant word buildin g particles it will be -

,
seen are the suffixes i n and a n

, R eference has already been m ade .
to the radical often en ding i n an aspirate vowel and it has been ex ,
plai ne d also that h the consonant which i n M alay i s appended to the

b
,
vowel i n the sa m e position i n order to denote the aspiration has een , ,
o m itted i n Tagalog for cen turies past since the language ca m e to be

wri tten with the R o m an character The first Spani sh gra m m arian s
b
.
evi dently elieved that th is aspi ration of the vowel could be i n dicated
better by what was called a cen to br e v e g r a v e by so m e of the m and p en al ,
ti ma p r odu cta g r a v e by others The h whi ch i n such a position

b
,
as the o ne referred to above should be silent i n the radic a l ein g

‘
, ,
then a m ere sign o f the aspi ration d etaches itself fro m the vowel and ,
beco m es the i ni tial consonant of the last syllab le which it contributes ,
to for m with the above m entioned s u f fi x e d particles i n the co m pound .
I n this position h recovers the gu ttural sound i t has at the beginning

of a syllable a s i t i s n ot th en a sign but a real con sonant
,
Se e .
thi s illustrated for i nstance i n the M alay m a n a h Tagalog ma n a

, , , , , ,
"
“
i nheri tance an d thei r derivatives : M alay ca ma n a h a n ; Tagalo g ca ma
, ,
- - -
“
n a ha n
~
“
por tio n allotted
, th e M alay mu r a h Tagalog m or a cheap , , , ,
”
and deri vatives : M alay ca mu r a h a h “
liberality ; Tagalog ca mor a ha n
,
- -
, ,
- -
,
“ ” “ ”
insult inj ury
“
w ro n g
b
, ,
A s a consequence o f t he o m ission o f h i n the radical i t eco m es ,
necessary to replace i t i n the co m pound and , that thi s m a y b e ,
done t he suffixes i n and a n are therefore to b e written ki n and

, , ,
ha n . I n speaki ng the p ro no u ncing o f the las t vo w el sound detached

,
fro m that o f all other letters i n the radical m a y be considere d to ,
m ark the aspi ration sufficien tly b ut this is by no m eans the case i n ,
wri ting an d there existing no sig n to g u ide the reade r as to th i s

,
i m portant poi nt the author has t hought i t convenient to use the

,
G reek n ote of breathing o r grave accent for the purpos e Thi s .
m ark is even m ore essential than the other i n g u iding the stude n t
i n hi s task especially if he is to acqui re the language unassiste d ; as
,
he could n ot otherwise k no w how a great m any co m pounds we re to

he for m ed ; but it i s however a co nventional sign an d it m a y b e used
, ,
o r n o t as the student m a y wi sh .
(I ) Se e I ntro d ucti on to t he Di cti o nary '

ot Pad re J ua n de N oceda
THE TA G AL O G
(
L A N GUA Gh
'
A e xa m ples it i s
few elieved w i ll suf fi ce to War ran t the
“ ”
,
“
b ,
adoption of this m ark B as a “

soaking ba s a i n wet ; ba s a read
.
, , ,
” “ ”
i ng ; ba s a ki n “
,
“
to be read ; s a ma wicke d c a s a maa n wickedness , ,
s a ma
“
, acco m panyi ng ca s a m a ha n co m pany ,
There are Ta galog words i n which the stres s of t he accent i s

on the last syllable but in the great bulk however of radi cal wo rds
, , ,
the acce n t i s on the penulti m ate The only radicals foun d i n which .
th e stress of th e accent i s o n the antepenulti m ate are so m e of those

"
ending i n a o as ar a o “
day ; cala o “
hornbill ( a bi rd ); etc where
b
.
, , , ,
the endin g a o for m s n o diphthong the words eing p ronoun ced and ,
divi ded thus : a r a o cd la o - -

,
- -
.
Wh en particles are prefixed to the radical the accent of the ,

“
latter is preserved i n the co m po un d as fo r i nstance i n u mar a o to , , ,
”
be sunny ; f ro m ar a o “
sun ; p a g ca s a la t “
pen m an ship fro m s i d a t ’ ’
, , ,
writing The accen t of the radical i s likewise p reserved i n th e

’
co mpound even i n the case of particles being s u f fi x e d when the stress is

”
i n the las t syllable of the radical as for i nstance i n u p é a n seat ; fro m “
, , , ,
“ “ “ “
up o sittin g ca s a ma a n wicke dn ess fro m s a ma wickedness In the
’
’
, , ,
case o f particles being s u f fi x e d to radi cals or p r e fi x built deri v ati ves ,

-
otherwise accented a prosodial change t hen takes place by which the

, ,
accented syllable should keep i n the co m p ound the sa m e rela tive

position it kept i n the radi cal t he accent advancing one syllable fo r ,
"
the purpose Thus fro m s i r la t
.
“
writing ; i s for m ed s u la ta n
,
-
,
- -
,
“ “ “
w riting paper ; fro m a r a o “
day ; i s fo r m ed ca a r a o a h
“
an - -
,
- - - -
,
n i v e rs a ry e tc
M e t ho d of A c c e nt u a t i o n .
Di rections fo r the u nderstanding o f the m ethod of accen tuation

adopted i n thi s work follow :
F o r the prope r use of t he acute accent words are divided i nto ,
two classes : grave and acute G rave words are those i n which .
the stress of the accent i s o n the penulti m ate ; ac u te words those i n ,
which the stress o f the acce n t i s o n the last syllable .
U naccented words e nding i n a vowel o r i n n or s are to be

pronoun ced grave U naccented words en di ng i n a consonant ( n and
.
s excepted ) are t o be p ronounced acute A n y devi ation fro m the .
above rules will be m a rked wi th accent m arks .
“
E xa m ples o f u naccen ted grave words are : a ca la to thi nk ; ,
“ ” ” ”
ba y a n , t own ; g a ta s “
m ilk ; g a ui “
gait E xa m ples of accented
, , .
“ ”
grave words are : g ami t use ; ala c “
arrack , ,
E xa m ples of unaccented acute words are : bon d oc

,
“
hill q u i dla t , ,
"
lightening E xa m ples of accented acu te words are : ap r “
offence ;
'
,
“
bu cas , open s a la mi n
“
looking glass ,
-
The few Tagalog words i n which the stress is o n the ante '
penulti m ate syllable will al w ays be accented as n aca o stealing ; hi ca o

“ ‘
, , ,
“ "
ear rin g ; etc
The las t syllable o f radical words th e fi nal vowel o f whi ch i s
foun d thus m arked should be pronounced acute i n a p eculiar way .
The vowel as i t were detaches i tsel f fro m the preceding porti on of

w
, ,
the word an d has the aspirate soun d i t would have if it were follo
ed by h a co nson ant with whi ch it i s found appended i n M alay
,
"
and o ther kindred dialects Thus wo rds as ba to stone ; s a bi saying
“ “
w
.
, , ,
e tc ; a r e t o be pro nounced as if they were ritten ba t 6h s a b i h —
d
-
.
, .
For t he p roper acc e ntua tio n c a r e s ho u l b e ta k e n i n the ca se of

THE TA GAL O G L A N GUA GE .
m ean s to walk i n the natural w a y ; while m a g la ca d

“
“
”
”
hich mean s , w
“
to walk m uch to walk swiftly i s acute Words denoting slowness ‘
zz
.
,
“ “ ”
“
are generally grave as t g u l to cease hi a to to s top t o halt
’
’
.
, ,
P e c u li a r i t i e s .
U n der certai n condition s to be explai ned i n th e gra m m ar words ,
having m utual dependence are linke d to each o ther b y m eans of cer

tai n connectives adhering thereto or place d bet een the m either to ,
w ,
su it euphony o r to establish particular relation s

,
The particles .
m ade use o f for thi s purpose a r e 9 s u f fi x e d to words ending i n n ; ng , ,
affixed to those ending in one o r t w o eq u al vowels ; and n a placed '

,
b e tween those ending i n a consonan t ( n excepted ) or two different ,
vowels an d the following word to be lin k ed thereto

A y ai y z b
.
are likewi se connectives u sed between words es ta lish

’
- -
, ,
ing so m e verbal relation ge nerally so between the subj ect an d the verb , ,
.
The illustration s hereafter will convey to the student su ch a

notion of the m atter as m a y be sufficient for hi m to understan d the
“ ”
office o f these particles at thi s early stage B a ya n town ; m a la
,
.
,
“ “ “
qn i , large ; ba y a ng m a la qu i large town ; m a bu ti good ; ta u o m a n
“ “ “ “
, ,
“
, ,
“ “
perso n ; ma ba ti ng ta n o or ta n ong m a hn ti “
good fellow ; ma li cot
“
, , , ,
“ "
n aughty ; a na c son or daughter ; m a li co t n a a n a c or a n a c n a ma
“
, , ,
" “ “ “
li cot ,
“
naughty son or daughter ; bon do c m ountai n m a taa s ,
high ; , ,
a ny bu n d o c a y m a taa s
“ “
the m oun tai n i s high , .
A M i s so m e ti m es a connective used be tween causal conjunctions

an d the word followi ng as i n d z
'
? a co
p a r or oon 8 a p a y"ca t a coa ma y , , , , ,
g a na
“
I shall n ot go there because I h ave busi ness
, ,
.
So m e words undergo certai n contraction s on account of briefness

or euphony In a y an d a t for i n stan ce a m a y be d ropped when
.
, , ,
the word i m m ediately p receding ends i n a vowel When i t ends , .
i n n both the n of the word an d the a of the con nectives m a y be

,
dropped the pra ctice i n such a case having b e e n e s ta b li s he d of

, .
t he p u tti n g o f the t or y i re m ai ning of the connectives between two

°
-
“
co m m as ( 1) as i n g a bi t ar a o for g a bi a t ar a o
,
“
night and day ; , , , ,
ca r n nn n ga t oa ba n a la n for ca r n nn nga n a t ca ba n a la n wi sdo m an d “

'
, , , ,
“ ”
vi rtue ; Si P e dr oni m a bn ti for m; P e dr o a y m a hu ti ,
P eter i s good ; , ,
“
“ “
fo r i y an a y ma ha ba that i s lo n g ,
.
R e a d i ng a nd P r o no u nc i n g .
E very
le tter ( i t between 9 an d q an d e o r rj excepted ) havin g ,
whatever its posit i on the sa m e u nvarying sound i t follows that the , ,
reading of Tagalog co m es to be a si m ple p rocess consisting in giving ,
to each letter i ts proper soun d that i s to say the one assigned to , ,
it i n the chapter devoted to the o rthography an d thus pronounc i ng ,
each syllable phon e tically .
Stude nts who a t te m pt to acqu ire the lan g uage u nassisted should
endeavor before passi ng o n i n the G ra m m ar to acquai nt the m selves
, ,
fully with the foregoi ng re m arks an d then to read and pronounce ,
aloud repeatedly an d as correctly as possi ble t he following .
( 1) Thi s s e ems to b e b u t a n e x te n s i on of t he c o m m a o r a p o s tr o p he , w hi ch i n
M a la g a s i is us ed f o r t he p u r p o s e o f i n d i c a t i n g a p a u s e in s p e e c h, a n d a ls o f or r e p la c i n
g
the s u b s ta n t i v e v e rb a n d a o i d i n v
g a m b i g u i ty .
P a os onr . 25
R E A DI N G AND PR O N O U N CI N G E X E R CI S E .
A ng ga ra l
p a n s a bundoc .
”
A hng p a h n ga r a hl
- -
s ah boon d oke -
.
Th e ser m o n on the m oun tain .
c “
(j
‘7
f
Ta g Cayo
.
. ay Si y ang as i n n ang lupa : n

g u ni ,
t ,
P ron Ca h y oe y ahn ai a h s e en n a hn g loop a h:

’
g oé n e e t
’
.
-
ey e s ee - - -
n -
Tran s Ye are salt of the earth : but

j u tf /
.
cun an g asin ay tu ng m a b a n g a
y a no
c oon a hng a h s e en -
( ey e toon g m a h bang ) - -
ey e a hn -
oh
if the salt ( beco m e savorle ss ) then wh a t
Ta g . ang a in
y p ga s . U al a nang anb pa m an
P ron Wa h lri h n a hng
'
a hng e e p a h g a h s ee n hn oh ah ma n
’ ’
a p
- - - -
. .
Trans . the wherewith to salt .

( I t) has not of what m ore ever :
Ta g . c a b u lu han cund i up ang y ta p o n s a lab as

P ro n . ca h -
boo loo hahn ,
- -
coo n -
d ee oo p ahng ee tah p ohn
- -
s ah la h bahs -
Trans . value except for to b e th rown to the outside
Ta g . at y a c a
p a n n ang i nan a g tau t) .
P ron a kt y cah p ha n n a hng mah nga h tah w oh

'
. a - - - -
.
Trans . and to be tra m pled upo n o f ( by ) the ( plur ) people . .
Ta g . Cay o ang ilao nang s a n g li b u ta n .
P ron Ca h y oh a hn g I a h oh n a hng s a hn g le e boo ta hn

’
.
-
ee - - -
.
Trans . Ye ( are ) the light of the whole round n ess ( world )
Ta g . A ng i s ang ciudad na n a ta ta y o
P ron . A hng ce s s ahng thew d a ha -

na h n a h ta h ta h
- -
y de
Tran s . The city that stands erected
Ta g . s a i bab ao nang i s ang bundoc ay
P ron . s ah ee -
ba h bah o h -
n a hng s ee s -
ahng boon doke ey e
Trans . at above of ( on ) one ( a) m ountai n so
P ron he e n d e e ma h e e ta h tah g oh
’
- - - - -
. .
Trans . n ot ca n be b i d .
Ta g . At hi ndi p i n a n i n i n ga s a n ang i s ang

P ron A kt heen d e e n a h n e e n e e n g ah s a hn a hng ahng
'
.
p ee - - -
s ee s -
Tran s . A nd not i s set i n fla m es the on e ( a )
Ta g . i la u an at y li n a la g ay s a i lali m nang
le e n a h la h g ay s ah lah leem n a hng
'
P ron . ee -
la oo ahn '
a kt ee - - -
s e - -
Trans . light a nd i s being pu t in under of
Ta g . i s ang tacal an ,
cund i s a lalag y an -
nang
h lahn dee s ah la h la hy y ahn n a hn g
’
P ron . s ee s -
ahng ta h -
ca -
,
coo n - -
Tran s .
one ( a ) rice m easu re ,
but ( is placed )at the stand of the
THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A G E .
Ta g
'
.
ilao at lu n g m i li u an a g s a lah a t h a ng
P e é la h o h
-
a ht lu ng mee le e w ah n a hg
- - '
s ah
.
la h hatt n a hng
Tra ns . light and shi nes to all of
Ta g . m an a g na s a b ah ay .
P ron m ah ng a h nah s ah hah hi g h

'
- -
. .
Trans . the ( those) that ( are ) in the ho use .
Ta g . L u m i u an a g na gay on ang i ny b n g i lao s a

P ron . L oo m e e w ah n a hg
- - '
na h g a h y ohn a hng e e n y ohn -
eé -
la h oh
-
s a h
Tran s . L e t s hi ne then so t he your light in
Ta g . h arap m an gan ang tau b u p an m aqui ta nil a

P ron ha h r ahp n a hng m ah ng a h tah w oh ahn ma h ke é ta h n i hl a
’
.
- -
oo p - - - -
Trans . front of the ( plur ) . m en so that m a y b e seen of the m
Ta g . ang iny ong m an a g g a u an g m a b u b u tl at

P ro 11 a hng o mah ng a h h a m a h bo o boot e é a kt
'
. e en -
n
y g
-
g a w
-
n g
- - -
Trans . the you r the ( plur) wo rks goo d an d
Ta g . c a n i lan g p u r i hi n ang i nybng A ma na na

P ron ca h- n ee l any oo r e é h ee n hng y ang a h m ah nah na h
’
p a ee n
b
- - -
.
Tran s . their ( y the m ) to be honored the your F ather that is
Ta g . s a lan it g .
P ron s ah lah ng e e t
’
-
. .
Tran s . in heaven .
98 TH E TA G A L O G L A N GU A G E
The
subj ect of a sen tence whether a noun or pronoun m ay e , ,
b
placed ei ther before or after the verb i t governs a s m a y best s ui t ,
euphony or e m phasi s .
M a y r oon an d i ts root ma y are constructed between two n o m in

atives .M a y r oon m a y be used alone m a y always requi re s so m e ,
obj ect of possession following .
“
To have as an active verb followed by a noun i n an i nde ,
term inate sense is translated by ma y o r m a yr oon I f t he noun wh ich

,
is i n E nglish the di rect co m ple m ent of the verb to have i s deter

“
m inate i n sense “
to have i s then translated with n a an d the obj ecti ve cas e
,
’
( ablative o f place or locative ) o f the nou n or personal pron oun which

i s the subj ec t i n E nglish ; thu s n a s a a q u i n a ny ti n ap a y m o m ean s
’
b
, ,
“
literally : your b read i s with m e Sa i s so m eti m es used efore
ca y i n connectio n wi th the so called dative o f acquisition
, .
Sufficient i llustr a tions for the m aj ority o f cases to which th e above

rule i s appli cable follow that the s tude nt fro m the outset m a y thu s
, , ,
get accusto m ed to this peculiar for m o f Tagalog construc tion .
Wha t ? g A n b ? , ga n b bag a ?
Which ? ,
wh ich o ne ? gA li n ? , dali n bag a?
’
Who ? .
g Si n o ? , g s i n o cay a ? .
A n ong la m esang m a y roo n ca ?

Wha t ta b le
'
have you ? (
( A n ong la m esa ang n a s a i y b ?
A n g i y b n g la m esa
I have your ( thy) tabl e
Which has ? ( indet )
.
i A n g la m esa m o
A li n m a r o o n ?
j
ang n a s a aqui n .
.
d g y
Do ( deter
. m ) .
g N a s a alin ? .
Who has ? ( indet ) .
gS i n o n g m a y
,
r o o n ? .
Do ( deter
. m ) .
gN a s a cani no
Which king has m oney ? d A l i n g h aring m a y r oo n g salapi ?
g
.
Which bishop has m y letter? g N a s a alin o bi spo ( bag a ) ang s ulat co? .
M y k i ng has m oney . M a y r oo n g salapi ang h ari co .
Your ( sin g )bi shop has m y letter . N a s a obispo m o ang a q u i n g s ulat .
Who has so m e water? gSi n o n g ( cay a) m a y r oo n g t ubig ?

Wh o has your ( sing )salt? g N a s a can ino bag a ang i y b n g asi n ? .
The
rule as applied to the i n terrogative a n d w hen obtaining i n ,
the obj ective case i s by reason o f th e i ndeter m in ation of thi s pronoun

, , ,
a so m ewhat variable one bo th e x p re s i o n s ga n ong la me s a a ny n a s a eye?

,
and ga mi ng la mes a ng m a y r é o n ca ? being used wi th a tende n cy however ,
to the latter beco m ing p ro p o n d e ra n t .
N u m eral adj ectives are no t considered as deter m inative unless ,
th ey the m selves a re o therwise deter m ined by so m e word having a

deter m inati ve charac ter E xa m p le : Jll a y r oon a cony d a la n a ny p a c o
.
,
I have two n ails d a la a any p a c o a ny n a s a a q u i n I h av e “

‘
a ny ,
the two n ails ( L iterally “

the t w o n ails are with m e
,
Properly speaking the i nterrogati ve sense i s not i ndi cated i n

,
Tagalog by any sign o r p articular m a n ner of construction ; but by the

e m ploy m ent of such words as ba y a ( 2 ) ca y a etc thei r u se being , ,
.
,
( 1) Sa ca n i n o i s t he lo c a t i v e ca s e o f s z
’
F o r d e c le n s i o n s , s e e Si x t h L e s s o n
no . .
( 2 ) B a y a w i ll f re l u e n t ly b e m e t w i t h w r i t t e n a n d p r o n o u n c e d ba N o ti c e .
s h o u ld b e t
a ke n of t he c o m m o n n a t i v e h a b i t o f s ho r t e n i n g w o rd s b y d rop p i n g
s y lla b le s , s o m e t i m e s a t t h e b e g i n n i n g , s o m e t i m e s i n t he m i d d le , a n d s o m e t i m e s a t
t he e nd . I n t h i s f a s hi o n , t
h e y s a y : ba f o r bay a, la f o r lam a ng , Ta n i a f o r E s ta
m s la o , d ap an a f o r d a tap ou a e t c m u c h i n t he s a me w a v a s w e s a y c o llo q u i a lly :
’
, ,
”
“
ad
’
f or “
v t
a d e r is e me n t ,
" “
F r i s co “
f o r Sa n F ra n ci s co ,
" “
B r os f or “ "
Bro t he r s ,
"
“
ci ts f or “
z
ci t i e n s
“
, e tc
THE A R TI CL E . 29
Optional The i nterrogati ve signs taken fro m Span ish a re however

.
, ,
largely used and should be placed both at the begi nni ng ( i nverted )
, ,
and a t t he e nd of the sente nce The tone o f the voice alone .

, ,
m a y so m e ti m es m ark the i nterrogatio n sufficiently .
L a m es a .
( )
1
L a m an , T
( g );
a ca r n e , ( Spa n )
.
A sin .
A s aca l
v
.
( corruption of the Spanish word
a e ri ca r
) .
Ti i bi g
’
Su la t a n , ( Ta g ); p ap e l
( (
wri ting paper .
, Span ) .
written upon . Sula t .
M y m ine or of m e ( possessive )
, , , . A quin ( prepositive )
, ; co , ( po stpositive ) .
Thy thi ne or of thee ( poss )

, , ,
your yours or of you ( po ss ) I y o, mo, ( post )

S
, , , , .
( i n the singular )
A n g s a mba li lo co , o r , a n g a q u i n g s li m
M y hat .
ba li lo .
My tabl e A n g la mes a co or , a ng a q u i n g la m es a
b read
. .
,
Your ( sing ) . A n g ti n ap a y m o , or , ang i y on g t i n ap a y x

ang s a mba li lo co ?
Have you my ha t ? g N a s a i y b bag a ang a q u i n g s a mb a
l
.
li lo ?
Co , p o , n a s a a n g s a m b a li lo m o
Yes Si r , I have your hat
(
.
aqui n a n g i y on g s a m b a li lo
, .
. .
gN a s a i y o bag a a ng la m esa m o ?
Have you your tabl e ?
{ or cay a) ang i y on g la m esa? l
I have my ta leb .
5 N a s a aq ui n
ang la m esa co
ang a q u i n g la m esa i
.
A n g hari .
A n g obi s p o ( Spa n ) . .
A n g la m esa m o
I have your tabl e
i a n g na s a aqu i n
(
.
A n g i y b n g la m e s a
. .
What ? ( no m i native ) .
g A n o ? ; dan o bag a?
The
'
b
a ove illustrations show that the possess ive pro nou ns an d
the possess ive case o f the p erso na l p ro no u n s are alike a n d have t w o
for m s o ne p re positive and the o ther postp ositive
z
.
, .
The relative character o f a ny m ay be seen i n ga l ng s a mba li lo

’
a ny n a s a z
y o? a ny i y ony la mes a a ny n a s a a q u i n and si m i lar se ntences
'
, ,
.
F I RST E XE R CI SE .
Have you any b rea d ? Yes Si r I h ave so m e b read Have , , .
you m y bread ? I ha v e yo ur b read H a v e y o u the m eat ? I have .
t he m eat Have yo u your m eat ?

. I have m y m ea t Have y o u the .
s a lt? I have t he salt H a v e you m y s a l t ? I ha v e y o u r sa lt H a ve . .
yo u t he sugar ? I have t he s u gar Have yo u t he water ? I have the .

'
( l ) Th e S p a n i s h w o r d mes a u s e d w i t h t h e a r ti c le la . I n a dop ti n g
Sp a ni s h
w o rds ,
na ti v e s s o me i me s t
p e s e r e t h e a r t i c le a n d
r
v
s o me ti me s t he s o f t he p l u r a l,
w hi c h t he y be l v
i e e t o f o r m a p a r t o f t he w o r d
,
.
THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A G E
water Have you your water ? I have m y water
. What paper have . .
you ? I have m y paper Which table have I ? Thou hast m y table

. . . .
Whi ch king has sugar ? Y ou r king h a s s u gar Which king has m y .
M y king has your ha t W hic h bishop has water ? Your bi shop .
ha s so m e water Whic h one h as m y paper ? M y bi shop has your

.
p aper Who has so m e m oney ? I have so m e Who ha s m y b rea d ?

.
.
You have m y bread .
S E CO N D L E S S O N . YC AL A U A N G PA G A R A L .
G E N DER .
I for gende r i s u nknown i n Tagalog an d th e sexes are

nfl e x i o n ,
generally d istinguished by the additio n of such words as la la q u i ,
m ale ; ba ba y e
“
fe m ale ; i n the case o f living beings The following
, .
are t he only cases i n wh ic h gender i s expresse d by di fferent words :

a ma
“
,
father ; ma m other ; a ma n ma ma
” “ ”
z ,
“
u ncle ; a ll aunt ; coy a z
“
'
z
’
, ,
eldest brother ; a ti z a te
‘
“ ” “ ”
ca ca ,
eldest sister ; bi n a ta da la y a , , ,
" “ “ ” “
“
gi rl ; ta n da n g young cock ; du ma r a y a pullet ;
, young hen ; ba y ao , ,
“ ”
“
brother i n law ; kip a y
- -
siste r i n law ,
-
.
Si Juan Si Orti . z .
Si Se nor R obi nson .
Si Se nor B ranagan .
A n g Se nor Branagan .
Si Doctor M artin
Dr M artin
.
A n g Dr M arti n . .
n a m es and surna m es i n the si ngular an n o m i nativ e

Chri stian d
case require the particle 375 before th e m When u sed with ti tles they .
,
m a y be preceded by the sa m e particle o r by that o f co m m o n nouns ,
according to whethe r stress i s laid o n the n a m e or o n the title .
The father . The m o ther . A ng a ma A ng i n a

. .
The b rother A ng c a p a t i d n a lalaqui
b
.
. .
The si ster A ng -
c a p a ti d na abaye
b
. .
E ldest )
gpy g
rother ( first born a, a ca
( colloquial na m es )
. . .
E ldest si ster at
.
M y eldest brother . Si coya s i caca ; ang c oya co

, ,
a ng cac a
M y eldest sister . Si ati an g ati co
, .
M y fath e r M y m other . . Si ama . u Si i n a .
The
article 315 o f pro per personal nouns m a y be used also
befo re co mm on nouns to i ndica te living beings u ni que i n kind an d ,
pertaining to the s peaker i t carrying i n itself the i dea o f possessio n ,
with regard to the speaker wi thou t th e use o f the possessive

pronoun being requi red When ani m als are na m ed after person s .
( 1) W he n i n th e la n g u a g e o f M a d a g a s ca r h i n g s a r e s p o k e n o f , w hi c h t v
co n s i s t of t w o e le m e n t s , t
h a t c o n s i d e r e d a s t h e f e e b le r o f t he t w o i s d e n o t e d b y
v a c/ y . Thi s i s p ro b a b ly t he o r i g i n o f t h e w o rd ba bdy ba ba y e z .
32 THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
A R TI CL E F OR O
C MM ON , AN D
'
P RO P E R N O UN S OF THI N G S I N THE SI N G U L A R .
N am . A ng .
j Sa, nang; n g
Of the
.
t ( c o n t r a ct ) ( )
1
.
TO , or fo r the ,
. Sa .
The . N ang , s a .
5 C ausative and locative I by at the

n, Sa
A bl
. . .
, ,
1 I nstru m ental . By th rough with th e

, , , . N ang .
A R TI CL E F OR P R oPE R N OU N s OF PE R SO N S ,
I N THE S I N GU L A R .
N om . Si , .
P oss Of Ca y u i
b by
. . .
,
O j ect .
( all i ts divi sion s ) . TO , at in , , , wi th etc , . . Ca y .
D E CL E N SI ON WI TH A C MM O ON N OUN .
The . A ng .
O f t he .
T T
” for the
h weapon
ili g sandat a
.
,
. .
e n s a
ObJe Ct
locative I n at th e Sa
'
A bl j .
, ,
. .
( i n st By wi th t he
.
, ,
. N an g
D E CL E N SI ON WI TH A P RO PE R N OUN or PE R SO N .
N om . Peter . Si Pedro .
P oss Peter s of P eter

‘
Ca y ui P edro
b
. .
,
.
O j ect ( all its divisions ) . Peter ; by , to etc , Peter Ca y Pedro , . . .
N ot to have ( active ver ) not to b ,
possess ; there i s ( or are) not ( i h U al a ,

.
defini te ) 1
b
.
3 2)
have ( acti ve ver ); there I s ( o r
M a y m a e on
j , .
I have n o ta le
l
b
U al a ac ti ng la m esa
A c o i ual ang la m esa
.
, ,
.
U a la bag a s a i y b ang carne la

(m
? g or ,
Have y o u not the m eat ,
a n g ca t i . ?
There i s so m e salt . M a y asin , m a y roo n g asi n
There i s no sugar . U al ang a s uca l .
He or she,
. Si v a .
I s there any paper o n the ta bl e ? M o n bag a ng papel s a la m esa ?

cg a e .
There i s no sugar i n the water . U al ang a s uca l s a t ubig

I s there any house on the far m ? M b h y cay a bi i q u i d ?
’
a a y a a a s
There is none . U al a .
Have you the leaf o f the book ? g N a s a i y h b a g a a n g p o h a s n a n g li b r o ?
I h ave i t : ( indeed ) . N a s a aqui n n ga .
( 1) N a ng is co n t ra c t e d
y Su c h a b b r e v i
i nto a e d f o r m , a lt ho u g h f re q u e n t ly
n . t
m e t w i t h i n o t he r b oo k s w i ll n o t b e f o u n d i n t hi s g ra m m a r , a s i t w o u ld b e d e
s t r u c ti v e o f t h e p r o s o d y a n d t h e s t u d en m i h
g t b e h e r e b y m i s le d i n o t
a f a
l
s e p ro t t ~
n u n c i a ti o n o f t hi s i m p o r t a n t p a r t i c le .
( 2 ) The r e i s n o e q u i a le n i n E n g li s h v t .
N U M BE R ,
A ND THE A D J E GTI V E .
i s used without any liga m en t ( 1) A s for m a y r aon and u a la

I li a y
when they co m e before a p ronoun the no mina tive o f t he sentence the
.
,
, ,
liga m en t which ought to have been used with sa m e pa sses over to

b
, ,
t he pronoun I f the no m inative co m es befo re the liga m e n t ma y

. e , ,
m
e ployed g y M a r aan c a ny p pe
a. l? Ua la a cang p ap e l Other w ise : gI caa i .
, ,
m a y r aany p a p e l? A ca, i , u a lany p ap e l .
N ya i s an inten si ve or co m ple ti ve postpos itive p article largely

used i n Tagalog which carries the sense to its m ost co m plete ex
,
re s i o n a qu i n
“
as i n n ya I have i t i ndeed la there “
'
p n,
a s a , ; u a ny a , ,
i s absolute ly none I t should be care f ully distinguis he d fro m n a

. .
The foregoi ng ph rases show that when the subj ect i n a sentence
co m es b efore the verb the verbal liga m ent a y i sho uld b e p lace d
b
-
,
e tween N o liga m ent i s used i n the contrary case

. .
SE CON D E X E R CI SE .
Has m y father any salt ? H e ha s none H ave you a m other ? .

‘
I have Ha s the king a n y sister? H e has none

. Has the b ishop .
any b rot her? He h as Has Jo hn any water? Jo hn ha s so m e water .

.
Has he any house ? Certainly he has a house H a s G o d a n y power? , .
Yes i ndeed he has power

,
Has G o d love for m a n ?
,
Yes Go d .
,
has love fo r m a n I s t here any book at you r hou se ? Yes at m y

.
,
'
house there is a book Has your m other s love any po w er ? Yes

’
. ,
i ndeed Whi ch book have you ? I have P eter s book Wh at far m has
’
. .
your fa the r ? He has the ki ng s far m What has Peter ? P eter has ’
.
John s book Has h e not m y sugar? He has it not F o r who m i s

’
b
. .
the ta le ? The t able is for m y father Ha v e you no t a ny m On e y ? .
I h a ve no m oney Have I not P eter s m eat? Yo u have i t not

’
. .
TH I R D L E S S O N . YC A TL O N G PA G A R A L
N U M B E R , A N D T H E A D E CTI V E J .
definite plural n u m ber i s expressed i n Tagalog by the use o f

A
th e par ticle m a ny a a plural cardinal nu m eral o r such collecti ve
'
, ,
“
So m eti m es however
'
nu m eral adj ectives as p an a la ha t d i lan all , , ,

.
, ,
the nu m ber re m ains i nde fi ni te and should be gathered fro m th e

co ntext When there i s no thing to show whether singular o r plural
i s m eant the noun m a y generally e assu m ed to be i n the plural o r
,
b
used i n the p artitive sense .
The ( plural
.
) .
A n g m an a ; m ga g abb ) .
(
Yo u ( plural ) ye Cay o; cay o p o ( pol i te )
z
. .
.
,
Tayo , ca m i , q u i t a c a ta
’
We .
.
( 1) Se e L e s s on F ou r h t .
( 2 ) M a ri ya ,
t
i s Of t e n a b b r e v i a e d i n t o mya ; b u t f o r t he s ame r e a s on s as
e x p la i n e d f o r ny i n t h e fi rs t n o t e of t h e p r e c e d i n g le s s o n , s u ch ab b re v i a i on t W i ll
no t be us e d i n t hi s gr a m ma r .
THE TA GA LoG L A N GUA GE .
The y Sil a
d d ili
. .
N O N ot Hi ndi ual a Di hin i

b
. .
, .
, , .
Do not ( prohi i tive ) . . Hou a g .
Clothes L ooking glass . . Da m it Sala m in ( nang m u c hé )

. .
-
.
M oney silver ,
. Salapi p i la c ,
.
U nders tanding j udg m ent ,

. Bait c a b a i t a n , pag isip
,
-
.
A ny t hing which i s good the i dea ,

Buti
of goodness .
G ood ( adj ) . M abuti .
A nything bad the i dea of wickedn ess , Sa m a ( root word )

. .
Bad ( adj. M asa m a .
A nything pretty the idea of pretti ness , D i q u i t ( root word )

. .
P re t ty M a ri q u i t
b
. .
A nything beautiful th e i dea of eauty , . G and a ( ro o t w o r d)

.
r
.
Beautiful ( adj ) M agand a

g
. .
U gly w icke d ,
. Pan it lupit ,
.
A nything Old . Tand a ( root word ).

-
.
Old ( i n age ) ( adj )

. . M atand a .
M a n person creature
, ( L atin homo ,
. Tau b .
Dog Child . . As o . Bata .
I I o rs e . Ca ba y o ( corr of Sp word
. . . ca ba llo) .
M are . Ca b a y b n g babaye .
Judicious pru dent M a ba i t

g
.
, .
The looking glasses A n g m an a sala m i n

g
-
. .
The m e n the persons the people , . , . A n g m an a tau b .
’
M y brethren M a n ga ca p a ti d co
g
. .
a q u i ng m an a bata
My chi ldren
g
.
m an a bata co
.
g
.
i y b n g m an a sala m i n
Thy looking glasses
g
.
m an a sala m i n m o
.
.
ta n b n g m a tand a
The old person .
m atand ang tau b

.
batang m a b a i t
The good ( j udiciou s ) child
.
m a b a i t na bata
.
c a b a y b n g m a b u tl
The good horse
.
m a b u ti ng ca b a y b
.
b a b a y e n g m agand a
The beautiful wo m an
.
m a g a n dan g babaye
.
g
.
m an a asong m a ri q u i t
g
.
m an a m a ri q u i t n a aso .
m a ri r i q u i t n a aso
The pre t ty dogs
.
asong m a ri ri q u i t
.
g
.
m an a asong m a ri ri q u i t
g
.
A n g m an a m a ri ri q u i t n a aso
g
.
A n g m an a ca b a y b n g b a b a y e n g
p an g it
A g m an g a g
.
The ugly m ares . n p an it n a ca b a y b n g
babaye .
On e . Two .
On e perso n a person , .
Two ch i ldren .
Co m m on nouns and adj ectives are put i n the plural by using th e

art cle ma ny a to be placed between that which i ndicates th e relation
‘
p i ,
THE TA GA L O G L A N GUA GE .
galog m a y co me before o r af ter the n ou ns they qu a lify he re t o o , , ,
euphony affording the reason for their e m ploy m ent i n o ne way o r

another .
D e c le n s i o ns .
Ti I E —
A R TI CL E I N TH E PL U RA L .
( plural ) A n g m anga
ga sa m an ga
.
N ang m an
g
.
,
Sa m an a
ga m an g a
.
N ang m an s a
Ob J e Ct
.
,
( Sa m a g a
lo ca t and
‘
l I n a t f ro m e tc t h e
.
n
A bl ca u s a t
, , , . .
. .
N ang m n g a
um
L
i tgi
s ’
'
By with e tc , , .
; the . a .
D E CL E N SI ON or A C MM O ON N O UN I N THE PL U RA L .
The .
Of the .
Dat . TO or for , ,
the .
4
A ce . The .
Object
i A bl
( lo c a t
ca u s a t
and
.
F ro m i n
at etc the
,
,
.
,
,
.
houses . Sa m an ga bahay .
i n s tru m Wi th by fro m , , , N ang .
e ntal . the .
D E CL E N SI ON OF A N OU N I N THE PL U RA L W I TH AN A D E CTI J V E .
The . A ng .
Of the N ang , s a
g
. .
TO or for , ,
the Sa . m an
a asong
Th e ugly N an g I a it
s a p g n
l i g g
. .
, .
l a cat and . I n at , d a ge m an a pan it

ca u s a t fro m etc th e lna aso
A bl
.
.
, , , .
i ns t ru m With by etc , , .
,
ental . the .
nou ns have n o plural I t i s howeve r a peculiarity o f

P roper
Tagalog that p roper nouns of person s be p receded by s i na the ,
plural of s i not when person s bearing the s a m e na m e are m ean t ;

,
but when the p ri ncipal person the one who i s as the head O f t he fa m i ly ,
o r association i s to be represented together with hi s or her i nti m ate

,
relation s or whith tho se con nected wi th hi m i n oth er respects Si n a i s .
declined as follows :
N om . Si n a .
Poss . N in a ,
can a qu i n a , .
Obj ect .
( all its divisions ) . Can a ,
quin a .
Thu s
for i nstance Jan e an d her fa m ily ( or person s i n any
, ,
“
inti m ate connectio n wi th her) is declined as follows :

N om Si n a
I
J ane an d h er people J uana
. .
Poss N i n af can a, q u i n a >

bj d ivi ion j
. . . .
O e ct . ( all i ts s s .
)l ( Jan a, qui n a .
THE L i G A M E N Ts ,
A N D THE R EN DERI N G oE THE VE R B “
TO BE
”
37
E d w ard and hi s people . Si n a E dua rdo .
A n g b uqui d ni n a To m as
The far m o f Tho m as fa m ily
’ .
A n g can a To m as na b i i q u i d
.
’
A sto r ( it Co y . Si n a A stor .
To R ussell Co y . Can ang R u sel .
TH I R D E X ER CI SE .
Have we
u nderstanding ? Yes we have Have they any goo d , .
clothes ? N o they h ave none

, Have yo u ( plur ) any bad looking . .
glasses ? Yes we have so m e bad ones

, H ave I your p retty horses ?
Yes you have the m
,
H ave the j udicious children m y beauti fu l dogs ?
.
Yes they have your b eau tiful dogs H ave they m y fine books ? N o
, . .
Which hats have w e ? You have P eter s hats Has John m y old
'
b
.
rothers goo d horses ? He h a s the m not H a s P eter s father m y

’ '
’
chi ldren s old horses ? He has the m n ot Have old people love fo r .
children ? Yes Si r they have love for children Have John s fa m ily
, , .
’
any good houses ? N o they have no goo d houses but ( 1) they h ave , ,
so m e pretty far m s Wh at far m s have Peter s fa m i ly ? P eter s fa m ily

.
’ ’
h ave beau t iful far m s Have they the ugly houses of John s f a m ily ?
.
’
They have not the ugly houses of John s fa m i ly A r e there any books
’
o n the tables ? There are no books on t he tables Have you r sisters .
any o ld dogs ? N o they have n o old dogs , .
F O U R TH L E S SO N . YC A A PA T N A PA G A R AL .
“
TH E L I G A M E N TS , A N D TH E R E N D E R I N G O F TH E V E R B TO B E
has been in dicated in foregoi ng chapters the Tagalog language

As ,
i s distinguishe d fro m M a lay an d other i ns u lar languages by the

e m ploy m ent of cert a i n en dings or separate particles i nten ded to lin k
words clauses an d sentences to each other The proper use of such
,
.
conn e cti v es or li n ki ng p a r ti cles is m ore a m atter o f p ractice than of

-
theory as eup hony i n m any cases deter m ines whether they shall be
, , ,
u sed o r not .
Hereafter we give such explanations as m a y be useful at thi s

“
stage ; b u t this m atter being both so i m portant and abstruse we refer ,
t he student to the last lesson i n the gra m m ar where so m e further ,
rules are give n o n the subj ect .
The m utual relation between a substanti v e and i ts qu a l i fying

word should be in dicated by a liga m ent s u ffi xe d or placed after ,
whichever of the two words co m es first i n the sentence A ccording .
as the first of these whether the substantive o r the qualifying word, ,
ends in n one or t w o d i fi e r e n t vowels o r a con son ant ( n excepted ) t he

, , ,
liga m ent e m ployed should be y ny or n a respectively E xa m ples : , , ,

.
“
ba ta ny m a li co t o r m a li co t n a ba ta
, ,
“
naughty boy ; i tbny i s a this o ther ; , ,
i y ang d a la nany li br o “
those two books ; ga nany ta ndifl what person ? ;
,
“ ’
“
( i r a a n a ma li n a o
’
clear day .
( 1) B ut, cu ndi .
38 THE TA G A L O G L A N GUA GE .
The subj ect be

i t a noun or a p ronoun of an active a f fir m ativ e
, ,
sentence should be linked to th e v erb by m ean s of a y i when t he -

,
subj ect precedes the verb bu t not whe n this order i s i nverted , .
a ny i bdji
“
E xa m ples : A ce i p u ny map as oc p a ny m ap as oc a co I enter
’
, , , , ,
hu ny mn hu n i hu ny mu hu ni a ny i bon
“
,
the bi rd sings ,
Tw o clauses having m utual con n e cti b n s h ould likewise be linked

by a y i -
E xa m ple :
.
"
Ca n du ma ti ny Si P e d r o a y u ma l s ca
“
if P eter z
’
arrives go away
b
,
A clause serving as su j ect o f an active a ffir m ative se ntence

should b e linked to t he verb i n t he sa m e way when such clause pre ,
cedes the verb b u t o rdinarily not when thi s order i s in verted

, , , ,
a s : a ny p a y ip i y s a D i as
-
a y n a cap a y p u r i s a ta u o or n a cap a yp up u r i 3a ,
ta u o a ny p a y i bi g 3 a D i e s
‘
-
to love G o d ennobles m a n o r i t ennobles ,
“
,
“
m a n to love G o d H owever the liga m en t m a y b e p reserved even

.
,
when the subj ect follows th e verb when fo r the sake of grea ter e m ,
hasis the verb i s preceded by a relative pronoun o r used i n Tagalog

p , , , ,
i n the participial sense as : a ny n a cap a yp u r i 3a ta u o a y a ny p a y i bi g

,
“ ”
3a D i as what ennobles m a n i s to love G o d
,
.
I n co m poun d ac t i ve sentences the pri ncipal and the secondar y

sentence are li nked to each other by m ean s of a t t when a conj unctio n of -
cause i s used as : hi n di a co n a ca ba ba s a s a p a y ca t u a la a cony s a la mi n

, , , , ,
“
I cannot read because I h ave n o spectacles
'
When an i nt e rrogative word i s used to s tart a sentence the ,
verbal liga m ent i s replaced by the no m inal o ne whic h i n this case , , ,
s ta nds for the article o r the relative pronoun as : gs i n ony n a y n aca o ?

w
, ,
“
“
who stole ? ; ga nony s a bi mo ? what do yo u say ? literally ho i s “
w
,
" “
he ho s tole what i s that which you say ? ; i t being i ndifferen t
z
,
to say s i nony or s i n o a ny n a y n aca o ? a n ony o r a no a ny s a b mo? ;

‘
b
,
The latter for m s are however prefera le as being both m ore i dio m atic ,
an d m ore e m pa thi c
db b w d
.
The liga m ents are not generally use efore m on osylla ic or s

or expletive particles no r befo re the particles serving to estab li sh th e,
“
relatio n of case for exa m ple ; d a mi t 3a a r a o a ra o daily weari ng apparel
.
, ,
'
la la q u i ma n ba ba y e m a n
“
b e i t m a n o r wo m an a ny ca lou a lha ti a n e
g l o r i a baya
“
bliss o
,
that
,
i s to say glory , i ton c a n
,
a z
q u i n a P e dr o ,
’
,
’
, ,
this is for Peter an d hi s fa m ily ’
The liga m ent i s also d ropped efore the p ossessive pron oun s if b
put after the nouns they qualify as s a lap i n i y a ca ni y any s a lap i ; , , ,
“
hi s or her m oney
The n u m eral adj ectives drop the liga m en t whe n they co m e
b efore the restrictive p refix ca as i n ap a t ca ta a o four person s o nly ;“
, ,
”
N o liga m ent i s used between the subj ect an d the verb if th e

for m er is prec e ded by so m e negative o r p rohi bitive particle for instance : ,
“ “ "
D i a co ca ny cu ma cai n I do no t eat hou a y lu maca d “
don t walk
'
’
z w
, ,
“ "
hou a y s a bi hi n ( 1) don t say it ; ki n da ca m ma y na nd ca o “
'
e are not
’
, ,
thieves
b
.
The verbal liga m ent m a y also

’
e d ropped fo r euphony s sake
“
w
if the ord serving as the subj ect ends in 12 E x : A ny p a n ta li n ap a ti d ; .
the tying rope parted -
We have sai d else here th a t the a of a y an d a t m a y w e b

d ropped When co m ing after word s en ding i n a vo el and that i f . w ,
( 1) I f f o l lo w e d b y t he p rono u n , t he l i g a me nt
ho w e v e r ho ne y i s s h t u ld be
” "
E x ; hou ag ca ny lumdca d, don t w a lk ; hom y many s a bi h n. d o no t
“ ’
us ed .
“
i s ay i t .
THE TA GA L O G L A A N GU GE
“
To be
when ever it asserts pr e sence i s ren ered y n a an a ,
d b d
n oun of place i n the local ablati ve case o r by p r e fi x i n g n a to any ,
word de m o n s tra t l v e i n character as seen i n n a s a baha y n a r i to , , .
G old Silver Steel

. . . G uint o Pi la c P a ta li m
. . .
I ron Wood , lu m ber

. . B acal Caho y o r c ahuy
. .
Chrystal , glass ( m atter ) Cotton B ubog Bulac , . . . .
R i ng P e n . . Singsi ng P a n ula t ( Ta g ) ; p lu ma ( Sp ) , ,
A n g a m a co 1 m ab uti .
M y father i s good M abuti ang a m a co ( better)ang a q u i n g

‘
.
, ,
a m a 1 m abut i .
M y sister i s eautiful b
( A n g a q u i n g c a p a tid na abaye a y b
m agand a
.
1 .
Is his brother ha d wi cked d M a s a m a bag a ang ,c a n i y an g c a p a t i d? .
His brother is bad but m ine i s good A n g c a p a ti d n i y a i m asa m a; n gu ni t

l
, , , , ,
ang aqul i m a ba i t
( j u dicious ) .
, , .
I s their ring a gold o ne ? G i n t o bag a ang c a n i lan g singsing

'
u
d
Yes their ring i s a gold o ne
,
Oo ang s ingsing nil a i guint o , , , , .
Whenever to be i s the copula a n d has n o other v alue than “
to assert so m e attribute o f the noun i t is no t translated i n Tagalog by ,
any specific word but the m eaning m a y be co nveyed i n several ways ,

.
I f a no un o r a n adj ecti ve i s used as the predicate of another noun

or of a pronoun i t i s e n ough to i nsert a y bet wee n the m to i ndi cate
,
”
-
z ’
the copula : a ny a ma ma ba i t m y father i s p rudent As ay i

“ -
.
i s n ot generally u sed i n i nterrogative sentences when the subj ect co m e s

, ,
after the verb the copula i s the n expressed by so m e expletive o r

z
,
“
'
co m pletive particle ; gy u i n to ba y a i y any s i ny s ny ? is that a gold .
”
ring? So m eti m es the liga m ents o r the arrange m ent of words serve
to express the sa m e relatio n of copula as whe n a relative pronoun i s ,
”
u nderstood F o r i nstance : a ny ba n a l n a ta n o the virtuous m a n
.
“
or , , ,
“
the m a n that i s virtuous
F OU R TH E XE R CI SE .
Where i s your father? M y father i s at ho m e Where is m y .
b rother s son ? He i s at church Wh ere i s their daughter? Thei r .
daughter i s at church Where i s our son ? Ou r son i s at school I s ,

.
the child here? N o the child i s not here he i s i n t he country A re , ,

.
your sister s chi ldren there ( yonder )? M y sister s children are n ot there .
’
.
( yonder ) Where are they ? They are at ho m e I s it h e ? I t i s he

. . .
I s it you ? ( plural ) I t is not we A re m y m other s brothers there ? . .

’
M y m ot her s brothers are n ot there they a r e at Joh n s I s the m oun

’ ’
, .
tain over there? Yes i t i s over there I s your ring a gold one ? N o , .
,
it i s a silver one I s y our table a wood one ? N o m y table i s a

b
.
,
glass one Have your ishops any i ron ri ngs ? N o , they have n o iro n
.
rings ; the y have s o m e gold rings .

D E M O N STR ATI V E . P RO N O U N S ‘
. 41 .
F I F TH L E S S O N . Y CA L l M A N G PA G A R A L .
D E M O N S TR A T lV E P R ON OU N S .
Declens i ons are hereafte r given of all the Tagalo g de m onstrative

b
pronouns They can e use d both adj ectively an d su stan ti v ely : when
. b
used adj ecti vely they generally precede the noun
D e c le n s i o n s .
This . Yar i yeri , . I to .
Of thi s . Din i s a niri ,

. Dit o s e n ito , .
TO or , for this Din i s a Dito s a

’
, . . .
Th is . Di n i s e n i ri , . Dito s a n it o , .
lo ca t an d A t, 1n , u p on ,
j Din i Dit o s a
.
s a
A bl
ca u s a t . etc .
,
thi s .
. .
i ns t r u m By with
'
l
, ,
e ntal . etc this .
-
N EA R . FA R .
That . I yan . Y e on . Yon .
33355
1
gggggfl my é o n
8 81
Of that . .
1 1
To , or ,
for that . Diy an s a, D oon Ni s a .
y o o n .
Diy an s a, D oon s a ,
N i y é on , or ,
niy an . n i y a on . n i y oo n .
I at upon
n, , ,
N iy an Dé on s
m" w
s a . a
l
.
is y w 1i l '
N 1y eon , or ,
N 1ya 6n
i
,
e tc that n i y on
.
. . .
,
I nthe p ossessive an d direct obj ect cases the parti cle 3a which ,
precedes no uns an d other deter m i native words follo w s the de m ons ,
t ra ti v e pro n ou n s the reaso n bei ng that i t refers to the thing poi nted
,
out a n d not t m the p ro noun The p o s s e s s s i v e with s a should be used

.
“
i n answeri n g a question as : j oa ni n o ba y a i tony s ap a tos
,
? whose shoes ,
are these ; ? d i to s a ba ta “
th is boy s The two for m s of the possessive
’
.
,
case should be used i n th e way an d i n the cases already explai ned

for those of the per s ona l pronoun s .
z
This person . I t ong tau o, i t b n g tan ong i to ( e m phati c) . .
N iy ang bata n iy ang batan g iy an , diy an s a

Of that child that child s '
,
, .
batang iyan ( e m p h ) .
TO or , fo r that b ishop ( Do s a
fl p tl ) p
o bis po d oon s a o b 1s p o n g ya ou ,
.
d g g
{
I t ng m an a tau o ang m an a tan ong i to
These m e n persons )
g
.
,
I t ong m an a tan on g i to
.
g
.
( Diy an s a m an a asong carne

Those dogs m eat
g
’
lAn carn e niy ang m an a aso

.
g .
d j D oon s a m an g a bata
m an g a batang y
TO f or those chil ren .
or , ’
,
( D oon
.
s a a on
m an g a li bro
.
j N i y a on
m a g a li b
Those b OOk S ( Ob e Ct
)
.
'
J '
t N i y a on o ron a n
n g y .
It b
will e well to n ote th e i n fi e ct i v e characte r of the deelen
sion of Tagalog de m onstrative p ronouns whic h causes the rela tio n of ,
case to be expressed by the pronou n if i t co m es before the noun ,
and by the latter i f the p ronoun co m es after Thus “

th at boy s
’
.
,
book i s tran slated : a ny li br o n i y ang ba ta o r a ny li br o n a ng ba

z
, , ,
ta ny y an .
Stra w . Gu i n n ca n
“
.
Si n u li d ( root word s a li r to spi n -
Thread , ,
.
s i n n li d ,
.
M edi a s ( )(
Sp plural.
) .
Ca la ha t i .
Te n e d or ( Sp ) .
Balat ( Ta g ); cu er o) ( Sp )
,
.
Sapi n , ( Ta g ); s ap a tos ( corr f S

b oot
z
o p
Shoe
. . .
w ap a to )
.
. .
Balahibo , ( Ta g ); la n a ( Sp ) .
Si n ta s ( corr of Sp w ci n ta); y a lon

(
. . . .
S
( p)
( A n g lupa ang s a n g ca lu p aa n , sang
The E arth ( the world )
,
t d a i g di g a n
. .
E arth ( m atter). . L up a .
L and beach ,
. Cati catihan
,
.
Gu n . Baril .
So m ething ,
anythi ng ; any . A n o m an ; b alang na
M a r oo n cang a n o m an ?
Have you anything ( g y
t m a ca ?
.
a y a n o n
I have so m ething . M a y ré o n , m a y r oo n g a n om an a co .
N othing no t a nything , . U al a .
I have nothing . U a l a a con g e no m an .
The cloth . A n g cayo .
Soap . S a bon ( corr of Sp word , j a bon)

. . . .
A n o bag a ang na s a i o
What ( what thing) h ave you ? d y
A n ong m a y roo n ca ?
A n g i y on g p lu m a n g p a ta li m or a c er o
I have your steel pen ,
o) ang aqui n
l ( S
.
n a s a
p a c e r . .
What ( i nde t ) have you ? .

g A n o n g m a y r oo n ca ?
I have so m e bread . M a y t i n ap a y a c o .
Wi ne any ki nd of liquo r
, . A lac .
Coffee .
Caf e ( Sp ) cap e ( corr of Sp caf e)
.
,
. . . .
Te a . S ci ( Chi nese )
. .
Cheese .
Qu i s o ( corr of Sp word q u es o)
. . . .
My candles ti ck ( A n g a q u i n g c a n d e le r o ( p)
S .
l A n g candelero co ( Ta g ); s a s a n ga n
.
. .
String .
L ubid lub i r , tali pisi, ,
.
Tying string -
. P anali ( root word ta li , tying
.
“
p a n t a li
-
,
.
So m ethi ng , any thing good . A n o m an m abuti .
Thi s .
Yari , yeri i to ,
.
That ( tha t near you )

. . I y an , yan .
That ( far fro m the i nterlocutors

. . Ya on , yon .
have you ? I h ave m y good silver pen What have you ? I hav e
. . .
nothing Have you m y steel o r m y silver pen ? I have your steel

. .
pen Have you m y soap ? I h ave it not Have you m y candlestic k ?

‘
. .
I have it not Which candlestick have you ? I have m y gold candle

.
. .
stick Have you m y strin g ? I h ave it not Have you m y good win e ?
. .
I have i t not Have you that boo k ? I have i t not Have you that
. .
m ea t ? I have i t Have you anything goo d ? I have n othing good

. .
What h ave you pretty ? I have the pretty gold ri bbon Have you any . .
thi ng ugly ? I h ave nothing ugly ; I have s o m e t i n g fine What h av e

. .
you fine ? I have the fi ne d o g Have you you r glass pen ? I have .
i t not ; I have your fork Has h e this o r that cro w n ? He has this .
,
he has not that Have m y sisters the clothes of these chi ldre n ? They
.
have not these children s clo thes they have those of thei r b rothers
’
I s that pen for that m a n ? That pen i s not for that m a n i t is for
w
,
those o m en .
S I X TH L E SS O N . YC A A N I M NA PA G A R A L .
l N TE R R O G A Tl V E P R O N O U N S .
Declensio ns of th e Tagalog i nterrogative p ron ouns g what , a n o?

“
.
“ “
ga li n ?
( discri m i native ) an d gs i n o fl
i who ? follow
b
.
, ,
The firs t two m a y b e used as adj ectives an d m a y be preceded y the

article a ny; mm ( 1) can neither be used as an adj ective nor expressed
w
,
i th the article .
N om . What? dA n o? ( gang a n o?
P oss . Of what ? d Sa
Obj ect .
( all its divisions ) . What ? gs a a n o?
N om . Wh ich ? dA l i n ? cgang ali n ?

P oss O f which ? gs a alin ?
b
. .
O j ect .
( all its divisions ) Which ? gS a alin ?
N om . Who ? dS i n o ?
P oss . Of who m whose ? , dC a n i n o ? , dn i n o ?
Obj ective .
( a ll i ts division s ) Who m ? gs a cani no ?
gS i n o is exclusively used for persons an d rej ects the article

? The .
for m gn i n o ?of the possessi ve case i s to be considered as but an aph

eresi e of gca ni n o ? a shortening according to th e fashion referred to i n
,
the second note to the F i rs t L esson I t should only b e e m ployed as .
an additional confir m atory i nquiry wh en the answer to the questio n

or i ginal ly put has not been heard o r understood Thus s u p p o s s i n g that .
,
an inquiry has been m ade to this effect gca n i n o ba y a i tong d a mi t

: ?
,
( 1) t
I n a ll p r o b a b i li t y , s i n o i s b u t a co n r a ct e d c o m p ou n d e m b o d y i n g t he p a r t
tv
i cle s i a n d t h e i n t e rr o g a i e a nd, a s i s li k e w i s e t he c a s e i n M a la y w i t h a p a , “ w h a t “ ;
“ “
s i ap a , w ho .
t
( 2 ) On the s ou he r n b ou nd a r i e s o f Ta y a b a s Pr o v i n ce , i t i s n ot u nco m mon
tv t t
to he ar na i e s s ay ; s i nang ta u t), he re b y b e s owi ng u p on s i ne an a d e c i a l cha ra ct e r j tv .
I N R E RR OGA TI v E -
PRO N O UN S .
whose cloth i ng is this ? ; an d that the ans wer fo r i nstance “that oy s b

b
, ,
di g/an s a ba ta ng i y an was not understood an d that there y a second

, , .
“ ”
in quiry , whose do you say beco m es n ecessary thi s r e a s u ra n ce , ,
“ ” '
seeki n g w ho se shoul d be ren dered by cgni no?

The plural i s for m ed i n various ways : the pronoun is repeate ‘
d ,
o r the particle m a nya i s i nserted between the pronoun an d the noun ,
or both the repetitio n and m a ny a m a y be used as i llustrated hereafter :

‘
S i i ? i m ? i
d n o s i n o a ny ma ny a ? w ho ( plural )
“
y
’
; a n o a n o?
'
g n os n o g s n on y a n a s - -
, , , ,
a n ony ma nya ? ga n o a n d a ny ma nya ? what ;

“
a li n a li n ? m
’
, g ga li ny a n ya ? -
,
“ ”
li li m ? which 9 “
which on es ?
’
g a n a -
n a n y a n y a
b
,
These pro nouns i t m a y e said fi nd no use for th e accusative

, ,
case th e Ta galog i nterrogative sentence either carries along wi th it

w
,
,
“
th e verb to be understood or i s construc ted i n such a peculiar , ay
as to requi re so m e of the other cases .
Who ( plural ) are those S i sino ya ong tau o?

{
n o
d
g
-
m e n ? ( people ) gS i n o n g m an a tau o ya e n ?
g
.
Whose ( plural )are those mugs ? gCa n i ca n i n o ( 1)iy an m an a singsing ?

For who m ( plural )are those hats ? g s a c a n i ca n i n o bag a ya en m an a s a m g
b a lilo n g ya e n ?
g A n b an ong si n gsing n a i tb?
What rings are these ?
gA n on g m an a singsing n a i to?
'
g
Which u m rellas h ave b y o u? ( 2 ) j d A li n aling p-
a yong ang n a
l gA li n g m an a p ayong ang na s a i y o?
s a i y o?
g
A n g s a c o m e rs i a n te m an a candele ro g
ang n a s a aqui n
I have the m erchant s candlesticks
g
’ .
A n g m an a candelero nang co m er
.
siaute ang na s a aqui n

g
.
gS a alin aling m an a bata itong m a

g
-
F or which chil dren are these nails ? gs

n a pacong i to?
a alin g m an a ata it ong m an a g b g
paco n g i to?
The p o s e s s i v e case w ith s a s houl d p refera ly b be use d in a ns

wering a question .
A li n m a y serve for persons an d things ;

, a nd, only for things ;
Who are you ? ( sin g ) ” dSi n o ca ? ( ag a) b .
Who are they ? gSi n o si no ( bag a) sil a?

-
What do you want ? ( si ng ) (CA n t) ca ? gan o ca bag a? ,
n
an o ca dit o ? dan o ca dito? gu ag
What are you doing here ? , ,
a a n o ca rit o?
What i s hi s usi nes s h ere ? b g A a n o si y a d oon ? n
d ga aa n o siy a r oon ? ,
What do you wi sh ? g A n b n g i big m o ?

I wish I big co
w b
. .
You ( sin g ) i sh . I ig m o .
(I) I t isg e n e r a l r u le t h a t t h e r e d u p li c a t i o n s o f s y lla b le s o r w or d s , w hi c h

a
t
o c cu r s o f r e q u e n ly i n Ta g a lo g , d o n o t p a s s b e y o n d , r e s p e c i e ly t h e s e co n d le t e r tv , t
o r s e co n d s y lla b le he r e o f t
Th u s , ca n i ca ni no, i n s e a d o f e a ni noca ni n o s i n c e c a n i no
. t ,
i s t hr e e s y lla b le
-
.
2
( ) A l t h o u g h t h e E n g li s h i n e r r o g a i e o b a i n s h t
e r e i n t he tv
a ccu s a i v e , i ts t t
Ta ga lo g c ou n t e r p a r t f a i ls t o a g re e w i t h i t ; “
t o ha e “
b o t h i n the d e te r m i n a t e a n d v ,
l
i n d e t e r mi n a te s e ns e s , a s a re a dy s a i d , r e q u i r i n g i n Ta g a o g t o b e c on s tru c e d b e t l t
wee n t wo nomi nat i v e s .
He or she i shes w I bi g n iy a
b
. .
We wi sh I big n a ti n i ig na m in
w
.
, .
You ( plural ) i sh I bi g n i n y o
w
. .
They ish . I big nil a .
I bi g ,
in th i s sen se i s a pas sive an d i nv ariable verb for to
w
ish “ ”
to desi re , .
,
N atives avoi d using th e th i rd p erson pronou n s i n reference to

thi n gs They generally repeat the noun or try to construct i n suc h
.
a m an n er as to render i t unnecessary to u se the pronou n E xa m ples : .
m b ti b a li b ? “
i s the book good ? m a bn ti nya
“
it i s good ‘
g a n a y a n y” r o ; , , ,
“
certainly i t i s ; in stead of ma bn ti s i y d
, .
A ng m a p a g c a laca l, m a n ga n ga laca ]
d
.
The m erchant the tra es m an , .

( fro m c a la cal
“
m erchan dise ang .
come r s i a n te S
( p co m er ci a n te) . . .
A ng taga P r a ns i a a ny p r a n s é s ( corr , . .
The F rench m an . of the Sp words F r a n ci a an d .
f r a n cé s )
b rella
.
Um . Payong .
Cork -
scre w .
Pa nb u cas n ang ro n go Ta g )
( corr of the Sp . wor ti
; ti r a bns on
r bu on ) d az
,
.
.
Carpenter . N ail .
( i ron spike ) . A n lo a gu e P aco . .
Ha m m er Pa m o cp o c ( root p oep oe “
to
z
.
. , ,
Beer . Sar be s a ( corr of the Sp word cer v e a )

'
. . .
Ink Honey
. . Ti n ta ( Sp ) P olot pulut
. .
, .
Walking stick . To n g co d t u n g co o r t u n g co r
, .
Thi m ble N eedle . . D e d a l ( Sp ) Ca r ay o m

. . .
A s p i le r ( corr of the Sp
. word a lfi ler ) . . .
Or a s dn ( corr of the Sp word hor a s . .

,
Watch . and a n to den ote the place where

hours are m arked ) .
A f gl s
( )
S t “ l m
fig
“ a “
flfia s )
The E ngli sh m an .
P 3 g g a ’ :
Sheep , ra m . Tu na ( corr of the Sp top a r

.
“
to ut . .
,
b .
M utton . L a m an n ang topa .
Butter lard , . M a nti ca ( corr of the Sp word ma n teca )

. . . .
Button . B a ton ( Spanish ) or bi ton es

, , .
Bed sheet quilt Com o t

w
-
.
, .
M a n ( al ays postpon ed )
( d
. .
N either n or . Hindi m a n hi ndi m a n or , hin i rin , .
Hind i h ind i na m an . .
A co m a n , i c ao m a n
N either I nor you
.
Hind i m a n a nd, i c ao a y hindi ri n

b
.
Have you th en ee d le or the pin ? .

5( N a s e i
a s p i le r?
y b ag a ang c a r ay om <5 ang
I h ave neither th e needle nor the U al a s a aquin an g ca ray o m m an , a ng

pi n . as p i le r m an .
Who ? ( si n g )
. . .
g S i n o ,
? de ino bag a ?
8 m an g m ay
2 1
o ? i
22n
6 a y r o n g s n o
Who ha s ? ( in ,
g s m o n g m a y ?
Who ha s ? gN a s a cani no ? ( bag a) .
Kni f e cutl as s , . l tac, ( Ta g);

TE E -
TA G A L 0G L A N GU A GE
Co m pound E nglish nouns one of whi c h expresses the m atter a :
thing expressed i n Tagalog by m ean s of the

i s m ade of are gen eral ly ,
liga m ents th e nou n expressive of t he thin g preceding that of the m atter

b
,
as seen a ove .
glass of water I s ang y asong t 11bi g

’
On e
‘
Tw o gantas of rice . D a la u an g salop n a big as .
The relatio n between the vessel and the co ntents i s like w ise ex
p ressed b y the linking particles .
Clothing for chi ldren Da m it s a m an a bata g

am
. .
Wr1t1n g ta le b .
I
( L a m
a
p g
esang
s u la t
q u 1n a s u s u la ta n
.
l es a ,
s a
Co m pound nouns one m e m er of which denotes the u s e for which

,
b
t he other i s intended are generally for m ed by i nserting the p a rtic le
,
'
“ ”
8a , w hich i s also u sed as a t ra s la t i o n of the E n glish prepositio n for
SI X TH E XE R CI SE
Has the kin g the glass o r the steel pen ? The king ha s
neither the glass n or the steel p en W hi ch pen h as the i sho p ? . b
The bishop has the fine pen Have you the stocking ? I h ave .
n either the s tocki n g no r th e pin H a s th e E nglish m an t he cork .
screw ? The E nglish m an has nei ther the cork screw nor the n eedle -
.
Is the m erc hant h ere ? N o he is n ot here Has the F rench m an ,

.
m y u m brella? He has not your u m brella I s th e cork screw on .
the t able ? The carpen ter has i t Who has the ha m m er? The .
carpenter has nei ther the ha m m er nor the nail Which m erchan t
b
.
has any beer? The m erchant o f m y town has two glasses o f eer .
’
Whose i nk is that ? I t i s m y brother s What honey have the .
,
E n g lish m en ? The E nglish m en have s om e good honey Which .
walking stick has your m o t her s daughter ?

-
M y m other s daughter
’ ’
ha s no walking stick at all sh e ha s her thi m ble her needle her pi n

-
,
-
, ,
and m y watch A r e there any sheep i n Spai n ?

. Yes t here are so m e , .
I s m utton good ? I t i s very good Who h as m y m other s bed s heets ? ’

-
.
P eter ha s t he m I s m y kni fe made of i ron ? N o i t i s m a d e of steel

'
.
, ,
F o r which perso n i s that purse ? That purse i s fo r m y sisters .
A re you Spaniard s ? Yes we are Spaniards Who have m y rice ?,

.
The E nglish m en have i t I s that gant a yours o r m y so n s ? Th at

’
ganta i s neither yours nor m y so n s Where i s John ? John i s n o t ’

.
h ere he is either at church o r a t school

, I s he not at ho m e ? He .
i s at ho m e What i s your ( pl ) country ?

. Ou r country i s F rance .
Wh at country m en are those people ? They are fro m this country

'
A r e those people Chinese ? They are not Chinese Thi s house i s .
not a wood house Thos e looking glasses are n o t silver

. These rings -
.
are not gold What are you gentle m en ?

. We are carpenters , .
PE R SO N A L AN D P O SSE SSI V E P RO N O U N S .
S E V E N TH L E SSO N . YC A P l TO N G PA G A R A L .
P E RSO N A L A N D P O S S E SS I V E P R ON O U N S .
Declension s are given hereafter of all the Tagalog person al p ron

ou ns fro m which the possessives are deri ve d That of the fi rst
w
.
perso n has three for m s i n the plural : ta y o ca in i q u i taz ca ta “

e
b
.
, , ,
Ta y o i s used when the person addressed i s i ntended to e i ncluded ,
an d i s therefore the o nly p ronoun to be used with the first person

“ "
p lu ral of the i m perative Ca mi o n the contrary like the royal WE .
, ,
i n E nglish ex cludes t he p e rs on addressed and i s therefore the correct

, ,
pronou n to use i n prayers addressed to the Deity Qu i taz ca ta is .

,
v ery little used i n the no m inative case ; it i s rather dua l an d parta kes
of the possessive case These pronouns afford the on ly distinction i n .
n u m ber which exists i n Tagalog the sort of p l ural for m ed as already

b d
, .
indicated y re uplication excepted

, , .
D e c le n s i o n of t h e p e r s o n a l p r o n o u ns .
FI R ST PE R SO N .
SI N G U L A R .
No m . 1 . A ce .
P oss Of m e A quin , ( prep ); co , ( p os tp )

b b
. . .
O j ect . M e ( all
. di v . of the o j ect ) . Sa aqui n .
O
SE C N D PE R SO N .
N om . The n . You . Ic ao ( prep ); ca ( post )

, ,
.
P oss Ofthee Of you I y o ( prep ); m o ( p o s tp )

b b
. .
. .
, ,
O j ect . Thee . You ( all div of the o j )

. . . Sa i y o .
THI RD PE R SO N .
N om . He ,
it s he ,
Siy a ( l )
. . .
P oss . Of hi m of he r of it ,
Caniy a ( p rep ); niy a ( p o s tp )
, .
, , .
Obj ect . H i m her i t ( all di v of the obj ect ) Sa caniy a

, , . . . .
FI R ST PE R SO N .
PL U RA L .
GE N E RA L PL U R A L .
We
'
. b( oth the speakers an d

the persons spoken to i n Tayo .
chi ded ) .
P oss Of ( of all of A tin , ( prep ); atin ( p o s tp )

’
i 1s u
b
.
. . ,
O j ect . Us .
( all div of the obj ect ) . . Sa ati n .
"
d i n a n i m a t e t hi n g s u n le s s t he
“
a p p li e
( l) Si y a, i t ; i s
“
no t g e ne r a lly to ,
la t te r b e p e rs o n i fi e d a s i s s o me t i m e s t he ca s e in f a b le s , p ro v e r b s , e tc
THE TA GAL O G L A N GUA GE .
R E STR I CTI V E PL U RA L .
We ( the p ersons spoken to no t

IO
)
N om Ca i r n
.
i ncluded )
. .
P oss f us A m in , ( prep ); na min ( p os tp )

j bj
. . .
,
Ob ect . Us .
( all div of the o ect ) . . Sa a m i n .
DU A L .
N om . We .
( th ou and I alone ) . Quita .
P oss Of us Canit a ( prep )

; ta ( p os tp )
b
. . .
, ,
Obj ect . Us .
( all div of th e o j ect ) . . Sa canit a .
AN O THE R D UA L .
N om . We . Cat a .
P oss Of us A t a, ( prep ); ta ( p os tp )
b
.
,
. .
Obj ect . Us .
( all div of the o j ect ) . . Sa a ta .
SE C N DO PE R SO N .
N om . You ( ye ) . . Cay o .
P oss . Of you . I ny o ( prep ); ,

n i ny o, ( p o s tp ) .
Obj ect . You ( all di v of the

. . Se i ny o .
THI RD PE R SO N .
N om . They . Sil a .
P oss . Of the m . Canil e ( p rep )

; nil a, ( p o s tp )
, .
Obj ect . The m ( all d iv of the obj ect )

. . . Sa cauil a .
p ronouns like p ossessive pronouns have t w o fo r m s i n

P ersonal , ,
the possessive case A q u i n i y o ca n i y a a mi n ca ni ta i ny o ca n i la are

w
.
, , , , , , ,
p repositive that i s to say precede t he noun and the verb

,
hen the , ,
latter obtain s i n a ny of the vario us passive for m s ; co mo n i y a n a ti n , , , ,
n a mi n n i ng o ,ta mm and th e correlative q u i ta ( as dual ) follo w i t

, , .
The no m i native ca i s likewise put after the verb i n active affir m ative
sentences The two for m s q u i ta an d s a i d are used in discri m inate ly
. .
I f howeve r an a d verb especially a negative o r p rohibiti v e part

w
, , ,
i ole is used to start a sentence

,
hether declarative o r i n te rro g a t ,
ive the above postpositi v e for m s of these pro nou ns take thei r place
,
before the nou n o r the verb Su fficient i ll u stratio ns follo w to acquain t

w
.
the student ith this peculiari ty .
Thisi s not m y p rop erty . Hindi co ari i to .
Do not kill i t . H o u a g m o ng p atayi n .
He did n o t say so . H ind i niy a s i n a bi .
n a ti n
He is not our father .
{ H m d i
l nam in j a ma s 1y a .
Do not do i t ( plural ) . . Hou ag u i ny ong ga oi n .
They did not co m pose the book . Di n il a q u i n a ang libro

t h a .
Do no t go there ( sin g ) . H o u a g cang par don .
She i s not m y m other Hi nd i co i n a siy a

b
. .
A re they n ot your relatives ? gH i n d i n i n y o ag a c a n a g an a c sil a?

When wi ll you ( sin g ) co m e here ? gC a i lan ca p a r i r i t b ?
Whe re didst t hou run ? gSa an ca bag a n a ca ta cb b?
Si t d o n h e r e w . Dito ca u m op o .
G irl , m aid , lass Dalag a

b
. .
Young m an , achelor ,
lad . Binata bagong ta u O , .
Tai lor . M a n a n a n a hé ( Ta g ); s a s tr e ( Sp ) , , .
Baker . P a n a der o ( Sp ); m a gti ti n ap a y ( Ta g ) , . .
Silk . Su t la ( Ta g ) ; s ed a
, ( p)
S ,
.
G own Q u i m o n ( Ta g ); ba ta ( Sp )
’
. .
,
Sisin m a n Oc na sisi n ; p ay o ( corr of

l
. .
,
Sp word p ollo )
z
. .
P encil . L a p i n ( corr of Sp word lap i )

. .
, .
F rien d . Caibigan c a t o tO , .
I nti m ate friend . Key . Cas i Sus i . .
Chocolate . Si cola te ( corr of Sp word chocola te ) . . . .
Trunk chest Cab an

b
, . .
Bag sack basket Bayong acol b a tolan

’
, , .
, ,
L ady y o u n g la dy m istress
, , .
M a g u i n OO g u i n o On g babaye ,
.
Bottl e ,
B a te ( corr o f Sp word bo te lla )
. . .
,
.
P easant country m an ,
M a g s a s a ca m a g b u b d q u i r .
, .
Servant . A lila lingcod , .
Ki ns m an relation Ca m a g an a c hi n lo g
, . , .
There thith er ,
D eo n . .
To go there th ither P ar don ( active an d passive )

, . . .
To sit down U= o po ( root ) ; u m u p o ( a ctive )

. .
Sayi ng to say to tell ( so m ething) Sab i ( r oot) m ag as h i ; s a b i hi n ( passive )

g
, , . . , , .
Os a p ( root) ; m an 68 ap ( active ) C ain

Talk to speak eating to eat
.
,
.
cu m a ln
, , , .
To speak to pronounce ; voca le b Uica ( roo ) m a g u i ca t ( )

act salit a
z
, .
. , , .
Sowing , to scatte r seeds .

S i b o g , m a g s ab og .
G al j w gao n ( contracted pass

I f éi i
o o ; 1
To do to m ake ( so et hi ng
’
m )
. .
, . .
n
To go to the far m P a s a b 11q u i d , m a p a s ab d q u i d
’
. .
is prefixed to an adver of place the verb of m otion i n the direct

I fpa b ,
i on i ndicated by the adverb is for m ed ; when p refixed to a nou n of place ,
s a should be inserted between that the verb of m otio n towards such a

place m a y thus e for m ed as seen in : p a r oon p a s a bi i q n i d b ,
’
b
, , .
R eference has been m ade elsewhere to th e existence of ver al

pri m itives or roots possessing of verbal force and i t will be well to ,
say here that they are fewer i n nu m ber than those considered to be
of a substantive o r an d adj ectival character an d that ver s i n Taga ,
b
log are m ostly for m ed fro m nouns fro m adj ectives a nd fr o m any , ,
other parts of speech

b
.
A ver al root expresses a state o r condi t ion of being an d so m eti m es ,
to o it denotes that a subj ect i s p ut i n such state thus corresponding

, ,
to the passive sense The notion of being or action as contai ned “
, ,
i n th e root is vague ; but a n otion of a m ore di stinctive character as

w
, ,
ell as the accessory i deas of tense m ood voice etc are dependent , , , .
on the application of certai n particles

w b
.
Co m ing no bac k to the p receding exa m ples i n the voca ulary i t ,

” "
i s true that so m e n otion of sitting
“ “
saying conversing etc is cont , , ,
’
.
a i n e d respectively i n the roots u p o s a bi Os ap etc an d that the sa m e

d
, ,
.
, , ,
m a y under certai n ci rc u m ta n c e s o r i n i ncorrect speech he expresse

,
.
by the si m ple root ; but o nly when they appear i n the for m of u mOp o ,
ma y s a bi ma nyOSap etc have they acquired a definite verbal character

, , .
( 1) I n Ta ga log i ntrans i ti ve as we l l as tra ns i ti ve ve rb s may as s ume a
pas s i ve f or m .
PER s oNA L A N D Po s s Es s rv E PRO N O UN S .
63
Peter is ri tin gw Si P e d ro i , s u ng m u s u1a t

w by
.
,
Th e se seats ( chairs ) ere m ade

I ton g m anga u p oa , 1, g u i n a ua co
me
.
Joh n
.
L et s it down there . U m op o diy an s i Juan ,
Buy m e thi s t runk I n Ta g alo g

b
.
g j B 1lh1n m o s a a qu i n i t ong ca ang b 1th
z
'
le t thi s trunk e bou ht )

.
B uy ( for) m e that silk gown

b i l li mo m s u t la
.
a co n l y an g q u 1 On g
( Ta g let etc e bought) .
. .
A nf
g a ll la , 1, c u n g m a ca i n nang
gmg
’ n a
The servants are eating m a n goes 5
)
.
A g gb
n
q u i r ay n ags a s ab og na n g
( p é fis
u
The far m ers are sowing rice .
The su ject b
b e i t a n oun or p ronoun of an active sente nce i s put
, ,
in case : if the Tagalog sentenc e i s a p assive one th e agent

the no m inative ,
should be put i n the possessive case .
What else should I say ? gA n O p a ang s ucat cong s a b i hi n ?

He an d I ( both of us )
. . Cam i niy a .
You ( sin g )and John ( bo th of you ) . . Cay o n i Juan .
He a n d t he i r m o the r ( both of the m ) . . Sil a n ang ca n ilan g i n aj

You ( si n g ) an d they . Cay o nil a .
He a n d hi s m aster . Sil a n ang c a n i y an g p a n gi n OOn .
Jesus an d His m other M a g i n a n i Jes us

g
-
, .
A lfred an d his children . Si A lfredo nang ca n i y an g m an a anac .
w
When t o perso nal pro nouns o r a pronou n an d a n ou n j oin i n
an a ctive sentence the personal p ronoun be it si ngular or p lural m a y
, , ,
be put i n the no minative ca s e an d i n th e p lural a n d t he n ou n or the ,

’
other p ronoun i n the possessive case of the proper nu m b er The .
o rderly arrange m ent of first secon d and th ird person should b e kept , ,
as i t wo uld b e a fault to say : s i la mo i nstead of ca y o n i y a to i n dicate ,

“
h e and you The sa m e peculiarity exists whe n a collective or
.
c o m panio nship n oun for m ed wi th ma y i s coupled to a personal na m e m a y
b ,
,
eing always associate d with the noun of the pri ncipal corresponding party .
These for m s of construction pec uliar to Tagalog are however , ,
obsolescent and are b eing replaced by the m ore natural on es of the

Western languages
w
.
F ro m the de m on strative pro nou ns the follo ing largel y used a d "
b
,
ver s o f place are derived :

i nd icati ng a l lace very 2 Dm ”
Here .
Ih ear to th e s p e d
k e r) S
d
.
( in icati ng a place equi

distant fro m both i nter Dit o .
i( n dicating a place nearer

There . to the perso n spoken to Diy an .
th a n to the speaker ) .
n di c a t i n g a lace far
( i
fro m b o th i n te rficu tors ) l
D oon .
P arin i p a ri to , .
( m otion to th e place where

To go there . the p e r s o n a d d r e s s e d P ariy an .
stands )
D o ( to so m e f ar a w
.
ay ly g
Do do Pa r oon
.
i ng p l a c e )
.
5
. .
.
54 THE TA GA LO G LA N GUAGE .
SE V E N TH E xE R ci SE .
Has thi s m a n the p encil ? He has i t not Have I the choco .
la te ? You hav e neithe r the chocolate nor the sugar Has m y friend .
your stick ? He has not my s tick he ha s m y u m b rella '
I s your
b
.
,
house p retty ? Ou r house i s not pretty ut i t is good What i s ,

.
that you have i n you r hands ? Wh a t I have i n m y h ands i s a

pencil What is that they have i n thei r fi ngers ? Wh a t they have
i n thei r fingers are rings What have I o n m y eyes ? I t i s spect
w
.
acles that you have o n your eye s Have e a soul ? A ll of us .
have a soul Where i s the g i rl ?

. The girl i s at ho m e Who .
i s the fathe r o f this yo ung m a n ? The father of the young m a n

is the ta ilo r Who has the b aker s s ilk ? M y sons have the baker s ’
'
si lk Where are her chicke ns ? Her chicke n s are at the far m

. Who .
They
’
has our friends pencils ? N obody A r e they our friends ? .
are our i nti m ate frien ds Who has m y relative s chocolate ? His
.
’
Where is the lady s bag ? The lady s bag

’
friend has i t i n the trunk .
’
i s not here Where is the chest key ? The peasant has i t What
b
-
. .
are those bottles m ade of ? Those ottles are m ade o f glass Have
w
.
you a n y m ale servant? I have no m ale servant hat I have are

w
,
t o fe m ale servants A re your relations at church ?

. N o m y rela ,
tion s are not church they are i n town Where is t he church ? The
, .
church i s o n the m ountain I s that lady hi s m other ? She i s not

d
.
his m other A re we good frien s ?

. We are good friends Who .
are your friends ? I h a ve n o friends A r e John s relations your .

’
friends ? They are m y frien ds B uy h i m ( fo r h i m ) this gown . .
What i s m y friend doing ? He i s co nversing with you r children

m b w
.
Who m ade these ta les ? ( Trans by ho etc ) The c a rpenter

w d
. .
m ade the m ( Tran s they er e m a e etc ) What is my si ster

d b
. . .
oin g? Your s i ster i s e a ting read .
E I G HTH L E SSON . YC A U A L O N G PA G A R A L .
THE S U B S TA N TI V E .
Su b stantives
are either pri m itive o r derivative the for m er ein g b
w
,
those hich i n thei rd ori g i n a l signification a re substa ntives A di f fi .
culty which attends the classificatio n of Tagalog words i nto various parts
of speech according to the syste m applied to E uropean languages
b
, ,
consists i n the n u m er of wor d s which while yet un m odified by ,
particles are either verb o r substantive adj ective or adverb according

w
, , ,
to the context or m ore generally according to p articles hich p recede

, , ,
or are p refixed to the m

b
.
The noun as a rule undergoes n o change to denote nu m er

, , ,
gender or case the latter bei ng expressed as i n E nglish b y preposi

, , ,
tions Those denoting a quality i n abstract are m ostly for m ed fro m

.
pri m itive adj ectives by p re fi x i ng ca and s u ffi xi ng a n or ha n thereto ;

,
as fro m ba n a l virtuous ; ca ba n a la n
,
“
,
“ “
virtue ; f ro m da qu i la great ”
, . ,
“ ” ”
exee lle nt;
“ ” “
ca da q u i lct a n
’
“
gr e a t ne s s e xcelle nce ;
, bayo ne w ; ca ba g a ha n,
, .
,
co m panion . Sa m a ,
fellow passenger -
. Sac ay ,
assistant . Tulong ,
u a rre lli n g p orson
l Ene m y i A uay ,
,
s chool m ate -
. A ral ,
si m i lar coequal , P ara ,

face rese m bling -
M u c ha -
person .
If i s prefixed to a root denoting an i dea of association i s

ca ,
llow s hi p reciprocity or likelihood a verbal n oun i ndicati ng on e of

, ,
the m utual parties i s thu s fo r m ed I f two of the m utual associate d .
parties are to be m eant ma y should be prefixed to the associative noun ,
al ready for m ed as shown i n the followin g illustrations :

,
Tw o co m panion s M a g ca s a m a. .
M arried couple ( husban d and wife ) M a g a s au a

. . .
Tw o br others or sisters M a g c a p a ti d . .
Tw o brothers i n l aw M a g b a y ao
-
. .
Tw o siste rs i h law -
M a g hi p a g .
Tw o friends . M a g ca i b i g a n .
If three or m ore of the corresp onding parties are to be expressed

b
,
and this ki nd o f co m p ositio n i s resor ted to c a the n should e repeated

b
, , , ,
i f the nou n i s n ot d u al i n character a nd the fi rs t syll a le of the ,
root if it i s o nly fo r m ed with ma y .
Three or b
m ore rothers or sisters . M a g c a ca p a t i d .
Three or m ore co m panions . M a g c a ca s a m a .
Three or m ore b rothers i n law - -

. M a g b a b a y ao .
Three or m ore m arried couples . M a g ca a s au a .
'
Ico m m on nouns d e n o ti ng c o rre la ti o n of co nsang u inity o r m utu al

n
depe n dence m ay is p refi xed to th a t o f t he p ri n cipal correlative p arty
,
to express his o r her a s soci a tio n with the s e co n dary co rrespo n d ing
party .
F ather an d son . M aga m a .
M other and daughter ,

M ag ina -
M aster a nd servant . M a g p a n gi n Oo n .
m ore
I f tha n o ne o f seco ndary associated parties are to b e
expressed , t h e b
fi rst syl la le of th e p ri n cip a l o n e sho u ld e rep eated b .
F ather and children . M a ga a m a .
M other and children . M ag i i na

-
.
is also p refixed to o ne o f the asso cia ted pa r

M ay ties whe n i t
i s coupled to a p ro per p e rsonal no u n b ut the n the latter should e , b
put i n the possessiv e c ase .
Jesus an d His m other ; M a g i n a n i Jes ti s

-
.
G eorge a nd his son . M a g a m a ni Jorge

-
.
M ar y and her father . M a g a m a u i M aria

-
.
A n han , if s u f fi x e d to a s ubst a n tive root i ndicative

-
of a natural
p r od u c t ,
’
t he nou n o f t he place fo r s uch

‘
prod u ct to
'
b
e fo und is
,
form ed .
THE SU BSTA N TI V E .
Paddy ,
ri ce field . P alay ,
Cocoa nut -
, cocoa nut plantation

-
. N iog ,
Sugar cane -
,
sugar plantation-
. Tu b e ,
P lant ,
gard en . Hala m an .
Ston e , quarry . B a te .
prefixed to these fi rst derivati ves the second derivative

I f ca is ,
thus for m ed will b e m ore collective .
R ice fi e ld
-
. Tract abounding with . P alayan . capalayan .
P lantatio n of
Do do ca s a s u m
plantai n trees i -
.
s an .
The sa m e su f fix fo r m s ,
with ve rb al roots the p lace where the ,
a c tion i s perfor m ed .
bath roo m -
. P aligo ,
sleeping ch a m ber -
. Si li d ,
b all . Say ao ,
F ro m verb al roots to o nou n s i ndicative of the i nstru m ent for , ,
the perfo m ance of the actio n are fo r m ed by p re fi x i n g the particle

p a n
, which gene rally beco m es p a before I) p s t an d p a ng before , , , ,
"
a vowel I n roots the fi r s t syllable of whi ch begi n s with c o r cl

'
.
,
n ot only these co nsonants a re d ropped b ut also the last letter of the ,
the p articl e ch anges to ny

'
Striking ha m m er , . P oepo e p a m o cp o c ,
.
Wri ting pen Sli la t p a n ti la t

Shavi n g ra z
. .
, ,
or , . A b it p a n gahi t
,
.
Boring a uger ,
. Butas p a m u ta s ,
.
Tying rope ,
. Tali panali
,
.
Clinging to hook ,
. Caui t p a n gau i t
,
.
a way peculiar to Tagalog verbs i n any te n se o r voice or

I n , ,
verbs i ndicating the v arious ch anges t he action undergoes m a y be ,
used as nouns by m erely s ubstitutin g a ny for th e n oun or pronoun

representing t he agent A s th is m atter properl y belon gs to the verb .
,
only a few hi nts are given he re and th e learner i s referre d to fur th ,
er explanation s i n the correspo nding chapters .
The enterin g . A n g p u m as o c .
The giving . A n g p a g b i b i g ay .
The teacher he who i s actually ,

A ng n u gm a ara l
t e a c hi n g
.
The student he who studied A ng , . n a g ara l .
The future purchaser A ng . hibil i

The sold co mm o dity the thin g 3 n
A g ,
y p i nag b l b i li
which is being sold 5
.
The seller he who has been a selle r A ng

,
n a ca p a g b i li .
Th e walking the m anner of walk

i ng the ga i t
2 A ng
,
a
p g c a lac ad .
, l .
What i s being prohibited A ng i n a g b a b au a l

.
yp .
R ai n wet rai n da m aged th e thing

, ,
that has been da m aged by the A n g i n o la n a n , ang p n a g o la n a n

i ,
ra m .
Went ( thither). . N a p o r Oo n .
Ca m e here . N a p a ri t o, n a p ari ni .
( to the place wh ere

Went there the person address N a p a ri y an .
l ed stands)
.
Went ho m e . N a p a s a b aha y .
( m arking p resen t
To be goi ng i ,
m otion to a distant N a p a p a rOo n or , n a p a ro rOo n
there I
.
,
place )
.
To b e go ing l n to tow n . N a p a p a s a b a y a n or , n a p a s ,
a s ab aya n .
To be co mmg on here .
(
N a p a p a ri tb or n a p a ri ri t o
N a a a r 1n i o r n a a r1r 1n l
p p p
,
,
,
,
.
F ather i n law or m othe r i n law

- - ' -
. B ian an ( lalaqui o r babaye )
. .
So n or daughter i n law - -
. M a n d g a ng ( do do ) . .
Short little s m all

, ,
. M aliit m unti ,
.
N obody , no one . U al a si no m an i s a m a i ual a , , ,

.
Buffalo ( ani m al ) Calab ao da m 111ag

’
g g
.
. .
,
B ird Copper N a m e
. . . I bon Tangs e N alan pan alan
. .
, .
z
B roo m F oot M o uth
. . . U alis p a n gu a li s P a a B i b i g
, . . .
So m ebody , so m e one anybody

any o ne whoever whosoeve r
, ,
( Si n o m an ,
b alang n a tau o
z
.
, ,
A
fig én
y
v
t hi ng w hate t e r what , ,
i
i A no m an , ano m ang b agay .
Whichever whi chsoever ,

. A lin m a n , ali n m ang b ag ay .
How m uch ? how m any ? ( when a M

,
d a g c a a n O?
al l an ? gil an bag a?
nu m ber i s i nquired after ) .
,
n
o
How m uch 9 ( when m easure l s

a a n O?
.
1n q u 1re d after ) .
Ani nterrogative p ronoun followed o r s u f fi xe d by the adver b

ma n i s thereby co nve rted into an i ndefinite o ne .
E I G H TH E X E R CI SE .
Di d your uncle go there ? M y u ncle did not go there i t i s ,
m y aunt w ho wen t there Did your wife s friend co m e he re ? He

'
did not co m e here h e went ho m e Did A lfred and h is m a s te r g o to, .
yo ur house ? They both we nt to our house Where are Joh n s t w o

’
co m panions ? They went to t o w n Did they go there ? Yes they

went there and the th ree brothers Cru za re c o m i ng
.
,
,
Di d not P ete r u
and hi s father go to the country ? P eter and h is fath e r did n ot go

to the co untry they went to church A re the wife a nd the husband
, .
going there to the forest? Th ey are go ing to the town I s you r .
clothi ng n e w o r old ? M y clothing i s old ( w o rn ou t) A re their . .
looking glasses enti re ( sou nd ) o r bro k en ?

-
They are are not b roke n ,
they are worn out A r e m y m other s sister s cats white o r blac k ?

’ ’
.
M y m other s siste r s cats are n ei ther white no r black

’ ’
I s you r si ster s
’
virtue great? M y sister s vi rtue i s great I s the wisdo m of G o d

’
.
,
great? The wisdo m of G o d has n o eq u a l Who are w i s e ? Th e .

.
sound are wise I s the p uri ty of o ur souls a beautiful thi ng ?

. Th e
p urity o f our souls i s a b e a utiful thing Who are fello w passe nge rs ? -
P eter John a n d M ary are fello w passengers

, H o w m any co m panio n s -
are you ? G eorge and I are co m panions How m any ene m ies c a m e .
This wo m a n who m you lo ve is I t ong b a b a y e ny s i n i s i n ta m o i , ,

-
capa
"
m y sister ti d co
Th e letter which you wrote to m e . A n g s ulat na ys i n d la t m o s a qui n
a .
What I h ave i s m y sister s i n l aw aquin p ayong nan g

’
A ny
’
- -
na s a ay ang
u m brella . a q u ing hi p a g .
That ( conj unction )

. . a .
Tell John s son to go into the Sa b i hi n m o s a anac ni Juan

’
na p a
country . s a b d q u i d siy a .
5 Hou ng m ong s a b i hi n s a can i y 5

1 na
Do not tell hi m that I am h ere
aco 1, n a rl to
.
.
,
the precedi ng exa m ples the E nglish relative pronoun is express

I n
ed by t he liga m e nts w hich i n this c a se cannot be supp ressed , , , .
Students m us t u nderstan d that t he m e re replacing of the verba l

liga m ent by th e no m inal one o r by a ny wi th the obj ective case before ,
a verb i s a s ure i ndication of the existence of a relative pronoun

,
.
A ttention should be paid to the d 1ff e r e n c e of sence i n the following ph rases :
That m a n i s co m ing here . I y ang tau o ay n a p a p a r i to .
The m a n
'
that i s co m i n g A ng t a u Ony n a p a p a r i to
You love this wo m an . Y t ong b a b a y e n g 1to i _s i n i s i n t a m o , , .
This wo man w ho m you love Yt ong b a b a y e ny s i n i s i n ta m o

‘
. .
You wrote the letter to m e . Si nulatan rn o a c o .
The letter that yo u wrote to me . A n g s ulat n a y s i n d la t m o s a aquin .
I have my si ster s i ’
n- law u m brella .
N a s e aqui n ang p ayong nang a q u i n g
hi p a g
What I have i s my law A ny n a aquin ang p ayong an g
’
s i s te r s in s a ay n
u m brella . hi p a g co .
Street ,
road . L a ns an ga n d aan, .
Way tho ro u hg f a r e D aa n
z
.
,
High road -
. Ca r s a cla .
( corr fro m . Sp . word cci l a d a .
)
Will good will dispositio n i nward
l
-
, , ,
M a g a n d an g lOo b , c a lo o b a n
feeling
.
M e m ory recollection , . A la a la .
U tang na lOo b ( lit deb t fro m th e

G ratitude , gratefulness obligation
{
,
.
,
heart) .
N oble precious d ear, , . M ah al .
R ascal , i m pudent fellow ,

cruel . Ta m p a la s an, t a e si l .
Stone Stone quarry

. . Ba t h B a t o han . .
Head Bolster . . Olo Olo n a n on an

. ,
.
Cousin . P ins an .
j Ta g a p a g s ai n g , cos i n e r o ( corr of Sp
Coo k
z
. .
word coc n e r o)
.
.
,
Ox o r cow B a ca ( corr of Sp word v a ca )

g
. . .
. .
,
q n di d a t a p6u a n uni s ubali ali n

But ( co n j un ction )
. .
l tana
,
.
, , ,
Other I b a 1s aa
‘
. .
,
A nother on e m ore I s a pa i b a pa
‘
.
, .
,
F o reigner . Ta ga ib ang lu p a i n .
Stranger . Ta ga i b an g bayan .
Se a D agat .
Sea m a n . Ta g a r ag a t m a g d a dag a t ,
.
Ta g Oa n nang s d la t ( li t ; hi d i n g p la ce
b ook
~
. .
Pocket -
, p o r f o li o . for papers ) ca r te ra , ( Sp ); e ap ot .
s
n a n g s ula t .
R E L A TI V E PRO N O UN S . 61
G arden , o rchard P lant . . H a la m a n a n . Hala m an , p anani m .
Co rn G rain , . B uti l .
G r anary . Ta m b obong , ca m ali g .
P ri ncipal head , leader lord ; i

, ,
G u i n o o; C a g ui no 0han
t o cr a cy l
.
a r1s .
b
In the a ove i nstances ca and a n are used to for m noun s i n
di c a ti v e o f the place where the thing or m atter referred to by the »
root i s to b e found ; and i n the case of persons the collective noun , ,
which considers the m as an e ntity o r a body .
Hair . F o rehead . B u ho c N o o . .
Lip N eck L abi L i i g

g
. . . .
Shoulders Orphan . . M an a b a li ca t Oli la . .
Strong F eeble weak .

, . M a la c as M a hi na .
Thi s one this oth er I t ong i s a it ong iba

‘
.
, , .
That other that o ver there , . I y ang i s a, iy ang i ba .
I circu m s c ribes m ore the nu m er

s a i tOny i s a, b of things a m ong
w
-
hich the o ne p oi nted ou t i s than i tOny i bct e tc

‘
, ,
Is this stone for this house ? n ng b a tOn g i tO i , ,

dito s a b ahay na
i to bag a?
N o, it i s fo r that other th at ove r ,
Hi nd i diy an s a is a
ther e
.
,
b a tan g
.
I s this b read fo r th at ch il d? gI tOn g t i n ap a y na i to, d Oo n s a
ya ou ?
It i s for that other DOo n s e i s a
g
. .
Before a while ago Gan ina dati , sandali l am ang

d
.
.
,
After ward s by an by , . M a m e a m a m ay a m ay a
,
-
.
z
Yesterd ay Ca ha p o n
b
. .
The day efore yesterday . Ca m a ca la u a ( pa) . .
So m e days ago Ca m a c a i lan arao

b
. .
Ju t li i m or ni n g efore m
im ll i g l Ca n gm a n g u m aga .
When ? gCa i lAn ?
i s a pl ural p refix wh ich i n dicates as m any pas t

Ca ma ca d a ys
’
as are exp res s ed b y the root to which i t i s j oine d .
Three days ago . Ca m a c a tlo .
Te n days ago . Ca m a ca p Ou o , m a ca d a lu a n p ou o .
To be
n ot havi ng a speci fi c expression i n Ta galog the rela ,
tio n of te n se i s generally conveyed by so m e adverb or word e X p re s s 1y e

of ti m e if n ot o therwise i nferred fro m the co ntext No w a days ho .
-
,
wever the e x p r e s s mn s : n a r i r i to n a r i r iy a n n a r or o on for the present

, , , ,
te ns e a r e e m ployed
, .
F
We were yesterday i n the country Ca ha p o i ca m i n a rOo n s a b ri q uid

‘
b
. .
, ,
gCa m a c a i lan p a 1 n a ri to a ga si la s a
’
Were the y he re at our town so m e ‘
b
, ,
days ago ? at i ng ayan ?

gCa i lan bag a ang a m a nang iy e ng
b
’
When was your father s i n law

w
- -
b i a n an g lalaqui h ar oon s e ahay

f a ther at your so n s i n la ?
’
- ~
nang m a nti g a ng m ong lalaqui ?

62 THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
w
He as there thi s m orning . N a rOo n siy a ca n gi n a n g um aga .
Were you ever M ary s household b aga

’
A
d li la ca s a dati nin a M ari a ?
servant?
Yes I was form erly thei r servant
,
. 00 , a c o, i ,
alila nil a n eo n da ti .
r i y an = p a p a ri y an ca bag a s a
Will you e at chu rch b ? 5g
l
N a
b a h an m a m ay a m ay a?
s im
-
I shall be there A c o i n a ri y an = pa pa r i y an m a m e a .
b
.
, ,
He will soon be M ary s hus and Siy a m a m e a ang cay M ariang a s é u a

’
. .
The b
a ove i ns ta n ces are i nten ded to give th e student a hint
as to ho w the use of adverbs of ti m e m a y so m eti m es d i spen se with the
e m ploy m ent of the proper tenses o f the ver an d are i n every respect b ,
gra mm atical ; but they are not i dio m atic speech an d the sa m e expressions .
would be better rendered i n Tagalog by convertin g noun s i nto verbs

and conj ugating the m i n a way whi ch wil l no t yet be u nderstoo d by
the le a rn er at this sta ge of the work .
N I N TH E X E R CI SE .
Whose are these trees M y father s Whose do you say ? M y

? ’
.
’
father s Whose childre n are those ? M ine W hich gun has he ? He
. .
has h is own Was you r wife o n the s treet yes terday ? She was there
b w
.
the day before yeste rday Was any body on the road ? N o ody . as
o n the road Has m a n a goo d disposition to w ards G o d? Yes m a n
.
,
has a good disposition t owards G o d What i s m e m ory ? M e m ory is

w
.
a power of our soul Has m y m other i n la w an ox ?

. She has t o - -
oxen Has the foreigner so m e of these plan ts i n his g a rden ? N o

.
,
he has not any of these but he has o thers I s the sea large ?
,
The .
sea i s large Where are the sea m en ? The sea m en are at the garde n o f
.
our neighbo ur Have they any grain ? Th ey have no grain What

. .
have t hey i n thei r pocket books ? They ha v e m o ney therein Where

-
.
are your granaries ? M y granaries are at the rice fi e lds Where are the -
.
aristocracy of thi s to wn ? The aristocracy of this town are at church .
How m any plants have you i n h i s garden ? I _have no p lants i n his

garden Was hi s hai r black? Hi s h a ir was black Where are located
. .
the forehead the li ps and the neck ?

, On the head I s the o r phan boy .
strong or weak ? He i s weak I s that m a n co m ing here yo u r brother? M y

.
brother i s the o ne going there A re those letters for your father? The .
letters for m y father a re those o n the table I s that one t he wo m an who m .
you love ? The wo m an I love is m y m other What shall I say to m y .
s ister ? Tell you r sister not to go to I loil o Shall I tell the m to go .
into the country ? Do not s a y that Whi ch of these two books is f o r m y

w
.
cousin ? The ne book i s fo r your cousi n th i s o ther i s for you r son

b
.
,
I s that ottle fo r this c hild ? N o it i s for that o ther Di d yo u go to the, .
garden before ? I did not go there When di d John co m e here? I t was .
so m e days ago that John ca m e here ? Did y o ur sister s i n la w m other

’
b
- -
'
go into tow n yesterday ? She went there th e d a y efore yesterday .
64 THE TA G A LOG L A N G U A G E .
M m ay
be parsed as an adverb of ti m e but i s used e x p le
on a ,
t i v e ly i n a way for whi ch there exi sts no exact equivalent i n E nglish .
I t nearly corresponds to the G er m an nur o r its co rrespon ding E nglish

“ ’
“ “
only i n phra s es like : only do say it please etc , , .
Only wait . H i n tay ca m on a

Do n o t yet . Hou a g m on a .
M a ndi n , y y y an d d i o r i correspon
a ni d ll of the m
’
na n a , n a n,
nr n a
“ ” ” ”
to yes i ndeed ,
“
m ost certainly absolutely “
self an d si m ilar E ng,
“
,
li sh expression s .
Why ! I s it you ? gl c ao bag a?

I t is I m yself . A c o n ga
w ( a A n g m anga babaye baga pal a ang

HO
wl as it the wo m en who stole ?
'
l n a g n ac a o 9
g a bab aye
(
00 m an d m’ nga
Yes the f 325
or ,
wo m e n the m selves
’
,
,
v el y .
13 8
E ven th ey the m selves d id Sil a n ga m andi n

g
.
,
I t i s y o u , i n d e e d it i s you yourselves Cay o n ga cay o n ani

ga
.
, ,
. .
I m y s e lf A co rin , a c o di n a c o n
g
‘
. .
,
They the m selves . Sil a ri n S1la n an a

, .
as an i n t e n s 1v e 1s a wo rd of w hi ch it i s difficult to give
N a ma n , ,
the right signification but i t i s hoped th a t the exa m ples whi ch follo w ,
m a y co nvey to the student a fairly accurate i dea o f i ts m ean i ng and uses .
I f a n ative goes i nto a store for so m e co m m odity and fi n ds t he

price thereo f exorbitant he l n all p ro bability wi ll give went t o h i s , ,
o p inio n sayi ng : ma ha l n a ma n
,
I f the arri val of so m e on e beco m es .
un certai n or i s despai red of an d a native is co nsulted o n the m atter he ,
w i ll r e a s u re hi m thus seeking his advice

-
,
by sayi ng : d a r a ti ny n a ma n
,
'
, .
I f two natives ente r i nto a controversy over so m e questio n he w he .

, ,
assu m es that he has the better of the argu m ent will wi nd u p his
re m arks an d pu t a stop to further altercatio n by sayi ng : i cao n a m i n ; .
Thus n a man co m es to be so m ew h at analogo us to s uch E nglish words

,
” “ ” “ “ ”
an d expressions as also “
too anyhow all th e sa m e i n to the ’ “
f o rz
, , , ,
bargain “
w i th all that
,
’
etc u sed either expletively as c onnecting .
,
t he s e n s e to m ental reflections or as an i nti m atio n that the speaker ,
refrains from further co m m ent only for the sake of peace . .
“ ” “ ” “
yet still even whe n these E nglish adverbs are
P a m eans , , ,
used to de note that such a result as the o ne i n question was not to '
b
”
“
e expected .
E ven the teacher could not under Di n a c a ta la s tas ang m aestro at gi cao ,
sta nd and y o u can ? pa ?

b
,
Over an d a ove m y h aving fur

pi m ta t P’n a cmn it? P”
s tig
g gp
r 0°
h ished hi m with clothes
I
.
food still this reward ? ,
P a la
i s also i nterrogative and 15 used i n the sense of the E ng
”
li sh conj un c t ion “
then “
th erefore , .
’
So then was you that cri ed ? I c ao baga pal a ang nag
’
,
i t .
-
l y a c?
P o,
the contractio n of p oon lord ; o r m ore probably the M alay ,
“
, ,
i nt en sive p u n which nat i ves use profusel y i s the equivalent of the

, ,
”
E nglish s ir and li ke thi s is only used in the voc a tive ca s e
‘
I N TE N SI V ES .
Yes
si r ,
. OO p o ,
.
N o si r
. , Di p o
, .
You you r lord shi p

,
. I c ao p o cay o , po .
A s yo u like . I c ao l a p o .
Sa r i li
i s u sed adj ectively fo r the E ngl ish “
o n w a nd co m es be
fore not afte r the n ou n
'
, .
N a q u i ta co siy a nang aquin

’
s a r i li n g
I saw hi m with my own eyes
m at a
.
Bi n a y a ra n co nang aqui n s a r i li ng as
I pai d it ou t of my own m oney
lapi
.
Si y a the
thi rd person p ro noun i n the singular is used as i n te n
, ,
siv e i n a sense which includes those of the de m onstrative an d th e

‘
rel ati ve When so used it co m es to be as a n e m phatic m ea ns o f

.
,
recalling t o m e m ory t he subj ect of t he sentence a n d refers to persons ,
an d things both i n the singular an d i n the plural .
Joseph i t was he wh o stole

, . Si J o s e, siy a ang n a g n é ca o ;
M y m other i t was she w ho w e p t , . A ng a q u i ng siy a ang n a g ta n gis

i n a, . .
a n go mn g “ yang YPm a ’é
é
An c‘
( ci n i g
y 83
D ru nk n e s s i s what killed hi m .
fi
You yo u rself is what I said g
I c ao n a siy a ang n a g s a b i a c o
g
. .
,
I t was the Spaniards who d is c ov A n g m an a c a s gila ang siy ang tung m o

ered A m erica . c las : n a c a t u ci as n ang lu p a i n A m eri c a .
as an i ntensive so m ewhat co rresponds with all genders an d

Si y a
'
b
, ,
nu m ers of the E nglish reflective pronoun when u sed adj ectively i n ‘
reference to n oun s .
The b lacks m ith h i m self m ade i t A ng pand ay acal Si v a ang g u ng ma u a b

aun t herself returned it b ack
.
, .
The . A ng a li siy ang n a g s a o li .
A n g c a y a m a n a i siy ang y q u i n a s a m a
We a lth i tself caused his rui n l
, ,
n 1y a
.
Si y a y j ust so j ust that way ”

den otes an a solute “
b c o i n ci
V
n a, ,
dence in iews or o pin io n wi th what has bee n previo usly sai d .
L ook here is it i n th is m anner that Ti n gn an m o gg a n i t b b ag a ang pag e

b
, ,
l
m ats can be m ade ? gau a n ang anig ?

Just that way . Siy a n a ? g
“
Si y a n a na i s Optati ve and stands fo r a m en , m ay i t b e so ,
m ay Go d gran t it etc ,
M ay he
rr i ve 10 peace ' a jD u m a ti n g nau a siy a nang b a n ay ad l .
i n o rder that we m a y thus n ang m a ca m tan na m i ng ang c alo

attai n the glory of G o d a m en ,
. u a lha t i a n g nang D i o s s i y a nau a ,
’
The full force of the p receding i dio m atic words and expressions
can only be appreciated o n learning the lang u age an heari ng th e m
"
d
use d by the natives .
Though I even I A ce m a n
d ro
. .
,
Tu oug h Peter ca m e he re N a p a ri tO= p u m a ri tO m a n Si Pe

b e virtuous
. .
A l tho u gh a m an . Banal m a n ang tau e .
M an i s a pos tpositive particle which ci rcu m scri es the sense b

of the w ord p recedi ng i n an opposi ti ve sen se .
Is i t ,
by
c han ce thei r father that , gC a n i la n g a m a cay a ya ong ta n ong
m a n w ho i s co m i ng here ? n a p a p a r i t O?
Yes indeed i t i s he hi m self
,
. Siy a n a ( p a ls ) g . .
Was i t he gSi y a bag a

How how n o w are they then here , , , A
d y a n o ,
n a r i tO n a ag a g b sil a ea
i n town ? bayan ?
M o s t certainly . g
Oo n ani ; o o , n a ; siy a n a
,
g g .
I s that true ? ATo to O bag a iy an ?

Yes i ndeed i t i s a solutely true toto o toto o n ga t o to O m an di nb To t o b ng
g
. .
, , , ,
Why i s it you who say so ? A a n O cay o nan a ang n a g s a s a bi ?

g y
g
, ,
Of course it i s we A y a n o ca m i n a
, .
,
I s this your child ? gI t b pal a ang anac m o ?

It i s Si y a n a ( p a le) g
g
. . .
Oh] how tall ! jA b aa l m a la q u i z m a taa s n a l
g
,
I y ang b a b a e n g i y an n a bag a ang

Is that the sa m e wo man you love ? V y
“ s i n i s in ta m 0 ?
The ver y sa m e Siy a rin ( n a ) .

, g .
Week a week , . I s ang lin g o .
Seven Twe l ve . . P it o L ab i n g d a la u a
. .
To m en tio n . Turan . m a g t u ra n
I n the m iddle . Na s a guitn a .
M oon m onth B euan

J
, . .
anuary . E n ero .
Ee b ru a ry F e br e r o
z
.
M arch . M ar o .
A pril . A br i l .
M ay . M ayo .
Jun e J u ni o
( Spam )
. .
July J u li o
:
. .
A ugu s t A g os to
b
. .
Septe m e r Sep ti em br e
b
. .
Oc to er . Octu br e .
N ove m ber N ov i em br e
b
. .
Dece m e r D i ci e mbr e
Bou ang M ar z z
. .
o or , bou an na M ar o
The m o nth of M arch ,
.
ang ngalan .
Year . Ta On .
s 111at n ang a q u i ng
’
Hav e you the lette r wh ich m y gN a i y o baga ang

’
s a .
b rother had ? c a p a t i d ? , o r , na n a s a a q u i n g c a p a t i r?
I have not the letter which your U al a s a aquin ang s ulat nang ca p a ti d
b rother had . mo , or n a n a s a i y b n g c a p a t i d
,
.
a ’ ”a “a 8 3 “ m l”’ mg “a S"
{ fil jfl
An “
1 have the lette r which th ey had .
l
Which horse has he ? gA i ng ca ba y O ang na s a caniy a?
When possession i s m ean t the E ngli sh person al p ro no u n s i n ,
rel a tive clauses or discri m i nati ve se ntences m a y b e rendere d i n ,
Tagalog by th e p o s s e s s i v e o n e s re m ai ning u n
'
“
the verb to have ,
translate d as seen a bov e .

THE TA GA L O G L A N GUA GE
E L E V E N TH L E S S O N . Y C A L A B I N G [ SA N G PA G A R AL .
N U M ERA L A DJ E CTI V E S .
Ca r d i n al N u m e r a ls .
n u m erals i n Tagalog are exceedingly si m ple

The They always .
precede the noun .
Cardinal nu m bers fro m eleven to ni neteen i nclusive are f r m ed

fro m the digits by precedi ng the latter with the particl e la bs m o re ; used “ o
”
, ,
as a coefficient M ultip les of ten u p to ni nety in clusive h ave the ,

“
ter m ination p ou o ten ;
“
( p o lo the word for te n ; i n the Bisayan
,
an d ,
’
Bicol dialects being also used i n several places ) I nter m ediate n u m

b d
.
bers a re for m ed si m ply by addi ng the u nits A ove o ne hu n red .

,
”
i s c mg d aa n ; and on e thousand
“
é s cmg li bo; the nu m bers p roceed wi th
‘ ‘
equal regularity : 32 6 ta tlong d aa n d a la a cm g da

‘
, ,
la u ang li bo an i m , na r aa n , ap a t na p ou o , t , i s a .
ter m s for high n u m be rs h ave been borrowe d fro m th e

Certain
San skri t l a nguage an d h ave been as i n M al ay and Ja v anese m i sapp li ed , .
to Tagalog n a m ely : la cs a ( San sk la ks ha , and g ota ( San sk ,

.
, , .
a g ota Th e nu m bers represented by these wo rds i n Tagalog

are : laci ng la cs ctz ten thousand ; i s c mg g ota z
,
“
la cs ct “
a
’ ' ‘
s a ng y ota
'
s a ng , ,
” “
hundred thousand ; s a ngp ou ong g ota o ne m i llio n , .
To express a quantity whi ch app roaches what i n E nglis h i s

called a round nu m ber i t is so m eti m es convenien t to s tate the latter
'
z
,
qualified by th e figure i n which i t i s deficient using t he word c t la ng ,

’
z oola ng less ”
,
“
save ; as i s done i n the old fashio ned ph rase fo rty
,
“ “ '
~
strip es save one Thus i nstead of i s ang d aa n s i g a m n a p en a l a a lo

.
, ,
“
one hundred ninety eight ; the ph rase cé la ng n a ng d a la u d s a d a la
'
u cmg d aa n m a y be used
‘
, .
The student Will do well to acquai nt hi m self with th e Spanish n u m e

ral s for they are largely m ade use of by natives i n co unting
,
On e Tw o Ta tlb
r
I hr e e I sa Dala n a
'
. . . . . .
F ou r . F iv e Si x . A pat L i ma . . A nim .
Seven . E ight N ine . . Pi th U a lb

. Siy a m . .
Te n E leven . Sa n g p ou o L abing i s a . .
Twelve . Thi rteen . L abing dala n a L ab i ng t a t lb . .
F ourteen . F ifteen . L ab i ng apat L abi ng li m a . .
Sixteen L ab i ng ani m
‘
. .
Seventeen . L ab i ng p i t b .
E ight een . L ab i ng ual o

N inete en . L ab i ng Si y a m .
Tw e n ty u D a la u an g p ouo .
Twenty one -
. D a la u an g p ono , t , i s a .
Thi rty . Tatl ong p ono .
Thi r ty two Ta tl ong p on o t da la u a

r
-
.
, .
,
F or t y . A pat na p Ou o .
Fo r ty thre e s
. A p at na p ou o t , t a tlo ,
F ifty . L i m ang p on o .
F ifty -
four . L i m an g p on o , t , apat .
N U M B R A L A D J E GTI V E S .
Sixty . A ni m n a p 6uo .
S ixty fi v e
-
. A ni m na p 6u o , t , li m a .
Seventy . P it ong p ouo .
Seventy six -
. P it ong p ono , t , an i m .
E ighty . U a lon g p ouo .
E ighty seven -
. U a lb n g p on o t , pit o , .
N inety . Si y a m na p ouo .
N i nety eight-
. Si y a m n a p 0u o , t , u a lo .
On e hundred . Sang d aan , i s ang d aan .
On e h undred and ni ne . Sang d aa t , s i y a m

, .
O n e hundred an d twenty . Sang d aa , t d a la u an g p ouo

, .
Tw o h undred . Dal u n ang d aan .
Tw o hundred an d fifty . D a la u an g d aa , t li m ang p ono ,

.
,
Three hun dred . Tatl ong d aan .
Three hundred an d sixty n ine -

. Tatl ong d aa , t , ani m n a p ou o t , Si y a m ,
.
F our hu nd red . A pat n a d aan , apat n a r aan .
F ive hundred . L i m ang d aan .
Si x hun dred . A ni m n a d aan .
Seven hundred . P it ong d aan .
E ight hu ndred . U a lon g d aan

N in e hundred . Si y a m n a d é a n .
On e thou s a n d f Sang li b o is ang li b o

z
.
,
E leven hundred . I s an g lib o, t i s ang d i an

, .
Tw o thousand . Da la u an g lib o .
N ine thousan d . Si y a m n a lib o .
Te n thousand . Sa n g lacs a, i s ang lacs a

Th irty thousan d . Tatl ong lacs a .
Seventy thousand . P it ong lacs a .
On e hu n d red thousan d Sang yota is ang yo ta

,
.
Tw o hundred thousan d D a la u an g yota

g g
.
On e m i llio n . Sang p ouo ng yota , s ang an ao an ao .
How m uch ? ( inqui ring as to price ) .

( M ag o a mo
'
?
P rice B al a g a
‘
How m uch i s the price of t hat ? g M a g c a n b ang b alag a niy an ?

Si x dollars . A ni m n a p i s o ( p p es o)
S . . .
Card inaln u merals m a y be p receded by the article i n a deter

m i n a te s e n s e as i n E n glis h
. A ng ta tlé ng p i s os n a g bi n i g ay 00 s a ly e
, . ,
“
the th ree dollars I gave you .
’
L a bi w héc h precedes the digit nu m bers to fo r m th e firs t denary

, ,
“ ”
m eans m ore ; and i s l i nked to the nu m ber I n the sa m e way the .
different par ts of a co m plex nu m eral are linked to each other by

m eans of t he lig a m ents I f t he n u m ber i s no t a round o ne a t t .
,
-
co m es be f ore the last expressio n of the quantity and not as i n , ,
E nglish before the denaries

,
.
’
Only , but . L am ang .
Only one I s a l am ang , iis a

‘
. .
Only t w o . D a la u a l am ang d a da la u a , .
The only . Sang p ouo l am ang , s a s a n g p ou o .
A hu ndred only . San g d aan l am ang s a s a n g daa n ,

.
. l
n u m ber m a y be restricted i n se nse i n the co m m o n way by

A
the adverb ltt ma ng o r by re p eating t he first syllable o r the fi rst two
,
’
letters thereof i f consistin g of m ore t han two L ama ng should be used .
a f t er the n u m eral the sen s e of which i t i s i n tended t o restric t .

O r d i n a l N u m e r a ls .
nu m eral s are for m ed fro m the cardi nals by p re fi x i n g to the

Ordinal
latter the particle i ca zg oa the first being altogether and the three following , ,
so m ewhat irregular i n for m ation

,
Cardinal nn m e ra ls beginn ing with .
a drop i t to for m the ordinal Ordi nal nu m e rals are generally preceded
b
.
y the arti cle as i n E nglish .
To precede ,
to go b efore . Ona, p a n go n gon a .
The first . A n g n ao n a ang u n a ,

.
The secon d A n g y ca la u a .
third .
y ca t lb .
fou rth .
y c a p a t
fifth .
y c a li m a
s ixth .
y c a n i m .
seventh .
y p o
c a i t .
eigh t .
y c a u a l o
ni nth .
y c a s i y a m .
tenth .
y ca s a n gp ou o
eleventh .
y ca l a b lng i s a .
twelfth .
y c a l a b l n g d a la u a .
t w enti eth .
y c a d a l a u a n g p o uo .
thi rtieth lb n g po uo
’
.
y ca t .
fi f tieth .
y c a l i m a n g p o uo .
eighty ninth -
y c a u a lo n g p ou o , t , alya m .
hundredth .
y ca s a n g d aa n .
thousandth .
y c a s a n g li b o .
t e n thousandth ca a n g la c s a
.
y s .
o a tlb n g lib o, n al ong d aan

3 5 y ’
,
na po no , t , t a tlo .
co m plex nu m bers o nly the first an m ost e m racing on e i s

I n d b
d
m a e o rdi nal i n Tagalog contrary to t he E ng lish p ractice , .
The very first . A ng c a o n a o n a ha n .
The last . A ng hul l .
The very last . A ng c a hu li hu li ha n .
The very first m an was A da m . A ng c a u n a u n a ha n g A d an tau b ay si .
Oh! my Go d ! I , the very last 10h! iDi o s col , a c o a n g ca hu li hu li ha n

i g
,
a m ong sinners . n ang m an a m a ca s a la n a n .
The
extre m e ordinal n u m era ls m a y be i ntensi fi ed i n Tagalog by .
using the pre fi x ca the suffix a n and the reduplicatio n of the root , .
M uch .
( nu m . adj ) m any , . M ara mi ( fro
. m da m i ) .
Va n l ch , a great deal a great

gi g l i M a ra mlng m ara mi
,
.
n
The m aj ority , the m ost . A n g c ara m i ha n .
A ll . L ahat , a n g lahat .
Sl a na , hu s to ( corr of Sp
E no u gh ( adv ) ( y . . .
to)
. .
g u s
b er
.
( m
'
VI o r th a car dl na l
2
nu
l li L a b ls hlg u l t
.
s a, s a
f o lo w i g)
.
M ore than eight . L abis s aual o ,

hi g u i t s a ual o .
Mo re .
( co m p a rative ) . L alo , lalo pa .
72 THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A G E .
m ale the others are fe m a le

,
H i s m y a u n t m any trees ?
. S he h as
, .
so m e Where are t he two b rothers i n law ? Th ey are at Ceb u

. How - -
m any wo m en were th ere yesterday ? A great m any A r e t he r e n o

’
boo k s at ho m e ? We have m any a t ho m e A r e th ere m any dog s .
there ? There are only a few How m an y cats has m y cousin ? .
He has only o ne A re there twenty birds at yo u r far m ?

. There
are m ore than twe n ty Where are they ? They a re o n the branches
.
o f trees Who told y ou there are m any ch urches i n M ani la ? M y

.
friend s told m e so H o w m any souls h ave we ?

. We h ave only on e
How m any fi ngers are t here on your ha n d ? There are only fou r .
Where then i s the o ther? Well then the ot her i s hidden

, , ,
How , .
m any trees ( trunks ) a re there i n this ga rde n ? There a re a great

m a ny H o w m any o f t he m have branches an d ho w m any have
.
n one ? Those n ot having bra nches are on ly a fe w W ho was th e .
fi rst m a n ? The fi rs t m a n was A da m A n d the fi rs t wo m an ? Ev e . .
What place i n o rder has your sis te r at school ? S he i s t he fifth i n

o rder W ha t nu m ber have you ? I have t he 638 t h
.
A r e you per .
chance a great personage ? I a m the las t o f m e n A r e all m e n .
bad ( w icked ) ? N o o nly so m e o f t he m are wicked

, A r e al l wo m en .
i n your to w n j udic i ous ? The m aj ority are j ud icio u s H ave you .
m ore than three pe n s ? I have m ore than sixty Is y our fri en d .
o lde r tha n his bro t her? He i s taller but he i s n ot olde r Have , .
you still m ore sons ? I have two m ore What day of the week i s .
to day ? To day i s Tuesday A n d what day o f the m onth was yes

.
t e rd a y ? Yesterd a y was t he 2 5 th H o w m any do llars ( ab out ho w .
m any ) h ave you ? I h ave so m e t hi rty dollars .
T W E L F TH L E S SO N . YCA L A B I N G D A L A U A N G P A G A R A L .
N U M E R A L A D E C TI V E S J .
( c o nt i n u e d ) .
A d v e r b i a l N u m e r a ls .
The adverbial nu m eral s are for m ed by p re fi x i ng ma ca to the card

n a ls ,
th e first bei ng altogeth er and the second and third so m e w hat
, ,
r re g u la r .
Once Twi ce M i n s an M a ca la u a
z
. . .
.
Th rice , t hr e e ti m e s ~
. M a ca i tlo, m a ca tlo m a ca ta tlb .
F our ti m es . M a ca ap a t .
F ive M a c a li m a .
Si x M a c a an i m .
Seven M a ca p i tb
E ight M a c a u a lo .
N ine M a ca s i y a m .
Te n M a c a s a n gp ou o .
E leven M a c a la b i n g i s a .
N ineteen M a ca la b i ng s i y a m
A hu n d r e M a ca s a n g d aa n .
A thousand M a ca s a n g li b o .
How m any ti m e s ? , how often ? gM a ca i lan ?

N UM ER A L AD J V E CTI ES . 73
The restri ctio n i n sense m y be m ade by repeating the fir s t tw o r
letters fo r m i n s an and the fi rst syllab le of the particle fo r the others , ,
besides the co m m o n way o f u si ng lct ma ng or both lam a ng and the re

’
p e ti to n .
Once only only on ce , . M l m i n s an .
Tw ice o nly only twice ,

. M e c a la u a .
Te n ti m es on ly M a m a ca s a n g p o u o
’
. .
A hu ndred ti m es o nly . M a m a ca s a n g daa n .
These sa m e adverbial nu m erals are u s ed i n so m e locali ti es to

”
denote m ultiplication i n the sa m e way as the suffix fold i n E nglish ; “
,
“
m a e a la u ct la lo ng m a la q a i t w ofold ( doubly ) greater o r large
‘
.
,
g N a oa i la n ? i s used by so m e people for gm a c a i lan ? P roperly

speaki ng gn a ca i lan ? expresses past ti m e an d dm a ca i lcm ? present o r
’
fut u re : dN a e a i lct n ca ng n a g ca s a ld ? how m any ti m es d id you co m m it “

’
z
,
” ”
sin ? ? often wi ll yo u go there “
'
g M a ca lan c a ng p a p a r oon h o w ?
B a s es ( corrupt Spanish word f"or v e ces ) ( ti m es ) i s so m eti m es used , .
“
g llang bes e s
? “
ho w m any ti m es ?
,
ho w often ?
H o w m any ti m es did you co m e GN a ca i lan z m a c a i lan

—
n a p a ri t o ca caha
here yesterday ? po n ?
Twi ce . M a ca la u a .
How often does your si ster go gM a ca i lan bag ang n a g s i s i m b a ang c a

.
to m ass ? patid m ong babaye ?

E very Sunday . L i ngo lingo .
Di s t r i b u t i v e A b s tr a c t N u me r a ls .
These
are f or m ed by repeati ng t he enti re cardinal nu m eral i f
dissyllabi c and its t w o fi rst syllables if p o li s y lla b i c witho ut any liga m ent
, . ,
.
On e by one . I s a is a .
Tw o by t w o two at a ti m e , . D a la d a la u a .
Three by three th ree at a ,

ti m e . Ta t lo t a tlo .
F our four four A pat apat

n
, t . .
, t
FI VC five, five t a n L i m a li m a .
( Fe ll te n ten Sa n g p ou o s a n g p ou 0
z
°
z z
n , 1)
Do e n do en a d o e n ,
L a bl lab i ng d a la u a .
H o w m any at a ti m e ? al l an il an ? .
Thousand by thousand . Sa n g li s a n g li b o .
Hundred by hu ndred . Sa n g d as a n g d aa n .
E ve ry d a y daily . . A rao arao .
E very hour hou rly Oras o ras

'
.
, .
E v ery m o nth m o nthly , . Bouan b ouan

E very year yea rly , . Tao n ta é n .
E very week weekly , . L i ngo lingo .
E very Sunday . Do do . .
E very Tuesday . Toning m artes .
E very Saturday . Do s abado .
P a r t i ti ve N u m e r a ls .
”
The The other partitive
'
h alf is expressed by a ng ca la ha tt .
nu m erals i n the si ngular are expres sed by the o rdinals with t he

“ “
arti cle t he wo rd
,
share portion ; being Optionally used a t
,
10
Does you r father co m e here i n th e A n a m a m o bag a i n a p a p a r i to s a

cr g , ,
m orning or i n the evening ? u m aga o s a gab l?

I n the evening . Sa gab i .
TWE LF TH E X E R CI SE
Whi ch b ook
you ? I h ave t he fi rst h ave
A n d where i s the .
second ? M y brother ha s it I s not Octobe r t he ni nth m o n th of the .
year ? N o Si r October i s the tenth ,

How m any ti m es did your
,
.
child pu rloin ?
Only o nce D i d your u ncle go th ree ti m es t o the
.
garden ? He went to the garde n o nly o nce H o w do you give you r .
books ? I give the m one by o ne but m y m aster g i ves the m three by ,
three Do you go to school every Thu rsday ? I go there every day

. .
How m any hours are you at school i n the m orni ng ? I stay the re two
hours What day of the week d o not your chi ld ren go to schoo l ?
.
They do not go to school o n Sun days H o w m any pens d l d you give

‘
to every o ne ? I gave seve n pens to eve ry o ne H o w m any di d y o u .
say ? I sai d seven pens H o w m uch rice does thei r father give.
the m ? Their father gives on e ganta each A n d thei r uncle ? Their .
uncle does not gi v e the m even a f a rth ing each ; thei r aunt gave the m
on ce 2 5 pound weigh t each I s the weathe r fi n e i n the m o n th of .
October ? The weather i s rough i n th e m onth of October Whe n wi ll .
you go to th e garden ? I will go there to m orrow m orning A re -

.
there m a n y m ice i n your house ? There are very f e w A re there rats .
at you r far m ? There are rats an d bi rds H a s your so n any lice i n .
his head ? H e has no ne b u t i n hi s clothe s there are c ra b li ce Have

,
.
you m any s w ine ? I have only only a boar and a sow .
THI R TE E N TH L E SS O N . YC A L A B I N G T A TL O N G P A G A R A L .
DEG R E ES O F CO M P A R I S O N .
C o m p a r a t i ve of E q u a li t y .
co mparative of equality is for m ed i n severa l ways accord

The ,
i n g as to whether a quantity a quali ty or a thi n g i s to be co m pared ,

.
Before going however i nto fur the r explanations a b o u t the m atte r the ,
student should fi rst beco m e acquai nted with the follo w ing words and
co m binations used for the pu rpose .
( P ara sing casing m acasing 9 a gan

, , , , ,
g a pares cap a res

, , .
ui p arang ; sing casing m a g ca

l
, , ,
s n l g ( pre fi xed to the root

)
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
. .
G a ( pre fi x ed to the root of the adverb

o o o o o o o o o o o o o
5 an d e a prefixed to the root of the
,
,
,
quali ty ) .
As m uch as . Capara ca p a ri s ca p a n tay m a g c a s i n g

, , ,
.
Capara capares ca p a n tay parap a ra

As as
(
, , , ,
magcap a re s .
78 THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A G E .
when b oth o b j ects co m pared have bee n p revio u sly expresse

,
d ,
the
prefix ca i m parting a se nse of co m panionship or likeness
‘
A n g m an g a bata n ang a m ai n co at ang

M y uncle s chi ldren
’
are as ta ll as
s a m an ga q i g p i a i
a u n ns , , m a g ca ca
pari s nang taas or ca s i n g taa s nang
m y cousin s
g g
’ , ,
m an a an ac nang a q u i ng m an a
.
pins an .
i s prefixed to th e possessiv e case of the de monstrati ve

Ga
p ronoun s thu s form ing adverbs or adver ial co m parative exp ressions ;
, b
and if the co m pari son i s m ade wi th a n adj ective the latter takes ca , .
80 ,
i n this m anner ; so as this , . Canit o, gait o .
So , i n that m a nner as that , . Ga n i y an , g a n oo n .
As large as thi s . Can it o c a la q u i .
As old as that . G a n i y an catand a .
i s also p refixed to the i nterrogative pronou n s a m) an d a li n

Ga
i n the no m inative when the exte nt of a quality i s i nquired after .
w d
To hat egree i s sh e vi rtuous ? gG a a n o siy a c a b a n a lzzb a n a l?
To w hich i s it equal i n eauty ? b aG a a li n ca ri q u i t?
It i s pretty like that . G a n i y an c a ri q u i t .
When g a o r g a g a i s prefixed to a ver b , i t i m parts a sense

of m ockery or ludicrous i m i tation o f the actio n .
As if you were selling you p rete nd ,

Ga n a gb i b i li ca gayang n a g b i b i li ca
are selli ng .
,
A s if he were weeping hard

F eigning he was weeping a great eal d i Ga n a g ta ta ngi s siy a o r gayang etc
, , ,
G a ng a m ay be e m ployed as plural .
G anga nit o .
G anga niy an ganga n oon

, .
G a n ga n it o ca .
G anga niy an ganga n oon ca
The
co m pari so n of quanti ty m a y be m ade by expressing the
t w o obj ects co m pared i n the no mi native case with m a g cap a r e s o r m a g ca
p a ntag and the root of q uanti ty prefixed wi th ca at the e n d the ,
“
translatio n being litera lly such a thi ng an d such a thing are equal
"
i n quantity The possessive case of a p roper n oun m a y be used
.
for the possessive pronoun

. .
My b rother has not so m any b ooks A ng a q u i n g ca p a t i d ay ual ang g a n i to

as these . c a ra m ln g libro .
A n g ti nta nang a q u i ng a m a i n at ang

has as m uch m k as m y
b tlig
l l le
nang a q u i ng a m a m a g c a p a ri s ==m ag
a r
ca s i n g da m l .
Cap a r a may govern the possessive case o r the no m inati ve of ,

a
co m m o n noun . P a ra p a r a is generally used to denote plurality
D E GR E E S or CO M PA R I S N O . 79
Je j ewelry Co m b
w el , Hiyas a lhaja ( Sp ) Su clay
g
. . . .
, .
Ear Work Ts in a G au a p a g gau a -
g
. . . .
,
E yelash Wrist . . Pi li c m a t a G alang galan a n —

.
F lower . Bulac lac -
A n kle Boc o nang p a a b do l s aco n g , , .
A r m pi t .
Qu i li q u i li z c a li q u ili .
R ich wealthy
,
R iches wealth .
, . M aya m an . Ca y a m a n a n .
State condition L a g ay
b aga ang lagay niy a?
. .
,
I s he well ? gM a b u ti
THI R TE E N TH E X E R CI SE .
Yo u an d your son are well ? We are well Has you r m ale .
cou s i n any flo wers i n hi s garden ? Ye s Si r he has m any flowers , , .
Has he any other p lants ? Yes Si r he has othe r plants Who have , , .
big houses ? The wealthy have b i g houses A re th ere a n y goo d .
houses i n your to w n ? Yes Si r the re are so m e goo d houses What , , .
o ther things have you? We have so m e oxen Have yo u m uch .
m ore m oney ? M y b aker has a great deal m ore Has he m ore paper? .
He has m o re Has the sai lor as m uc h coffee as tea ? He has as

.
m u ch t e a as coff ee Has thi s m a n as m any friends as ene m ies ?

.
He has as m any o f th e for m er as of t he l at t er Have they as

b
.
m any shoes as stockings ? They have n o stockings Is m y rother s '

.
hat as pretty as m i ne ? You r b rother s i s as p retty as you rs

’
A re .
yo u a s wise as m y uncle ? I a m not so wise as he I s John a s

'
vi rtuous as m y sister? They both are equally virtuous Is that .
crysta l as hard as s to ne ? Stone i s no t so hard as thi s cry sta l Is .
i ron as whi te as silver ? Iron i s not as white as si lver I s ink a s

b
.
I s m y father s steel as
’
black as this ? M y i nk i s as lack as that
d
.
good as our uncle s ? Both of the m are equally goo A r e these

’
b b
.
dogs as eautif u l as those ? These are n ot so beautiful Is read .
thus m ade ? Yes i n that m anner To what degree i s m y father

,
.
old ? Yo ur father i s as old as m ine To w hich degree i s m y aunt s .

'
se rvant wicked ? He i s a s wicked as a thief How p retty i s m y bi rd ? .
I t i s pretty as a flower I s A ntho ny as j udicious as I ? Both of .
you are j udiciou s What does he wish ? He wishes to feign as if he

.
were weeping hard A re they as red as those ? They a re as red as these. .
’
Is you r j ewelry as p recious as m y siste r s ? M y j e w el ry i s n ot s o pre
.
“
c i o u s as your s i s te rs s H o w m any co m bs h ave you ? I have two Is

'
. .
your ear as black as m y n ose ? I t is as black as you r wrist ) Where have '
you your ankles an d ar m pits ? M y an kles are at m y feet my arm pi ts

m z
,
( ) h C m T
’
at under y s oulders A re ru s fa i ly rich ? hey a r e rich . .

.
To what degree are they wealthy ? They are wealthy as a king

'
I s yo u r
w
.
b rother i h la w -
ell ? He 1s well
-
A re far m ers a s strong as vi llagers ? .
V illagers are not so strong as far m ers I s the tailor as wealthy as m y

'
aunt s sister i n la w ? Your aunt s sister i n law i s as wealthy as the tailor

’ ’
- e - -
.
A re A m erican s a s i ndustrious as N atives ? N atives are not so i ndus

t ri o u s as A mericans b u t t he y a re as good sea m en A re wo m en as ta ll
,
' '
m en? M e n are not s o beautiful as wo m en but wo m en are n ot ao

'
'
as ,
t a ll a s me n ,
.
THE TA G A L OG L A N GUA G E .
F O U R TE E N TH L E S S O N . YCA L A B l N G A P A T N A P A G A R A L .
D E G R E E S O F CO M P A R I S O N .
C o m p a r a t i ve of Su p e r i o r i t y .
The
si m plest way of for m i n g the co m parative of superio rity i n
Tagalog i s to put the obj e ct with wh ich the co m parison i s m ade
i n the ablative case ( locative ) b y the use of the p reposition s s a o r
“
co g . Vi rtue i s m ore precious than ri ches a ng ca ba n a la i ma ha l s a , n
“
e a g a ma n a n ; Peter i s richer than John Si P e d r o i m a y a ma n ca p J u a n , , , ,
“
m y brother i s taller than I a ng c a p a ti d co i m a taa s s a a ga i n ; but it
, , ,
i s both m ore i dio m atic and m ore e m phatic to i nsert the adverbs la lo
,
,
“ “ ” “
m of e ; p a sti ll ; or la lo p a
, m ore still ; between the things co m ,
pared with the sa m e co nstructio n

,
Thus a ng ca ba n a la i la long m a ha l .
, , ,
Si P e d r o i m a y a m a n p a ca g J u a n ; an d a n q cap a ti d co
’
s a , ,
la lo p a ng m a taa s s a a q u i n express b etter the co m parative of superiority

, .
L a bi s a n d la bi s p a m ay likewise be used instead of la lo P a alone .

, ,
i s used only i n Co m p a ri n g a quality ; la lo p a ng both with substantives ,
an d adj ectives
’
L alo ( th e substanti ve s a
)
M ore ( an d a than
b
.
l L alo pa ( the su stantive )s a

.
( T h e adj ective )
L alo ( the adj ect )
M ore ( and an than . t
L alo pa ( the adj )
t
.
( The adj )pa s a . .
L alo
L alo pa
—
E r, —
r Pa
L abi s s a .
L abis pa
M ore gold than silver L alo ang g int o s e i la c u p
z
. .
M ore water than wine L alo p a n g p a ang t ubig s a alac

g
.
Th e c ou n try m e n have m ore oxen A n g m an a m a g s a s a ca i m ae on la

'
g
,
than the villagers . long baca s a m an a ta g a b a y a n .
M y father ha s m ore bread than A n g a m a co , i m a e on lalo pa n g tin a,
butter . pay s a m a n t i q u i y a .
I Cé o l m a y r oon l alo pang p l la e s a

’
Yo u ha v e m ore m o ney
{ than I t
~ ’
o r , m a s a la p l ca s a aqu i n
.
a q u ln ,
.
But th e Judge has m ore than either N gu nl t ang H o c o m , m a e on pa s a

'
, ,
of us . ati n g lahat .
Lal n a hal ang c a b a n a la n s a c a ya

3 gp é
Virtue i s m ore p recious than wealth .
g
l r a
Si J u a n a i lalo pang bata s a aqui n

, , , or ,
Jane i s younger than I .

( better ) Si Juana 1 b ata pa
. s a
a q uin .
Ga y 8 a i s s o m e t i m e s e m p lo y e d , e v e n w he n a c o m m o n a n d n o t a p r o p
( 1)
e r n o u n f o llo w s f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f r e n d e r i n g t h e s e n s e c le a r e r ( s e e F i r s t L e s s o n )
, ,
as ,
" ”
f o r i n s t a n ce , i n : m a ha l a n g p u r i s a balm y , ho n o r i s m o r e p r e c i o u s t ha n li f e ; bu t
‘
as t he e x p r e s s i o n i n Ta g a lo g , i f a c c o s t e d i n t hi s m a n n e r , m i g h t g i v e r i s e t o m i s w
c o n ce p i o n t ma ha l a n y p a r t ca y s a b a l my m a y b e u s e d t o m a k e i t c le a r t ha h e r e
, t
a co m p a r i s o n i s i n te n d e d .
Which of the m i s the m ost i ndus d A lln s a can ll a ang m a s i a g s a

p lahat?
t ri o u s ? ( L i t t h e,
i ndus t rious over all .
)
A n g a nac co ang lalo s a c a n i la
My son the m ost
.
1s
( L i t the m ore of the m )
.
superlatives are fo r m ed i n sever a l ways The si m plest

A bsol ute .
w ay i s that o f
usi ng so m e of the following adverbs :
Very m uch exceedingl y
, ,
L ubb a m a s aq u i t labis toto o
.
, , , .
E x t re m ely . Di s a pal a d i h am ac di p ala c , , .
Of these those that are si m ple i n s tructure m a y co m e be f ore

, ,
or after the w ord they qualify ; the co m p ou n d o nes afte r i t ,
L a b ha and la bi s have a se n se o f excess so m ewhat as the E u

-
”
i
“ “ "
glish to o o r too m uch ; m a s aq a i t a se n se o f plenty a s when hard “
,
i s used i n E nglish ad v erbially To too i s a te r m O t assurance ; the .
“ " “
o thers are adverbial expressions m ean ing n ot paltry no t calculable
, , .
di h am ac .
Ban al siy a di sapala .
di p a la c
She i s extre m ely virtuou s
.
lU b hé
.
fl g
-
i
d
t o t o On g . siy ang banal .
labi s .
God is extre m ely w ise A ng D i os

r un o n g .
ay t o t o On g ( or lu b han g )m a
P eter is very i ll L u b hang m a y s a q u i t si P e dro

b
.
A n g c a n i lan g an a c n a b abaye ay la le
Thei r d a u g the r i s ve ry beautiful
nang ga n d a .
A ng c a n i y an g p a n gi n OOn ay m abags ic
His m aste r i s very cruel
nam a s aq u i t
.
g
.
Heave n i s exceedingly high . A n g l an it a y m at aas na d i sapala .
A n g p Oto n g nang H ari a y m ahal na

The ki ng s crown i s very precio us
’
di ha m ac .
Honesty i s m uch estee m ed . A ng c a p u ri ha i , toto e ng m i n am a ha l

,
.
A nother
way of for m ing th e absolu te superlati ve i s by re peating .
the adj ective i n full and i nserting the p roper liga m ent be t ween .
Very red . M apul ang m a pul a .
E xtre m ely black . M aiti m na m ai ti m .
plural of superlatives is for m ed by e m ployi ng the plurali z

The ing
particle for t he si m ple adj ectives and ei ther by usi ng the particle or ,
by repeating the fi rst syllable of root for th ose pre fi xed with m a ,
.
M m i n a m a s i a g n a d a la g al
M ost 1n d u s t r i o u s m a ld s i a n
g a a s a
p g p
l jM a s i p a g na m a s i p a g n a dalag a !
. ‘
Very ugly dogs g

M an a asong p an i t na p an it g g
g
. .
A n g m an a m a b u t i ng m a b u tl ng m a n
sanas
The extre m ely good pples
.
a
A ng m a b u b u tln g m a b u b u ti ng man
.
sanas .
The adj ectives m a y also be m ade superlative by repeati ng the

root ( or its t w o first syllable s ) ca being pre fi xed and a n o r ha n
, ,
s u ffi x e d .
D E GR E E S OF CO M PA R I S N O .
De ep profound
, . M a lali m .
Very deep m ost profo und , . Ca la li m la li m a n -

.
Sw eet Very swee t sweetest

.
, . M a t a m is Ca ta m i s ta m i s a n
. .
Wholeso m e M a g u i n ha u a .
5 Ca g u i n ha g u i n ha u a ha n or m a g u i n ha
Very wholeso m e , ,
u ang m a g u i n ha u a
.
l .
Superlatives or superl a tive exp ressions m a y be

for m ed i n a less
si m ple way , by u sing a n egati ve word a n d a n y
co m para t i ve ter m
denoting equality contentio n or fellowship before the possessive case
'
o f the root denoti ng the qu a lity the literal translatio n bei ng “

m atchle ss , .
“
unri valled .
Capara .
M atchless . Cap a res .
Ca t u la d .
U n rivalled . Di ual ang

,
Ca u a n gi s .
Ca ha m b i n g
I m c o m para ble . Ca ha li m b a u a .
Ca p a n t ay .
This flo er i s w m a c hle s s in b eauty I t ong bulac la e n a i t o i ual an g capa

ri s nang gand a
-
.
, ,
Si Haring R i ca rd o i ual an g nagi n g

King R ichard was u nri valled i n , ,
ly na n g t ap a ng nang un ang
ca p a n t e
bravery
panah on
.
Kindred r elation shi p , . Ca m a g a n a ca n , c a hi n log a n .
Con sanguineous relation Ca d u g o

b
. .
R elation y affini ty Ca b a lay

g
. .
The skies Heaven L an i t

,
/
. .
Coal T V
. Ca r bé n ( Sp ) ; uling n a b a th ( g)
a . .
Charcoal Star . . Oli n g B i to u i n

. .
Custo m habi t te m per Sick A sal ugali M ays a q u i t

d
, , . .
, . .
M ( corr of S wor m
z
A pple 5 a ns a n a s p . an . .
~
)
.
a na
P ai nter .
; m a n hi hi b o , ( Ta g )
P i n tor ( Sp ) ,
.
P icture pai nti ng i m age L ar auan

b
, ,
. .
The roof A ng bu ong

bb
.
The roof o f the house . A ng s a b ahay n a u ong .
The thatching straw . A n g p au i d

The thatching st ra w p lant . A n g n ipa ang sas a . .
N ipa plantation
-
. Sa s a han .
Cruel bad te m pered

, P raye r -
. . M aba gs i c Dasal . .
F OU R TEE N TH E X E R CI SE .
Has you r servant a good broo m ? He has on e Have the .
h usband m en any of these or of those bags ? They h ave non e of these

no r of those Who has a good trunk ? M y b rother ha s on e
. Has .
he a leather o r a wood trunk ? He has a wood one Has the carpen ter .
m any i ron nails ? He has m any Who has so m e gun s ? The A m er .
i ca n s have so m e Have yo u the wood ha m m er of th e F ren ch m an o r

.
that of the E ngli sh m an ? I have nei ther What i s m ore p re cl o u s th a n

w
.
eal th ? Vi rtue Who i s the greatest of all ? Go d Who a re

. .
- r
’
youn g er than m y brothers ? You r un cle s children are y oun ger Am ’

.
I shorter than P eter ? Ye s he i s taller tha n you Which Of these ,

.
three flowers is the pretties t? The p rettiest is that one on the ta ble ‘
Who are stronger than wo m en ? M e n A r e b uffalos less s w ift than .
horses ? They are less swift A re A m erican s fewe r th an natives ? .
hey are m ore neighbour s brother your relative ? He is

’
I s t he . ,
n ot m y consanguineous relation b u t he i s m y relatio n by m arri age ,

.
Ho w m any people are your ki n dred co m posed Of ? They consist Of seven

m ale an d four fe m ale relations D O vi rtuous people get i nto Heaven ? .
Only vi rtuous people g e t i nto Heaven I s coal dif f erent fro m charcoal ? .
Yes coal i s d ifferent fro m charcoal

, A r e there m any stars i n the sky . ,
by nig ht ti m e ? Yes there are a g reat m a ny

-
I s your m ale cousin good
, .
te m p e red ? N O h e is cruel I s your m other sick ? N O sh e is well but he

H o w m uch is the do z
,
.
, ,
painter i s sick en of those apples ? Twen ty cents .
Has your aunt m any pi c t ures i n her house ? She has th ree pictures i n h er
house Of what m aterial i s the roo f of your n eighbor s house ? The roof
.
’
o f m y neigh bor s house is of th atching straw What i s the plant of

'
thatching stra w N i pa A re there any nipa fields i n your p rovince? Yes

. .
,
t here are so m e Where i s y ou r m aster ? He i s at church I s he cruel ?

. .
N o he i s not cruel he i s ki nd What prayer i s that? Ou r father :

, , .
( The L ord s prayer ) H o w m a ny persons are there ? There a re three ;

.
J ohn A lfred and R ichard

, Whi ch i s the wises t? The wises t i s Joh n . .
Which i s t he eldest ? The eldes t is A lfred Which i s the whitest?

J
.
The whitest i s R icha rd Which o f your sisters i s the m os t beautiful ? . ane

i s beautiful M ary i s m ore beautiful ; but Clara i s the m ost beautifu l Of
,
the three Oh ! Clara i s very beautiful

. A r e A m ericans very indus .
trions ? They are extre mely i nd ustrious I s honey very s w eet ? Yes .
,
honey i s very sweet A r e buffalos ugly ? Yes i ndeed t hey are ex

.
, ,
ce e d i n g ly ugly What ani m al i s very swift? The horse i s very swift

.
.
A r e bi rds swifter that horses ? Yes birds are swifter than horses , .
A re natives very s w arthy ? N o they are n ot very swarthy A re your , .
eyelashes very black ? They are very blac k I s the sea deep ? The .
sea i s very deep A r e apples wholeso m e ? They a re very wholeso m e

.
.
A r e bi rds s w ift? Birds are m atchless i n s w iftness I s your father .
virtuous ? M y father i s m atchless for vi rt ue .
F l F TE E N TH L E SS O N . YOA L A E l N O L I M A NG P A G A RA L .
D l M lN U TlV E S .
I t ha s
been said i n the p receding lesso n that the red up li c a tio n
Of an adj ective i n full and the us i ng o f the proper liga m ent between
for m s a ki nd of su perlative N o w the repea ting of the root of a .
,
a co m p o u n d adj ective without any liga m en t serves to exp ress t he di

.
m l nu ti v e
.
I dle la z
y; a little idle so m ewhat M a ta m a d ; m a ta m a d ta m a d
z
, , .
la y .
Savory tasteful ; a li ttle savory

, . M a s a r a p ; ma s a ra p s a ra p .
S o ur ,
souri sh M aasi m , m a a s i m a s i m
d br
.
.
Salt s a lt e ; s a ltish
, , a ckish . M a ala t; m aa la tala t .
M on osyllabi c
'
an d d issyllabic perso nal na m es are not ge ne rally

m ade di m i nutives .
There
are other suppleto ry ways Of lessenin g the m ea ning o f
s ubstantives one of which especially for th e abstract ones i s wi th m a y
, , ,
,
befo re and with di n after the abstract .
He is pretty well off Siy a i m a y c ay a m a n a n din , , .
M y m other i s recovering slightly

A n g m a co l m a y ca la ca s a n d ln
her s t re n g hth 1 .
, , .
Ver s are very frequently b m ade d i m inutive in Ta galog as will

b
,
be seen i n su sequent lessons .
But ( adv ) only L am ang b ocor

ta n g i liban
, ,
Bu t ( prep )
. . Boco r , , .
I have but on e friend M a e on is ang caibigan l am ang

a c On g
g
. .
A ll of the m ca m e here but m e . N a p a r i to sil ang lah at ta n i s a aquin

TOO m uch too m any , . L abis lu b han g m ara m i
,
You have too m uch wine . Ca v o i m a e on alac n a labis

, , .
They h ave too m any books . Sil a i m a y lub h ang m a ra m i n g libro -

.
L ara p a m i n ta ( corr Of Sp word

P epper
.
, . .
p i mi en ta ) .
Vinegar Vein or root Suca U gat

word
. . . .
L a la m u n a n (
“
root -
la mé n to
1hroa t
' , ,
.
swallow)
Brains m arrow p i th U ta c
g
.
, ,
N erves M an a litid
g
. .
Cocoa n ut Oi l .
L an is .
Ti n a ja large earthen j ar about 2 0

,
Ta payan
gallons i n capaci ty
.
Well any hole dug i n the ground

lBal on
,
to get at fresh water .
Sh irt . Baro .
Beast any an i m al whatever

,
H ayo .
Dead Deceased people. P at ay n a m a téty N a n ga m a t ay .

,
. .
0a m ( Sg l p a r e ( corr Of Sp word
P riest cu rate p a rson
.
, ’
p a dr e father ’
.
, ,
.
,
P ri e s tf i n i n i s t e l o f G od
‘
Ca ha lili nang Di e s ‘
. .
Baby infa nt , Sangol .
I m pudent unchaste I m pudence M ah alay Ca h a la y a n

b
.
, . . .
To elong to to agree t o to fit
b l
, , ,
t o sui t to ea r towards , .
A n g ating ca lo lOu a a y s a Dios ( di n )

Ou r sou l i s to G O d our b ody to
n a o o c o l; ang ating c a ta o u a i s a lupa
.
,
earth , .
( l)
.
n a o oc o .
F I F I E E N TH E XE R CI SE
‘
.
m any s hoes ha s your

Ho w
ife ? Sh e has on ly two Who is w
z
l a y ? The fe m ale servant is a l ittle la y What i s the m ost ta steful z .
fruit i n the Phi lippi nes ? The pine ap ple ; but the ban ana i s so m e
w w
-
hat tasteful Is thi s ater salt water? N o , h i s only salti sh A rc you n g

. .
THE VE RB . UM V E RBS . 87
chi ckens fl e e t e r tha n hens ? Chi ckens wh ile they are still s m all are
d
, ,
on ly a little fleet I s that apple t asteful ?

. I t i s rathe r i nsipi Will .
yo u h ave so m e bread ? I wis h t o have so m e D O yo u not wi sh to .
go to school ? I wish to go to chu rch but m y frie nd F rank does n ot , .
Have you a good deal of m o ney ? I have o nly a little How i s tha t .
m ilk ? This m ilk i s sourish Wh a t i s that pictu r e ? That picture i s .
that o f a bi rd A re there m any figures i n that pic t ure ? This picture

.
ha s twen ty fi gures I s h is brothe r a phys i cian ?

. He i s only
a quack What i s that painted o n that picture? I t i s a house
. Is .
you r baker well ? He i s sick I s he ve ry sick ? He i s pretty n early .
recovered D i d they all go to chu rch this m orning ?

. N O they all ,
went t here b ut h i m H o w m any go ds are there ? There i s o nly o ne

. .
H o w much m oney has the priest? The priest ha s too m uc h What .
i s that yo u have i n that bag ? I t i s paper Does he wi sh to have .
so m e vinegar? He does no t wi sh to h ave any for he has a so re ,
throat Where are roots ? R oots o f trees are i n the earth What are
. .
b rains ? Brai n s are the roots of n erves I s there any cocoa n ut oi l i n .

-
that ti n aj a ? There i s none thi s ti n aja i s e m pty Where i s there an y , .
w ater? There i s water i n the well I s your father dead ? Yes m y .

.
father i s dead Where are n o w the souls o f the dead ? Those of

.
virtuous people are i n Heaven those of t he wicked are i n Hel l What , .
is a priest? A p riest i s a m inister of G o d What i s i m p udent? There .
are m any actions that are i m pudent A re beasts an d m e n alike ? N o

b b
.
,
bea sts a nd persons are d i fi e re nt easts bear towards earth m e n ear , ,
to w ards Go d .
S lX TE E N TH L E S SO N . YC A L A B I N G ANI M NA PA GA RA L .
TH E V ERB . UM V E R BS .
Verb s i n Tagalog as m ost other par ts o f speech are ei the r , ,

,
pri m itive o r deri vative ; the for m er are th ose whi ch i n thei r o rig in al
signification are verbs the latter are fo r m ed fro m pri m i tive ver s su b
,
b
s ta n t i v es adj ectives o r any others parts of speech by the addi tio n Of
,
prefixes suffixes o r both or by th e i nsertio n of particles The deri vative

, ,
.
verbs m a y be su bdivided i nto p ri m ary o r secondary according to whethe r ,
the root i s co m bined wi th on e o r several parti cles .
P ri m itive v erb s are fo r the m ost dissyllabi c i n s tructure an d m a y

“ “
b e either transitive as bi g ay give ; o r i ntran sitive as lolog sleep ;
, ,
but a transi tive sense m a y be given to an i ntra nsiti ve verb and vice
versa by the applica ti on of particles .
The root i s s o m eti m es a m b i guous as ar a l “

i n s truction ; bi li
'
, ,
”
“
bartering ; i da ng i n d ebt n e s s f f ro m w hich are for m ed both the tra ns iti ve
“
,
’
” ”
verbs to teach
“ “
to sell “
,
to le n d ; and also the neute r verbs o r ra ther
,
those which although not stric t ly i ntransi tive i nas m uch as they ad m i t
,
of a h accusati ve are nevertheless considered by natives i n the li ght

-
,
“ ” “ “ ” ”
of i ntransitives a s to learn to b u y to bo rrow
b
.
, , , ,
The ver al particles are nu m e rous but one an d the sa m e roo t ,
does not take the m all because so m e are to i t useless an d there are
,
others the sense o f which conflicts with the significa t ion of the radic al
d b
.
Thei r role i n t he v e rb a l p la y is not co nfine to express the su ordin ate

THE TA G A L OG L A N GU A GE .
ideas of m ood ten s e etc but goes farther i nto m odificatio n s of the
, ,
.
,
action reach ing the Obj ect and forci ng i t i nto special syntactical arrange
'
ments generally requi ring the u s e Of adverbs prepos i t ion s an d round ‘
about expression s i n other lang u ages .
Th ese particles are not on ly prevalen t i n proportion as the style

i s terse an d correct but they are even i n a certai n way essential to ,
th e conveyance of fai rly i ntelligi ble thought ; an d thus we wan t agai n ,
to re m in d the stude n t of an d to i m press hi m on the i m por t an ce of thi s

subj ect a right understan ding of which will give h im th e m aste ry of
,
the langua g e .
The parti cl e to expressi ve of the E ngli sh in fin itive th e prefixes , ,
a n d suffixes a a b a nt d i e r e e e n 07 etc an d t he ter m i n ation s i ng

, , , , , , , , .
, ,
e d which a cco m pany verbs an d verba l noun s i n E ngli s h how e ver sense
-
i m parting they m a y be fall far sho rt of the significance of th e Tagalog ,
parti cles .
That th e student m a y h a ve an idea of the m odi fyi ng power of

these particles we su bj oi n a paradig m showing the m ani fold m eanings
,
they i m part to the verbal roo t ar a l ( idea O f knowledge te a chi ng )which

b
, ,
ha s een selected fo r the purpose .
R o o t— A ra l .
SE N SE . PA R TI CL E . DE RI V V A TI E . M E ANI N G .
The action applied to

others ( O b je c t i v e U m
.
. U m ara l . To teach .
action ) .
DO to one s self M a
. .
M a g aral To learn to s tudy

g
( subj ective action )
.
,
. .
.
.
Habitual or m ercenary
.action cu s to m ary per M a n
,
. M a n arai g . To preach to lecture , .
f o r m a n ce .
P otential ( Obj ect . . action ) M aca . To b e able to teach .
Do ( subj ect study

n n n
. . .
P r e a c h
Do ( h b l tu a l
n
a
.
o r lecture .
Causative .
( Obj ect . M a gp a . order teach .
M a g p a p a g ara l
learn
Do .
( subj ect . .
,
M a g p a p a n gara l
p reach
Do ( hablt
o r lecture
. . .
Interferen ce m eddling M aqui m eddle with teach

,
M a q u l a ra l
with ( obj ect action )
.
. . . I n
Do do ( subj ect act )

. . . .
M a q u i p a g ara l . do W ith
studying ,
p reachi n g
D O do ( hab
. . .
o r lecturing
Craving ( Obj ect
.
a s k for teachin g
. .
,
.
Crave fo r study
DO ( subj
. ect .
ask for preachi n g

DO ( hab Pa p a n gara l
or lecturin g
. . .
Multitude ( subj ect . . M agsi . M a g s i ara l . teach by m any .
Do .
( subj ect . M a g s i p a g ara l . learn
preach or to lecture
Do ( hab M a g s i p a n gara l n
b y m any
. . .
E arnestness ( j Ob . M a g p a ca M a gp a c a ara l . teach earnestly .
DO ( subj M a gp a ca p a g ara l learn ‘
. .
l e arne r a d m ake it clear to hi m the ease ith hi ch he ca n h a v e w w

d w w
n
co m m an of a great m any ords it h b ut a f e w roots if h e on ly

w
kno s ho w to e m ploy these particles in telligently
,
w
.
The above illustration s also show how t o o r m ore particles can

b
co m ine with an d be applied to the sa m e root and ho w the action de n oted ,
by the latter receives the m odificatio n which i s the province of each

particle to i m part as seen for i nstance i n ma cap a ngar a l ma g nip a g dr a l
'
, , , , ,
ma cap a gp ap a g ar a l etc There i s still an a pparently i nsig nificant

b
, ,
ut in fact a very i m portant c hange brought to light by these co m

, ,
b i n a ti o n s of two o r m ore particles to which special attentio n o n the ,
part Of the student i s earnestly invited ; that i s the s ubstitution of p ,
for the i ni tia l m of all s ubord i nate verbal parti cles in such co m bina
b
,
“ ” “
tions as ma cap a g ar a l to e able to study ; ma gp ap a g a r a l to ord er , ,
to study ; m a q u ip a g ar a l to m eddle with learning ; m a g s ip a g a r a l 10

“
,
“
,
” ”
learn by m any ; m a cap a ng a r a l to be able to preach ; m a gp a p a ng ar a l ,
‘ '
,
”
“
to order to preach ; ma gnip a ngar a l to m eddle with p reaching ; ma g
“ '
,
”
s ip a ngar a l
“
to preach by m any ; i n respect of their si m pler deriva
,
”
t i v e s : ma g ar a l
“
to lear n ; an d ni a ngdr a l to p reach
, ,
“
.
A s this m atter i s s o i m por ta n t an d one not to be disposed of ,
with a passing thought i t i s believed necessary to go to so m e length ,
i n trying to explai n this peculiari ty so as to ai d the studen t i n using ,
an d u nderstanding these co m bi nation s o f several particles an d thus

b
,
to ena le hi m to u nderstand that i dio m ati c language whic h is even a

m atte r of difficulty for m any n atives .
The fact to b e bo rn e i n m i nd i s this : that when two o r ,
m ore particles co m bi ne wit h the sa m e root

,
not all of th e m hold ,
an e qual rank nor stan d o n th e sa m e level wi th regard to the

thought conveyed and that two o r at least one of the m m ust be, , , ,
subordi n ate to so m e othe r co nsidered tr a n s cen d e n ta l o r d e te rmi ni n g ,
and which fo r thi s r easo n takes it s place at the head O f the c o m

, ,
poun d thus for m ed There are particles which can be only trans
.
c e n d e n ta l or m o d i fi ca ti v e ; but never s ubordi nate as : m a ca m a g s i i n

, , , ,
respectively m a ca p a gp a p a g ar a l to be able to order to s t udy ; m a ca ar a l

,
“
, ,
“ “
to be able to teach ; an d m a g s ip a gp a ar a l to o rder ( by m any peo ,
"
ple ) to teac h ; m a g s ip a g ar a l to learn by m any There are others ,
“
.
tha t are either transcendental o r subordi nate as for i nstance ma gp a , , , ,

“
i n ma gp a na g ar a l to cause to learn ;,
where the subj ective actio n
denoted by m a g p a g i s subordinated t o the causative denoted by
-
ma gp a ; and i n m a cap a gp a ar a l “
to b e able to order to teach ; where , ,
o n the
-
contrary the causative ma gp a beco m es the subordinate part

,
i c le of the potential m a ca There are others that are always either .

,
subordi nate o nly or both subordi nate an d m o d i fi ca t i v e th e fo r m er

, , ,
being those whic h like the E nglis h particle to are necessary to change
, ,
the root i nto a verb expressive of the p ri m ary o r un m odi fi ed action of

the Special kin d which is the p ro v ince of the particle to denote .
Verbal particles have two for m s of expression one for each ,
voi ce of the verb N o w i t i s this tr a ns ce n d e n ta l particle which causes

.
,
all others associated the rewith to appear i n the passive for m and ,
hence t he cha n ge referred to above A p ractical de m ons tra tion Of

b
.
the process by w hich thi s cha n ge i s m ade follows an d i t i s to e , ,
ho ped that the student m a y thus successfully grasp the m atter .
I f for i nstance o ut O f the idea of learning lying do r m ant i n the

, ,
root a r a l t he deter m inate one of the receiving of i nstruction i nto the

,
m in d by the subj ect i s to b e develop e d the pre fi x m a g should be ,
applied to the root for the purpose thus for m ing the co m pound m a g ,
ara l . Th e particle m a g i n thi s case i s not on ly necessary to change the

, , ,
THE V E RA —
UM V E R ES . 91
f oot ar a l i nto a ver ( a con ditio n whi ch it di n b
o t p ossess efore d b
b
,
o r t ha t i t o nly possessed i n a n un developed state ); ut i t i s also

’
essen ti al to de note the sen se of receivi ng i n structio n in t o on e s m in d

'
i nas m uch as any other particle tha t m ight have bee n ap plied to ar a l
would fai l to i m part thi s signification N ow if thi s acti on i s to e .
,
b
rendered subordi nate to so m e other t o t he potential for instan ce the
.
, ,
particle ma ca i s to be p refixed ; but as t he language re q uires that

, ,
the action which i s the co m ple m ent of a deter m inin g verb b e ex

pressed i n the passive ( or i t m a y be that p a g i s the true verbal particl e
j
, ,
m a g being only con ugati ve ) the seco nd de rivative thus for m ed co m es ,
out i n the shape of ma cap a g ar a l and not i n that of m a ca ma g dr a l as ,
the studen t would n aturally i m agine if he were not i nstr u cted of the
change . The sa m e i s th e case too for any other additional partic le , ,
with w hi ch t he tran sce n den tal o r deter m i nin g on e m a y co m e to be

°
co m bined a s seen fo r i n stance i n m a cap a gp a p a g ar a l etc ; an d if the

, , , , .
learner fai ls to discover any trace of this change i n co m pou nds as

m a ca d r a l ma q u i ar a l m a cap a g p a d r a l it is because these refer
, ,
to the ,
obj ective p ri m ary actio n that i s to say to the actio n with u m the , , ,
only verb a l particle which h as n o t a correspo nding o ne fo r the

expressio n i n the p a s i v e .
Thus further to re nder t he fo regoing m ore m an ifest :

,
1 . To be a le b , ( potential a cti o n
) : M a ca .
2 . To order , ( cau s ative = M a gp a

a c ti o n ) .
3 . To study , ( pri m ary a c ti o n ) M a g: .
1 2 -
3
P otential particle ; Causativ e particle ; P ri m ary particle ;
( trascendental ) ( s u o rdinate b
) ( subordi nate )
M a ca p a gp a p ag
( To be ab le ) ( to order ) ( to study ) .
I a l ike m an ner thi rd ran k co m pounds as ma cap a gp a bz

n li to “
b
, ,
“
be able to order to buy ; m a cap a gp ap a g bi li to e able to o rder to ,
“ “
sell ; fro m bi li barteri n g ; m a cap a gp a a li s
, to b e able to order to go ’
,
“ ”
o ut ; m a cap a gp a p a g a li s to able to order to take out ; fro m a li s
'
, ,
"
“
goi ng out ; etc can b e for m ed A lth ough these for m s are n o t
. .
u sual owing to th e abstraction of m in d they requi re they are however

w
,
gra m m a t i cal a n d high ly i llustrative of t h e m etho d to b e follo ed i n

the fo r m atio n o f other less co m p lex a nd m o re u sual co m pou nds
Co n j u ga ti o n.
The dis t i ncti on s of m ood and voice apply but i m perfectly an d

b
,
those of person and n u m ber not at all to the Tagalog v er As

w
, .
to the m oods the i nfi ni ti v e and the i mp e r a ti v e are a like

,
hile ,
the s u bju n cti v e i s b ut v ery i n distinctly m arked an d i s m ade dep

endent o n the use of certai n co n j unctions with the corresponding ten .
s e e of th e i ndicative 1h e various v oices or m anners for th e verb '

.
to expres s the action i n relatio n to an a gent that executes i t a r e i n

Tagalog m anifo ld and co m e to be the result of applyi n g th e Specifi c
par ti cles an d pro cesses re qui red by each of these different for m s of
conj ugation n o auxi li ary o r m odal bei n g u sed for the p u r pose Only
b
.
,
the use of a noun o r pro n ou n can m ake the person and the nu m er
‘
of the v e r kno n b w .
tenses are : th e present the past an d the future w 1thou t

The
the inter m ediate ones that are recogni z
‘
, ,
'
ed i n m ore developed lan

guages of whi ch an a p ro x i m a t e i d ea can h oweve r be given by using
,
the verb i n connexio n wi t h so m e m o di fi c a t i v e particle or adverb of

ti m e A s the language affords n othing i n th e way of those auxiliary
.
verb s and sign s which play so i mp ortan t a part i n the E ngl is h con
j ugation all these Tagalog ten ses are necessarily si m ple i n structure
, ,
an d they are for m ed by a co m bi nation of certai n chan ges i n the

verbal particle with the redu plication of a p ortio n ei ther of the latter .
o r of the root
b
.
A lthough the Tagalog tense uilding process secures a n ortho -
graph ical discri m ination wide enough for the tenses to be distin g uish ed
at sight fro m each other it i s n o t to be i nferred therefro m however
, , ,
that a disti nction Of an equal degree O f perspicuity e x i s ts to o i n m i nd '
as to the sense Were n ot that i n de fi n i te n e s s w h ich throu g hout i n

'
.
Ta galog i s the m ost characteri stic feature of the language to apply here ,
i t would be sufficient fo r m aki ng this lack o f precision m anifest

, ,
to notice t he ease with w h ch natives ren der these ten ses i n te r cha n g e ' e
able with each other an d to see the frequency with which they u se
,
the verbal root coupled to so m e expressio n of ti m e for every tense

, ,
.
G e n e r a l R u le s .
The
two following are co m m ended to the atten tion of the s tudent
as appli cab le to all Ta galog verbs (u m an d p a ve rbs because here n o
b
, ,
i nitial m exi s t s eing an exception to the first ; p a verbs always

, ,
and ma ca verbs so m eti m es bei n g an exception to the second rule )

, ,
.
FI R ST . ini tial mof the ver al pa rticle cha n ges to

The b n for the p resen t
and the past tenses .
SE CO N D . E ither
the first syl lable of the root or the second Of th e ,
'
particle i f the latte r con si sts of m ore than on e should be re

, ,
duplicat e d for the present and the future tenses .
Pri mo r dia l a c ti v e ve rb a l p a r t i c le s .
Before any others ,

the followi ng three verbal pa rticles should
be fir s t co nsidered .
U m, f or verbali z
ing i n a tran si ti ve i n an in transi ti ve ut vol , ,
b
u n ta ry o r consci ous an d i n an i nchoative sense ; but i n the
’
ca s e of a transitiv e sense when the actio n i s vi ewed i n special ,
reference to the subj ect .
M ag, for ver ali z b

ing i n a transitive reflective an d reci procal sense ,
“
but for the t r a n s t i v e sense when the actio n i s vi ewed i n

, ,
special reference to the Obj ect a nd i n the case of i ntran sitive ,
verbs expressing voluntary actions when intensio n i s to be denoted ,

.
M a, for verbali z g
in i n an in transiti ve bu t i nvoluntary sense and i n , ,
one e x p r e s s w e of a state or condition Of being .
A lthough
the foregoi ng distin ction s as to the sen ses i m parted
by these p a r tl cle s are founded on the Obvious tenor Of t he language ,
yet m a n y exception s to the

,
l
rules will b e fo und whi ch are m os t ly ,
acc oun ted for by th e different light i n which certai n action s are cons
i d e re d by natives .
94 THE TA GA LO G LA N GUA GE .
i n : g u i nha u ct growing well recovery ;

‘
a cé j “
a n m
g g gt i t i n ha u d ” “
z
as , , , ,
”
instead of g u ng mu g u i n ha u d I a m getti n g well
“
Th1s a p p he s also
’
w
.
, ,
to the liquid consonants i n the fe cases i n which they are m e t with

co m bined with another con sonant and a vowel i n the first syllable of
the root ; and thus tr a baj o for in stance m akes n a g ta tm bajo an d not
, , , , ,
n a g tr a tm baj o although both for m s are i n use however

z
.
b
, ,
Tw o roots dr a l an d s t la t are hereafter conj u gated y u m to

’
fully illus t rate the expla n ation s given above .
C O N J U G A TI O N .
i nfi ni t i v e .
To teach . U m ara l .
Pre s e nt i nd e f i ni te t e ns e .
I teach . A co , i , u n g m a ar a l,
( )
l . u n g m a ara l a t e .
Thou teachest . I c ao ca
He sh e i t teach es
, ,
. Siy a
Tayo
l C mi a
Cay o
Sil a
P re s e nt p e rf e c t and p a s t i nd f i ni t e e t e ns es .
I t a u ght ,
h ave taught . A c o, i ,
u n g m ar a l, u n g m ara l a c o
Thou ta u ghte s t h ast ,

I
c ao
He sh e it tau ght ; ha s
, , Siy a
Tayo
Ca m i
Cay o
Sil a
( 1) W hi le m o d i fi e rs ha ve gone t o gre a t
le n g h i n d e i s i n g t v c r tho gra p hi a l
c
i n nova t i o n s w hi c h , f or the m os t, a re t
u n s u i a b le a n d u n a d a p a b le to t t he la n g u a g e ,
t he o b v i o u s ne s s t i n g u ng ma dr a l i n s te a d o f u ma dr a l ha s n o t y e t a t the i r ha n d s
of wri , ,
r e ce i v e d a n y co n s i d e ra ti o n W h e n h o w e v e r t h e r e a s o n h e r e a s s i g n e d o f t he c o n
. , ,
v e n i e n c e o f e s t a b li s hi n g a n o r tho g r a p hi ca l d i s t i n c ti o n b e t w e e n t he t e n s s w c u ld n o t e
s eem ju s t i fi a b le e n o u gh t ha t o f t h e a d a p ta t i o n o f t he s p o k e n t o t he w ri tte n
, .
la n g u a g e w ou ld b e c o n s i d e r e d s u f fi ci e n t f o r a s p e lli n g o f th e s e w o r d s i n t h e w a y
n e r e r e co m m e n d e d I t o n ly s u f fi c e s t o m a k e a n a ti v e
. tra n s la te i nto Ta g lo g a
t h e E n g li s h w or d a n d p h r a s e «t e a ch a nd «I a n t e a chi n g f o r t he e a r t o p e r ce i ve
» »
a t once a s oun d w hi c h ma y b e a r t i cu l a t e d t hu s : u md r a l i n t he f orme r a nd - -
, ,
may ma d a l, wi th di s ti nctly nas al pro nu nci a t i o n i s t he la tte r ca s e

- V
, , .
THE V a ns —
UM V s -
s s s .
95
P lu p e r f e c t t e ns e .
A co 1 n a ca ara l, n a ca ara l a co
I had taught .
.
u n g m a ra l na , u ng m ara l na
Thou hadst
He she i t had
, ,
You ,
ye
F u tu re i nd e f i ni t e te ns e .
Q
I s hall teach . A c o, i a ara l, a ara l a co .
Thou wilt I cao ca

He she it will ,
Si y a 11
Tayo
shall
lCCaymo
,
a i ,
Sil a,
Futu re p e r f e c t t e ns e .
5 A co i m a ca ara l m a ca ara l a co
I shall have ta u ght , .
a ara l na , a ara l na
.
Thou Wilt '
He she it will
, ,
We sh all
You will
i mp e r a t i v e .
Te a ch ( thou )
. ,
L e t hi m her i t teach , , ,
.
L e t us
Teach ( ye ) . .
L e t the m teach .
96 THE T A GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
i nfi n i t i v e .
To w rite Su m ula t
‘
. .
P re s e nt i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e .
I write A c o, i s u n g mu s ula t, s u ng m u s ula t a co

'
. .
,
Thou writest . I c ao ,
ca .
He she i t wri tes

, , . Siy a ,
siy a .
Ta ta 0
si n l ii i
0,
We w r 1te
.
Ca
.
g
ca n .
Cay o ,
cay o .
Sil d ,
sil a .
Pre s e nt p e r f e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi ni t e t e n s es .
I wrote have written

, . A c o, i; s u n g m ula t , s u n g m ula t a co .
Thou w ro te s t hast , I c ao ,
He s he w ro te ha s
, , ‘ , Siy a,
Ta yo
{Ca m i
,
Cay o
Sil a,
P lu p e rf e c t t e n s e .
A 06 i n a ca s ula t , n a ca s ula t a co
I had written .
s u n g m u la t n a sun g m u la t
’
,
na
Th ou hadst ca .
Siy a’
He sbe it had
, ,
You r ye '
n n 11
F u t u r e i n d e fi ni t e t e n s e.
I shal l write .
A nd; i s us ula t , s us ula t a co .
Thou wilt I c ao ca.
He she i t will , Siy é , s iy a .
Tayo tayo
j i
, .
Ca m i , ca m i .
Ca y é , cay o .
Si lé , Sil a
'
’
ro
96 THE T A GA L O G L A N GUA GE .
To w rite Su m ula t
‘
. .
Pre s e nt i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e.
I w rite A c o, i s u ng mu s ula t , s u ng m u s ula t a co

'
. .
,
Thou writest . I c ao ,
ca .
He she i t writes
, , . Siy a ,
siy a .
Ta ta
l
r
i
0
J
ifii
0,
We w r 1te
.
.
Ca )c a ni
.
.
,
Cay o ,
cay o .
Si lé ,
si l a .
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e n s es .
I wrote have written

, . A nd ,
i; s u n g m ula t , s u n g m ula t a co .
Thou w ro t e s t hast , I c ao ,
ca
He sh e wrote ha s
, , , Siy a,
Ta yo
{Ca m i
,
Cay o
Sil a ,
P lu p e r f e c t t e n s e .
A CO n a ca s ula t aco
I had written .
s u n g m u la t n a , s u n g m u la t
'
na
ca
Th ou hadst .
Si y é
He ,
s he , it had
"
Yb u y e , .
n
F u t u r e i n d e fi ni t e t e n s e.
I shal l write . A nd; i s us ula t , s us ulat a co .
Thou wilt I c ao ca .
He she i t will , Siy a, siy a .
Tayo tayo
sh all
lCa m i l
, .
, ca m i .
Ca y 0, n ca y é .
Sil a, sil a .
THE V E R B .
—
UM V E R Bs .
97
Fu tu re p e r f e c t t e ns e .
shall have writte n (

A ce i m a c a s ula t , m a ca s ula t a co
s us ula t na , s u s ula t na a co .
Tho u
ca
He , s he , i t will
You ,
ye wi ll
i mp e ra ti v e .
Wri te ( thou )
. . Su m ula t ca
L e t hi m her i t wri te
’
.
, ,
Let us
Write ( ye )
w
. .
L e t the m ri te .
The i m perative lacks the fi rs t person si ngular an d i t requires

the pronouns to be put after it .
V e r b a ls .
Um b
ver al nouns are fo r m e d by p re fi x i n g p ag to t he root . Thus ,
The teachi n g A n g p a g ara l .
The wri ting . A n g p a g s ula t .
The S u b j u nc t i v e .
The subj unctive m ood i s i n Tagalog

as i n E nglish m erely a , ,
syntactical o ne the conj unctio n o r any othe r s pe cial particle an d n o t

, ,
an i nflection expressing the m ood ,

The following two postpositive .
particle s are a m ong others the fittest to express the conditional ( f u

, .
ture co n s e q u e nt o te n s e ) an d the past tenses .
Should would ( signs of the condi

,
Sana di s i n
.
)
t i o n a l te nse
.
,
b b ig co
.
I should like to wri te ut I have I s a n a , i , s u m ula t, n u ni ,t , ual a

, g
no pen . a c on g p a u nla t .
Cl é a ara l dl s m p ro ré o n
{ t s gg
tl ay a
If he would teach I should go there , .
s a éé
followi ng are likewise co nditional particles and expression s
The
used i n con nectio n with the subj unctive m oo d .
If whether Cu n
g
, .
Were i t n ot for . Dan an cu n da nga n , .
A s i f i t were . Cu n sana s a .
P rovided L am ang
d
. .
Provi ed n o t unless , . H o u a g l am ang .

The foll o i ng particles have a w d b itative

u sense .
It ma y b e m a y e m a yhap , b ,
. Sa ca li bag a , Sa ca li , b
cun ag a s a ca li .
Perhaps . M a rahi l .
L est . M ac a, bac a .
w
The follo ing have an a vers a ti ve u nco ndi tio nal sense d .
l lli étE
a g a m é n , c a hi t , b i s la
Though , a ltho u gh .
,
i
t
I n s p i t e of , despi te . M a n m at ay m a n
,
.
Hap pen what m a y . Su c dan .
I n spite of f or all that , . M at ay m at ay m a n , .
A lthough not . Di m a n .
The
four m ai n m oods i nfinitive i m perati ve i ndicative and
b z
, , ,
su j unctive generally recogni ed i n Weste rn languages h ave been here

co nsidered ; but traces o f an o p tati ve m ood i n Ta g a o g m a y also b e ‘
found i n the use o f th e followi ng particles :
N a nasiy a n au a c a hi m a n a u a ri m a
Would to Go d ’ a me n l
g g
.
, ,
l anon g barin a m ahan a u p a n di n

.
g g
.
, , ,
I t would be bette r Di n a sal am at m ahan a ,
Would to G o d that a good success

( M a ha n a j
g m a g ca m i t ca nang m abu
m a y atte nd your en terpri se ,
ti ng ca p a la r a n l
.
M a y y o u have a good luc k !

.
b
.
That thou m ayest at tai n the o j ect U p a n d i n m a c a m tan m o ang h i na

of thy endeavo rs ha m b o m o
lC a
'
h i m a n a u a r i t o lo n fi a n ca nan g Pa ng
M a y Go d a ld the e ! b
i n onu Di o s i .
a divi sion o f the i m perative m ood a p roh ibiti ve o r n egative

As ,
m ood for m ed with the adverb hou a g m a y likewi se be m entioned .
Do not run .
( sing ) . H o u a g tu m a c b o .
Don t do i t do H o u a g m ong g a o i n
'
. . .
The
following u m ve rbs m a y be conj ugated by the student
z
,
for practice like u md m l and s u m t la t

’
.
,
Dri n k ing to d ri nk I n o m- inu m

m i nu m u
g
, .
.
,
A s k ing to a s k fo r
, . H in gii , hu m i n gi .
R eadi ng to read , ,
Bas a b u m a s a
, .
E ntering to 2 0 i n to enter , ,
. P asoc , p u m as o c .
R unn ing to run , . Tacb o, t u m a c b o .
'
Outside t o g o out to co m e o ut
, ,
. L ab as lu m a b as , .
Barter to b u y , . Bil i b u m i ll
, .
E ating to eat , . Cain , c u m a i n .
W a lking to walk , . L ac a d lu m ac a d , .
A rrival to arri ve , . Dati ng d u m a t i n g , .
D eparture to leave to go away , , . A li s , u m a li s .

100 THE TA G A L O G L A N G UA G E .
conjugation of ma y with th e roots ar a l aud bi li follo s

The w ,
to exe m plify the i nstructions given above I n these paradig m s an d .
i n others to follow i t has been dee m ed convenien t to adj oi n a set of

b
other ver al co m pounds of th e sa m e roo t s as are conj ugated wi th a
,
view to gradually prepari ng the student fo r the m o re difficult m atte r

of the v e r al passive for m s b .
V e rb a l c o mp o u n d s .
To buy .
B u m i li .
The thi ng b ough t A n g b i lhi n , n abi l i

b uy
. .
The m on ey wi th which to the ,
wherewith al and also the p erson A n g y b i li

i
.
,
for who m the purchase i s m ade .
The person fro m who m so m ethi n g I

A n g bilh an na b i lhan ( co ntraction s )
i s bought 5
.
,
.
Buyi ng pu rchase ,
P a g b i li . .
He who could m a ke a pu rch ase A n g n a ca b i li

b
. .
He who uys by wholesale o r is l

A n g n a m 1m 111
'
,
cus to m arily engaged i n buying l

The reason for having bought A n g y p i n a m i li
g
. .
The p e rs o n s fro m who m ( if m any ) A n g m an a p i n a m ilha n . .

.
The bu y i ng of a single article i n l

A n g p a m 1m 1li
'
wholesale quantity i
b
.
To sell The thing sold

. M ag il i A n g y p a g b i li . . .
The person to who m A n g p a g b i b i lha n . .
What has been sold A n g y p i n a g b i ll . .
The place where A n g p a m i m i li ha n

b
. .
The two argaining parties

.
A n g m a g ca b i li ha n . .
CO NJ U G A TI O N .
To learn , to study ; to sell . M ag aral ; m ag b ili .
P re s e nt i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e .
n ag b i bi li
I learn ,
sell . N a g a ara l , . a co .
( 1)
Thou le a rn e s t ,
sellest . ca
He s he , it learns ,
sells .
learn , sell .
( 1) The s tu de nt i s
t ha t t he s ub je c t b e i t a n o u n o r a p ro
a lr e a d y a wa re ,
m a y co m e b e f o r e t he v e r b w i th t h e v e rb a l li ga m e nt b e t w e e n : u co i mag uar a
'
n ou n
na g bi bi lz
, , , ,
( ma i To a vo i d u nn e ce s s a ry p r o li x i ty w e u s e o n ly t he f o r m i n t h e i llu s
‘
.
, , ,
tra ti on w hi ch i s on the o the r ha nd b oth the mos t com mo n a nd t he mos t i d i o ma ti c

, , , .
MAG —
PA G V E R BS . 101
p e rf e c t p a s t i n d e fi n t e t e ns
i
Pre s e nt a nd es
I learned sold ; have learned sold , ,

. N ag aa l; n a g b ili
r a co
Thou le a r n e d s t ; s o ld e s t ; hast ca.
He she it learned sold ; h as

, , ,
siy a .
tayo
We
.
ca mi .
You ye ,
cay o .
They si l a.
I had learn e d sold , . N a ca p a g ara l, n a ca p a g b i ll; n a g ara l na ,

n a gb i ll na a co .
Thou hadst ca
He she it had
, ,
na s iy a .
‘V9 11 n n n 2 Tlta 6
ca I l
.
Yo u y e cay e
n n i la
,
Th ey 11 a)
S v
F u tu re i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e .
I shall learn sell , . M a g a ara l, M a g b i b i li a ce .
Thou wil t ca .
He s he , it will siy a .
tayo .
ca m i .
cay o .
sil a .
F u t u re p e rf e c t t e ns e .
5M ac a p a g ara l, m a ca p a gb i li
I shal l have learned sold , .
M agaaral na m a gb i b i li na l a co .
Thou w ilt l
He she i t wi ll
, ,
We shall
ca m i .
You ye ,
w ill
i mp e ra ti v e .
L earn sell ( th ou )
, . . M ag aral , m ag b il i ca .
L e t hi m her i t learn ,
, ,
sell . s 1y a .
L e t us t a yo .
L earn s el l ( ye )
, . . cay o .
L e t the m l e a r n , s ell . sil a .

102 THE TA GAL O G L A N GUA G E .
V e r b a ls .
i i if ns f br this secon d par ticle a re for m ed by p re fi xm g

Thli ve i bal ‘ ' '
nb
‘
‘
p ay to the root an d repeating the fi rst syllable of the latter .
The le a i ni ng , selling . A n g p a g a ara l, p a g b i b i ll .
should be careful to distingu ish a m fro m m a y verbal

Students
n oun s by not failing to use the re d u p i ca ti o n o f the fi rs t syllable o f '
the root and ren dering i t as disti nctly p ro nounced as possi ble for the ,
sa m e difference existi ng h ere i n the m eani ng exis ts too for other ,

'
particles with wh ich these latter m y b e co m bi ned Thus a ny p a y .

,
" “ “
ar a l
“
the teach ng ; ( m y p a y a ar a l the lear n ing ; a ny p a y p a ar a l the
,
i ,
“ "
ordering to teach ; a ny p a yp ap a y a ar a l th e ordering to study ; etc ’
The following roots m ay b e conj ugated by the s tudent like

ma y am l and m a g bi li .
A ccou nt consi deration ; to thi nk I si p ; 1n a g 1si p

’
-
.
, .
G ift t o give
,
. Big ay m a g b i g ay , .
Wi sh to desi re , . N asa m aguasa , .
Outside to take out , . L ab as m a g la b as , .
Departure leave ; to take away , . A li s ; m agalis .
L oad to carry to bea r

, , . Dal a m agda la ,
.
Do ,
t o b ri n g . M agdal a ( l i fe .
To take to ,
to convey
( M agd al a
R e m ittance to send 1 Hat i d

,
m a g ha t i d
.
Con v eying , to convey to (

.
,
.
Order to order , . Otos m a g oto s,

.
Situation to place , . L ag ay , m a g la g ay .
.
Soon f orth ith w M adail p a g da ca

w
.
,
.
, ’
A fter ards . Sac a m a m ea ,

.
Who told you your fr 1en dw as Si ck n ino bag a ng n a g s a b i s a i y o na ang
l iy eng c a i b i g a i m a y s a q u i t?
.
, ,
As
Cu n gaan e ay siy a
As m uch
.
Cu n g a a n o ang p a n gi n oo n ay siy a ri n
As the m aster , so the servant ,
.
ang alila .
Cu n gaan e ang p a g b i b i g ay m o i siy a

A s m uch you give so you will be , ,
,
ri n ang i b i b i g ay s a i y o m a ng pag
g iven
, ,
b i b i g ay iyo
.
s a .
Still even yet ,( adv ) ,

. . Pa .
A lready No longer . . Na . U al a na .
Have you still a grandfather? gM a y roo n p a p o ca y on g nono ?

N o Si r I have no longer a grand
( Hindi )ual a n a a c ong nono
, ,
o
p ,
father , .
A n d have you still a fath er ? g A t a m a m a y r oo n pang cay o? ,
N o Si r neither have I a father

, , . U al a p o ual a ri n a c o ng a m a ,
N either n ot either ( adv ) , . . Hi ndi rin ual a ri n , .
Why ? GB aq u i t ? gb a q u i n ? ga t an b?
Becau se Sa pagea t , at , dahi l s e , a ng
b
.
, ,
Her , gras s Sci s s or s . . Da me Gun tin g . .

104 THE TA GA L O G L A N G U A GE .
i f not a transit i ve an i ntransitive one of those whi ch express an action of

,
a volunta ry ki nd the agent if ani m ate o r rational m ust be u nconsci ous ;

, .
,
an d incapable of volution i t ani m ate I t i s thus th a t any action n o , .

,
m atter how subj ective i t m a y be o riginating i n a n act of the free will

b
,
of t he a gent and any state o r conditio n of eing that i s v o lu n ta ri lv

.
ex perienced by the subj ect cannot be expressed by the ma verb ; a n d ,
th at o n th e contrary transitive verbs i n the conj ugation o f which u m

, ,
an d ma y particles are used when deliberate o r conscious acts of the

agent are to b e m eant m a y ad m i t of ma i f the sa m e are to be r e ,
presented as the result o f chance fortuity o r unconsciousnes s on the part ,
of the agen t .
I n the conj ugation with ma both th e regular change of the fi rst letter
b
,
of the particle and the reduplication of the fi rst sylla le of the root
,
take place as i n ma y verbs The pluperfect and future perfect te nses

b
.
can not e for m ed respectively with n a ca and ma ca without a m iscon

, ,
c e p tl o n a rising as t o wheth er the active o r the passive i s m eant a ,
confusion which happen s because ma is also th e passive parti cle f o r ,
ma ca and thus on ly the fo r m with n a or p a after the past an d si m ple

b
, , ,
future tenses should e used .
Tw o roots p a tay an d té loy are hereafter co nj ugate d w i t h ma to

, ,
further illustrate the m atter .
V e rb a l c o m p o u nd s .
To di e . M a m atay .
The dying death A n g p a g ca m a t ay , ang c a m ata yan ( 1)

‘
.
, .
The cau s e or ti m e of . A n g y ca m a tay .
The place where . A n g c a m atay an ( 1)ang q u i n a m a ta y an

, .
The person who m another s death A n g m a m a ta y a n

affects
.
To e gl to pretend to ( h e o r to
b dil ad e
M a g m a m a tay m a ta y a n .
To sleep ( status ) . M a t olo g .
To go to sleep to sleep purposely , ,

Tu m olo g , m a g tolog
to go to rest
.
Sleeping P a g ca tolo g p a g ca to tolo g p a g ca ca to]o g

‘
-
.
,
The cause . A n g y ca tolo g y p a gt olo g , .
Dull sleepy person one wh o sleep s

, ,
M a p a g tolog , m a tolog u i n
’
m uch
.
Sleeping roo m - . Tol og an .
To allow to sleep Pa to log

’
. .
J
C O N U G A TI O N .
i nf i n i t i v e .
To di e . To sl e ep . M a m at ay . M a tolog .
( 1) N o te ly t d e a t h; ma ta y an de a t h
“
c a ma ta y a n,
“
ca re f u l t he a cce n u a t i o n : ca , .
MA 2 1
'
V E E Bs . 105
Pre s e nt i n d e f i ni t e t e ns e .
I sleep
d ie , .
N a m a m a tay ,
n a to tolo g a co
Tho u diest sleepest , .
He she ,
it d ies sleeps , .
die , s leep .
Pre s e nt p e rfe ct a nd p as t i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
I died , slept ; have died ,

slep t . N m at ay , n a tolo g a co
‘
Thou d i e d s t, s le p te s t ; hast 031

He she i t d ied , ,
slep t ; has
I ha d d ied , sle pt . N a m atay na n a tolo g na or pa

, ,
a co .
,
Thou hadst ca na
He she I t had ,
You , ye
F u t u re i n d e f i n i te t e ns e .
I shall die ,
sleep . M a m a m a tay ,
m a t o t olog a co .
Thou wi lt
He she it , W i ll
You ye , w ill
They
F u t u r e p e r f e c t t e ns e .
I shall have died slept

, . M a m a m a tay na ,
m a to tolog 11a a co
Thou wilt
He she i t will
, ,
We
You ye , will
They
’
( 1)
'
a and pa s l
ho u ld b e p a ce d a f te r t he m o no s y l la bi c p rono u n s a nd b e f o re
t he p o lly s ylla b i c o n e s ,
tv
i n a f fi rm a i e s e n e nc e s t .
i mp e ra t i v e .
Die , sleep ( thou ) . M a m at ay , m a tolo g ca

L e t hi m , her i t ,
di e
L e t us
Die , ( you ye)
,
L et the m
V e rb a l n o u ns .
The ma verbal nou ns are fo r m ed by p re fi x i n g

p a y ca to the
roo t p a y ca ca i s also used ; so m eti m es wi thout any appreciable diff erence
, ,
i n m eaning ; so meti m es i mparting an i ntensi ve sense , .
The dying death , . A n g p a g ca m a tay .
Sleepi ng the sleep A n g p a g ca tolo g ang p a g c a ca to lo g

’
. .
, ,
The
following roo ts a re given fo r the student to p ractice the
conj ugation wi th the particle m a .
m a g eto m .
m a ob ao .
m a t ac o t .
m ahiy a .
m agui n ao .
m a i n i t( a n ) .
m at oua .
m a ha p i s m al a m h ay ,
.
m a s on o g , m a n i nga s .
It see m s i t appears ,
. Ti la , d i ua .
I t see m s like a perso n . Tila ta u o diua ,

ay tau t) .
I t see m s as i f he were co m ing here . Tila n a p a p a r i to siy a .
Tea r to tear,
. G uisi , gu m isi ; pil as , p u m i las .
Cu t to cut
,
. Potol , m a g p oto l .
i nto pieces as glass

M a g b as a g
b ware
.
To reak up
.
] i n t o s p l i n t s a s ‘
l ti m ber .
To break to part ( active )( speaking

M a gp a t i r , m a g la g o t
.
,
of l ines )
.
To m end . M a g ta p i .
To pick up to find ,
. M a g p olo t .
To try to to i ntend ,
. M a g b a n t a m a g a c a la , m agtica
,
.
To look for to seek ,

. H u m ana p .
P ath . L and as .
E lapsed past ,
. L i p as n a .
Since ( conj ) whereas ,

. Ya m a n g y a y a m a n g
, .
Dried faded ,
. Tuy o, lant a .
Track trace vestige

, ,
. Bac as .
M ango G uava . . M anga Bayabas

. .
I t i s wa rm I t i s cool . M ai ni t M a l a mi g. ma guin ao
. .
108 THE TA G A L O G L A N G U A G E .
i t see m s as i f i t were to rn ; but i t i s o nly c u t o u t I s h is aunt willing .
to brea k i nto pieces all the p l a tes gl as ses bottles ang ti n aj a s ? N o Si r , , , ,
she only wishes to break the ti naj a s but she did not thi nk to b reak ,
all the other things Why does not th e servant bring here the cane l
.
g a ve hi m yesterday ( las t) night

- ?
H e is afraid an d asha m ed to co m e
here because he broke the cane i nto spli nts
,
Who parted th i s stri ng ? .
John s servan t s aun t parted that and m any other string s

'
A r e yo u
’
m ending so m e thing there ? I a m m e nd ing shi rts and shoe s Does .
a vi r tuous m a n try to see k so m eth ing ? A v irtuous m a n tries to seek

the path ( the way ) to Heaven I s the water i n the sea war m o r .
cool ? The water i n the sea i s cool H o w old i s al ready your eldest .
.
sister? She passes already thirty six years What p rice i s rice sold a t -
.
at present? I t i s sold at fi v e dollars the bushel What do you say to m e ? .
I s a y to you good m o rni ng because i t i s m o rni ng n o w ; when noon i s

,
past I shall bi d yo u good af ternoon ; and then w hen n ight co m es i n

,
I shall say goo d eve ning u p to m i d nig ht Whic h do y o u cons ider a s -

.
the best o f all fruits ? I co nside r the banan a the best fruit ; b ut so m e
people say the m ango i s the best fru it of a ll What i s the rice plan t ? .
R ice is a plant that has an ear I s m a n to die ? A ll m e n will d ie all

.
,
plants will be burnt ( faded d ried )and all t he stars will be extin g u ished
, .
N I N E TE E N TH L E S SO N . YC A L A B I N G S I Y A M N A P A G A R A L .
TH E P A S S I V E V O I C E .
The for m s of conj ugation given i n foregoing lessons are not th e

m ost usual in Tagalog They are the vague exp ressio n o f actions
.
abstract i n notio n and so m e w hat indeter m inate as to o bj ect m an ner , ,
place o r purpose Wh e n the actio n bears u p o n a deter m inate o bj ect

.
o r special purpose Tagalog verbs generally assu m e o ther for m s o f

,
conj ugation called passives though they a re rathe r to be con sidered,
as verbal case nou ns which a r e m ade b y the red uplicati o n of a syll

able capable of ex pressing te nse a nd with whi c h m ore i s so m eti m es
, ,
said than i s possible with the E nglis h verb These s o called passive s .
-
are three but on e of the m i s co m m on to the other t w o

,
N o t all .
roots ho w ever ad m it freely of the three fo r m s although m ost tran s

, , ,
i t i v e verbs and all those exp ressing an action by whi ch t he su bj ect

d ra w s s o m e t hi n g to hi m self do
,
N o r i s i t to b e thought tha t they
,
.
can b e used i ndiscri m inately with a verb ad m itti ng of all three fo r ,
i t i s j ust i n thei r b ei ng pro p erly and distinc tly e m ployed that the
real d i f fi culty o f m aste ri ng t he la n gu a ge consists .
They are develo ped fro m the verbal co m pound ( i n the case o f ,
u m verbs fro m the verbal root ) by using i n various ways the part
, ,
.
i c le tin km to fo r m an un m od i fied pa s sive ; a n d by associating i n n e v

e r hz
-
with the prefix y o n one side and with the s uffix u m ha n

'
n , ,
-
on the other side to for m so m eti m es the sa m e u n m od ified pas s i ve

, , ,
above m enti oned ; an d so m e ti m es a special passive to which certai n ,
circu m sta nces of instru m ent place e tc h ave been added ( 1) A s , . .
( 1) The Ta ga lo g par ti c le s i a hi n , d a ha n s eem to b u t t he M a la ga s i

be
z
- -
p a ls i v e i n c re m e n s i na t an a , in w hi c h t he a i s m u t e or l
e li d i b e ; a nd y i t he i i k e e r ba l v
THE P A SSI V E VO I CE 109
the co m ponent particle plays so i m portan t a part i n d isting uish i ng one

for m fro m t he othe r we have as a m atter of expediency adopted , , ,
the designatio ns of i n y a n passi ve i n reference to th e sa m e, , ,
I n passive the firs t o f t hese for m s here considered i s used i n

, ,
re fere nce to a s ubj ect i n the no m i nat i ve which i s ge ne rally th e d i ,

'
~
rect co m ple m en t o f the ve rb i n the active voice a nd is n ot o nly th e ,
p revalent fo r m b u t i s too t he m ost ana logo us to the E nglish passi ve

, ,
b eing li ke this i napplicable to i ntransi tive or rather to what i s

, .
,
by na ti ves considered a s i n trans itive verbs I t i s u sed with all

‘
ca u sa ti ve ver b s and with th e l argest portion of the in tran si ti ve o n es ;

here too d ue allowance bein g m ade fo r the light i n whi ch Ta g a log
,
vie w s the perfor m ance o f certai n action s I t will be we ll t o s t a te .
h ere that verbs of givi ng selling i ns tructing and th e like a re j ust , , ,
those which are dep rived o f th i s kind of pass i ve a feature m ost likely ,
to stri ke a n E uropean m i nd when i t i s con sidered th at th ese verbs ,
requi t e t w o co m ple m ents i n m os t other language s .
I n m a y be p refixed i n fi x e d o r s u f fi x e d ; hi n i s always s u f fi x e d , ,
.
Whe n i n hi n i s ap plied to for m the passive of a m verbs i n

-
i s prefixed to the fi rs t vowe l of the root o r i nse rted betwee n the ,
con sonant and the fi rst vowel for the si m ple present an d th e past ,
tense . I n o r hi n as the case m a y b e i s s u ffi x e d to the root i n t he

, ,
si m ple future and i m perative hi n bein g only applied to roots endin g ,
i n a grave ly accented vo w el The fi rst syllable of the root sh ould

b e reduplicated i n the regular way for t he si m ple present and the
, ,
si m ple future ten ses .
To fo r m t he plu p erfect and the future per f ect ten se n a a n d ,
m a the passi ve fo r m s fo r n a ca and ma ca

, shou ld be re specti vely , , ,
prefixed to the ve rbal root this b esides the su p ple t ory way o f us i ng ,
t he ad v erb n a after the respective s i m ple tenses .
The sa m e as i n the acti v e the subj ec t i n the passive fo r m ,
m a y indiscri m i nate ly co m e before o r af t er the verb he re also th e

, , , , ,
ver b al liga m ent b eing i n t roduced wh en th e subj ec t co m es fir s t : a n y

c q a i ny a man
'
zz
n i bi y co o r i n i é bi y on a n
’
i m
“
m fathe r loved
gy m e
is
, a
y g a n
, g a a ,y ,
A s said elsewhere the Tagalog passive sen tence re q ui res the ,
a gent to be put i n the o i o r gen t ve case and it is to render

p s s e s v e i i ,
t h i s pec u li ari t y m o re noticeable to t he s tudent s eye tha t the arrange m ent

e x h1b 1t e d b the paradig m s below and all others to follo w has been ado pted
y .
N o w i f th e agent is represented b y a p ronoun eithe r fo r m o f th e

, ,
possessive case
m ay be used ; the p re pos itive of
postp o sitive after wi thou t t he verbal liga m ent as see n i n th e exa m p les o f
, ,
course befo re and the
,
, , ,
t he conj uga t io n belo w the latter co nstruction being ho w ever ,

m o re idio m , ,
atic and usual I f the a gent i s represen t ed by a noun or a sentence the

.
,
postposi t ive for m should only b e e m ployed sa y i ng fo r i n sta n ce i n i i bi y , , ,

“
né P e d r o S i J u a na o r a t J a a n a i i n i i bi y n i P e d r o
, ,
Jane i s loved by , ,
P eter y m n a y a n ti n a ng D i as a ny p a y bi bi y ay n a ng li mos s a m a hi hi r ap o r
’
, , ,
“
a ny p a y bi bi y a y n a ny li mos s a m a in/Li m p a y y ni n a y a n ti n a ng D i o s to '
,
"
g i v e ( the g i v i ng of) al m s to the i n digen t i s re w arded b y G o d .
M a la g a s i p a s s i v e i n c r e m e n t t h a t i s o n ly t o b e c o n s i d e r e d a s t he a b b r e i a t i o n o f t n e
, v
fi rs t t w o Th e m o s t i m p o r ta n t d i f f e r e n ce a s t o t h e i r u s e i n t h e t w o la n g u a g e s
.
,
.
co ns i s t s i n t he M a a g a s i i n s tr u m e n t a l f o r m w i h a n a a n r e je c t i n g t h e p a s s t v e t
i n c re m e n t i n d i n , w h e n i n Ta g a lo g t he s e t w o p a r t i c le s jo m t o f o r m a s p e c i a l
ki nd o f p as s i v e A w i d e r d 1f f e r e n ce t a k e s p la c e w i t h t h e M a la g a s i i , f o r , b e s i d e s
.
p a r t i n g co m p a n y w i t h i n a i n i s o n lv u s e d i n t he i m p e ra t i e , w h 1le t h e s a me v
p a r t i c e l
i n Ta g a lo g r e q u i r e s t he a s s o c i a t i o n o f i n f o r t h e p r e s e n t a n d t h e p a s t
,
a nd i s u s e d w i t h e v e ry t e n s e .
i 10 THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A G E .
Tw o verbs u mi bi y and g u ma n ti are hereafter conj ugated i n

u m , ,
the in passi ve fo r m to fully illustrate the foregoi ng m s tru ct i on s .
V e rb a l c o mp o u nd s .
To wi h to want to love
s , , .
Wishing .
To be loved ( w i lli ngly cheerfully ) , ,

I big i n z i b i g u i n
-
to he wished
.
To reward to gi ve an equ i va lent for G u m an ti

'
. .
,
R ewarding P a g g anti
-
b
. .
To e rewarded to be given an
l G a n t 1h1n
,
e qui valent f o r
.
To rewa rd wi th I g a n tl
b
. .
To substitute for s u stituted for , . Pa g g a n t iha n

-
,
napag -
g a n t i ha n .
J
i nfi n i t i v e
To be loved . Ibig -
i nz i b i g u i n .
P re s e nt i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e .
A q u i ng i n i i bi g ,
CO
I y e ng
Ca n i y ang
A ting
‘
11 3 5
t A m i ng
.
I u y Ong
Ca n i lan g
'
Pr e s e nt p e rfe ct a nd p a s t i n d e fi n i t e t e ns es .
wa s , w e re ; ha s , ha s t have been loved by

, me . A q u i n g i n i b i g i n i b ig , co .
thee l
( you 1 Iy e ng mo
’
-
hi m i ,
her lCa n i y an g
0
, niy a
it J .
5
l
l
ye ’
( I O
'
nj 7
n gO
ou
y .
the m . Ca n i lang
V e rb a l .
The state of bei ng loved A n g i b i gn i n

'
. .
i nfi ni t i v e .
To be rewarded . G a n t i hi n .
Pre s e nt i nd e fi ni t e te ns e .
i s are re w arded by me . A q u i n g g u i n a g a n ti g u i n a g a nti co , .
thee you ,
. I y Ong mo
hi m her i t , . Ca n i y an g
A ting
A m ing
I n y On g
Ca n fl an g
Pre s e nt p e rf e ct a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e te ns e s .
was wast wert were ; h a s h a st

,
h a ve been re w arded by m e
, ,
.
, ,
l A q u i ng g uin a nti , guinanti co .
do do do do do do t hee you ,
. I y e ng
hi m he r i t , ,
. Ca n i y ang
A ting .
A m i ng
11 11
11 11 11 11 11 11 y e ,
yo u . I n y b ng
11 11 11 11 11
the m . Ca n i lhn g
P lu p e r f e c t te ns e .
ha dhadst been )A u i n maganti guinanti na n a a n tl co guinanti co

q g ; g na
re w arded by m e l , , .
thee l ,
do do do do do ou I y e ng mo na 11 .
y .
hi m
he r . Ca m i / En g m ya , ,,
na n iy a
1t .
n a ti n .
na m i n
H M H H N
.
(
011
11 11 11 1. ”
d e i
the m
r .
lny b ng
Ca n i lang
n lny o ,
'
n i la n il a
,
. ,
F u tu re i n d e fi ni t e te ns e .
shall sh alt will wilt be rewarded l

, , ,
A q u i ng g a g a n t i hi n , g a g a n ti hi n co
by m e
.
11 11
thee yo u ,
I y On g
11 11
hi m her I t
11 , , . Ca n i y an g
S A ting
( A m ing
11 11 11 I n y b ng
Ca n l la n g
1 1
11 11 11
_THE PA SSI V E V OI CE
.
'
. 113 ?
F u tu r e p e rf e c t t e ns e .
hall shalt
S , ,
w 1li W i lt h ave
ihi n c on a
' '
,
A q u i n g m aganti , g a g a n tihi n na ; m aganti co g a gan t
b e e n re w a rd e d
.
,
by m e .
( you )
t he e
do do ’
I y On g mo na .
hi m
he r ,
Ca n i y an g n 1y a, n a niy a .
it .
us s n a tl g ,
9, H H
39
H ’i
N )9
{
t
i I ny b ng i H
’i i ’i
i mpe rati v e .
L et be rewarded by th ee you , . I y e n g g a n t i hi n , g a n t ihi n m o

h i m her it Ca n i y a n g
‘
, ,
us . A ting
ye y o u I n y On g
'
, .
the m . Ca n i lan g
V e rb a l .
The ~
s ta te o f b ein g rewarded . A ng g a n t i h i n .
The followi ng u m verbs are o ffered for the studen t s practice ,
I n us mg th e pass ive conj ugatio n ,
To b uy
to e bough t , b . B u m ili b i lhi n ( cont )
, . .
To catch to be caug ht ,
.
D u m a q u i p , da q u i p i n d a -
in .
To write to be written , . Su m ula t ; s u la t i n .
To do to m ake ; to be done m ade

, ,
G u m a u a;
To taste to be ta sted , . L u m a s a p la s a pi n , .
To s m ell t o be s m elled ,
. U m a m dy a m oy i n , .
To sigh t to spy ; to be S ighted , . Tu m a nao ; t a n a o i n .
To feel to touch ; t o be touched

, . H u m i p o ; hi p o i n .
To call out to to be called , . Ta m anag ta u a gu i n , .
To answer to reply ; to be replied ;

Su m a g o t , s a g otm
,
to ( the person ) i
.
. .
To a sk to i nqui re ; to be asked
b Tu m a no n g ; ta n o n gi n
, ,
i nquired a out ( the person )

.
. .
To receive to acce p t ; to be re ,
Tu m a n g a p ta n g a p m
ce i v e d
.
,
.
What is your servant writing ? g A n o a n g s i n u s u l a t n ang i y On g alila ?

He i s writing the letters you gave Si n u s ula t u iy a an g m a n a s ulat n a y i g b
h i m thi s m orning
, . n i g ay m o s a caniy a ca n gi na n o m a g a
g .
2 25
6 1 10
55 g u i n a g a u a d 1y é n n i P ede
What i s F rederic d oing ther e?
10
F rederi c i s doing wh at hi s m aster G u i n a ga u a u i F ederi co a n g yn i u to s
o rde re d hi m to do . . na n g ca n i y an g p a n gi n oo n s e e a ni y a § .
15
To keep co m pany to . Su m a m a .
To acco m pany each other M ags a m a

b
. .
To e put together . Pa g s a m a hi n .
f a t h e r g o d I na a m
Person s ta n dm g f o r a ,
father
.
m other go d I n ii na
3
,
m other
.
son go dchild I n a a n a c ,
. .
b ro ther Q u i n a ca p a ti d . .
father or
m o t h e r in Bi n i b i a n an -
.
l law .
Who m are you calling for ? Si n o ang t i n a tau a g m o?

é
I a m calling for m y servant who Ti n a tau a g co ang a q u i n g alila na , , p a
is never at ho m e rating ual a siy a s a b ahay
w b
.
N ephe niece
,
. Pa m a n g q u i ng lalaqui abaye , .
N I N E TE E N TH E X E RCI SE .
b
What i s eing tasted by yo u? The o ranges that m y frien d
gave m e are ei ng t asted by m eb Whi ch of these t w o flowers will
b
be s m elled y m y u ncle s n iece ? The white flo w e r will e s m elled’
b
by your uncle s n iece What i s the sea m an on the lookou t for? He
’
.
i s o n the lookout fo r hi s Ship Was m y godchi ld touch ed by th e

b
.
physician ? I t was touched y the physician and the latt er said that ,
'
i ts sicknes s i s n o t a serious one By who m a m I called ? Thou art

w
.
called by your ife Why i s n ot our servant called by he r? Your

.
'
servant went out ; that i s the reason w hy yo u are being called Who m .
i s the teacher replying to ? ( Who i s bei ng replied to by the teacher?)

The teacher is replied to y the pupi l Wh o wi ll b e in quired a bout b .
by m y nephew? The pri est wi ll be i n qui red about by your nephew

b
.
Had m y book ee n accepted when I was rewarded by t hy father?

b
Your book had ee n accepted by m y father before you were re ward ed
b y hi m Who is love d by m y sister? Her go d m other i s lo v ed y her b
b
. .
What has been ought by m y m other? The n i p a h ouse has been

bought by her Is the footpad ( robber) caught ? He h as already b ee n
b b
.
caught Will this prayer e wri t ten y anybody ? That p rayer wil l be
w b
.
ri t t e n y m e .
TW E N TI E TH L E S S O N YC A D A L A U A N G P O U O N G PA G A R A L . .
THE P A SS I V E V O I CE .
( co nti nu e d )
A lt hough ma y
verbs have p a y fo r the passive this pa rticle i s ,
however dropped with m os t of the m the a m verbs pass ive for m of , ?
conj ugatio n being ge n eral ly co m m on to bot h the a m and the ma y ones .
When p a y i s retained i n cases and for p u rp os e s t o be ex

db w
, . s
'
plained i n s ubsequent lessons i n is i nserte e t een p e nd t a g th us , ,

THE T A G A L O G L A N G U A GE .
F u t u re i nd e f i ni te t e ns e
. shal l; W 111 be taken out by m e .
11 11
thee , you .
hi m ,
her it , .
Fu tu r e p e r f e c t t e ns e.
W 1“h ave
g tgbem
shall bee a n
,
u e
M a a li s co . aa li s in C
o na .
d d d
.
'
do do o o o thee you
n
, .
i mp e ra t i v e .
Let be taken out by t h ee . A li s i n ~
mo .
1 hi m .
1
l he r , it . 1
us
V e rb a l .
The state of bein g 1.1m .

m . Ang alisi o .
i nf i n i t i v e .
To be j oined . Pa g s a m a hi n .
Pre s e nt i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e .
i s are j oined by
,
me . Pi n a g s a s a ma co .
thee , you .
h i m , her , it .
P re s e nt p e rf e ct a nd pa s t i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
O was w ere ; h
,
as , b
have een j oined
Pm a g s a m a co
by m e .
.
thee yo u , .
hi m her i t , , .
uS
’
n o i a s l O
THE PA SSI
. V E VO I CE . 117
ha d been j oi ned by me . N a p ags ama co ,

pi nagsa m a co na .
thee you ,
.
hi m her i t , ,
.
'
Fu t ure i nd e f i ni te t e ns e .
S hall wi ll be j oined by
,
me . Pa g s a s a m a hi n co
th ee you ,
.
h i m , ti e r , it .
F u tu re p e rf e ct t e ns e .
shall ,
w ill have b een j oin ed
me . N a p ags a ma co ,
a
p g s a s a ma hin co na .
do do do do do thee you , .
hi m her it
, ,
.
i m p e ra t i v e .
Let be j oined by thee you , . Pa s a m a hi n mo

hi m he r , ,
it .
us .
ye you , .
the m .
V e rb a l .
The state of being j oined . A ng p a g s a m a hi n .
The
following may verbs are offered fo r the student s prac ice
‘
t
i n using the passive .
To dress to put o n clothes ; to ]

,
Ma g d a m i t ; da m t i a ( c o nt )
be put on J
. .
To tell to say ; to b e said

, M a g s a b l; s a b i hi n .
To c arry to be carried ,
M agdal a da i ni u ( con t ) .
,
. .
To put i n order to arrange to di s e n

M a g hus a y ; h u s a y i n
, ,
tangle ; to b e put i n o rder

.
b
.
To put i n front of each o ther to e

M ag tapat p a g ta p a ti n ,
_
t i n fro nt of each other
.
,
p u
b d
.
To wrap up to e wrappe u p ,
M a g b alo t b a lo t i n .
, .
To steal to b e stole n M a g n aca o n a ca o i n o r p a g nac a o i n

b
, ,
.
,
To praise to e p raised ,
M ag p uri p u ri hi n .
, .
To explain to be explained ,
M agsays ay s a ys a y i n , .
To cu t to be cut M ag p dt ol p o toli n ; or p o tli n ( cont

j
, .
, , .
To oin to gather to heap to

l M a g ti p on ; t i p o n i n
b d
, , ,
thron g ; to e gathere etc

. .
d w d w
, .
ra n earer to b e ra n n e arer
Ma gla p i t pagla p i ti n
,
to e ach oth e r
, .
.
To attain . M a g ca m i t .
Vessel or Ship of any description Sa s a c y an

b
~
. .
Bank border Beach , shore

, . D a la m p as i g Bay ay . . .
L on g S
.hort M ahaba
. M ai oli . .
L arge , b road Wide , extensive M al apad

. M a lo u an g . . .
Straight , narrow M a q u i tid m aquipot

.
, .
Tight . M aquipot .
F i sh . I s da .
R ight ( place ) L eft ( place )

. Canan Caliu a . .
What shall i say to Joh n ? g A n o bag a ang s a s a b i hi n co cay Juan ?

1 m o s a can i y a na t 1n a tau a g co
222
11
Tell hi m that I a m calli n g for hi m J
111
]
.
E no u gh ! ( interj ect ) Siy al .
I t i s already enough Siy a n a ! .

“
E nough 1 Do not spe a k any lo n ger Siy a n a a ng s a li ta l .
TWE N TI E TH E XE R CI SE .
w
When ill the ca rp e nte r t a ke a ay the lu m er h e o u ght so me
‘
w b b
d ays ago ? It will be taken a ay by hi m to m orro w ( H e will take w
w
-
.
i t away to m orrow) W hy h a s it not b e en carried a ay by hi m alread y ?

.
Bec use i t was sorted by hi m in boards of a n equal length and

b re h Is it yet bei ng sorted ? N o i t was already sorted By ho m w
b b b
. .
,
’
will thi s shi rt e put o n ? That Shirt will e put o n y o ur neighbor s

daughter : Why i s i t not put o n y her m other ? It i s not put o n by b
he r m other because i t i s Sho rt a nd tight for her Will th at which
b
, .
you explained to m e yesterday m orning e s tated by m e ( shall I

state e tc )to your br o ther i n la ? Be i t sai d y yo u to hi m ( Yes -
w b
b d b
-
. .
,
say it to hi m ) When do you wish t hat i t e sai y m e ( do yo u

wish m e to tell it)to hi m? Be it told y you ( tell i t)to hi m after
"
b
b b
,
m y goi ng away What i s ei ng rought over ( here ) b y the m a n who

.
was at the beach ? The fish that has been sto len by o u r tailor s boy
'
b
i s eing b rought o v e r ( here ) by hi m Where i s i t b eing carried by
b w
.
hi m now ? I t i s being carried y hi m to the bank When ill

“
b
.
the m oney I gave to you r m other i n law e b rought by her? ( When

b
-
will your m other i n la w bring m e the m oney I gave her) - -

? It will e
brought t o you by her next week ( S he will bri ng i t to you etc )
b b
.
.
Whi ch ooks are to be put i n o rder y the ser v ant : yours or

t hose of your teacher? Bot h m i ne an d m y teach er s are to b e ( will ’
b e ) put in order by the servant What was done by the b aker s boy .
'
( did the baker s boy d id ) before i n the m

’
orning ? T he clothes i n m y
b
wardro e were put ( he put) i n order by hi m H o w ( i n what order )
b
.
do you wish the pictures i n Jane s roo m to e put ? I wish ( it i s

’
my wish ) that they b e p ut facing each other A r e the seats as w e lL

b
.
to e put i n front of each other? Yes , let the m b e put i n front

of each o ther by P eter What as stolen yesterday i n t he garde n w
w
.
by our boy ? M y sister s flowers ere s tolen ( he s tole) by hi m ; they ’
were first ta ken by h i m an d the n rap p ed i n a piece of cloth w

b b
.
Have so m e other things ever een s tolen y hi m ? The m oney o n

b
the ta le or i n m y pocket has often been s tolen y hi m Ho is b . w
i t then that he has been so often praised by you ? He has been
w w b
, ,
praised by m e at a ti me h en I as not yet a ware of his eing

a thief What are those peop le praise for ? Those p eo ple a re d
12 0 THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A G E .
.
th e m ad m i t of the i n passive for m alt hough m ost do F o r su ch , .
E n glish tran sitive verbs a s can not find m eans of expressio n i n t he

i n Tagalog passive for m recou rse i s had to the passive m iddle ,
voices on e of which i t i s the purpose o f th e p resent lesson to illustrate

,
.
N o w these suppleto ry o r m iddl e voices whi ch so m eti m es like the

b
.
, , ,
i n passive are used i n referen ce to a gra m m atical su j ect which i s

,
the direct co m ple m ent of t he verb i n th e a ctive voi ce ; are m ore f rs

'
quently used however i n reference to a subj ect i ndicativ e of certai n

, ,
a t tri b u t e s of i n stru m ent cause pl a ce etc and i t i s a m atter of consider

~
, , , .
,
'
able difficulty for begi nners to know whi ch of t hese for m s i s to be used
an d for what purpose A s the subj ect i s one of t he greatest i m port .
a n ce i t i s dee m ed necessary to devise so m e m ean s by wh i ch the d if

,
fi c u lti e s m a y be obvi ated which th e studen t i s m ost l k e ly to en counter

b
,
i n discovering the proper passive for m to e used i n each particular

case . I n trying to clear the way for hi m to be able t o d isc ri m in ate
and select the right p assive a syste m of expression has been resorted ,
to which while preserving i h i ts a bbrevi a ted for m the greatest analogy

’
, , ,
to the E nglish an d Ta galog idio m s and dispensing with longer e x p la n

a n a to ry for m s will i t i s believed serve well this i ntended purpose
, , , .
The device here adopted fo r this expression wi ll be fo u nd m erely

to consi s t i n this :
Where a passive voice is to b e in dicate d i n Ta g alog analogous
to the E nglish o ne the verb will be used i n the passive 0 11 the E nglish ,
Side of the vocabulary l hus

'
.
,
To receive to be received . . T a n a ng a p t a n g a p i n ,
.
To give to be gi v en
,
. M a g b i g ay y b i g ay , .
To look at to be looked at , . Tu m i ngi n tingn an ( cont , .

)
.
By the foregoing a rrange m ent t he student m ust unders tand tha t ,

“
the gra m m atical subj ect i n refe rence to th e verbs i n the passive to
“ ”
receive to give an d to look at i s the sa m e both i n E nglish and
,
’ “
,
i n Ta galog or i n other words ; the di rect co m ple m ent of th e verb to “

, ,
i n the active voice i n the passive i s to be referred to i n

b
. .
, , , ,
”
Tag alog by i n ; that of to give by y ; a nd t hat of to look at
, y an “
,
“
,
.
Where the y m iddle pas sive voice i s us e d i n reference to the .
i nstru m ent wi th which o r the m ean s by which the actio n is perfor m ed , , ,

.
this will be indicated by using th e E ngl ish verb i n th e active fo r m .
”
coupled to the p reposi tion s wi th
“
through o r any other wh ich m a y ,
“
, .
appea r suitable to denote the in stru m en t o r m ean s a ccording to the ,
n ature of t he action i n E ngli sh ; and where y i s u sed to d enote the ‘
reason cause m otive etc ; by the E n g lish verb i n the active for m coupled
, , , .
”
to by reason of
“ “
because of o r such other exp ression as m a y best
, ,
suit the kind o f a ction Thus .

,
To sei z
e to sei e with , z . D u m a q u i p, y d a q u i p .
To reach to attain ; to reach to at

tain through
,
.
,
) U m a bu t , j ab u t
7
.
To praise to praise because of , . M agpuri y p a gp u ri , .
To die to die of fro m

, , . M a m at ay , y c a m a tay .
The
preceding a rran g e m ent o r m anner of expressio n 1s used to
i ndicate to the studen t that i n constructing th e Ta galog sentence with
this for m of passive t he i nstru m e n t m eans or the reason as the case , , ,
m a y be i s to be put I n the no m inative that i s to say ; i s to b e co m e

, , ,
t he gra m m atic al sub j ect no m atter if the reason m otive etc i ‘
.
, , , ,
I R
N ST U M E N TA L PA SSI V E MI DDL E VO I CE . 12 1
represen ted by a senten ce ; fo r here too the u sing of the article , ,
serves to i ndicate the subj ect Se e an exa m ple of thi s I n the followi ng .
sentence : M y b rother I n law praises his m aster so that he m a y be

‘
,
given the m oney he has asked fro m hi m o r m ore i n a c o r d a n c e with ,
the Ta galog i dio m : the reason for m y brother i n law to prai se hi s m aster i s
“ -
j ust that he m a y be given the m on ey etc a ny yp i n a yp u m n a ng ba y a o co ‘
1 ai n ( or a ny z z
bi y a y z a ny p a y b bz z
, ,
8 a c a n i y a ny p a n y i n é o bi g g y ay
‘
8 a ca n i y a ) n a ng s a la p i hi n i ny u i n z
a ny
ny u z
-
, , ,
o r
'
i h
’
i i n i y a n i to
‘
y rt s a ca n y a n , , .
Y passive i s also so m eti m es u sed i n reference to the so called

dative of acquisition a gra m m ati ca l case which generally co m es afte r ,
t he E nglish p reposition
“
for To i ndicate this the verb will be used ,
i n the acti ve voice coupled to th e s a m e pre p osition as : ,
To buy , to b uy for . B u m i li y b i li , .
Buy for m e . Yb i li m o a co .
To cook to cook fo r , . M a g lo to y pa g lo t o , .
G e t cooked fo r hi m . Yp a g lo to m o siy a .
Where th e a n m iddle passive voice i s used i n reference to the

attributi ve dative o r indi rect co m ple m ent o f th e sentence t hi s w ill ,
be i ndicated by using the E nglish verb in the acti ve voice wi th t he

”
preposi tion to ; an d where the re f erence i s to th e locative th at i s
“
,
to say to the place fo r the perfo r m ance o f the action it wi l l be

, ,
“
denoted i n E ngli sh by using the verb i n the acti ve with a t in ,
’ “
,
’
“
upo n etc as m a y best sui t t he kind of action
,
.
,
.
A n so m e ti m es refers to the place perso n or thi ng in dicating ,
th e origi n or source of s u p ply fro m wh ich so m ething i s dr a wn .
This will be indi cated by the E nglis h verb i n th e active coupled to

the preposition fro m
“
The followi ng words and ph rases are believed .
to i llustrate the m atter :

To give to gi v e to,
. M a g b i gay big y an ( cont ) ,
-
. .
To con ceal to conceal in . . M agtago p a g ta g u a n ,

.
To s tep to stop at,

. H u m i n t o bi ntu a n , .
To buy to b u y fro m
,
. B u m i li bilh an ( cont )
,
. .
Students
should not conside r the pla n he re ado pted of using
t he E nglish verb i n the active cou pled with certain preposition s to
tra n slate the Tagalog pass ive as m erely a fan ciful o r a rbitrary ar
ra n ge m en t but as one eing closely allied to the sense that i t i s
,
b
thereby intended to i mp art .
With regard to the use of said preposition s i t should be born e ,
i n m ind that sa m e are i nherent i n th e above m entioned passive for m s ,
an d th at i f the latter are e m ployed i n reference to any gra m m a t ical

subj ect other t han t he on e i n reference to whi ch they ought to be
used such preposition s should b e expressed Students it i s beli eve d
,
.
, ,
wil l thereby the ai ded an d m uch ti m e spared i n thei r trying to find

g
out the ri ht passive to be e m ployed i n each pa rticul a r case .
The passive voice a s a bo v e s aid m a y i n th e maj o rity of cases

'
, , ,
assu m e a verbal i nstru m en tal for m which it m a y be sai d corresponds , ,
to the in stru m ental ablative case o f n oun s by p re fi x i n g the particle ,
p i ( 1) i n all tenses ( excep t the pluperfect and t h e future perfect

,
) ,
( 1) I t b e e n d e e m ed n e c e s s a r y t o u s e 11 i r s t e a d o f i t hr o u g h o u t t hi s
ha s
g r a mm a r w he n e v e r t h e i n s t r u m e n t a l p a s s i v e v o i c e i s t o b e i n d i ca t e d ; f o r , o t he r w i s e ,
t he s t u d e n t co u ld n o t w e ll kn o w i n t he ca s e o f co m p o u n d s li k e y n i u tos y n a lay ay , ,
16
THE TA GA L O G L A N G U A G E .
to th e ver i n the i n passive fo r m b F o r the present an the past . d

tenses y i i s to he prefixed to the sa m e i n passive o nes of a m
,
-
and ma y verbs ( w hen the latter d ro p p a y ); for the i m perative to ,
the verbal root ; and f o r the si m ple future to what would be th e regul a r ,
i n passive with i n hi n d ro p p ed Wi th those ma y verbs i n which p a y i s

-
retained y i is to be prefi xed to the v e rba l p a ssi ve co m pound i n the

,
i m perative and i n the si m ple future F o r the pluperfect and the future .
perfect tenses the peculiarity i s to b e m en tioned of the particle y i

,
-
being in serted between the pass ive pre fi xes n a an d ma an d the verbal
roo t o r the verbal passive co m pound acco rdi ng respectivel y to whether
, , , ,
the ver b i s a a m one o r a m a y o ne which d rops p ay i n the passive , ,
o r whether i t is a m a y verb i n w hi ch p a y is retained .
This for m as a b ove said i s so m eti m es use d i n refere nce to a

, ,
subj ect i n the no m inative which as i n the case o f the i n passive , ,
for m i s the direct co m ple m ent of the verb I n the active voice an d i t
, ,
is then that i t be a rs the greates t possible analogy to the E nglish pass

i ve M ost co m m only ho w ever i t fo r m s a ecu lia r Ta galog vo i ce
.
p , , ,
gra m atically but not logically a passi v e pointi ng o u t th e i nstru m ent

, , ,
with wh ich the reason cause o r m ean s by whi ch the acti on i s perfor m ed ;
b
, ,
such instru m ent reason cause o r m eans the re y beco m ing the gra m
, ,
m a t i c a l subj ect of the sentence and being pu t in th e n o m i n a tive especia ll y ,
whe n t he se n tence i ncludes besides a d rect co m ple m ent a nother i ndi re ct , ,
one ex p ressive of any such instru m e nt etc , . .
I t i s the pass ive for m to be used i n reference to the di rect

b
o j ect o f such verbs as i n E nglish requi re t w o co m ple m ents an d .
with those denoting m oral o r m a terial acts by which the subj ect gives
up o r pa rts wi th so m ething ; fo r as it were the p e r f or m er i s i n Ta , ,
galog considered to be passive i n relatio n to suc h actio ns as m ake

hi m reli nquish the control of so m ething ei the r m aterially or m orally , ,
the thi ng o r though t th u s reli nquishe d o r p a rted co m pany wi th being

considered as the reason for suc h actions a nd the reby beco m ing t he
gra m m atical subj ect of the p assive sente nce .
I n the y i passive conj ugatio n of the three

-
ve rbs which is
give n hereafter to practically i llustrate th e above i nstruction s the for m ,
i s used i n re f erence to the i nstru m ent i n o ne case an d i n reference ,
to the direct co m ple m ent i n the o ther t w o o f which o ne is o f a ma y ,
verb p rese rving the a m verbs passive for m and the o ther o f a like ,
verb i n whi ch p a y i s retai ned - .
V e rb a l c o m p o u nd s
sei z
be
.
To ed Da q u i p i n
. .
To allow one s self to be cough t M a g p a da q u i t:

z
.
To be o rdered to be sei ed Y p a da q u i p . .
To be thrown aw a y Yt a p o n . .
Do ( intensive ) . Y p a g ta p o n .
To throw upo n Ta p o n a n . .
Do ( i ntensive ) . Pa g t a p o n a n .
To give n oti ce to P a g b a li ta a n . .
To be reported Y p a g b a li ta y b a li ta
.
, , yp a g m a li t a .
To have to be i n possession o f ;
M a g ca ba h ta
,
n ews to be aware of , s .
To report to each other M a g b a li ta a n .

'
To go out i n search of n ews M a q u i ba li t a . .
i n a li s e t c , w h i c h o f t he
, . t wo pas s iv e s i n or i was m e a nt The r e a s o n h a v i ng t h u s .
b e e n e x p la i n e d w hi c h le d t he a u t ho r to d e p a r t s o me w ha t f ro m t he r e g u la r s p e l li n g ,
he w i ll b e g la d t o s ee t ha t s t u d e n t s w r i te 13 a n d n o t 3 1 thi s Ta g a lo g p a r ti c l e ( Se e ,
a ls o i n t he Or t ho g ra p hy , f o o tn o te , p a g e
12 4 THE TA G A L O G L AN G U A G E .
i m p e r a t i ve .
z
Sei e ( thou ) Yd a q u i p m o
L e t hi m, her it ,
sei z
e
us
V e rb a l .
The action of sei z

ing wi th . A n g y da q u i p .
I nf i n i t i ve .
To be th rown aw a y . Yta p o n .
P re s e nt i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e
is a re th row n by me .
1 1 thee you ,
.
1 s a 1 hi m her i t .
, .
s r us .
P re s e nt p e rf e ct a nd p a s t i n d e fi n i t e t e ns es .
was were ; has h ave been th rown by

,
me . Yti na p o n co
1 1 thee you ,
. 1 mo .
hi m her , ,
I t .
1 US .
1 you ye ,
.
1 the m .
ha d been thro w n bv m e . N a y ta p o n co , y ti n a p o n co na .
1 1 1 1 thee you ,
. 1 mo 1
1 1 1 1 h i m her ,
1t na niy a
n a ti n
1 us .
na m i n
.
1 you ye , . 1
1 n i ny o .
the m . D il a .
F u tu re i nd e fi ni t e te ns e .
S hall will be thrown by me . Y ta ta p o n co .
thee you ,
. mo .
h i m her i t , ,
. niy a .
n a ti n .
n a m in .
n i ny b .
n il a .
I R
N ST U M E N TA L P A SSI V E MI DD L E V oI CE 12 5
F u t u re p e r f e c t t e ns e .
. shall wi ll have een th rown by

,
b me . M a y ta p o n co , y ta ta p o n co n a .
thee you ,
.
hi m ber it , ,
.
I mp e r a t i v e .
Let b e th ro w n b y thee . Y ta p o n m o
hi m , her i t ,
.
I nfi ni t i ve
To b e repo rted . I p a gb a li t a .
Pre s e nt i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e
i s are repor ted by m e

, . Yp i n a g b a b a li ta co
thee ,
you .
hi m , h er it , .
US .
you ye , .
the m .
P re s e nt p e rf e ct a nd p a s t i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e s .
was , w ere ; has have been reported by me . Yp i n a g b a li ta co

you th ee ,
.
hi m he r it , ,
.
us .
you ye ,
.
th e m .
1
,
ha d b e e n reported y m e b N a y p a g b a li ta co
.
, y p i n a g b a li ta co na .
thee you ,
.
hi m her i t , , .
12 6 THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A G E .
F u t u r e i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e .
shall will e reported y

,
b b me . Yp a gb a b a li ta co .
thee you ,
. mo
hi m her i t, , .
Fu t u re p e rf e c t t e n s e .
shall w ill have een b

b
,
repor ted y m e . M ay p a gb a li ta co , yp g
a b a b a li ta co na .
thee you , . mo mo
hi m he r i t , , . n a niy a .
u ati n .
n a m in .
n i ny o .
n il a.
I mpe ra ti v e .
L et . be re p orte d by thee . Yp a gba li ta m o .
hi m , he r,
’
it . niy a .
us n a nn .
n i nyo .
n il a .
V e rb a l .
The state of b e ing reporte d . A ng y p a gb a li ta .
The
student i s re q uired to conj ugate i n the y i passive for m -
t he followi n g verbs the ele m en t whic h i s i n each to beco m e the

,
subj ect of the sentence being indicated by using on the E ngli sh side
those for m s of expression which have been adopted for the pu rpo se .
To g i ve to , be given . M a g b i gay y b i g ay , .
T0 0 t s ca tts d ; t0 be S OW
51
3b t igd }M M a g ha SI c y ha 81c , m a g s ab o g , y s ab o g
,
s ca t e
.
,
6 ) e .
To place to be placed , a g la g ay y la g ay .
, .
To kill to kill with P u ma t ay y p a t ay

b b
, .
, .
To
2
uy to buy with to uy for
R u ml li y b i n
, , .
( for the sake )

“
f ,
o .
To fl a g e lla t e to fi ag e lla te with H u ma m p as y ha mp as

, .
, .
To sew to sew with , Tu ma hi y ta hi .

, .
To weep to m ourn ; to weep to

Tu ma n gi s ; y ta n gi s
i
, ,
m ourn because of
.
b
.
To consent to to c o ns e n t to y
P u m a y a g y p ay a g
}
,
reason of
.
,
.
TW E N TY —
S E CO N D L E SSO N .
YC A D A L A U A N G P O U O , T, D A L AU A N G PA G A R A L .
L O CA L P A S S I V E M I D D L E V O I C E .
The passive voice m a y likewi se assu m e a verbal local fo r m

which so m eti m e s refers to the dative and so m eti m es to the local ablative
of nouns This kind of passive i t wi ll be seen also refers so m e
.
,
ti m es to the direct obj ect of nouns .
The conj ugation i s m ade by s u f fi x i n g a n or ha n as the case ,
m a y be to the root or co m pound i n all the tenses

,
The i n passive .
particle i s preserved th roughout except where i t is a suffi x that is , ,
to say i n the infinitive i m perative and si m ple future where i n o r hi n

, , , ,
is d ropped an d replaced respecti vely by a n o r ha n , ,
Sentences with a verb i n the local passive fo r m are constructed

by putting the perso n or place the E nglish i ndirect obj ect i n the , ,
no m inative I n cases w here the a n ha n passive refers to the di rect

.
-
co m ple m ent i t i s th i s o f course that should be put i n the no m i native

, , , .
While further explanations wi l l be give n i n the proper place ,
the attention o f the student is fo r the m o m ent called to the following

paradig m s of fou r verbs i n the conj uga tion o f whi ch the a n passive
,
i s used each i n reference to on e of these fou r different subj ects .
V e rb a l c o m p o u nd s
To borrow To borrow fro m . U m uta ng U ta n ga n . . .
Do o n account of
. Yti ta n g . .
To be deeply i n d e b ed M a g ca uta n g . .
To be to Pa g c a u ta n ga n . .
DO . by reason of Y p a g ca uta n g , .
To lend To be lent To len d to

. M a g p a uta n g. Yp a g uta n g Pa u ta ngi n . . . .
To give To be given M a g b i g ay Yb i g ay
b b
. . . .
To go a out giving To e given I

M a mi g ay Yp a nn g a y
.
i n a continuous way i
. .
Cover li d screen Ta q u i p
b
, ,
To place oneself etween so as to

thereby hide so m e thing
To cover oneself
Tu m a q u i p
M a g da q u i p
.
.
i .
To cover To be covered M a gda q u i p Da cp an ( co nt )

Yla g ay z
. . . . .
To put To be p u t
. M a g la g ay. a
yp g g yla a . .
To order to put To order to be )

M agpa 1a gay Y 1agay
.
i
a a
put .
p gp . .
J
I nf i n i t i v e .
To borrow fro m .
Ota n ga n .
L O CA L PA SSI V E MI D DL E VO I CE 12 9
Pre s e nt i nd e fi n i t e t e n s e .
I b orrow fro m . I n o o ta n
g an co .
Thou b o rro w e s t mo .
He she i t borrows
, , niy a .
We b orro w
n a ti n
i n ai mi
.
n.
You ye ,
n ny o .
They nil a .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e f i ni t e t e ns e s .
I b orrowed , h av e b orro wed fro m . I n o ta n g an co .
Thou bo rro w e d t s hast mo

i t b o rro ed
.
,
He ,
s he , w , has n iy a .
n a ti n .
n ami n .
mi ny o .
n il a .
I had b orro we d fro m . N a o ta nga n co , i n ota nga n co n a .
Tho u hadst mo , mo na .
He she i t had
, , niy a , na n i ya .
n a ti n , n a ti n
We .
na m in , n a m in .
You ye ,
n i n y o, n i ny o .
They nil a , n il a ,
F u tu re i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e .
I shall orro b w fro m . Oota n ga n co .
Tho u wilt 1 1 mo .
He she i t W ill
, , niy a .
B atu
We shall }
n am i n
w ill
.
You ye , n i ny o .
They 1 n il a .
F u t u re p e rf e c t t e n s e .
I shall have orrowed fro m b . M a ot a nga n co , o o ta n ga n co n a .
Thou W ilt m o, mo
He she it will
, , n ly a .
n a ti n ,
We
You ye
shall
w i ll
{mnai nymin o,
,
They n il a ,
Borrow ( thou) fro m Ota n ga n mo

b
. . .
L e t hi m , he r it orrow
, n iy a .
L et u s n a ti n .
Borrow ( ye ) . n i ny b .
Let the m borro w ni l a .

130 THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A G E .
V e rb a l .
The actio n of borrowi ng fro m —

A ng o ta u ga n .
I n fi ni t i v e
To give to . B ig u i an zb i g y an .
I giv e to Bi n i b i g u i an co .
Thou givest mo
He , she , it gives
We
You ye ,
They
P re s e nt p e rf e ct a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e n s es .
I gave ,
have given to . Bi n i g u i a n co
Thou gavest ,
hast
He , she , it gave ,
has
We '
You ye ,
They
I had given to . N a b i g u i an co ,
b i n i g u i an co n a .
Thou h adst mo mo
He she i t had
, , ,
na n iy a .
( n a ti n
We
.
1na m i n .
You ye ,
n i ny o .
They nil a .
F u t u re i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e.
I shall give to . Bi b i g u i an co .
Thou wi lt mo
He she i t will
‘
F u t u re pe rf e c t te ns e .
I shall have given to . M a b i g u i an co , b i b i g u i an co n a .
Thou wilt mo , mo
He she it will
, , n iy a , na n iy a .
u atin n a ti n ,
We shall ,
na m i n , na m i n .
You ye , will n i n y o, n i ny o .
They n il a , ni l a .
132 THE TA GA L O G L A N GUA GE .
I sh all have put upon . M a p a g la gu i an co , a

p g la lag ui an co na f
Thou wilt mo mo
He s he it ill
, w na niy a '
n a ti n f
{ nam i n .
n i ny o .
nil a .
I mp e ra ti v e .
Pu t ( thou ) upon . P a g la g u i an mo
L e t hi m her it put
,
us
Pu t (y e)
L et the m put
V e rb a l .
The action of putting upon . A ng p a g la g u i an .
I nfi n i t i v e .
To be covered ( )
‘
. I a op an . cont .
P re s e nt i n d e fi n i t e t e ns e .
is are covered by me . Ti na ta cp an co
‘
thee you , . mo .
hi m her it , ,
. niy a .
n a ti n
{n a mi n i ny o
n
.
.
nil a .
P r e s e nt p e r f e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e s .
Wa s , were ; ,
b
has have een covered by me . Ti n acp an co .
thee you ,
.
hi m her i t , , .
ha d b een covered by m e . N a ta cp an co t i n a cp an co na .
thee you , . mo
1 h i m her i t , ,
. na n iy a .
1 na ti n «
us
.
n ami n .
1 1 1 you ye , . ni n y o .
1 the m . 1 1 nil au
L O CA L PA SSI V E M I DDL E VO I CE . 133
shall ,
will be co vered by me . Ta ta cp an co .
1 1
1 thee you ,
. mo .
1 hi m her i t , , . niy a .
u at i n
us .
n am i n
.
you ye , . mi ny o .
the m . n il a .
shall will have been covered by me M a ta cp an co ta ta cp an co na

‘
.
.
, , .
i t he e
mo
,
y
( 011
hi m ,
her , na n iy a .
it .
us
n a ml n
.
you ye , . ni nyb
‘
1
1 t he m . 01
13 .
I mp e ra t i v e .
Let be covere d by thee .
hi m , he r, it
2:
.
118 .
ye yo u , .
the m .
V e rb a l .
The state of b ei ng covered . A n g t ac p an .
The student shou ld con jugate the

. following roots i n the local
pa s sive fo rm i n referen ce to such subj ect an d for such sense as are
b
,
i ndicated y the for m s of expression used o n the E nglish side i n .
accordance with the plan adopted for t he purpo se .
To r e c e 1v e , to I e ce i v e fro m . Tu m a n g a p ta ng a p a n , .
To b uy , to b u y fro m B u m i li bilh an ( cont )

.
, .
To steal to steal fro m

,
M a g n ac a o p a g n a ca u a n
.
,
.
To si n g to si n g i n honor of
,
M a g a u i t p a g a u i ta n .
,
.
To perceive to note ; to be p e r ,
M a g ma s i d;
ce i v e d to be noted
b
, .
To restore to give ack ; to restore

M a g s a o li ; s a o ha n z p a g s a o li a n
b
’
,
t o to give ack to
.
.
,
To say to tell ; to say to to tell to

, M a g s abi ; p a g s a b i ba n , ,
To look a t to be looked at , Tu m i ngi tingn an ( co nt ) .

,
. .
To p t la y to throw Op en ; to
b gs én g g ,M a g b u cas ; b u c s an ( cont )
,
d
. .
To scour t o be scoured H u m u g as bugasan

b b bb
, .
,
To ru to e ru ed , Cu m o s c Os c o s co s i n zco s cos a n
.
, .
Where 18 my hat? gSa a n n a r Oo n ang s a m b al i lo co ?

Yti na p o n co s e ha la m a n a n , p i n a g ta
I thre w it i nto the garden pu nan co ang . ha la m a n a n , ang hala
m anan ang p i n a g ta p u n a n co
b
.
To which child di d you gi ve that dA li ng ata ang b i n i g u i an m o niy ang

m oney? s a la p i ng iy an ?
I gave i t to Peter the son of our Si Pedro a n g anac nang a m ing c a a p id

b
, ,
neighbour ahay ang b i n i g u i an co

b
.
.
,
Where h as your daughter een gSaa n s i n u ga ta n b a g a ang anac m ong

wounded ? abaye ? b
b w
She has not een ou nded but on Siy a i hi nd i n a s u g a t a n cu n i b a g cus , , , , ,
d ,
the contrary she wounded her s i n u g a ta n n iy a s a OlO ang c a n i y an g
b
,
rother o n the head ca p a t i d n a lalaqui . .
Who m are you writing to ? gSi n o bag a ang sinulatan m o?

I a m writing three letters to my Si n u s u la ta n co s i me nang ta t n g .
m other . s ulat .
To go upstairs Pu m a nhi c m an b i o
d
.
.
,
G ran father G rand son N o n o= n u n o A po '
d
- -
. .
G reat gran s on
-
d
A p o s a tubod ( literally gran son fro m
the knee) .
.
.
,
-
G reat great gran s o n

- -
d
A p o s a t a la mp a ca n ( lit grand son fro m
the foot plan t )
-
.
.
. .
Qui ll Ba gii i s
w z
. .
Country m an fello ci ti en Ca b a b a y a n
,
-
. .
Seed .Wi re Bingh i Gauat

. . .
Wi do er w i ow , wd
Bau O ba lo
lalaqui
ab a y e.
E
ib
.
w
.
O ner To protect
. M ay a n U m a m p On . . .
To stan d To spring to one s feet

. M atay o Tu m a y o . .
To se t up To c o nsu m e . M a g ta y o U m o b Os . . .
TW E N TY SE CON D E X E R CI SE
w
ro m ho m does the m erchant orro h is m oney ? He doe s not
F b w
b orrow i t fro m anybo dy he buys goods fro m other m erchants bu t b e
b
, ,
orrowed yesterday so m e m oney fro m one of his country m en Who

w
.
i s he who m the baker ill borrow m oney f ro m? He will bo rrow so m e

fro m hi s uncle s carpenters Had you already orrowed any m oney fro m
’
. b
P eter when I arrived here ? N o when you arrived here I had n o t yet , ,
borro wed anyth ing fro m P eter Who m s hall I borro w fro m ? Borrow .
fro m your aunt Who m have you stolen thi s book fro m ? I stole thi s
.
book fro m nobody i t was given m e by m y sister How Often di d you , .
steal an ything fro m your parents ? Three ti m es How m u ch at a ti m e? .
Twice twenty fi v e cents ; and on ce one dollar

,
—
What do you wish , .
m e to note ? I wish you to note thi s I a m teaching ( showing ) you .
What i s i t? That happiness here on B earth soon passes away Who .
will sing to night? A lfred s daughter wil l sing to night I n whose honor
-
'
-
.
will She sing ? She will sing i n honor of her father Where did the .
servant put that cheese ? The table was the place wher e he pu t i t
b
.
To who m did thei r

'
rother wri te ? I t was his children to who m he

wrote In which house do you wish to go upstai rs ? I t i s I n your house
.
that I will go upstairs What i s your f a ther s father? M y father s f a .

' ’
ther i s my grandfather A n d you r grandfather s son s son ? He i s his

’
.
“ ”
will denote the acquisitive actio n ; a n d thus fro m p a li t e x cha ng e fi , ,
p u ma li t
“
to re ceive
,
i n exchange for I f i t i s of such a ki nd a s .
to i m ply correlatio n between the parties i t will the n deno te that ,
action only which i s the p rovince o f the agent to perfor m to i nd uce .
“
the other party i nto the co rrelative o ne ; and th us fro m M a y quarrel , ,
i ng ; u mau a y to assail
“
I f i n the root the sense of a change of place
, .
exists tha t verb i s for m ed whic h expresses the m otion which the
b
,
subj ect rings to pass as a result of a conscious effort of hi s will

b
,
and no t that Of the applicatio n of th e m o tio n to so m e external O j ect .
” "
Thus f ro m lap i t
,
“ “
nearing ; lu map i t to approach
, , .
When a pplied to a root of i nstru m ent the a m verb as i n the

w
, ,
case o f a ver b o f m otio n will exp res s the orking w it h such i n s ,
t ru m e n t n ot the effect which i s the result o f i ts application to a

,
m atter of thi ng Thu s f ro m li cop “

gi m let ; lu mi cop “
t o bore
b
. .
, .
, , ,
I f the root i s an a dverb i ts co m i n a tio n with u m will for m

b
,
a ver which i ndicates an a ction all ied i n sen se to th at which i s

found i n the adver Thus fro m la lo “
m o re ;b lu ma lo
.
“
to exceed ”
, , ,
.
The p receding general re m arks are s upple m e nted with the

z
follo w ing i te mi ed state m ent of actions to which th e particle i s applied .
denoting qualities capa le of bei ng assi m ilated by the

R oots b
agent th rough a slow process m a y be co nj ugated by a m to i ndicate ,
the conversio n when still i n p rogress Um i s therefore the particle

b
,
.
,
used i n for m ing the so called L ati n i ncepti ve o r i nchoative ver s i n 300 .
The shirt i s eco mm g Wh1te b '
P u ng m u p u tI ang aro b
( whitens )
.
b
.
The flower eca m e r e d ( reddened ) P u n g mu la ang bulac lac

b
-
. . .
The water wi ll eco m e cold . L a la m i g ang t ubig .
The b roth ha I ( b eco me hot .

N a ca 1n 1t ang sab ao ;
n a ang sab ao .
( better )u n g mm i t
L alaqu i na s i P edro ( bet ter) naca

P eter will have grown tall .
laqu i n a
.
The patien t i s slo w ly recovering G u ng m ag a li n g ang m a y s a q u i t

b
. .
My b z
n iece i s eco m i ng la y .
A n g p a m a n gq u i n cong abaye tung
i m a ta ma d or n a gu i g u i ng ta m ad
N atives are b eco m i ng i ndustrious g
.
, ,
. A n g m an a Tagalog a y s u ng m i s i p a g .
P riests are growi ng co ards w A n g m a n ge pare d d u n g m o dOu a g

Th wo m en will b eco m e wise g b
.
.
.
e . D u d un o n g ang m an a ba aye .
This stri n g i s beco m ing long I t ong li I b i d na it o i h u n g m a ha b a

’
g
.
.
, ,
A m ericans will grow ri cher . Ya y a m a n pa ang m an a A m ericano .
So m e
adver s capa le of an i n ce ptive b b m eaning m a y be like
W i se conj ugated i n this sen se .
M a ry
’
L u ng m a la lo ang c a b a n a la n ui M ari a
s virtue i s sur p a s s i n g Jane s '
s a cay Juana .
A ctions through whic h the agent gai ns control of so m ething .
To b uy To overtake to co m e at
.
, . B u m i li U m ab u tz u m ab ot
. .
To ta ke To receive to accept o f
.
, . Cu m u ha Tu m a n ga p . .
To borrow To co m e across to fin d
.
, . U m Ota n g Su m o m p on g . .
To go out to m eet to m eet so m e

b odyto welco m e
,
,
.
Su m a lOb o n g .
To catch to plunder
z
, . H u m u li .
To sei e To fi lch to p urlo i n

.
, .
Du ma qu i p . U momi t .
U SE OF THE V E R B t L PA R TI CL E UM .
Vol untary acts of m otion .
To ru n . To leap . Tu m a c b o . Tu m a lOn .
To j u mp To flee . L u m o cs o . Tu m a n a n t u m a c as ,
.
To wal k . To s wi m . L u m ac a d . L u m a n go y .
To s top . To cease . Tu m a ha n . H u m i m p ay .
P urposely perfor m ed acts of posture .
To stand u p to spri ng to o ne s feet Tu m i n dig

’
. .
,
To lie dow n To lean on H u m i ga H u m ili g

. . . .
To crouch to s tan d o n hands and 1

Tu m o u a r
,
feet
.
To place oneself face downwards Du m a p a tu m a o b .

,
.
To pla ce onesel f on one s back Tu m i ha y a

’
. .
To place oneself with o ne s face 1

Tu m a p a t
ahead to place oneself i n front of i
.
.
,
To place oneself on one s side Tu m a g u i li d

’
. .
The steady progress i n self p rod uci ng

growi ng p rocesses if -
,
up- ,
represented as contin uous and not i nter m ite nt o r recurri ng when ,
thei r full develop m ent has n ot yet been acco m pl ished .
To put forth shoots . Su m i b o l .
To be growi ng up ( plants ) . . Tu m uh o .
To bud To spro ut . U m u s b o ng . Su m u p li n g .
A t m ospheric occurrences ,
provided the root word does not begi n
in b .
To be windy to be blowing , .
To r a i n to be raining , .
To thunde r to b e th underi ng ,
.
To lighten to be ligh tening ,
To s t rike ( lightening) . .
A strono m i cal
tr a nsitions when not other w ise expressed and th e
change i s rep resented a s going o n p ro vided the root does n o t begi n ,
with b .
To be growing li gh t to be sunny , . U m arao .
To be growing late ( to t a ke a n .
af t ernoon luncheon ) .
To be gro w i ng dark .
To rise ( the sun o r any other lu m

t Sum i ca t , su m i l a ng
.
i no u s body )
.
To set to be setting ( any lu m i nous

lL
,
heave n ly bodies ) to launch i nto , ,

u m u b og .
to dive .
To set to be setting to get ( so m e

L u mon o d
, ,
one )d rowned
.
b
.
To e g rowing dark . Su m i li m d n m i li m
, .
To eclipse . L u m i m li m lu m a ho , .
( l) Th e
tu d e n t w i ll e a s i lv
. u nd e r s t a n d t h a t t h e
s r oo w ord of a ll t he s e t
v e rb s i s t ha t p a r t w hi ch r e m a i ns a f t e r a ki ng a w a y t h e v e rb a l p a r t i c le a n d t ha t t ,
q i s ch a n g e d i nt o 0 b e f o r e a , O, u Thu s t h e r o o t o f c u mi dla t i s q u i dla t . .
18
Destructive an d i n d ictive acts purposely execute d .
To kill to extinguish
,
.
To destroy .
To set fire to to co m m it arson ,

.
To la v waste to exter m inate

d
.
,
To woun To pinch . .
To cudgel to whip ,
.
To break i nto pieces

b
.
To split to reak i nto spli nts

,
.
Controlla b le
or unco n trollable but c on s cio u s ly p e rfo r m ed acts of
b
, ,
the odily function s and life s upporting actions ,

-
.
To w eep To sob Tu m a n gi s Hu mi b ic
z
. . . .
To laugh To snee e Tu m au a B u m a hI n
’
. . . .
To blo w o ne s nose To eat Su m i n ga Cu m ai n

’
. . . .
To drink To s p i t U m i no m L u m u ra
b w
. . . .
To it e To s w allo
. To glut . . Cu m a ga t . L u ma mo n . L u m a go c .
TW E N TY —
TH I R D E X E R CI SE .
Who is growing wealthier? The m e rchant i s gro w ing wealthie r .
H a s the stuff of m y rousers beco m e shru n ke n? N o o n the co ntrary i t has

'
, ,
stretched out Who is g rowi ng older ? . M y fathe r i s growi ng olde r .
I s A nthon y s so n growing taller? N o h e i s not growing t aller bu t he i s

’
, ,
beco m ing stronger Have Ta g als beco m e wealthier? N O they h ave .

,
not yet beco m e wealthier When wi ll they beco m e w ealthier ? Whe n .
they will beco m e m ore i ndustrio us Has your si ste r received already .
the letters ? She has no t yet received the letters What are A m eric a ns .
buying ? They are b uyi n g lands Who has borrowed m oney ? This .
m a n has borro w ed m oney Who m are you going to m eet? I a m going to .
m eet m y uncle Did you c atch any m ouse ? I caugh t one Why do yo u .
purloi n m oney ? I do not purloin i t i s the servant who purloins Why i s

b
.
,
your daughter running? She i s ru nni n g because she v i s he s to catch a i rd

b
.
,
What i s thei r rother doing ? H e i s leapi ng into the sea Why a re th e .
children j u m ping ? They are not j u m ping they are only walking ? Does ,
the sailor k no w ho w to s w i m ? H e knows ho w to swi m Why do you .
not cease sleeping? Because I went to bed at mi d night yesterday H o w .
a re the plants i n you r g arden n o w ? They shoot and the trees o n th e ,
bank o f the ri v er are b ud d ing How was the weather yesterday ? Ye ster .
d a y it rai ned thundered ligh tened and flash ed and the sun d i d not shi ne
, , , , .
Where are you going at p rese nt ? I a m going ho m e because i t i s grow ,
ing dark and the m oo n wil l not Shi n e b e f o re m i d night Why does ° -
your brother kill birds exter m i nate plants wound swine bre a k plates , , ,
and spli t canes ? Because he is cruel he I S often whi pped by m y fa t h ,
er Why is the child c ryi ng ? B cause he has bee n p inched j ust a

. e
,
I n o m e n t ago he was laughi n g while eating drinking and s w allo w ing

, , ,
f r u i ts .
(I) . I f w ha t ca u s e s d e s t ru c ti o n i s an i n a n i m a t e a g e n t , th e r oo t is to
b e co nju g a te d w i t h m a ca . A y li ndol a y n a ca s i r a s a s i mba ha n ,
n
“
the e ar thq u a ke
d e s tr o y e d t he c hu r c h .
w h ile ma y y a mot is to cure on esel f ; la ma bas fro m la bas

-
“
outside ; , ,
“
is “
to go out ; but ma y la bas i s to draw out so m ethi ng Though
“ '
:
, .
“
to go ou t i s an action of an i ntransitive kind 1t ad m its however of vol , ,
i ti o n an d there f ore takes u m; ma ti s o r to s tu m ble ; is an act ,
i m porting m otion and o f an in t ransiti ve kind but is no t a v oluntary

z
,
one a n d cann o t o n this account be verbali ed by u m Uma bot ex

, , .
p resses the reaching o f so m ething by the agent for h i m self ; m a y a bot i s

his h andin g of so m ething over to o thers
"
P u ma li t ma l t “
to exchange .
-
z '
for ; the actio n considered as to the act o f th e subj ect i n receiving ;

“
ma y p a li t to excha n ge f o r
, the action looked upon as to the a c t ,
of the subj ect i n giving u p .
" “
Sa “
in at
,
o r better to say th e locati ve case of a noun
,
’
, , ,
of place m a y take a m to denote per m anen t stay thereat N a s a points

, .
out to an occasional o r tran sito ry ; s a ng ma s a to a per m anen t s tay , , .
G od i s e verywhere o r on everythi n g , , . A n g Dios a y s u n g m a s a la ha t

Jesus Chri st is i n Heaven Si J e s u c ri s to i s u ng m a s a langi t
g
. .
, ,
A m erican s settle down i n the P hi A n g m an a A m e ri ca n o i s u n g ma s , ,

a
li p p i n e s . F ili pi n as .
Um i s ever a pplie d to a root eginni ng wi th m partially

n b , ,
because the co m ing together of the two la b ials could not well be
pronounced and partially because verbal roots W i t h m m a y be con
, ,
s i de r e d as contracted u m verbs co m ing fro m o r m olded after the ,
Javanese language with the vowel a suppressed So m e roots begi n

, .
ni ng with b an d p ( tw o consonants which are fre q uently found con .
verted i nto m i n that language and are too so m eti m es i n Tagalog) ,
m a y assu m e a Javanese for m an d be conjugated i n a so m ewh at

devious m ann er consi stent for the m ost however with th e regular , , ,
for m So m e other roots i t will be seen Show th e sa m e o r si m ila r

b
.
, ,
deviations e ither by reaso n of euphony o r y reason of so me a dvance

, ,
i n the sense they m a y thus acquire ove r that they h ave when a p
pearing i n the regular fo r m
b
.
As already said the pas s ive for m s o f a m and ma y ver s are

alike whenever the change i n the actio n expressed by the verb ,
with the one o r the o ther o f these particles i s n ot s uch as to ,
requi re the using of p a y the passi ve particle fo r m a y ,

.
Bring out so m e food ge ne rally

M agalis or m a gla b as ca nang cani n
.
boiled rice )
.
Take ou t thi s n ail . A li s i n m o it ong paco .
Pa g a li s i n ( or better y p a a li s )m o iy ang
Order those p ictures to be taken out
2 g
. ,
m an a lar auan ( or cu a dr o , Sp )
.
. .
Passional o f the subj ect expressed i n t he active

c i rc u m s
'
a n ce s
voice of the verb by m a m a y be co nj uga t ed i n the a m verbs passive ,
for m to express the purposely perfor m ed ca usative actio n

,
.
J ane is afraid t N a ta taco t s i Juana si ,

J uana 1 nata
.
t acot .
F righten her m ake her fear Ta co ti n m o s iy a

b
. .
,
N a g o g o to m ang ca ayo ang ca b a y o , i ,

The horse i s hungry
,
n a g og o to m
.
Starve i t m ake i t feel hungry G o to m i n m o siy a

w
.
, .
Why d id you r sister al lo the B

d qa u i t bag a i n Ohao n ang i y Ong ca pa
po u ltry to p e rish f ro m thi rs t ? d
ti na bb
a a ye a ng ma nge ma noc ?
I RR E GU L A R I TI E S I N THE CO N J U G A TI ON OF UM V E R BS 14 1
The i nfiniti v e of this for m I S fre quen tly used subs ta n ti vely .
N o ad m ittance , entrance i s p ro
j
-
Yp i n a g b ab é ma l ang p u m as o c
hi bi te d
.
To tho s
ig if ii 23 322513?
y a 6 1 e
w i hs re .(3 i A ng “ w i ll fl y [ tw e e t m 8 a m a y b i ll
9 1
TW E N TY —
FOU R TH E X E R CI SE .
Who acco m panies you ? N obody acco m panies m e n o w j us t a ,
m o m en t ago I a co m p a n i e d John who w a s speaking to h is sister sh e

, , ,
j oined Pete r who was scolding hi s friend I s your fe m ale cousi n

, .
doing so m ething ? She s m ells flowers and tastes frui ts Is the .
ser v ant o f Peter doing so m ething? He is co m bing the ch ildren Who

b
.
w i ll e a t the d ru m ? M y son wi ll beat t he dru m while hi s friend ,
shears horses What wil l you do wi th that spear? I wil l spear boars
b
. .
Who s tabbed M agellan ? N ati ves of Ce u s tab bed h i m A re the carpen t

ers doi ng so m ething ? So m e of the m a re ad z
.
ing so m e others are plan ing ,

.
Where i s Ou r L o rd G o d? G o d is everywhere and Hi s precious So n i s i n

Heaven at His right Why did not you r servan t take o ut any seats ?
.
He i s taking so m e out but he has alrea dy taken out these tables Do

,
.
you want an y thing else ? Yes order hi m to take out all the plates
b
,
that were o n the table efore What shall I d o to the dogs ? F righte n .
the m for the cats are hungry an d fear the m Why d oes m y m aster
, .
chide m e ? He ch ides you because yo u cause the dogs to s u fi e r thi rst ,
a nd the cats to s ta rve .
TW E N TY F I F TH L E S S O N —
.
YC A D A L A U A N G P O U O, T, L I M A N G PA G A R A L .
I R R E G U L A R I TI E S I N T H E J
C O N U G A TI O N O F UM V ERB S .
As
said i n the precedi ng lesson certai n u m verb s m a y devi ate ,
fro m the re gular conj ugatio n and assu m e for m s which are considered
m ore eu p ho n ious tha n the regular ones This wil l be fou n d to be the .
case wit h m os t dissyllabic verbal roots beginni ng with a vowel or with ,
b ezy p and t i n any of whic h cases a i s prefi xed to t he vo w el ;

,
b ez
, , ,
, y p 5
1 .change ,to n y
,
being adj oined i n the case of 0 4; fo r the
,
2
prese nt and the past tense ; m co m es befo re the vowel and the above ,
m entioned consonants change to m for the i m perative ; but the regular

b
,
fo r m m a y like w ise e u sed

b
.
So m eti m es i t i s n ot a considera t i o n of euphony

,
ut rather the ,
necessi ty of d rawing a d istinctio n between the si m ple and the i ntens ive
senses that causes ce rtai n u m ve rbs to appear i n his i rreg u lar for m
V ,
b
i n ie w o f the i m possi ili ty of ma y the i ntensifying p ar t icle bei ng
,
d
, ,
a pplie i n cases where sa m e i s e m loyed to change the subj ective

bj
,
o r t he acq ui s i ti v e acti on, a s e xp r e s s e by u m to the O ective or sur -

, ,
a
rendering one denoted by ma y L e t the root ta cbo e taken as an . b

exa m ple : tu ma cbb to run ; ( si m ple sense) ma y ta cbb to run ; ei ther by
“ “ ’
b
,
m any people o r i f y a si m ple perso n i n so m e vigo rous way o r for so m e

, ,
p u rpose Here there i s nothi ng to preve n t ma y o f playing freely i ts

.
i ntensifying role for bo th the action w ith a m and th e one with ma y

z
,
a re of the sa m e nature The case fo r i nstance with d i s and bi l

‘
z
.
, ,
wi ll be very di ff erent o n account o f u ma li s and ba mi l expressing actions

‘
b z z
,
of a differen t kind of those expressed y ma y a l s an d ma y bi l a

’ ‘
d ifi e re n c e wh ich p revents ma y fro m displaying its intensive power When

b
.
i t hap pen s that ma y i s th u s de arred fro m ren deri ng i ntensive the

action expressed by the a m verb recourse i s b a d to m a n p a n the part .
,
-
i cle of frequentatives fo r i ntensio n ; and it i s i n this way that we have

w
, ,
n a n a les n a mi mi li e tc a s uppletory i n tensive m ea ns hich i s but a

’
, , ,
p a lliative fo r m o f the m a n p a n fo r m o f co nj u g atio n

b
-
.
Tw o ver s are herea f te r conj ugate d i n t hi s i rregular way to Sho w

b
t he a ove deviati on s .
To return ,
to go b ack . U mo u i .
P re s e nt i n d e fi n i te t e ns e .
I , thou he etc
, , .
,
we ,
you , they , N o no u i a c o, ca siy a tayo ca m i cay o
, , , , ,
return etc ,
sil a .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e s .
I tho u he e tc we you they re

, , , , .
, N oui a co, ca siy a tay o ca mi
, , , ,
t ay o ,
t u rned etc ; have etc retu rned

, , . . sil a
I mp e ra t i v e .
R eturn , let hi m ,
e tc .
,
us the m return
,
. M oui ca , siy a tayo cay o sil a
, , ,
.
To go for to fetc h to call for, , . Cu m a On .
Pr e s e nt i nd e fi ni t e te ns e .
I , thou h e , , etc .
,
we ,
you ,
they N a n ga n ga On a c o, ca siy a ta yo ca mi
, , , ,
fetch etc , sil a .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi n i t e t e ns es .
I tho u h e etc we y o u they

, , , .
, , ,
N a n ga On a co, ca ,
siy a ,
tayo ,
ca m i ,
fetch ed ; l ave etc fetched , .

, . cay o si l a ,
.
I mpe r a ti v e .
F e t ch , let hi m , etc us the m fetch

.
, , . M ao nca ,
siy a tayo c a y o sil a
, , , .
I nfi n i ti v e .
To pa r t a li ne . Pumé ti r .
THE TA G A L O G L A N G U A GE .
To conquer to overco m e to vanquish Pa nalo m analo

’
, , .
, .
Pre s e nt i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e .
I ,
t hou he etc , , .
, we ,
you , they N a na na lo a c o, ca ,
S iy a tayo
, ,
ca m i ,
c onquer etc , c a y o s il a , .
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e s .
I ,
thou he etc we you they , ,
.
, , ,
N a n a lo a c o, ca ,
siy a ,
tayo ,
ca m i ,
con q uered ; have etc co nq u ered ,

.
,
. cay o ,
s i la .
P lu p e r f e c t t e n s e
I ,
thou h e etc we you , , .
, , , N a n a lo na a c o ca na na Si y a , ,
ta y o , c a m i , cay o sil a,
.
they ha d etc conquered ,

.
,
. N a c a p a n a lo
F u t u re i nd e f i n i te t e ns e
I ,
thou he ete we you they Sh all
, ,
.
, , , , ,
M a n a n a lo a c o ,
ca , siy a tayo ca m i
, , ,
etc conquer .
,
. cay o, sil a .
Fu t u re p e rf e ct t e ns e.
I thou
, , he ,
etc , we, you they ,
M a n a n a lo na a co ca na na ,
s ha ll , e tc .
,
ha v e conquered . M a ca p a n a lo
I mp e r a ti ve .
Conquer ,
l et hi m ,
etc .
,
us the m
,
co n quer . M analo ca siy a tayo cay o sil a

, , , ,
.
The follo wing verbs are conj ugated l i ke p a na lo .
To listen to . Pa q u i n y i g ,
a
p q u i n i g .
To Holy Co mm u m o n to
gfpp
e ive ,
Pa q u i n ab a ng
p r
To serve to wait u pon to fl a t ter , ,

. Pannyo .
To sigh t to loo k a t f ro m afar to

behold to ga z
P a n Oo r
, ,
i
e at ,
.
To lo d ge . Pa n u lu y a n .
To lead to guide ,
. Pa t n Og o t
To trust to believe ,
. P a n i u a la .
To think to m use ,
. Pa n i m d i m .
To lean on a st aff To squat . . Pa n i i n Pa n i n g ca y a d

. .
To kneel down . P ani c lob o r

-
.
Ca n to be able to be able to do
, ,
. P a n g y a ri .
To talk to rep r i m and , . Pa n g6s a p .
To precede to go before to c o m
m ence to start ,
,
.
,
Pan go na .
To lose i n the trade . Pa ngu lu g u i

To sh iver to cra m p to a gu e , ,
. Pa n gi q u i ,
To q uake to tre m ble P a n gi ni g
’
, . .
IRR E G U L A R I TI E S I N THE CO N J U GA TI ON OF UM V E RBS . 1215
To drowse to get drowsy ,

Pa n gi m i . .
To be j e a lous P a ngi m b o lo
g
.
To feel a tingling pai n in the teeth Pa n il o . .
To keep holidays P a ngi li n

g
. .
To b eco m e disdain ful Pa n ilap . .
To warn to be on on e s guard to 2 Pa n ilag g

’
, ,
1
.
sneak away
b
.
To shake to shudder to e pani c ,

Pa ngilab o t ,
s tri cken
.
b
.
To e j ealous ( the m arried parties ) Pa n gi b o g ho

’
. . .
To court to pay address e s to Pa n g I bi g

b
.
,
To beco m e hu m le Pa n ga y o m p a p a . .
To drea m . Pa n gara p ( aloud ) ; p a na g u i n i p ,

.
To hurt to da m age ,
Pa n ga n y a y a . .
To see one s self i n a glass Pa n ga n i n o

’
. .
To d read to fear so m e i m agi nary 1

danger
,
Pa n ani b pan a m ba g ,
g .
b
.
To ring forth to lie i n for th e

Pa ngan a y p a n ga ngan a y
,
fi r s t ti m e
.
,
.
To bring forth to lie i n P a n ga n a c

b
. .
,
To ury one s face i n the h ands Pa n ga lu m b a b a

’
. .
To fold one s ar m s
’
P a n ga lo q u i p q u i p
b g
.
To get ti red to eco m e torpid P an alo p a n ga I OS

, .
,
.
To beco m e weak to beco m e m eagre P a nga li ra n g , . .
To get tired fro m too m uch standing Pa ngala y . .
To dare to venture ,
P a n ga has p a n ga ngahas .
,
.
To pro m ise Pa n ga c o pana t a , .
To p i erce to pass through to m ove

,
Pa n a i t i m , ,
to cause e m otion .
b
.
To persevere to a ide to persi st Pa na ti li , , . .
To sit on the ground wi th one s

’
P a n a s i la
legs crossed
.
To co m e to go down to go down
,
Pa n ao g ,
s tairs .
.
To m ourn over Pa n a m b i ta n . .
To trust to confide Pa n a li g
’
, .
To put oneself un d er other s con t

'
Pa n ag u i s u y o
rol .
.
To sigh to la m ent
, P a n a g hOy . .
To envy to bear a envious feeling

, Pa n a g hi li . .
To offe r to Offer ,
e first fruits Pa n a g a n o . .
To hurry on to i nci te to p rovoke Pa m o n c a hi

, , . .
To wag ( a dog its tail )

. Pa m a y p Oy . .
To pray to crave , Pa m a n hi c . .
To live i n a house Pa m aha y . .
To s w ell Pa m a g a
b
. .
To bathe to take aths , P aligo . .
To rise early Pa a ga . .
I
roots eginni ng wi th h i n i s fo r euphony s sake i nverte d
n b , ,
'
i n the i nstru me ntal passive or changed to n a i n the present and i n

“
the past te nse as shown i n the paradig m hereafter , .
To be d a shed to the gro und . YhOlog .

Pre s e nt i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e
i s are d a shed by m e thee hi m

, , , , Yn iho hOlo g , or , y na ho hOlo g co , mo,
he r i t us ye the m to the ground
, , , , ,
. n i y a ua ti n na m i n miny o
, , , ,
n il a .
Pa s t t e ns e s .
was ere ha s have een w b

b Yn i hOlo g l
,
h co m o n iy a
, ,
or , y n a O o g
d ashed y m e t h ee hi m her , , , ,
i t us the m to the ground

, , , ,
n a ti n , na m i n ,
mi ny o ,
n il a .
, , .
Thi s
i rregularity applies also to roo ts beginni ng wi th l o r
with a vowel especially to those begin n ing wi th n a u i u o tho
, , , ,
they m a y also follo w the reg u la r conj ugation Thus i t m a y be said .

,
with eq u a l prop riety y n i la y ay y n a la y ay o r y li n ay ay “

, I put i t ; y ni , , ,
’
”
y n a”u a la o r g i n na la
“
u a la , was lost ; y n i a i ca y na u i ca o r y i n a i ca pro
, , , ,
n o u n c e d; and s o fo rth fo r the other tenses thus avoidi ng t he hia tus ,
whi ch i s produced by the concurrence of the t wo i s ’

.
To set loose . U m a lp as = m a g a lp as
TO re m a i n , to stay at Tu m i r a
'
. .
TW E N TY F I F TH E X ER CI SE -
.
When will you return to town ? I W i sh to retu rn there

t o m orro w
Who m did you call f o r ( su m m on ) ? I called for ( su m m oned )
b
.
the physician Ca n you part this string ? . I can pa rt stri n gs ut I ,
cannot part thi s Where i s you r servan t going for water? He goes
.
fo r water to that well where bi rd s peck husked rice and your sister
gathers flowers Where i s t he child ? The child i s ahead runni ng to
.
,
t ake the lead of F rank What does Peter do ? Pete r listens to the .
priest a nd i s going to receive Holy Co m m unio n Who led th e Ta gals

b
.
i n th ei r war a gain st the A m e rican s ? The Tagals were led y A g ui

naldo i n w ho m they trusted What does the Old m a n think of? H e .
thinks of leani ng o n a staff as he cannot kneel down Who m is , .
the A m erican talking to He i s talking to so m e of h is country m en . .
Who takes th e lead of A lfred ? F rank took the lead of hi m Do you .
gai n m uc h by you r trade ? I gain nothi n g by i t I o n the co ntrary , , ,
lose m oney I s the servant shivering wi th cold ? N o he i s tre m bling

.
,
for fear Who i s beco m ing d rowsy ? N obody i s getti ng d rowsy but
.
, '
you r friend s friend i s j ealou s and feels a pai n i n his teeth

’
Why .
i s you r w i f e s hu dd e ri n g ? Because i t i s thunde ri ng Why i s Jane s

’
.
’
husband j ealous ? Because she i s being courted by h er neighbou r .
Dost thou h u m ble thyself before G o d? Yes and every m a n should ,
hu m ble hi m self before H i m What di d your cousin d rea m last n ight? .
He drea m t that he was hurting his met e r and that s he w a s s e e i ng ,
herself i n the looking glass Why does hi s father bury hi s face i n -

.
his hands and st a nds with hi s a r m s folded ? He got ti red a n d beca m e

,
weak Why does she n o t go downstairs a n d sit there with her le g s

.
crossed ? She m ou rns over the death of her husband Who m do you .
trust in ? I tru st i n the H oly Vi rgin Why is your Sister sighing ? Bec a use
he r friend M ary bears her envy and incit e s her to take a bath Do .
as to person o r m a tter acted upon ; w hi le i n ma yy a m t the re

'
th e
'
i d e re d '
i s an added m eaning which i ncludes the subj ect an d gives to the verb
”
the m eani ng “
to cure others and th e curer as well I f the root is .
o n e d e n o t i n g subj ective m otion

o
as fo r i n stance ta cbo the u m ver b , , , ,
expresses the m otio n wh ich th e subj ect b ri ngs i nto exi stence by
a conscious effort of his o wn will that i s to s a y the si m ple or , ,
i m m ediate use of the radical i dea an d thus tu ma cbo to run ; , , ,

“ ’
but i n ma y ta cbb the action being considered i n relation to so m e

,
ex te rnal obj ect the m ean ing i s enlarged SO as to beco m e so m ewhat

,
“ ” “ ” ”
that of to run for
“
to ru n do w n to run away with ; and
, ,
the verb i s considered as transi ti e I f the m otio n as indica ted by v

.
,
the root is Obj ective as fo r i nstan ce i n lap i t the u m verb has a

, , , , ,
s ignificatio n si m ilar to that o f ta ma cbo; lu map i t to approach ; “

wh ile ,
’
ma y lap i t expresses the m ove m ent o r m otio n applied to so m e ex ternal

obj ect ; the verb then i s tran sitive and means : to pl a ce to d raw near
,
“
, , .
With roots of quality as fo r i nstance y a ma n th e a m verb expresses the , , ,

“ "
assi m ilation o f the quality by th e subj ect ; y u ma ma n to grow wealthy , .
I n ma yy a ma n there is exh i bited that deviation of m eanin g foun d i n

ma y ta cbb caused by a vai n e ff ort o n the part of particle to render
,
the quality applicable to others Thus m a y y a ma n m a y be assu m ed .

,
to m ean : to thi r t fo r ri ches

“
A si m ila r d isti nctio n m a y be said
s .
to exist i n the case o f a roo t th e n a m e of a Subs ta nce or m atter ,
which can be rendered m o re o r le s s assi m ilable by a subj ect Or applic ,

“ ”
able to othe rs as y u i n tb gold , We have here y u mi n tb to beco m e of
“
,
.
, ,
to be transfor m ed in to gold ; as m a y be said figurati vely o f a s to n e ,

’
, ,
or other s ubstance o r to assi milate gold by the subj ect ; but as this
, ,
i s beyond possi b i lity the verb if used i n thi s latter sense will turn, , ,
fro m the o riginal m eani ng and ad m it o f so m e m etapho ri cal one bearing

the closest possible relation to that i m parted by the part i cle Thus .
,
y u mi n tb m a y be applied to the act o f a wo m an who would convert

i n to gold as i t were he r own ody by allowing i t to be devoted to ase
, , b b
o r i nfa m ou s pu rposes ; wh ile the m a y verb will express the application
of the substance to so m e external o bj ect an d thus ma yy u i mb “
to gild , , , .
It only re m ain s to con sider here the case a root having a wel l
b
,
deter m ined ver al character as fo r i nstance ca i n i n u m etc Cu ma i n , , , , , ,

“ "
a mi n a m m ean
“
respectively to eat ;
, to d ri nk ; that i s to say the act of , ,
a person ( probably of only one person ) who eats or dri nks ; m a y ca i n

b
, , ,
ma y i n u m= ma y u i na m m a y e cons i dered as i ndicating the sa m e action

b
,
perfor m ed by m any people o r if y only one pers on i n so m e in ts u , , ,

“
sive way and therefore to eat
,
“
to d rink i n so m e gluttonous m anner ; , ,
’
but here and with m any othe r roots the d i fferen ce i n sen se i s n ot ,
very obvious .
Cases w ill be found which the above explanations do not a c:

count for ; but here as elsewhere the see m ing ano m aly ari ses m ainly
, ,
fro m a difficulty of p roperly classifyi ng particular ver b s i n Tagalog

z
.
The following i te m i ed descri ption of t he use of the particle i s

given as a co m ple m en t to what has een sai d a ove b b .
M ay used with roo ts

, may m be
m ainly for b egi nn ing w ith ,
the purpose o f avoid ing h arshness o f sound and thus it m a y be that ,
the n ature of the actio n i s so m eti m es fou n d to be a t vari ance wi th

that i m parted by the partic le .
To i nsult , to d isho nor others M a g m u ra .
To s ta rt; to c o mmenc e . M a g mo la .
U SE OF THE V ER E A L PA R TI CL E M A G . i 14 9
i
To experience to p ercei ve
, . M a g ma s i d .
To M a gma na M a g m a la s
"
i nherit . t o percei ve . . x
To enhan ce . M a g m a ha l .
For actio n s by which the subj ect loses con trol of so m eth in g ,
To sell . M agbil i .
To take along wi th to take to ,

. M a g ha ti r .
To give to de liver
, . M a g b i g ay .
To gran t . M a g ca lOo b .
To present with to m ake a gift ,

. M a g b iy a y a .
To gi ve bac k to restore , . M a g s a o li .
Fo r
the acts o f the i ntellect by which though t i s reli nqu ished by
the subj ect and those o f sc a t te ri ng m ate rial th ings
,
.
To s ay . To give notice . M a g s a bi .M a g b a li ta .
To expla i n . M agsays ay m a g s a la y s ay ,
.
To n arrat e . M a g s a li t a .
To per m it to allo w M a g ttI lo t

'
.
, .
To grant leave . M a g p a hi n tOlo t .
To sho w to m ake shown

,
. M a g p a q u i ta .
To thro w a w ay To fo rbi d . . M a g ta p o n M a g b au a l
. .
To launch a ship . M a g bo n s or .
To throw m issiles to pelt ,

. M a g ha g u i s .
To fell to cause to fall to ground

, . M a g hOlo g .
To s o w grai n to put seeds i nto a hole

, . M a g ha s i c .
To scatter to waste , . M a g bu la g s a c .
To diffuse to e m i t M a g s a m bI I la t
’
To s o w grai n by scattering it abou t . M a g s ab o g .
Fo r b
ver s purporting m ove ment th at i s to say , , m otion applied
to so m e exte rnal o bj ect .
To d ra w
to place n ear
, .
To put i n to put i nto , .
To lift up to raise to heave , , ,

M a g ta a s
elevate
.
To set up . M a g ta y o
To take dow n to lower , . M a g p a n aog .
To fell ( trees )
. . M a gbo u a l .
To re m ove to a d istance . M a g la y o .
'
10 t ake away . M a g a lls ,
To place so m ething u pright . M a g ti n d i g , m a g p a ti n d i g .
Fo r bodily actio ns ,
i f perfor m ed by the subj ect u pon hi m self .
To cure onesel f .
To shave
To wh ip
To co m b
To
'
cu t o n e s ha i r ’
To wash one s f a ce
'
To scratch one s self ’
w
.
To ou n d o ne s self
'
M a g s ug a t
.
u lcerated
.
To wet oneself
w
.
To a s h on es e lf
THE TA GA LO G LA N GUA G E .
v erba li ing words either p u re

Fo r z ,
o r corru p te taken fro m d ,
Spanish o r ot her alien languages R oots . o f offices m a y t
express fine disc harge of Official d uties .
M a ss ,to o f fi ci a te M i s a ( Sp ) .
, ,
To g a m ble J u y a r ( Sp )
.
; ,
Tobacco to s m o ke to sell tobacco

,
Ta ba co ( Sp ) ; , .
,
Chocolat e to take to e a b ora te

,
Choco la te ( Sp ) m a g s rcola te
, ,
to sel l chocolate ) ; .
;
.
To play base ball M a gb e s b o l . .
M ayor to be a m ayo r to act as

,
Ca p i lna ( Sp ) ; m a g cap i ta n m ag p re
, , ,
m ayo r s i d e nte
b
1
. .
F ather priest ; to
,
e a p riest P a dr e ( Sp ) ; m a g p a re .
,
.
I f roo t s denoting any piece o f wearing apparel are ver ali ed b z

with ma y , the verb wi ll expre s s the wear i ng o f sa m e .
Trousers ,
’
to we a r trousers . Sa la u a l, m a g s a la u a l .
Shoe s ,
shoes . Sapin , m ags a pi n .
Spectacles , Specta cles . Sala m in , m a g s a la m i n .
Hat ,
a hat . Sa m b a li lo ,
m a g s a m b a li lo .
A pron ,
an apron . Tapis ,
m a g ta p i s .
L
i s e m ployed f o r all those personal act i ons
M ay
” I
wh ch
-
or collective i n character both sides being m eant as , ,
To m arry .
To fight to q uarrel ,
.
To j oi n with to be associated with , .
To converse .
To asse m b le
To ad m i t the co m pany of others ,
M ag s a ma
to be i n co m pany with others .
To dispute to contend , .
M ay b eing
collective i n sense co m es to be the proper par
, ,
t i cle of the reciprocal ve r b s and as seen i n the preceding paragraph , ,
by its m ere association wi th a root collecti ve o r dual i n character ,
a kind of collecti ve o r si m ple reci procal ve rb is for m ed The sa m e .
m a y be the case whe n i t i s i ntended to fo r m a verb expressive

of an actio n a d m i ti n g of co rrespondence rivalry or co m petition i f no , ,
’
special stress i s laid on the i ntens i ve perfor m ance of the action .
To see each other . M a g q u i ta

To write to each other . M a g s d la t .
( better ) m a g s u la tan .
To m i x wi th each other . M a g ha lo .
To reconcile to each other

)
to
M a gb a t1
’
,
greet each other .

.
But for the sa m e actions when stress is laid o n the co m p e ti t

b
, ,
i On or rival ry an d fo r such others a s m a y e perfor m ed i n a one

,
Si d e way and a re i ntended to be m ade i ndicative of recip roci ty especially ,
( 1) M a y , thu s
i n d i c a t e s t he a c ti n g i n s o me w a y u p o n the thi n g e x p r e s s e d
u s e d,
b y the ro o t ; b u t d oe s n o t r e f e r t o a n y s p e c i fi c k i n d o f o p e r a t i o n M ay ta ba co, t he r e .
f o re , may me a n, a c t u a l ly , t o s e l l, t o b u y t o tr a d e i n , t o ra i s e , tob a c co , a cc or d i ng ,
to what has b e e n s poke n of b e f o re , o r i s de te r mi ne d b y s ome othe r e xpres s i on.

THE TA G A L O G L A N G U A GE .
TW E N TY S E V E N TH L E S S O N —
YC A D A L A U A N G P O U O , T, P I TO N G P A G A HA L .
U SE O F TH E V E R B A L P A R T I C L E M A G .
si n g m a y to for m reci procal verbs attenti on should e pai d

I n u ,
b
to the n ature of the acti on an d to the intension an d purpose i n t he
p erfo r m an ce of sa m e We h ave seen t h at m ay alone m a y for.
m reci p
ro c a l verb s of a first degree i f the root to whi ch i t i s applied carries
w
along ith i t a n idea of duality or reci procity and we have thus ma y , ,
a s au a ma y au a y
,
F o r the fo r m ation of reciprocal verbs of a second
.
d egree th e m ere application of the pa rticle i s not considered sufficient

, ,
a nd i n or a n as the case m a y he shoul d be appended To thi s clas s

, , , .
“
belon g such verbs as ma y tap a ti n to pu t two thin gs i n front of each
b
,
“ ”
toher ; and ma y tolony a n to ai d each other R eci procal verbs m us t e
’
.
,
transitive i n SO far as they require a n obj ect that re turns the a ction .
I f then ma y and a n are applied to a root fro m which n o tran si tive verb
, ,
can be developed the action th u s expressed will be one of riva lry , ,
and ma y locs oha n fo r i nsta nce expresses the actio n of j u m ping perfor m ed
, ,
by m any i n co m p etition as to which of the perfo r m ers wi ll excel o r

su rpass the others I f the action i s transitive and this latter sense
b
.
of rivalry i s to e expressed the single su f fix a n i s not sufficient an d

d b
,
shoul e repeated as i n the follo w i ng i llustration , .
To push so m ebody out of hi s place .
( This action i s active and can be Tu m o la c .
recipro cal )
m ade .
To push h a rd to push by m any ,

. M a g tOla c .
To push each other . M a g t o la can .
To push e a c h o the r ( th e a tion

b y m any an s i n
.
e rf o r m e d
gom p e ti ti o n as to who will p ush M a g to lo ca n a n .
the m ost) .
So m eti m es the discri m in atio n bet w een the plurali zing an d rec i procal
senses is m ade by chang i ng the a ccent , as , fo r ins tance i n : .
To approach ( intransi t ive )

.
To place nearer .
To approach e a ch other .
To see m any things o r to look at ,

M a g q u i ta
i n te n s 1v e ly
. .
To see each other .
conj ugated by a m an d which ad m it Of i ntensio n ma y e

A ctions b
conj ugated by m a y to den ote such intens i on o r p lurality either of , ,
subj ect o r Obj ects if the actio n i s not o therwise m odified i n m eaning
, ,
as in :
,
t v t
I n hi s , a s i n e e ry h i n g e ls e , w e e n d e a o r t o co n e y to t he s u d e n t ‘ s v v t
m i n d s o m e i d e a o f t he a r i o u s m o d i fi ca i o n s v
o f s e ns e t
w hi ch a r o o t m a y u n d e r g o
i f c o n ju g a t e d b y m ay ; b u t t he y a r e s o m a n i f o ld t ha i t w ou ld b e i m po s s i b le t o t -
e x ha u s t t he m Pr ac ti c e a lo n e ca n b e r e co mm e n d e d o n hi s p o i n t
. t .
U SE or TH E V E R B A L P A R TI CL E . M ay .
15 3
To run ( si m p le action )
. . Tu m a cb o .
Torun for to run away with ,

. M a g ta cb o .
Towrite ( si m p le action ) Su m ula t

w
. . .
To ri te a great deal M a g s u la t ( The w ord m ade acute )

b
. .
To drink hard to drink y m any , . M a g in u m -

.
To eat greedily to eat by m any M a g c ai n

“
.
,
.
To read ( m any o r a great deal )

.
, . M a g ba s a .
To wa lk ( si m ple action )
. . L u m aca d .
To walk quickly . M a g la ca d .
To weep ( si m ple action ). . Tu m a n gi s .
To weep ( by m any o r beyond m e

} M a g ta n gi s
.
asure
.
Thi s m an ner
of i ntensifyi ng the action o r p lurali ing the a gents z
i s not exclusive and m a y be considered as of a fi rs t degree of i ntension
’
b
.
M a y a nd the reduplicatio n of the first sylla le o f the root i ntensi fie s

,
d
m ore an the reduplic a tio n o f the whole root even m ore , .
T sell by w holesale
o M a g b i b i li
Th following b y m any i n a
. .
e rapid
o r d er of
M a gs o no ds o no d .
s u c ce s s 1o n .
T think deeply
o M ag i s i p i s i p
-
T m e d ita te p rofoundly
. .
o . M a g n i la y n i la y .
Thi s latter co m p ositio n with so m e verbs o f m otio n deno tes s o m e “
b
ti m es oth to do what the root m ean s an d the co n trary ; o r rather thi s ,
n otion i s i m plied i n the i nten sive sense i n so fa r as fo r i nsta nce to go

b
, , ,
continually u p ta i rs co m es to e to go up an d to co m e do wnstai rs
, .
To pass on and to pass b ack again M I

ag d aa n d aan
’
and a gain i
.
he sets a b out
.
He goes out an d in ,
N a g la la b a s la b a s an siy a
going i n and co m ing out
.
Verbs denoting an unsteady m otion m a y b e for m ed i n the sa m e way .
To oscillate M a q u ili n g q u i li n g
’
bb
. .
To wa le . M a q u i n di n g q u i ndi n g .
To stagger . M a g s ura y s ura y .
To
h
a n g e con t i nuously on e pos
c E
3
M a g b i li n gb i li n g
‘
u
.
e
To walk with wavering pace . M a g o c o r dc o r .
To flut te r 0 . M a g b a li n g b ali n g .
To p lace oneself face downward )

and then on one s ack again
’
b .
M a g b a li b a li gt a d .
( )
2
with these an d si m ila r ver s

N ay , b m ay b e d ropped i n t h e p resent ;
b b
,
the first sylla le eing redupli cated .
Ti ti a rti a r si a y
'
He walks o n tiptoe
b
. .
He loafs wanders a out ; he walks

b Su s u hn g s u lm g
,
a out purposeless
.
(I ) . i n m a n y v e r b s o f m o ti o n w h i c h a re g ra v e i n a c c e n t , t h e a cce l
He r e , as
e ra t i o n i s e x p r e s s e d , b o t h b y ma y a n d b y c h a n g i n g t he a c ce n t Th e s a m e i s t h e .
ca s e f o r o t he r a c ti o n s w hi c h a r e i n t e n s i fi e d a s s e e n a b o ve , .
The o r t ho g ra p hy o f Ta g a lo g w o r d s is h a r d ly y e t fi x e d b y a n y r u le ,
a n d ju s t at t hi s w r i t i n g th e co n f u s i o n s e e ms t o b e a t i t s h i g he s t p o i n t Th e .
s t u d e n t m a y p e r ha p s fi n d the s e w o r d s w r i t te n ma y ba li ny bali ng , e t c W e w r i te t h e m
as
of t he Ta ga lo g co n u g a ti o n j
i n t h e t e x t , t hi s s e e m i ng m o re i n a c co r d a n c e w i t h t he i n co r p o r a t i ve c ha ra c te r
.
d
fro m an a j ec tive o f ma co m p o s i ti oh a ma y ver i s fo r me
If , b d ,
th e latter will exp ress the boasti ng swaggering of suc h quality as

b
, ,
i s expressed by the adj ective i f the action ad mi ts of oasti ng ; but ,
the word i s m ade acute .
To b oast wi sdo m .
Toswagger .
Toboast beauty
b
To oast prudence .
If the actio n does not ad m it of bragging and the adj ective is

of double co m po sition the ma y v erb will i ndi cate the assi m ilatio n y , b
the subj ect of the quality expressed by the adj ective
To b eco m e to gro w forgetf u l M a g ma li m o ti n

gro w i nfirm
. .
,
To . M a g m a s a c ti n , m a g mas a s a cti n .
ma y
is applied to an abstract noun of ca + ro o t + a n co m posi t
I f
ion the verb thus for m ed will i ndicate the putting i n to practice of
b
,
the corresponding quali ty ; ut such words are only used i n the i n fi

n i ti v e .
To do j ustice . M a g c a to u i ra n .
Topractice virtue . M a g ca b a n a la n .
Toact chastely M a g c a li n i s a n
b b
. .
To ehave one s self o scenely M a g ca ha la y a n

’
. .
The di m inutive sense of m

verbs i s for m ed by redupli cating
a
the root ( or the fi rst t wo b

sylla les thereof i f co nsisti ng of m ore
than t o) as : w ,
To run . Tu m a cb o .
To rove to ra m ble Tu m a c b o tacb o -
b b
. .
,
P eter i s gaddi g a out Tu m a c b o tac o si Pedro

z
z
. .
To d ri le . U m u lan ol an-
.
The sa m e di m inutive sense of

verb s i s generally for m ed ma y
b y the reduplicatio n of the root and the a f fi xing of a n o r ha n .
To wri te . To s c ri b le . M a g s ula t . M ag s ula ts u la ta n .
Th is for m ation is ~
co m m o n to actions ad m itting of feigni n g ,
gesture ,
i m itation or m ockery .
To be a hypocrite to aff ect virtue M a g b a n a lb a n a la n , m a g p a p a i m b a b ao

b
.
, .
To ni ble or to feign eating . M a g c a i n ca i n a n .
To snivel to m ake crying gri m aces

,
. M a g iyao i y a ca n
-
.
To affect to be deaf . M a g b i n gi b i ngi ha n

-
.
To sic k M a g s a q u i t s a q u i ta n .
To m ad . M a g o lo lo lo la n .
To play by ch ild ren at m aking )

M a g b aha y b a ha y a n
little houses 5
.
.
15 6 THE TA GA L O G L A N GUA GE .
b ut they w
alked quickly a nd wept beyond m easure Ho w o persons d
w bb
.
alk? Drunkards stagger and o s c i la te ; young girls wa le ; fools flutter ;

‘
old m a n waver ; s ick person s change posture an d chi ldre n wal k o n

b
,
t iptoe What do persons affect to be ? F ools affect to e wise ;

b b
.
co w ards to be gallant ; wo m en to be eautiful ; rascal s to e prudent ;

, , ,
and hy p ocrites to be vi rtuous What do o ther perso ns beco me ?

, .
L ove sick persons b eco m e forgetful and ol d m e n sickly What girls , , .
act wisely ? The j udicious act chastely but the i nj udic i ous act
b
,
o sce nely Did the chil dren rove i n th e garden ? They did b ut they
z
z
.
,
could n o t go o n because i t i s d ri li ng
'
Does the b oy kno w al ready .
ho w to wri te ? N o he o nly scribbles a little I s A l fred s child j udicious ?

'
.
,
N o he a ffects to be vi rtuous bu t on the contrary he i s always n i b b

, , , ,
'
lin g and sn iveling and so m eti m es feign s to be m a d Why d oes m y .
servant affect to be deaf and sick ? Because he i s n aughty a n d i s

al w ays playing at m aking little houses with other boys What di d .
the father an d the so n do ? They at fi rs t looked at each other a nd ,
then e m braced each o ther What are those m e n doing ? They are .
handing ove r sacks to each o ther Do you sell rice a nd fish ? .
I sell pickled fi s h and eg gs and I a ls o m ake houses I s your b rother

b
, .
a good son and a good father? He i s no t a good father ut h e ,
i s a good s o n I s he also a good son i n law ? He i s althoug h i t

b
-
.
,
i s very difficult to e a good s o n i n law What does he say to hi s son ? - ~

.
He says to hi m e n deavou r to learn m ake every exertio n to be happy

w
, ,
and be active What ere that m ulti tude d oing there ?

. They were
conversing .
TW E N TY E I G HTH L E S S O N
—
.
YC A D A L A U A N G P O U O , T, U A L O N G P A G A R A L .
U S E O F TH E P A R TI C L E P A G I N TH E PA S S I V E
R eference ha s
been m a e to ma y ver s generally d ropping p a y d b
i n the passive and assu m ing the plai n passive fo r m s of the u rn o nes
. ,
W i h no other particle than that which i s required to m ark the voice
t
Th1s sharing by the t w o verbs i n o ne an d the sa m e passive for m does
.
n ot lead however to any m isconceptio n o r dou t as to wh ich sense or verb b

b
, , ,
l S m eant ; for u m v er s if i ntransitive usually rej ect i n ; and if transitive

,
, , , ,
they require i n reference to thei r direct o bj ect a differe n t kind of

b
, ,
.
p a s s 1v e than the co rresponding m a y on es Thi s will eco m e m o re

apparent fro m the illustrations following : a li s n for i nstance could not z
'
z b
, ,
by a ny r ule of gra m m ar by traced to u ma li s

.
U ma l s besides eing .
’
, .
1n tra n s 1t1v e i s for m ed fro m a root in dicative of a ki nd of m otion t hat

,
ca n be applied to other thi ngs and a s a li s i a refers to a definite thing

b
,
w h1c h m ust be the direct obj ect o f so m e transiti ve ver no o ne could

i
.
poss bly construe it to m ean either to go out “

o r to e gone out
“
, ,
,
b ,
but necessarily to m ean to be taken out

“
"
I n the case o f a n i ntrans .
1t 1v e verb which although for m ed fro m a root i ndicative of a ki nd of

m otion
of w hlc h no application can be m ade a ppears n ot w i ths ta nding i n the
z
, ,
m p a s s 1v e f o r 1 as for i nstance ta cboh n there can here exist no m iscon

’
n
~ ‘
d
, , , ,
'
ce pt1o n a s to i ts m eani n
g o r sense nor any if fi c u lty i n tra ci ng i t to the
, ,
U SE o r THE PA R TI CL E Pa y I N THE PA SSI V E
’
15 7
transitive Tagalog verb i n the active ma y ta cba which as already said refe rs
‘
, , ,
t o the actio n o f runn ing for so m e purpose and therefore ta cbohi n cann ot be
’
,
”
m ade to m ean “ “
to run out ; b ut necessari ly to run fo r i t “
to run a way
w
, ,
”
ith i t A m ark o f distinction i s required and p a y therefo re i s used
w
.
, , , ,
here both the a m and the m a y verb for m ed fro m on e an d the sa m e root
are transitive as for in stance ba m l m a y ar a l This z
z ’
‘
b b
, , , , .
” “
i s ecause of the necessi ty of disting u i shing betwee n g bi li to uy
w z
z
,
” “ “ “
'
i th to buy for ; an d yp a y b l to be s old ; bi lhan to buy fro m ;

‘
, , ,
an d p i n a y bi lha n “
to sell t o ; mi n d “
to be t aught ;
, ( m atter taught ) ,
’
“ "
and yp i na y ar a l to study o n account o f ; a r a la n to te a ch to ; and “
b
, ,
’
p ya a r a la n
“
to be studied ; etc I n action s that esides ad m ittin g of
b
, ,
a n instru m ent o r reason fo r t he perfor m ance ad m it too o f eing per ,
for m ed for or i n con sideratio n of so m e person p a y beco m es n ecessary

, , ,
“
to in dicate th is sense : thus we have y ta hi to sew with ; and yp a y /a hi , , ,
”
“
sew for ; y loto to be cooked ; and yp a y lo to ,
“
to cook for ; e tc , .
Where the suffix a n alone refers to the perso n or the thi ng

w b
, ,
hi ch i s the di rect o r i ndi rect co m ple m ent of th e ver p a y if u sed

w
, , ,
ill refer to the real place where the actio n i s acco m plished ; and a s -
,
a rule where the abstrac t n otion of p lace i s m eant a n alone i nd i

, , , ,
cates the i m m ediate a n wi th p a y prefixed th e m e diate o r ulti m ate , , ,
place Se e these d istinctions illustrated i n the follo w ing words : a la y aa n

b
.
,
to e tended watched ca red fo r ; p a y a la y a a n “

to tend a t; ba y a r a n ’
b
, , , ,
'
”
to e paid ; p a y ba ba y a r a n to p ay a t; a ny lotoa n the m ediate place
“
,
’
,
“
fo r the cooking the frying p an ; a ny p a y lotoa n ,
“
the kitchen ; a ny ,
s a la ta n
“
the wri ting paper ;
, a ny p a y s u la ta n
“
the desk the o ffice , , ,
ta cboha n
“
a ny the p e rs p n run fo r i n o rde r to give h i m so m ething ;
,
”
a ny p a ta cboha n
“
y the race t rack F o r other actions the disti nction
, .
i s not so obviou s o r i t m a y b e that it even vanishes i nto an optional ,

‘
a pplication of th e particle and thus the student needs not worry hi m self
b
,
too m uch about searchi ng for a dis ti nctio n etween fo r i n stance p i

z
, ,
na y mi ca o and n i naca o; p a y s a bi hi n and s a bi hi n ; p a y lo toi n and I oto n

’
z
'
yp n a y ba li ta and y bi n a l ta p a y hu y a s a n and hu g a s a n etc z

'
‘
,
'
, . .
,
So m e m ore i llustrations follow as co m ple m entary to the above

re m arks .
To ta ke away M agal i s
’
. .
Take that away . A li s i n m o iy an .
To give b ack . M a g s a o li .
G ive the m oney back Ys a o h m o ang p i lae

’
.
.
I had already given back the trous N a y s a o li co n a ang s a la u a l, n a n g siy a, i ,
ers when he arri ved . d u n g m a ti n g .
{ i aro gS a n y napon m y a ang ca n i y ang

t i
Where has he thro w n his shirt? .
)
.
w
.
It was the garden wh ere I thre it . A n g ha la m a n a n ang ti n a p o n an co .
'
PO at tain . M ag ca m i t .
I t
b
'
ditgig i i
l y ? say I t and d i fficult t o
M araling sa ihi h m a li u a g , ca m tan .
shoul Pay d b
e used i n the passi ve i f ma y i s used i n the acti v e
t o i ntens i fy the acti o n expresse d y t he verb o r to denote plurality b .
d
To estroy m any things M a g s i ra
ga b ab uy
.
The s w m e d estroyed these m any P i n a g s i ra nang m an itong

pl a nts m an a ha la m a n a n g
which
.
Th e re a re m any have
b
e e n estroy s ( lants
,
d p } M a ra mi ng ha la m a n a n ang p m a g s xs i ra .
15 8 THE TA GA L O G LA N GUA GE .
To count m any things M a g b i la ng

b d
. .
B u n g m i la n g ag i P e ro n ang m
'
d a S a
Did Peter count m uch m oney ?
ra m i ng salapi ?
Ohl, b e counted m ore than ten thou A b aa ! m a hi g u i t s a s a n gla cs an g pisos
(
sand dollars ang p i n agb i la n g niy a .
When both actions eing transi ti ve ma y i n the active converts

,
b ,
the sense of the root fro m the subj ecti ve a s conj ugated with a m to , ,
t he obj ecti ve sense p a y should be used i n the p assive to m ake thi s

,
ch ange o f m eaning clear .
'
I bo rrowed that m oney I gave hi m Yu etang co iy ang s a lapi y b i n i g ay co

yesterday . s a c aniy a c a ha p o n .
I will bo rrow a hund red dollars Oo ta n ga n co Si Juan nang s a n g daa n g

fro m Joh n . p iso .
Pi n ag o ota n g o r p i n a o ota n g co i tong

I lend this m oney . salap i o r y p i n a g p a p a ot a n g or ypina
,
a a d ta n g co it ong salapi
p p .
I bought th is h at Bi n i li co i t ong s a m b a li lo
b
. .
This hat i s what I ough t this Ytong s a m b a hlo ang b i n ili co

,
ha t i s m y pu rch ase
.
ga
.
I sell th ese houses . Y p i na gb i b ill co i tong man b ahay .
I t i s t o m y neighbou r that I have A ng a q u i ng c a p aa p i t b aha

y ,
ang p i n a g
sold thi s rice . bi lhan co n i ton g big as .
ver b s requi re p a y i n the p a ssive i f the m o ti ve or

R eciprocal
p lace of the action i s expressed .
Those d
con e m n ed to eternal punish g
A n g m an a n a p a ca s a m a s a i mp i e r n o
m ent i n Hell curse each other and n a g s u s u m p a a n S il a at p i n a g to to lo n ga n
he lp b n e anothe r i n doi ng evi l . n il a ang pagan a nang m asa m a ,
Th y u lte d each othe r at the
rg igs
l ; r1
A ng tiangue ang p i n a g m ora ha n
The sa m e i s the case w ith action s of a d ual o r a collecti ve kin d .
G am b ling was the reaso n for the m A ng p a gs u s u ga l ay ang yp i n a g au a y

to quarrel n i la
d
.
They are a s se m ble i n th e hou se A n g b ahay n ang i na m o i , ,

ang pi
of your m other . n a g ca ti o n a n nil a
p .
b
Ver s o f feigning require like ise w p ay .
M enial servant s feig n to be s ick , A n g p i na g s a q u i ts a q u i ta n nang m a n ga

( so as ) n ot to be whi pped a li la , i ang hi nd i sil a
p a lo i n
ga
.
, .
F ools affect to be wise that they A n g y p i n a g m a m a r un o n g nang m an

may b e praised . g
ban al a y ang sil a, i , p u rihi n .
A ctive verbs require p a y if the place

ma y here th e action w
13 perfor med i s expressed i n the sentence especially hen the ver , w b
requires the passive of a n for the direct obj ect .
I pai d m y personal t ax i n M anila Sa M aynila p i n a g b a y a ra n co ang

when I wa s still there . a q u i ng b
oui s nang d o roo n pa a co , .
Take care of the horses at the A n g b a c o ra n p a g a la g a a n m o nang

enclosure . g
m a n a cabayo .
Yo u r brother put the plate on Ytb ng la m e s a n g i tb s i y ang p i na g la g i an -
thi s v e ry ta le b . n an g i yong ca p a ti d nang pi ng an .

THE TA GA L O G L A N G U A G E .
TW E N TY N I N TH L E S SO N —
YCA DA L A U A N G P O U O , T, S I YA M NA PA G A R A L .
U S E O F TH E V E R B A L P A R TI C L E MA .
applying ma to for m i ntran si tive ve r s stud ents sho ul not

I n b , d
lose sight of the fact that no i ntenti onal o r v oluntary act no sta te
b
,
suffere d voluntarily y the subj ect o r i n any way under hi s control ,
nor anythi n g occurring throug h his con sen t ad m its of ma and that , ,
on the contrary a n y root or a c t however tran si tive or vo lun tary

, , , ,
m a y be conj ugated by m a if the a ction i s to be represented a s

occu rring accidentally o r beyon d the subj ect s control Th us verbs .
,
“ ” ” “ “ ”
as to run “
to leap to go in
,
to go out etc th oug h i ntransi tive
, , ,
.
, .
are not conj ugated by ma o n account of being volu ntary acts A p parent .
departures fro m this rule are found so m eti m es but those ofte n ari s e ,
fro m a difficulty in classifying a particular verb i n Tagalog .
To slip to slide M aru las

b
. .
,
To stu m le . M a ti s o r .
To M a li hi s , ma li g ao
’
go astray to lose one s way ,
. .
To fall down to fall to the ground

to lose on e s standing .
To die to d ie away
,
.
To lose to m iss , .
But to m ake to dis a ppear

“ ”
to
“
get rid of so m e ody o r of so m e ,
”
,
“
b
thing and to flee which are conscious acts are expressed by ma g u a la
, , , ,
I n the sa m e way acts of the m i nd whi ch if con sci ously o r , ,
purposely execute d are conj ugated by a m or m a y are conj ugated by

b
, ,
ma if u ncon scious o r uncontrolla le .
To o m it doing so m ething purposely L u m i s a n . .
To forget . M e lisan .
To neg lect to cast i nto oblivion

,
L u mi mo t . .
To forget ( unconscious act)

.
M a li m o t . .
A c t s o f posture are i ndicat ed y the b ma verb i f i nvolunt ary ,

"
o r if status and not actio n i s m eant

.
To go to b ed ( to place oneself i n a 2.
Hu m i g a
lyin g posture) l
b
.
To be i n ed M ahig a n a hi g a n a hi hi g a , , .
To kneel down ( consc i ously ) to

.
bend one s knees

‘ L u m o ho d
.
,
i
To m ake others kneel down to ,
kneel d own with so m e thing M a g loho d .
hanging o n .
To kneel down ( unconsciously )

M a loho d n a lo loho d
j
,
to be i n a kneeling posi tio n

.
,
.
TO S ‘ d to be 1“ an “P“g ht i
PO Jiij ; OI
i i n di t n di M a ti n d g , nat g , n a ti i g .
To be a prisoner to be wi th one s
’
bb i N a b I b I la n g o , g
,
na a pa n ao
feet i n stocks o r il oes .
p .
To be seated M au po nau u p o
w d
. .
,
M a ta o b , na tata ob
’
To lie ith one s face downwar s .

U SE or THE V E RBA L P A R TI CL E Ma . 16 1
the agent s ratio nality o r i rrationali ty deter m ines

’
So m eti m es
‘
whether the action i s to be conj ugated by ma o r by so m e other verbal

particle as sho w n i n the s u bj oi ned i llustrations
,
.
The p u pil s ta nds ( plac e s hi m self A ng n a g a ara l tu ng m a ta y o s a li a ra p

erect ed ) efore h is b m aster nang c a n i y an g m a es tr o
ga
. .
A n g m an halig u e n ang a q u i n g hé
The p 1lla rs Of my house are up r i ght hay n a ta ta y o o r n a t u t u i d zzn a ca tu i d
.
g
.
Place those i ma ges u pright . Y ta y o m o iy ang I nan a lar au a n .
U ncontrolla b le passional states of the s ubj ect are ge nerally in

d i ca te d by ma .
To be s ad . M a lu m b ay .
glad M a lo g o d , m ato ua
’
. .
angry . M a g ali t .
asha m e d . M ahiy a .
afraid . M a taco t .
a s to nished M a gi I la t
'
. .
terrified . M a g u la n g ta n g .
h ungry . M a g oto m .
thi rs ty M a ob ao
b
. .
slee p y to e asleep ,
. M a tolo g .
regards other i ntransi tive action s which a re m ore o r less

As
“
controllable as to laugh ” “
to ee p etc thei r being pu rp ose ly o r w
d b
, ,
.
, , ,
i nvolun tarily p erfor m ed Shoul e taken i nto account i n applying the

proper verbal particle .
A ctions of a destructive ch aracter whe n they are fortui tous o r

accidental and no t ca used y the deliberate act of a conscious agent
,
b ,
o r when referen ce i s m ade to a n actual state of destruction are ex

b
,
p ressed y ma .
b eco m e destroyed
-
To
}
to be de '
,
M a s i ra
stroyed
T gro w d ry fa d e d be i n
.
o ; to a t
,
“ M a tuy o
sta te of d e cay j
.
a b roke
.
To b re a k off to be i n
condition
'
n ,
M a asag b .
b b
.
To e i n a cleft condi tion M a ali

b d
. .
To e par te , to lie c u t asunder M a la g o t m a p a ti r .

,
.
To rot .
0
M a b olo c .
Here to o the natu re o f the destroyi ng agent m a y d eter m ine

, ,
which ve rb al particle i s to be e m ploye d F o r i nsta nce : s é noy “

burn .
,
”
i ng ; if what causes burn ing is a perso n s u mé n oy ; if i t i s so m e i n ,
ani m ate thi ng ma s é n oy , .
be
'
M a ri y a, na n a , y m ay likewise i ntroduced in th is conj ugation

to express m ulti tude ‘
M any perso ns are dying o r d ead . Ma ra mi ang na n a m a m a tay

g .
A ll of the m ( a m u lt i tu d e )w ill b e sad . Sil ang lahat ay m a n ga lu lu m b ay .
If stress is laid u pon the i nvolunta riness o f so m e transition re ~
presented as goin g on the slo w assi m ilati ve process by the subj ect
b
,
may e expressed by ma n a , .
Your sister i s growi ng m a d N a u u lo l ang c a p a tid m ong b a b aye

w b
. .
She ill eco m e a s tutterer . M a ga ga ri l siy a .

for the sake o f briefness roo ts denoting so m e s tate of des

A lso , ,
t r u c ti o n m a y be used alon e and generally any actual state which m a y , , ,
be gathered fro m the context o r fro m t he root or which i s m anifest , , ,
can be expressed i n the sa m e way .
The fish i s putri d al ready . Boloc na ang i s da .
The dog i s dead . P at ay na an g aso .
The work i s finished . Tapus na ang gau a .
The letter i s ready . Yari na ang Sti la t .
and n a ca are so m eti m es used for ma and n a

M a ca , to whi ch
particles they are respectively analogous i n m any respects , , .
He forgot ,
He i s uprigh t ( standi ng) .
He sat .
Students are agai n re m inded o f the fact that m a verbs lack the
i n passive for m , but m a y be conj ugated i n the i nstru m ental and the
local passives i nas m uch as any occ u rrence , howeve r fo rtuitou s i t m a y
,
be ca n have a reason an i nstru m ent a ti m e or a place by which or

, , , ,
l
i n which to take p ace and paradig m s follow Showi ng the conj ugatio n ,
with both these for m s A s already said ma v e rb s ha v e t w o particles , ca

w
.
,
and ma , for the passive Ca i s used i n co nnection ith the y passive . .
With the a n passi ve ca 18 used i n reference to the place ; ma , i n reference ,
to the person o r t he t hm g The reason assig n ed i n the eigh tee nth lesso n
, .
for the rej ection of the for m s wi th n a ca and m a ca i n the pluperfect

and the future perfect tenses of the active voice holds good also for the ,
d ropping of n a and ma i n the s a m e tenses o f the various passives .
J
Y PA SSI V E .
I nfi ni t i v e .
To die of fro m , . Yca m a tay .
Pre s e nt i n d e fi ni t e t e n s e .
I , thou he etc we you they die

, , .
, , ,
Yq u i n a m a m a tay co , mo ,
niy a , n a ti n ,
etc of fro m
.
, . n ami n ,
n i n y o, n il a .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni te te ns es .
I thou he etc we you they

a Yq u n a m a ta mo m ya
, , , , ,
.
,
h a t1n , n a
died etc ; have died etc of i y 09 ’ , ,
m i n, m1n y o, n l la
. .
, , ,
fro m .
.
I , thou he etc we you they had

, ,
.
, , ,
Yq u i n a m a tay co na m o na ; ,
na niy a ,
etc d I e d of fro m
.
,
. u atin na m in n i n o, nil a
, y , .
I , thou he etc we you they shall

, ,
.
, , , Y c a m a m a tay co m o , ,
niy a ,
n a ti n , na
etc will etc die of fro m
.
, ,
.
, . m i n , miny o nil a ,
.
I mp e ra tiv e .
w
Be dro ned ( thou y e )le t hi m e tc Ca lo n o ra n mo, n iy a n a ti n , n i ny o,
b w
, , ,
.
, ,
u s the m e d ro ned at
,
. nil a .
The stu ent should conj ugate d i n the an passive w i th ca the

following verbs :
To b e with one s feet i n s tocks { M a p a nga o

’
g
,
capa n au a n
to be i n stocks at
.
t
,
.
To faint to s w o o n to s w o o n
M a b ilo , c a hi lo a n
, ,
away at
.
To be tired out to b e co m e tired at M a p ag o d ca p a g o ra n

b
. .
, ,
To be co m prised to e co m p rised i n , . M a s a c la o ,
c as a c la u a n .
T0 f ll d ( o lt f d ecay to d rop '
;
0 1 to Afg d i M a la g la g ; c a la g la g a n
,
f f t
.
p .
AN p .; s s rv e ,
( wi th ma ) .
To be lost . M a u a la a n .
P re s e nt i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e .
are lost to m e thee

is , , hi m , N a u a u a la a n siy a ta yo ca m i cay o
a c o, , , , ,
her it us you the m

, , , , . cay o ,
sil a n ang ( )
1 .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi ni te t e ns e s .
was were ; has h ave been I OSt, ,

N a u a laa n a c o, ca siy a ta yo ca m i
to m e thee h1m her I t us y ou , , . ,
, , , , , , ,
e ay( ,
c
sil a nan g
the m .
.
Plu p e rf e c t t e n s e .
ha d
been lost to m e thee , ,
hi m ,
M a u a laa n na a c o ca na ; ,
n a siy a t ayo , ,
her it us you the m

, , , , . ca m i cay o sil a nang , ,
.
Fu t u re i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e .
will e lost to m e thee b . ,

hi m , M a u a u a laa n a c o, S iy a ta yo , , ca m i , cay o ,
her it u s you the m
, , , ,
. sil a nang .
Fu t u re p e r f e c t t e ns e .
w ill have b een l os t to m e ,

thee ,
M a u a u a la a n n a a c o ca na ; ,
n a siy a ,
ta
hi m , her it us you the m
, , , , . yo , ca m i cay o si l a nang , , .
I mpe r tiv e a .
Le t . be lost to m e thee , , , hi m , M a u ala a n ca a co, ,

siy a ta yo , , ca m i ,
her i t us you the m

, , , , . cay o ,
sil a nang .
( l ) The a r r a ng e m e n t i n t he p a ra d i g m i s s o d i s po s ed as t o gi ve
'
t he s tu d e n t
t he c lea r e s t po s s i b le i d ea o f t he co n s t r u ct i o n o f t he s e n t e n ce w i t h t hi s k i nd o f
p as s w e .
U SE o r THE V E R BA L PA R TI CL E M a .
The s tudent s hould conj ugat e i n the an passive with ma the

w
follo i ng v e r s : b
To d i e to be deprive y death of
,
db . M a m atay m a m a ta y an
, .
To fo rget to be forgotten M a li m ot , m a li m o tan

b b d
.
, .
To a andon to b e a a n o ned , . M a p a b a y a m a p a ba y aa n
, .
The particle
seen above d rop p ed i n the local passive
ca is as
b
, ,
of these v e r s when n o place o r deliberate act b ut the person affected

b w
,
y the event i s m eant this as sho w n i n the follo i ng ph rases : ,
L e t hi m d ie i n the ho s pi tal Ca m atay an n iy a ang hos p i ta l

b
. .
L e t h i s m o th er d ie let hi m e de
b
,
ri v e d of his m othe r y death , let M a m a ta y an siy a n ang ina

p
d
.
death eprive hi m of hi s m other

b ahay
.
I n th is h ouse I m isse d my ring ( nang .

Q u m a u a laa n co .
a q u i ng s
I tong
m gs mg
o
na 1th
ri ng was lost ( m isse d )to m

.
The N l e . a u a aa n a co nang s i ngsing .
S m eti me s m co m b ines w ith m y i n

o a a the local p ass ive to den ote
the sou rce fro m which so meth i ng co m es
A ng p i n a g ca ca s i ra a n n a u g m an a g
The ru m of to w n s co mes fro m wa r baya , i , ang p a g b a ba c a, o r , a n g y q u i
i
.
n a s i s i ra e tc
TWE N TY N I N TH E X E R CI SE -
.
d
Where d i you r s er v ant slip a n d stu m le ? He n o t o nly sli p b
b b w
,
ped and stu m led ut fell do n i n the fo rest where he went astray
, .
What h a ve you m issed th at you a re ( look) so sad ? Death has de ,
p ri v e d m e of m y so n Wh e re d id h e die ? He died i n M anila . .
Why did your sister o mi t to co n f es s that s in ? Because sh e forgo t ,
to con f ess it Why w a s you r m o ther terrified last nigh t? She was
.
in bed when i t was thu ndering she beca m e terrified sprang , ,
( unconsciously ) to her feet a n d we fo und her k nelt do w n Did yo u

'
see the thief? Yes he was face do w n w ards a nd with h is f e et i n ,
stocks Is o ur n e i g hb i u r h ungry or thi rsty ? He i s n either h ungry

.
'
n or thi rs t y he is angry W ho i s asha m ed ? N obody i s asha m ed

b
. . ,
b u t Pe te r i s as to nished
‘ »
What is t he destr u ctio n c aused y ea rth
b
.
qu a k es ? Destructio n y earthquakes extends i ts e f to ( co m prises ) m any

th i ngs ; buildings are destroyed ; trees are wil te d thei r branches cleft ,
a nd t he wi res o f the t elegraph cu t off Why do they n ot eat that

fish ? Because i t i s already putrid What d id m y grand m othe r d ie .
o f? She d i e of age Where did she d ie ? She died i n th e ch urch

b
. . .
Why i s that m a n s taggering ? Because he is la m e and

\
li nd and ,
h e i s s a d because he i s r u i ned, Why does he feig n to be dea f? .

'
He d o e s not feig n to be deaf he i s certai nly deaf Where d i d th e ,

'
f u g i ti v e fail to be d rowned ? He failed to be d ro w ned i n th e ri ver .
H o w 18 your fe m ale cousi n ? She i s ti red o ut and fainted a way

-
.
Why did thi s fruit fall d o w n ? Because li fe i n t he th ree i s bei ng

ext i n g u i she d .
TE E TA GA L O G L A N GU A G E .
THI RTI E TH L E S S O N . Y C A TL O N G P O U O N G P A G A R A L .
TH E P A R TI C I P LE .
'
to adhere as far as po ssible to th e p la n o ri g i n a lly

Con ti nuin g , ,
.
established of con sideri n g the sa m e parts of speech as are generally

recogni z ed for the study of the E uropea n languages i t now beco m es
b
,
incum bent to say so m ething h ere about that fo r m of th e ver which ;

i n Tagalog i s con s idered to stan d fo r the E nglish participle
,
.
Words of the k i nd of those which while retaining th e essential ,
properties o f the verb shall i ndicate the doer o r shall refer to t he

, ,
actio n a s past and acco m pli shed are n ot wanting i n Tagalog ; but ,
here as elsewhere i n th e langu a ge thei r capability to perfor m the

, ,
functions wh ich i n E ngli sh are assigned to the participle i s n ot ,
dependent o n th e i nv ariable o r specific for m they assu m e but rather , ,
this power i s extended to the m fro m othe r verbal parts an d thei r ,
classification as verb s o r as participles co m es to be a m atter for

‘
syntax and not for ety m ology to deter mi ne It i s owi ng to th is .
coalescen ce of sen ses i n on e an d the sa m e word that the i nfinitive ,
which as has been already said i s used sub stantively m a y also be

, , ,
used as a participle o r rather as a p a rti c i p a l noun havi ng a m eani ng

b
,
i n con f or m i ty with the te ns e th e m ood and voice o f the ver fro m

'
w
,
hich i t has been derived an d thus sh aring s o m ewhat o f the ,
properties of the G reek participle The ten ses o f the active voice .
,
serve to for m the active o r p resent participles ; those o f the p assi ve

voice the past o r passive participles i n all the for m s The distinctio n
, .
between t he i n fi nitive proper and i ts uses as a s u b s ta n ti v e o r a

’
participle i s m ade by the article ; th a t of the participles u sed one

way or the other i s to be gathered fro m the context ; a n d thu s ,
“
a ny ma y ar a l n a ba ta m ean s : th e study ing boy ; a ny ma y ar a l n a ng ’
,
“
i ny lé s the studyi ng o f E n glish
, i n the active of voice ; a nd a ny , ,
“
p i n a y a r a la n n a ng ba ta the m atter th a t h as been studied by the
,
“
boy ; a ny p i n a y a r a la ny n i ca t he acqui red language i n the passive ;
, ,
etc , etc These partici pial nou ns

. whe n u sed as deter m i native of ,
another n oun o r p ronoun are to be considered as the antecedents ,
of the n ouns o r pronoun s deter m i ned by the m and hence adj ectival ,
or subordinate E nglish clauses having a relative pronou n either ex

b
,
pressed o r unders tood m a y be rendered y these participial or a d

je cti v a l v er al derivatives
, b ,
Besides the peculiarity these participles both active and passi ve

.
, ,
show of an adaptation to every tense m ood and voice of the verb , ,
the passive participle shows the m ore striking one of a subdivi sio n
i nto subj ective an d obj ective assu m ing i n each ca s e a different for m , ,
according to wheth er i t refers to the act of the subj ect or to the ,
obj ect on which the action i s acco m plished ; and according to whether
i t represents the sa m e as the result o f an i ntentional o r o f a f o rtu i tou s
act A s the m atter i s on e wh ich if well un derstood will sho w the
.
, ,
genius of the language i n a clear light a nd afford those who begin

to speak it th e key to m any apparent d ifficulties it i s dee m ed ,
n e ce s a ry to go i nto a practi cal e xe m p li fi ca ti on of the use and

d
meani n g of thes e two i v i s i on s of t he p a s t partici p l e .
THE TA G A L OG L AN G U A G E .
Di seas e b efalls ou r b o dy .
s ggggg
lo g ang s a q u 1t s a a tm g
R e m ai nder surplus l ,
.
To leave off ( s o m e t 1i n g t o 1e a ve )M a tn a '
b
,
so m ethi n g ehind g .
To re m ai n behi nd letting others

Tu m i ra
proceed . l
To b e left behind ( status )
,
M atir a . . .
What ha s been left behin d a s a

re m ainder what has been give n A n g y ti n i ra
, .
u p as an overplu s .
To w r 1t e ,
to m ake reada le b Tu m i ti c m a g ti ti c
characters
.
,
.
To believe in to profess to vow , ,

. Su m a m p a la ta y a .
To obey . Su m u n o d .
l o suck to draw m i lk fro m the

‘
b Su m os o
,
reast .
To nu rse to feed th e suckling

,
. M a g pa s os o .
The wet nurse ; the teat o r dug

A ng sisi n a ; ang susuh an
con sidered as the feeding place ‘
.
The m ilk the feeding substance ;

,
t he dug or teat considered as to A ng s u s u hi n .
the food drawn fro m i t .
He who is whipping A n g hu ng m a ha m p as ( 1) .
He whi pped . A n g hu n g m a m p as ( 1) .
He will whi p . A n g ha ha m p as ( 1) .
He i s bei ng w hi pped . A n g hi na ha m p as ( 1) .
He was A n g hi n a m p as ( 1) .
He wi ll be A n g ha ha m p a s i n ( 1)
'
To report to tell ,
. M a g s a li ta .
R e porte d t old ( with out any refer

, ,
Sa htln , yp a g s a li ta
ence to ti m e )
.
The reporting person reporter ,

. A ng n a g s a s a li t a .
The person who reported . A ng n a g s a li t a
wi ll report . A n g m a g s a s a li t a .
wou ld report A n g m a g a s a li t a d is i n
.
s .
A n s m a h t a, ang y s m a li t a yp 1n a g s a
What was reported 3 lgm
The tale to b e reported . A ng s a s a li t i n ,ang y s a s a li t a .
The tale that i s reported . A ng s i n a s a li t a ang y s i n a s a lita

, .
The person reported to ( infinitive

A ng p a gs a ht a a n
.
no s p e cific ti m e )
or . l .
The person to w ho m so m et hing

A n g p i n a g s a li ta an
ha s been reported
.
o
.
The person to w ho m so m ethi ng )

A n g p ag s a s a h l a a n
wil l be reported ) .
To wrap up . M a g b alo t .
Wrapped up ( wi thou t 1e f e re n c e
B e lo t i n
(
.
t o t i m e m an ner o r pl a ce)
,
(1 S c ho l a rs w i ll n o t f a l l t o n o t e t he a n a lo g y w hi c h i n w ha t r e g a rd s t he
,
e x p re s s i o n of t e ns e , b e t w e e n t he Ta g a lo g a n d
e xi s ts t he G re e k p a r t i ci p le s
e x hi b i te d i n the c o rr e s p o n d i n g w o rd s : o t e w t t og , o t é
’
as 0 t UTtt C
OV
t V, 0
‘ '
p
t u nt op s v o q, e t e t npp é v o q , o w lbo o o ii e v o c .
THE P A R TI CI P L E . 169
The thi ng w hich is b eing wrap A n g b i n a b alo t

p ed up
.
Tha t whi ch ha s been wrapped up . A n g b i n alo t .
The i nstru m ent with whi ch so m e

thing w
i ll be wrapped up
A n g y b a b alo t .
b
.
The bundle o r the t hing to e

wrapped i n the cove ring ( i n d e te r
m in a te ) .
The cove rin g whi c h served fo r

, .
E
»
A ng b e lotan .
so m e t hin g t o have been wrap A n g p i n a g b a lu ta n .
p e d up .
The des truc ti on o f Sodo m i s wri t A n g p a g ca s i ra nang Sodo m a 1 n a ti tt

ten i n the Holy Scri p t ure tic s a San tong Sulat . .
The co m ing of Jesus Chri s t was A n g p a g da t i n g n i J e s u c ri s t0 1 n a c a s u

wri t ten i n t he Holy Scri p tu re l at s a San tong Sti la t . .
Wri te on tha t paper Su la ta n m o iy ang papel

. .
Thi s i s t he paper fo r hi m t o wri te I t ong papel n a i t o ang siy ang su s ula

'
'
upon . ta n n i y a .
On wha t paper d id yo u wri te t he dA n o bag a ang si nulatan m o n an g

verses ? m an a tul a? g
What will be wri t t e n by your fa t her gA n o a n g s u s u la ti n nang a m a m o s a
t o you r bro ther ? iy e ng c a p a ti d n a lalaqui ?
He ha s already wri t t en to hi m t o Ys i n ula t n a n iy a s a caniy a na p a ri to
co m e here i m m edia tely siy a p a g d a ca . .
L e t t he m wri t e wi t h thi s pen Ys ulat n il a i t ong plu m a . .
L e t t hi s b e the pe n wi t h which I t ong p lu m a n g i to an g ys ulat nil a

the p rayer be wri t ten by the m nang p a n a la n gi n . .
L e t thi s be the pe n with whi c h you I t ong p lu m a n g i to ang y s u s ula t m o ,
shall wri te t o you r school m aster s a i y on g m aestro -

. .
Creed t he A postles
’
creed th e be
, ,
A ng s u ma s a m p a la ta y a
liever
.
A ng s u ngmas a m p a la ta y a cay J e s u c ri s
He who believes in Chris t a n d obe y s
to a t s u n g m o s o n o d s a ca n i y an g aral
( ollo w s )hi s doctri ne wi ll be saved
f ,
.
siy a ang m a p a p a c a g a li n g .
That obey ing ( obedient)boy wi ll be I y ang batan g s u n g m o s o n o d s u s u n o r i n

b
,
o eyed when a m a n . siy a na m an cu n g lu m a q u i .
A j udicious girl i s prais ed by eve A n g m a hi n hi n g d a la g a i p i n u p u rl nang , ,
ry b o dy 0 lahat
was estee m ed
.
The virtuo us man . A n g banal na t au o a y m i n a ha l .
(
I tong b i y a y a n g it o i s a a q u i n g sin i
Thi s present i s for my sweethear t , ,
.
sint a .
The person wh o is loved an d A n g n a i b i g ang s i n i s i n ta ang casi n

‘
re , ,
c i p r o ca t e s . tahan
The pers c h who i s love d withou t
b
eing aware of i t
To kill
A n g i n n b i g an g n a s i n la
.
P u m a tay
l ,
.
The ki lling poison ( t he poiso n that l

A n g n a ca m a tay na lason
.
kills )
.
Killed ( without reference to the

Pa t ay
.
actio n or ti m e )
.
The m a n killed ( he wh o was killed ) A n g p i n a t ay n a t a u t)

. . .
The d ee r that i s bei ng killed A n g u s ang p i n a p a tay . .
The dove that will be k illed A n g c a la p a t i ng p a p a ta y i u

. .
Th e i ns t ru m ent of kil li n g ( in definite ) A n g y p a t ay . .

w w
The s ord h ich as u s e d i n killing w . A n g y p i n a tay na sandata .
z
The o n e w hi ch w i llb e u s e d f o r ki lli n g . A n g s a n da tan g y p a p a tay .
The person who m the dea th of th e

A n g p a ta y an
victi m affects
.
Th lace for m urder to be c o m m 1t

w or d i d e grave)
0
t ( f A n g p a ta y a n ( the s ma .
Do do do ha s een co m m itted b A n g p i n a g p a ta y a n
w
. .
The p lac e of a holesale massacre . A n g p a g p a ta y a n a n .
THI R TI E TH —
E X E R CI SE .
What i s the reaso n for m any person s to fall do n ? The reason w

for m any to fall i s their stu m bling I s fever i n th e P h ilippi nes
b
.
a cause for m a ny persons to di e ? N o t only fever ut also other ,
co m plai n ts are the cause o f m any E uropea ns dyi ng i n the Ph i lip .
pi nes W here d i d the servant fall ?

. He fell o n the road Why .
did he fall down ? H e fell down because h e was d run k By who m

,
ha s this been da s he d ? I t has b een d a s he d by our fri end What .
s hall we d a r t to hi m ? L e t us throw an o range to hi m F o r who m .
did th e god f ather throw the m oney o n co m ing ou t fro m ch urch ?

H e threw i t fo r the b oys How m uch i s th e re m ai nder of the m o n
.
ey I sent you last week ? The re m ai nder i s thi rty three dollars .
How m uch of i t will be left after paying the tailor ? There wi ll r e

m ai n o nly six teen reals Where did m y cousi n wish t o s tay the
.
other day ? He re m ai n ed ( wi llingly) at Cavi te A n d where was thei r

b w
.
s o n left behind by hi s c o m pani o ns ? He was le ft ehi nd in the oo ds .
What did he wri t e with ? Wi th a quill On which p ape r shal l I

w
.
wri te ? Do n o t wri te on any p aper you shall ri te o n a d esk

b
.
,
Do you believe i n G o d? Ye s Si r I elieve i n G o d and obey

, ,
Hi m Does your baby n urse s till ? I t i s stil l nu rsi ng as i t i s o nly

.
,
six m on ths old Who nurses it ? I t i s n ursed by a wo m an who

.
ca m e fro m the coun try W ha t will you tell you r grandso n ? I

.
will tell hi m no thing To who m did the blacks m ith repor t tha t
.
news ? He re p orted i t t o m y bro ther s coun try m en What i s the ’

.
wo m an wrapping i n that paper ? I t i s so m e cloth she i s wrappi ng

up . Wha t thing i s t o be used by her to wrap the cloth in ? She
uses paper t o wrap i t i n How m any wild boars will the na t ive
w
.
kill ? H e ill kill m any for h e i s clever Wh a t does he kil l t he m

, .
wi t h ? He ki lls th e m wi th a spear Where d id he kill th ose .
seven h e b rough t the O t her day ? He k illed the m i n th e fores t

w
.
Wha t i ll you do wi t h t ha t s wo rd ? I shall kill m y e ne m y wi th i t .
T H I R TY F I R S T L E S S O N
—
.
YC A T L O N G P O U O , T, l S A N G PA G A R A L .
TH E PA S T PA RTI CI P L E .
Havi ng been ad m i tted of the existence i n Tagalog of a past parti

c i le o r par ti cipial n oun developed fro m tense m ood and v oice ve rbal
p ,
for m s by the app l i cat i on of the article the i m portance of a n a cquaint

'
,
THE TA G A L O G LAN GUA GE .
place for th e perfo r m a nce of the m anual acti o n a nd o nly t he con te xt ,
serves to disti nguish these two latter senses fro m those the p articiple s
have i n reference to the writing for the con veyance of thought Se e .
the followi ng i llustration s :
Ys ula t z l ti s u a m o s a iy eng i na ang

n
Write to your m o th er the ( news d t i n n i on g c a p a t i d na b a
p g
a a n g a g y
o f arrival of your si ster
) . b aye or s a latan m o ang i y b ng i n a
, ,
n ang etc .
Write with this pen . I t ong plu m a a n g y s fi la t m o .
I ton g la m esang 1to ang s 1y ang m ong

Do on desk ,
u la t a n
. .
p ag s .
verbs m ore or less allied i n sense to the above o nes ad m i t of

Other ,
an i n passive participle togethe r with the y o ne ; b ut here so m e re m arkab le

de v iation s especially as to the re f ere n ce o f the for m i n a n are exhi b ited
, , ,
that m a y offer so m e i nsight i nto the pecul iar characte r of the language .
To i nqui re inqui red about i n quir

, ,
e d fro m i nqui red fro m i n a Tu m a no n g y ti n a n o n g t i n a n o n g tina

g
~
, , , ,
way as to obtai n counsel or the non an .
solving of so m e p roble m .
To sing sung ( the song considered

,
m usically ) sung ( th e song story ) M a g au i t i n au i t ,y n i a u i t i n a u i ta n

, , , , ,
.
sung ( i n honor of o r before )

, , .
To tal k talked ( topic ) talked to

, U m os a p y n i os a p q u i n a o s a p q u i n a o
, , , , ,
talked with sapan

. .
V w
erb s by hich a ch a n ge i n th e p os i t io n o f the obj ec t i s
expressed an d those e x p re s i v e o f ac tio ns by v i r tu e of wh ich the agen t ,
willi n gly an d conscio u sly loses co n tro l o f o r p a r t s co m pa ny wi th , ,
so m ething exhibi t t h e sa m e p ec u liari ty o f n o t a d m i t ti ng o f the i n

,
passive par ti ciple and o f the y o ne bein g us e d i n refere nce to the

"
,
d i rect o b je c t o f the verb the a n p articiple re m aining un changed i n ,
its reference to the person or to the place i n the dative or locative , , ,
case on who m o r o n wh ich the a c ti o n i s to be acco m plished

, . .
To sell sold sold to

, , .
To sell by retail sold by retail

( M agot ay , y p i n a g o tay , p i na g o ta y a n
, ,
sold by retail to
.
To put to dry to ex pose to sun ,
shine ; exposed to sunshine e x p ,

M a g b i la d ; y b i n i la d , b i n i la ra n .
o e cd to sunshi ne at .
To place placed placed a t

, , . M a g la g ay , y n i la g ay li n a g u i an , .
To scatter scattered s c a t t e r e d
, ,
M a g b u la g s a g y b i n u la g s a c b i n u la g s
, ,
a
upon . gan .
I
ver s denoting an action
n b
hich as long as i t re m ain s n u w ,
m o di fi ed i s i ndi ffe rent o r neuter the i n passive participle refe rs to

, ,
the result of the acquisiti ve the p a rtici ple wi th y to that of the ,
alienating action .
To re a ch reached ( thing ) reached

U m a bo t i n a b o t a b o ta n
, , ,
overta k en ( person ) ,
, , .
To h and over h anded over hand

M a ga b ot , y p i nag ab ot, p i na g a bo ta n
, ,
e d o v e r to
.
.
THE PA ST I ’ ’
A E TrcI PL E .
To e xcha n g e f o r recei ved i n ex

~
change for exchanged for fro m P u m a li t m alit p a li ti n pal 1tan

, ,
r -
, ,
’
.
or at ( place) . l
To exchange for given i n exchange ,
fo r given i n exchange fo r at M a g p a li t ; y p i n a gp a li t p i n ag p a li ta n
, .
,
.
( place )
In a cti ve verbs deno ting an actio n by wh ich th e subj ect gains
control of so m ething the i n pass ive participle i s used i n re f erence to .
the direct obj ect of the verb and refers to th e thing se cured as the
i m m ediate result o f the action ; that with y to the pe rson fro m who m ,
o r i f the acti on i s o f such a kind as not to ad m it of p roceeding

,
fro m a person to the p lace or sou rce fro m which the acquis i tio n
,
i s m ade .
To take , taken taken with take n

, , Cu m o ha , q u i n o ha , yq u i n o h a , q ui no
fro m . nan ( e p e n tl1 ) . .
To grasp grasped grasped ( i n r e

Cu m 1m q u 1m q u 1n 1m q u 1m y q u 1n 1m
ference to the hand ) snatched , ,
qui m q u i ni m q u i m a n ,
fro m
.
,
.
To prey p reyed preyed with ta ken Cu m a m ca m q u i n a m ca m y q u i na m ca m

, , , , , ,
by violence fro m q u i n a m c a m a n
To sei z
e sei z
ed sei ed with sei z z
. .
, ed D u m a q u i p d i n a q u i p y di n a q u i p di
, , , , ,
at fro m, n acp an ( cont )

. . .
In verb s o f thi s ki nd wh ere th e actio n expressed i s such as ,
n o t to ad m i t of an i nstru m ent fo r the perfo r m ance th e parti ciple

with y r efers to t he ca u se o r reason ; bu t the m eans by wh ich the
,
thin g i s acqui red o r the person i n consideratio n of o r fo r the sake , ,
o f who m the actio n i s done m a y s tand i n the relatio n of cause o r

, ,
reason and be referred to by th e participle with y .
To ask for asked for ( thi ng ) asked , , Hu m i ngi hi n i n gi y hi n i n gi b i ngi ngan

, , ,
for ( person ) asked fo r fro m ( cont )

b
, . .
To receive rece i ved recei ved ec , , Tu m a n g a p , ti nang a p , y ti n a nga p , ti

ause of received fro m , . n a nga p a n .
( co n t ) .
To reduce to captivi ty reduced to

Bu ha g " b i n tha g , y b 1n i h a g
ggfi gfig
,
captivi ty reduced to capti vity by g

,
a
re a son of reduc ed to capti vity at , .
o
The deci sive i nfl uence which the con sideration actio n as o f the
one of an acquisitive o r of an alienati ng characte r exercises o ver ,
the sense o f th e o ne o r of the other for m o f participles m a y f u r the 1 ,
be seen i n the follo wing i llustrations o f p arti ciples derived fro m ve rbs
of action purporti ng subj ecti ve m otion .
To run run down run a ay

, , w w i th , Tu m a cb o m a g ta cb o t i n a cbo, y ti na c bo
-
, ,
run for and given to . t i n a c b o ha n .
To ad vance advan ced togethe r ,
with advanced that i s to say

U m o n a m agon a, i no n a y n i o n a i n o n a
, , , - o
borne or carried to the fore m ost , ,
rank as an standard ; overtaken han .
and left beh i nd ( person )

d
.
To e e a t retreate w ub retreat
ég U moron g m é ro n g y n o ro n , i noro nga n
, , ’
g
-
, .
e
THE TA GA L O G LA N GUA GE .
To swi m swu m for ( thing ) swu m

, , L u m a n goy m a g la n goy li n an go , y lina
‘
-
, y
a way wi th swu m for ( ashore ) , . n goy li na n go y a n p i na g la ngoy a n -
.
To j u m p j u m ped for j u m ped b e

, , L u m o c s o m ag lo cs o l1n ocs o, y hn o cs o, ,
cause of j u m ped at , . li n o cs o ha n .
To go u p t a i r s g one u pstai rs for , ,
gone upstairs because o f fou nd Pu m a n hi c m a n b i o h m

0
,
-
, p 1n a n 1c , yp a n
upstai rs and lai d hands upon . hic n a p a n hi ca n
, .
( person )
To go downstairs gon e downstai rs
b M an a og i i pina
,
p n a n a o g, yp na n ao g,
for go n e downstai rs ecause of
,
,
foun d do w nstairs
,
n aogan .
b
In ver s fo rm ed fro m an a m iguous root o r i n those denoti ng b ,
searching i n quite a general sense the distinction betwee n th e m e a n s u o r

w
,
i nstru m ent and th e perso n i s m ade known by the ord i n th e n o mm a t i v e

signifying one o r other o f th ese th ree things . .
z
To uy b bo ght ought with or for
, u ,
b , ,
B u m i li bi n i li y b i n i ll, b i n i lhan
bought fro m .
, .
To h s ch osen chosen for chos

gg g l P u m i li , p
, , ,
pinili , yp i n i li , i n ili an
e
To seek sough t , sought fo r so u gh t
, , Hu m an a p , hi n ana p , y hi n an a p , hi ng
at or fro m
, . napan .
The follo i n g e xpressions w w ill m ake m an ifest the a b ove dis tinctions :
b
I h ave ought thi s ook with the b A ng s e lap i ng bi ni gu i a n a co n i a m a
m oney given m e y m y father b ang siy ang y b i n i ll co n i ton g libro
,
b
. .
Buy for m e that ook . Yb i ll m o a c o n iy ang l ibro .
Choose ( select)fo r m y wi fe the best Yp i li m o a n g a q u i ng a s au a na n g lalong

’
m a n goes on the m arket m a b u b u ti n g m anga s a pa m ilihan .
Search with thi s light for th e rat Itong llao na i tb ang y han a p m o nang
g
,
that hid itself so m ewhere i n the dag ang n a ca ta g o s a cos i n a can i

kitchen before i n th e m orni ng nang u m aga
b b
. .
F etch m e the book I was read Yhan a p m o a co nang li b ro ng ina as a

ing efore b .
co ca n gi n a .
b
In ver s for m e d fro m roots denoting an a s s i m i llab le q u a hty ,
distinction should be m ade bet w een t he i nchoative an d the f a c t iti v

v e rb that is to say etween f or i nstance whiten “
to gro w h1te ;
a b w
, , ,
,
“ ”
to m a ke w hi te
'
and white n “
to b leach I nchoative verbs be i ng
b
, , .
i ntransitive can only have su j ective partici ples with th e prefix na o r

, .
,
m ore frequently with ma the p article of the i n fi n 1t1v e o r 1n d e fi n 1t

, ,
ive tense followed by the p erfective n a i n reference to the a c co m p l

, ,
i s hm e n t upon the subj ect of the ac tion w hi ch i s the re s ult o f the as

si m ilative pr o gress ; and ith y ca i n reference to what ha a
been the w , .
The f a ct1t1v e verb

.
occasion for the subj ect to assu m e the quality

b
.
,
like m ost other transitive ver s has the i n participle i n reference to

.
, ,
the m atter which i s the i mm ediate or pri m ary resu lt of the a ctl on
.
b
,
for instance the su stanc e prepared ; the a n participle m reference to the

, ,
thing which i s the ulti m ate result of the action of applying the substance
to other thing ; and the participle with y i n refe rence to the i nstr u m en t
.
w b w
.
w ith hich or the m eans y , hich the application 1s m ade .
To b eco m e white b eco m e white P u mu tt m a m u tt, na mu ti m a puti us

b e o me white b ecau e f
— -
, , ,
c s o .
yq u i na p u ti .
THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A G E .
To varn ish varni shed varnish ed , ,

Hu mi bo hi n i b c an y hi n i b o
with .
, , .
To shave sh aved sh aved with , , . U m a hi t i n a hi ta n y n i a hi t

, . .
To le a r n le a r n e d le a rn e d b e ca u s
, , e of . M a g aral p i n a g a ra la n y p i n a g ara l
, , .
To pay , paid pai d with , . M a g b ay a d b i n a y a ra n y b i n ay a d

, , .
M a g s a ra ( corr p f the Sp word ce r r a r )

To shut , shut sh ut with , . . .
s m a r han
y s m a ra
.
,
, .
Here t o o the fa ct s hould be n oti ced of so m e verbs ex hibiting

b
,
d ou le pa rti ciples i n _1n a n d i n a n i n reference to t he d irect obj ect

’
, ,
t he on e o r t he ot her to be u sed respectively accordin g to w hether , ,
such reference i s to the re s ult of t he agent s labo r o r to s uch a c ha nge

’
o r tran sfor m ation a s has been rough t about y t he operatio n a nd lies b b

m anifest o n the ob je ct
'
To clean cle a ned out of cleaned 1 M a li n i s

li n i s i n , li n i s y n a li n i s
, , ,
the space cleaned cleaned with i g an ,

( ) , .
b
, ,
To rub rub ed of rubbed ( th e

, , ,
Cu m o s cos , q u i n o s cos , q u inos co s a n
space )ru bb e d w i th
,
.
y q u i n o s cos .
To scou r s cou r e d ( m atter g at h ered

,
Hu m u ga s hm og a s hm o g a s an , y h1n o
i n by scouri n g ) s cou re d ( s p a ce \ , ,
w
,
scoured ith .
Other
verbs i n which the i n passive partici ple i s wa n ting , ,
ex hibi t th e sa m e p eculi a rity of a double participle i n a n and wi t h

y i n referen ce to the di rect o bj ect .
To sowed ( the seed ) sowed

l
s ow ,
M a g s ab o g , y s i n ab o g i n a bo g a n
, .
s
( the fi eld )
, .
To l l t Pla n te d ithe v 0u 11g shoot

l i t } M a g ta n 1m y t1na n 1m , t m a m n a n ( cont )
, ,
ed ( the f eld ) , . .
p a
is scarcely n ecessary to say here agai n that m a ve rbs have

I t
no i n passive participle I t i s only pertinen t to re m ark that the .
an partici p le a s s u m es a different for m according to w hethe r the

action i s fortuitous or the ac t of a sensible subj ect I n fo rtuitous .
occurrences by which so m e one i s affected th e si m ple for m of the ,
an partici ple stands for the person secondarily affected by the ev ent ;
th e for m wi th ca prefixed for the place With regard to the partici ple , .
with y it i s to be noticed that besides re f ering to the i nst ru m ent

, , ,
or cause it m a y also refer to the speci fi c ti m e i n which the fortuitous

,
in cident ca m e to pass ; there existing a tendency i n a n a tive s m in d ’
to regard ti m e an d event i n a m ore i nti m ate relatio n of cause and

e ff ect th a n exists i n ours .
To die dead deprived of by death

, , ,
M a m atay , n a m at ay ,
n a m a ta y an -
m ina
dead at dead of or at ( ti m e )
, ,
. . t ay an , q u i n a m a ta y a n , y q u i n a m a t ay .
To be sad been sad been sad over

, , ,
M a lu m b ay , n a lu m b ay m i n a lu m b ay , q u i -
been sad because of . n a lu m b a y an , y q u i n a lu m b ay .
M t t 1n a co ta n q u m a t a co ta n ,
aaggp
-
y t 1
To fear feared feare d because of
, ,
.
To be glad been glad been glad M at oua n a tou a , q u i n a tou a a n , y q u i na

g
, , ,
over been glad be c ause of

,
. t oua .
To be a sleep been asleep been , ,

M a t o lo g , n a t o lo g , t m o lo g a n , yq u ma
asleep i n or on been asleep , ,
t o lo g
because of or at ( tl m e )
.
.
,
.
THE PA s r PA HTI CI PL E
b
Ver s expressive of the di rection of one s m otion ( p a ver s ) ’
b ,
h ave the particle with y i n reference to the reason ; a n d the a n ,
participle i n reference to the place The p erso n m a y be re f erred to

,
.
by ei ther the o ne o r the other o f these two participles according ,
to whether such a person is considered to b e th e o ne for the sake

of w ho m the action i s perfor m ed ; o r as the goal or fi nal d estination
'
"
of one s m otion Thus i cao a ny y q u i n ap a r i to co m ean s : i t i s for
’ ‘
,
.
,
thy sake that I ca m e h ere ; an d i cao a ny p i n a r i tn ha n co I ca m e

“ ’
, ,
”
here to pay thee a vi si t ; I f the reason or force that dra w s so m e
body to a p la ce i s to be rep resented as un controllable y with ca
b
, , ,
an d therefore y ea should e used for th e p urpose ,

.
To co m e here co m e here b ecause ,
of or fo r the sake of ; c om e here

,
F arit o n a p a ri tb , y p i n a ri to y q u i n a p a
,
-
to see or as the fi nal stage of

,
ri te ; p i n a ri to ha n .
the trip :
To go there gone there gone there
, ,
P ariy an n a p a r i y an y p i n a r i y an y q u i n a -
because of or fo r the s a ke of ;
,
,
pariy an ; p i n a ri y a n a n ( rarely used )

,
gone there to see o r to settle

. .
.
,
To go yonder gone yonder gon e

b
, ,
yonder ec a use of o r for the ,

Par don ; n a p a roo n , yp i n a roo n
yq u i n a -
sake of ; gone yonde r to see or par don p i n a roona n

b d
.
, ,
to the place one i s oun f o r .
TH I R TY FI R ST E XE R CI SE —
.
Where shall I look for the shirt ? L ook fo r i t i n the roo m Wi th .
what i s i t to be sought ? Seek i t wi th this light What have you .
t aken ? I took t he boo k fro m John Does the child refus e to eat .
an d dri nk ? He ha s n othing to eat o r dri n k and besid es he ha s no

b
,
p late o r tu m ler W hat ha s he boug ht ? He ha s bought a fl o w e r fro m

.
Jan e Have yo u the wherewith a l to buy a house ? N o I h ave not

b
.
,
the wherewithal to uy one Why do you not ask m oney fro m your .
uncle ? I cannot I snatched fro m hi m thi s m oney

, What did your
father present you wi th ? He p resented m e wi th a watch W ha t has .
been announ ced by you to you r friend ? I reported to hi m the

death of hi s si ster What i s poi n ted out by t hat boy ? He poi n t s
.
out that tree To who m has he reco m m ended the co m m issio n of hi s

.
serv a n t? He has reco m m ended i t to the priest What a r e you cook

i n g? I t i s so m e fish that i s being cooked by m e F o r who m do .
y ou cook i t? I cook i t for m y brother What does th at s a 1lo r 1n t end .
to acco m plish running so m uch ? He intends to overtake that dog .
Why does P eter j u m p so m uch ? He j u m ps to reach so m e fr u it For .
who m di d you go u ps tai rs ? I t was m y brother fo r w ho m I went

upsta irs. Who m are your si sters afrai d of ? They fear th e dead L e t .
the m fear Go d and let the m not allow the m selve s to b e fri ghtened
by ghosts Who m ha s the neighbour been deprived of by death ?
.
His m other ha s d ied ( to hi m ) ( He m ourns t h e d eath of hi s m other )

. .
When did sh e d i e ? She died the first day o f M arch What di d .
s he die of? She was d rowned Over who m do yo u rej oi ce ? I r e .
j oice over m y ch ildren Who m will your relati ve co m e fo r? He will

.
co m e for m y sister to behold the p rocession Why did m y cousi n

b
.
co m e here ? He ca m e here to pay hi s de ts Who m are you going .
to vi si t? I a m going to vi s i t the p riest .

THE TA GA LO G L A N GUA GE .
THI R TY S E CO N D L E S SO N P .
YC A TL O N G P O U O, T, D A L A U A N G PA GA R A L .
THE M E A N I N G A N D US E O F THE V A R I OU S P A SS I V E S .
I N PA S S I V E .
The proper u se of the o ne or the other of the Tagalog passives

has often b
een truly referred to as the m ost d ifficult task i n the
study of the language ; bu t if the in struction s have been well under ,
sto od that were given through paradig m s and occasio nal re m arks i n
the foregoing chap t ers the student has here to face no i n s u rm o u n t
b
, .
a le difficulties the way havi ng been paved for hi m to thorough ly

b
,
‘
grasp the m atter y what has been sai d about the past participl e
,
in the preceding lesson '
The use of the i n for m i s the m ore easily to be u nders tood ,
as i t i s the one which correspon ds bes t i n analogy wi th th e E nglish

passive By eli m ina t ing : fi rs r ma v e rb s ; n e x t t hose requiri ng t wo
.
,
.
,
co m ple m en ts ; then tho se by which the subj ect parts co m pany wi th

b
,
so m ething ; and al so i ntransitive verbs of action ; all other ver s as

a rule ad m it o f eing exp ressed i n thi s passive b
b
.
,
The i n passive i s therefore the one to e used with m ost

b
, ,
active ver s i n reference to their direct obj ect or necessary co m ple

m ent ,that i s to say i n referen ce to what i s the i mm ediate o r ,
pri m ary result of an action consciously an d purposely perfor m ed by

the agent a n d f or the a g e n t w hen said di rect o bj ect o r n ecessary ,
co m ple m ent i s specifically exp ressed i n the sentence an d no i ndi rect

o bj ect o r secondary circu m stance of place i nstr u m ent reason o r ti m e , ,
as to the action i s added ; o r if any such ci rcu m sta nce i s exp ressed , ,
when i t i s not i nten ded to accord to the sa m e the pri ncipa l p lace
i n the sentence
b
.
The specifi c ation follows of those ver s to whi ch the above

passive i s to e applied b .
The i n passive i s used :
Wi th verbs by the acti o n of which t he subj ect s a i m to reach

’
o r secure so m ethi ng ei th er i n act o r i n thought is m anifes ted , , .
To carry away b y bi rds o f prey to

D u m é g m f da g u mn
0
,
be carried away by bi rds 5

'
’ ,
To des poi l to pi llage ; to b e des,

Su m a m s a m s a m s a m i n °
p o i le d etc , 5 . .
To select to be selected , Pu m i li m a m ili p i li i n .

-
,
.
To s coop to be scooped out of

, D u m oc o t d o co t i n .
,
.
z
To borro w to be borrowed ( things ) H u m i r a m hi ra m i n b ir m in ( con t )
, . .
,
-
.
To p ray to be prayed , D u m a la ngi n d a la n gi n i n , .
To swallow ; to be swa llowed L u m a m o n la m o n i n .

, .
To
figgggga g
t ra w m breath ; to be
H u m i thi t; hi t hi ti n .
a
To sip to be si pped
, . H u m i g o p hi g o p i n, .
To send for to su m m on to be s um 1
Su m ong do song d o m
, ,
ne d
.
.
5
180 THE TA G A L oG L AN GU A G E .
b
With ver s the action of which necessarily falls u pon a person i n ,
reference to such person as i s genera lly directly affected by the action ; , ,
To invite to e invited b U m aq u i t a q u i ti n
b H u m i n tay hi n ta y i nz
.
, .
,
To wai t for to e waited for hi n ti n ( cont )

be i
, .
, .
To ask ; to be inquired to n
,
M a g ta n o n g ; ta n o n gi n
qui red for
.
To prevail on to be prevailed on M a g a r og a a r og a i n
, .
, .
To repri m and to b e repri m anded Su m al a salah in , .

,
.
To succor to carry an infant i n

'
ar m s ; to be succored l,
Su m a clolo s a clolo hi n
.
, .
Wi th verb s of destruction a n d those i m plying c hange or

t ransfor m a t ion i n the n a ture of th e o bj ect to i ndi ca te th e result of ,
such destruction or ch ange i f n o reference as to the in stru m ent o r

’ '
, , ,
cause i s m ean t .
To do away with to be done away

Gu m i b a g u i b a i n ,
wi th
.
,
.
To kill to be killed , P u m a tay patayi n .

,
.
To set fire to to b e set fire to Su m ono g s o n o g u i n

,
.
,
.
To unsea m to be unsea m ed Tu m a s tas t a s ta s i n

,
.
,
.
To receive in exch a nge to be

P u m a li t p a li ti n ,
received i n exchange
.
,
.
To beco m e black to be m ade into

b U m i ti m i t i m i n ,
lack ,
.
b
.
To arrange to e arranged H u mtrs a y hu s a y i n

’
. .
, ,
The effect of so m e destruc ti ve an i m ate agent m a y

i n dicated be
b y expressing i n thi s passive the root indicative o f such age nt .
L ocust to e destroyed by locusts

,
b . B alang b a la n g i n , .
R at ,
rats . Dag a dagain, .
Crow , crows . Ou a c o u a q u i n
, .
A nt ants L anga m la n g a m i n
K
.
, ’ , .
ite eagle ; preyed on

,
kites . B anoy b a n oy i n , .
I n t he
sa m e m a nn er with ver s of carry ing cutting weighing , b , , ,
m easuring or m ovin g i n reference to what i s the result of any such

actions when considered on the a gen t s Si de e r ter m in ated i n hi m ’
b
.
,
”
Thus “
rought , d i n a la:
“
sen t yp i n a d a la , , .
To carr on th e shoulders to be
carri edthat way
1
,
P u m a s a m as an m a g p a s anm
y an , p as
- -
.
To dra g along to be dragged alo n g , . H u m i la h i la hi n ,
To carry along with t o be Carri ed ,

M a g ta g lay tag -
la y m
alon g wi th , .
b
.
To carry along elow the a r m p I t ,

M a g q u rhc q m ll q u m
to be carried along that w a y .
, .
To hold up in the ar m s to be held ,

M a g oal en , calo n gin
u p in th e a r m s
.
To cut ( generic) to be cu t , . M a g p oto l p o tli n ( co n t ) , . .
To tear to be torn , . G u m isi g u i s i i n , .
To cut out to be cut out Tu m a b as tab a sin

b
, .
, .
To he w to e hewn Ta m ag a tag i a ( con t ) -
dw b d
, .
,
. .
To cut o n to f ell ; to e felle , . M a gs a p o l; s a p oli n .

THE M E A N I N G AN D U SE o r TH E V A R I O U S PA SSI V ES .
To w eigh ( generic) to b , w eighed

e . Tu m i m b a n g m a g ti m b a ng , ti mb a ngi n
-
.
To ra m , or li q u l d s ) to
.
s paég
gpa
i r
( Tu m acal ta ca li n
,
b
.
,
x s l r
To m easure to ascertai n t he quan ,
ti ty of a li quid by sounding with Tu m arol; t a ro li n .
a rod ; to be m eas ured tha t way .
fro m a prepos itive possessive pronoun a ver i n the i n

If b
passive i s for m ed the clai m ( of the perso n o r perso n s to who m the
,
pronou n refers ) to the property o f the thin g whi ch i s the di rect

obj ect of the ver thus for m ed i s thereby i ndi cated b , .
M ine , I repute i t to be m ine A quin i n a a q u i n co .

,
.
Th i n e I re puted i t to be thine
,
I y o i n i y o co .
, .
Do hold it as thi ne Do i y o hi n m o
d b
. .
, ,
H I S etc ; I wi ll hol it to e hi s hers

,
Caniy a; ca c a n i y a hi n co ,
. .
Ours let hi m hold i t as ours

,
A m in aa m i n i n niy a .
, .
Do we repute it as ours
,
A tin i n a a t i n n a ti n .
, .
Yours I wil l hold it as you rs ( plu r ) I n y b 11n y ohi n co

,
. .
, .
Thei rs m ake it thei rs

,
Canil e c a n ila hi n m o .
,
for m ed wi th
A dj ectives ma an d having an att ri utive sen s e b
m ay b
e constructed I n the sa m e m ann er ; o r a r t , property “
reputi ng ; ’
b
,
may e used i n this passive with t he plai n for m o f th e adj ective

follo wi ng .
J ust fai r u prigh t

, , . M ar apat .
I hold i t to be j ust M i n a m a r ap a t co , i n s e ri cong m ar apat

d
. .
Bad I repute i t ba M asa m a I n a a r i con g m asa m a

bd
. . . .
He will repute that as a . M a m a s a m ai n n iy a iy an .
The thing m ade o r to be m ade o r i nto which so m e ra w or

b e ex pr ssed i n thi s
,
preparatory m aterial i s to be e tran s for m ed m a y

passi ve t he m atter acted u po n being put i n th e no m i native case i f it
, ,
i s n ot ci rcu m scribed i n sense .
I will m ake sh oes out o f this leath er Itong balat na i to i s a s a p i n i n co .

, ,
.
M a k e pants and aprons out of that I y an g c a y o ng iy a i s a la u a li n at ta p i s i n , ,
cloth . m
I m ade a walking stick out of th at
Yaou g c aho y n a va e i ti non g cor co
log . i
If a n oun expressing a condition capa le of eing assi m ilated b b
by the subj ect o r extende d t o o thers i s exp ressed i n thi s passive
b
, ,
’
the su j ect s design o f acquiring such condition is expressed .
M ake hi m your friend . Ca to tohi n m o S iy a .
I consider you as m y father you are ,
m y g od father ( stand as a parent .

,
I n aa m a qu it a .
a father to m e ) .
Consider m e as a son s ta n d as a
} A naq u in m o 106
,
1
godfathe r to m e .
.
( 1) Thi s m u s t be u nd e r s to o d of t he I fa p p rOp ri a t e or n e c e s s a ry m a te r i a l:
thi s is n o t t he ca s e , r e f e re n ce w i ll b e t o t he e la b o ra t i o n
the Se e t hrs 1llu s t r a t e d .
“
t w o f o llo w i n g e x a m p le s : i to n g baca l n a i to n, p a p a la co li n co I w i ll m a k e
'
in t he ,
1 w i l l a x ( f a s hi o n
”
i teng cahoy na i t0, i , p ap a la coli n co,
'
“
o u t o f t hi s i ro n ,
‘
a n a xe
”
s ha pe ) thi s ti mb e r .
With so m e i n tr a n sitive verb s of actio n d enoti n g acts which

ad m it of a definite purpose for thei r perfor m a n ce this passive is used ,
i n reference to the o bj ec t toward which the action i s di rected . .
To fly to fly for
,
. L u m i p a d li p a r i n
,
.
To run to r u n fo r Tu m a c b o ta cb ohi n
g
.
,
.
,
To swi m to swi m for ,

. L u m a n goy lan oyin ,
.
To dive to dive for,

. Su m i s i d Sisi ri n
,
.
To peep out to peep out for ,

. D u m o n ga o d u n ga o i n ,
.
With all Tagalog causative verbs i n reference to ,

the person
standing i n the relation o f th e i ndirect obj ect ( dative ) of an action
which does not resolve i tself i nto so m e for m of giving .
To order to co m e here to e ordered F arit o p a ri to hi n , b

to co m e here i .
To order to do to order to be
M a g p a g a u a p a gp a g a o i n
,
done to
.
,
b
.
To order to cure to order to e

‘
M a g p a g a m o t p a p a g g a mo t m
,
cured
.
,
.
To lend that is to say to m ake

b M a g p a u ta n g p a o ta n g rn
b
, ,
others orrow ; to e lent to I

.
,
To endow wi th the necessary quali

fi ca ti o n s t o e rendered qualified
,
M
ip ba a gu m g da a t p a
p
a tm
p p a g g u I
a
,
ngda
for
.
b
.
To order to put on clothes to e

ordered to put on cloth es i M a g p a r a m rt pagp a ra m rtm
.
,
, .
To k e to walk to be m ade to
ga M a g p a laca d p a la c a ri n
,
w al
.
,
To allo w to p ass 0n , t0 b e a 11owe d M a g p a d aa n , p a g p a ra a n m

to pass o n
' .
b e r d ere d
.
To order n p stairs to 0
,
M a g p a p a n hw p a g p a n hrq u m
up stairs .
, .
’
the verbs of which obtai n i n the i n pas s ive fo r m
Senten ces , ,
are ,
i n every respect con structed as Si m ilar sentences i n E nglish ex , ,
cept i n what refers to the a gent whi ch as already sta ted is i n Ta , , , ,

- 1
galog to be put i n the possessi ve case I f the sentence i ncl udes so m e

, .
i ndirect co m ple m ent th e case of the latter re m ain s unch anged and ,
the proper p reposi tio n Should be used or i f i t i s i ntended to m ake , ,
i t the m ost i m portant m e m ber i n the sentence the verb i s put i n ,
t h e other correspondi ng passive requi red by the n ature of th e indi rect

co m ple m ent with th e latter in the no m inati ve an d the direct one i n
,
the accusative .
b
I ought this house
Bi f ”CO it eng ahay
f a q u i ng b i n ili b ,
I tong bahay
.
Your ( thy)b rother eats the an ana b .

Q u i n a c ai n nang ca p a ti d m o a n g Sé
gu i n g .
'
He killed hi m . Pi n a tay n y a siy ai

i ,
Pi n ata y n ry a S1y a n a n g sandat a, or , a n g

He killed hi m with the sword
sandat a ang y p i n a tay n iy a s a caniy a
.
I looked for the chicken i n the H i n an a p co ang S isi n s a s i li d or , p i n a g ,
roo m . han a p e n co ang Si li d nang Sisi n ( 1) .
( l) The c ons tr u c t i o n of the s a me t

s e n e nc e i n t he L a ti n la n gu a g e , l
w ou d
be : quer a tu r a cu bi cu lum p u ltu m .
a m atter of g ra m m atical speculatio n an d o ne for whi ch e may ,

w
even find so m e authori ty i n E nglish if we o nly consider the different ,
“ “
construction of phrases like : to plant rice i n a field and to
“
p lant a field wi th rice ; “
ask your father fo r m oney and as k ’
,
m oney fro m your father ; b u t the us i ng o f the y passive i n this

respect goes deeper into the n a ti ve character and i s accounted for
m ore as a m atter of E thology than of gra m m ar .
Western gra m m arians have go n e to a g rea t length fo r a divis ion

b
of the ver i nto active neuter i nchoative desiderative frequentative , , , , ,
etc ; but Should a divisio n be m ade o f Tagalog verbs a cco rding to

.
,
n ative ideas the m o s t obvious one w p u ld be i nto volu n tary and i n

,
V oluntary i n regards to the perfor m an ce ; an d i nto acquisitive and alien

,
a t o ry i n regard to the outco m e

, I t i s on ly ap parent to a n ative s .
’
m in d that no transaction i s m ean t to have been brought to a close by

’
such verbs as for instance to give “
to throw away which i ndicate ’ “
‘
, , , , ,
an action by wh ich t he agent parts with so m ethi ng ; i nas much as

he by such a n act i s de arred fro m Shari ng i n the proceeds of an
, ,
b
action wh ich i s con sidered a s perfor m ed solely for the benefit of the
’
other party an d thu s the act co m es to be regarded as if co m p u l

,
’
s o ri ly or reluctantly executed o n the agen t s si de .
To thi s m oral native conceptio n t he fact m a y be at tri buted

‘
that i n such acti ve verbs as require i n the passive thi s 3; for m , ,
i n reference to what is their direct o bj ect i n the ac tive voice the i n ,
p a s s i v e i s wanti n g .
So , this passiv e i s used i n reference to th e di rect obj ec t :

With Snc h v erbs as i ndicate an actio n by wh ich the subj ect
loses control of so m ething either by the way o f throwing o r by , ,
that o f relinqu i shing transferring p u tti ng exposi ng add i ng e tc , , , , , .
To sell to e sold ,
b
M agbil i y p a g b i ll .
,
To hand over to be handed o ver M a g ganad y g a u a d , .

-
. .
To throw away to be thro w n away M a g ta p o n y t a p o n , .

,
.
To sow to be sowed ,
M a g s ab o g y s ab o g .
,
.
To scatter to be s cattered M a g b u la g s a c y b u la g s a c
,
.
, .
To spread about to be spread about M a g c ala t y cala t , .

,
.
To e m it to be e m itted ,
M a g s a m b ola t y s a m b é la t .
,
.
To spill to be spilled ,
M a g b o ho s y b oho s .
,
.
To add by m ixing to be added by

M a g ha lo y ha lo ,
m ixing , .
To add to be added M a g da g d a g y d a g d a g
b
.
, .
,
To j oi n to e j oined to , M a g la n g c a p y la n g ca p .
,
.
To place to be placed M a g la g ay y la g ay
, ,
.
To heap t o be heaped , M a g p ato n g yp at o n g .

,
.
To expose to sunshine to be expos

M a g hi lad y b i la d ,
ed to sunsh ine S .
H ere too what has been said i n the lesson devoted to the past
, ,
participle applies : i n verbs w hi ch by reaso n of the m eaning of their

, ,
root ca n be m ade to express either an acquisitive o r a n a li e n a to ry

, , ,
action i n passive i s used i n reference to the direct obj ect of t he

,
acq u isitive ; y passive i n reference to that of the a li e n a t o ry actio n , ,

.
To reach to be reached , . G u m a u a d ga u a r i n ,
.
To hand ove r to be handed over , . M a g ganad y g a u a d

-
,
.
To m i x by shaking to be m ixed , . H u m a lo baloi u ,

.
To m i x by adding to be m i xed , . M a g ha lo , y ha lo .
TH E M E A N I N G AND U SE or TH E V A R I O U S PA SSI V E S. 185
Wi th verbs requi ring two co m ple m ents ( There m ark is aga in

d b
.
m ade tha t s u mala t m a y s a bi and ma y to r o have ou le passives i n m

d
, ,
.
and i n y i n reference to their i rect ob j ect)

,
.
To give to e given b M a g b i g ay , y b i g ay
be
. .
,
To e s e nt w i th to presen t ed
pf } M a g b ryaya , y pa g b ry a y a
,
.
Wi l
To tell , tob e told . M a g s a li ta, y s a li ta yp a -
g s a li ta.
T i nquire a b out to b e i n quired

o
a b out ( the nature of the in q ui ry )
,
M a gt a n o n g y ta n on g
, .
T teach to b e ta gh t ( the m atter

. .
o u
U m aral y aral
.
,
obj ect of i n structio n ) .
To Show to poi n t out to instruct ;

b
, ,
to e showed to b e in structed ,
.
M a g to ro ; y to ro
( the thi ng wh ich i s th e obj ect of
.
i nstruction ) .
b
With ver s denoting action s of a j usting translating o r copying out d , .
To confor m to be co nfor m ed M a g b ag a y y b ag a y
b
.
, .
,
To co m pare to e co m pared , . M a g ha li m b a u a , y p a gha li m b au a .
To ta d e r equal t o be rendered
q pl } M a g p ara , y p a ra
,
.
e l
To copy out ,
b
to e copied out . M a g s a li n , y s ali n .
Causative Tagalog have this passive i n reference ( ma y p a

) verbs
to the thing which i s the direct o j ect o f the verb to m ake cause b
b
, ,
.
o rder etc i f the ver s deter m ined by the m are active

, .
, .
d
To or er to take there , to o rder to
b e sent M a g p a da la, yp a d a la
z
z
.
d b
.
To o rder to m ake to o r er to e
,
M a g p a g a u a, y p a g a u a
made
.
To
pgla
o t ta k e o ut to order to
M a p a p a g a hs li
’
,
a a
yp p g a s
bé ut
.
,
n
To lend that i s to say to make
b w b M a g p a ri ta n g ; y p a ri ta n g
, ,
o thers o rro ; to e lent

.
the t hi ng t aken h old of by the action of an i ntran si tive

I f
b
verb is to e represented as carried away i nten tionally y the subj ect
'
b
b b d
,
such an o j ect of pursuit ma y e refer re to by the y passive .
To run to run away wi th Tu m a c b o y ta cb o

b
, .
, .
To fall back to fall ack wi th , . U m oro n g y erong

, .
To Swi m to swi m o ff with

, . L u ma n goy y la n goy , .
So m e m ore
ver s will be found havi ng the y passive in reference b
to the direct o j ect as for i nsta n ce y a mala ny “
b “
to rever ; yy ala ny : to '
z
z z b
, , ,
” “ " “
’
be revered ; m a y t t c to trace out readable characters ; y tt t c to e

'
’
, ,
writte n ; which exhibit see min g deviations fro m the above rules The .
i rregulari ty appears m o re striking i n the case of y n mala ny for as the , ,
action here expresse d i s one of the sa m e ki nd as that of ma yp m n ‘
b
,
s u mi n taz ma m n tct etc

’
the i n passive see m s to e the only one a pplicable

‘
. .
, ,
On i nquiry i t i s found th at y ct la n a i s the M alay y e lany “

bracelet
’
w
, , ,
“
a ri st o rna ment ; a nd that g u mala ng see ms to m ean : to hang o u
“ '
24
the person certain attri butes of dig nity wi th a vie to ren e r hi m , w .

d
more h onored o r revered and as the action con sidered i n thi s way
.
b
, , , ,
co me s to b e on e of putting the y i s the proper passi ve to e used ,

.
A s fo r ma g ti ti c the word i s bo rrowed fro m t he A rabic wh ere i t m ea n s :

,
“
to put poi nts to certai n v owels ; a n d thus an actio n o f th e sa m e -
ki nd as that of g u mdla ng .
'
The y passive i s aside f ro m the above cases , to b e u sed i n

,
'
reference to the i nstru m ent with which o r the reason fo r wh i ch the ,

'
,
~
action i s executed and i n th e case Of cert a i n o cc u rre n ce s ( tho u g h no t

’
so properly ) i n refere nce to the specific ti m e i n whic h the eve n

takes place .
,
So m e illustrations of its use i n these resp ects follo :

'
,
w
What has he m a de this g a nta with ? g A n on g yg u i n a u a niy a n i t on g salo ? p
I t ong i tac ang yg u i n a u a niy a, y g u i n a u é:
He m ade 1t W i th th i s km f e
niy a i tong i tac
.
D ‘
dA n b t y p i na g b a b a ta mo n 1y ang m anga
Why do you bear those g i e v a n ce s
r
z
f c a h i ra p a n ?
I he a r the m fo r G od s sake Dios a ng y p i na g b a b a ta co h iy an

’
.
A t what ti m e di d they a rrive ?

.
G A n ong o ras ang p ga d a t i n g nil a?
Y( na fl1 l 1 a n g p a g b u b u c a ng li n a
They arr i ved at day break -
.
j gg figg a a u y .
all this elaborate syste m of conj ugati o n 1s esta lished chiefly

As b
b
-
for the clearest possi l e d isti nctio n between the reference to the p ri n
c i p a l an d the one to the a c ce s o ry ci rcu m st a n ces at te nd ing the perfor m an ce
of the action it follo ws that the di s qualification o f ye to stand for the
,
i nstr u m ent cause etc beco m es nec e ssary wi th those verb s requi ring the
, , .
,
p ssive for their direct co m ple m ent With a verb the refore of this
y a , ,
k i nd in a sentence i n which there exists besides a d i rect c o m p le m ,
e nt an i ndirect one setting forth the i nstru m ent reason etc

,
the , , .
latter shou ld then be re f erred to by m eans o f the p rope r prepo s iti on ,
cau sal conj unction or a n y o ther directive which the natu re o f th e

,
acti o n m a y r e qui re g/ sta nd ing solely for the direct co m ple men t
, .
Igave hi m the m oney because ,

Y bi n i g ay co ang salap i s a caniy a s a ,
he t old m e that h is m other a

p g c a ,
t ,
n a g s a bi siy a s a a q u i n g na
was very i ll ang i na n iy a i , lu b han g m a y s aq u it

;
. .
He threw away thi s san d with a Yti n a p o n n i y a i tong b u hangi h nang

hoe .
p a n g hoca
y .
YS
;
ang p alay nang
{ ég
g
s
g
og CO a q u 1n g
I my rice with the hand
,
s ow .
co urse verbs the signification of which carri es a lo ng

Of , w i th
the m the idea o f th e u si ng o f an i nstru m en t as for i nstance .
, , , g u m
mami t can n o t be exp ressed i n the y pass ive

‘
, .
What didst thou make use of i n

L
A O g u i n amit mo gti ti c
‘
n ng
d s a p a
writing the book ? s a z n a n g libro ?
}
I t i s 11k ew i s e necessary to say here th at the i dea of i nstru me nt
'
'
as de noted by the y passive i s extended to m ean the cognate i dea

of th e m eans by which the action i s acco m pli shed .
eto day ang pare n ay on , g

~ '
The priest does

‘
n ot o f fi c i a t ind 1 n a g m i mi s
’
a
b d
,
ecause he has n o gar m ents to Sat p a g c a t , ,

ual a s i y ang a m it 11a 1 ,
say m a s s w i th .
y p a g m i m is a
THE TA GA L O G LAN GUA GE .
The di fi e re n cey as to theb etw een

cause o f a n act i on an d y ea
'
for o ther than ma verb s ; i s that y ea de signates thoroughly perfec ted

acts when the action ad m its of a slow deve lop m ent
,
.
The weather i s the cause of hi s

A n g p a n a ho, i , ang y g u i n a g a li ng n iy a
i m prove m en t
.
w
.
The taking of this m edicin e as A n g p a g i n o m n i ton g g a m o t, a ng yq u i

w
-
hat m ade h is re covery co m plete . n a g a li n g n iy a .
Wi th so m e intran sitive verb s , y passive m ay refer to the specific

ti m e of the action o r occurre n ce
The d ay my w ife arrived ,
was A n g arao na y d i n a ti n g nang
“
a q u i ng
Tu esday as aua a y m artes

w hich she di ed
. .
,
The hour at . A ng oras na y q u i n a m a tay niy a .
If the expressi on of ti m e i s a deter m inate o ne i t m a y e put b

b
,
be fo re or after the verb ; if it i s i ndeter m i nate i t should be put efore ,

.
A ng viernes n an g cuares m a di yq u i n a
On Fri d ays in L ent m eat should not J cain e r m a ca ca i n nan g carne or di
, , , ,
be eate n .
yq u i n a c ai n nang carne ang viernes
n ang cuares m a
w hich I e mb arked g
.
The year i n for A n g ta ong y s i na cay c o paton o s a

the Philippines . F ilipinas .
The constru ction of sentences

the ver of which o ta ins i n the ,
b b .
y passive i s the sa,

m e as i s i n those with the verb i n the i n passive ,
if y i s used i n reference to the d r e c t co m ple m ent o f the ver b .
w w
I thre a ay the ook b . Yt i n a p o n co ang li ro b .
He thre w up ( vo m ited )th e m ilk . Y s i n u ca niy a ang gatas .
P eter gave this m oney . Y bi n i g ay n i P edro i tb n g salap i .
Where the y p a s s w e 18 used i n r eference to the instru m ent ,
p erson cause
,
o r ti m e fo r the actio n the sente nce i s constructed b y ,
expressing i n the no m inative the word in dicati ve of any such ci r

cu m s ta n ce w
ith the direct co m ple m ent ( i f there be any )i n the accusative .
With th i s string you will fasten the

Yt ong p a n ta li ygagap 68 mo s a b ilan
g a ga p u s m o s a b i la ng o m l tb n g
prison er s hand s to his back
g
gfig
'
i
.
It w as on account of he r that I Siy a ang y q ui na p a ri to, or y p i n a ri to

ca m e here . co .
The putting of the b

n o m i native efore the ver a n d the using b
of the latter i n the p artici pia l for m renders the exp ressio n m ore
e m phati c .
TH I R TY TH I R D E X E R CI SE
-
.
What i th e m erchant sell ?dd He sol d m y si s ter s n e e le s an ’

d d
p i n s What do y ou thro i nto the fire ? I ish to thro w
w m y fath e r s w ’
w
.
ood into the fire What did the nati ve m i x with ( add to ) t he wi ne ?
w
.
Wa te r What did the m erchant add to the butter ?

. He added tallo
THE ME A N I N G AND USE or THE VA R I OM PA s s fv Es . 139
to it What id you r cousi n p ut o n that ta le ? d He p u t there my b
b
.
sister s p ra yer ook Why do yo u expose that line n to th e sun ? Be

'
w
-
.
cause i t i s et What do you present your m other with ? . I p re

sen t her wi th a pai r of spectacles What di d h e say to you r si ste r
‘
i n law ?
-
He asked h er about the state of her aunt What h ast th ou .
taught this ch ild ? I ta u ght hi m the religious doctrin e Which did

w
.
they sho w your fe m ale cousin ? They sho ed her m y fan What -
.
does the pu pi l copy ? He copies the verses What have you cut m y .
b rea d with ? I cut i t wit h m y knife What have you writt en h is

w
.
letter wi th ? I wrote i t with a pencil What has he ou nded our .
frien d with ? With a sti ck Why do you no t pay m e ? Because I

w b
.
have no m oney to pay wi th With what m on ey ill P ete r uy the

b
.
bed ? He will uy i t wi th the m oney he rece ived fro m m e Why

d
.
does that wo m an weep s o m uch ? Becaus e death eprived h er o f her

chi ld Why had he re m ai ned here ? He had re m ai ned here fo r
’
A nn s sake
’
What i s i t that m akes soldiers obey thei r ch iefs ? It
‘
i s fear that m akes the m obey What m ade hi m co m plete ly wealthy ? .
The sale of h ides rounded out his f u r tu n e When would he arrive .
at the sea had h e departed i n ti m e ? He wo uld have arri ved the re

w
,
to m orro by ten o clock Who m have you co m e to visit here ? I

’
ca m e to visi t you .
THI RTY F O U R TH L E S SO N—
.
YCA TL O N G P O U O , T, A P A T N A P A G A R A L .
THE M E A N I N G A N D U S E O F TH E V A R I O U S P A SS I V E S . ( c o nt i nu e d) .
A N PA SSI V E .
The
passive i s u se y n ati ves w hen they
an an t t o raise to d b w
the rank of di rect obj ect o f th e verb th e person or the thing on who m
o r o n whi ch t he actio n does not fall directly an d when reference i s ,
to be m ade t o the thing o r m atter wh ich i s the ulti m ate result of

w b
.
the u s e to hic h th e action can e put

b
.
Thi s passive i s also u sed i n reference t o the di rect o j ect of

the v er
“
b w
he n the radical m eaning ( as i n the case of bu e as
,
”
“
een , b
opened ; ma s i d put to a test ; etc ) carries along with i t th e i dea
'
, .
of a thing o r actio n a lready m ad e o r a cco m p li s he d y o r ( as i n th e

“
c ase of g u i n té gold ; p i n to when th ere i s i ncluded therei n
b
, ,
a re ference to the m atter o r the thing which would e the direct

obj ect o r th e i m m e diate result of a verb expressive of a m ore generi c
a cti on
w
.
The u s e of a n i n th e first case so m ewha t corresponds i th

that w
hich we m ake of certai n E nglish ver s to which a di rect b
obj ec t o f person o r thing i s allotted w hich i s n ot the one o n
w ho m o r on w
hich the action falls directly as for i nsta nce hen w
w w
, , ,
“ ” ’
e s ay: to pay a servant he as given m oney “
to pl a nt a , ,
” ” “ ”
field “
,to walk a m il e to go u p a river etc ; and i n the second , , .
case the use i s si m ilar to that shown i n the different us a ge acco rded
b w
,
“ “ ”
to the ver s to thr ow and to pelt i n the follo i n g s e nte nces : , ,
“
the b oy s hav e thro n w sto nes at my horse ,
" “
so me s ai nts We re
'
p elted death to
E ither the one o r the other of the a ove usages of b an s
1
m an ifested i n the following ver s : b

To
look at to b e looked at Tu mi n gi n ti n gn an
b
, . .
To
look askew to e looked at that
Su m u li y a p s u li y a p an
,
way , .
b
.
i
T o p u t to a test for to e put to a
M a g m a s i d p a g a l a g aan ( cont ) ,
t est fo r
,
,
b
.
To salt to e salted M ag a sin asn an ( con t )

b
. .
, ,
.
T o pierce to e pierced Tu m a la b tabl an ( con t )

g
. . .
, ,
To ho ld t o g rasp ; to be held
‘
,
'
Tu m an an m a g ta n ga n ; ta n gn an ( con t ) .
-
. .
To cover to be covered ,
Tu m aqui p taep an .
,
.
To taste to b e tasted
“
,
Tu m i q u i m ti e m an ( con t ) .
, . .
To pay for to be paid fo r M a g b a y a d bayaran

, .
, .
To open to be opened ,
M a g b u cas b u c s an ( cont ) .
,
. .
l
gw
To th doors to be he d
vi u
s u
pr pp
yo g
.
; M a gp i n to p i n to a n ,
t
.
,
To gild to be gilt M a g u i n to g u i n to a n
b
. .
, ,
To
h ig b
ia)
W 1th 1ron to e shoed ( a
M a g haca l acalan ,
.
i , b .
To threaten to e th reatened M ag ala p a gb a laa n

, b . b , .
To clothe to be clothed D u m a m i t d a m tan ( con t )

b
.
, .
, .
To d eceive to e dece i ved M a g d a y a p a g da y aa n

, .
, .
To kiss to he kissed , H u m a li c ha d can ( con t ) .

,
. .
To s m ac k to be s m acked M a g ha li c p a g ha d c an ( cont )
, .
, .
To clean of lice to be cleaned of H u m i n g o t o h i n g o t o h a n hi n go tan

, ,
-
.
lice .
“
M a g ar a l, to learn ; has p a g a r a la n in r e f e re n ce to What is
learned
b
.
With so m e ver s wh ich m ay take a thing or a person fo r

their direct obj ect i n generally refers to the th ing ; a n to the , , , .
person .
To s m ell to be s m elled ( flo w er ) to
) U ma m oy , a m oy i n , a m oy an
, ,
he kissed ( to s m ell a person )

.
b
. .
To u nfasten to be u nfastened ; to e
Cu m a la g ca lg u I n ; calg an ( con t )
’
,
freed fro m sin to be absolved

. .
,
.
,
To hear to be h eard ( speech ) to b e

listened to ( person )
, ,
D u m i n gi g , di n g u i n ,
din g an ( con t ) . .
. .
Wi th such others as m a y take a thing or place i n, or

'
a , y
refers t o the thing ; a n t o the place , .
To clean to be clean ed out of to , ,

be M a g li n i s li n i s i n , li n i s an
cleaned ( space cleaned ) .
,
.
To lant to be p la nte d the shoot

t ghe p lanted ( the fi e l )
,
M a g t a m m y ta n 1m t a m n an ( con t )
g ,
, ,
. .
b
.
To sweep to e swept out of to b e 1

M a gua 11s u a 1i s m u a 11s a n
,
, , , .
swept ( roo m ) .
i , ,
.
To rub to b e rubbed aw a y to be
, ,
rubbed ( the thing or place w here

b
.
Cu m o s c os c o s co s i n c o s cos a n
t he effect of ru bing re m ai n s
.
, ,
mani fe st ) .
A ll
other v erbs have a n for the place which i s i n the lo ca t
“
i ve case governed y any of the prepositio ns a t ” “
in ” “
b
on ” “
upon
b
, , , ,
“ ”
y etc,
5 Bi n i g u i an n iy a a co n i ton g paco or aco

’
He gave me this nai l , ,
2 ang b i n i g i an n iy a n i ton g paco

.
-
gs m b a g s ang p 1n a g b 11han m y a n an g
Who m h ave they sold my shirt to ?
a q u i n g baro
g
.
Pi n a g b i lhan n il a ang c a n i lang m an a

They sol d i t to thei r friends . caibigan or , an g m an a cai i gan
,
g b
nil a ang p i n a gb i lhan ni l a
b
,
A re you ad m oni shing A lfred ? i dPi n a n
fredo ?
g g
u n u s a p a n a g a n i n y o Si A l
Hind i Si A lfredo cund i and ca n i y an g

I t i s not A l f red b ut his sister tha t
b
,
c a p a ti d n a abaye ang p i n a n gu n gu
,
we are ad m onishing
sapan n a m 1n
.
To put to put upon

, . a g la g ay laguian
, .
To cook to coo k i n M a g lo to , lo to a n
w
.
, .
To wrap to ra p i n M a g b a lot b a lo ta n
w
. .
, ,
To walk to alk on , . L u m aca d , lacara n .
So m eti m es the discri m ination etween place an d th e person i s m ade b

by p ag
'
w he n th e action a d m its of a place .
To seek The plac e of seeking

. . H u m an a p . A n g p a g ha n a p a n .
To c lai m pay m ent to get o ne s self

’
paid to m ake collections The Su m i ngil A n g p a g s i ngilan

i
. . .
,
place of collectio n .
verb s have the y passive i n reference to the person wh o

Causative
i s the i ndirect obj ect of a ve rb exp ressi ve of an a ction whi ch co m es
b
to e resolved i n to one of giving when the dete r m i ned verb i s not
b
,
z
of those requiri n g the y passive i n reference te the di rect o j ect .
To send to sen d to
,
. M a g pa da la p a ra lha n
, .
( con t ) .
To l clothi ng to su pp ly 010 th
g
p y
g M a g p a d a m i t , p a p a g da m tan ( con t )
,
i
.
t
To order toput to a test fo r to ,
M a g p a m a s 1d , p a p a g m a s da n ( co n t )
o rder to put to a test for
. .
The
infl u ence wh i ch th e actio n of giving and the person given
to h ave o n the use of thi s passive i s further shown by the fact
that even so m e i ntransitive v erbs and v erbs n ot ad m itting of an i n
d b
iret o j ect i n the dative m ay assu m e i t i n reference to the p erson to
b
,
who m so m ething i s to e given as the final purpo se of an action which

i s considered as p reparato ry for o r suggestive of an act of giving , , .
To go after to go after so as to
,
Su m u n o d son oran
give to , .
T0 to call out for

:2;l tqéi jg i
I n
'
u r,
Tu m a u a g , ta uagan .
To run for to run fo r wi th the ai m

M a gta cb o, ta cb o ha n
,
of o vertaki ng and givi ng to . S

TH E M E A N I N G AND U SE or THE V A R I OUS PA SSI V ES .
Se e this use o f an illustrated in the following ph rases :
G o after thy father and give ( ad Sund an m o ang i y ong a ma n i ton g

m in ister)h i m this m edicine . ga m ot .
Call out f o r hi m an d give hi m so m e 1Tauaga n mo S iy a na n g i s da .
fish
w i th hi m
.
R u n fo r hi m an d lodge
Ta cb o ha n m o siy a n i tong Sli la t .
thi s letter .
p recedi n g exa m ples are highly illustrati ve and i f well

The ,
u nderstood twi ll afford th e student m ore enlighten m en t as to th e use

,
o f thi s passive th an h e could possi bly derive fro m lon ge r explanation s

and m ore ela orate rules b .
The
co n structio n of s entences th e verb of wh ich requi res a n ,
passive i n reference to what i s t he di rect o bj ect i n the active

voic e i s the sa m e a s that of those the ver of which o tai n s i n b b
the m passi ve
“
Hold thi s candle . T ngn an m o i t ong

a di la
ca n .
H i a ha g c a n n ang anac ang can 1y an g

The son ki sses hi s m other .
j in
g l
P rop up the tree . Tu co ra n m o ang c ab oy .
If the sentence i ncludes besides a di rect co m ple m ent an i ndirect

b
, ,
on e of place the latte r i s put i n the no m inative an d the di rect o j ect

'
'
i n the accusati ve .
My grandfathe r plan ts a variety of Ti n a ta m n an ni non o nang s a ri s a r i n g

trees i n the garden . c ab oy an g ha la m a n a n .
Have you looked for the servan t i n Pi n a g ha n a p a n m o bag a s a alila i tong

d
th i s road ? da ang i to?
If a n refers to the place o r t he perso n respectively i n th e lo c a t , ,
ive or d ative case t he place o r person sh oul d be na m ed that i s to s a y

, , , ,
put i n in the no mi native and the re m ai nder as above ; the a gent i n , ,
the p os s e s i v e and the direct co m ple m ent i n th e accusative The

b
, , .
i n d irect co m ple m ent m a y be put before o r after the ver except i n ,
the case of an i nterrogati v e sentence begin n ing with a pronoun o r

an adverb when t he pronou n o r the adverb Shou ld precede t he verb
, .
A S a rule the na m ing of the place or person before the verb i s a

,
m eans of re ndering i t p ro m i nent i n the s e ntence .
I w rite on thi s paper . Si n u s u la ta n co it ong papel “
Ys i n u1a tz s i m i la t n iy a ang a q u i n g
3
‘
He wrote 111y v erses .
g
m a n a tula
We Shall write on that ta le b .

Pa s s u la ta n na m in iy ang la m esang
gg
i ’ li
He pu t the ook on the floo rb .
3 yan
A n g sabig ang li n a g u i an i p i n a gla g
n 1ya nang l l bro .
I will give m y m oney to M r Such . Bi b i g u i an co nang a q u i ng

p i la c Si
a one . Con an .
n o n g p i n a g b i lhan m o n i ton
To who m have yo u sold thi s cake ? gS i g ma
ta m i s ?
b
.
To m y A n g ana c nan g ca a p i dbaha y co

’
n ei gh our s son . .
25
b 8 b m ab ay a ra n m o m tbng hl hl
‘
22n
2
Who m a re you p a yi n g for this ed ? 6 . .
3 ]
I m paying the m erchant for t hi s Bi b mit ong hi hi g a n ang

'
a na a y a ra n cc
b ed . co m e rs i a n te .
I will buy t he big house fro m the Bi b ilhan co n ang m ataas n a b ahay
owner . ang m a y a ri .
THI R TY F OU R TH E X E R CI SE
-
.
Has the servant salted the fish ? H e has no t yet salted the fish .
Has your broth er pierced thi s buffalo with a Spear? H e ha s pierced

this buffalo with a spear What do yo u hold i n your han d ?
. I t is ,
a spear that I h old i n m y h and What d id yo u learn ? I learned .
the E ngli sh language Who m is the thief th reatening ?

. He i s _
th reatening that boy D id you clothe th e child ?

. I clothed hi m .
F ro m who m d id you hear what you told m e about the u nfasten i ng of

the prisoner ? I heard i t fro m a friend of m ine W La t i s his .
grand daughter opening ?

-
She i s opening the garde n gate What .
are you doing there ? I a m gildi ng m y ri ng What will they buy .
f ro m the A m eri can ? They will b uy m y b utter fro m hi m F ro m .
who m have you taken that cane ? I received it fro m m y u ncle .
F ro m who m have we asked thi s paper ? We a sked it fro m the p riest .
F ro m who m have you received thi s m oney i n pay m ent? I received

thi s m oney fro m m y deb tor Why d id he n ot g ive m e the bi rd ?
.
Because he has already given i t to his sister I s it thi s house w here .
they asse m bled ? N o they m e t together at M ary s house

, Wha t d id ’
t hey asse m ble for ? They asse m bled to speak about the tax Where .
will you go ? I shall go n owhere Have you anythi ng to tell m e ? .
I have to tell you so m ething

, Where have you put m y spectacles ?.
I h ave put the m so m ewhere i n the roo m F o r who m do you cut do w n .
that tree? I cut i t down fo r m y m aster Di d I n ot say to you .
not to cut down any trees ? Well I obey m y m aster s orders ,

’
T H I R TY F I F TH L E S S O N—
.
Y C A TL O N G P O U O , T, L I M A N G P A G A R A L .
T H E P R O P E R U S E O F E I TH E R V O I C E O F TH E V E R B .
The
u se of the p assive i s f a r m ore co m m on I n Tagalog than .
i n Western languages : i n fact i t i s the m os t co m m o n fo r m i n n ar

,
-
ration .
E uropean s w ho h ave acquired the language through a long i nter

course with n atives Sp eak i n the passive without being aware there
,
of They believe that e u m n mo y bi n i y ay e o fo r i nstance are literal

’
.
, , ,
“ " “
translation s for take i t I give i t this bei ng the usual m old i nto
, ,
which thoughts of thi s ki nd are cast i n thei r vernaculars an d i t i s ,
only after gra m m atical analysi s that the d i scovery i s m ade that let i t
“
”
be taken by thee “
i t i s given by m e
, is the real m eanin g ,
:
TE E TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
The acti ve voi ce i s

sed with i ntran sitive verb s unless re f eren ce u ,
I S m ade to in stru m en t cause t l m e place o r p urpose .

, , .
Tu n g ma tau a il a S .
N a m am a tay ca m i .
L u n g ma laca d cay o .
In i nterrogative sentences when an agen t an d not an o j ect i s b

in qui red after .
Who calls the m ? gSi n o ng tu n g m a tau a g s a ca n i la?

Which of the m loves y ou ? ’ d A Hn ’ o r S ino s a c a n i la ang s u n g m i
i Si nt a s a i y o .
What h urt m e? g A n hn
, g n a gp a s a q u i t s a aquin ?
co m plex sentences i n
I n w hich b
the su j ect i s en larged by an
adjective clause .
The m a n who loves G o d will at tain ,

A n g tan ong s u n g m i s i n ta s a Dios a y
G lory . m a g c a c a m i t nang c a lo u a lha ti a n .
A n g hu n g ha n g na bag ong ta u Ong n a g

The kna v ish boy who dissi pates his
a a c s a y a n ang ca n y an g ari a y d a a t
z
fortune deserves to be whipped p

Sucat S iy ang ha m p a s i n
.
The b b
ver s hould e used i n th e pas s i ve voice i n sentences w he e
z
‘
'
t he d
irect co m ple m ent of th e verb i s i ndivid uali ed o r i s circu m scribed ,
and fixed by so m e a t tri b u te o r a ttributi ve word .
Ca ll
for M ary Ta u a g u i n m o Si M aria
b b
. .
He will bring m y ook . D a da lhi n niy a rit o ang a q u i ng li ro .
Do n ot whi p that cat H o u a g m ong ha m p a s i n iy ang pu sa

g
. .
B rm g 1n the sh oes I always wear t D a lhi n m o ri t o ang m an a sapi n na gui

n a g am i t cong m a d a laS: ca ra n tu a n
.
.
I n sentences when a deter m ina t e o j ect that i s to

i n te rrog a i v e
'
b ,
say the di rect obj ect of the verb i n the active voice w hich i s the
,
gra m m atical subj ect i n the passive i s i nqui red a f ter ,
What do you want? g A n On g i ig m o ? b

Which dog did he kill ? d A li n g aso ang p i n a t ay niy a?
Who m do you h ate .

dSi n o ang q u i n a p o p o o ta n m o ?
Wh en m a y m a y r é on u a la, etc
, ,
a re used as de te r m m m g verbs ,
the verbs deter m i ned by the m should he used i n the passive .
I have to say . M a e on a cé ng s as a b ihi n = s a b i hi n .
You will have nothing to ask . U al a c a y en g y ta ta n o n g .
H e deserved to be punished . Sli e s t siy ang n b o n ha m p a s i n .
They deserve to be rewarded . D apat sil ang g a n t i hi n .
Ye h ave heard that it was said ( you iny ong i n a bi

N a ri n i g u s
h eard s a w
.
When the obj ect i s rendered e m phati c i n the way an by d

s i m ilar m e a n s t o tho s e e m ployed fo r the e m phasi ing z o f the subj ect ,
eve n w hen the obj ect i s i ndeter m inate i n sense .
What I honor is virtue ? A n g c a b a n a la n ang siy ang p u ri hi n co

d
.
It I S the m ango th a t I con s i er the A u g m anga , i ang i na a ri co a ng lalon g

b
,
ta s t i es t fru i t . ma s ara p n a un ga .
THE PRO PE R USE or EI THE R VOI eE OR THE V E RB .
The
use of the on e o r the other of the variou s passives i s
s o m ew hat arbi trary as there exi s ts a kin d of i nterchangeability wi th
,
each other which i s difficult to fix by any rule I n sentences with .
a definitely ci rcu m scri bed obj ect n ot i n cl uding a n y other ci rcu m stantial
ele m ent the passive to be used i s that which the n ature of the action
,
re q uires i n regard to th e direct obj ect acco rding to th e rules previously ,
laid down fo r th e p u rpose ,

.
A ccept of my good will Ta ng a p i n m o a n g l eoh cong m agand a

g
. .
Y ta ta p o n n iy a i tb n g m an a s i n e la s
He wi ll th row away these slippers i
.
( corr o f Sp word , chi ne la s )

. .
H d o 8 d ( ren d ere d ”d
211251130 )£ 2?
6
2
3
1
gH m a to la n m o Si ya ?
In sentences containing one i ndi rect co m ple m en t directly con

n e c te d with t he action the using o f e i ther the y o r the a n passi ves
, , ,
i s d eter m ined i n accordance with th e i nd irect obj ect m ean i ng i n

s t r u m en t place ti m e or cause
, , .
Search shi rt with th i s 5 Ytong ilao y ha li ha o m o nang a q u i n g

for my
ligh t I baro
b
.
Did you sea rch a out th e roo m for S S i li i c a n m o hag a n ang ca n i y an g

g na c s
hi s fan ? payp ay a nd Si li d?
b
On our e m arking the hurricane A n g p a g s a s a cay uatin y q u i n a ta é n nang
5
occurred . b ag u i o z o n OS .
A n b n g y u i n a m a m a tay nang I y eng

What i s you r uncle dying o f ? l d q
1 a m ai n .
sentences having m ore th a n o ne i ndirect co m ple ment the using

I n ,
of either the on e o r the other of the various p assives i s decided by the ,
speaker s desire to lay m ore stress u pon the one o r the other of the m
'
Kill thi s cat i n the street with y our 1Yp a tay m o n i tb n g pusa ang i y Ong
gun t b a ril s a la n s a nga n
b
. .
Stress i s here y lai d on th e i nstru m en t and the sa m e i s m ade e m ph ati c

b
,
y saying :
Wi th you r very gun ki ll thi s ca t ,
A n g ha r i i m o rin ang i p a tay m o
,
n i tb n g
i n the stree t . pusa s a la n s a nga n .
Kill thi s cat wi th your gun i n th e P a ta y a n m o an g la ns a nga n n i tOn g pusa

street n a u g iy e ng bari l
zb
. .
The place i s hereby m ade pro m i nent The sa m e i s e m phasi ed y .
s a yi ng :
In the street i tself kill this cat wi th A n s la n s a n gan a ng siy ang p a ta y a n 1110
you r gu n n i tb n g pu sa nang iy en g bari l
'
. .
If it i s th e di rect obj ect that i s i ntended to render p ro m i 1i e n t ,
the senten ce m a y b e co n str u cted i n t he regular way s a yi n g ,
K ill this cat in th e street wi th your Patayi n m o i tb n g pusa s a la n s a nga n

g u n . na n g ari l b 1110 ,
or m ake i t m ore e m p hati c y sayi ng : b

Thi s ca t le t i t he killed by y o u i n It ong pusang i t o i a ng p a tay i n m o s a
w b
, , ,
‘
the street i th you r g u n . la n s a nga n n an g i y b ng ar i l .

Students care to d istinguish circu m stantial m e m ers

s t o u ld t ake b
connected with the actio n fro m adve rbs o r ad verbial e x p re s i o n s i n
“
using the passive for m s
He d id th is purposely . Sa d i y a n g g a i man s n iy a i to .
He assaulted hi m fu r iously ( w ith Di n a lo h o n g n iy a Siy a n ang b Oo n g

great fury ) . b a g s i c : c a ha g s i ca n
A ttention S hould be paid t o the followi ng senten ces :
b
Bring t hese ooks upstai rs fo r m e P a n hi c a n m o a c o n i tb n g m an a libro
. g .
He took the chi ld upstairs Y p i n a n hi c niy a ang ba t a s a b ahay

.
I wi ll m eet y o u u ps t ai rs Pa p a n hi q u i n qui t a s a b ahay

. .
Wi l l he look fo r the book whi ch

dH a h a n a p i n niy a an g li b ro n g n a u a la?
was m i ssed ?
Overtake m y b rother H a b o li n m o ang a q u i n g c a p a ti d
.
R u n after hi m an d d eliver thi s

Ha b u la n m o siy a n i t On g enla t
letter to hi m .
.
Who m di d you i nqui re after? gS i n o n g y t i n a n o n g m o ?

W ho m do you i nqu ire fro m ? gSi n o ang t i n a ta n o n g m o ? J
Y ti n a n o n g co s e caniy a cung ba g a
I asked hi m wheth er he was her
siy a i c a p a t i d n iy a o r t i n a n o n g -
brothe r , , , ,
co Siy a etc
.
To discover to detect
,
Tu m oclas
. .
The discu s sion of the i m portan t m atter of th e Tagalog pass i ve for m s

'
closes here I f th e student has learned to fi nd i n each case the

.
, ,
proper passive to be used i n re f erence to what i s the direct c o m p le m

ent of the verb i n the active voice there can be no serious di fficulty ,
for hi m i n the construction o f the sentence with the sa m e o r wi th ,
any of the other pas s ive for m s wh ich re f er to so m e o f the vario u s

d ivision s of the indi rect co m ple m ent ; for when said passive re ferring .
to the direct obj ect i s known th e co nstruction i s analogous to t h e

,
E ngl ish o ne and i f the senten ce i ncludes

,
besides this direct obj ec t , ,
so m e other ele m en t i n the i ndirect on e the using of the on e o r the ,
other o f _th e various passive fo r m s co m es to be m erely a m atter of

choi ce an d is deter m ined by the s peaker s desire of laying particula r
,
’
stress o n one or the other o f such ele m ents The differen t construct .
ion i n which each of the following senten ces i s expressed toge ther
w b
,
i th the explanation s given between parentheses will it i s elieved , , ,
m ake e ven clearer this m atter
B i lhi n m o n i tOng salapi s a a q u i n g a m a

ang m a la q u ln g b uqui d ( pa ra )s a ating
Buy with this m oney fro m m y fath
anac ( The action of b uying i s here
er the big far m fo r our son
.
co nsidered i n relation to the thing o h

.
j cet o f the purchase ) .
( The sa m e sentence i n whi ch the

Bill i an 1110 ang a q u i ng a m a n i tb ng s a
action of buying is considered i n
lapi nang m a la q u i n g i q u i d ( para)
relation to the perso n fro m who m
s a ating anac
the purchase i s m a de ) .
.
T
( e sa m e i n wh i ch the action of
h
I thng s a la p i n g
, y
b i li m o sito i
a a q u i n g
buyi ng i s cons idered i n rela t ion ,
a m a n a n g m a la q u l ng b 11 q u i d ( para )
’
to the m oney with wh ich the

.
u rchase i s m ade
s a a t i ng a nac .
p ) .
THE TA G A L O G L AN GU A GE .
I owe hi m ? You owe hi m thirty six dollars Who else ca m e to

i nquire fo r m e ? The Chinese trades m an ca m e to clai m pay m en t
for the shoes Wh at di d you S a y t o hi m ? I t old hi m you ha d n o
.
m oney to p a y with Why does h e whi p h i s servan t? Because he

.
stole a ring fro m hi m Why d oes not you r frien d co m e fo r y o u .
at ho me ? He fears the dog Why are you n e t wi lling to receive .
this m oney ? Because i t i s no t good .
TH I R TY S I X TH L E S S O N
—
YC A TL O N G PO U O T, , A N I M N A PA G AR AL .
Mo nm cu ivs V E R B AL P A R TI CL E M A V= PA N
.
The Tagalog lan g u a ge abounds i n verbal prefixed particles m o d :
i f y i n g the radical signification as to the m an ner i nte nsio n an d pu r , ,
pose o f the action i n a way generally requiri ng long round abou t

,
-
for m s of expression i n other languages These particles are so m eti m es .
essential to the verb that i s to say exp ress the pri m ary m eaning o r
, ,
u n m odified action ; but m ost co m m only they stan d fo r verb attri butes
b
, , ,
which are otherwise to e e m ployed thus i m parting a wonderful concise

, , ,
ness to the speech

b
.
M a n p a n the particle used i n for m ing frequentative ver s is ,
either p ri m ary o r subordinate ; but n ever a transcendental particle

b
.
With a few ver s of those den o ting a n a ctio n o r contingency

whi ch occurs at so m e a ppoi nted ti m e o r according to so m e fixed
“ ” “
rule a s for i n stance with m a ng a n a e to lie i n to bring forth ;
‘
z
, , , , ,
” "
“
to harvest “
to gather i n rice ; ma mi has a to be i n the
’
m a ng a n
‘
, , ,
habi t of ; ma n p a n expresse s the pri m ary m ean ing ; but u sually i t i s

-
used to for m verbs expressi ve of h abitual action s an d to i m pa rt to ,
those wh ich express the Si m ple action o r th e action i ndi fferently or ,
o ccasionally perfor m ed a sen se of the sa m e having acqui red a character

,
of fi x e dn e s s by habi t trade or exercise

b w
.
, ,
Ver al I o ot s t he fi rst letter of whi ch i s b o r p a nd hich . ,
by reason of th e i r signification requi re to be conj ugated by u m are

z z
, ,
“ “
lurali ed or intensified by ma n B u mi li to buy ma mi l to buy
’ ‘
z
p ; .
,
i n quantities ; p a mati
“
to wh iten ; ma mu t “
to grow rapidly o r very
’
, ,
white ’
The i n tercha n geabil i ty of letters which 1n other conjuga ti o

.
ns
is s o m ewhat vague and s o m e ti m e s opti o nal has i n thi s of ma n ,
i n o re consistence The n of m a n o r p a n i s d ro pped before r o o tS

b
.
b eginning with b p s t an d replaced y n g i n those be ginning with

‘
, , , ,
vowel I n roots begin ning by ezq b o th th e latter and the n of

'
a .
,
the particle a re d ropped and replaced by n g B an d p cha nge t O

‘
. .
m; 5 t a n d so m eti m es d to n
, , , .
The conj ugative m echanis m wi th t h is particle i t will b e seen

b
, ,
does not deviate fro m the regular o ne which has een explai ned fo r
the conj ugation wi th other particles .
M O DI F I CA TI V E V E R B A L PA R TI CL E M A N zPA N . 2 01
Thi s latter m a y be seen i n the follo ing conj ugation of the w

particle w ith the root li ba e “
scoffing ,
”
.
V e rb a l c o mp o u nd s
To s co fi at to b e scoffed at
,
. M a n li b a c , li b a q u i n = p a n li ba q u i n .
M ocker . M a p a g li b a c .
J
CO N U G A TI O N .
A CTI V E .
To scoff . M a n li ba c .
P re s e nt i n d e fi ni t e te ns e .
I thou he etc we you they N a n li li b a c a c o, ca iy a tayo ca m i

{
, , ,
.
, , , , S , , ,
scoff etc cay o Sil a , .
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e f i n i t e t e ns e s .
I thou he ete
, e you they scoff
, , .
,
w , ,
N a n li b a c a co, ca ,
siy a ,
tayo ,
ca m i ,
ed etc ; have etc scoffed .

, . . cay o , S il a .
P lu pe rf e c t t e n s e .
N a ca p a n li b a c a co, ca S iy a tayo ca m i
we
, , , ,
I thou he etc o
y u, they ha d cay o sil a
d
.
, , , .
, , ,
etc scoffe
. . N a n li b a c n a a c o ca n a ; na s iy a t ayo , , ,
ca m i cay o Sil a , , .
F u t u r e i nd e fi ni te t e n s e .
I thou h e etc we y o u
, , , .
, , ,
the y S hall ,
M a n li li ba c a c o, ca , S iy a tayo , ,
ca m i ,
etc will etc scoff
.
, , . . cay o sil a , .
Fu t u re p e rf e c t t e n s e .
M a ca p a n li b a c a co, ca iy a tayo ca m i
J
, S , , ,
I thou he etc we you they cay o Sil a

w
. .
, , , , , , , ,
Shall etc i ll . etc have sco f fed l M a n li li b a c n a a c o, ca na ; n a siy a tayo

, , ,
. .
l ca m i , cay o,
, ,
S il a .
i mp e ra ti v e .
let h1m , etc us

l M a n li b a c ca siy a tayo cay o sil a
.
, ,
, , , , .
V e rb a l .
The acti on of s cof fi n g . A n g p a n li lib a c .
I N P A SS I V E .
I nfi n i t i v e
To
‘
be s coff e d at .
THE TA GA L O G} L A N GU A GE .
P re s e nt i nd e fi ni t e te ns e .
am, e tc .
,
are scoffed at by Pi na n li li b a c co m o niy a, , ,
n a ti n , na min ,
m e , the e , hi m , etc us you the m

.
, , , . n l n y o, n i la .
Pre s e nt p e rfe ct a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e n s es .
w
etc were ; h ave
as , ,
etc .
Pi n a n li ba c co , m o , niy a n a ti n , n a mi n
been scoffed at by m e thee hi m , ,
, , ,
mi ny o, nil a
etc us you the m
.
.
,
.
, ,
N a p a n li ba c co m o niy a n at i n , na m in
b
, , , ,
had etc een scoffed at by

, . n i n y o, n il a .
me , thee hi m etc us you the m

, ,
.
, , , . Pi n a n li ba c co n a m o na ; na n iy a , , n a ti n ,
n a m in miny o n il a , , .
F u t u re i n d e fi ni t e t e n s e .
shall e tc ; w i ll etc . .
, . b Pa li ll b a l ln c no, n 1ya n a ti n , na
at by m e thee hi m etc us
g guy b gilg
,
,
i rl l i
.
, , ,
l
you the m , .
M a pa n li b a c co m o , niy a, n a ti n , na m in ,
etc ; will etc have ,
n i n y o n iy a,
. .
, ,
been scoffed at by m e thee hi m ,

, , ,
Pa n li li b a q u i n co na m o n a ; na niy a
etc us you the m , ,
n a ti n , na m i n , n i n y o, nil a
.
, , , .
i mp e ra t i v e .
Be scoffed at let b e scoffed Pa n l a q u m m o ,

l n 1y a, n a ti n , n lnyo
,
at by thee hi m
the m .
, ,
etc . u s you , ,
m é fs
V e rb a l .
The s tate of b eing scoffe d at . A u g p a n hba q u i n .
Y PA S S I V E .
I nfi ni t i ve
To s coff o n account o f . Yp a n li b a c .
P re s e nt i n d e fi n i t e t e ns e .
I , thou he etc we you, , .

, , ,
t hey Yp i n a n li li b a c co mo , ,
niy a ,
u a ti n ,
scoff e tc on account of
, . . na m i n n i n y o nil a , , .
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
I thou he etc we you they

Yp i n a n li b a c co m o niy a n a ti n , na
, , , .
, ,
scoffed etc ; have etc sco ff ed on , , ,
m i n , n i n y o nil a
.
,
accoun t o f
, .
.
Fu t u r e p e r f e c t t e n s e .
M a p a nli b a c an co mo niy a uatin na

w
, , , ,
1,
thou he e tc
, e yo u they shal l
,
.
, , , , m i n n i ny o n il a
, , .
etc will etc have scoffed i n

, , . Pa n li li ba can co na m o na ; ,
na niy a ,
natin , n a m in , n i n y o n il a , .
I m p e rati v e .
Scoff ( thou ye) , , le t hi m ,

etc .
,
u s ,
P a n li b a can mo ,
niy a , n a ti n , n i n y o,
the m scoff in . n il a .
V e rba l .
The action of s co ffi n g in .
A n g p a n li b a can .
The
'
student s hould conj ugate i n the active and i n the p ass ive
the follo w i ng ma n verbs i n which as i n ma nli ba c no change of ,
‘
letters takes place .
To cure pro fessiona lly to ,

b e cured ,
M a ng a m o t , p a n g a m o t i n , y p a n g a mo t,
to cure with to cure at a n g a m o ta n
p
b
. .
,
To i m itate to e i m itated ( thing)

b M a ng a g a d
, ,
p a n g a g a ri n p a n g a g a ra n
to e i m itated ( perso n ) to i m itate a n g a ga d
,
, , ,
because of .
y p .
To go about m ixin g to be m ixed l M a n ga m ao p a n g a ma o i n y p a ng a m ao , , , , ,
to m i x with to m i x at p ,
a n g a m a oa n . .
To practice to be practi ced to l M a n g a u a p a n ga o i n y p a ng a u a pan

, , , , ,
practice wi th to practice at i a u a a n
g ,
. .
To wash one s face to be wash ed

’
M a nhi la m o s p a n h i la m o
,
s i n y p a n h i la
,
to wash o ne s face with to wash ’
m os p a nhi la m o s a n ,
, ,
custo m arily another s face ’ , .
To clean fro m n its to be clean ed ,
fro m nits ( i n referen ce to the

nits re m oved fro m the head ) to M a n li s a p a n li a i n y p a n li s a p a n li s a a n , , s , ,
.
clean fro m ni ts wi th to be clean ,
ed fro m ni ts ( person )
b
. .
To soothsay to e predicted to ,
M a nho la p a n hola i n y p a n ho la panho ,
pre di ct because to predict so m e , , ,
laan
b
,
thing to or efore ( person )

.
.
, .
To haunt to be haunted to haunt M a nli g ao p a n li g a o i n p a n li ga oa n ypan

i
-
, , , ,
with . lig ao .
To plunder to be plundered to M a n g hu li ( ) p
I h l h u li
s
, a n u u n yp a n , , , ,
plunder wi th to plunder fro m p a n h u,

li an . .
To net ( to fish with a n e t) to be M a nla mb a t p a n la m b a ti n p a nla m b a , , ,
netted to net at , tan . .
w
The f o llo ing roots are given to i llustrate the c hange of letters
they undergo when conj ugated by ma n .
b
Ha it custo m cunni ng craft ; to
,
B ibas a;
, ,
m a m iha s a
use to be accusto m ed
.
, .
Censure fault ; t o censure to find

Pi nt as
( m a m 1n ta s
, ,
faul t with .
, .
,
( 1) I ! the root b e gi ns wi th h 9 ma y b e i ns
. t
er e d.
MO DI FI CA TI V E V E R BA L PA R TI CL E MA N zPA N . 906
Oath to s ear
, w . Su m p a , m a nu m p a .
Te m ptation cross exa m inatio n ; to

g
-
,
Tucs o; m a n u cs b
te m pt
.
L ove desire ; to flirt t o be of an

,
a m orous disposition
,
.
I b ig ,
m a n gi b i g .
Taking to take continua lly t o be

, ,
Coh a , m a n go ha
en g aged i n taking
.
V e r b a l Co mp o u n d s .
To h a ituate b .
M a m i ha s a .
Habi t cus to m acqui red

,
a nh an . A u g p in a mi s .
To train others to cause o thers to

M a g p a m i ha s a
5
,
get accusto m ed to .
The cause of b eing a ccusto m ed

A n g y c a p a m i ha s a ,
what pro duce s the habi t i .
To get accusto m ed to M a g b i b i ha s a . .
To find fault wi th M a m i n t as . .
The actio n censured A n g p a m i n t as . .
Censurer critic ,
M a p a m i n tas . .
To curse others Su m u m p a . .
To curse m any M a g s u mp a . .
To be cursed by others Su m p ai n p a g s u m p ai n .
, .
The reaso n o r the nature of the

A n g y s u m p a yp a g s u m p a
curse .
, .
To curse each other

"
M a g s u mp a a n . .
To curse custo m arily M a n u mp a . .
The nature of t he curse or th ing ,

A n g y p a nu m p a
cursed over custo m arily 5
.
b
.
Person efore who m an oath is taken A ng p a nu m p a a n

b
.
Habi tual swearing efore A n g p a n u n u mp a a n

b
. .
Ha itual curser Pa la s u m p a . .
To te m pt others Tu m ocs o . .
Do ( m any o r m any ti m es ) M a g to cs o =m a g to tocs o . .
To b e te m pted by To cs o hi n . .
Do hard or frequen tly

. P a g to to cs o hi n . .
Do with o r o n accoun t of Yt o cs o . .
Do har d . Y p a g to to cs o
. .
To cross exa m ine M a g t o cs o han . .
To go abou t t e m ti ng M a n oc s o
Do a great deal?
.
M a g p a n o cs o .
Do with .Yp a n o cs o
The place . A n g p a n o cs o ha n .
Te m pter M a u o n o cs o
w
. .
To wish to ant to desi re U mi bi g

b
, ,
. .
Do ( y m a ny ); to go about flirting M a ngi bi g . .
To rea ch th e a g e of puberty M a ca i bi g . .
L oved ( ex i n te n ti on s )
. I n i bi g . .
L oved ( ca s u a li te r )
. N a i bi g .
Wh om o n e loves A n g caibigan . .
To long for M a g i big

. .
The thing longed fo r A n g p i n a g i b i ga n .

-
L ove of so m ething A n g caibig an . .
Thing loved Q u i n a i bi g a n
. .
(I ) F o r t he s ake of e u p ho ny , ma mi ha e d t a ke s h a nd a dds n.
TE E TA G A L oG L A N GU A GE
“
L oving lovely lova le ai m able

, ,
b , . Ca i b i g ibig .
To love this an d that o ver agai n . M a n gi b i g .
F lirting a m o rous , . M a i bi g u i n ( )
I .
To have a leani ng for . M a i bi g .
Covetousness . Pa g c a i b i g .
To pay a d de s s e s to . M an gi b i g .
To love each other . M a g i i b i g m a g ca ca i b i g a n

-
, .
To like M a ca l i b i g
’
. .
To t ake ( for o ne s self) Cu m o ha = m o ha

’
. . .
The thing ta ken A n g con in

The person fro m ho m w
. .
. A n g con an .
Taking Pa g c o ha
b
. .
To go a out taking . M a n go ha .
The thing thus taken . A n g p a n go n i n .
Ta ker . M a p a g c o ha .
The thing taken ( ca s u a li te r ) . . A n g nacob a .
What can be taken reachable ,

. M a co co ha .
J
A CTI V E .
To use to e i n the ha it o f
, b b . M a m i ha s a .
To find fault with . M a m i n tas .
To curse to swear , . M anu mpa .
To te m pt . M a n u cs o .
To fli rt M a n gi bi g
b
. .
To take to go a out takin g , . M a n goha .
N a m i m iha s a .
N a m i m i n t as .
N an u nu m pa .
N a nu n u cs o .
N a n gi n gi b i g .
N a n go n goha .
Pre s e nt p e rf e ct a nd p a s t i nd e fi n i te t e ns e s .
U sed , -
ds t ; have hast has used , , . N a m i ha s a .
Cens ured , censured . N a m i n t as .
Swore , sworn . N a n u mp a .
Te m pted , te m pted . N a n u cs b .
F lirted , flirted . N a n gi b i g .
Took , taken it . N a n gu ha .
Had ,
-
ds t used . N a ca p a m i ha s a n a m i ha s a na ,
.
cen sured . N a ca p a m i n tas n a m i n t as na ,

.
N a ca p a n u m p a n a n u m p a na ,
.
N a ca p a n u c s o, n a n u cs o n a .
N a ca p a n gi b i g n a n gi b i g na ,
.
N a ca p a u go ha n a ngo ha na ,
.
( 1) N o t e t he a cce nt u a t i o n .
P re s e nt p e rf e ct a nd pas t i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
Was ,
-
s t w ere ; have hast ,
ha s b een accusto m e d . Pi n a m i ha s a .
censured . Pi n a m i n tas .
cursed . Pi n a n u m p a .
te m pted . Pi n a n u cs o .
fli rted . Pi n a n gi bi g .
t aken . Pi n a ngo ha .
Ha d ,
-
de t b een accusto m ed . N a p a m i ha s a , p i n a m ih a s a na .
censured . N a p a m i n tas , p i n a m i n t a s na .
cursed . N a p a n u m p a, p i n a n u m p a na .
te m pted . N a p a u u c s o, p i n a n u cs o n a .
N a p a n gi bi g , p i n a n i
g g b i na .
N a p a n go ha , i n oha n a
p n a g .
F u t u re i nd e fi n i t e t e n s e .
Shall -
lt will ,
-
It be accusto m ed . Pa m i m i ha s a n hi n .
( epenthesis )
censured . Pa m i mi nta s i n .
cursed . Pa n u nu m p a i n .
te m pted . P a n u n u cs o hi n .
flir ted . Pa n gi ngi b i g u i n .
I , I ) H ta ke n . Pa n gon go n i n .
Shall lt , W l ll
- -
lt b
have een accusto m ed . M a p a m iha s a, p a m i m iha s a n hi n na .
censured M a p a m i n tas a rn i m i n t a s i n na
.
, p .
cursed M a p a nu m p a a n u n u m p a i n na
.
, p .
te m pted M a p a n u cs o a n u n u c s o hi n na
.
, p .
flirted M a p a n gi bi g , i n gi b i g u i n na
.
p a n g .
taken . M a p a ngo ha , p g g
a n o n o n i n na .
Be let b e accusto m ed . P a m i s a n hi n .
cen sured . Pa m i n ta s i n .
cursed . Pa n u m p a i n .
te m pted . P a n u c s o hi n .
flirted . P a n gi b i g u l n .
taken . Pa n go n i n
V e r b a ls .
The state of being accusto m e d . A n g p a m i ha s a n hi n .
censure d .
p a m i n t as in .
cursed .
p a n u m p a i n .
te m pted .
p a n u c s o hi n .
fli rted .
p a n gi b i g u i n .
taken .
p a n g o n i n .
M O DI FI CA TI V E V E R BA L PA R TI CL E M an zP a n . 2 09
Y P A SS I V E .
To accusto m b ecause of .
censure
curse at .
te m pt with .
fli rt on accou nt of .
take with .
P re s e nt i nd e fi n i t e te ns e .
A ccusto m , -
est ,
-
s b e ause o f
c . Y p i n a m i m i ha s a .
Censure , -
s t, Y p i n a m i m i n tas .
Curse , at. Yp i n a n u n u m p a .
Te m pt , -
est ,
with . Y p i n a n u n u cs o .
F li rt
, on accou nt of . Yp i n a n gi n gi b i g .
Take ,
-
s t, with . Yp i n a n go n goha .
P re s e nt p e rf e ct a nd pa s t i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
A ccusto m ed , d e t ; have hast has accusto m ed because of . Y p i n a m i ha s a .
Cen sured , censu red Yp i n a m i n tas .
Cursed , cu rsed at . Yp i na n u m p a .
Te m pted , te m pted w ith . Yp i n a n u cs o .
F lirted , flirted on account of . Yp i n a n gi b i g .
Took , taken with . Yp i n a n go ha .
Had ,
-
ds t accusto m ed ecause of b . N a y p a m i ha s a, yp i n a m i h a s a n a .
censu red N a y p a m i n tas , yp i n a m i n t a s n a

cu rs ed at . N a y pa n u m p a , y p i n a n u m p a na .
te m pted with . N a y p an u cs b , yp i n a n u cs o na .
flirted on account of N a y p a ngi b i g , y p i n a n gi b i g n a

’
. .
ta ken with . N a y p a ngoh a , yp i n a n

g o h a na .
F u t u re i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e
b
0
Sha ll -
lt, will -
lt a cc usto m ecause of Y p a m i m i ha s a
n
, . .
censure Y p a m i m i n tas
n
n .
n curse at . Yp a n u n u m p a .
n at te m pt With . Y p a n u n u cs o .
fli rt o n account of Y p a n gi n gi b i g
“
. .
ta ke with . Yp a ngo n goha .
Fu t u re p e rf e c t t e ns e .
have accusto m ed
Shall , -
lt , will ,
—
lt
{ because of
do ce n s u re d do do
i M a y p a m i ha s a, y p a m i m i ha s a
M a y p a m i n tas , y p a m i m i n tas n a
na .
, , , . .
cursed at . M a y p a n u m p a, y p a n u n u m p a na .
te m pted with . M ayp a n u c s o, y p a n u n u cs o n a .
flirted o n a o
Ma i b i g gl bi g
i na
’
coun t of yp a n g g ,
yp a n n .
w
.
ta ken i th . M a yp a n gu ha , yp a n g un guha na .
27
2 10 THE TA G A L O G LA N GU A GE .
I mpe ra t i v e .
A ccusto m , let accusto m because of . Y pa m i h as a .
Censure , censure Y p a m i n t as .
Curs e ,
c u rse at . Yp a n u m p a .
Te m pt , te m pt wi th . Yp a n u c s o .
F lirt ,
flirt on account of . Y p a n gi b i g .
Take ,
take with . Yp a n go ha .
V e rb a ls .
The action of accusto m ing becau se of . A n g y p a m i ha s a .
cen su ring y p a m i n t as .
cursing at m
’
yp a n u p et .
s te m p ting with .
y pa n u cs o .
fli rting on account of yp a n i
g g b i
w
. .
a taki ng i th .
y p a n go ha .
AN P A SS I V E .
To be accus to m ed to . Pa m i ha s a n ha n ( epen thesis ) . .
To ani m advert on . P a m i n ta s a n .
To swear befo re . Pa n u m p a an .
To te m pt at o r i n . Pa n u c s o ha n .
To flirt wi th Pa n g i b i g a n
g
. .
To take fro m . Pan on an ( con traction ) . .
A m art , a re
,
accus to m ed to . Pi n a m i m i s a n han .
A ni m advert , -
est s ,
on —
. Pi n a m i m i n ta s an .
Sw ear ,
-
s t
,
before . Pi n a n u n u m p a an .
Te m pt , —
est ,
at or in . Pi n a n u n u cs o han .
F lirt ,
with . Pi n a n gi ngi b i g a n .
Take ,
—
s t
, fro m . Pi na n go n go n an .
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t a nd pas ; i n d e fi n i t e t e ns es .
Was ,s t were ; have hast

—
has bee n accusto m ed to
, , , . Pi na m i s a n han ,
A ni m a dverted d s t ; have hast an i m adverted o n
, , , . P i n a m i n t a s an .
Swore , sworn before . P i n a n u m p a an

Te m pted ,
te m pted at or i n . P i n a n u cs o han .
F lirted , flirted with . P i n an gi b i g a n .
Took , taken fro m . Pi n a ngo n an .
Had de t been accusto m ed to N a p a mi s a n han , i n a m i s a n han na

p
—
, . .
2 ani m adverted on . N a p a m i n ta s an , p i n a m i n ta s an na .
s worn before N a p a n u m p a an i n a n u m p a an na
a .
, p .
te m pted i n or at . N a p a n u c s o han , p i n a n u cs o han na .
flirted wi th N a p a n gi b ig a n i a n i bi g a n na
.
, p n g .
taken fro m . N a p a ngo n an , p i n a ngo n an na .

2 12 THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
is used to for m verbs deno ting the seasona le prod u ctio n

M an b
of the plants .
To blosso m to bloo m M a m ula c lac ( fro bulac m lac )

g g
- -
.
,
.
To fructify to bear fruit ,

. M a m un a ( fro m bon a) . .
To put forth or gather i n the shoots l

M a n la b o n g
of ba m boo trees i -
.
.
denotes the habi tual action the freque nce o f acts Or the
M an
w
,
m ultit u de of agents i n so m e actio ns the first degree o f h ich i s ex ,
pressed by a m o r may .
To cut with the h and to go ofl ,

P u mu ti m a m uti
about cutting that w a y
.
,
.
To gather flowers to go abou t g a t ,

Cu m i t i l, m a n gi ti l
hering flowers
.
To spin to be spinner ,
. Su m uli d m a n ulid ,
.
To give to lavish , . M a g b i g ay , m a m i g ay
the sense with those actions which m a y

B ut be m erce na ry is
one of engage m ent in the trade Thus for i nstance .
,
.
To se w
to sew a great deal
,
. Tu m a hi ,
m a g ta hi .
i
But to engage i n tailoring to earn
, ,
M anah i
a living by sewing .
i
To wri te ( the action looked upon as
Su mI I la t , m a g s ula t
’
to the a gent ) to wri te so m ething

.
.
,
’
B ut to earn o ne s livelihood by
M a n ula t
w riting .
roots of i nstru m ents tools o r ar m s i f conj u g ated

F ro m , ,
ma n are for m ed ve rb s i ndicating that sa m e are handled o r

,
m ade
use of custo m arily and as a m atter of trade .
Sword , t o ear side ar m s w . Sandat a m a n a n d a ta ,

.
A x e to wear an axe P a la co l, m a m a la co l
b
. .
,
Chopping knife to wield i t Tabac m ana ac

g
. .
, ,
Dagger to wear a dagger ,

. I u a m an i na
, .
Co m m on
nouns of places a re conj ugated by ma n to i ndi ca te
b
ha itatio n or resi dence therei n .
M oun t ,hill ; to settle o n a m ountain . Bondoc ; m a m o n d o c .
Town to live i n town

,
. Bayan m a m ayan ,
.
Se a to lead a sea farin g life

,
. D agat m a n ag a t
,
.
House to live i n a house ( as oppos

w } Bahay m a m aha y
.
,
ed to to live i n the oods )

.
,
.
i ndicating wearing apparel i f conj ugated with ma n

R oots ill , , w
express the wearing thereof Th e di ff erence i n sense be tw ee n the .
the sa m e conj uga ted wi th ma y o r wit h ma n i s that the for m er e x

'
‘
p resses the actual and the lat ter the custo m ary wea ri ng , ,
.
Shirt , to wear a s hi rt . Baro m a m aro

,
.
A p ron to wea r a n apron

. . Tapi s , m a na p i s
Ha t ,
t o wear a hat . Sa m b a lilo m a n a m b a li lo ,
'
.
M O DI F I CA TI V E V E R BA L PA R TI CL E M a nzP a n . 2 13
The
i ndustries con nected with forestry a nd sea p roducts ein g b
so largely engaged i n i n the I slands roo ts i ndicative of any such ,
p rod ucts m a y be co n j ugate d with ma n to den ote the en gaging i n t he

i ndustry a s a business :
Wood to exercise th e w oo dm on g
'
,
Cab oy m a ngaho y
er s trade .
R a ttan to gather i n rattan s

,
Cu ay m a n gou ay .
, .
Deer t o chase deer as a m atter o f

U s a m a n2 u s a
g
,
bus iness .
F ish to be a fisher m an
,
I s d a m a ngi s d a .
, .
Oyster to gather o y s te rs ,
Ta la b a m a n a la b a .
, .
Shell m other of pear l s h e tto (

,
Ca p I s m a n ga p I s
pick up to gather shells ‘
, .
.
,
The i nstru m ent m ade use of i n fishi n g or getti ng at such produc ts

m ay like ise w be conj ugated by ma n .
Snare , to lay snares fo r . Si lo , m anilo .
F ish ing ro d to be a rod fi sher m an

-
,
. Bi u a s , m a m i nas .
Hook to use hooks i n fi shin g B i n u i t, m a m i n u i t

w b
. .
,
N e t to fi s h i th a net
,
. L a m at m a nla m b a t .
G u n f o w lI n g p I e ce ; to hunt W I th -
,
Baril ; m a m ari l
a gu n
.
d
B ut istinctio n should b e drawn bet ee n these instru m en ts co n w
j ugated by ma n and t he sa m e conj ugated by u m U m look s f o r
w
.
,
ard to the actio n o r use ma n to t he work or effect Thus i la o , .

,
“
“
light ; u mi la o to m ake use of a light ; that i s to say “
to light ; ’
z
, ,
ma ng la o “
to get a living by e m ployi ng a light ; ( to fish u sing a
’
torch )
b
.
A s alrea dy hinted ma n is used to i nten sify such a m ver s as ,
cannot be in tensified b y ma y on accou nt of the change of m eaning

which the ver undergoes ith the latter particle b w .
To teach to preach ,
. U m ara l m a ngara l , .
To buy to buy by wholesale B u m i li m a m il i

g
.
, .
,
To go U m a hs m an alis
’
out to go o ut frequently
w b
. .
,
To r w h ite to eco m e very

wgi tq }
,
Pu m u ti , m a m uti .
THI R TY SI XTH E X E R CI SE
—
.
Who m oes m y so n scoff at? He scoff s at yo u d Why does

J
.
he sco ff at m e ? Becaus e you are doctoring m y dog Did ohn prae .
tise m edicine ? No but he practises sooth say i ng Do ch ildre n lay

b
.
,
snares fo r i rds ? They d o not lay s nares fo r bi rds they ear n thei r
b
,
livi ng y n etti ng an d by fishing w i th a h oo k What are the i m p i ous .
accusto me d to ? They are accusto m ed to censure and to c u rse .
Who m i s the young m a n al ways te m pti ng ? He i s te m pting his f e m

ale cousin
-
Do you u se to flirt? I used to flirt with girls
. hen a w
( 1) Se e Tw e n ty fi f t h L e s s on.
2 14 THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A GE .
lad. A m ong w
ho m do you d istri bute that m oney ? I dis tribute i t
a m ong m y relatives Does yo ur servant take care of the garden ? He takes
.
care of hi s far m for he does no t live i n town but i n the country What
, , .
ki nd of fishing i s our neighbour engaged i n ? He i s engaged in fishing for

eels and frogs What is your t rade ? . M y trade i s that of a writer .
Who m do you pray to custo m arily ? I pray to Go d and t he Holy Vi rgin .
Is the p riest preach i ng to those wo m e n w e a ri ng a p ro n s ? Yes What ‘
b
.
i s her hus and en gaged i n ? He i s e ngaged i n fishing wi th a torch '
b
.
Is that dog u sed to bite an d devour oars ? I t is n ot used to bite and

devour boars for the oars do not allow the m selves to be o vertaken
, b .
What i s the condition of th e trees i n your garden ? They do not

b
ye t ear fruit ; but they now bloo m What was Jane engaged i n
d
.
when still alive ? She was engaged i n sp inni ng an gatheri ng flo w ers .
H o w does he earn h is living ? He sews an d writes Do o f ficers wear .
side ar m s ?
-
They wear a s word Did you r grandfathe r lead a sea f ari ng .
life? N o he was a wood m an an d a chaser of deer

,
Was not your .
father engage d i n fishing? He was engaged i n g athering o y sters an d

shells Did they fish with a h ook o r with a rod ? They fished ith w
b w
.
‘
a torch and so m eti m es with a ne t Does his frie nd hu nt oars ith

b
.
a gun ? N o he ha itually hunts boars with dogs

,
.
TH I R TY S E V E N TH L E SS O N
—
.
YC A TL O N G P O U O , T, P I TO N G PA G A R A L .
M O D I FI C A TI V EV ER BA L P A R TI CL E M A CA
On
encounteri ng dissyllabic and trisyllabic ver al particles the
'
b
student is re mi nded of the general r u le regarding the repeati ng o f the ,
second o r thi rd syllable of the particle accord in g to i ts being d i s s y l ,
la b i c or polysyllabic i nstead of the first of the root for the presen t and the
, ,
future tense I n applyi ng this rule to m a ca the re m ark i s m ade that

.
,
here a s elsewhere the rule is s o m ewhat wavering and that the custo m
, , ,
p revails i n so m e d istricts of repeating ca whi le the fi rst syllable of the

b
,
root i s repeated i n others The latter for m is m ore to e reco m m ended

w
.
,
especially in those roots hich ad m it of e a i n the passive .
M a ca
0“
as a ver al particle i s al ays transcendental never
‘
b ,
w ,
b d
su or inate to any other
’
A ccording to whether i t i s applied to a m an d ma y o r to m a verbs , ,
so i t i m parts respectively a potential or a causative se nse

b
, , ,
.
The conj ugation of m a ca verbs di ffers fro m that o f m ost other ver s ,
but in the pluperfect and future perfect tenses lac k ing o f course the for m , ,
with thi s p a rticle that of using the respective si m ple past i ndefinite
, ,
and future i ndefinite or i m perati ve tenses with the perfective particle

na followi ng on ly eing u sed fo r the p urpose b
The v erbs ma ca ld ca d and ma ca hap z
, .
are hereafter conj ugated as

‘
s
a patte rn for a ll others of the sa m e kin d .
.
2 16 THE TA G A L O G L A N GUA G E .
V e r b a ls .
The acti on of being able to walk . A n g p a g ca laca d .
saddening . A n g p a g ca ha p i s .
potential verb s have m a fo r the p assive an d a re us e d

M a ca
i n all the passives t he n ature of the action or the root m ay a m i t d

o f : ma ca b
causative ver s have ca for the passive an d on ly a m it o f d
the i nstru m ental passive for m
b b
.
The analogy i s to be noted existing et w een ma ca an d ma ver s ,
which m anifests i tself i n th e above peculiarity an d i n ma ca potential

b
ver s dropping i n i n all the passives as seen i n the paradig m s below , .
I f the studen t ai m s at a thorough acquaintance wi th this i m portant

particle h e should pay close attention t o these conj ugative s i m i la rI tI e s
b
,
and to t he special con struction of sentences with ma ca cau s a tive v e r s

which will e explained i n the sequel b .
I N P A S SI V E .
To be run over ( to be a ble to be

M al acad
.
r u n ov e r ) 1
Am . art i s are run over

, , . N a la laca d .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
Was s t were ; have hast has ee n

,
e
, , , b I
N a 1acad
.
ru n over .
.
P lu p e rf e c t t e ns e .
Had ,
-
ds t b een ru n over . N a laca d na .
Fu t ure i nd e fi ni te t e ns e
Shall , -
lt, will ,
-
lt be run over . M a la laca d .
Fu tu re p e rf e c t t e n s e .
Shal l , lt, -
w ill ,
-
lt have b een run over . M a la laca d na .
I mp e ra ti v e .
Be let
, be ru n over . M a laca rl .
Ve r b a l .
The sta te of b eing run over . A n g m al acad .

M O DI F I CA TI V E VE RBA L PA R TI CL E M a ca
02
3
7
1 2 ;
1
2 17
Y PA SSI V E .
b
To e able to walk with ( a staff ) M a y laca d
b
. . .
To sadden y . Yca ha p i s .
Ca n , s t -
walk with . N a y la laca d .
Sa dden , -
est ,
-
s . by . Yq u i n a ha ha p i s .
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t a nd pas t i nd e fi n i t e t
te ns es .
Could , d at walk ; have hast ha s been

-
, ,
able to wa lk with Sadd ene d , d at ; -

r N a y laca d Yq u i n a ha p i s
b
. . .
have h ast has saddened y

, , . l
Had ,
-
ds t b een a b le to w alk w ith . N a y laca d n a .
saddened by . Yq u i n a ha p i s na .
F u t u re i n d e fi n i te t e n s e .
Shall , lt , -
wil l ,
i t be able to walk wi th . M a y la lac a d .
sadden by . Yca ha ha p i s .
Fu t u r e p e r f e c t t e ns e .
Shall —
lt , will -
lt have been able to
M a y la laca d na
, ,
walk with .
d
.
do do sad ened by Yca ha ha p i s na .
I mp e ra t i v e .
b
Be a le let . be able to walk wi th . M a y laca d .
Sadden let ,
. sadden by . Yca ha p i s .
V e r b al .
The action of being able to walk wi th . A n g m a y laca d .
saddening by . A u g y ca ha p i s .
AN P A SS I V E .
To be a le to walk at b ’
. M a la ca ra n .
am, art b
a le to
i
I s
,
N a la la ca ran .
2 18 THE TA G A L O G L A N GU A G E .
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p as t lnd e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
Co uld d at walk ; was s t were h ave -
b b w
-
, , , ,
N a la ca ra n
h ast has een a le to alk at
.
.
,
Had ds t een a le to
,
-
b b walk at . N a la ca ra n na .
Futu re i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e .
Shall , 1t , -
wi ll ,
-
lt b e ab le to walk at . M a la la ca ra n .
Shall , lt , will I t h ave een able to

-
b
w al k at
-
,
M a la la ca ra n na .
I m p e ra t i v e .
b
Be a le let , b e a b le to w alk at . M a la ca ra n .
V e rb a l .
The action of b eing able to walk at . A u g m a la ca ra n .
The
fol lowing verbs should be conj ugated i n the active an d in the
w
passive in the sa me ay as ma ca laca d and ma ca hap i s y the student b .
To gladden to m ake m erry by ,M a ca tou a y ca tou a .

, .
To s a dden to m ake sad by M a ca lu m b ay y ca lu m b ay

w
, .
, .
To frighten to frighten i th ,M a ca tac o t y ca ta co t .

, .
To har m to har m with M a ca s a m a y c a s a m a

b
.
, , .
To grieve to grieve y , M a ca p a n ga ny a y a y ca p a nga n y a y a .

,
.
To resto re health to m ake healthy M a c a g a li n g y ca g a hn g

, .
,
.
To strengthen to strength e n wi th M a ca la cas y c a la cas

b
.
, ,
.
To e able to do o r to m ake to be
b
,
able to e do n e or m ade to be M a ca g a u a m a g a u a m a y g a u a m aga

b
, , , ,
a le to do or to ma ke with to be u aan ,
.
able to do o r make at
w
.
To terrify to terrify ith M a ca p a n gi la b o t y ca p a ngi la b o t

b b
, .
,
.
To eautify to render eautiful M a ca g a n d a y ca g a n d a

, , ,
.
To cause the disgust of satiety to

M a ca b u s o g y c a b u s o g ,
satiate by .
To hi nder to hinder with , M a ca g a m b a la y c a g a in b a la .

, .
To alleviate to be a lleviated by M a ca g u i n ha u a y ca g u i n ha u a
, .
‘
,
.
deter mining power or control which ma ca exerci s es over other

The
verbal particles m a y further be seen i n th e following co m binations :
To be able to go out
n
.
take Oll t
n
H .
I : go away .
ta k e aw a y .
teach .
study .
preach .
b
In v e r s d enoting the atte m pt o n t he par t of the su j ect b
to w ards so m e end the tenden cy i s expressed i n the regular way ; _
,
but the at tain m ent i s expressed by ma ca .
5H u m an a p M a ca hah a p
To look fo r To find
. .
t Cu m i ta M acaqu ita
. .
To ask fo r ,
To b
o tain . H u m i ngi . M a c a hi n gi .
To run for . To overtake . H u m abo l . M a ca hab o l .
The an passive serves to deno te the sa m e sense of b eing

overtaken b y unconscious agen ts .
N ight ca m e u pon us . b efore we N a g a bi ha n ca m i b ago d un g m a ti ng as

arrived at M anila . M ayni la .
The ar m y were surprise d on their

“
w ay b y t h e rain .
N a la o n an a ng b och o s a d a an .
The er
i s fre q uently m ade use of y n ati ves as a
m a ca v b b
euphe m is m for so m ething which they a re asha m ed to d ec lare o r vouch
for In ad m itting of th eir havi ng acted i n so m e foolish way of
’
.
,
having don e so m ethi ng that m a y bring punish m ent u po n th e m o r ,
i n disclosing what m a y hurt the feelings of the pe rson they are speaki n g
t o they generally e m ploy ma ca as an in si nuation o f the possi bility of
'
’
d
,
any such acts h aving been co mm i tte as they are however well sure of , ,
.
Have you ever purloi ned anything ? dU ng mo m i t b

ca ag a nang s h o man ?
I have so m eti m es pu rloined ( I
} M a ra hi l n a ca o m i t ac 6
.
m a y h ave purloined ) .
I N
d a q u i ta m o a c ong p u m a tay as ea
Did you see m e kill hi m?
i n iy a?
I saw . N a ca q u i ta a co .
sentences the verb of whi ch ha s the particle ma ca used

A ctive
“
i n the po ten tial sense are constructed i n the regular way of putting
‘
the a gent i n the n o m i native and th e obj ect i n the accusative .
I can shoot ild fowl w . N a ca ba b a ri laco nang i b o n

'
H indi siy a n a ca i n m a ca i n nang m anga

’
He could not eat any m angoes .

-
.
M a ca p a g a ara l ca m i n a u g m a ra m i ng
'
We shall b e able to study m any

things . b agay .
A ctive sentences with a ma ca causati ve ver ha ve the sa m e b '
govern m ent i n regard to the s ubj ect but the thing o r per s o n o n
b
,
"
which o r on who m the action falls co m es to e considered as the

indirect obj ect o f the deter m ini ng verb and is always p receded b y '
.
the p reposi tio n s a and not by n a ng Ow ing to thi s special govern

m ent and to the fact that these ver s can
'
e used i n n o o ther ‘
b b
than the y passive the rules laid down for the p roper use of the ,
a ctive or the passive m i ce of the verb do not apply to ma ca cau s a

tive verbs they being u sed i ndiscri m inately i n eith er of the two voi ce s
b
,
regardless of the deter m ination or i ndeterm ination of the o j ect

The peculiar passive construction with these verbs in w
.
hich
the a g e nt of the v er i n the active voi ce ta kes i ts p lace as the b
M ODI FI CA TI V E V E R BA L PA R TI CL E
b
su j ect i n the passive s entence i s earnestly co mm en ed i s the an i m ,
d
prove m en t to the attention of the students .
I wng m n fl l tb a p g n a ca g a hn
S ga
s
It was this m edicine that resto red ga ot ’
a q u i n g c a p a tI d 'g
.
u I n a g g
a a 1
h ealth to m v b rother yq
n ang a q u i n g ca p a tI d I tb ng ga m ot
.
A n g ca hin hi na i n a ca g a g a n d a s a m a
b eauty
, ,
M odesty b e a u tifi e s ( affords n ga dalag a o r , and c a hi n hi n a n ang
g
,
to)y oung girls . siy ang y q u i na g a g a n d a nang m an a

dalag a .
A ng ca n i y ang a a li ay n aca lu m b ay
Hi s departure saddened ( caused p g s
s a aquin or yq u i n a lu m b ay co ang
sad ness to )m e , .
ca n i y an g li
.
a
p g a s .
A ng ca li n i a , i , s n aca g a g a li n g cata '
s e
01 health to ( streng
2132)£ 3233
8 7 8
ou an o r y q u i n a g a g a li n g nang cata °
1 y , ,
ou an an g calinisa n
.
TH I R TY SE V E N TH E X E R CI SE .
Why can you n o t wal k ? I can not walk because I a m eak w

d w
.
,
What sad d en s her? Her m other s eath sadden s he r Who m ill he

’
rej oice over? He will rej oice ove r hi s child ren What i s i t th at ca used you .
What te rri fi e s child ren ? Thunder

'
to recover? So m e m edicines cured m e .
t e rri fi e s c hild ren What is i t th a t b e a u tifi e s girls ? M odesty b e a u ti fi e s gi rls

w
. .
What ould h inder hi m ? His office hinders hi m Who m itigated .
your grief? M y wife m itigated my gri ef Wi ll he be able t o go

b w w
.
out now? He cann ot go out n o w u t he will go a ay to m orro

b b
-
.
,
Have y o u een a le to ta ke ou t stone ? I cou ld n o t take out s to ne

b
.
Ca n you teach Tagalog ? N o I cannot ut I ca n lea rn i t M a y I

b
.
, ,
( a m I per m itted to ) ta ke this ook ? You m a y take i t Do you under .
sta nd w hat I s a y ? I do
,
Does h e hea r the roari ng of the wind ?
.
He does not he i s deaf , Ca n you th ink u p on i t? . I can think .
Ca n he m ake out the m eani ng o f thi s word ? He can m ake out

the m eaning “i ll he be a le to p ronounce ? He
t
. b ill n ot be a le to w b
prono u nce for he stutters so m ewhat Do they know ho w to read ?
b d
, .
They do Has the servant looked fo r the ke y ? Yes ut he coul

b
.
,
not co m e across i t Has your sister aske d o u r neigh ou r for

b
.
flow ers ? N o because she knows that s he w i ll n o t e gi ven any

b
~
.
,
What d i d the oy do ? He ra n after F rank and he overtook

'
hi m When shall we de p art ? We shall start early i n the m orn ing

w
that e m a y not b e har m ed by sunshine
,
A n d i f night co m e upon
u s i n the ay ? w G o on for y ou will ha v e i t he
"
enefit of enj oyin g b

b d
,
m oo nlight ; ut take care not to be surprise by the rain .

22 2 ,
TH I R TY — E I G HTH L E S SO N .
YC A T L O N G P O U O , T, U A L O N G PA G A R A L .
M O DI FI CA TI V E V ER B A L P A R TI C L E M A G P A = P A .
M a gp a zn
i s chi e fly used i n for m ing causative ver s i ndica tive
a b
of an action executed by a person other than the speaker and i s
w
,
therefore a transcendental particle although so meti m es i t ill be seen

b
, , ,
su ordinate to others
w
.
Thi s transcenden cy of ma yp a requi res ho ever here so m e elu , ,
c i da ti o n ; for with ce rtai n verbs as for i nstan ce m a gp a ata ng ma yp a

, , , ,
d a la etc i t see m s as i f the particle were used as the one n ec essarily

d
, .
,
an p ri m arily requi red f o r the si m ple m ean in g of respec tively “

to
b
, ,
” “
loan , to sen d etc ; ut th is concept o f the action exists but i n
, .
our m inds as a result of giving as equivalents fo r these co m plex Ta ga

b
log ver s the si m ple E nglish verbs to loan
,
“ ” ”
and to send whe re , ,
a m ore congenial rendition would require so m ethi ng as to m ake others

“
" “ ”
borrow to order to convey
b b d
.
,
M a yp a eing dissy llabi c p a th e last sylla le i s re pe ate i n , , ,
t he present and the fut u re tenses o f the active voice The contrary
b
.
i s the case in the passive voic e ; fo r a s p a i s m o nosylla ic the fi rst , ,
syllable of the root i s here to b e repea te d i n !those tenses Care

b
.
should e ta ken to i ntrod uce bet w een p a and the root i n the plupe rfect
an d th e future perfec t tenses of the active and i n a ll t e n s e s of the
b
,
p a s s w e voice the passive particle

,
required y the verb i n i ts pri m ary
sen se i n order t o m ake i t clear whether it i s to the a m to t he ma y
b
.
, , ,
o r any other ver that the particle i s applied

d d
.
The two following verbs have been selecte to ren e r this d i fi e

rence of m eanings m ore noticeable
J
A CTI V E
d
‘
To or er to teach toca ns to teach ; , e

to order to learn , to cause to g p aara l, m a g p a p a g ara l .
le a rn .
Pr e s e nt i n d e fi ni t e t e n s e .
d
Or er , -
s t, -
s to teach ; to learn . N a g p a p a ara l; n a g p a p a p a g ara l.
Ordered d s t ; have hast ha s -

order 2
N a g p a ara i a pa g ara l.
, , ,
nag
ed to teach ; to lear n . S , p
THE TA GA L O G L A N G U A GE .
V e rb a l .
The actio n of ordering to teach ;

to learn to i A n g p a a ra li n , a ng p a a
p g a ra li n .
Y PA SS I V E .
I nfi ni t i v e .
To order to b e taught ; to o rder to ,

learn y reason of b . f
Yp i n a a ra l, y p a p a g a ra l .
Or be ta u gh t ; to learn
gi ééggb
r s to
}
-
Yp i n a aara l; y p i n a p a g aara l
I l of
.
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e s .
Ordered d e t; have hast has order

b b
-
, , ,
ed to e taught ; to learn y rea Yp i na ara l; y p i na p a g ara l .
son of .
Had ds t orde red to be taugh t ; to N a y p a ra l y p i na ara l n a ;

a
y
na a l
g p p g
a a ra
b
-
, , , ,
learn y reason of .
yp i n a p g ara l n a
a .
F u t u re i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e .
Shall lt will lt order to be taught ; g Y aa ara l

b
- -
y p p ga a ra l
, , ,
p a a
lea rn y reason of
.
,
.
Shall , will lt hav e o rdered to

lt - M a y p a ara l, y p a a ara l na ; ma y p a p a g ara l,
b b
-
, ,
e taught ; to learn y reason of .

y p a p a g a ara l na .
i mpe ra ti v e .
Order orde r to be ta ugh t ; to

i Yp a ara l; y p a p a g a ra l
,
learn by reas o n of .
,
V e r b a ls .
The actio n of o rderi ng to be ta u ght ;

A ng y p a ara l; ang y p a p a g ara l
to learn by reason o f .
.
AN P A SS I V E .
I nfi ni t i v e .
To order to te ach to to o rd e r to be
d ,
Paa ra lan , p ap a g ara la n
p
studie .
.
M O DI F I CA TI V E V E RBA L PA R TI CL E M a gp a P a z . 225
Order - est -
s to teach to ; to be Pi n a aa ra la n , p i n a p a g a a ra la n
d
, ,
.
s tudie
P re s e nt pe rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e f i ni t e t e ns e s .
Ordered d s t ; h ave hast ha s o rde r )

b
.
1
-
,
Pm a a ra la n , , 0
p i n a p a g a ra an
i
.
,
ed to teach to ; to e studied .
P lu pe r f e c t t e n s e .
Had d at ordered to teach to ; to e

,
- b N a p a a ra la n p i n a a ra la n
, na ; na p a p a g .
studied . aralan , p i n a p g
a a ra la n na .
z
F u t u re i nd e f i n i t e t e ns e .
Sh l
gbé x
yiéd
lt ' l lt order to te ach to ;
Paa a ra la n , p a p a g a ara la n na
t
.
F u t u r e p e rf e c t t e ns e .
Shall -
lt
wi ll lt h ave ordered to -
M a p a a ra la n p a a a ra la n na ; ma p a p a g
b d
.
, , ,, .
teach to ; to e stu ied . aralan p a p a g a a ra la n

,
na .
I mp e r a ti v e .
Order let d
or er to teach to ; to
d Paa ra la n , p a p a g a ra la n
.
,
b e stu ied
.
V e r b a ls .
The a c ti o n o f o d e r i ng t0 i ca ch tO; i
'
to b e studie d r
.
5
A n g p a a ra la n ; ang p a p a g a r a la n .
The student i s reco m m en ded to conj ugate i n the active and i n

t he passive the follo ing w ma yp a ver s : b
To order to d o o r m ake to be o r ,
d ered ( person )to d o or m ake to M a gpa ga u a paga o i n , ( co nt ) yp a g au a
b
.
, , ,
o rder to e done o r m ade to o r , a

p g a u a a n .
d e r to do o r m ake at
b
.
To order to g o ups tai rs to e order ,

~
ed ( person ) to go u pstai rs to o r ,
M a g p a p a n hi c p a p a n hi q u i n y pa p a nhi c ,
d e r to go u pst a i rs along wi th or , ,
,
p pa a n h i c a u
because of to o rder to go upsta irs
.
a n d give to .
To order to ta ke upsta i rs to be o r
‘
d er ed ( p e rson )to t a ke up stai rs to M a g p a p a g p a n hi c p a p a g p a n h i q u i n

b
, , ,
o rder to e ta ken u psta i rs to o r ,

a
yp p gp a a n hi c ,
a a
p p gp a n hi c a n .
der to ta ke upstai rs and give to .
To order to go d o wns ta irs to be o r ,
d ered ( person)to go d own stai rs ,

M a g p a n a o g p a p a n a og u i n , y p a na og , p a
to order to go do w n stai rs alo n g ,
with or ecause of to o rd e r to
, b panaogan .
go downstairs and g i ve to .
d
To o r er to ta ke d o w nst irs to b ] a e
to take d o w n
,
ordered e rs o n
stai rs b e taken down y p p gp g p p pg pg p
M gp p gp g p a a a ana o , a a a na og u m,
st i rs to order to take d o nstai rs
, '
a a a na e I
a a a na o g a n
w
.
a ,
an d give to J
T order to plant to b e ordered
.
o
b M gp t i m p t i mi yp a ta n i m ,
,
a a an a an n, a
p
( person ) to plant to order to e ,
t m n an ( cont )
,
a
planted to order to plant at
, .
. .
To ord er to write to be ordered ,

M a g p a s ula t , p a s u la ti n , a
yp s ula t , pasu
( person ) to write to o rder to be ,
latan
written to order to write on or to
, ,
.
.
To order to sew to be ordered

b
,
( p e )
r s o n to sew to order to e ,
sewed to order to sew at o r for

, , .
i n the foregoing i n stan ces refers to actions to e exe

M a yp a , b
b
,
c u te d by a pers o n other than th e su j ect I f the a ction i s active .
and such as to he suffered b y th e subj ect m a yp a m eans to a l low

b
'
onesel f to suffer wi llingly o r to let oneself e i n fl I I e n ce d prevailed

'
, ,
o n or acted upon by the acts of others .
To allow oneself to b e chea ted .
a a Iouched .
whipped
I I I I I
a a a .
slapped
I .
crucified
I I I I I
a a a .
punished
I I I I I b
.
co m ed
b
.
a a a a elied .
If ma yp a i s applied to a root denoting a physical state which

has been reached fro m another con trary prev i ous o ne y a slow self
‘
b
workin g process the action of the s u j ect either to p ro m ote or not to b
w
,
i nterfere ith the transition i s m eant .
To allow to beco m e cool to m ake ,

M a g p a la m i g
cool by exposure
.
To allow to grow rotten to allow )

M a g p a b o lo c ,
.
rottenness to go on i .
To allo w to get dried to p ut to dry M a g p a tu y o

w
. .
,
To allo to fall i n to decay M a g p a g u i ba . .
A ttention b
should e paid to what i s said i n a sentence ei ther p re v ious
ly or subsequently for a proper distinctio n between the sense of for i n stance
d
, ,
“ ” "
to order to e m olish and that of to allow to fall i n to decay ; etc
“
When the sa m e effect i s to be brought a bo u t th rough the i n

fl u e n ce of an external agent the root expressive of the latte r m a y be ,
conj ugated wi th ma gp a and the purposely executed act of the subj ect
to profit by such i nfluence i s i ndicated .
To expos e to sunsh i ne .
the wind .
rainfall .
( I ) The w o r d I s m a d e g ra v e t o d i s t i n g u i s h t hi s s e ns e of t ha t of
“
to wa i t
u n t i l t he s u n ri s e s , a n d o f t h a t o f ca u s a li t y .
d
I t shoul also be noticed tha t i f ma y p a is m a e u s e d of by a
pe rson inferior I n ran k to the one addressed the sense is reverse , d . Thu s ,
ma gp a g a a a ca n i y a n s a i y o ng a ma ma gp a u la n ca s a D i as do mo t
'
,
"
m ean , respectively , “
order your father to do that ; “
m ake G o d to
sen d down so m e rain ; but reques t you r father to do that ;
“ “
pray ’
to G o d fo r rai n ; and so forth fo r si m il ar c a ses .
E very stude nt will eas ily m a ke o ut the d ifi e re n ce i n m eaning

betwee n to co nfess to the priest a nd
“ “
to co n fess by the p riest
’
.
A n y such actions i n which the perfo r m er plays a passi v e rol e a re

w
conj ugated ith ma yp a .
To hear confession s . M a g p a co m p i s a l .
To confess to the priest . M a g cu m p i s a l .
To ask for pardon to haggle to ask l

, ,
Tu m au a d
for a red uction of price i
.
To grant pardon to grant a reduct ,

M a g p a tau a d
ion in the price
.
M a yp a ma y there f ore be con s ide red as the particle w hi ch for m s

b
, ,
d eponen t ver s .
To get s ha ved . M a g p aa hi t .
To have one s shoes shined

’
. M a g p a li n i s n an g sapi n .
To get on e s hair cut dressed M a g pagu p i t

’
. .
,
”
“
To say “
to reci te so m ething by m any or many ti mes ; as
b
,
i n prayers ,
m ay e expressed by ma yp a .
Sa y ( plural ) a m en and a m en . M a g pa a m é n cay o .
Through the laxi ty i n the rules which prevails everywhere i n

Tagalog ma yp a m a y be m ade to m ea n co nsc i ous actions o f the subj ect
,
upon h i m self .
To e m bellish oneself .
To deck oneself .
To elate , to d raw credi t or praise

upon oneself . i M a g p a p u r1 .
A
sense of i nvoluntariness o r the natural effect of inani mate agents
i s exp ressed by d ropping the g of m a yp a .
Sm oke m ounts upwards . N a p a p a i ta a s ang a s o .
Wa ter flows downwards N a p a p a i b a b a ang t ubig

g o
. .
Vapors of the soil rise i n the at A n g m a n ge sin ao n ang lupa napa

m o s p he re a
p p a s a i m a
p p a u i d
g
. :
N a i a s a d a g a t ang agus nang m an a

R ivers flow into the sea i i pég
My heart throb s unto ( I s dra w n to w A ng a q u i ng puso n a p a p a s a i n yo Pa
, ,
ards ) Thee m y L ord , . n gi n o o n cong Dios .
We v
p r e s e r e to t he w o r d d ep one n t t he s e n s e i t has i n L a i n , w he re t
i t me a n s a v
v e rb h a v i n g i n a c ti e m e a n i n g w i t h a p a s s i v e f o r m or i c e e rs a , v v .
(2) t
Se e i n t hi s conne cti o n w ha i s s a i d i n t he Orthogra p hy, pa ge 11 .
M O DI FI CA TI V E V E R BA L PA R TI cLE M a gp a s a .
b
Ver s to which ma yp a does not i m part an n rd e r n g
’
i se nse m ay
b
. ,
e made to exp ress i t by repea t i ng p a .
Go d co m m and s to give a i ms to A n g Dios a y n a gp a p a p a li m os s e m an ga

the poor . d u o ha-
ma g h mé s V
'
Bu t ,
it is clearer to say : A ng D i as ay n a g o ot i s na
ma nga d u e ha
'
3a
b ee n b
.
R eference to ma yp a ei ng so m eti m e s a
has m ade s ub
o rdinate particle Se e how this takes place whe n the pote n tial
. v erb
governs the causative one .
To b e a b le to o rde r t learn o M a ca p a g p a p a g ara l

b e b le to order to teach
. .
To a M aca p a g p a ara l
b e able to order to get i nto
. .
To M a ca p a g p a p a g pas oc
b e a b le to o rder to go ups tairs
.
To . M a ca p a g p a p a n hi c .
Such co n glo m erations are conj ug a ted as follo s w

P resent . N a ca p ag p a p a p a n hi c .
Past . N a ca p a g p a p a nhi c .
F uture . M a ca p a g p a p a p a n hi c .
Studen ts w ill bb
pro a ly feel rather su rprised at findin g ma yp a
used to i m p a rt
so m an i f old an d apparently co n trary senses and at
b
,
seeing i t eve n applied to i m part seve ral others which the a ove
given explan ation s do n ot account for Thi s i s par tly due to the .
o rthographical scope not a ffording so a m ple distinc tion as i t s h ould

a fi o rd b
etween m a yp a fo r transitive verb s o r voluntary actio ns ; an
,
d
map a fo r intran sitive or i nvoluntary ones ; and partly to the conception
b
, ,
which of the ac tion s de noted by the ma yp a ver is for m ed i n the native

m ind .In the perfor m ance o f a n action o f a d u a l o r a c o lle c ti v e ki nd ,
a nati ve m a y consider hi m self ei th er as the princi pal i n the tran saction o r

d
,
as m erely affor ing the O pportunity fo r the other party to perfor m the ac t
ion Thus ma gp a ca mp i s a l ma gp a d a lao fo r i nsta nce are co nsidered by
d
.
, , , ,
n atives i n the way of respectively to aff or th e occasion for others

“
b
, ,
“ ”
to be confessed ; to a fl o rd the occasion for so m e o ne to e pai d a
"
visit ( 1) This explai ns to o why ma yp a co m es to signify : to o rder
.
“
, ,
” “ “ “ ”
to a f ford the occas
“
to allow t o o co n s e n t
, not to i nterfere with ,
’
,
” “
ion fo r ,to cause etc accord ing to the nature of the action an d
, .
,
of the root
b
.
A lthough i n foregoing chapters re ference ha s een m ade to

the u s e and m eaning of the various passi v es with the causative verb
w
,
it ill be well however to add here so me re marks about this i m

porta nt su j ect b
b
.
Fo r the p roper use of the passive s i n ma yp a ver s the fact

d b
,
s houl not e lost sight o f that here there are two d i fi e re n t a ctions
d b
,
an t hat s o m eti m es the regi m en of t he deter m in ing ver

, ( wh ich ,
lie s i n t he p a r i cle ) and so m eti m es that of the dete rm i ned one ( that
.
.
of the action expressed by the root) i s called upon to decide as to the

the use of the one o r th e other o f t he various passives .
“
M a gp a q u i ta for i nstance m a y be m a de to m ean :
, to let othe rs ,
(i) I n f a ct, i f t he s t u d e n t u n d e r s ta n d s Sp a n i s h , he w i ll fi nd t hi s n o ti o n
mani fes t i n s u ch na ti ve t urns a s : da r dc con f es ar, da r dc v is i ta r, e tc.
TE E TA G A L O G L A N GUA GE .
see that i s to s a y to show ; a nd to give sight to “

t hat i s to “
w
, , ,
“
say to re m o ve or cu re blindness In th e fi rst sense e have :
z
.
, ,
an expression which if used would m ean

' '
p a q m ta n mo s i y a n ub , , ,
"
“
m ake hi m look at ( pay attentio n to ) this ; and yp a qn i ta mo s a a q u i n
“
a ny i y bng r e lé s ( p
S r e loj ) show m e you r watch ;. while p a q u i ta
,a n ,
mo a cb n a ng i y cng r e lbs would have practically t he sa m e m eaning , ,
only that m o re stress i s laid on t he person I n the o ther sen s e the

y
,
.
,
verb would have passive in re f erence t o the i nstru m ent wi th which

sight was to be res t o red and a n passive i n r e fe re n ce to the person ,
restored to the u s e of his sight ; but the d iscri m i natio n he re as to

which of the two senses was m eant would be m ade m ore dependen t ,
on the use and significati o n of the o the r ele m ents of the se n te nce
an d on the syntactical arrange m ent than on the particle .
The si m plest rule t o be laid down o n this poi nt i s this :

'
the reference to the direct obj ect wh e ther a perso n o r a th ing by

b
, ,
the deter m ining verb ( to o rder to allo w to pray etc ) i s m ade y , , , .
the i n passive ; the reference to the direct obj ect of the dete r m ine d
b
ver ( that which refers to the signi ficatio n of the root)i s m ade by the
y passive provided the ver i n i ts p ri m ary m eaning requires either b
y
,
the o r the i n passive i n reference to the direct obj ect the a n passive
b b b
, ,
i n reference to the direct o j ect eing co m m on oth to the causative

b
,
a n d to th e si m p le ver
w w w
.
The follo ing sen tences are given ith a v ie to illustrate

the a ove rule : b
I a rde re d by my fathe r to co m e
gg r
Pi n a p a p a ri to a co n i a ma .
w
I ill o rder my son to rite w
Pa s u s u la ti n co ang anac co . .
Wait first fo r th e rain to be over Pa tila i n m o m ona ang ul an . .
L e t m y sh irt dry ( do n o t i n
w b
.
t e r f e re ith the dryi ng of m y Pa tu y o i n mo ang a q u i ng aro .
sh i rt)
d
.
F righ ten away t hat og Pa la b a s i n hu g a o i n m o iy ang aso

.
-
.
Order your son to wri t e thi s Yp a s ula t m o i to s e i y ong anac . .
Tell m y servant to call for t hat Yp a tau a g m o s a a q u i n g alila y a ong

gentle m an m a g u i n oo
g
. .
Order the pupils to lea rn th is Pa p a g a ra la n m o s a m an a a la g a d = n a g

lesson . a ara l it ong li cs bn ( Sp le cci bn) z
'
. . .
Orde r the m to k e e p this m oney safe Pa i n ga ta n m o s a ca u il a it ong salap i . .
I a m o rdered allowed by m y father -
Pm a p a g a ara l pa a c o nang a m a co .
to go on with studying .
We shall wait for the day t o cool Pa la la m i g a n n a ti n ang arao

g
. .
Why did he not provide food ( feed ) Baq u i t di niy a p i n a ca i n ang m an a

t he poultry : m anoc .
He l p e t i e th water ( d rI nk ) l
i i figi gi tfi ggé Pi na i nu m niy a n u n i t di p i na é a i n g
,
b
. .
, , ,
Is that you r cousin that eggar over ,

b gPi n s a n m o b
a g a ya ong m a hi ra p n a g
there asking fo r al m s ? a p a li mos d oon ?

p
d d
In ee ! I t is he 0 0 n ga
J
b
. .
,
Is b e given a good deal of al m s ? dM a r a m i ag a ang p i n a gp a li m os a n ?

Where has the cook put m y ater w g A li ng ( g )
I a a l ang p i n a g p a la m i g a n
to cool? nang cosinero nang a q u i n g t ubig ?

A n g d u ru n ga u a n and siy ang p i na p a o
He put it at the w indow

la m i g a n n iy a
.
r .
My sister i n law d oes not provide

-
Hindi p i n a da ra m tan nang a q u i ng hi
d
-
clothin g for her ch il ren . pag a u g ca ni yang mange ana c .

TI I E TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
be able to know
To . M a ca ala m .
The thing known . A n g n a a la m a n .
To fei g n to know M a g m a ala m

b
. .
Bulletin oard posting place -

,
. P i n a g ca a la m a n .
To warn to advise ,
. U m a la m ( 1) .
P erson warned .
A ng ala m i n .
To m a ke o n e s e lf a c q u a i u te ( 1 ‘
M a q u I a la m .
a thi ng to inquire ,
.
The thing acquainted with . A n g y p a q u i a la m

The person fro m who m . A n g p a q u i a la m an .
J
CO N U G A TI O N .
A C TI V E .
I n fi ni t i v e .
To i nvestigate to set about to i n ,
q ui re to m ake onese
,
lf t horoughly M a q u ia la m .
acquainted with to sift i n to ,

.
Investigate ,
-
s t, -
s .
N a q u i q u i a la m .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a n d pas t i n d e fi n i t e t e ns e s .
I nv e s tI g a te d , d St ; ‘
have hast has , ,
N a q u i a la m
l
.
I n v e s t I ga te d .
Had ,
-
ds t i nvestigated . N a q u i a la m na .
F u t u re i nd e f i n i t e t en s e .
Shall , lt , -
will ,
-
It i nv e stigate . M a q u i q u i a la m .
Shall ,
-
lt , will ,
-
lt ha v e i n v e s ti g a te d . M a q u i q u i a la m na .
I m p e r at i v e .
I nves tigate let , i nvestigate . M a q u i a la m .
V e rb a l .
The action of i nvestigating . A ng p a q u i q u i a la m
( 1) N o te t he a c ce n t u a t i on .
M O DI FI CA TI V E V E R BA L PA R TI CL E M a qa i zPa qu i . 2 33
’
Y P A S SI V E .
To b e in vestigate d ,
i n qui re i nto d . Yp a q u i a la m .
Pre s e nt i nd e f i n i t e t e n s e .
Is are i n quired into

, . Yp i n a q u i q u i a la m .
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e f i n i t e t e n s es .
Wa s , w ere ; h as ,
b
have een in qui red
I n to . Yp i na q q u I a la m .
Had b een i nqui red into . Yp i n a q u i a la m na .
F u t u re i nd e fi n i t e t e n s e .
Sh all , will be in quired i nto . Yp a q u i q u i a la m .
Shall , w ill have b een in qui re d i nto . Y p a q u i q u i a la m na .
i m pe r a t i v e .
Let be I n q u I re d i nto . Yp a q u i a la m .
V e rb a l .
The state of b eing in qui re d i nto . A n g y p a q u i a la m .
AN PA SSI V E .
I n f i ni t i v e .
To inquire fro m . Pa q u i a la man .
'
P re s e nt i nd e fi n i t e t e n s e .
In qui re ,
-
s t, -
s fro m . Pi n a q u i q u i a la m an .
Pre s e nt pe rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi ni te t e ns es .
I n quired d s t ; have -
h ast has ,
P i n a q u i a la m an
, , ,
in qu ired fro m .
.
Plu p e rf e c t t e n s e .
Had , od t e inquired fro m . P i n a q u i a la m an na .
F u t u r e i n d e fi n i t e t e ns e .
Shall , -
lt , will ,
-
lt inquir e fro m . Pa q u i q u i ala m an .
SlI a ll, -
it will , ,
-
lt ha v e i n q u i re d fro m . P a q u i q u i a la m an na
I mp e ra t i v e .
Inquire ,
i nquire fro m . P a q u i a la m an .
V e rb a l .
The actio n of i nquiring fro m . A u g p a q u i a la m an .
The
student should co nj ugate like ma q a i a la m, i n the active and
i n the passive th e following verb s :
—
To j oin i n teaching to j oi n i n the ,
teaching of to j o in with ( person ) M a q u i ara l y p a q u i ara l p a q u i a ra la n

, , , .
i n teaching .
To j oi n i n studying to j oi n i n stu
M a q u i p a g ara l yp a q u i p a g ara l paqui
,
dyi n g because of to j oi n i n th e , ,
p a g a r a la n
,
studying of
.
To j oi n i n playing to ta ke a part
i n the playing of to j oi n to play (
M a q u i p a g la ro y p a q u i p a g la ro paqui
,
, ,
a g la ro a n
,
with ( perso n ) ) p .
b
.
To e m ark su rreptitiously to be
M a q u i s a c ay a q u i s a c ay paquis s o
b
,
e m barked th at way to e m ark y p , ,
qu i an ( con t ) ,
that way wi th ( person )

.
TO r 8 ation to th rust
a t i t O j oi n o co nverse pqa g o s a p a u
l
i c bpb
l c
g ii t
M a u i p a g o s a p yp a q u i p a g o s a p p a q u I ,
W i th
.
To share i n rej oicing to j oi n i n ,
rej oi cin g over to j oi n i n rej oi cing M a q u i tou a y p a q u i tou a p a q u i to u aa n

, , ,
.
with ( person )
.
T I k a ‘ a r l 1 k a
hei b o u t fb é fia fe i f the f
ua
i M a q u i p a g é u a y y p a q m p a g é u a y Pa r “
,
’ ,
paganayan
tention ) to start quarreling wi th
.
.
,
To m eddle i n controversy to j oin

M a q u i p a g ta lo y p a u i a ta lo
q p g
,
pa q ui
a nd offer a controve rsial topic t l ,
, ,
p a g a o n a n
to m eddle i n c o n tro v e rs y w i t h
.
To sn eak into co m pany to be thrust

M a q u i s a m a y p a q u i s a m a p a q u i s a ma
,
u pon i n co m pany to sneak i nto

, ,
ha n ,
co m pany with
.
M a qa i may
be m ade to m ean sharing rese m blan ce i n o r to have , ,
a leaning for custo m s o r m anners i f applied to roots den oti n g qu a

'
b
, ,
liti ca capa le o f being i m it a ted “
To confor m one s self to to co m ply l '
M a q u o g a li
’
,
with custo m s
.
To adopt natives m ann ers M a q u i ta g alo g

’
. .
To be have in a m anli k e m anner to

M a q u i la la q u i ,
use to fli rt or m i x with m e n .
.
To a ssu m e Spani sh m anners M a q u i c a s t i la . .
To be a parti san of the A m erican

M a q u i a m e ri ca n o
polity .
‘
.
TE E TA GA L O G LA N GU A GE .
P a r t i c le s a nd w o rd s o f fe ri ng p e c u li a r f e a t u r e s .
Stu d ents
should n ot have failed y thi s ti m e to have notic ed , b ,
the pl i able conditio n of Tagalog wor ds t o which reference h as been

often m ade and the capability t hey sho w to stand for other parts of
b w
,
‘
speec h esides that for
, hich they co m m o nly stand ‘ The encliti c .
particl e s have all been considered together wit h the clas s of co m pounds
they contri bute to for m an d it re m ain s only n ow to con sider such ,
i ndepende n t particles or di rectives as are e m ployed i n vari ous ways for

syntactical purposes In this and i n other subsequent lessons these
b w
.
particles will be considered i n alpha eti cal order together ith s uch
oth er words as o ffer peculiar features o r i n other respects are nece s sary
b
, ,
f o r idio m ati c speech I t is elieved that this study wil l prove useful
d
.
an in teresting both to the stude n t an d to the occasional reader .
The
article and relati ve pronou n a n
y m ay s ta nd b esides for
b
, ,
a su ordinate causative conj un ction .
You d i d no t pay any attention to l

( looked at )m e because I a m poor
DI m o a co l i n i u o u ang a co 1 duc ha
, .
g , , ,
-
.
Hind i a co n aca ca b a n go n m a ca b a ngo n

i
-
I cannot rise fo r I a m sick ,

,
ang a co 1 m a y s a q u I t
.
, .
,
copu lative conj unction m a y like ise sta n

At the w d i n the s a m e
w
, ,
ay for a causative one .
He could not co m e ecause h e ,

b ha d
DI SI y a n a ca p a ri to , at m a y a ala b S ly a
b u siness to attend to
.
.
A tzi
co m es after a cau sative o r ad versative conj unc tio n as a
co mplet i ve l i ga m en t .
I ca n not pay ecau s e I have no , b Hind i a co n a ca ba b ay a d= m a ca b ay a d ,
m one y s a p g ,t,
a c a ual a s oo ng salap i
b g
.
She I s ugly ut she i s j udicious S ya i p an i t n go m t siy a i m a b a i t

i
'
, .
, , , , , , , .
Si l ang lahat a y n a g au i t a lI n ta n a , t ,
A ll of the m sang b u t hi m ,
,
SI y a I h i ndi
, , .
TH I R TY N I N TH E X ER CI SE
-
Why do you meddle i n conversation wi th old people ? I m e dle d

i n thei r conversation because I a m anxious to beco m e wise W hy
w
.
do you reco m mend m e no t to m eddle ith wo m en i n j ee ring ? I

reco m m end i t because i t i s u n beco m ing to m eddle with wo m en i n
,
j eering Why did he m eddle i n disputing with h is neighbour ? Becau se

.
his neigh bour i s i n the habit of m eddling Does your brother .
assu m e Spanish m an ners ? No he does not assu m e Spani sh ,
m anners What are you g oing to than k the neighbour for? I am

d
.
g o i ng to tha nk hi m f or a ha n f u l o f ri ce W ho m d o y ou a s k it .
MO DI FI CA TI V E V E R B A L PA R TI CL E Pa Pa : . 2 37
f o r? I ask i t fo r m y frie nd who is sick a nd ha s nothing to eat ,
.
Who m have you thanked ( asked )for it? I asked i t fro m the sailor Did I .
n ot s a y to you not to ask it fro m suc h a n iggardly ( m a r a mot)

fello w ? I asked so m e fro m h i m because there was no other H o w ol d ,
.
i s you r son ? He i s scarcely t hree years old What are those .
chi ldren doing there a t the beach ? They are playing Why d o .
you n o t tell you rs to j oi n the m i n playi ng? I do not like ( u i li a i li )

to see my chi ldre n j oi n i n playing wit h such kind of peo ple .
With who m do you like that they should j oi n i n playing ? I like

to see the m j oi ning i n play wit h their school m ates ; I do not allo w
the m to j oin i n co m p a ny with such na u ghty boy s for they pick u p ,
quarrels and enter i nto controversy

. Is your dog accusto m ed to .
bite ? N o Si r o n the contrary m y dog is a very ta m e ani m al fond

, , ,
of hu m a n co m pany I n what do natives follo w A merica n m an ners?

.
They follow A m erican m anners i n d ressi ng What i s your friend .
studying ? He i s s tudying L ati n Where is h e studying ? In M an ila . .
Is i t difficult to learn L a tin ? It i s Why does not P ete r s a lute

b w
.
you ? A s I a m poor n o ody looks a t m e ; ere I rich I should be

d b bd
,
es te e m e ( honored ) y every o y .
F O R TI E TH L E S SO N . YC A A P A T N A P O U O N G P A G A R A L .
M O DI F I C A TI V E V ERBAL P A R TI C L E P A = PA .
P a an am d
ver s i t b
ill e re m e m ered have ee n re f erre d
, w b b ,
b
to as having for m s of conj ugatio n peculiar to the m selves .
P a i s for active and passi ve , except i n the present and the pas t tense
of the active voice where i t is prefixed b y n a n ap a then , eing ut n a gp a b b
w
, , ,
ith g dropped to indicate a m ore subj ective actio n Th is si m ilarity

b
.
of fo r m i s m ore apparent i n the sense an d i t eco m es a m atte r of

b
,
dou t whether ma yp a an d p a should be treated as separate verba l

particles The m ost i m por tant d i ff erence etween th e t o particles b w
b
.
lies i n p a eing used to fo r m verbs i ndicative of the d irectio n of

one s m otion a power wh i ch ma yp a does not possess
’
P a , therefore ,
b
, .
and not ma yp a , is a p plied to the a dver s of place di ni , di tb, di g/an,

” “
d o on , to for m the verbs “
to co m e here ,
’
to go there ; and to M a n ,
to for m the o ne i nqui ring as to the directio n o f the m otion Pa

b
.
may also be applied to any other roo t of place if the ver i nd ica ,
tive of m otio n thereunto is i ntended to b e for m ed ; but here s a a i

b b w
,
t hough n o t a solutely necessary i s i nserted et een the particle and “
the root or i n other words the particle i s applied to the locative

, , ,
case of the root indica tive of the place

b b
.
A s p a i s m onosyllabic the first sylla le o f the root is to ,

e
repeated i n t he usual tenses I f ho w ever s a i s i nserted to co n ju g ,
b
.
, ,
ate a root of place s a and not the fi rst sylla le of the roo t should
,
be repea ted p a s a being then considered as the real particle

-
In
b
, .
regard to the conj ugation of the above four ad v er s o f place the

b
,
u s e ha s
'
been to so m e extent esta lished o f optio nally repeating either

the particle o r the first s yllable o f the adver
, i t being ad m issible b ,
to s a y either p ap a ri tb p a ri ri td etc although the la tte r fo r m i s mo re

d
, , , .
,
to be recomme n e d .
The conjugation follo w s of three verbs in which the various sen ses
i m parted by the particle m ay be seen .
V e rb a l co m p o u nd s .
To li v e i n a house To . build a house . M a m aha y M ag b ahay

To be an i n m ate . M a q u i p a b aha y m a q u i p a m aha y ,
.
To beg fo r a parcel o f g rou nd to

M a q u i b a ha y
build a house upon i
.
To aid to assist other persons

,
To n olo n g . i .
To render effecti ve aid to others M a g t olo n g .
The person to who m

.
A n g to lo n ga n .
Do do ( i ntensive ) p a g to lo n ga n
. .
Th e reason or i nstru m ent y t olo n g yp a g t olo ng .

, .
A ssis t ant ( one of the aid i ng parties ) Ca tolo n g

. .
To aid custo m arily M a n olo n g

M a g p a n o lo n ga n m a g to
. .
To ai d each other . lon ga n , .
To place oneself he I e to establish )

D u m i to du m in i ,
-
one s residence here

’ .
J
A CTI V E .
i nfi ni t i ve .
To co m e here .
To go ho m e .
To ask f o r; a ssistance
Pre s e nt i n d e fi n i t e t e ns e .
Co m e s t s here
,
-
,
-
. . N a p a ri r i toz n a p a p a r i to .
G o est e s ho m e
,
-
,
-
,
N a p a s a s a b aha y .
A s k s i s for assi stance

, ,
-
. N a p a to tolo n g .
Ca m e st ; have hast has co m e here

, , . N a p a r i tb .
Went est ; have ha s tZ

,
'
, ha s g o n e ho m e ,
N a p a s a haha y .
A sked d at ; have hast has asked

i
-
N a p a to lon g
, , ,
for assistance .
.
Had -
d at co m e here . N a c a p a ri t o n a p a r i to na ,
.
gon e ho m e . N a c a p a s a b aha y n a p a s a b aha y , na .
asked for assistance . N a c a p a t olo n g n a p a tolo n g na , .
F u t u re i nd e fi n i t e te ns e .
Shall -
It will -
lt co m e here . Pa ri ri tb z p a p a ri to .
go ho m e . l a s a s a b aha y
‘
.
ask fo r t
j
a SSI s
Pa to té lo llg .
Fut u re i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e .
Shal l lt will It b e o rd ere d to co m e here Pa p a r i ri to hi n =p a p a p a ri to hi n

I I
- -
.
.
go ho m e P a p a s a s a b a ha y i n
I I I
. .
a s ked assi st . Pa to to lon gi n .
Fu tu re p e rf e c t t e ns e .
Shall , lt , -
will -
I t have b ee n ordered to co m e here
Pa p a n rl tOhm p a p a p a ri to
I I I I I I I
hi n na
.
,
.
go ho m e Pa p a s a s a b aha y i n na
I I I d
. .
aske to assi st . Pa to to lo ngin na .
i mp e r a t i v e .
Be ordered let be ordered to co m e here Pa p a ri to hi n

,
I
. .
go ho m e . Pa p a s a b a ha y i n .
aske d to assist . Pa to lo n gi n .
V e r b a ls .
The state of b eing o rdered to co m e here A ng p a p a ri to hi n

I
. .
go ho m e . a
p p a s a b a h a y i n .
asked to a ssi st .
p a pa tolo n gi n .
Y P A SS I V E .
To co m e h ere on account of . Yc a p a ri to .
To go ho m e on accou n t . Yca p a s a b aha y .
To a s k for assistance on account of . Yc a p a tolo n g .
P re s e nt i n d e fi ni t e t e n s e .
Co m e s t ,
-
,
-
s here on account of Yq u i n a p a ri ri to=y q u i n a p a p a ri to .
.
Go ,est o
,
-
es ho m e Yq u i n a p a s a s a b aha y .
A s k, s i , -
s for assistan ce Yp i n a to tolo ng =y q u i n a p a to tolo ng (I) .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e ns es .
Ca m e , at ; have , hast ,
ha s co m e h ere on account of . Yq u i n a p a ri to,
Wen t est ; -
gon e ho m e Yq u i n a p a s a b aha y .
I p i na tolo ng z yq u i
a s ked for assis tance
n a p a tu lo n g
I . ’
Had ,
-
d et , co m e h ere on accoun t of . N a y p a ri tb y q u i n a p a ri to na
, .
N a y p as a b aha y , y q u i n a p a s
i
a
gone ho m e
b ahay na .
N a y p a tolo n g y p i n a t olo n g na
ask e d fo r a SSI s ta nce , ,
yq u i n a p a tolo n g na .
the
‘
f or ms us ed a nd o t he r a nd w i t h th e o t he r
‘
( ) Bo t h
1 a re i n t hi s te ns es ,
M O DI F I CA TI V E VE RB A L PA R TI CL E Pa zPa .
Fu t u re i n d e fi ni t e t e ns
’
e .
Shall lt, will I t c o m e here o n account of Yc a p a ri ri to y ca p a p a ritb

’
- - _
— ~
.
,
go ho m e Yca p as a s ab aha y ,
ask for assistance Yp a to tolo n gz c

y p a a to t olo n g .
Shall -
lt , wi ll -
lt have co m e here on accou nt of
M a p a ri to y ea p a
r i r i to n a
, , .
M a y p a s a b ah a y
gon e ho m e ,
yca p a s a s ab ahay
n
na .
M a y p a tolo n g y p a ,
asked for assi stance t o tolo n g= y ca p a

t o tolo n g u s .
I mp e ra ti v e .
Co m e here ,
let co m e here o n accou nt of . Yc a p a ri to .
G o ho m e , go ho m e Yc a p a s a b aha y .
Y a t ol o n g zy c a p a t o
pong
-
A s k. ask fo r ass i stance e
'
V e r b a ls .
The actio n of co m ing he re o n accoun t of . A n g y c a p a ri tb .
going h o m e c
y p a a s a b aha y .
yp a to l o n =
g y ca p a
ask i ng fo r ass i s tance ,
tolong .
AN PA SS I V E .
To co m e here for to co m e here to

pay a V i s I t to ( a person ) .
,
.
2 Pari t ohan .
To go ho m e for .
To ask to be given assis ta nce by .
P re s e n t i n d e fi nite te ns e .
Co m e s t , s h e re for P i na r i r i to ha nzp i n a p a p a ri toha n

'
- -
.
, .
G o est , e s ho m e for
- -
Pi na s a s a b a ha y a n
b
, . .
A s k s t, s to e given assista nce by Pi n a to to lo n ga n

‘
- -
.
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi n i t e t e ns es .
Ca m e t ; have ,
hast has co m e here for Pi n a ri to ha n
'
”
,
-
s , . .
We nt e st ; , . gone ho m e f o r . Pi n a s a b a ha y a n .
A ske d d s t ; have hast has asked to I

-
Pm a t 0 l ongan
'
, , ,
be given assistance by i
.
2 42 THE TA G A L O G L A N GUA GE .
H ad, -
dat c ome h e re for N a p a ri toha n p i na ri to ha n n a
.
, .
go ne h o m e N a p a s a b a ha y a n p i n a s a b aha y a n na
d b
.
,
aske to e given assis t

ta nce b y . l
N a p a to lo n ga n p i na to lo nga n na , .
Sh a ll , lt -
,
w ill ,
-
It co me here fo r . Pa ri ri toha n zp a p a ri t o ha n .
go ho m e Pa s a s a b aha y a n
b
.
as k to e g i ve n
§ Pa to to longa n .
Sha ll , lt, -
w ill ,
-
It have co m e here fo r . M a p a ri to ha n p a ri ri to ha n n a , .
M a s a b a ha y a n , p a s as a ba ha y a n
n gone ho m e .
eg
asked to be give n
M a p a to lon ga n , p a to to lo nga n na
sistance by
.
as .
I mpe ra t i v e .
Co m e let co m e here fo r . Pa ri to ha n .
Go, go ho m e for Pa s a b a ha y a n
b
. .
A s k, ask to e given assistance by . Pa to lo nga n .
V e r b a ls .
The ction of co m ing here for

a . A n g p a r i to b a n .
going ho m e fo r p a s a b a h a y a n
b
. .
asking to e given
assistance y b .
5 p a t o lo n g an .
The s tudent i s reco m m ended to conj ugate i n the active and i n the
b
,
pa s sive the following pa ver s :
To go yo nder to to re b e o rd ered
}
Pa l a p a rI y a n m y ca p a ri y an Pa
S
,
p
E g
‘
°
pai r there to go there o n account ,
ti n
,
,
r
o i to go there to pay a visi t to
, .
To go y onder to e ordered to r e , b
pair yonder to go yonder o n a c Pa roon p a p a roo ni n y ca p a roo n paroo
, , ,
~
Coun t of to go yonder to pay a ,

nan .
v i sit to .
To co m e here to be ordered to re ,
pai r here to co m e here on a c Parin i p a p a ri n i hi n y ca p a ri ni pari

, , , ,
z
count of to co m e here to pay a, nihan .
vi sit to .
To go to to be ordered to repair to
,
Pa to g o p a to g o hi n yp a to ng o_ y ca ,
pap g
to go to o n account of to go to l
,
i ong b pa t n o han ,
for the purpose of .

.
To go to chu rch to be o rdered to

Pa s a s i m b a ha n p a p a s a s i m b a ha n i n y pa
,
go to church ; to go to church o n , ,
s a s i m b a ha n = y ca p a s a s i m b a ha n a
p
c
account of to go to church fo r the ,
s a s i m b a ha n a n
,
purp ose o f
.
.
The i n passive i n verbs re fe rs to the perso n o rdered o f mo tion

to repair to the p la Ce expressed by the a dverb and as p a here i s a p ,
plied to the verb of m otion p a m ust appear twice i n the co m pound , .
Order m y servant to co m e here . Pa p a ri to hi n m o an g a q u i n g b a ta .

.
to repai r there ? gP i n a p a r oo n m o siy a?

Pi n a p a roo n co na siy a .
Pa p a ri y a n i n m o siy a .
P a coincid e s with ma yp a i n th e ac q uiescing s ense but p a de ,
dotes m o re willingness on th e part of th e subj ect and i s n o t used

i n reference to outsid ers .
To ask to he kissed .
v touched
b
.
To con s ent to be eaten .
dec e ed
say m any specific m anner d enoted b y th e root m a y
“
To
b b
, ,
be referred to by the p a ver ut it does not indicate plurality as ,
ma gp a d o e s '
To say yes to affir m to con sen t to

, ,
a n y thm g .
To s ay n o to deny , .
To express a refusal .
To say Jesus , .
To say the deuce !

,
P a r t i c le s a nd w o rd s o f f e r i ng p e c u li a r f e a t u re s .
The i n t errogative pronou n a nd i s use d i s several ways :
As an i nterro gat i ve co n j unction of cau se followed by a t , .
Wh y did you not co m e i n ti m e ? g A n o t di ca n a p a r i to s a c a p a n a ho n a n
g
.
, ,
A n d why do you eat fruit ? cg

A t an o t cu n g m a c a i n ca n ang bon a ? , ,
”
A na stands fo r the ad m irative i nterj ectio n “
w hy !
“
what
What l are you per chance a king ?
, A n o gh ari
,
ca cay a?
reply to th e sa m e when the tone of the questio n is
The o ne of
surpri se m a y be m ,a
dle by a no preceded by a y .
Of course ( I . am ) . Ay a no .
co m bi ned with m ost ver al p a rt

A n o Shows a capabi lity to be b
ioles a nd b y reason of its di recti ve
and i nterrogative character i s o ne
of the ter m s m ost apt to give the
i dea o f the nature o f th e a cti on
which i s the p rovi nce of each verbal particle to I m part
_
.
What being the m atter wi th thee ?

is
gU n g m a a n o ca bag a?
How do you feel ? dM a a n o ca ?
How much 18 thi s ? g M a g ca a n o b a ga i o? t
M O DI F I CA TI V E V E R B A L PA R TI CL E Pa =Pa .
What a re doing here ? N a a a n q ca di to?

What i s your business here ? g g
Well n o w and what of that? what
,
n o w to be done ?
dA n hi n b aga?
What i s he going to do there ? M a gaa no siy a d oon ?
What are you being done u pon ? gl n a a a n o ca?
N oth ing can be done to you . H i ndi ca m a a a no .
A na besides
-
a n d, b eing th e plural of a n d, m ean s “
unaccounted
for and i s use i n the n egative .
Thi s work is not accounted fo r U al ang s u b a nd a n g gan ang i to

d
. .
,
’
He slappe m e wi thout the least
TI n a m p a l aco n i y a uala ng ano ano
reason
.
Se e other i dio m s and ph rases .
Well then dA n o'

ag a b
?
What else ? dA n o pa?
w b
.
Ho can i t e ? dD i a n o p a ? .
What m atters ? dDi anhin ? .
Fo r he says th at Di anhi n d ao na
They say it i s said :
,
Di u m an o .
F OR TI E TH E X E R CI SE .
Where a re your parents going ? They a re going to chu rch .
Do yo ur brothers go to school ? They go to the sea What po rt

b
.
i s the ship oun d for? She i s bound for M anila Does she not .
m ake f o r Ca v i te ? N o s he m akes for the Pasig rive r Have yo u

’
.
, ‘
to go anywhere ? Yes I have to go so m ewhere Which to w n i s

, .
your destination ? The city of M anila is m y d es tin ation What do .
you go to M anila for? I a m going there on account o f m y b rother

.
.
Hast thou ordered my serva nt to co m e here ? I have already o rdered

h i m to co m e here
- I f m y friend co m es what shall I tell h i m ?
. Tell ,
hi m to go ther e Has h e asked assista nce of m e ?

. He asked that
yo u would a s s i s t h i m What did you say to John ? I sai d to Joh n
“
to assist m e Why do you n ot allow m e to kiss your hand ? I

w
.
shall not allo you to kis s i t for i t i s u nclean What did the , .
priest say in hi s ser m on ? He said ; do n ot allow yourselves to

be overco m e by te m ptation ask th e H oly Vi rgi n fo r m ercy Did ,
.
he not ask you for m ercy ? Yes he asked m e to take pity on

hi m What did Pete r a s k you to consent to ? He aske
'
m e to
,
d
d
.
consent to go with hi m and I to ld hi m that I w a s not willing ,

Di ,
,
*
you consen t to m arry you r lover? I s a i d to hi m n o ( I refused ) Why

‘
. .
,
d i d you say the deuce I did n ot say the d e u ce l I sai d m y Jesus ! ,
Where are you m aking for? I a m making for M anila What did
w
. .
he show to hi s son ? He sho ed hi m this book Is she alone at ho m e ? .
Yes she is alone at ho m e

, Di d you see m y brother? I did n o t . . .
Has the m aste r arri ved already ? He has not yet arri ved Did he .
take m y shirt? He did not Will you not go to m eet your father?
w b w w
.
Do you no t i s h
'
I ill Whe n w i ll y o u co me ack ? N ext eek .

2 46 THE TA G A L O G L A N GU AGE .
b
to appear efore the priest? N o fo r I a m asha m ed What i s my , .
uncle gathering there ? H e i s gathering flowers Did the peppers .
that your servan t planted i n the garden put forth ? N o t yet Who
d
.
will re mai n at ho m e ?
"
Ou r father will stay Di you leave hi m .
a n y food ? I di d no t leave hi m anythi n g .
F O R TY F I R S T —
L E SSO N .
YC A A P A T N A P O U O , T, I S A N G PA G A R A L .
M O DI FI C A TI V E V E R B A L P A R TI C L E M A G CA z P A G CA -
.
M a y ca z
p a y ca is chiefly se i n fo r m ing ver s i ndicative of a
u d b
sta te of plen ty o r prevalence of such things or contingencies a s are
d eno ted by the root I t points out a previous n or mal sta te of lack
.
o r sca rcity which i s resolved i nto the opposite deno te d by ma y ca '

It
b
.
i s applied to such c onditi on s of eing as are developed fro m the working

“ “
o f such n atural powe r s or contingen t events as drop off or die away ’
without the designed inte rference of any active con scio us f g e n t It .
d i fi e rs fro m ma n i n the latte r re f e r ri n g to the actio n by which a p a r

b
t i c u la r state of a undan ce i s at tained w h ile ma y ca deno tes such a
b b b
,
sta te with out any reference to how it has ee n rought a o u t Thus

b
.
,
“ “ ”
m a mnnya to fructify ; ma y e a bonya to e laden wi th fruit M a y ca
’
w
.
, ,
and a m verbs di ffer i n the latter referring to the po er w ith which

b b
the su j ect i s endowed to ring about particular con itio ns o f plenty d ,
while n o reference to such power i s m ade by the ma y ca on e Se e

b w
.
this difference i n the sense i m parted y each of the t o particl es

“
illustra t ed i n the followi ng expressio ns : u ny mi i s da a ny i loy the riv e r
w b
,
i s tea m ing ith fi s h; n a y ca ca s br ot a ny ca tr e “

the ed is tea m i ng
’ '
w b
,
ith ugs In the fi rst case the ri ver has the power and i s t he
b b w
.
proper ele m ent fo r fi sh to e rought u p hi le n o s uch power for

'
b
,
bugs exists i n the ed

b
.
M a y ca i s to be considered as u t a co m pound of m a y and ca ,
the p a ssive particle for m a Thus ma y ca v e i bs

. are i ntran sitive i n ,
Tag alog and as i t takes place with all othe rs denoting i nvoluntary
b
,
a ction s can not e u sed i n the i n passi ve for m

b
, .
M a y ca i s n ever associated with any ot her ver al parti cle as i t

b b b
,
i s neither governing n o r su ord inate It eing d issylla i c repea ts e a in .

,
the u sual tenses .
V e rb a l co m p o u n d s .
To have p ro p erty to possess to o n

, ,
w M a g ca roo n
Cause . Yp a g ca roo n .
Pl a ce. Pa g ca ro o n a n .
C 0 NJ U G A I I O N .
’ ‘
A CTI V E .
To have , to po s s ess to a oun d ,

b w ith . M a gca roo n .
2 48 THE TA G A L O G L A N G U A G E .
I mp e ra ti v e
A bound , let b
a ound with on account of . Yp a g ca roo n .
V e rb a l
The state of a ou nding with on account of b . A ng y p a g ca roo n .
4N PA SS I V E .
To b
a ound wi th at . Pa g ca ro o n a n .
Pre s e nt i nd e fi ni t e t e n s e .
A b ound ,
-
ds t, -
s with at . Pi n a g ca ca ro o na n .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e te ns e s .
A b ounded ,
-
d s t; have hast has a ou nded with a t
, , b . P i n a g ca ro o n a n .
Had ,
-
d at b
a o unded with a t . N a p a g ca ro o n a n , p i n a g ca ro o n a n na .
F u t u re i n d e fi ni t e t e n s e .
Shall , lt , -
w ill ,
-
lt b
a oun with at d . P a g ca ca ro o n a n .
F u t u r e p e rf e c t t e n s e .
Shall , -
lt, w ill ,
-
lt have b
a ounded with at . N a p a g ca ro o na n , p a g ca Ca ro o n a n na .
I mp e ra t i v e .
A b ound ,
let a b ound wi th at . Pa g ca ro o n a n .
V e rb a l .
The action of a bounding with at A n g p a g c a ro o n a n

‘
. .
student i s reco m m en ded to conj ugate i n the active an d i n

The
the passive the followi n g ma y ca v er b s :
To be of j udg m ent to arri ve at ( to ,
have reached )th e age o f re a son ;

to be of j udg m ent by to reach ( t o , ca b a i t ; p a g c a i s i p a n z p a g c a b a i ta n .
have reached )the age of reaso n at .
To be laden with fruit to be laden ,

M a g c a b u n ga a
yp g c a b u n a
g , p a g ca b u
wi th fruit on accoun t o f to be
gahan
,
,
n
laden wi th frui t at .
.
To be sick to be sick on accou nt M agca s a q u i t, i t

‘
a a a
a
yp g ca s a q u p g c s
b
, ,
'
o f to
- ~
e sick at
,
. quita n .
MG DI E I CA TI V E V E R B A L PA R TI CL E M a yp a u Pa y ca . 2 49
To b e lucky to be lucky on account ,

M a g ca p ala d , c
yp g p
a a ala d ,
a c
p g pa a la
o f to be lucky at
,
ran
T a b oun d i n offspring to abou n d
?
o ,
i n offspring o n account of to M a g ca a n a c y p a g ca a n a c p a g caa n a can , , , .
abound i n o f fspring at .
To b e gray headed to e gray head

M a g ca u b a n ,
b n
b nb
g
y p a g ca u a p a c a a
ed on account of t o be ( to h ave , ,
I n an ( l ) ,
beco m e )gray headed at

.
To rage ( a plagu e ) to rage ( a p lague )

on account of to rage ( a plague )jM a g ca s alo t y p a g ca s alo t p a g ca s a lo ta n
,
.
, , ,
at .
To rage ( s m all pox ) to rage ( s m all

M a g c ab o loto n g y p a g ca b o loto n g p a g
, ‘
pox )on accoun t of to ra ge ( s m all , ,
ca b o lo to n ga n
i
,
pox )at
.
b
To e deeply i n a state of s i n to ,
be deep ly i n sin on accoun t of M a g c a s a la y p a g ca s a la p a g ca s a la na n

b
, , , .
to e deeply i n si n at .
The 3
; passive refers i n ma y ca verbs to the reason o r caus e ;
the a n passive to the place or person ; according to the n atu re o f the
, ,
action .
What he inhe rited fro m his u ncle A n g y p i n a g c a c a roo n n i y a a y ang p a

i s the re a s o n o f h is being wealthy . m an a s a caniy a nang a m a i n n iy a .
I ( great deal Of prop e rty m

a;2i ; i
1
A n g Cavite ang i
p n a g ca ca r o o n a n co .
Pi n a g c a c a u ta n ga n g
'
He owes a great deal to his father n iy a ang ca n i y an

i I I law
-
. b i a n ang lalaqui .
also m eans plu rality o r u n i v e rsality i n the

M a y ca , orking of w
b
e m ergenci es y which m any are a ff ected although this c o lle ti v e sense ,
i s better m ade by repeati ng ca and re n dering the roo t ac u te i n a c

ce n t u a t i o n .
To prevail to sprea d a o ut ( f a m i ne )
, b . M a g c a c a g o to m .
,
To spread about ( fi re ) .
,
M a g ca c a s o n og .
To be blowing a hurri cane M a g c a ca b a g u i o

b
. .
To b e engaged i n pu lic rej oicings M a g ca ca tou a , m a g c a ca p i e s ta

b
. .
To e engag e d i n revo lution . M a g c a ca g o lo .
F ortuitous m eet i ng or asse m blage of m any m ay be express e d

by ma y ca .
To m eet ( m any accidentally ) , . M a g ca s a lu b o n g .
To asse m ble to gather together , . M a g ca ti p o n .
To co m e i n co m pany with . M a gca s a m a .
To coincide to concur i n . . M a g ca a y o n .
To be ( m a ny )e n g a g e d i n quarrelling . M a g c a au a y .
( i ) The ho u ld n o t lo s e s i g h t o f t he f a c t h a t t he f o o t i s tha t p ar t
p upi l s t
o f t he w o r d w h i c h re ma i n s a f t e r t a k i n g a w a y t he p a r t i c”le o r p a rt i c le s w hi ch ma y
“
b e a s s o c i a t e d th e r e w i th Th u s , u ba n , m e a n s g r a y ha i r
.
-
.
2 50 THE TA GA L OG L A N GU A GE .
M a g ca
'
a lso expresses the u t most li m it to h ich the actio n can he w

carrie dw i th so m e intransitive verbs the root ei ng reduplicate for the , b d
p urpose .
b
To reak off i nto very s m all it s b M a g c a la n g s a g la ng s a g
b
. . .
To e to rn awa y i n rags M a g c a u i n da n g u i n d a u g
d
-
. .
To be l n state of co m plete es ~
. M a g c a s i ra s i ra
t r u ct l o n
.
My
l
on
has already reached the
s
N a g c a ca i s i p na ang a nac co
a g e of reason
.
d
.
Ha I m oney I should no t be i n , Cu n m a g c a roo n sana a co nang p i la c .

such condition as I a m a y h indi a c o n a g c a c a g a n i to
g
. .
M any people gathered toge ther . N a g c 1ti p o n ang m a n a tau o

. .
R esort ( place of resort) P i na g ca ti p o n a n

b
.
A sse m ly . Pi n a g c a p i s a na n .
Pi ri ap i s ana n nang m anga m aruru

U niversity , acade m y .
rl igc
g l
If is so how m uch W i ll
D oon pa
.
If he does that he being o nly a child , ,

B ata pa i g u ng m ag a u a
, , nang g a n i to,
how m uch he will do w hen a m a n . d oo n p a cun lu m a q u l .
P a r t lc le s a nd w o rds o f f e r i ng p e c u li a r f e a t u r e s .
B dg a y .
" ” “ "
B dg a y , as a no un m eans ,
“
th ing ,
“
m atter , “
s ubj ect , gai t .
So m ething , so m e o j ect b . I s ang agay b .
What i s the m atter subj ect? , <( A n o hag a ang b a gay ?

What i s hi s m ien, aspect A m erican , dA n on g b agay , o r , any o niy a , a m eri cano
o r nativ e ? What does he look li ke ? 6 tag alog ?
“ " “
B ag a y , as a verb ,
m eans to equal ,
to sui t ,
to m ake ready .
The penalty wil l be p roportioned Pa g b a b a ga y a n hi ra p z p a rus a ang

'
n ang
to the offence . c a s a la n a n .
dN a b a b ag a y bag a s a i s ang dalag a ang

I s i beco m i ng fo r a girl to wal k
t
about the streets ? p a g la c a d lac a d
( p g g ) s a m an a
a li é o -
g
la ns a n ga n?
M ake th e children ready for the M a g b ag a y nang m an g b a a tang m ag s a
ball . say ao .
“
as for
B dg a h
"
z as an adverb
governi ng he the
,
i s followed by
dati ve case
3 a. an d m ean s “
a s to
,
t n .
As for m e , hi m . B agay s a aquin s a caniy a ,

.
As for m y ch ild . B agay s a a na c co .
As to the death of my brother l B a gay s a c a rn a ta y an n a u g a q u i ng c a
l
Differe nt th ings . B agay b agay .
Tna TA G A L O G L A N GUA GE .
mas s ? curate Why does your f e ma le c ou s i n p u t o n a n u ppe r

Ou r .
'
petticoat? She d oe s no t p u t o n any upper petticoat she wears a n '
apron Will you s m oke ? Thanks I do not s m oke W hy d oes your

b b
.
, .
ser v ant feig n to e s ick ? He feigns to e s ick i n o rde r to avo i d

pu nish ment What was the reaso n for your neighbours qu a rreli ng ?
b
.
G a m ling Where did they quarrel ? They q u arreled i n t h is ho u se

. .
( th i s house was thei r q u a rre li n g p la c e ) .
F O R TY S E C O N D L E S SO N
—
.
YC A A PA T N A P O U O , T, D A L A U A N G PA G A R A L .
M O D l F l CA TlV E V E R B A L P A R TI C L E . M A G Ul N z PA G U I N -
.
i s used i n fo r m ing verbs which like the ,
L atin fi o fi e r i f a ctus s u m de n ote the co nversio n i n to the thing o r

, , ,
quali ty denoted by the root The co n v ersio n of o ne quality i nto .
another by a slo w gradual p rocess o f assi m ilation is ex pressed by ,
u m; b u t mug u i n as its L atin equivalent denotes conversio n off ha nd

, , ,
thereby differi ng f ro m u m and ma

M a g u i n i s e ithe r a pri m ary o r a subordi nate particle The
‘
last syllable that i s t o say g u i the ini t ial consonant and i ts vo w el

, , ,
i n the syllable and no t g a i n fo r the latter co ns ists o f three letters ( 1) is

d
, , ,
repeate i n the usual tenses as seen i n the conj ugatio n herea fter ,
.
V e rb a l co mp o u nd s .
To b eco m e w o rthy . M a g u i n dap a t .
Cause . Yc a p a g u i n d ap a t .
M erits , desert ; to possess the n e ce s

Ca ra p a ta n m a g c a ra p a ta n
sary qualifications I ,
‘
J
CO N U G A TI O N .
A CT I V E .
I nfi n i t i v e
To “
b e o me w orthy
c . M a g ni n i lap a t .
Pr e s e nt i n de fi n i te t e ns e .
Beco me ,
-
s t ,
-
s w o thy r . N a g u igu i n dap a t .
Pr e s e nt p e rf e c t a nd pas t i nd e fi n i te t e ns e s .
Beca me ,
-
s t; have hast has beco m e
, , ,
w orthy . N a g u i n d ap a t .
( l) U, i n th i s ca s e , is no t re ck o ne d as a le t te r . See Si x te e nt h Le s s o n,
p a ge s 93 94-
.
V P M i Pa g u £n 2 53
’
M onrr rc y rrv a R BEA L A R TI CL E a g u n= .
Plu p e r f e c t t e n s e .
Ha d ,
-
da t be co m e worthy . N a ca p a g u i n dap a t , n a g u i n d ap a t na .
Shall , lt -
, wi ll ,
-
lt b eco m e w orthy . M a g u i g u i n d ap a t .
F u tu re p e rf e c t t e n s e .
Shall .
~
lt, will ,
-
I t have b eco me worthy . M ac a p a g u i n d ap a t , m a g u i g u i nd ap a t na .
Beco m e let , . b eco m e wo rthy . M a g u i n d ap a t .
V e rb a l .
The action of beco m ing worthy . A n g p a g u i g u i n d ap a t .
ad m i t o f the i n passive they m ust e

That m a g u i n verbs m ay , b
m ade causati ve by ma yp a as seen i n the follo w ing paradig m for i n , , ,
the si m ple m a g n i n verb t he obj ect o f co nversion whi ch i s m ade verb

b
,
is j ust that i n re ference to which the i n pass i ve would e u sed .
I N PA SS I V E .
To b e ena b led to b eco m e w o rthy . P a p a g u i n d a p a ti n .
P re s e nt i n d e fi ni t e te ns e .
A m, art i s , , a re enabled to beco m e worthy . Pi n a p a g u i g u i n dap a t .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
Was ,
-
s t, w ere b ; a
g
s , ,
b
hast has een enabled to eco m e worthy b . Pi na p a gu i n d ap a t .
H a d ds t een ena led

,
-
b b to b eco m e w orthy . Pi na p a g u i n d ap a t na .
Shall , lt -
, w i ll ,
-
lt b e ena b led to b eco me worthy . Pa p a g u i g u i nda p a ti n .
F u t u re p e r f e c t t e ns e.
Shall o lt wi ll ,
-
lt have b een e b
n a led to beco m e w orthy . Pa p a g u i g u i n da p a ti n na .
I m pe r a t i v e .
Be ena ble d ,
let . b e ena b led to b eco me worthy . Pa p a g u i ndap a ti n .
2 54 THE TA GA L O G LA N Gti A GE .
V e rb a l .
The s tate of b eing enab led to b eco m e wo rthy . A n g p a p a g u i n da p a ti n .
Y PA S SI V E .
To beco m e worthy on account of . Yp a g u i n dap a t
Beco m e ,
-
s t; -
s worthy on a ccoun t of . Yp i n a gu ig u i n dap a t .
Pr e s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e n s es .
Beca m e ,
-
s t; have h ast has beco m e
, ,
w ort hy on account of . Yp i n a g u i n dap a t .
Ha d ,
-
ds t b eco m e worthy on account of . Y p i n a g u i n dap a t na .
F u t u re i nd e fi ni te te n s e
Sh all ,
l lt
,
will ,
-
lt beco me w orthy on account of . Yp a g ni g u i ndap a t .
Shall , lt , -
w ill ,
-
lt have eco m eb w orthy o account n of . Yp a g u i gu i n dap a t na .
I mpe ra tiv e .
Beco m e let ,
b eco m e w o rthy on accou nt of . Yp a g u i n dap a t .
V e rb a l .
The action of b eco m ing worthy on account of . A n g y p a g u i g u i n d ap a t .
As ma g u i n d enotes a state ca m a y be u sed i n the in stru m e nta l

,
passive and therefore

, , ,
besides the fo r m s i n the paradi g m tho se of ,
yq u i n a p g g
a u i u i n d dp a t yq u i n a p g
a u i n d i
c p a t c
y p
a a au
, i g u i n d dp a t y ca p a g u i n , ,
d ri p a t are al so p roper especially i f it i s i ntended to s t re n g the n the

,
referen ce to the cause .
AN P A SS I V E .
To b e co me , w orthy at or i n . Pa g u i n da p a ta n .
Pre s e nt i nd e f i n i t e t e ns e .
Beco me , rS , t -
s worthy at or i n . Pi n a g u i g u i n d a p a ta n .
z
Ta r TA GA L O G L A N GUA GE
.
.
ena le m e to eco m e b b Pa p a gi u n d a p a ti n mo Pa ngi n oo n g

a c o,
w
Mb Go d
3552555 5 ga g m ‘ t nang hu ha y
,
3
0 11 c a
orthy of attai ning eternal life .
The So n of G o d assu m ed hu m an A ng a
p g s aco ptau o ang siy ang
s a
ttributes for t he s a ke of the
a .
u i
y q n a p a g u i n ta u o n a u g anac n ang
rede m ption o f m an ki nd i os
z b z
. .
N a areth was t he p lace where A n g ayang N a aret a n g siy an g pina

J
esus Christ grew i nto a m a n .
g u i n ta u o ha n n i Jesucri sto .
wh ere he was
13 2
It 1
13323 53; i
1
A ng M ayn ila ang i
p a g u i n p a ri a n
n niy a .
0 11
sen se of conversi on denoted by ma g ni n m a y wi th the

The ,
possessive pronoun s entai l volition on the part of th e subj ect , .
Iwill be yours I will beco m e you r ,

M a g u gu ng i y o aco
slav e i i
.
You will be m ine . M a gu i gu i ng -

aqui n ca .
M a g u m i m parts /
so m eti m es a sense of uncerta i n ty especially v ith ,
n u m eral a d j ectives .
W l fate be W hat Sh all

? ; gg g
al l y
dA n o cay a ang m a g u i g u i n p ala d co ?
,
c to
Will it e true b
i ll i t co m e , w to i
dM a g u i gu i n to to o
g a g a? b
be true ? l
.
A fter abou t si x m onth s . Cu n m a guing an i m na b o uan .
To be owin g to M a gu i n d a hi la n
b
. .
A bout how m any will they e ? gM a g u i g u i n g il an sil a?

b
-
They m a y be a o ut ten . M a g u i g u i n s a m p ou o .
is also apt to ex p ress the copula

M ag u i n y reason o f the
“
b ”
close relati on i n signific ation existing between to be and to be c o m e ? “
Thus i t m a y properly be s a id ; gn a g u i g u i ng a li la ca s a P a r e ?
,
“
A re -
you the priest s servant ; have you co m e to be the p riest s servant ?

’ '
i
It was A braha m s son Isaac ; and ’
, N a g u m g anac n 1 A braha m , 31 Is a ac ; at ,
i t was I a s s o s son Jacob ; and it n a g u i n g anac n 1 I saac si Jacob ;

’
at
b J b
, ,
was Jaco s son uda a nd his ’
, n a g u i n g a n c n i Jaco
a s i Jud a , at
b rothers . a n g ca n i y an g m a n ga ca p a t i d
M a g u i ng m ay be pu t i m m ediate ly b efore the n oun o r be fore

tho m odifier
‘
Verily I say un to you E xcept ye ,

Ca to to ha n a ng i n a s a b i co s a i ny o
s ,
na
turn and beco m e a s little child cu n h indi cay o m a g b a li c loob at
g
,
( St M athe w chapt 18 ,
. m a gui n g pa rang m an a m a li lii t na
vers . ata .
Where it could be said wi th equal o r p erhaps even greate r

propriety : ma g u i ng ma li li i t p a r a ng ma ng a ba ta
‘
P a r t i c le s a nd w o rd s o f f e r i ng p e c u li a r f e a t u r e s .
a as a noun m eans any i nstru m ent used f or hunt i ng fi s h

'
d, ,
or
M O DI FI CA TI V E VERBAL PA R TI CL E M a g u i nzP a g u i n .
i ng an d also sta nds fo r the ga m e or fo r what has been caught

, ,
b ut
i n thi s sense it I S beco m ing obsolete .
A n g b os og , ang pana pati n ang m an a g

Bows m uskets and n igh t poachers m a n li li g a o a y q u i n a ca y a nang m a
b d
, ,
are arrested y the constables . n a alguaci l

g“ ( g
a l u a ci l,
S p wo r for . .
a bu m bailiff) .
Ca y a , as a verb m eans . can ,

” “
to be a le b , in a m aterial sense ,
but i t I S ho w ever conj ugated W i th ma ca .
Ha s he strength enough fo r that? gM a ca c a y a

bag a n iy a iy an ?
,
I cannot ri ng i t here b . Di co m a ca y a n a n d a lhi n rito .
Ga g/ d h a s
already been Spoken of as an i ntensive ( 1) A s a n .
.
adverb i t i s used postponed i n i nte rrogation s h aving as ba g ci an

, , , ,
“ " “ ”
expletive sense and m ean s ho w ? how now? “
perchan ce ?
you perchance the son of Peter?
A re , , dI c ao cay a bag a ang ana c n i P edro ?
Howl is he the m urderer?
, dSi y a cay a ang n a ca m a tay ? .
“
Ca y a
” “
as a conj unction
,
”
, is u sed .
befo re the ver b and m ean s '
since ,
therefore .
You have een cal led fo r and since b ,

Ti nau a g ca , y am a n g m a g a li ng
cay a
y o u are already well ( i n good
,
ca na , a roo n = u m o n ca
health ) go there .
p p a r o .
He i s sick the re f o re I will pay hi m

, Siy a i m a y, ,
s a q u i t, cay a d a da la u i n co
a vi si t . siy a .
Ca y d , i s followed by the affir m ative a nd co m ple tive p arti cles .
“ ” ”
Ca y d ng a m eans wherefore “
j ust that ; i n the clause o r s u b o rd
’
, ,
i n a t e senten ce .
Just because she i s a wo m an she , Cay a

'
n g a, siy a i , ,
b abaye m a g p a ca hi n
e n d e v o r s to be chaste hin siy a
g
. .
Just for that reason I wi ll not give Cay a n a i , ,

di b i b i g u i an cat a nang
o u any m oney salapi
y . .
Ca y ci ng an i is m ore e m phati c than mi a nd is sed in

”
ca y ci
‘
. d u
the negative .
Si nce you have no far m lease 0 n e l Cay a n gan i ual a cang b ri q u i d .

ma
l m ou ls ca .
“
Ca y d i s also used fo r therefore for
'
j n a; y a ta ca y at nga m J ,
b
.
“ “ ”
the adver ial p hrase no sooner as soon as , .
’
I no sooner arrived than I a rrested Cay a n g a n i ,t, p a g d a t i n g co i , , di n a q u i p

hi m . co siy a .
N otice m ust be ta ken o f th e co m m o n n a t i y e h a bit ( not o ne to .
b e i m i tate d by E uropean s learn i ng the la nguage ) o f _

'
i n s e r ti n g i n a
sentence words whic h have no m eani ng to fill a te m p orary hiatus wh ile
the speaker i s thi nking of hi s next word On e of these p ro p w o rd s i s : .
0
( I ) Se e Te nt h L e s
. s on .
TR E TA GA L O G L A N GUA GE .
it b ei
g pe rhaps the o ne m ost i n us e by nati ve s
n I t stands for what one
b
.
do e s not re m e m er o r serves as a peri phrasis o r euph e m is m for anythi ng

,
whi ch i s already u nderstood bet w een the i nterlocutors f or what will

be sha m eful to express o r m a y h urt the feeli ngs of othe rs
,
M r Such
. a one . Si Co an or , ,
co n an .
What i s u nderstood . A n g co an .
The private parts . A ng co an .
Codn,
i n the sa m e way as a nd can e m ade ver and conj ugat e d b b
b
,
W i th all the ver al particles which the n atu re of the actio n i t i s intended to
give a hin t of m a y ad m it .
She is gro w ing so an d so . Cu n g m o c o an siy a .
She m ight ( consent ) . . M a c o c o an siy a .
Order her so and so M a g p a co an ca s a caniy a

dd d
.
.
She m e les i n oi n g thi s an d that . N a q u i q u i c o an siy a
F OR TY SE CON D E X ER CI SE
-
.
Wh o took m an s attri u te s ? The So n of G o d took m an s

’
b '
attri utesb Why d id He take m an s a t tJ i b u te s ? He took m an s

' ’
b b
.
a ttri utes fo r the sake o f our rede m ption Di d you r so n eco m e worthy
b
to e o rdai ned a p riest? No ut he beca m e orthy of ob taini ng an , b w
office Did what I told you tu rn o u t true ? Yes i t turned out true
b
. .
,
S hall I e yours a n d you m i ne ? N o thou shalt n ei ther be m ine nor

b
,
I thin e What has been the reason Thi s ha s c o m e to e

b
.
, ,
the reaso n fo r What will m ay fate co m e to e ?

. . What your fate
will be nobody knows
,
What shall I do to beco m e wo rt hy of other s
.
’
considera tion ? Pa y what you o w e Has t he servant to do anything ? .
L e t hi m put water i nto this vat Where has you r wi f e been buri ed ? .
Here i n this spot she was buried Why did he co m e i n wi thout bowing ? .
Because he i s an uneducated m a n Why does he p u fl u p ? He

b
.
does not re m e m er his origin Wi ll you acco m p a ny m e ? I wil l keep

.
you co m pany Where are you going ? I a m going to fish with a rod
b
.
.
What i s you r father distributing ? W h at he i s distri buting i s kno w n y m y

b rothers to who m h e i s distributin g i t Who converted water i n to w ine ? .
Jesus Christ converted water i nto win e Who was converted i nto a beast? .
L u th be l was converted in to a beast Did the wine convert i t s e f i nto .
v i negar ? It did What did your fri end tu rn out to be ? He turned

b
.
out a m i ser W ha t ha s your aunt beco m e ?

. She eca m e deaf ,
.
.
n
m ute and blind Ca n you lift that? . I ca n no t li ft that What have .
you lai d hands u pon ? I laid hands upon t he thie f Do you chance .
to be M a ry s br other? I a m
’
What do you in tend to do ? Where

) e has n o t co m e I wi ll go for hi m
.
as ( since h , .
THE TA GA L O G L A N GUAGE .
F u t u re p e r f e c t t e ns e.
Shall , w ill have beheld . m

( an y ) M a ca p a g s i p a n oo r , ma g s i p a n oo r na .
I mpe ra t iv e .
Be hold ( ye ) let ( us the m )behold , ,

. M a g s i p a n oo r .
V e rb a l .
The acti on of eholding b .

( m any ) A n g p a g s i s i p a n oo r .
T he student should conj ugate the follo w ing verbs with ma g s i .
To teach ( by m any ) . M a g s i ar a l . .
To s tudy ( by m any ) . M a g s i p a g ara l: .
To preach ( by m any ) . M a g s i p a n gara l . .
To confess ( by m any pen itents ) . M agsi p a g cu m p i s a l . .
To confess ( by m any p riests ) . M a g s i p a g p a cu m p i s a l . .
To go i n ( m any ). M a g s i p as oc
To get ( so m e thing )i n to ( by m any M a g s i p a g p as o c . .
To go out ( m any ) . M a g s i la b as .
To draw ( so m e thing )out ( by m any ) M a g s i p a g la b as . . .
To weep ( by m any )
. M a g s i ta n gi s
. .
To laugh ( m an y ) . M a g s i tau a .
the collective sense of m ultitude i n icated y ma g s i m a y;

Still d b
b e carried to a higher degree o f plurality by i nserting nga b e t e en
, ,
w
he ch angeable and changeless portion of the particle
t
A ll the childre n o f thi s school A n g m an ga b ata n i ton g e s cu e la ha n

learn . nan g i s i p
ags
a g a ra l .
A ll of you there outside co m e M a n ga g s i p as o c c a y on g n a ri ri y an s a

in . lab as .
Pa g ita anan m o an m a n a u m a ara l

Honor the m asters who teach you
3 .
p i
o r m a s tr o n a n ga g S Si ar a l a i y o I i
g
.
A ll this crowd m ade a co nfession I tong m a ra m i n g m an a tau o n a n ga g s i

this m orning and they all wi ll ga e z a
p g c u m p i s a l c a n
g i n a n g u m aga at m a
at the procession to m o rro w . n ga g s i s i p a n oo r n a n g p r o c e s i on b nc a s
Corner . L og ,
lu m ber . Sub o c . Galap .
The i nside Withi n . . A n g l oob Sa _ l oob . .
Withi n the church . Se l oob nang s i m bahan .
The outside Outside out wa rd s .

,
. A n g lab as Sa lah as .
Outside the town . Sa lab as n ang bayan .
To co mm e m orate Highway m an . . M a gdi u ang Tulis an . .
F oot pad
-
. M a n g ha hara n g .
Where i s her house ? gN a s a an an g c a n i y an g b ahay ?

It i s Wi thi n the town . N a s a l oob n ang bayan .
A n d y ours ? d A t ang i y o?
It i s outside the forest N a s a lab as nang g ubat
J w
. .
ust hat G an an
j w w
. .
Ta k e ust h at y o u ish M uha ca nang ga nang tbi g mo .

V E R B A L PA R TI CL E M a g s i zPa g s i
'
M o nI E I CA TI V E . 2 61
I
Take j ust what suffices for a shi rt . M uha ca n ang gan ang s ucat b a ro i n .
That is only for m e . G an ang a q ui n iy an .
You ( plur )ta ke for yourselves what

. N a gg a g a n an g i ny o cay o n a n g gan an g
I s for m e . aqui n
s a .
A s for m y part . Sa g a n ang aquin .
A s for hi m Sa gan an g caniy a

b
. .
A s for m y pa rt I a a n don he r , . Sa gan ang aquin p i na b a b a y aa n co siy a , .
P a r t i c le s a nd w o rds o ff e r i ng p e c u li a r f e a t u r e s .
as a noun m ean s “
i nti m ate friend
’
Ca s i , ,
: .
They are inti mate friends . M a g ca s i ,

m a g c a ca s i sil a ,
and conj ugated with ma g m eans to engage i n close fa m iliari ty .
He engages i n inti m acy . N a g ca c a s i siy a .
Ca s i , as a verb , m ean s : “
to perva de . if conj ugated w ith um .
The Holy G host pervaded the souls A ng DiosE s p i r i tu Sa n ta an g cu n gm a s i

of the A postles . s a ca lolou a nang m an a A p os toles
( p)
S g .
v
Still c a ma s i m eans : to b e b ribed ,
an d by ma g ,
“
to b ribe .
The j udge accepted o f my gi ft . A n g b ooo m ay ang q u i n a s iha n co .
Ca s i m ay be use d as an i m personal verb m eaning “

i t see m s .
It see m s that he ent there w . N a p a r oo n c a s i siy a .
t see m s he does not know her . Di niy a n a q u i q u i la la ca s l .
D i , th e cont raction o f d i li
”
d
an hi n di i s al ways a prepositive
,
par ticle m eaning not“

o r i m part ,
the sense of the prefix u n
“
.
I n s u fi e ra b le ,
U nspeaka b le .
b
cannot e conj ugated y p a o n account of its m onosyllabi c
Di
“
b
structure thus to s a y n o
,
i s exp ressed by the full word hi n d i or
, ,
d i li with p a fo rm ing p a hi n d i p a d i li
, , , .
Di serves to af fi r m i n an alternati v e or contrasti ng sense .
b
To who m ut Ou r L ord G o d should , cgD isino ang d a d a i nga n co cund i ang ,
I pray ? . Dios na ating Pa ngi n oo n ?

Di j oins to adve r s b , then i m parti ng a negative se nse .
N o t yet A ltho u g h a lthou gh n ot

.
,
.
. Di pa Di m a n
. .
N o t only but even . Di m a n n au a .
G reatly exceedingly
,
Why not ? . Di ha m ac gSaa n d i g a n oo n ?
.
Does he n o t wish to eat yet? dDi pa ibig niy ang c u m a i n ?

A lthough you don t weep I will
’
Di ca m a n t u ma ng is ha ha m p a s i n '
whip you . quita .
E xceedingly wealthy . M aya m an di ha m ac .
Why n ot so ? dSa an d i g a n oo n ?
TE E TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
D i li ,
b esides
its proper signification a s a negative a d erb
v , is
u sed at the en d for an alternative n egat ive conj unction .
Will he p ay o r not? cgB a b ay a d siy a dili ? ,
Diua .
D i ua i s another i m personal v er b “
having a dubita tive sense as
" "
‘
ca s i, ti la , y a ta . I t likewi se stands fo r i t see m s i t appears , .
It see m s to he he . Dlu a i siy a

I t ap pears as i f you would despise Di u a i , p i nau a u a lan m o
,
na a cong ha
me . lag a .
“ ” “ ” “ ”
as a noun m ean s
Di u a , ,
spi rit ,
genius ,
vapor ; although
i n this sense i s little i n use .
g
.
The spi ri t of m artyrs . A ng diua n ang m an a mar ti r .

( Sp
Di u a ha s
also an adj ectival force m ean ing “
fresh th ing ; bu t
b
,
it is et ter to say s a mu a
’
The fresh leaves of trees

A ng s a ri u a ng d ahon n ang m an a g
c aho y
.
D eon .
D é on
i s as the stu ent kno s the a ver i n icative o f pla ce d w d b d
b
, ,
far away fro m the i nterlocutors It m a y a lso e used as an adverb .
” ”
of ti m e m eaning then
“ “
at that ti m e “
i n those d ays , , .
’
When you eat you shal l know then

}
m a a a la m a n m o
fl ggggfifi
cu n
,
r l a on
0
what kind of food is i n store for

cu n
you
In those days the Patron Saint s
’
D oon s a m an ga arao na y a on y pi na g ~
feast was celebrated . did i u a n g ang Pi nta ca s i ng San to .
D eon
i f associ a ted with p a has the ad m irative conj unctional
w
, ,
se n se indicated i n the follo ing illustrati on .
He b eing
so young does that Bata pa i g u n m
g a g au a nang g a n i to
w
, , , , , ,
hat shall h e do when a m a n? gd oo n p a

-
cun la m a q u i ?
We have seen th at dé on m a y e m ade a ver ith ma g ca ; b b w
z
ma g ca r é on “ “ “ ’ ”
to h ave to own to be worth; still it m a y b e
'
, , ,
m ade verb with ma n : ma n dé on “

to take so m ething out of a heap , .
Gl m so m e fru i t out
fi figa
Of the
s
} Bi gui an m o il a n ang
s n a n doroou .
THE TA G A L CG L A N GU A GE .
Cause , or the subj ect of a convers l

A n g y p a g ca s tl la
ation i n Spani sh .
P lace for Spaniards to m eet . Ca s ti laa n = p a g c a s ti la a n .

.
To adopt Spani sh m anners M a g s a ca s ti la .
I n what Spanish m ann ers or custo m s l

A ng Sl n a s a ca s ti la
are followed i ,
b
.
Cause or reason where y adopted . A ng y p a g s a ca s ti la .
CO NJ U G A T I O N .
A C TI V E .
I nfi ni t i v e .
Te behave as a Spaniard to follow

M a gs a c a s t1la
'
,
Spani sh custo m s
.
Pre s e nt i nd e fi n i t e te ns e .
F ollow ,
-
es t ,
-
s Spani sh cu sto m s . N ag s a s a ca s ti la .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi n i t e t e ns es .
F ollowed ,
-
d s t; h ave hast has followed
, ,
Spanish custo m s . N a gS
a c a s ti la .
Had ,
-
ds t followed Spanish custo m s . N ac apags a cas t i la , n a g s a ca s ti la na .
F u tu re i n d e fi n i t e t e ns e .
Shall ,
-
lt, will ,
-
lt follow Span ish custo m s . M ags a s a ca s ti la .
Fu t u re p e r f e c t te ns e .
Shall It -
will I t have followed )
,
M a ca p a g s a ca s t i la mags ti la na
. ,
a s a ca s
Spanish custo m s s , .
I mpe ra ti v e .
F ollow , le t . follow Spa nish custo ms . M a gs ac a s ti la .
V e rb a l
The actio n of following Spani sh custo m s . A ng p ag s a s a ca s ti la .
I N P A SS I V E .
The
peculiarity is to be noted that whi le ma g a verbs m a y e e b
c onsidered as only enlarged m a g ones they are ho eve r conj ugated , , w ,
i n the i n pass i ve like a m verbs p a g being dropped and only a d and ,
the root re m aining .
( What ) to be adopted of the Spanish

custo m s ( that i n which )Spanish Sa ca s ti la i n
l
, .
cus to m s to be adopted .
M O DI F I CA TI V E V E R BA L P A R TI CL E M a gs a zPa g s a . 2 65
P re s e nt i n d e fi ni t e t e n s e .
( W ha t)is a d opte d Of th e Spanish

custo m s y , b . l
Si n a s a ca s ti la . a ng .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e s
-
( What ) was ; has b een adopte d of

Sp a ni s h CU StO II l S y , b .
Si na ca s tl la . ang .
( What )ha d be e n a do p te d of the Spa nish custo m s , by . Si na ca s t i la a ng .

( )
1
Fu t u r e i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e .
( What)shall ,
w ill b e a d opted of the Span ish custo ms by , . ang .
b d
)
l
( Wh a t shall will have een a opt
d b aca s tila i n na ang ( 1)
,
as
e o f the Spa n ish custo m s y
.
.
,
I mp e ra t i v e .
L e t ( what) b e d op ted o f the Spanis h cus to m b y

a s ,
. Sa ca s ti lai n ang .
V e rb a l .
The s ta te of ( what) ei ng adopte b d A ng nang

of t he Spanish c us to m s
.
Y PA SSI V E .
I nf i n i t i v e
To follow Spanish cus to m s on account of . Yp a g s a ca s tila .
P re s e nt i nd e fi ni t e te ns e .
Fo llbw , -
est ,
-
s Spa ni sh cus to m s o n account of . Yp i na g s a s a ca s ti la .
Pr e s e nt pe rf e c t a nd p a s t I nd e f i ni t e te ns e s .
F ollowed , -
d s t; have , h ast , has
followed Spanis h custo m s on Yp i n a g s a ca s ti la
z
.
acco unt of .
H custo m s
is; fi gfifi f
’d Sp an i sh
l N ay p a gs a ca s t i la , y p i na g s a ca s tila na .
Fu tu r e i nd e f i n i t e t e ns e .
Shall , 1t -
,
will ,
-
It follow Spanish c usto m s o n account of . Yp a g s a s a ca s ti la .
( 1) N o f o rms wi t h we a nd ma are us e d to a v oi d co nf u s ion .

Shall lt wi ll I t have followed

2
-
, , ,
M a y p a g s a ca s ti la , y p a g s a s a ca s t i la na
Spanish cus to m s on account of
.
I mp e r a t i v e
w follow Spanishle t
(
F ollo ,
Yp a g s a ca s ti la
custo m s o n account of
.
V e rb a l .
The action of following Spanish

A ng y p a g s a ca s ti la
custo m s on account of i
.
AN PA SS I V E .
I nf i ni t i v e .
To follo w the Spanish cus to m s at . Pa g s a cas tila a n .
F ollo w ,
-
e St , S the Spanish custo m s at . Pi n a g s a s a ca s ti la a n .
P re s e nt p e rf e ct a nd p a s t i n d e fi n i t e t e ns es .
F ollowed d s t; have hast ha s fol l

- -
,
Pm a g s a ca s ti la a n
, ,
lowed the Spanish custo m s at l

,
P lu p e r f e c t te ns e .
Hi l
hi tiih
o llo w e d Span i sh
ig f
the
l
s
N a gp a s a ca s ti laa n , p i na g s a ca s ti la a n n a .
i s a
F u t u re i nd e f i n i t e t e ns e .
Shall , lt, -
will ,
-
lt follo w the Spanish cus to m s at . Pa g s as a ca s ti la a n .
Sha ll, lt , -
w ill I t have
,
-
followed the
M agpa s a cas tl laa n , p a g s a s aca s ti la a n na
Spanish custo m s at .
.
F ollow , let follow the Spanish custo m s at . Pa g s a ca s ti la a n .
V e rb a l .
The action of follow i ng the Spanish custo m s at A ng p ags a ca s tilaa n .
'
The student should conj ug ate i n the a ctiv e a nd i n th e p as sive

the followi n g ma gs a v e rb s :
P a r t i c le s an d w o rd s o ff e r i n g p e c u li a r f e a t u r e s .
11a d
is the i n efinite a dj ective p ronou n “
other ,
” “
a nother .
If m a e ver d b
i ba m a y assu me various m eanings accor ing to d
w
,
the parti cle ith w h1ch a s s o cra te d .
z
'
To cha nge M a g i ba
by
~
. .
to feel the
) M a ngi b a
,
.
what t was
p gi
o ff e re nt fro m I
M a g ca i b a
b f f
.
s M.
11s , d
as an a j ective of quality , m eans : “
d i ff e rent .
Thi s i s di fi e re nt fro m that Ito i i b a d iy an

b
. .
, ,
U nco mm on , u n s ati s facto ry . Cai a .
I ba has an b
adver ial i mpo r t as in
J ests asi d e ,
apart . I ba s a b iro .
I ba i s us e d as a noun i n the sense of

“
strange r ,
” “
not akin .
He i s no t my relative I b a s a aqui n siy a

w
. .
gN a a a la m a n mo
'
Do you kno that hi s w ife ch ances na

ang ca n i y an g
'
b
to e m y ki ns o m a n ? w . as aua ay hi nd i i b a s a aquin ?
w ell kno wn p repositive form f the d

.
'
I cao i s the o secon p e rs on

m y b e m ade ver b d conj uga t d w ith
’
p ronoun . It a an e a m or pa .
Tothou . U m i c ao .
Who thous y ou ? gSi n o n g u n g m u cao s a i y o?

A s k hi m to thou you . P aic ao ca s a caniy a
R ai n i s an i ndefinite pronoun corre s po n ing d to the E ngli sh

so m e ,
" “
a fe ”
w .
Some , a f ew . So me dy a s . Il an mange il an
, . Il ang a rea .
M O DI F I CA TI V E V E R B A L PA R TI CL E M a g s a zPa gs a . 2 69
It i s used i n i n te rrogations as an equi valent o f ho m a ny ? “

w ’
I t is plu ral b
ut it m a y co m e efo re a singular noun of a non n u m er b
b
-
a le thing .
H o w m uch m on e y ? al l an salap i ?
w
.
Ho m any m e n ? dl l d ng tau o? gil an cata no ? .
I i s another fo r m of the negative adver d i d i li

n di
” ”
b , ,
hi nd i ,
m eaning “
no “
never “
not yet ; a nd i s so me what e m phati c
, , . It i s
j oi ned to the other particles its synony m s .
N eithe r , n o r either d
In i m a n ind i ri n
d
.
, .
N o t o n ly , solely . I n i l am a n g .
I nd i p a, d enotes
conti nuance ; i n di n a di scontinu a nce ; with the ,
the peculiarity as to the fo r me r that i t is generally used with th e

b
ver i n the present ten se .
He has n o t yet fin ished it . Ind i pa niy a n a ta ta p u s .
He sta ys no longer there . Indi na siy a d oo n tu ng m i ti r a .
L a bi is the co m parative a d ver b “

m ore .
M ore than I m e L ab i s a aquin

d b
, .
M ore than a hun red m e n . La i s a s a n d aa n g ta u o .
L a bi
‘
may “
like wise stand fo r the a d v erb too ,
" “
too m uch .
He i s too cruel stern b

L a i ng m a b a g s i c siy a
w b an ?
.
,
.
Ho m uch is the price of this trunk ? gM a g ca a n o ang ha la g a n i tb ng ca

Twe nty d ollars Da la u an g p ouong piso
b
. .
Tha t i s too mu ch . L a i iy an .
L a bi ,
e
I f
0
ma de v er b c
W i th a m, m eans : “
to excee d ,
” “
to a dd .
He exceed s t o i nches w .
L u n g m a la b i siy a s a da la u an g p a l
g a da ( p)
S
w at r overflo w s b
.
The e L u n g m a b i ang t u ig
A dd w ater t the b roth b b
. .
o . L a b i ha n m o nang t u ig a n g s a ao .
L a bi ; if m ade v er b w ith m g a ,
m eans : “
to leave beh i nd as a surplus .
They left b hi nd one b ushel o f ric

e e . L i na b i nil a i s ang ca b an na b ig a s .
“ ” "
L a bi , as a noun , m eans : excess , surpl u s .
The excess i s three reals . A ng la bi ay tatl ong s i c ap a t .

.
2 70 THE TA GA L O G L A N GUA GE
'
F OR TY F OU R TH E X E R CI SE -
.
Why d o yo u wonder at that o m an f ollo wing Ch inese custo m s ? w

I wonder thereat because i t i s n ot custo m ary for natives of thi s cou ntry
,
to adopt Chinese fash io ns and m anners B ut do y o u know wh o sh e .
is ? I do no t know Do you not kn ow that she i s the wife of a wealthy

.
Chi nese m erchant ? I d id n o t ; but if so I no longer wonder at , ,
he r havi ng adopted Chinese custo m s Would you adopt E nglis h cus .
toms i f I should adop t the n ati ve ones ? I should a dopt E nglish

custo m s even i f you would not adopt n ative ones By who m a re
b
.
M oori sh custo m s adopted ? M oorish custo m s are adopted y so m e

natives livi ng around the shores of M indan ao Islan d Do M oors eve r .
a dopt Bi sayan custo m s ? They ado pt Bisayan custo m s i n part IS .
there no other cotto n than this ? There i s other cotto n an d oth er i ron .
Has b e another h a m m er? He ha s an other ha m m er and another

plane .
'
Does m y aunt ch ange bonnets ? She changes b o n n e ts i A re

you a fi e c te d b y this cli m ate ?
'
Ye s I a m very m uch affecte d by thi s ,
c li m ate Did you r son change to a di ff eren t m a n than before ? He

,
did . I s i ron d ifi e re n t fro m steel ? I ron i s d i fi e re n t fro m steel In what .
are they di fferent ? They are d i fferen t i n hardn ess I s your neigh .
bo r a relative of yours ? He i s not m y relative Do you kn e w .
that her husban d i n m y relative ? I do not know Why does that

b
.
m a n say thou to you r daughter ? He says thou to her ecause h e

b
,
i s going to m arry he r How m any Weeks will you e absent? So m e

b
.
weeks on ly Have you m y ook ? I h ave i t not How m any m e n

. .
ca m e? A few only ca m e Has he not recei ved h i s t runk yet ? He

.
has not recei ved i t yet Why do you write so carefully ? Be

.
cause I a m writing to m y father A re there any thi ck clouds i n the

"
at m osphere ? The a t m osphere i s fraught with thick clouds Who

w
. .
i s that boy ? He i s a m o d e s t fello Why di d the vi llagers m eet

b
,
.
together? They m e t to speak a out the visit of the general .
Who m did y o u ho w to ? To G ardine r he i s a noble m an Why i s

b
.
,
b e asha m ed o f h is parents ? He is asha m ed of h is pa rents e cause ,
t hey a re poor .
F O U R TY— F I F TH L E SS O N .
YC A A P A T N A P O U O , T, LI MANG P A GA RA L .
M O DI F I C A TI V E V E R B A L P A R TI C L E HA N l PA N H I .
M a n hi zp a n hi
i s a co m poun d of ma n p m: and hi a particle r
,
denoting fi ction derision etc which i m parts a sense m uch the sa m e

b
, , .
, ,
”
as that i m parted by the E nglish prefix for i n forswear
“ “ “
for ear e tc
z
, ,
"
Thus g a n ti
,
“
reward ; g u ma n ti
,
“
to reward ; m a n hi g a n t “
to revenge ;
,
‘
,
“
a l “
’
“
p ag , unhulled rice ; ma mala y to gather i n paddy ; ma nhi mala g to , ,
“ “ ” "
p ala d good luck
“
fo rtune ; m a g ca p ala d
,
to b e lu cky ; m a n ,
ki malad “
to predict by fortune tellers
, M a n i s the g overning parti cle .
for hi ma y be considered as belon ging to the root and he nce i n ma n hi

b
, ,
v e r s t he sa m e changes i n the i nitial consonant take place as i n ma n one s .

THE TA G A L O G L A N G UA G E
‘
I N PA S S I V E .
To b e avenge d of . Pa n hi ga n ti hi n .
A m, art is are avenged of

, ,
. Pi n a nhi hi g a n ti .
P r e s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
Was ,
-
s t, were ; have hast has ee n avenged of , , b :
Pi n a nhi g a n ti .
Ha d ,
-
de t b e e n avenged of . N a p a nhi g a n tl,p i na n hi g a n ti na .
Fu t u r e i n d e fi n i t e t e n s
‘
e .
Shall ,
-
lt , w ill ,
-
It b e avenged of . Pa n hi hi g a n tihi n .
Shall lt -
w ill -
lt have b een aveng
d M a p a nhi ga n ti , p a n hi hi ga n ti hi n na
, , ,
e of
.
I mp e ra t i v e .
Be avenged let , b e avenged of . Pa nhi g a nti hi n .
V e rb a l .
'
I be s ta te of ei ng avenged of b . A n g p a n hi g a nti hi n .
Y P A SS I V E .
To revenge with or by . Yp a n hi ga n ti .
Pre s e nt i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e .
R eve n ge , -
s t, -
s with or by . Yp i n a n hi hi ga n tl .
P re ée nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi n i t e t e n s es .
R evenged , d s t ; -
have hast has reve n ged
, , w ith o r by . Yp i n a n hi g a n ti
’
P lu pe rf e c t t e ns e .
Had ,
-
de t revenge with o r y d b . N a y p a n hi g a n tl y p i na n hi g a n tl ,
na .
F u t u re i nd e fi ni t e t e n s e .
Sh a ll , -
lt , w ill , I t -
revenge with or b y . Yp a nhi hi ga nti .
M O DI F I CA TI V E VE RBA L PA RTI CL E M an hi =P a a hi . 2 73
S hall lt will -
It have revenged )M a a n hi a n ti t1 i i a
w b
-
y p a nh1h1g a n
, , ,
yp g ,
ith or y , l
I mp e rati v e .
R evenge , let . revenge with or by ,

. Yp a n hi g a n ti .
V e rb a l .
The action of revenging with or by , . A ug yp a u h i g a n ti .
AN PA S SI V E .
I nf i ni t i v e .
To take revenge upon . Pa n hi g a n ti han .
Pre s e nt i nd e f i n i t e t e ns e .
Take ,
-
s t, -
s revenge upon . P i na n h i hi g a n ti han .
P r e s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi n i t e . te n s es .
Took ,
-
est ; have hast has taken revenge upon , , . Pi n a nhi g a n t ihan .
Had ,
-
ds t taken revenge U po n . N a p a n hi gan ti b an , p i n a nhi g a n ti han na .
F u t u r e i n d e fi ni te t e n s e .
Shall , lt, -
wi ll ,
-
li take revenge upon . P a n hi hi g a n ti hau .
Shall ’
lt’ W I I L I t ”
have taken re 8
M a p a nhi g a n ti han p a n hi hi g a n ti han a
,
. 11
venge u p on .
,
Take let , take revenge u pon . Pa nhi ga n ti han .
V e rb a l .
The a ction of taki n g re venge upon . A n g p a n hi g a n ti han .
The
following roots illustrating s o m e o f the changes i n the i niti al ,
consonant and the ma nki verbs for m ed the r efro m are given to be co n
,
.
j ugated i n the active and i n the p assive by the studen t
U nh ulled ri ce To glean to be
w Palay M a n hi m ala y y p a n hi m ala y , pan
.
,
gleaned to glean ith o r by to

.
,
, , ,
hi malaya n
g lean at
.
.
Sta i n To
fa ce clean to w ash one ’
s
b w
.
,
e as hed ( other s face )clean to L a m os M a n hi la m os ’

p a n h i la m o s i n
w
,
.
, ,
ash one s face clean with to hi l m hi l m

'
yp a n a os p a n a o s a n , , .
wash one s f a ce cle a n at or in '
b
.
‘
,
Spoiled child To ehave chi ldishly

b
.
,
to e done i n a childish way to M os m os M a nhi m o s m os p a n hi m o s m o

b b
, .
,
ehave childishly ecause of to sin y p a n hi m o s mos p a n hi m o s m os a n

b
.
, , ,
ehave childishly at
b
.
Trifle To peddle to sell bad ut

apparently good things ; to be sold l
L M a n hi la c o ; y p a n hi la co p a n hila
.
, ,
a co .
,
w
that ay to s e ll tha t way at
coan .
b b b
.
,
Cruel To re el to re el for to re el Ba g s i c M a n hi m a g s i c p a n hi m a g s i q u i n
b
.
, , .
, ,
ecause of to rebel against yp a n hi ,

m a g s i c p a n h i m a g s i ca n .
, .
Sm i th To fi dg e t about fo r n o pur
.
pose to fi dg e t about fo r to fi dg e t Pan d ay M a n hi m a n day p a n hi m a da yi n

b
.
, , , ,
about ecause of to fi dg e t abou t yp a n h i m a n d a y p a n h

,
i m a
:
n d a yan , .
at .
Ski n To flay to be flayed to flay F an it

. M a nhi m an i t p a n h i m a n i t i n
, ,
.
, ,
wi th to flay a t yp a n h i m a n i t p a n h i m a n i t an
b b
, .
, .
Bereave m ent To e ereft to be be Pangl ao M a n hi m a n g lao y p a nhi m a ng

b
.
, ,
.
r e f t b e ca u s e of to e bereft at 1510 p a n hi m a n g la u a n
'
.
, , .
Dying To swoon away to s w oon
I
Mf m a té y
figfi
hi m a tay
g
.
,
n
g g yp a
away on account of to SWOOH g
' ,
im ,
aw a y at
’
M ustache To co m b the m ustache .
'
s m ooth and even to be co m bed M i s a y M a n hi m i s a y ,p n hi m i s a y i n

a .
, ,
( the m ustache )that way to co m b yp a n hi m i s a y p a n hi m i s a y a n , , .
etc with to co m b etc at

w
. . .
,
S elli n g of the eyelids To wash l .

,
one s sore eyes i n lukewar m wat Po c to M a n hi m o c to p a n hi m o c to hi n

’
.
, ,
er to be washed ( the eyes )etc to

, yp a n hi m o c t o p a n hi m o c to ha n .
, , .
wash etc with to wash etc at J .

, . .
They avenged m e . Pi na n hi ga n ti a c o nil a .
He avenged hi m self by not payi ng Yp i n a n hi g a n ti n iy a ang di m a g bay a d

hi m . caniy a
s a .
I will take revenge o n hi m . Siy a ang p a n hihi g a n ti han co .
M a n ki for m s verbs i ndicative of actions of bodily cleansing .
Wax of the ear To

clean the ear fro m wax Tutul i M a n hi n u ll
’
. . .
.
F oulness o f t h e To
clean o ne s teeth fro m
g
'
Ti n g 9
'
M an hm i n a
- '
teeth . foulness .
.
Cra b louse -
.
I To c e a n one 8 self fro m
li c é Tu m a . M a n hi n o m a .
N8 fi ngers
33
53
18
To clean o ne s nai ls
’
,
. M a n hi n go c o
6
.
L1 de ( o p tha l
25; 3
}
To M a n hi m o ta
’
clear out o ne s eyes M ota
.
. . .
To z
l
c ea n one s self fro m I
M a n hi li s a
1 nit
.
A llways ,
cons ta ntly . To u I tou i n ang tou i tou t tou t
'
,
'
-
na
, .
Whe never Toni n g

Whenever you rea d b ook a To ui can g m as a nan g li ro
‘
b .
2 76 THE TA G A L O G L A N G U A G E
Ocol, as a verb ,
has various m eanings :
The soul I s for ( belongs to )Go d . A n g c a lo lou a a y n a o oc o l s a Dios .
M easure o n hi m th i s stuff to see Yoc o l m o s a caniy a i t ong cayo na

w heth er it i s suitable f o r his shirt . b a b a ro i n niy a .
It suits P eter to be j udge . Ocol cay P edro ang m a gho c o m .
I n o o c o la n or , i n a a y onan co an g lé o b
I y i eld to the W i ll of Go d .
nang Di os
,
“ " “ " “
P on o as a n oun m eans : sou rce o rigin trunk of a tree ’
, , , , .
“ ”
fore m an
’
“
,
leader .
A n g D ms fly ang pono n ang ca to to ha

Go d i s the source of truth .
naI
Ho w m any b anana trees are there gl lan bag a ang m an a pono g na ng s é

your far m ?
I n g u i n g na s a i y on g b uq uid ?
He i s the chi ef of the fleet . Siy a i ang pono nang boch o s
, , a d agat .
G enerati ve organs . P o nong ca ta o u an .
Head place or town p resident of P onong

,
bayan .
the town m ayor , .
P on o, as a ver b ,
m ea n s : “
to fill and also to m ake u p “
.
F ill th e vat . P on an m o ang tapayan .
M ake up one hundred . M a g p o n o ca n an g s a n g d aa n .
Qu i ta Ca td .
These t o pronouns w
used i n the no m inative express the
“
when
plural even in a m ore restricted sen se than ca mi as they m ean thou ,
.
and I alone ; bu t they have a so m ewhat i nterj ectio nal exhortative

sense .
Well then let us go to m ass

, . Quita i m a g s i mb a
, ,
.
Well let us set about i t

, . Ca t az q u i ta na .
L e t us eat . Quita 1 c u m ai n .
But m ost co mm on ly q u i ta ca ta stands for the possessi ve case

w
,
i th regard to the s p eaker 0 1 agent and fo r the no m inative of the ,
noun of sufferi ng both of the m b ei ng used i n the passive a s a

,
substitute for ca i ca o thou by m e

“
I n other words : when m the pass
, .
ive sentence the agent is represen ted by the first person pronoun and ,
the gra m m atical subj ect by that of the second person the for m er is ,
o m i tted an d i cao is translated qu i ta ca ta -

.
I will keep you co m pany you shall

Sa s a m a ha n =ca ta
,
q u 1ta
be acco m panied by m e .
.
I will wake thee up G u ig u i s i n gi n ca ta=q u i ta

w db
.
.
You are hi p p e y m e . Hi n aha mp as q u itaz ca ta .

M O DI F I CA TI V E VE RB A L PA R TI CL E M a gp a ca
F OU R TY F I F TH E X E R CI SE
-
.
Why does the sol d ier take revenge o n that dog ? He takes
revenge on it because i t hi t hi m
, Wi ll the bli nd m a n e avenged . b
of the offence ? He will be avenged b y h is son On who m will -
.
’
h e take revenge He will take revenge o n the b oy who led h i m

.
,
astr a y . Why does that poor m a n glean ? He gleans be cause he i s ,
hungry .Do you wash your face every m orning ? I al w ays wash
m y face after ri si ng fro m bed Why does he acts so chi ldishly ? .
He acts childishly for h e i s still a spoiled chi ld, Do Chi nese

undersell other m erchants ? They u nde rsel l the m because they sell bad ,
t hings for goo d o nes A gain s t who m d id n atives rebel ?

. They r e ~
b e li e d agai nst Spania r ds an d A m ericans What does th e carpen te r

do ? He does nothi ng h e a fi e c t s doin g so m e thing ( fi dg e ts ) Why
. . .
does your broth er flay the deer ? He flays it to sell the m eat .
What i s th e m atter with the crippled m a n ? He swoone d away yes

t e rd a y . I s your m a le cou s i n co m bi ng his m ustache s m ooth
-
N o he .
,
i s cleani ng his ear fro m wax an d his tee th fro m fou lness Does h e
’
b
.
ha itually clean his nails ? He not o nly cle a n s h i s nai ls but also h e ,
o
clears out hi s eyes and clean s hi m self fro m nits Where i s hi s grand son ? He .
i s w i thi m the roo m W hy do you co m pare those t w o gantas ?

.
I co m pare the m to see whether they are eq ual Will they confo r m .
to the will of thei r father? They wil l Who i s the leader of the .
ar m y ? The leader of the ar m y i s the ki ng What i s t he servant .
filling u p ? He is filling u p you r glass Will you kee p m e co m pany ? .
I will keep y o u co m pany i f yo u go to M ani la W ill you puni sh .
m e whenever I do n ot obey you ? I will punish you whenever yo u

do not obey m e Who i s the m ost fa m ous m ost cele rated and i llus
.
,
b
t ri o u s m a n of the U nited States of N orth A m erica ? Washington i s
tho m ost fa m ous What are you eating ? I eat the fruit sough t
b
.
y m y m oth e r .
F O R TY- SI XTH L E S S O N .
0
YC A A P A T N A P O U O , T, A N I M N A P A G A R A L .
fijn
CA
M O DI FI C A TI V E M A G P A CA z
'
V E R B A L P A R TI C L E
of ma verbs
M a gp a ca z g
, s u ffi x e d
z
gg
a
j
a ca
m
is
L ike
those with ma gp a an d p a ver s with
.
b ut ma gp a W i th -
ca ,
the p as s w e
, b
part i cle
ma gp a ca d e n o te actions suffered willingly by the subj ect o r perfor m ed

consciously u pon hi m self The acti ons thus viewed being passive o r
subj ective i t follows th at ma gp a ca verbs do not ad m it of th e i n
,
passive ; but however the discri m ination between th e passive and th e

, ,
self i n fl i c te d acts should be m ade clear by the use of adequate

-
words with roots ad m itting of both Thus n a gp a ca m a tag s i J es u cr i s to .
"
,
ni y a
“
ca s a Jes u s Chri st gave u p His life ; n a gp a ca ma tay s i Ca té n
d
,
“ "
s a ca ni an i li Cato n co mm i tted suici e
y g s a r , .
2 78 THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
analogy referred to above bet w een magp a an map p a ca

The d
verbs is f u rther shown i n the conj u gative m echanis m ; fo r i n ma gp a ca ,
verb s p a and not ca i s repeated i n the present and future tenses as

, ,
seen in the conj u gation hereafter .
To k i ll . P at ay , p u m a tay .
To sentence to death or to have

M a g p a té y m a g Pa Pa té Y
,
so m ebody killed by other s hands i

’
’
.
To kill one by one by m any blows

o r by one wh o k i lls m any
M a g p a p a ta y ( 1)
,
.
,
i .
To kill m any by m any o r one by

m any .
M a n g a g p a p a tay ,
i .
The killed person or an i m al A n g pa t a yi n . .
The in stru m en t weapon A n g yp a t ay , . .
g
I
The m ourning persons the relat
5 A n g m an a p a ta y an ( 1)
,
ives of the victi m

.
The place . A n g p a t a y a n p a g p a ta y a n , .
To go about killing M a m atay . .
To swoon away to beco m e d rowsy M a n hi m a t ay , . .
To g ive u p one s life to co m m it

'
M a g p a ca m a t ay ,
de
.
s ni c i .
CO N U G A TI O NJ .
A CTI V E .
I nfi ni t i v e .
To give u p one s life to co m mit suicid e M a g p a c a m a tay

'
. .
,
Pre s e nt i n d e fi ni t e te ns e .
Co m m it ,
-
est ,
-
s suicide . N a g p a p a c a m a tay .
Pre s e nt pe rfe ct a nd p a s t i nd e f i n i t e te ns e s .
Co m m itted ,
-
ds t; have h ast has co m m itted suicide
, ,
. Na g p a ca m a tay .
z
Ha l ds t co m mitte
,
-
d suicide . N a ca p a g p aca m a tay , n a g p a c a m a tay na .
F u tu re i n d e fi n i t e t e ns e .
Shall ,
lt,
-
w ill ,
-
lt co mm it suicide . M a g p a p a ca m a tay .
Fu tu re p e r f e c t t e ns e .
Shal
l1 1r
i
, ’ will ,
-
lt h ave co m m itted M a ca p a g p a ca m a tay , m a g p a p aca m a tay
su c ite .
( 1) N o te t he a c ce n t u a ti o n .
Pre s e nt i nd e f i n i t e t e n s e .
Co mm it , -
es t s suicide in o r at
,
«
, . Pi n a g p a p a ca ma ta y au .
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
Co m m itted d s t; have hast has

i
-
Pm a g p a c a m a ta y an
, , ,
co m m itted suicide in or at
,
.
,
Had ,
-
ds t co m m itted suicide in ,
N a p a g p a ca m a ta y an , p i n a g p a ca m a ta
or at .
y an na .
F ut u re i n d e fi ni t e te ns e .
"
S1l w I 11, co m m i t su i c i d e
' '
-
1t
Pa g p a p a ca m a ta y an
i t] , or at .
.
Shall ,
-
It
wi ll lt have co m m itted ,
-
M a p a gp a c a m a ta y an ,
a
p gpa p a c a m a ta
suicide in o r at , .
y an ii a .
I mp e r a ti v e .
Co mmit , let . co mm it suicide i n or at , . Pa g ca mata y an .
V e rb a l .
The a c ti o n of co m m i tting suicide

A n g p a g p a c a m a ta y a n
in or
.
,
at .
The
studen t should con j ugate i n the acti ve a nd i n the passive
li ke m a gp a ca ma tdg the following verbs :
z
To hu m ble oneself to hu m ble
M a g p a c a b a b a y p a g p a c a b a b a p a g p a ca
,
oneself on account of to hu m , ,
babaan ,
ble oneself at
.
To constitute oneself into a

beggar to do that on account of i
M a g p a a d u i a ypagp a ca d u c ha p a g
p g
-
, ,
,
P aca i “ 0 a “
,
to do that at .
To allow oneself to go i nto a state of

dej ection to allow etc on accoun t ,
( M a g p a ca lii t
i tan
y p a g p a c a lii t p a g p a ca
.
li , ,
of to allow etc a t
.
. . .
To brood over i nsult to brood over

b L M a g p a ca a p i i
,
a a a a a ca
insult ecause o f to brood ove r y p g p a c
p p g p , ,
a p i an
’
,
i nsult a t l
.
To repent t o repent on account M a g p a c a s i s i y p a g p a c a s i s i p a g p a ca s i

, , ,
o f to repent of
, sihan . .
To value oneself high ly to value

M a g p a c a m a ha l yp a g p a ca m a ha l pag
,
oneself high ly because of to , ,
a ca m a ha la n
,
v alue on eself high ly at p .

.
To al low oneself to be led i nto the

right path to e m bellish o nesel f ; M a g p a c a b u ti ; y p a g pa ca b u ti p a g p a ca
, ,
t o do this on account of to do b u ti li a n , .
this at .
M O DI F I CA TI V E V E R BA L PA R TI CL E M a gp a c
Pa gp a ca
f a ca
.
2 81
The g passive i n ma gp a ca verbs generally refers to the i nstru m ent o r ,
to the reason ; the a n passive to the place or to the t hing ; accordi n g

b
, ,
to whe ther the ver requires or not the a n passive i n reference to the
direct o bj ect .
J esus Christ gave u p Hi s life for A u g y p i na g p a c a m a t ay n i J e s u cri s to i ,
the rede m ption of m ankind . ang p a g s a c0 p s a c a ta u o ha n .
I t was on the cross that Jesus Christ A n g e r a s a y ang p i n a g p aca m a t a y an

gave up Hi s life . u i J e s u c ri s to .
P a ca ta n da a n m o a n g s i n a s a b i co s a
‘
N otice carefully what I t e ll you

iyo
.
The
re m ark i s m ade
that p a gp a ca i n the passive i s for th ose
b
»
ver s which require p a g for the si m ple action ; p a ca for the others ,
.
E ndeavour to teach your children P a caa ra la n m o a n g i y on g m a nga a na c

'
good habits . nang m a b u tln g asal .
E ndeavour to learn th e E nglish lan ~

Pa g p a ca p a g a ra la n m o ang n i c a n g
guage . ingl é s .
The two pre ceding illustrations show the parti cle i n a

differen t
light When ma gp a ca is applied to verb s the action of wh ich i s
.
voluntary or capable of ad m itting a direct co m ple m ent other than the

subj ect i t i ndi cates an earnest desire a s pecial care to execute the
, ,
action in the highest possibl e degree of efficiency an d i n thi s perfective

, ,
sense ma gp a ca verbs ad m it of the i n passive

'
To do so m ething carefully . M a g p a ca ra ha n
To think d eeply . M a gp a c a i s i p .
To observe carefully . M a g p a c a ta n d a .
To be upon one s gua rd

’
. M a g p a c a i n ga t .
To behave oneself very m indfully . M a g p a ca b a e t .
To u t i n order to s ettle thi ngs

'
hg
M a g p a ca hu s a y
,
e ( I fully
.
z
.
To study in earnest . M a g p a c a p a g ara l .
To estee m largely . M a g p a ca m a ha l
An ali h i d. n a g p a p a ca b u t i 33 m a
M odesty enhances wo m en s beauty
3f ggx
’
g b
.
g
The reaso n for m y fe m al e co u s m A n g yp i n a g p a p a ca b u tl nan g a q u i n
g
—
e m belli shi ng he r s e lf i s that she p i n s an g b a b a y e , i , ang n a n g siy a, i ,

m a y be praised m apuri
g
. .
M eek peopl e allow the m selves to be A n g y p i na g p a p a ca a p l nang m an a b a

’
a bused t hat th ey m a
y acquire na 1n a tau o a y ang n ang m a g ca roo n
:
m erits before G o d . n ang c a r a p a ta n s a harap n a n g D i e s .
Pa ca p a g s i s i ha n m o ang lahat m ong

R epent earnestl y of all yo u r wrongs
m a s a m an g gau a
.
Thin k carefully of that . P a ca i s i p i n m o iy an .
Pi n a g p a p a c a m a ha l= p i n a c a m a m ah a l
I do estee m y o u
quit a
.
R eciproca l verbs wi th ma g and an are greatly inten si fied by

m a gp a ca .
They har m e a ch b the r bitterly . N a g p a p a ca s a m a a n S il a .
You aided each other earnestly N a g p a c a to lo nga n cayo

’
. .
M agp a ca
the g an d rops
re mains map a ca he n d w a f ortuitou s
an d not a purposely executed action is to he m eant .
To allo w
oneself to e le i nto the b d
right path
To be saved to attai n salvation
.
}M M a g p a ca g a ll ng
a p a ca g a li n g
.
'
d
, . .
To be conde m ne to i ncur eternal ,

Ma p a ca s am a
u ish m ent .
p n .
In the passive w hen p a ca i s use d the first sylla le of b the root

b
, ,
should e re p eated .
He endeavours to p u rif y hi s ha its b Pi na ca li li ni s n iy a ang ca ni y ang m a n a g

He w ill b e purified of all his sins .
Pa ca li li n i s a n siy a nang lahat niy ang
g
m an a c a s a la na n
Thou shalt b e saved if thou keep
.
M a p a p a ca g a li n g ca cun s i n u s u n o d m o
est my holy co m m an d m ents . ang a q u i n g m an a s antong u tos g .
Young cock F ighting cock Tandang Sa s a hu ngi n

w
. . . .
I will allow this rooster to gro into

Sas a b u n gl n i n co i tong t andang
a fighting cock
.
g
.
H i hi p n ang han in
0
Blast of wind Z e p hy i r Sl m oy
'
. . . .
To e m brace To shine to glow

. , . Yu m aca p M a g n i ng ni n g
. .
To wait for Wait a m o m ent M a g hi n t ay H i n t ay ca m una

w
. . . .
I n the allure m ents of thi s o m an N a g n i n i n g n i n g ang ca hi n hi n a n

m odesty shines . quilos n i ton g b i n i bi n i .
To spri n g to flow fro m To put into

,
. . B u m u ca l . M a g s i li d .
w fro m? A lin ang b i n u hu ca lan n i tong 1 l og

'
Where does this river flo (

i to?
The b utterfly Gnat . . A n g p a ro p a ro L a m oe . .
A t
n Cock roach L anga m I p is
G lo w w or m
-
. . . .
-
T swell. o , to inflate . A li ta p ta p B u m i n to g
. .
P a r t i c le s a n d w o rd s o f f e r i ng p e c u li a r f e a t u r e s .
Sata n .
as its structure s a + a n i ndicates

Saa n , is m ost co m m only the
b ,
, ,
“ “ ”
adver of place where whi ther , .
Where is the quilt? gS aa n n a roo n ang c om o t ?

Whither do yo u go ? ds aa n ca p a r o r oo n ?
be m
Sata n m a y
ade a p a ver an d i t stands then for the b ,
verb by which inqui ry i s m ade as to the direction of one s m otion

’
Where i s she going ? t{

N a
p a s as aa n b aga siy a? '
Sata n is j oined to other particles i m pa rti n g vario u s senses thereto .
A nywhere , wherever everywhere , . Saan m a n .
E verywhere a nywhere in the E a rth s aan m a n s a lupa

w
, . .
A ny he re you go Sé an ma n p u mar oon

‘ ’
. ca .
2 84 THE TA GA LOG LA N GUA GE .
gave hi s life on M ount Cal v ary What does the pious man do? He
up .
li u m b le s hi m self before G o d an d he rises before m e n What di d the .
So n of G o d do ? H e m ade hi m self poor an d m eek and allowed -
h i m self to b e i nsulted an d lashed Why does that gi rl e m bellish .
herself ? She e m bellishes h erself that she m a y b e p raised Do you '
repent of your sins ? Yes I do repent of all m y sin s Why does , .
your sister value herself so highly ? She valu es herself so highly ,
because she i s virtuous Why does the servant do th a t carefully ?

. .
Because he i s afraid of punish m ent Did you m editate on what I .
told you ? I did What do you order m e ? . Observe ca refully the

dog and take great care n o t to be hi t by i t act very j udiciou sly ,
and keep you r accounts accurately What shall I do to be saved ?

[
.
E ndeavour to correct your habits if you desire to b e saved fo r .

,
only those keepi ng the Holy Co m m and m ents of G o d will be saved .
Where are you going ? I a m going to school Where i s your father? .

:
M y father i s at ho m e Where shall I go ? Wherever you go you

.
m ust work and suffer What did the fathe r and his son do ? . As
soo n as they m e t they e m braced each other Is you r cock a fight i ng .
cock already ? N o it is still a young cock What winds p revai l

outside at the sea ? M ild bree z z
.
,
es ; the e p hy i rs swelled the sails of our

ship . Do gnats hurt you by nigh t? Y es gnats and cock ro aches ,
-
hurt m e A r e there m any butterflies i n you r garden ? There are

.
m any of the m and a lso ants and glow wor m s,

-
F O R TY S E V E N TH —
L E SSO N .
YC A A P A T N A P O U O , T, P I TO N G PA G A RA L .
M O D I F I CA TI V E V E R B A L P A R TI CL E M A GP A T1= PA G P A TL
M a gp a ti zp a gp a ti
i s only used with ver s denoting posture to b ,
add to t he purposely executed acting of the subj ect a sense of alacri ty

whic h i s not fou nd i n the a m verb L ike ma gp a ca m a gp a ti shows the .
,
peculi a ri ty of repeating p a an d not ti i n the present an d i n the

future tenses thus indicating that t i rather belo ngs to the root than
,
to the particle .
M a gp a ti verbs being intra nsiti ve have only g z g ca and a n ,
passives as shown i n the conj ugation hereafter

, .
To kneel L u m oho d
b
. .
To crouch to kneel down efore

, . M a n i clo ho d .
To re m ain i n a kneeling posture out

of stu m ling b N a p a lu ho d ,
na
p a t ilo ho d .
w
.
Place person or he i r g in
, hose,
.
reverence o r t he cushion for A n g loho ran

,
kneeling upon .
T0 k neel down ha v i n s o m e t hi n g
with o r hanging do vg n l
M a g lo ho d
.
.
Thing held during kneeling A n g y lo ho d .
To fall o n one s knees ’

M a g p a tilo ho d . .
Cause Yp a g p a t i loho d
b w
. .
Pl ace or p ers o n e f o re ho m
, Pagp atilohoran . .
MO DI FI CA TI VE V E R BA L PA R TI CL E Ma gp a ti zPa gp a ti . 285
CO NJ U G A TI O N .
A CTI V E .
To fal l on one s knees

’
. M a g p a ti lohod .
F all, -
est ,
-
s on knees . N a g p a p a tilo hod .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi ni te t e ns es .
F ell , -
est ; have hast has fallen on , ,
. knees . N a gp a ti lohod .
P lu p e rf e c t t e ns e.
Had de t fallen on
,
-
. knees . N a ca p a g p a ti lohod , n a g p a ti lo ho d na .
Fu t u r e i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e .
Shall , lt, -
will ,
-
lt fall on . kn ees . M a g p a p a ti loli od .
Fu t u r e p e rf e c t t e ns e .
Sh a ll .
lt ’ w ill ,
0
"have fallen on
M a ca p a g p a ti lo ho d, m a g p a p a ti lo ho d
’
na .
knees .
Fall , let . fall on . knees . M a g p a ti lohod .
V e rb a l .
The action of falling on . knees . A n g p a g p a g p a tiloho d .
Y P A SS I V E .
I nfi n i ti v e .
To f a ll on one s knees on account of Yca p a g p a ti lohod

’
. .
Pre s e nt i n d e fi ni t e t e n s e .
F all , -
es t, -
s on . knees o n acc ount o f . Yq ui n a p a g p a p a ti lohod .
Pr e s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e f i n i t e t e n s es .
F ell , -
est ; have hast has falle n , , o n accou nt of Yq u i n ap a g pa ti lo hod . .
Had d s t fallen on -
knees on
N a y p a g p a t i lo ho d , y q u i na p a g pa t ilohod na
, .
a c co un t of
.
Th e TA GA LoG L A NGUAGE
"
986 . .
F u t u re i nd e fi ni te t e n s e.
Shall , lt , -
w ill ,
-
lt f all on . knees on account of . Yca p a g p a p a ti loh o d .
Fu tu re p e rf e ct te ns e .
Shall ,
-
It w ill h ave fallen
,
-
1t
M a y p a g p a ti lo ho d , y ca p a gp a p a ti lo hod na
knees on ac count of
.
on .
I mp e r ati v e .
F all , let . fall on . knees on account of . Yca p a g p a tiloho d .
V e rb a l .
The action of fal ling on . .

‘
knees o n account of . A n g y ca p a g p a ti lohod .
'
A N P A SS I V E .
I nfi nit i v e .
To fall on one s knees at , or

'
b efore . Pa g p a ti lohoran .
Pr e s ent i nd e fi n i t e te ns e .
‘
Fall , -
s t, -
s on knees at or efore ,
b . Pi n a g p a p a tilohoré n .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi ni t e te ns e s .
F ell , -
est ; have hast has fallen on , , . knees at o r efore ,
b . Pi n a g p a tiloho ran .
Had -
ds t fallen on knees at or N a p ag p a t i lohoran , p i n a g p a t i lo h o r an
b fore
, .
,
e . na .
Fu t u re i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e .
Shall , lt, -
will ,
-
lt fall on . knees at o r efore , b . Pa g p a p a ti lohoran .
Shall , -
lt, w ill have fallen -
It '
M a p a gp a ti lohoran , p agp a p a ti lohoran

b
,
on knees at or efore , . na .
Fa ll let , . fall on . knees at or efore ,

b . Pa gp a tilohoran .
V e rb a l .
The actio n of f a lling on . knees at or efore ,

b . A n g p a g p a t i lo ho ran .
The d
tu ent shoul conj ugate in the active an in the p assiv e
s d d
w b
,
in the s a me ma n ne r a s magp a ti lohod t he f ol lo i ng v er s ,

Tm; TA GA L O G L A N GUA GE .
Up ard sw .
Dacong i taa s .
Daco n g ibab a .
E astw a rd s .
Daco n g s i la nga n a n .
Westwards ca lu n u ra n
b
.
.
On U p on Sa i b a ao
b
.
.
,
A ove o ver ,
Sa it aas .
U nder underneath ,
. Sa i lali m .
P a r t i c le s a n d w o rd s o f f e r i ng p e c u li a r f e a t u r e s .
Si ld is the well known thi rd person pronoun i n the plural .
,
w
They al ays they are gi ven ,
. Sil a nang sil a ang b i ni b i g u i an .
and s i ld p o m a y be used i n add r

Si ld essing a si ngle perso n
and b y so doing the ut m ost degree of respect is expressed .
You thou ( si m plest sense )

,
. . I c ao , ca .
You ( sing
, )( poli te ) . I c ao p o , cay o cay o p o ,
.
You thou ( Your E xcellency You r

S1la la p 0
' ' '
,
.
,
SI
M aj es ty Your Highness )
‘
.
,
Thi s ,
however ,
does not exclude the address with the proper
Your E xcellency . I y o, or , i ny o pong ca m a ha la n .
Si ld i s m ade verb i n the m anner already explained for the

o ther personal pronouns .
The child say s gi ld . N a p a p a s i la an g bata .
“
Si ld , as a verb ,
m ea ns : to eat m eat o r fish .
The servant i s e a t i n g m eat or

N a g SI Sl a ang al i la
fis h
.
z'
S ld , ( note th e accentuation ) i s the Sanskri t word s i la found

J
,
also in M alay , avanese and Battak where i t has th e sa m e m eaning ,
as i n Tag a l og , that i s to say , to si t cross legged

“
,
-
.
M oros sit cross legged when at -

A n g m an a g m oros ay na gs i s i la s a
church . si m bahan .
Si yd as an i ntensive ha s been treated i n the p roper place ( 1)

, , .
Si g/( t i s the well kn own third person pron oun i n the si n gular but ,
i t m a y also stan d for the second person being then a kind of ,
polite and res pectful address .
You r m ercy . Siy a p o .
( 1) Se e Te n t h L es s o n.
M O D I FI CA TI V E VERB A L P A R TI CL E M a gp a ti : Pa gp a ti . 2 89
S ig n note
(“ the accen tuation ) i f m ade verb w ith p a, m eans :
b
, , ,
" " ’
to assent ,
to a ide by other s opinion .
He assents . N ap a s i s i y a .
H o u a g m o yp a S1y a
0
Do not agree to that do not assent to ,

. .
with m a g ca
Si g/ d ,
m eans : “
to suit ,
’
to b eco m e , and also
to be enough sufficient ,
.
That d ress suits h er I y ang da m i t n a g c a ca s iy a

caniy a
s a .
That stick i s not eno u gh for a Hindi n a g ca ca s i y a iy ang c aboy s a
pillar . is ang h a ligue .
”
Wi th u m, s i yd m eans : “
to fi ll up the whole roo m ,
“
to go
on growing .
H I S sore fill i ng up m flesh ( ls N a n i n i y az s

is
u n gm i s i y a n a a ng ca n i y an g
.
healing) s ugat
A dju tm g re e m e nt, t
.
s en t, ~
a Slu
Ca s i y a han ( no tice t he accen tuation ) .
ableness
.
E nough average co m m o n , o rd i n a ry
, ,
Casi 3ah an r
thing .
'
Si y a m a y be used as an adverb o r i nterj ectio n .
So j ust so j ust i t
, , .
Bravo !
is m ost frequen tly the M alay s i y a zs i a

Si y d vain , useless r
,
“ ” “
,
’
idle ; used i n Ta galog i n the sa m e m eaning a nd i n others which

include association with so m e othe r particle .
E nough ! Siy a n a
g
.
It i s he hi m self ! It i s ju s t tha t j ust it Siy a n a

b
. .
,
A lthough he e . Siy a m a n .
Would to G o d a m e n ha pp i n e 8 8
} Si ya naua
,
to you
.
I t i s he then Siy a pal a

‘
Si ma t
'
Sci ca t, as a n oun m ean s : m easu re that i s to say any con, , ,
t ri v a n ce p roper to ascertai n length A s a verb i t has the followi n g .

,
s i g n i fi ca ti o n s .
To m easure .
( si m ple sense ) Su m uc a t m a n uca t , .
To m easure a great deal . M a g s u ca t ( n ote t he . accentuation ) .
The m eaning of pattern sta n d ard of, s ale u t i s applied i n various

ways : I t is u sed in a poten tial sense as m a ng g a r i , ma ca .
She c a n work . s uc a t siy ang g u m a u a .
They m a y be given i t . Sucat sil ang bigui an .

'
But i f the sen se i s a passive one or the action oes not ad m it ,

d
of potentiality i t then m eans : “
duty o r m oral obligation
, the s a m e ,
as d ap a t .
You deserve to be puni shed s uca t cang ha m p a s i n

’
. .
He is worthy to be appoi nted captain . Sli e s t siy ang m a g u i n g ca p i tan .
I t is beneath thei r no bleness . Dili s ucat s a ca n i lan g ca m a ha la n .
S zt
’
t ca m m eans
the sa m e as s i y et n a
7 enough Sti ca t n a
’
,
“
.
,
followed by an infinitive for m s ex p ressions si m ilar to those for m ed

i n L atin wi th the gerund i n di s
It is ti m e to eat . te mp u s e d e n di ) . Sli c a t nang cu m a i n .
t r go out . a be u n d t ) lu m a b as .
study . s tu d e n di ) . m ag aral .
walk . a mbu la n d i ) . lu m aca d .
sleep d o r mi en di ) . m a tolo g .
F OR TY SE V E N TH E XE R CI SE
-
.
Where di d she fall on her knees? She fell o n her knees

b efore the A rchbishop Di d yo u not p rostrate yourself efo re the
. b
i m age of th e Holy Vi rgin ? I prostrated m yself b efo re the alta r .
What caused you r grandfather to throw hi m self down ? Terror a n d

weakness caused hi m to th row hi m self down What are the chi ld .
(
ren doing? They are always sitting down and ris ing u p Why did .
the sailor spring i nto the water? He did not spring i nto the wate r ,
the m ast tu m bled suddenly down and he fell downwards Di d the .
wi nd fell the tree ? I t was not the wind it was a thunder ,
bolt that felled it Why does h e call out for the m constantly ?
. .
He ha s n o others to call o ut for What are the d og an d the .
cat eating? The dog eats m eat the cat i s eating fi s h Does m oney , ,
.
suffice to secure h appiness ? M on ey does not suffice to se cu re

happiness ? Did he d rin k too m uch ? He dran k o nly i n t he
ordinary Wa y Shall I go o n speaking ?
. E nough ! do not speak any
m ore abou t that Was it he who said it?. He hi m self sai d i t Do .
you fear hi m ? A lthough he i s the leader I do n ot fear hi m Did .
your m easure t he stuff I sent you ? I did not m easure i t the Chi ,
n ese m erch ant did i t Di d you yourself take th e m easu re fo r the

.
trousers ? I took the m easure m y s e f Ca n he pay ? He cannot .
pay Why do yo u not go on worki ng? I t i s already ti m e to sleep

w b
. .
U nti l hen wi ll M ary be in town ? She will e here until to m orrow -

.
H o w f a r will you acco m pany hi m ? I will acco m pany hi m as far

as t he r iver Wh ere does this river flo w toward s ?
. Thi s ri ver flows
t owards t he N orth Where i s the shi p bou n d for ? . She stee rs to
ward s the N orth Where did you put the pi n ?. I put it on the
t able I s your sister above ?
. She i s below .
THE TA GA L O G L AN GUA GE .
V e rb a l .
The state of re m ai ning etc . A n g p a g ca p a p a n gi s i .
Y PA SS I V E .
w
To re m ai n sho ing one s teeth out of terror o n accou nt of
’
. Yp a g c a p a ngi s i .
P re s e nt i nd e fi n i t e t e ns e .
R e m ain , -
est ,
-
s ,
etc on accou nt of
. . Yp i na g ca p a p a n gi s i .
P r e s e nt p e r f e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi ni te t e ns e s .
R e m ained , de t ; -
have hast has re m ained etc on a ccount of Yp i na g ca p a n gi s l
, ,
. . .
H
a?
ds t re m ained etc on account
}
-
N a y p a g ca p a ngi s l. y p i “3 808 1“a i 81

.
na .
Fu t u re i nd e fi ni t e t e ns e .
Shall , lt, -
will ,
-
lt re m ain etc on account of . . Yp a g ca p a p a n gi s l .
F u tu re p e rf e c t t e ns e .
Shall will lt have re m ai ned etc

lt
l
- -
M a yp a g ca p a n gi s i y p a g ca p a p a ngi s i na
, , , .
on account of .
, .
V e rb a l .
The state of re m ai ning etc on account of . . A n g yp a g ca p a n gi s l .
AN PA S S I V E .
To re m ain showing one s teeth out of terror in or at

’
Pa g ca p a n gi s i ha n
'
. .
,
Pre s e nt i nd e f i ni te t e ns e .
R e m ain , -
est ,
-
s , etc in or at
.
, . Pi n a g ca p a p a n gi s i ha n .
Pre s e nt p e rf e c t and p a s t i n d e fi ni t e t e ns e s .
R e m ained ,
-
de t, ha v e , has t ,
ha s re m ained etc i n or at .
,
. Pi n a g ca p a n gi s i han .
Had ,
-
de t re m ained etc i n or at .
,
. N a p a g ca p a n gi s i ha n , p i n a g ca p an gi s i ha n na .
Future i nd e fi n i t e t e n s e .
Shall , -lt, wi ll ,
-
lt, re mai n etc in or at ” Pa g cap ap a ngi s i ha n
.
,
M O D I FI CA TI V E V E R BA L PA R TI CLE M a g é ap a: Pa gcap a . 2 93
F u tu re p e rf e c t t e n s e .
Sh l ll’ ll lt have re m ai ned

et i Zi at
t,
M a p a g ca p a n gi s i ha n p a g ca p a p a n gi s i ha n na
ca ] l , ,
V e rb a l .
The state of r e m a i n i n g e tc v
. i n or at
,
. A u g p a g ca p a n gi s i ha n .
the sa m e m anner as ngi s i the following roots should be co n

I n ,
j ugated i n the ac tive and i n th e passive with ma g cap a by t he student .
Op e n i g the eyes To r e m a i n
f
W i tlp
o D i la t m ulat M a g ca p a di la t m a g ca p a
.
,
,
o ne s ope n c utto f pan ic
.
,
eyle
,
m ulat ; y p a g c a p a di la t y p a g c a p a m u
t 1 1a m so esca u s e O f c re m a m
,
? :3 lat ; p a g ca p a d i la ta n p a g ca p a m u la ta n
’
.
,
s )
Opening of the m outh To re m ai n .
N g an ga M g a ca p a n gan ga yp a g ca p a
n g an g a p g
’
wi th one s m outh op en to re m ain a n g a ha n
.
g
,
a ca p a n .
so o n account of to re m ai n so at , .
,
Pla c m g Of the legs W l d e apart To

B i s a cla t M a g ca p a b i s a c la t y p a g ca p a
.
re m a i n W i th one s legs W l d e apart ,

.
.
,
b i s a c la t p a g ca p a b i s a c la ta n
to re m a i n i n s uch a posture on
.
,
acc ount of to re m ai n so at , .
P a r t i c le s a nd w o rd s o f f e r i ng p e c u li a r f e a t u re s .
Ta bi ,
as a nou n m eans : ,
“
b o rd er ,
" “
b ank ,
“
shore ,
” “
extre m ity .
’
The ri ver bank . A ng b

ta i nan g f lo g .
The sea s hore -

. A ng tab l nang d agat .
As a ver b or ver al noun b , ta bi has the follo ing w s i g ni fi c a ti o n s :
b
To e on the border M ata i b
b
.
To go a out bordering . M a p a ta b l .
To place oneself a t the border e d ge '

l u m a bl
'
. .
,
L e t hi m not place hi m self at the edge . H o u a g siy ang tu m a b i .
P lace that a t the extre m ity . Yta bl m o iy an .
P lace you rself at the very edge . Pa t a ta bi ca .
The extre mi ty , the fore m ost poi nt

A ng c a ta b i ha n
.
of so m ething .
bb i sh
.
Dunghill a heap of ru , . Ta b i ha n .
Ta b zi s
‘
the Sanskri t
to excuse ; which has passed x a n ta v y a ,
into M alay as Jav a nese and Sundanese as tu be; i nto M a
, ta be k; i nto ,
ca ssar as ta bey a ; and i s largely used i n Tagalog as a polite warni ng

,
for so m ebody to get out of the way when p ersons gene rally i nferiors
w
, ,
ant roo m for the m to pass on by o r through , .
By your leave Ta i p ob
b
. . .
Pl e a se m ake roo m for m e to pass

, .
( Ta i ! a co 1 dar s an , , .
Ta g d ,
as already said ,
denotes n ativity , pertai ning to t he place
of birth .
0
Where are you fro m ? what country 2 T a a s aa n ca?

are you fro m? ( g
I a m a To n do m a n Taga Tondo a co
. .
Ta g d , as a noun m eans also : “

fi s hing h ook o f any si e z bi na i t
b eing
-
, ,
a s m all o ne .
Bait your b ook . Painan m o ang i y on g ta ga .
Ta g ct ,
’
as a verb ,
m eans : “
to he w
’
i n a longi tudin a l w ay .
To hew downwards .
To hew a great deal

b
.
To go a out hewing .
"
Tu ma g d m ean s a ls o to lay hol d of “
to us e so m e holdfast thi ng ’
, ,
as t he anchor .
The anchor lai d hold on land . Tu ng m a g a s a lupa ang sinipit

M etaphorically it may be s aid :
d
His wor s pierce deeply i nto my Tu ng ma ta g a m an i n d s a l oo b co a ng
heart . ca n i y an g uica .
Ta g a as a prefixed particle for m ing frequentative noun s w ill b e

be d
, ,
di scusse i n the proper place .
Ta la g d is
like 6001 either a telling o r an attributive word , de
b b
~
, , ,
noting an idea of bias predesti nation fi tness etc ette r to e kno w n

b
.
, , , ,
y the followin g exa m ples .
N aturally i n a natural i nnate ay

, ,
w . Talag a .
The le m on i s i ntrinsically sour . Talag ang m aasi m ang d ayap ,

.
Thi s m isfortune was foredoo m ed Talag a nang Dios s a aqui n itong a q u i n g

for m e by Go d c a hi ra p a n
b
.
To keep so m ething to e devoted to . M a g ta la g a .
I keep this candle to be offered to Pi n a g ta ta la g a ha n co ang ca s a n to s a n

the M ost Holy Virgin Vi rgen n i tong candi la
b
. .
He has been orn a thief Ta lag ang siy a, i , m a g n a n aca o

b
. .
To yield to to e res olved Tu m a la g a

w
.
, .
I yield to whatever your ill m a y Tu n g ma ta la ga a co s a a n o m an y c otos -
be m o s a aqui n .
He is resolved to do that . Tu ng m a tala g a siy a g a o i n g iy an .
Ta mbi ng .
Ta mbi ng as an a ver ,
d b of ti m e ,
m eans : “
i mm ediat e ly ,
” “
f o I thw i th .
Do i t i mme d i a tely . b
Ta m in g mon g g a oi n .
F OR TY E I G H TH —
E X E R CI SE .
Who m i s that chi ld g ri m acing with hi s teeth at? H e m akes

gestures at that old m a n W hy does he m ake gri m aces ? H e m akes
.
gri m aces because of his drunken n ess Had he already re m ai ned grin ding hi s
.
teeth wh en you went ho m e ? Yes he had Why d id he re m ai n ,

.
grin ding hi s teeth ? I t was on account of fright that he re m ai ned ,
grinding hi s t eeth Wh ere d i d he re m ain chattering hi s teeth i n con

.
v u ls i o n ? He re m ained gri ndi n g hi s teeth on t he ground of the church .
Why did your sister re m ai n wi th he r eyes open ? She re m ained with

he r eyes o p en at the news of her m other s death
’
Why i s that .
m an s m outh kept open ?

’
He re m ained with his m outh o pen on
account of a fit .Di d the thief re m ai n with hi s legs wide apart on
leaping over the fence ? He re m ained wi th h is legs wide apart when
he leaped over the fence Does th e fisher walk along the river
.
bank ? He wa lks along the ri ver bank to catch fish Why do you .
place yourself at the border of the sea? I t i s to see the ships Do

b
.
y o u not re m e m er th at your father sai d to you do not place yourself at ,
t he very edge? Well I re m e m ber that Where did Sain t Job pass the
z
.
,
greater part of hi s life ? On a d u n ghill Why di d you not say ta b ‘
b
.
on your passing on ? I said : Si r y you r leave ! What i s you r ,
country ? M y country i s N orth A m erica To who m do you dedicate that .
flower? I dedicate i t to m y sweetheart Di d you bai t your fi s hi n g .
hook ? I t has been baited with wor m s What are you doing ? I a m .
hewing this log lengthwise What i s t he A m eri cans i nnate disposition ?

.
’
They are in dustrious by te m pera ment but n atives o n t he contrary

h ave a bias for la z
, , ,
iness A re you resolved to keep the co m m and m ents

.
of Go d? I a m resolved thereto Who betrayed Jesus ? One o f Hi s

What produces that bla z
.
d i sci ples betra yed H i m . e ? I t i s a wood

which i s i n fla m es Was P eter saved ? Yes were i t not fo r m e he
.
, ,
would have perished Wh at do you a d m i re ? I ad m i re the great

w
.
orks of Go d .
F O R TYL N I N TH L E S SO N .
YC A A P A T N A P O U O , T, S I YA M NA PA G A R A L .
M O D I F I CA TI V E V E R B A L P A R TI C L E M A G CA N r -
PA G OA N .
z
M a g cc m p a g ca n i s the last Ta galog verbal particle here considered ,
although p erhaps so m e others o f a n arrow local range m a y be i n use

b
.
This particle i s for roots of hu m ors secreted by the hu m an ody

what ma g ca p a i s for those of bodily m otions Si m ilarly with the .
latter , i t for m s verbs indicative of the u nconscious or uncontrollable

flowing o r secreting of th e hu m or indicated by the root to which i t is
applied :
The sa m e a s i n ma g cap a i n m a g ca n verbs the i m perative and
'
,
the i n passive are wanti ng .
I n o rder to give a fre e play to m a g ca n an d a t the sa m e ti m e

to avoi d the con f usion which would result between ma g oa n and ma g ca -
M O DI F I CA TI V E V E R B A L PA R TI CLE M a g ca n=Pa g ca n . 2 97
‘
v b
er s i f ca the fi rst t wo letters of the last syllable ca n were taken
, ,
for reduplication both ca and th e first syllab le of the root are repeated ;
,
the latter i n all and ca n i n the present and i n the future ten s e s
,
of the conj ug a ti on as seen hereafter ,
V e rb a l c o mp o u nd s .
To weep . L u m o ha .
To shed tears . M a g lo ha .
The cause . A n g y lo ha = y q u i n a lo ha .
Perso n over who m tears are shed . L i n o ha a n q u i n a lo lo ha a n

,
.
J
A CTI V E .
To shed te a rs u n co n c i o u s ly . M a g ca n lu lu ha .
Pre s e nt in d e fi n i t e t e ns e .
Shed , -
s t, -
s tears etc N a g ca ca n lu lu ha .
P re s e nt p e rf e c t a nd p a s t i nd e fi ni te t e ns e s .
Shed , -
est; have ,
hast , has shed tears etc . . N a g ca n lu lu ha .
Had l ds t shed tears '

c c N a ca p a g ca n lu lu ha , n a g ca n lu lu ha na
, .
Fu t u re i nd e f i n i t e te ns e .
Shall ,
-
lt , will ,
-
I t s hed te a rs etc M a g ca ca n lu lu ha .
Shall , I t -
will ,
-
It ha ve shed tears etc . M a c a p a g ca n lu lu ha , m a g ca ca n lu lu ha na .
V e rb a l .
The action of shedding tears etc . . A n g p a g ca c a n lu lu ha .
Y P A SS I V E .
To shed te a r s u ncons ciously on account of . Yp a g ca n lu lu ha .
Pre s e nt i nd e fi n i t e te ns e .
Shed , —
est -
s tears etc on accoun t of . . Yp i n a g c a n lu lu ha .
2 98 THE TA GA L O G
Pr e s e nt p e rf e ct a nd p a s t i nd e fi ni t e t e ns es .
She d ,
-
ds t; have , hast , has shed tears etc o n account of . . a n lu lu h
Yp i na gC a .
P lu p e r f e c t t e ns e.
H ds l d
i };
t '
she tears etc on account
N a y p a g ca n lu lu ha , y p i n a g ca nlu lu ha
.
na .
Fu tu re i nd e f i ni t e t e ns e .
Shall , lt, -
w ill ,
-
It d
she tears etc o n accou n t o f . Yp a g ca ca n lu lu ha .
Shall , lt , -
will I t have she tears l
,
-
d
M a y p a g ca n lu lu ha y p a g ca ca nlu lu ha n a
e tc on . accoun t of t .
, . .
V e rb a l .
The action of she dd ing tears etc . on account of A n g y p a g ca nlu lu ha .
AN P A S SI V E .
To s he d t ars etc
e . at or over
, . Pa g ca n lu lu ha a n .
P re s e nt i n de fi n i t e te ns e .
Shed , st ,
-
s tears etc at or ov er .
,
. Pi n a g ca c a nlu lu ha a n .
Pr e s e nt p e r f e ct a nd p a s t i nd e f i n i te t e ns e s .
Shed , d e t; -
have hast has s hed te a rs etc at o r ove r
, ,
.
, . Pi n a g ca n lu lu ha a n .
N a p a g ca n lu lu ha a n , p i n a g ca n lu lu haa n
Had ,
-
d et shed tea rs etc at or over .
,
.
na
Shall , lt -
. will ,
-
It shed tears etc at o r ove r .
,
. Pa g ca ca nlu lu ha a n .
Fu t u re p e rf e c t t e ns e.
Shall will I t have shed

-
lt , -
;
,
M a p a g ca n lu i u ha a n p a g ca ca n lu lu ha a n na
te ars etc at o r over
.
,
. .
,
V e rb a l .
The action of s he ddi n g te a rs etc at, o r over ‘

. . A n g p a g c a n lu lu ha a n .
l THE TA GA L O G L A N GU A GE .
Tap a tas a verb has several m eanings d

accor ing to the par
w
, , ,
,
ti cle ith which it is a ssoci ated

, ,
.
To place i n front of To place one .
M agtapat Tu m a p a t .
self i n front o f
.
d
.
Two thing s place opposite each

’
Pi n a g ta p a t
other
,
M ore than two things placed in front

Pi n a g ta p a t ta p a ti n
o f each o ther
.
To go directly to to go th e shortest
é
M agtapat
,
w a y to act rightfully
.
.
.
Cu t b y w hi ch a road or path i s
'
Ta p a ta n
,
shortened
.
To lie ( two thi ng s o pp o s i te one

M a ta p at , n a g ta ta =n a ca ta ta p a t
.
t
.
p a
anothe r)
.
To belong to to be i ncu m bent on M a ta p a t

g a pare
. .
,
Sa m an l am an g n a ta ta p a t a n g
M ass i s only i ncu m ben t on p riests .
) m isa .
Ti la is as di u a ca s t an d o ther expressions a kind of i m per

b
, , ,
“ ” “ ”
sonal ver m eaning : i t see m s ; i t ap pears .
It see m s to e a person b . Tila tau o .
It a ppea rs that he went there Tila na

p a roo n .
Ti la
as a verb i s conj ugated by u m ma y p a o r
, , , pa and m ean s :
” ” “
to cease raining to wa i t t i ll ra i n 1s ove r , .
R ain i s su si d ing b . Tu n g m i tila .
L e t us wait unti l rain i s over . Ta t ila i n n ating m ona ang ulan .
”
Tolé y , as a n adverb ,
m eans : as well as ,
“
at the sa m e ti m e ,
jo u fly ,
“ ” “
con join tly .
G ive m y son thi s and fetch m y Yb i g ay m o i to s a anac c o, to loy a c o, i ,
b
ook on the way .
y co h a nang a q u i n g libro
mo .
L e t hi m se ll the bushel o f ri ce along Y p a g b i lf n iy a ang cab an n a big as

w
ith the bag ( cover) . t o loy nang bayong .
To lé y i n t he past ten se of the passive , still retain s i ts

, a dverbial
“ ”
sense m eaning w hol ly ,
,
“
co m pletely o r the p erfecti ve sense , i m parted
to so m e E nglish ver b s by th e parti cle u p
“
.
’
It was killed at once co m pletely ,

. Pi n a tay di n t i no loy .
I m ade it u p Y i n a ri cong t i n o loy

b
.
,
I ou ght up h is pled ge . Ti u oloy cong tu bu s i n a n g s a nla ni ya .

MO DI FI CA TI VE V E R B A L PA RTI CL E M a g ca ni Pa g aa n -
. 301
Té loy thus accente ,

d ,
is m ade a v er b with various s i g n i fi ca ti o n s .
To m ake u p to conclude ,
. Tu molo y m a g toloy ,
.
To go o n with to go f u rther to
proceed .
, ,
lY M a g to loy .
( note the accentuatio
an g parus s
n ) .
G o o n with punish ing .

p a to loy .
To lodge at t o take shelter i n ,

. Tu m o loy .
( note the acc ) .
To a fi o r d shelter i n . M a g p a to loy .
I n n lodging house To lo y a n
b ang b ayan
.
, ,
He affords shelter to strangers . N a g p a p a toloy siy a s a taga i .

.
Tong col .
To ng col is ,
like Cool and ta la g a a ord havi ng an attri uti ve i m port w b
d
.
,
"
U se as a noun i t m eans : propriety “
adequateness , .
To who m d oes
thi s correspo nd ? gSi no n g m a y t u n g co ! n ito?
It corresponds to m e ‘
N a to to n g co l s a aquin
b
. .
Duty o ligation authority office Ca to n g c o la n

d
, , , . .
Thi s is m y uty . Ca to n g co la n co i to .
Us e of tang cal as a verb .
To
geghi g
s t l ‘l to each party what I s
M a gt o n g col m a g p a to ng co l
d t
.
,
.
Go ddesigned this for m e . A c c i , p i n a to to ng cola n

,
n ang Dios nit o .
To appo rtion one s task to take

’
one s part of the task .

,
l Tu m o n g co l
Tong col m a y b e used as a n a d v erb in the sense of g an a ng ,

g a n dn 8a .
As fo r m e . To ng co l s a aqu in .
F OR TY N I N TH E X E R CI SE -
.
Why do you not m ind that ba y weepi ng over there ? I do not b

m ind h i m fo r babies we ep wi thout being c o n s c l o u s the reof
, Why .
does tha t girl sho w tears i n her eyes ?

.
J
I t i s o n acount of illness
that she sheds tears u nconsciously Does the curate of you r pari sh .
preach well ? H e p reach e s eff ectively and he sheds tears ( unconsciously )

when at the pulpit H o w i s your husband ? M y husband i s aggravated
i n hi s co mplai nt he suffers fro m inco ntinence of uri ne an d h e bleeds
.
u nconsciously he covers hi m self with perspiratio n a nd slavers ; so m e

,
ti m es he swoons away a n d bursts out i nto laughter Di d the m aid

b
.
lush ? She blushed at the s ight of he r lover Why i s there so .
m uch fruit strewn on the ground ? Because it i s too ripe and drops
off fro m the trees Do the children ro m p ? They are overj oye d
with their toys What do you laugh at? L aughter tickles all over
.
me Why did yo u not shun h i m ? He placed hi m self right i n front

w d d
.
o f me Ho a re
. t he trees i n your gar en arrang e ? Th e y a re '
302 THE TA GA LO G LA N GUA GE .
placed o pposite eac h other Did you go the shortest wa y to M a ri

.
quina ? I left the high road and ventured o n the cross path Is -
.
not that sai l o n the sea white ? I t see m s to be yello w Does i t .
not appear to be a stea m er? N o i t see m s to be a s a i li n g vessel ,

.
A re you going out at once ? N o I sha ll wait u ntil rain i s over , .
Where does you r brother lodge ? He lo d ges at m y house What .
i s your office ? M y office i s that of a j udge What office does he fill ? .
His offi ce i s that a collecto r Di d yo u distribute the salary to the

.
j ourney m en ? I did Do you wish m e to acco m pany you ?

. No I ,
will go alone I s hi s m aster cruel o r m er ciful ?

. H e i s m eek a n d
m erciful A re you fon d of riding ?
. I a m n ot fon d of riding .
F I FTI E TH L E S SO N . YC A L I M A N G P O U O N G P A G A R A L .
TH E G E R U N D .
The
gerund i n E nglish i s a verbal nou n preservin g the sa m e
b
govern m ent as the ver fro m which it i s derived as in : I like eati n g “
,
apples . The ter m in ation “

i ng of the E nglish verbs i s out s ide t he ,
above m entioned case parsed properly o r i m p roperly a s verbal n oun

’
, , , ,
present or predicative participle participi al adj ective etc according

b
.
, , ,
to its eing used in one way or the other I t is also a p eculiarity .
o f the E nglish lang u age to u se the g erund i nstead of the infinitive ‘

,
which m ost other languages req u ire after so m e p reposition either ex ,

“ " “
pressed o r understood a s i n : after playing ,
he continues gro wi ng ,
”
up . I n othe r languages the gerun d is that for m of the verb which
e xpresses the actio n adverbially as for i nsta nce i n the following , ,
“
express i ons : I read standing
“
( while standing ) he learn s by
,
teaching ,
( while teaching ) A s i n Tagalog

. there exists no special for m for the
E nglish verbal derivatives ending i n i ng all of the m will be i n
cluded i n the explanation s hereafter .
The present partici ple as stated in a f oregoing chapter i s ex , ,
pressed by the active form of the verb preceded b y the article and ,
adapts i tself to every ( tense m ood etc ad m itting too of declen sion like
, , .
,
the sa m e part of speech i n C re e k .
The lovi ng girl ( m aid ) . . A ng s u ng m i s i n tang dalag a .
Of the obeying child . N a ng s u ngm u s ono d na bata .
To fo r the working m a n ( to the

Sa gu n g m a g a u an g tau t)
,
m a n who i s working )
.
I gave a dollar fo r the fi ghting ( he Y b i n i g ay

co s a n a q u i p a gb a ca ng sun
who fought)soldier . dalo ang piso .
I Wil l buy a book for the studying Ybi b i li co ang m a g a ara l n a a la g a d

pupi l ( he who will study )
. . n an g is ang libro .
When the ter m ination ing for m s a verbal noun “

,
the lat ter
i s expressed by the Tagalog verbal nou n .
R eading is very a m usi ng . A n g p a g b a s a, i n a g b i b i g ay aliu , .
A n g p a ng a n gara l na m a b u tl= m a 1g u 1
P reaching well i s very difficul t 1
l a y m a li u a g na toto o
.
z
.
E at i ng too m uch is dangerous

, . A n g p i g ca cai j , n a ca p a nga nga u i b .
304 THE TA G A L CG L A N GUA GE .
But if con ition is i m plie d d the i n fi itive prece d ed b y is used

,
n ca n .
He wil l arrange the m atter b y M g h hu y siya nang b agay cun b

a u s a a
paying the debt . yaran n iy a ang otang .
M ary singing he refuses to play y N a n a y ao siy ang t u m o g to g cun m a g

canta ( Sp ca nta r )s i M aria
.
,
. .
an idea o f ti m e i s pro m in ent i n the expression

If , ca n before
the present tense i s used .
Old people speaking children Cu n ang m a ta ta nda d apat

n a g s a s a li ta
g
, ,
should be silent . t u m a hi m i c ang m an a bata .
The se rm on co m m encing I will go , Cu n n a g p a p a s i m u la ang p a n gara l a y ,
away . a a lts a co .
The idea of the past wi th the gerun d i s generally ex

p resse d b y the past t e n se p receded by n a ny .
J N a n g siy a i na m at ay na d u ng ma ti n g
He dying the doctor arrived , , ,
, .
I ang m é dico .
They sailing their m other went N ang n a g la la y a g na sil a i n oui ang

b ack
, , ,
. ca n i lan g i n a .
The E nglish gerund co m ing

after so m e preposition o r adverb
and replacing the infiniti ve is translated i n several ways according to
b
,
the sen se i m par t ed to the action y the adverb o r p reposition .
“
On with the gerund deno ting s i m ulta neity or conti nuance i s ,
tran slated by p a g prefixed to the root with the possessive case of ,
the agent and the accusative of the obj ect i f any following , , .
fi n i sh i ng “u s work
on my
read .
I hall
S
Pa g ta p u s co n i ton g ga u a ,
a co i b abas h .
ma g
’
On striking twelve o clock we shall Pa g to gto g n ang a [ as d oe s
go to rest . a
p p a hi n ga t ay o .
Oi go i ng upsta i rs he
lf e fi
]
Pa g p a n hi c n ang a ma co i n a holo g siy a
,
.
, ,
On his preaching rain ca m e down , . Pa g p a ngara l niy a , n a g m u la ang ol an .
th e acti o n i s past and co m plete p a g ca an d so m eti m es also ca p a g ca i h

If , ,
stead of p a y i s prefixed to the root or verbal for m with the sa m e con struction
, ,
.
A fterhaving finished m y breakfast Pa g c a ta p u s nang a q u i ng p a m aha o ,
I shall go to church . m a g s i s rm b a a c o .
On havi ng p ai d fo r the shoes I Ca p a g ca b ay a d co nang sapin bun g

b
, ,
bought a ed . m il l a co nang i s ang hi hi g a a n .
"
A fter with the gerund i s translated by p a g ca prefixed to the
infinitive .
A fter d ining . P a g ca p a n a nha li .
A fter s a ying this b e e m braced his

,
Pa g c a s a b l niy a nit o y u ng m aca p ,
siy a
uncle s a c a n i an g a m ai n
.
y .
The m ass over t he pri est t o ok I

,
Pa g c a m l s a na nags mo la te ang pare
chocolate
.
,
.
TnE G E RU N D .
If other p reposi tion s are used before the gerund th e in finitive ,
or verbal n oun m a y be used i n Tagalog with the proper particle p reced ing .
I n m aking use of gunpowder great Sa pag ga m i t nang

-
p olv or a ( Sp ) i , ,
care sh ould be taken ,

. m a g p a p a c a i n ga t a n g tau b .
This ( kin d o f) herb i s good for I t ong ca m a n t i g u l a y m abuti s a a

p g
curi n g toothache . ga m ot s a s a q u i t n ang n gi p i n .
z
To be on the lookout fo r Sn m o b o c
g
. .
It would be better rath er . . M a ha n a .
It
$211E
1
g
e tte r “0 ! to ha v e
a
' be e n
Ms ha n g a, i di
,
n a g u i n g la la q u i .
A n d th anks e given b Sal am a t at

b
.
A n d thanks e given he did n ot fall Sal am at at di siy a n a holo

.
g .
F i ns of fi shes Win g .
\
. Pa li c p i c Pa c p a c . .
F ryi n g pan E arthen cooking pot

. . Canal i Pa la y o c
. .
Bean s P atani
be
. .
A ny th ing to eaten with the

U la m
boiled rice .
.
To b et l
P u m n s ta
ap u e s ta ,
,
m a g p o s ta
“
b et .
’
.
( corr of . Sp . w o rd
P a r t i c le s a nd w o r ds o ff e r i n g p e c u li a r f e a t u r e s .
Tou t
i s an adverb which stands for “
always ,
a nd ha s so m eti m es
“
the co n j unctional sen se of w hen eve r .
A lways ,
con stantly Toning toui to u i n ang toni
b
. .
,
You are co n stantly busy . Ton i ng toui m a y roon ca n g a ala .
Whenever you read so m ething Ton i ng b u m a s a ca n ang a n o m an

siy a i s u m u1a tz
. .
Whenever he writes . To ning ,

s u n m u s ri la t
.
g .
Tou zm
'
ay also be used adj ectively .
E very day every yea r

,
. To ning arao ,
to ning ta on .
” “
I t may also be used as a conj unctio n fo r “
whi le ,
” “
as far
as ,
as long as .
While as far as as lo n g as m anh ood

, , To n ing di m ap a n i ang a
p g c a ta no s a
i s n o t eradicated fro m the worl d . s a n g lib u ta n .
“
Ua la is s om eti m es u sed as a su sta ntive for gul f b “
,
" “
sea ,
mai n , an d m a y also be m ad e ve rb I n thi s signi fi catio n .
Pu t to th e open sea M a ual a c a

’
. .
"
N a li a u a la Si y a na n g can ‘Ya ng n
i
53 1
‘ ‘
.
He ea n r ed hi s rap i n e I n to the sea

rn i n
.
s
Ua lct besides i ts well known negative m port , has v a ri o u s other

’ ’
,
I
s i g n ifi ca t i o n s as a verb .
To flee to pardon to exon erate

, , . M a g n a la .
To disappear M aual a
g
. .
I t i s not possible to flee n o w . H ind i m a c au a n a la n ay on .
I t disappeared fro m m y hands . N a u a la s a ca m ay co .
A bsolutely nothing . U al ang ual a .
I have absolutel everything U al ang di ual a s a aquin

y . .
put i n appearance yes

2U al a siy a c a ha p o n .
F ree m e fro m my debt U a li n m o n a ang otang co s a i y o

ga
. .
N a g p a p a u a la ang Dios n ang m a n

God pardons our Si ns
t c a s a la n a n n a ti n
.
is j oined to m any words for m ing adversati ve o r n egative

Ua la
expressions better to be learned by practice
E ndless , eternal . U al ang hang an .
E asy possible
,
. U a l ang li u a g .
I nnocent bla m eless

,
. U al ang s ala .
Soun d , healthy . U al ang s a q u i t .
”
Ya r i i s one o f the for m s of the de m on strative p ro no un “
this
b
, , ,
”
this here ,
which i s m ore co m m only expresse d y i ta .
This heart of m i ne . Yaring a q u ing puso .
Ya r i
i s used a s a n absolute verb referring to a thing or a
task as do ne o r co m pleted .
F ini shed ! Y a ri n a .
Conclusion . Ca y a ri a n .
What did your business co m e to ? gA n o n g p ga c a c a y a ri n ang os ap n i n y o?
F I F TI E TH E X E R CI SE .
Do you li k e to hear th e singing b irds i n the m orning? I like

to see the si nging birds on the trees an d the fi ghti ng cocks i n th e ,
pit Whose book i s that? It i s that of the learning boy

. Do es t he .
China m an len d any m oney to the ga m bling parties ? He lend s a

hundre d dollars to the ga mbling parti es I s fishing an art? No . ,
fishin g i s a pasti m e but wri ting i s an art I s hunting di fficult i n

, .
the Phi lippines ? I t i s dif fi cul t on account o f th e bus hes but i t i s ,
easy o n account of th e abundance o f ga m e I s yachting dange rous ? .
yachting i s so m eti m e s da ng erous What did y o u find the serva n t

d d w
.
oing? I f ou n hi m s te a li n g m y atch a nd putting on m y shi rt .

305
4 THE TA G A L O G L A N G UA GE .
He r 1119 09 goes to m ass every holy l

Ang c a n i y an g p a m a n g q u i ng b a b aye
i m b a ton i ng arao na ng p i e s ta
n ag s is
day ’
.
( S “
.
corr o f .
p word fi es t a feast
.
)V .
He bows to ( salutes )her B u ng m a b a ti siy a s a caniy a .
The bird i s pecking N a n u n u ca ang ibon .
The leader i s w riti n g . Su ng m u s ula tz n a s u SI i la t ang pono .
This sa m e tense serves fo r the past i ndefi n i te of th e progress ive

conj ugation with so m e adverb denoting past ti m e , or wi thout i t i f
t he epoch i s other w i se expressed o r u nde rstood .
The ch ildren we re yeste rday play N a gla la ro ca ha p on a ng m an a g b ata s a
i n g i n the garden ha la m a n a n
‘
. .
I w a s putting o n m y clothes whe n N a g d a d a m i t a c o nang p u ng m as oc siy a

she entered m y roo m . s a a q u i n g s i li d .
You were runni ng . Tu ng m a ta c b o cay o ca ngi na .
“
The sa me sen s e of conti nuance m ay be exp ressed by the adverb
p a, still .
Stars a re shining . N a g n i n i n g n i ng pa ang m an ga b i t i i t n .
The
past i ndefinite ( not wh en two actions a re co m pared ) and
pres ent perfect te n ses a re exp ressed alike .
Jesus Christ
arose on the third N a b nha y 01! Si Jesucri sto s a y ca t ng
d a y after his dea th . arao nang ca n i y ang p a g ca m a tay .
I have finish ed the wo rk . N a g ta p u s a co nang gau a:
I gave the m yesterday your ooks b .

Y b i n i g ay co s a canil e c a ha p o n
m an ga libro mo .
ang
already stated the m eans a re wan ting i n Tagalog for the

As ,
p roper exp ression o f a p lu p erfect te nse The one wh ic h has be en

b
.
r e sorted to o f p re fi x i n g n a ca to th e ver al roo t o r using n a after

the si m p le past tense i s to be conside red as circu m l ocu to ry and
, ,
used there where t w o past actio ns o ne of which i s anteri or t o the ,
other are co m pared

, .
Ihad already eaten yesterday when N a a c ai n n a a co ca ha p o n nang dung

y o n arrived . m ati ng ca .
The servant ha d already looked P i n a g han a p =h i n an a p na n ang alila

for the cat that d isappeared ang pusang n a u a la n ang n a q u i ta ,
when F ran k found he r ( it) . n i Q u i co y .
The future i nde fi nite i s used i n its proper way for any fu ture
a ction .
A n g A n ac nang Dios a y m a n a n ao g z
The Son of G o d will co m e do w n
babab a oli s a lupa , ho ho co m a n n iy a
again o n E arth to j u dge the liv
a n g n a n ga b u b nha y p a at ang nan a
i ng a n d the dead g
m atay u s
.
But i t sta nds too for the E ngl ish i nfi nitive denoting an i m pendi n g
actio n .
I am
going to s tudy A c o 1, m a g aara l
d
. .
,
The priest is going to rea A n g pare a y b a ba s a .
He i s going to eat . Siya, i , c a c ai n .

US E AND I N TE R CE AN GE o r TE N SE S 309
We are going to go o u t . Ca m i a a li s na .
Yo u a re g oing to write . Cay c i s u s ula t , ,

.
They are going to sleep . M a to t Olo g n a s i 'a .
M y m o the r i s g o i n g to s a y he r praye rs . M a g d a ra s a l s i i n a .
What has been said a ove about the past p erfect a pplies also b
to the future perfect ; i n so far as n a after the si m ple fu ture for m s ,
the perfect .
L o lo to m co n a ang i s d a ayon i y On g
l
s a
I s ha ll
have cooked the fi sh as you ,
a g b l hn s a aqu i n cun ba
z
yglih
l
ordered m e when you co m e back
l
.
,
The house will have b een destroyed Si s i ra i n n a n ang an ay ang b ahay cun
by w h ite an ts when yo u are ready
m a to lOy cang m a m aha y
to tena nt it
.
The i m perative b esides

its p roper u s e as s uch also s er v es for
, ,
the present subj unctive w ith th e p roper conj unction .
If I write . Cu n s u m ula t a co .
A ltho u gh he m a y go there . Pa rOon m a n siy a .
E ndeavor to be v irtuous that you

m a y attai n eternal life . ca m it nang b uhay n a u al ang hangan
i s already k n o w n that the te nses of
It n the s u b j u cti ve m oo d are
exp ressed by the correspo nd i ng o nes of the i ndicative w ith the p roper
pa rticles e i ther p receding o r fo llo w ing .
I sho uld pay fo r i t i f I had any B a b a y a ra n

co sana c u n a co i m ay ca , ,
.
m oney . ro o n a n zy c a b ay a d .
P rovi d ed you do not do i t H o u a g m o la m ang gaol u

w
. .
Would to G o d he ould co m e P u m a ri to nau a siy a

w
. .
Should that be true I ould kill Cu n iy an s a n a i to to o p a p a ta y i n co , .
hi m siy a
b
.
Obey your father lest yo u e pu n

,
Su m On o d ca s e i y b ng a ma m ac a paru ,
i s he d . sahan ca .
The use
one te nse for a nother occu rs very frequently i n
of
Tagalog not on because o f the i n d e fi n i te n e s s wh ich p revail s t h roughou t
b
,
the language but ecause too of the fact th at natives enter tai n d if
, , ,
f e re n t ideas fro m ours as to the use an d scope of tenses .
A review of the m os t frequent changes follows .
i ndefi nite i s so m e ti m es used for the past te nse especially

P resent ,
if the sentence contains a n egative particle

‘
Has the carpenter arrived .

gD u ng m a ti ng na an ; a n lo u a g n e . ?
Hi m
gggp
a d u ng m a ra ti ng ( for dung a
He has not yet arrived .
.
F uture i nde fi ni te m a y be use d:

( )
1 F o r the present i ndefini te .
Does he laugh sti ll? gTa tau a pa siy a? ( fo r tu ng m a tau a )

w
.
I a m going a ay . A c c, i , a a li s .
( for n a n a li s
) .
( )
2 F or the i m perative .
Before you eat wash your teeth

,
Bag o cang cu m a ln , m a n hi hi n i n ga ( for
clean .
m a n hi n i n ga)ca m ona .
5 D a da lhan ( fo r d a lhan
) m o a co n a u g
Bri ng me a b OOk to read .
t i s ang li b ro n g b a b a s a hi n .
H o u a g m ong c a hh m o ta n ( for ca ll m o
DO not forget your parents .
( tan )ang i y On g m an a m a g ula n g g .
The future perfect m ay be used for the pluperfect .
When I ha d already gone out , my N ang m a c a a li s ( fo r n a ca a li s ) na a co

en e m y appeared . hu n g m ara p ang a q u i ng ca au a y .
I received the m on ey when I ha d Ti n a n g a p co ang salapi n ang a co, 1, .
already paid . m a ca b ay a d ( for n a ca b ay a d)n a .
The i m perative m a y be used :

( 1) F o r t he present indefinite .
M a gp a da la ( fo r n ag a
p p a d a la )si y a nang
He send s m oney
{ salapi
( )
2 In poten tial negati ve sentences .
gdH i n di ca m a ca p a n gOSa p ( for n a ca

Ca n you not speak ?
ca p a n
gé s ap )
Hi ndi co m a y p a hay a g ( for nay p a
I cannot declare I t
.
ll a ag
)
.
p a y .
( )
3 F o r the past .
M r a q m ta
t )m y a
3
f at
3 gg
a ns as
He saw the dog an d killed i t .
2
1 ; b y g ?
When I heard thunder I was N ang m a ri n gi g ( for n a ri n gi g) cong
f ri ghte n e c u n g m u culog a y n a ta c o t a co .
( )
4 The i nfiniti ve m ay b e used for the co m plete present p articiple .
5 N ang ( fors a b i hi n
a
p g s a s a b i )niy a it o i
He havin g said this died , , ,
l siy a i na m atay , , .
Having finished the work ,

they N ang m a ta p n s ( for p a g ca ta p u s ) nil a
went to the theatre . ang gau a n a p a s a te a tro si l a , .
The infinitive m a y also b e used for all the other tenses ,

as already said .
Cu n ang m aestro c a n i y ang

n a g a g ali t
When the m aster gets a n gry he ,
p a ru s a ha n ( for p i n a ru ru s a ha n ) ang
,
punishes a ll the scholars

lah a t na a la g a dz n a g a ara l
.
When I bought the house I said , N ang b ilhi n ( for b i n i li )co ang b ah ay ,
nothin g to the m .
u a laa c c mg s i n a b i n g a n o m an s a ca n ila
’
Who shall n o t la u gh ? g Si n o n g di tu m ana ? ( for tat an a ) .
Do not carry about yo u r i n fant Hou ng m o c alu ngiu ang ca p a ti d m ong

brother in your ar m s . bungs o .
312 THE TA GA L oG L A N GU A GE .
pronounce Ca n t hey n o t declare it?

. They can not eclare i t d .
Ca n they not f a il to go ? They cannot fai l to go Was not that .
m ade publicly ? N o i t was m ade secretly

, Where i s m y watch ? .
Here i t i s Where is your father? _There he i s

. Where does this .
road begin ? I t b e g i n s a t the beach How was your fe m ale cousi n

C
.
wounded ? She was wounded wi th the poin t of a pin Who created .
G o d? G o d i s i ncreate and eternal I s He m ercif u l ? Hi s m ercy

b
.
i s infinite however great your sin s m a y

,
e He will par don the m .
Where i s H e ? H e i s everywhere wherever yo u go there He i s and , ,
whatever you do He sees it ,

.
F I F TY- S E CO N D L E S SO N .
YC A L I M A N G P O U O , T, DA L AU A N G PA G A RA L .
V ER BAL P E C U L I A R I TI E S .
that the review of the verb has been co m pleted it would

N ow ,
be well to say so m ething about certa i n Tagalog verbal peculiari ti es

before closi ng the subj ect .
As the student ha s x ha d by this ti m e occasio n to n ote the ,
language is not p rovided with proper a uxiliary v erbs no r wi th any ,
thing corresponding i n sen se and scope with the M alay a da and

j a di the
,
Javanese a n a an d d a di the Battak a d ong and ja a the , z
'
Dayak a tom and ja m etc except perhaps that the latte r m a y be

’
, .
,
foun d i n th e Ta galog y a m whi ch i f so has so m e w hat depar ted

’
, . ,
fro m the signification it ha s i n those other languages .
F o r the pu rpose of co m pari ng th e relati ve M alay influences i n

Tagalog an d the other la n gu a ges of th e P h ili ppines i t i s worth noti cing ,
that a d a i s foun d i n Bi sayan with a signification very analogous to

“ “
that it ha s in M alay as m a y a t a there i s ; a d a Si g/a there he is ; etc
,
-
, , .
show .
The endeavor which the language m akes to acqu i re such i m porta n t

ele m ents as auxiliary verbs are co nsidered to be i s apparen t ho w ever , , ,
i n t he particular us e to w hich it puts u a la ma yr é o n and ma y which , ,

“
to a certain degree corresponds to that to which not to h ave
, have ‘
,
" ”
not ,
“
’
there n e t to have there not to b e ; “
to ha t e
,
have “
there ,
“
,
to have and there to be ‘

are put i n E nglish
d
.
, ,
I llustrations follow which i t i s believe will Show this analogy , ,
i n a clearer light .
He has not eaten any bread ? g,

U a la siy ang bag a q u i n a l ng ti n ap a y ?
He has eaten so m e bread . Siy a i , m a y q u i n ai n g t i n ap a y
, .
I s there no one eating ? aU a la bag ang c u n g m a ca i n ?

There I s nobody eating . U a l an g ( ta u b)cu n g m a cai n
U rl g n a c a a s a b i z m
éi
g a
p g a ca a
p g s a b l s a
Was there no one who to ld it to hi m ?
C lb é ?
N body told it to hi m U alang n a g s a b i diya n s a caniy a

o . .
W W ’H
2!
be anybody wh o
) gU a la b a g ang ( ta n O)p a ro rOo n
There will not be anybody to go there . U a lan g p a ro r do n .
Will there not be any o n e to wh o m gU a la bag ang m a b i g u l a n n a u g e n m o t

thei r quilt m a y be given ? n il a?
There will be nobody to who m U al ang m a b i g u la n nau g c a n ilang
:
thei r q ui lt m a y be given . c li mo t .
V E R BA L PE CU L I A R I TI E S .
b
Does he uy ? is h e uying? b g M a y bi n i b i li ag a s iy a? b
He buys he i s buying,
. M a y b i n i b l li Sly a .
Have you drunk any wine ? g M a y i n i n o m ca bag ang alac ?

,
I have d runk so m e wine . M a y i n l n o m a c On g alac ?

Will your sister cull o ut of these M i ili i n bag a a n g l y On g c a p a ti d na
d a
yp p
w
flo ers ? babaye dito _ s a m an a bulac lac ? g
b
-
1m Sl y a d u b s a m a n ga
Sh w ill cull so m e of these flowers
ula c
.
)11
2 g£
M 11
e .
I t i s greed b etween the m not to M y p i

a a n a g c a i s a ha n sil ang hi ndi ni l a
p ay it .
b a b a y a ra n .
M 3 10 8 5 0 1
30 8 na m a g ll n g co d 83
It wa s enacte d to serve i n the ar m y .
1; 62 0
It will be resolved to p roceed up

“ 01
.
5 M ay yp a S‘ SI J any
g
’
03
to the en d .
Mis used for to have to

a y r é on with t he agent i n t he “ '
no m inative case an d the ver which stands for i ts di rect co m ple m ent b ,
following i n the co rresponding tense o r i n that peculiar to Tagalog , ,
of the proper passive voice .
Have they ( anything)to say ? M o n bag a sil ang s a s a b i hi n ?

g a e
They have to say M a y ré o n sil ang s a s a b i hi n
z
b bag r b i n i b i li n
b i l
'
d M a e o n a c a y cl n t g
Had you to uy so m eth ing?
.
h ing a n o m an ?
We had to pay the de t b .

M a e on ca m ing b i n a y a ra n g b a y a ra n g
Otang .
-
Shall I have anything to do ?

g M a e o n bag a a c é n g g a g a o i n ?
You shall have to sweep the door sill . I ca o a y m a e ong m a u a li s ang p i n toa n .
i s also used b efore a co m m on noun i n a sense of

M ay
ownershi p parent a ge or appurtenance beari ng i n th i s respect a close
, , , ,
Si m ilarity to the L atin ha be o b a bes etc , , ,

.
The owner th e proprietor , .
The father one of the parents , .
The m aker
b
.
A uthor i nvento r fa ricato r de

signer
,
.
, ,
l
Wh o co m posed th es e verses ? cgSi n O ang m a y cath a ult ong tula ?
The Creato r . A n g m a y lalang m a y capal , .
The powerful m a n . A n g m a y c a p a n g y a ri ha n g tau o .
The A l m ighty . A n g m a y c a p a n gy a ri ha n s a lahat .
The lover . A n g m a y si nt a .
Who i s the owner of this far m? g Si no ang m a

y ari n i tOn g b uq u i d ?
Ou r neighbour i s the owner . A n g a m ing c a a p i db aha y ang m a y ari .
Who i s the father of this m aid ? é S i n o n g m a y anac di t o s a dalag a? .
The Ch ina m an at the corner i s the

father .
Who are the i nventors of thi s kind

lS A ng lu s lc s a suloc ang m ay
g
anac n 1ya .
d i n o si no ang m an a m a y cat h a
of pillow ? n i t b n g g a n i tb n g o lo n a n z o n a n ?
The Japanese are the i nventors . g
A n g m an a taga J a p On ang m a y cath as ,
Who is the Creator of everything ? dSi n o ang m a y ca p a l s a lahat ?

A n g D ’OS Pa n g ln o o n n a t i n Sl y a ang
Go d o u r L ord i s the Creator and ’ ,
gg é igfigt
e t a ns m a
.
the A l m ighty .
la a
y ca p a n g y a ri
a s
314 THE TA GA L o G L A N GU A GE .
co mes efore su stantive roots ha v ing a passive force

M ay b b an d
converts the m into ad ectives j .
Si ck . culpritG uilty ,
. M ay s a q u i t . M a y sala .
Wi se learned Denticulated toothed

,
.
,
. M a y d On o n g . M a y n gi p i n .
Golden gold yielding ,

. M a y guin t o .
M ag is sti ll used , preceded by s a, for the prepositio n “

n ear .
N ear
the tree . Sa m a y c aho y .
house . b ahay .
church . si m baha n .
What i s that n ear the bo rder of gA n o cay a ya ong na s a m a y tabi nang

the sea ? d agat
l
Ya ong n a s a m a y d agat a y i s ang
That near the sea is a pi rogue
b a n g ca
.
A nother peculi arity of Tagalog i s the using of so m e roots i n

a n absolute i m personal way fo r every ten se The r oots m ost co m m only
b
.
m ade use of i n such a way or w hich m a y e considered as defective ,
verbs ,
are :
Co m ing f ro m , d e ri v i n g ‘
. G aling .
Concluded , m ade up . Yari .
F inished , ended Ta p tI
’
. s .
Deserving ( puni sh m ent) . .

S ucat .
Condign worthy j ust right , , , ,

proper . D apat .
Wi shing wi lling , . I bi g.
N ot knowing . A y a n an .
R e f u s i ng to be u n w i lli n ? the
A y ao
L a ti n ) l
n ole , n olle , n ata l
.
b
j
It is was will e said ; he she they
D a0 co no
b
, , , , ,
says say said ; will e said

.
’
, , .
and D at e 0072 6 are always postpo ned to the ver b , data being f a r
m ore i n u se .
I t i s said you are very ri ch . M a y a m a n g m aya m an ca d ao .
I t w a s said you were dead . N a m at ay ca d ao .
I t will be said he will beco m e m a d . M a o o lo l S iy a d ao .
He says let hi m go out . L u m a b as siy a d ao .
They say t hey are not willing N a n a y ao a y ao c o n o sil a

‘
: .
.
He says he will study . M a g aa ra l d ao siy a .
A y ao ( )
1 the n o u n or pronoun I n the no m i native or
governs
p os s es s w e case according to whet h er sentence i s active o r p a s s 1v e .
A re you not willing to enter? dA y ao cang p u m as o c ?

N ay ao a c On g m a g a s au a , or , ay ao a c On g
I refused to m arry
au a
.
n a ga s .
Will you refuse to give m y m oney

A
g y ao m on g y s a o li ang salap i co ?
back ?
( ) y
1 A ao i s b u t t h e m o d e r n J a a ne s e a j a a n d t h e K a w i a y u w a I t s h o u ld v , .
b e r e m a r k e d h e r e t h a t a m o n g t h e J a a n e s e w o r d s a d o p t e d i n Ta g a lo g a n d i n t he v
t
o h e r di a le c ts o f t h e P hi li p p i n e I s la n d s , t h o s e t a k e n f r o m t h e a n c i e n t Ka w i la n g u a g e
v
p r e a i l, a f a c t , i n d e p e n d e n t ly f ro m a n y o t h e r , w hi c h s ho w s t h e v e r y r e m o e a n ti q u i ty t
o f t he J a v a n e s e i n fl u e n ce , a n d ha Of t he la n g u a ge s o f t he P hi li p p i n e s t t .
TE E TA GA L CG L A N GUA GE .
b
Ver al roots are used i n their crude state i n the s e con d pers on
of the i m perativ e especi ally when there exists no direct or i ndirect
co m ple m ent in the sentence
,
Thi s m anner of using the ver al roo t . b

ha s a frequent use a m ong natives and i s so m ewhat interj ectio nal .
Walk ! Take ! L aca d . Cu ha .
R un! Run for i t! , overtake ! Tacb o . Ta cb o hi n .
Drag along . E at! H ila . Cai n .
Co m e on .
Hali ca , t Oloy .
b
Ver al roots when they are not changed fro m thei r pr i m ary
,
sense by so m e m odifying particle are used t oo for every tense if , ,
the latter is otherwise deter m ined by so m e other wo rd .
What do you bring ? gA n o ang da la m o?

I bring noth ing to day U al a a c On g dal a n ga y On
ga
-
. .
c a ha
Yesterday I b rought so m e fruit . A ng dal a co p o ,i , bu n .
What will he be willing to have A n ong i b i g niy a b li ca s ?

6
to m orrow ?
-
,
What does he s ay ? g A n On g sab i n iy a?

He say s that Sab i n i y a, i ,
So m e
co m pounds either nouns or adj ectives are used as ver s in b
b
, ,
an a solute m an ner .
Wi se learned ,
. M a rli n on g .
Does he know ? gM a r u n o siy a?

n g
Do you kno w how to read ? cang b u m a s a?
gM a run o n g
N O si r I cannot read
, ,
. H ind i p o di a c o m a run on g hu m as h
,
.
Do they know how to speak E nglish ? gM a run o n g sil ang m a g u i c a n g ingl é s ?

They do not know ho w to spe a k Hindi Sil a I n a rnn o n g m a g s a li t a s a u i
E n g lish but they know how to
,
cang i n gl é s ; n gu n i t m a rli no n g sil a , ,
speak Tagalog . m a g s a li ta s a u i ca n g tag alog .
N eed want it i s necessary

, ,
. Cai lan ga n .
What do you need ? A b n g ca i la n a n m o ?

d n g
You need to be cured . Ca i la n ga n cang g a m o ti n .
They n eed to work . Ca i la n ga n sil ang m a g t ra b a jo .
The
language still preserves relic s of a n an cient absolute i m
p e ra t i v e for m ed,
by s u f fi x i n g the parti cle i zy to th e verbal root there
where the a n passive a n d the particle a n there where the y passive , ,
should have been used .
Open it
w
.
Throw i t a ay .
Di m i nu t i v e v e rb s .
Thi s d eno m ination

i nclu des not only those ver s hich en ote b w d
b
,
a fee le action but al l o thers the actio n of which i s to be represented

w
,
as perfor m ed in a way of fiction m ockery or awk ardness This , .
( 1) Thi s
i s t o b e c on s i d e re d a s a b r ok e n li n k i n t h e c ha i n o f u ni o n of
Ta ga lo g w i th M a la g a s i , f or i t i s m u ch i n t h e s a m e w a y t h at t he c o rr e s p o n d i n g
p a rt i c le s a re u s e d i n the a te r a ng u age ( Se e i n N i l t
ne te e n t h l
L e s s o n f o o t
.
-n
o e. t
pa ge s 108 109 -
.
V E R BA L PE CULI A R I TI E S El i
’
ma nn er o f repres e nting the action finds m uc h favo r ith natives the w ,
sa m e m ean s being here resorted to for the purpose as fo r th e di m

i n u ti v e noun that is to say the using o f the verbal co m p o u nd wi th
, ,
the reduplication of the root wh atever else pertains to the conj ugative ,
m echanis m re m aini n g unchanged .
To walk , L u m aca d .
To walk i n a scurrilous m anner . L u m a ca dlaca d .
To say to speak , . M a g ii i ca .
To speak and p ronounce ind istin ctly

M a g ni cau i ca
like little children
.
To sleep M a té lo g
b
. .
To slu m er or to feign Sleepi ng M a to lo g t é log

, . .
Carri ed taken , Di n a la . .
Carri e d and brought i n again and

Di n a la da la= di n a d a la d a la
over again .
To wri te Su m ti la t m a g s ri la t
b
. .
,
To scrib le Su m u la ts ula t m a g s u la ts ri la t
.
, .
To eat . Cu m a i n m a g ca i n , .
To eat very little as sick persons

Cu ma i n ca i n m a g ca i n ca i n
do to eat an d slaver as ba bies
, .
, .
To weep Tu m a n gi s m a gt a n gi s
w
.
, .
To hine . Tu m a n gi s ta n gi s m a g ta n gi s ta n gi s , .
To rai n U m olan
z
z
. .
To dri le U m ola n ol an
b
.
-
To uild houses M a g b aha y . .
To rai se little houses as chi ldren do M a g b a y b a ha y a n . .
The Sick p erson can already walk

A n g m a y s a q u i t n a c a ca la ca d laca d n a
a little c an m ake so m e steps .
b
, .
The child egi ns to m utter so m e

w o rd s .
A ng ata i n a g ii i u i ca u i ca na b , ,
.
Do not trust hi m he only feigns H o u a g m o Siy ang p a n i u a la a n n a g to to

, ,
to sleep .
lo g to log a n Siy a l am ang .
Why are you always taking the

book i n an d o ut? gB a q u i t m o di n a d a la d a la ang li ro ? b
The m ale an d the fe m ale chi ld write A n g d a la u an g ata n a g s u s ri la ts u la ta n b
e ach other little love letters n a u g p a la s i n ta ha n
b w
-
.
.
M y child egins to eat to s allow

so m e food A n g .
ata co i ,
c u n g m a ca i n c a i n n a b , ,
.
b
Her ba y 1s al ays w whi ning . ( A ng c a n i y an g b u n g s o i , p a la g u i n g
n a g ta t a n gi s ta n gi s
,
g
.
The childre n are m aking little hou s A n g m an a bata , i n a gb a b a ha y b a ha ,
es o ut o f earth i n the garden . yan n a u g lupa s a ha la m a n a n .
The orph a n .
A ng Oli la .
To leave o fi L eave off reading .

. Inan . I u an mo an g p a gb a s a .
The poor fello w the unfortunate A n g m a hi ra p

g a m ag alang?
, . .
Have you parents ? no U la O m an

w d a c a y n g
N o Si r
, e are parentless
, Hind i p o ca m i o , O , p m an g a
, li la .
P ure genuine
, . Tagan as pul os , .
This ring i s of genui ne gol d .

( I tOn g si ngsing na it o i ta gan as na
gui nt o .
, ,
That i m age i s pure ivory . Iy ang la rau a n g iy a i pul os na garing , . .
Cu sto m ary habitual Ca ra n i u a n g ca ra t i ha u

d
, .
,
Cus toma ry re s s . Carani u a ng d a mti n .

THE TA GA L oG L A N GUA GE .
I nveterate habit . Ca ra t i ha n as a l .
E nough sufficient , . Ca s i y a ha n c a i g u i ha n , .
That i s sufficient . I y a i , ca i g u i ha n na
, .
To pass to elapse , . L u m i pas .
The ti m e ha s passed when . L u n g m i p a s na ang panahon n a . .
To exceed to excel to overdo

, , . L u m a lo .
He excels i n wisdo m L u n g ma la lo ang p a g ca rlm on g n iy a

’
.
.
F I FTY SE CON D EXE R CI SE -

.
Had you anyth in g to eat? I ha d n oth ing to eat Has he «

.
not seen m y brother ? He has not yet seen hi m Has he not slept .
yet? He ha s not yet slept What wi ll th ere be con si dered ? There .
will b e he r m arriage considered H ave you anything to tell m e ? .
Yes I have so m ething to tell you

,
Have you anyth ing to d o ? .
Yes I have so m ething to do

,
Has he anything to desire ? He .
ha s noth ing to desi re Have you sai d anything ? I have sai d nothing
. .
Has he killed a m a n ? He has kille d a m a n Who is the father of th i s .
child ? Peter i s the father of thi s child Who i s the m aker of the world ? .
G o d our L ord i s the m aker A re you perchance t he owner of this land ?

w
.
, ,
I a m not t he o n er but m y broth er i n l aw Who are the owners - -

.
of this forest? The landlords i n t he town are the owners of thi s

forest What i s that near the church ?
. That n ear the church i s a
very beauti ful tree Who i s si ck ? M y father i s sick A re they
‘
. .
t he culpri t s ? N o they are not the culprits ?, I s the m aster learned ?

He i s v e ry learned Where is you r servant co m ing fro m?
. He is
co m ing fro m the river Is th is b ook finished ? I t i s not yet .
finished Is the m onth ended ? I t is ended Ought he to be

w
. .
puni shed ? He o u ght not to be p unished A r e your cousin s orthy .
of reward ? They are worthy of reward I S h e wi lling to write ? .
He i s willing to wri te What does he say ? He says he 18 a stran ger

w
. .
As k hi m whether he knows ho w to p lay the harp ? He says he kno s .
Do you want this flower ? N o Si r if yo u want i t take i t Do you

w
.
, ,
know m y frien d loves you ? I do not care Do t h ey not ish to .
go to school ? They do not wish to What do you say ? I say

b w
.
it i s not possi le Does h e know how to sew?

. He does not kno
ho w to sew Ca n y o u speak Tagalog ?
. I can speak Tagalog A re .
you a j udge of writing ? I a m not a j udge o f writing A r e you

w
.
acquainted with cooking? I a m not acquai nted ith it I s it ne ce s .
sary ? I t i s necessary I s i t necessary to say it? I t is necessary

.
that I should declare it Where i s your father? Ou r father i s dead —
w b
,
.
e are orphans Di d Joh n quit ga m ling ?

. He ha s not yet quitted
it Who is that m a n ? He is an unfortunate What i s that crown
d
. .
m a e of ? It is m ade o f pure Silver Wha t does your father excel .
i n? He excels i n lec turing .

82 0 THE TA GA L O G L AN GUA GE .
A s k so me vi ne ga r on passing by M a q u i raa n ca n an g s u ca
d
. .
They have sowed pa dy . N a g ha s i c sil a nang p alay .
They shall gather ( cut off with the

M a ngi n git il S il a n a ngtn a m i n
fingers )so m e betel leaves
.
/
b
.
M i tas
'
Gather so m e flowers m a m i tas c a nang ulac lac

: -
.
Do not pi ck up any quarrels . H o u a g cang hu m ana p n a u g Os a p .
Wi ll you have so m e bread ? dI b i g m o nang t i n ap a y ?

w
I ant a little . b
I i g co nang canuti ,
.
i s generally used I n a ll cases not other i se sp ecified in

N a ng w
b
the su j oined rules for the use of s a .
He cannot lift the vat Hindi siy a m a ca b u ha t nang tapayan

b
. .
We ui ld our house of stone N a g b a b a to ca m i nang b ahay na m in . .
Peter reduced the price N a g b a b a Si P edro nang ha la g a

. .
Drive away the poultry B u mlI g a o cay o h a n g m anoc

’
w
. .
They ill undo ( untie) the agree Ca ca la g sil a nang t i p an p i n a g ca i s a r -
m ent . b an .
I t i s a si n to listen to ( heari ng ) Sala a n g d u m i n gi g nang u i ca n g m a

b
O sceni ties . ha hala y
Why did not the servant transfer gBaq u i t h indi n a g s a li n ang ali la nang
'
the water into the vat t ubig s a tapayan . .
P u m Oto l ca nang p a bt lo ( Sp w for

’
Snuff the candle

. .
“ ”
wick )nang candila
.
b b
.
Correct ( rectify )yo ur ad ha its Tu m ou i r ca nang m a s a m ang asal m o . .
Sa i s used before the di rect obj ect i n the active :

I n sentences the ver b b
of which o tains i n the causa ti ve sense
of ma ca conj ugati on .
M odesty enhances wo m en s eauty

’
b .
An
é s ggggégig
a
l ay n a ca g a g a n da s a
His arr i val caused pleasure to his A ng p a g

d ti a ng n i y a, i , n a ca té u a s a
m other c a n i y an g me
w
. .
Why does ar cause sorrow to your B

g q a u i t cay a ang a
p g b a b a c a i n a c a lu , ,
sister? lu m b ay s a ca p a ti d m ong babaye ?

This fruit i s still green ( unri p e )an d I t ong b o n gan g it o, i , hi lao pa t , m acasa
g
,
will har m m y children sa m a s a m an a anac co

g
. .
A n g m an a ga m ot ang siy ang nacaca

It is the re m edies that cure the sick .
galing s a m an a m a y s a q u i t g
g
.
A n g m an a c a y a b a n ga n n i y a i , naca
HI S brags cause fri ght to the boys
g
,
t a ta c o t s a m an a bata
.
g
.
The tears of David was t his A n g m an a luha n i David n a ca di li g

couch . s a ca n i y an g h i hi g a a n .
With verbs wh ich m ore or less require a person for their direct
To salute to bow at to greet

, ,
. M ag hati , b u m a ti .
Salute the priest . B u m a t i ca s a p are .
To betray To deny . . Vi a g ca n u lo M a g ta tua . .
Si Sa n Pe d ro i n a g ta tua s a c a n i y an g
, ,
Saint Peter denied hi s m aster m a e s tr o ti n a tu a n n i Sa n P e dro ang

:
l
.
c a n i y an g m aestro .
U SE or N a ng A N D Sa I N THE OB J V E CTI E CA SE . 32 1 »
To cure to doctor Gu m a m o t
ga
. .
,
J e sus Christ cured the sick .

Si J e s u cri s t o i g u n g m a m o t s a m an
m ay s a q u i t
,
.
,
To whip to cudgel
,
. H u m a m p as .
Shall we whip our servant ? dH a ha m as tayo s a alila n e tin ?

p
To in cite to caj ole to spu r on
, , . Pa m o ng ca hi .
She c a j oles the m a n ( m ale . N a m o m o n g ca hi siy a s a lal a qui .
To slap . Tu m a mp a l m a g ta m p a l , .
I will slap the scou ndrel . Ta ta m p a l a co s a ta m p a la s a n zta cs i l .
In c ertai n verbs whi ch m a y take a thing or a person for thei r

di rect co m ple ment n a ny co mes efore the thing p a before the p erson
, b , .
To pay the ( fo r the )m ai ntenance . M a gb ay a d nang y q u i n a b u b nha y .
N a g b ay a d siy a s a m edi co = m a n g a ga
He paid the physician .
m ot
ga
.
To obey ( to keep ) th e co m m and Su m o n o d na u g m an utos nang

m ents of G o d Di o s
b
. .
Your fri en d does n ot o ey his A n g caibigan m o i hindi s u n g m o s o n o d , ,
m o t her . s a i n a niy a .
A s k ( in quire )the reason of t hat . M a g ta n o n g ca n ang c a d a hi la n a n niy an .
A s k t he servant whe ther he swept Tu m a n o n g ca s a alila cu n n i u a li s a n

the bath roo m -
. na n iy a ang p a li g oa n .
Sa
i s co m m only used also wi th th ose verbs i n th e active which
i n the passive require a n i n reference to thei r direct o bj ec t .
To look at the sky Tu m i n gi n s a l an it g

b
. .
Iai m ed ( took a i m )at the i rd . Tu n g m u rla a c o s a ibon .
They poi nt to th e thief Tn n g m o to ro sil a s a m a g n a n aca o

w
. .
To throw arro s a t . M a gp a n a s a
To w ring to twist M i hi t , m a g p i hi t
b
, . .
To turn to retract to fall ack

, ,
. M a g b a li c , b u m a li c m alic , .
Turn your heart to G o d . M a g b a li c cang lOo b s a Dios .
TO j oin to approach by crawling U m a g ap a y

b
, . .
To turn one s ack to on ’

Tu m a li c o d
b
.
, .
To carry a out along with to bea r , . Dal a .
To be pregnant . Dal ang bata tau o , .
To he a r anger envy , . Dal an g p oot .
To have fear . Dal ang t acot .
To carry sha m e along . Dal ang hiya .
D a ta
i s u sed i n the sense of carrying along with wi th w ords si m ila r ,
to those i n the exa m ples an d i t m a y be m ade a ma g verb “

Th i s
b
.
boy carries sha m e a out hi m

'
n a g d a d a lc mg hi y a i tong ba ta ng
‘
, .
To swoon away to be giddy , . M a b i lo .
I swooned away at the shock stroke , . Yq u i n a hilo co a n g poepoe .
To sto p . H u m i n t o, m a ghi n t o .
To cal m to co m pose o ne s self to ’
Tu m i g u i l m a g ti g u i l
, ,
grow cal m , .
g
.
The wind grows cal m Ti ti g u i lti g u i l ang han i n

g
. .
N oise cla m or bustle

, ,
. I n ay .
32 2 THE TA GA L CG L A N GU A GE .
Be silent . Hou a g m a g -
in gay .
To go to M anila to go down th e river ,

. L u m ou as .
I shall go to M anila L u lou as a c o

b
. .
I hold it to be good . I n a a ri cong m a uti .
A t ti m es so m eti m e s
,
. Cu n m i n s an .
Other ti m es at othe r ti m es ,
. Cu n m in e au n a m an .
So m eti m es b
a ove so m et i m es below
, .
Cu n m i n s an s a i taas , cun m in e au
m g i s a i ba b a= s a lupa .
na
To chew N gu m o y a
b bb
. .
To chew etel nut To ni le . . N gu m a n ga N gu m a lot , n gu m a ta

. .
To gn aw ‘
N gu m a t n ga t
g
. .
To gesticula te to m ake gri m aces ,

. N u m i si .
To s m ile bashfully . N gu m i ti .
To go beyo nd to transpierce ,
. Tu m a la b .
M iracle . Hi m al a .
To be overco m e afflicted with ,

. Tabl an ( contraction )
.
I a m overawed . Ti n a ta blan a co nang tacot .
To be p resent . M a ha ra p .
The present ti m e . A n g p a n a hé n g hi n a ha r a p , ca s a lu c u y a n .
N owadays . Sa p a n a hé n g hi n a ha ra p ca s a lu cu y a n , .
The past ti m e . A n g p a n a hOn g t i n a li c d an , n a ca raa n .
F or m erly . Sa p a n a hé n g t i n a li c d an , n a ca raa n
F uturity the ti m e to co m e
,
. A n g p a n a hOn g ha ha ra p i n .
Sa pa n a hOn g h a ha ra p i n s a p a n a hOn g
In the future
F inally i n a word
.
{ d a ra t i n g
Sa ca ta g an g uica
.
w
. .
,
I n a fe words . Sa m e dalin g s a b l .
A ccording , accordingto A yo n s a , a ll n s un o d s a
g
. .
A ccording to the census . A yo n s a b i la o g nang m an a tau o .
A ccordin g to this . Sa b agay na i t o .
F l FTY TH I R D E X E R CI SE
-
.
Wh a t m ust I do t o obtai n th e p ardon of m y trespasses ? If

you want to obtai n the pardon of your trespasses make a goo d confession .
Do you write when you study ? When I study I d o not wri te Why ,
.
do they stop there? They stop there to see a ship under sail DO .
y o u hold it to b e a bad thi ng to lis t en to Obsceniti es ? I do hold

i t t o be a very bad thing Does your m aster repute it as a good .
thing to serve Go d? Yes i ndeed Where do you go ? I go to

b
.
,
M anila .When will you co m e back ? I shall co m e ack i n th e

evenin g Does your son refuse to appear before hi s m aster ?
. He
refuses to put i n appearance for he fears punish m ent When wi ll ,
.
he read the book I gave hi m ? He will read it next Sunday Do .
A m erica n s intend to go away ? They do not i nte n d to go away .
Why di d you not reply to the pri est? I was overco m e with sh a m e .
.
Who m does t hat school boy fear ? He fears hi s m aster Did the Old .
wo m a n swoon away ? She swooned away but she soo n recovered fro m he r ,
fi t and n o w i s growing cal m er What co m m otion i s that? I t i s the .
children that are runn ing about i n the street

. Did you tell the m to be .
silent? I told the m to b e silent Do natives plot? They plot so m e .

,
ti m es openly ( publicly); so m eti m es hiddenly Who are accusto m ed to

w d
.
,
che to bacco ? A m eric a ns a re accusto m e to chew to bacco Do nativ e s .

The follo ing are co m pound adverbs of m anner w .
So , thus , that way . G a n oo n gay on , .
So , thus , i n thi s m an ner . Can it o .
So thus , as th at
,
. G a n i y an .
F i nally , at last . Ca ta p u s ta p u s a n , c au a ca s u a ca s a n .
“
E nglish adverb s of m anner ending i n ly are generally ex
’
pressed b y the correspon ding adj ectives with

. th e liga m ent o r n a ng -
preceding .
Swiftly Quickly . . M a tu li n M a da li . .
Slowly understandingly,
. M arahan .
Well goodly ,
. M abuti m a g a li n g ,
.
Badly Clearly . . M asa m a M alinao . .
Carefully Strongly . . M ah usay M a la c as . .
Do i t quickly . G a o i n m ong m a da li .
Wrap it up carefully . Balutin m ong m ah usay .
Yti n ola c niy a na n g m a la cas

He push ed the boat strongly .
b a n g ca .
It i s well to say however that not all adj ectives can e , , b

u sed as adverbs Thus si m ple adj ectives that i s to say radical a d .
, ,
je c ti v e s as for instance lup i t olo l etc and ma adj ectives i m porting

z b
, , , , , .
,
quality and not m ann er as ma r m ong ma ba i t etc cannot e used

’
, , ,
.
,
adverbially
b
.
So m e no m inal roots are m ade i nt o adverbs of m an ner y the

particle 3a .
Ope n ly pu l i cly ,
b . Sa b ayag .
Hidden ly secretly , . Sa li hi m .
Co m m only custo m arily Sa ogali s a c a o g a li a n
J
.
, .
,
udiciously . Sa bait .
b
A d v er s ad m i t of a superlative d egree in the sa me w ay as ad j ecti ves .
M ah usay n a m ah usay .
M a b u tln g m abuti .
M a s a m an g m asa m a .
I not i not , m arahan dahan .
A d v e rb s of p la c e .
M any of these are verb al roots prece ed d by s a .
Where ? Here hither , .

gSé a n ? Dito din i , .
There ( near you) . . Diy an .
There ( at that place ) D oon

bi
. .
N ear close , . M al apit m a y 83 siping , s

, s a ,
. a ta .
F a r far off away

, , . Vl a la y o s a m alayo
'
, .
Within inside Ou t outside , .

, . Sa l oob Sa lab as . .
Before opposite Behi nd , . . Sa h arap s a tapat Sa lico d ,

. .
A bove Below . . Sa it aas Sa ibab a . .
On upon , U nder . . Sa ib abao Sa i la li m . .
I n the m iddle m idway Sa i lali m Sa guitn a

dd w
, . . .
I n the mi l e half ay , . Sa p ag u i ta n .
THE A D V E RB . 32 5
b
By y the si e of
,
d . Sa p i ling .
Sideways on that side ,

. Sa cabil a .
Both sides On all sides . . Sa m a g ca b i la Sa m a gca b i ca b i la . .
Belo w down sta irs on the ground

, ,
. Sa lupa .
A nywhere everywhere Saan m a n

b
. .
,
A t m idnight . Sa hating ga ?
N a a p a g u l ta n tayo s a p a glaca d 1a 1a
We are halfway in the jou rn ey .
l c lhs
M y m other was close y m e b . N a s e siping co si i n a .
H
b
0
Sl d e
s th ig
ant ro a d on the other
,
N a p a roon siy a s a ca il a n ang d ag at .
e S
On both sides of the ship . Sa m a g ca b i la na n g s a s a q u i an .
'
A dv e rb s of t i me .
When ? N ow gC a ila n ? N ay o n g
w g
. .
To day . To m orro . N ay on arao n a i t o Buc a s . .
Ca ca m aca , ( particles i ndicating past

‘
Ago
{
,
.
ti m e )
d
.
Yester ay L ast night Ca ha p o n Ca g a b l

d
. .
,
The ay before yesterday . Ca m a ca lau a .
So m e days ago . Ca m a ca i lan g arao .
F i ve days a g o Ca m a ca li m an g arao
j w b
. .
Before a while ago ust no Ca n gi n a ca n gi n a pa , ago pa

b
. .
, , ,
By and y presently , . M a m e a m a m ay a, m a m e a m e a
, .
E arly A lready
. . M aaga Na . .
Still yet, N ot yet . . Pa . Di pa .
A lways . Toui , t o u i tou i , cail an m a n .
Constantly continually , . Pa la g u i arati , .
Suddenly off hand Ca a la m a a m ca ra ca r a ca

b b
-
. .
, ,
Instantly I m m ediately . . Bigl a s a igl a A gad ta m ing

, .
, .
M a g p a r a ti m a n s aa n , h ang an ca il an
F or ever everlastingly , .
l man
d
.
N ever , n o m ore n o longer , . Cail an pa m an , c a i ca ila, i hi n i . .
Often , frequently M a li m i t , di m a m a ca i lan

b
. .
F ro m . M ula , m ul a s a uhat , .
F or m erly , anciently . Sa u n a, s a dati , s a un an g arao .
So m eti m e , so m eti m es . Cu n m i n s an .
N ow an d then , occasionally . M a n a ca n a ca m a mi n s an m i n s an ,
-
.
R arely . Bi b ira , m a dala n g .
L ate . Tangb ali na gab l n a huli , , .
Daily Hourly A rao arao -

Oras oras
b
-
. . . .
Weekly M onthly . . L ingo lingo Bouan onan

-
.
-
.
Yearly . Ta on ta on -
Co n j u nc t i v e a dv e rb s of t i me .
A s soon as , n o sooner than , o n

'
. Sa , p a g ca , pag .
Then ; at the end afterwards , . Sac a .
Then ( at that past ti m e )

. . N oon , niy om .
When , at the ti m e of ( future ) . . Cu n .
Whenever Till until .

,
. Cu n tou i Hang an , ha ngan s a
. .
When , at the ti m e of ( past) . . N ang .
When , on those d ays . N oon .
A fter A fter having

. . Pa g ca , cap a g Pa g ca , ca p a gca . .
F i rst , firstly . ona .
Be f ore , p reviou s to , p re v iously . Bago

Ca i ldn i s m ainly i nterrogative .
When did he co m e ? gCa i la n siy a n a p a ri to?

Before i n the m orning
, . Ca n gi n a n g o m aga .
Before i n the afternoo n Ca ngi n a n g tang b ali

w
.
, .
He as here j ust a while ago . Ca n i ca n gi n a i n a ri ri to siy a .
M a mé a =ma ma y d i s m i ddle b et ween ta mbi ng and s a cd .
w b
I shall rite y an d by . Su s ula t a co m a m ea .
We shall always love each o ther . M a g s i s i n ta ha n cat ang d a lau a c ail an m a n

He died instantly . N a m at ay siy ang bigl a .
He prostrated hi m self i m m ediately . N a g p a ti ra p a siy ang agad .
Cu m ai n cang ta m b 1ng , ta m b 1ng1n m ong

E at i mm ediately
c u m ai n
.
A n g Dios , a y Dios din m a g p a p a ra ti n

God ex i sts a b ( e te r n o
m a n s aa n
.
ca l aco 1 h i ndi u n g m u n o m
I never dri nk li quors .
ggg $22
n .
I often take bath s M a li m i t a c on g n a li li g o

b
. ,
They frequently co mm i tted sin Di m a m a ca ilan n a g ca s a la si l a la an s a

agai nst G o d Dios
b g
.
F ro m this day on M ula n gay on uhat n ay on

b
.
, .
F ro m Thursday till Sa turday . M ula s a j ueves hang an s a s a ado

.
.
In for m er ti m es Sa on ang panah on

b
. .
Thi s child cries but rarely Bi hi ra n g t u n g m a t n gi s i t ong ata

a
b
. .
abaye n a hu li
.
A ng c a p at i d n a
s a fl agg
My sister arrived late at m ass
i ng
.
It i s late ( i n the morning)

. . Tangb ali na .
It i s late ( i n the evening )

. . G a b i na .
For
the proper use of the con unctive adver s the follo ing j b w
d irections are given :
Sa refers to a p rin cipal ac tion i m m ediately following t he
secondary one expressed by the word to whic h i t i s applie It d .
i ndica tes rather punc tuali ty than si m ultaneousness .
On his say i ng these word s he ied d Sa p a g s a b i niy a n i ton g m an a u ica a y g

2 na m at ay
.
,
.
On thei r noticing the earthquake ,

-
Sa p a g ca m ala y n il a nang li n dol, sil a l
they ran a ay w . tu n g m a cb o .
Pag
refers to th e subordinate action hich it represents as w ”
acco m plished o r i n progress with so me other si m ultaneous actio n It

w
, .
goes ith the possessive cas e of the agent and the accusa ti ve of t he obj ec t .
d
A s soon as I tol i t to hi m . Pa g s a blz zp a g s a bihi n co s a caniy a .
N o sooner he wen t i n Pa g p as oc niy a

b
. .
A s soon a s you gree t hi m , co m e ack Pa g b a ti m o s a caniy a, m oui e a

w
. .
A s m y fa ther en t a w a y , he arrived . P a g a li s nang a m a co , d u n g m a t i ng siy a .
On m y arriving at the house , I Pa g d a ti n g co s a b ahay , n a q u i t a co ang

s a w an innu m era le cro d b w . is ang ca tipo h an di m a i lang na tau o b .
P ag i s used with the n e gative i n a threaten ing sense .
You sha ll see how I beat you . Pa g hindi qui t a p a lo i n .
If he does not co m e I shall not pay ,

Pa g h indi siy a p u m a ri n l , ay hindi co
hi m . siy a b a ba y a ra n .
Pag i s used for active verbal nouns , p a g ca , for i n t ransitive ones .
The throwing down of bo m bs A n g p a g hoholo g nang bomba ( Sp )

w b g
. .
The falling do n of the fruit . A n g p a g ca holo g nang on a .
applied to actions ad m itting of ti m e for thei r develop m ent

Pag ,
express the action as i n progress ; p a g ca as acco m plished , .
The growi ng light . A n g p a gli u an a g .
The clearness of day . A n g p a g ca li u an a g .
Wi th regard to the govern m ent of p a g and p a g ca wi th verbal

n ouns great care should be t aken i n d istinguishing whether the person
,
i s ac tive or passive with regard to the actio n A n y disregard o n th is .
point m a y lead to m any striking m istakes .
The b eheading of Saint J ohn .

( by A n g p a gp é g o t cay Sa n Juan
Herod)
.
The beh eading by the executioner A n g p a g p og o t nang m a m u m ug ot cay

of M ary Stuart M aria E s tu a r do
b
. .
The irth of The Holy Vi rgin A n g p a n ga n ga n a c cay M aria Santisi m a

b J b
.
The ringing forth ( of esus ) y A n g p a nga nga na c nang Santisi m a

The Holy Virgin . V i rgen .
Sa cd , as an adver b , i ndicates m ore f u turity than ma ma y d .
G od m adethe skies first and m a n , G u i n au a n ang Dios ang l an it g ,

sac a
long afterwards . ang tau o .
He laughed an d then ? ,
N atan a si y a , ga t sac a?
Cam , n a ny , noo n , n i p
/ on o r n i y d on as adver s can n ot b e used i ndi s b
d
, ,
c ri m i n a t e ly . Gu n shoul be used m refe rence to the p resent o r future

s ense .
When I go to M anila I shall buy a Gu n p u m a ré o n M ayn ila y b i b ill

a co s a
hat for you . quita nang i s ang s a m b a li lo .
When Peter co m es let m e know o f it ,

. Cu n d a ra ti ng si Pedro , ala m i n m o a co .
Gu n m a y be used with the past i n defi nite tense if the action

appears as perfor m ed custo m arily .
When I was i n L ondon I went Cu n a c o, i , .

n a ro r oo n s a L ondres napa
frequently to the theatre . s a s a t e a t ro a con g m a da las .
N a ng i s used with all degrees of the past tense .
When he ca m e yesterday to visit N ang di n ala o n iy a

a c o, i , c a ha p o n ,
m e I was sick
,
. n a g ca ca s a q u i t a co
When m y sister arrived we had ,

N ang d u m a ti n g ang c a p a ti d cong ba
already eaten dined , . baye n a c a ca i n 11a ca m i
,
.
THE A D V E RB
co m e at t he beginn in g of a past narra ti on
z
’
m y d on ,
’
N oon , m yé n , .
They lay stress o n the epoch and n o t on t he act 1on .
No n ng ara ) ay nangyar 1 ang pag

On that day th e battle was fought .
( gb éi a
I n t hose ti m es whe n Jesus Christ ( N oon

'
nar 1r 1to pa s a 1u p a s 1 J e s u c r1s to

was st i ll o n E arth .
B a q o, as an adverb ,
always co m es before the verb .
Before you m arry think o n i t care Bag o cang m a g a s au a p a ca i s i p i n m o

fully . m on a .
Befo re you read s w eep t he roo m ,

. Bag o cang b u m a s a u a l1s a n m o ang s ilid .
M on a w
al ays co m es after the verb a nd is l argely used expletively ( 1) .
C aoin m o m ona .
H i n t ay ca m ona .
E ndlessly i nces santly , wi tho ut i h

, U al ang hu m p éty ual ang tah an ual ang , ,
te rm i s s i on . li ca t .
F irstly , i n first place . On a o n a c a o n a o n a ha n

,
.
F orthwith , i n the t w i n kli n g o f an Sa sandal i s u m a n d a li , s a i s ang q u i s a p

,
e e . nang m at a .
While i n the m ean ti m e

,
. Sa m antal a h ang an
°
,
.
While he i s still ali ve . Hang ah n a b u b uha y siy a .
A t n ightfall . Sa ta q u i p sili m .
FI F TY F OU R TH E X ER CI SE
-
.
How far i s M anila? F ro m here to M anila t here i s a dista nce of
six m iles Did she do it volun tarily ?

. She d id Who m ade the table ? .
The table as well as the chai r were m ade by the carpenter Wil l .
he do i t i n this m anner? He m ust do i t i n that m anner Wh ich .
r u ns m ore s w i f tly fi a sailing vessel or a stea m er ? A stea m er run s

m ore swiftly Do I write well ?
. You write badly A re there any .
people i nside ? There are n o people inside all of the m a re out ,
side . Does his house sta n d opposite the church ? N o it s tan d s b e ,
hi nd t he chu rch I s m y b ro t he r a b o v e or below ? H e i s under t he

’
bed . Where are we i n o u r j ourney ? We are half way 1n our j ourney -

.
Where i s the child ? The chi ld i s by its m other s side Where i s

’
his far m ? I t i s o n the other side of the road Where i s yours ?

‘
On both sides of the river When do you intend to pay the tailor? .
I intend to pay hi m to m orrow Were you at t he theatre last nigh t?

'
-
.
I was there a wee k ago A re m y fri ends here ? Just n o w they

were here but I thi nk they wi ll co m e back by and by
,
A t what .
ti m e shall I get u p t o m o rrow? R ise early A re you always reading ? .
I have no t the ti m e I a m con s t an tly working , Whe n s hall I send .
( 1) Se e Te n th L e s s on .
f or the physician ? Sen for hi m i mm ediately d

Do you i n te nd to
w
.
'
re main here for ever ? I do Ho m any days are there f ro m to .
There are sixty fi v e days till the end

'
d a y till the end of the year? -
of the year Di d this tree bear fruit for m erly ?

. It did and even ,
now it f r u c tifi e s occasionally Does he often go to school ? He go es to .
school rarely How often does m y sister go to M anil a?

. She goes there
yearly When will he write ?
. A fter having read this letter he will
write When did they beco m e frightened ? They beca m e frightened whe n
.
they saw the snake When will you go to bed ? I will go to sleep
.
after taking m y supper When will your son study hi s lesson ?

. A fter
hearing m ass he wil l go to study Did you see the cathedral ? When .
ever I go to M anila I visit ( see) the cathed ral Why do you not .
read? When I write I do not read When di d your b ro the r i n la w .

O -
arrive ? Wh en I was writi ng h e a rri ved Why d i d no t m y cousi n ,

.
write ? Because your u ncle had already written when you r b rother
arrived When did he g o away ?
. A s soon as his father went away -
he also wen t away Wha t did the king do after the count spoke ?
.
N o sooner the count had fi nished speaki n g he was e m braced by the

king . When did m y brother arrive ? H e arrived after you ent w
away . Where shall I go ? G o to your u ncle s an d after you r greet
’
i ng to hi m co m e back W hen shall we take a bath ? The m ass being

,
.
over we shall take a bath What will the servant do before eati ng ?
b
.
,
Before he eats he m ust go for water Wh ich of these ooks shall

d
.
I rea first? R ead that fi rst .
F I F TY —
F I F TH L E SSO N .
Y CA L I M A N G P O U O , T, L I M A N G PA G A R A L .
TH E A D V E R B .
( co n ti n u e d )
N oti ce
sho u ld be ta k en of the adverbial verbs that i s to say ,
of adverbs m ade verb s and conj ugated i n various ways The ad .
verbs m ost frequently used for this purpose are those of m anner ti m e ,
and degree .
To act thus ( in that way ). . G u m a n i y an , g u m a y a on , or , g u ma y on .
M ake i t i n thi s way . G a i t o hi n m o .
L e t us p rofit by this opportunity . Sa m a n ta la hi n n a ti n .
I co m posed thi s book by working

I t ong l1b r o 1, m m a m ay a ma y a co
at short in tervals .
,
.
Throw it away at once . Ta n g b i n gi n m o y ta p o n .
Hi s fever in creases . L u n g m a la lo ang c a n i y an g la g n a t .
His m oney i s running short . Cu n g m u cula n g ang c a n i y ang salapi ,
'
Verbs referring to the m ann er disposi tion etc i n w hi ch an , , .
action is perfor m ed m a y be u sed adverbially i n the pas t tense o f the

,
i n passive .
In tentionally , purposely .
Pi n a cs a, t i n i q u i s , s i na d y a
-
.
W1lli n g ly .
Qu i nu s a .
By the j ob . Pi n a c q u i a o .
By retail . I n o ta y
’
.
THE TA GAL O G LA N GUA GE .
Sa y ,est s ; sai
-
ds t ,
-
d ,
-
. A ng uica .
Sa ys sai d h e
,
. A ng uica n iy a .
Says said Jesus Christ

,
. A ng uica n i Jesucristo .
Yo u s a y said
,
,
. A ng u ica m o n i n y o , .
Saint Peter says said , . A ng uica n i Sa n P ed ro .
"
The no m inal root wo rd ; i s u sed a s a n i m personal ab solute u i ca
“
b
,
v er I t i s generally applied to q u otations and requi res the postposi t i ve

.
for m s of the possessive case of the personal pronoun s .
M oney old p e ople say i s the best A ng s a la p i ,

ang uica nang m a i a ta n da
'
, , ,
friend . siy ang lalong m a b u tln g caibigan

m
.
tl g w y ad m unt i
E i gmgég
a ll g “103
The debt ,
he says ,
i s s m all .
, .
Truly so m e ti m e da y
. At ,
. Tant o m andi n Sa alang arao . b .
I truly saw it . Tant o m anding n a q u i ta co .
So m e day I will do i t . Sa b alang arao g a g a o i n co .
I n that very m ann er way ,

. Casi ng gay on casing g a n i y an , .
A nyhow So m e way or oth er P a a n o m a n Saan m ang par aan

b
. . . .
Care attention Do as y o u like

. . . Bahala I c ao n a ang ahala
. .
L eave t hat to m y care . A co n a ang bahala n iy an .
To care for to look after ,

M a m a ha la , m a g ca li n ga .
To t e nd to care for an i m ate beings

,
. M a g a la g a .
To live to possess m eans of living

,
. M a m uha y .
To instil life . M a gb uha y , m a g p a b uha y b u m uha y , .
To p u ll off M unot , m a mun o t ( fro m b i m o t )

’
. . .
M a m u no ( fro m p on o “
co m m e n c e
To co m m en ce , to start ,
m ent ; m a g p a s i m u la
.
g
.
Then therefore D i y a ta , cay a n a

g
, . .
You alone were here then you ,

I c ao l am a n g ang n a rl ri to, cay a n a
are the thief . i c ao ang m a g na n aca o .
I s i t possible ? D
g y i a t a ?
I s i t possible he died ?
dD i y a t a bag a i , n a m at ay siy a? ,
So m e w a y or other . Sa hi g p i t at s a lo u s g .
E ither for being tight o r for bei n g ,

Sa hi g p i t at s a lo u a g ang d a m it a y
loose the dress was th rown away .
y t i n a p o n .
A cco m plis hed perfect , . Sa cd a l

The pith of wisdo m . Sa c d a l c a ru n u nga n .
M ost learned . Sa c d a l na n g d unong .
The pith of purity . Sa c d a l cali nisan .
The purest . A n g s a c da l nan g lini s .
The hardest . A n g s a cda l n ang tig as .
Outshining . Sa c da l dil a g .
L ittle by little . On ti o n ti inot i not , .
To stop to halt , . M a g hi n to hu m i n t o , .
To halt here an d there . M a g hi n tohi n to .
Do n ot stop there . H o u a g cang hu m i n to diy an .
Thanks Well and good

. . Sa lam at Di siy ang sal am at
. .
We lco m e l welco m e to you , . Sal am at at du m a ti n g ca .
L ucky to be lucky
, . P a la ri n .
U nfortunate to b e unlucky , . Sa m ing p alad ( fro m s a md)

-
.
If I have good luck . Cu n ac e i p i n a p ala d

, , .
He wa s unlu ck y . Si ya, i , s in am a .
THE ADVEHE 333
‘
To t hi n k it ust j . M a ta p a ti n z zma rap a ti n .
hard . M a hi ra p i nz zm ab i g a ti n .
obvious . M a g aa n i n .
sweet M a t a m 1s 1n
b
.
Does s he thin k th e practice of cg

M i n a m a hi ra p ag a niy a ang pag gau a -
vi rtue hard nang ca b a n a la n ?

b
.
She thinks it sweet to ear g ri e v a n M i na m a ta m i s n iy a ang p a g ti ti i s nang

‘
ces for the sa k e of Jesus Ch rist . b irap alang al ang cay J e s u c ri s to -

.
The north The south A n g hi la g a a n A n g ti m u ga n

g
. .
. .
The c a s t . A ng s i la n ga n a n , silan an .
The west A n g c a lu n or a n
g
. .
The wi nd blo w s fro m the north H u m i hi la g a ang han i n

g
. .
The wi nd blows fro m the south Tu n g m i ti m og ang h an in

J
. .
N o rth -
east wind . Sa b a las n or d es te ( Sp )
,, . .
N orth -
west wi nd . H a b ag a t .
I t ong d aan it o i t u ng mu tu n go s a da
This road leads to the west , ,
.
cong ca lo n o ra n
To M a g p fi ga y
’
ta ke o fi one s hat in r everence . .
Why do you not take off y o u r ha t B a i t h ind i m i ang

’
f
q u o p n a u a
gp g y a n
g
i n reverence to the priest? pare ?
To inv ite entertain , . M a m i gu i n g , m a gp i g u i ng .
To take leave of . M a gp a a la m .
To dress to put on clothes ,

. M a gs é ot .
To change clothes . M a g b i hi s .
F lE TY FI F TH E X E R CI SE
-
.
Ha s
the tai lor m uch m oney ? He has ut little Why do b .
you n o t go t o night to the m eeting ? I cannot go I a m so m ewhat i ll ? ,
Has the carpent er m ore nails than ha m m ers ? He has less ha m m ers than
n ails Have you too m uch utter? I have not enough What ti m e is it? b
w b
. .
I t i s nearly noon Di d they all go ? A ll of the m en t

. ut hi m .
Does i t thun der h ard ? I t does not thunder but it rai ns hard A re ,
.
you the brother of m y friend ? Yes I s i t t ru e t ha t he paid ? It . .
i s i ndeed
,
A re you a m erchant ?
. No Shall we go to m ass ? N either .
you nor you r brother m ust go Why shall I not do thi s ? Do not .
do that lest y o u hurt yoursel f

,
Shall he co m e ? L e t hi m co m e . .
Do you chance to h ave so m e m oney about you ? I do not know if

w
, ,
perchance I have so m e I ill give it to you What i s F aith ? F aith

, .
,
say the holy fathers i s to believe what we have not seen What
,
.
.
i s the a m ount o f Peter s debt? P eter s debt says m y son a m ounts

’ ’
, ,
to thi rty dollars Did you then speak to hi m ? Truly I did speak
.
, , ,
to hi m When will he write u s ?

. He will write you said he so m e , ,
day . Will you m arry her ? I w ill m arry her anyho w But have .
you m oney enough to do that? N o but so m e way o r other I will do it , , .
How? L eave that to m y care What does the serv a nt do ? He looks .
after swine I s your grandfather still alive ? N o he i s dead What m i racles

J
. .
, '
did esus Chri st Work? He gave life to m any Does your sister pull off .
he r hair ? She does I s it possible ? She i s m a d so she does m any .

,
foolish things Is his m other virtuous ? She i s the very pith of virtue
. .
I s your se rvant dirty ? He is the dirtiest How shall I write the letter ? Write
b w
.
i t little y little Does their servant wal k quickly ? He alks very

w d
. .
Did yo u tha nk M ary

’
s l o ly , he halt s here an there at every s ho p .

334 THE TA G A Lo G LA NG U A GE .
for her present? I thanked her : Who i s there ? Ou r f rien is d

h ere welco m e F rankl Where do you go n o w ? I a m going to the
w
, ,
ga m bling roo m to see w hether I a m lucky

,
Ho di d you co m e .
,
out fro m ga m bling ? I was unlucky I lost all m y m oney Do y ou not , .
think i t hard to lose m oney i n that way ? I do not think it

sweet What quarter does the wi n d blow fr om ? I t blows fro m
.
,
t he north Where does thi s path lead ? . I t leads to t he southern

shore To who m does that boy t ake hi s hat off ?
. He takes off his
hat to his m aster Did your father i nvite hi m ? He did Have you . .
‘
anything else to say ? No I now take leave of you What are

w
, .
you doing th ere i n the roo m ? I a m putting on m y clothes Ho .
often do you change clothes ? I change to clean clothes eve ry week .
F I F TY S I X TH L E S SO N
—
.
YC A L I M A N G P O U O , T, A N lM NA P A G A R AL .
H E P R E P OS I TI O N
T .
The versatile character of Tagalog words and their capa ility to b

perfor m the function s of different parts of speech a p p lies largely to
adverbs prepositions and conj unctio ns The m utual relations of words
,
.
are expressed i n Tagalog in several ways and for m s o f expression only

the purpose for hich the words establishi ng th e relations are used w ,
according to the syste m ati c division esta l i s hed y gra m m ar serve to b b ,

,
classify the m as adve rbs or prepositions So m e of these aptly i llustrate .
the difficulty o f classi fying Tagalog words accordi ng to the pa rts of

,
s peech usually recognised by gra mm arian s The no m inal liga m ents .
m a y also be used i n Tagalog as p repositions .
T0 ,
at Before facing .
,
. Sa , cay ca n a , Sa har a p , s a tapat .
U nder Sa i lali m
b
. .
N ear y ,
. Sa m e y , s a piling s a s i ping , .
With a long wit h ,

. Sa nang cay can a sab ay , ach ay
, , , , .
With by th rough A gai nst

, ,
. . N an g d a hi la n s a
. L aban s a . .
Of N ang s a n i cay nin a, can a, n a , n g g

"
. , , , , ,
.
F ro m Sa n an g , g aling s a , m ula , m ul a s a
‘
.
, .
In at A m ong
, . . Sa . Sa .
Between . Sa s a guitn a na s a guitn a

, , .
Towards to , . D a p i t daco s a daco

, , .
Till until To as far as

, .
,
. Hang an Hang an . .
Fo r Without Sa cay can a U al a c ulang

b b
. .
, , .
, .
On u pon a out
, , . Sa nang
, agay s a to n g co l s a
, , .
Behind . Sa licod .
as a p reposition i s fo r every case of a co m m on noun ex

Sa , , ,
cept the no m inative and the vocative ( no m i native of addres s ) I t

'
”
should be put before the ; obj ect of possession and not before th e
possessor when used for the possessive case Sa i s ex clusive for the .
dative .
The d ep th Of the r iver .
333 525; fi g
1
1 1 11
83 n
o
cla la li m an , 07 : 3118 03 1
11 ‘
He was by the tree . N ariy an siy a s a m a y c ab oy

I did it through charity : G u i n a u a co d a hila n s a au a .
A n g p a g to ton gay a o a y ca s a la n a n g la
Blasphe m y is a si n against God
ban Dios
.
s a
N as a p repositio n governi ng the possessive and o j ective

a ng , b
( direct obj ect ) case has been so fully treated of i n
,
foregoing chapters
as to dispense w ith the need of further expla n ations N a ng ( prepo .
s i ti o n ) governing
,
the ablative case de notes the i nstr u m ent when the
lat ter ha s not been referred to by the i nst ru m ental passive for m .
Cover that with a mat . Ta e p an m o iy an n ang b anig .
H i n a m p as niy a ang c a n i y an g alila

He whipped hi s servant with a stri ng
n an g li i b i r
. ’
B a i t i n a a n i i n a i to nang cara
Why di d
u g u u
m y m other do this with d q
a needle ? y o m ? o r , db aq u i t ang y g u i na u a ni
i n a nit o a y ang c a ray o m ?
He i s praised by every body . Pi n u p u rl siy a nang lahat .
They killed the cock roach by

i N ang
-
Pi n a tay n tla ang i pis nang y apac

sta m ping i t
.
m a m a g u i ta n z s a p a m a m a g u i ta n
He obtained the o ffice through the
nang ca n iy an g a m a a y q u i n a m tan
‘
influence of his father .
niy a ang ca tu n g c o la n .
The preposition E ngli sh

i s translated in several ways “ ’
of .
When denoting possession i t is al w ays translated by n a ny m m n d

' '
b
, , ,
placed efore the possessor ( but after the obj ect of possession ) o r by
b
,
s a ca y ca mi placed
, ,
efore the possessor i n the m anner already explain
, ,
ed according to the possessor being represented respectively by a

, , ,
co mm on a personal n oun or a n oun of co m panionshi p

, , , .
The ear of the dog . A n g ta i n ga n ang aso .
’
Joseph s book A n g libro n i J o s e .
The house of the M a ka y s . A n g b ahay ni n a M ackay .
The sa m e i s the ca se if the relation i s m erely adj ectival .
The bank of the river A ng tab i nang ilog

g
. .
The glory of Heaven . A ng c a lo u a lha ti a n n a ng z s a lan it
Fo r translating E nglish co m pound noun s having the preposition

“ ”
of understood between t heir m e m bers the followi ng di rections are given , .
If
the relation i s on e of m atter the ,
two m e m bers are tied
together by the no m inal liga m ents ,
the m atter following the thing .
Stone house . B ahay n a bat o .
G old ring . Singsi ng na gui nt o .
Silver looking '
glass . Sa la m i ng p i la c .
Steel pen . Plu m a n g p a ta li m ; a s e ro

w
l
the relation i s one of origin th e placing of the two words

If ,
i n t he sa m e order m a y be sufficient ; the liga m ent should be use d

i f the word ends i n a vowel although 8 a 18 genera lly i ntroduced ,
without any liga m ent .
Berli n flowers . Bula c lac Berlin bulac lac s a Berli n

—
,
-
.
Ilocos m a n . Ta u on g I loco tau t) s a I loco

,
.
Ca la m i a n e s wax
1 P a c q u i t Ca la m i a n e s p a c q u i t s a Cala ,
m ianes
.
THE PR EPO SI TI O N . 337
d
a
c ori t e n ts
“
The li ga ments are use fo r of i n the re la ti on of
’
‘
Tw o pecks of rice . D a lau an g salo p na b igas

glass of water I s ang v a s o n g t11b i g
’
A . .
A pitcher of cocoa nut oi l -

. Is ang ta p a y a n g lan gi s .
Sa also expresses application or the use for which a thing i s i ntend d e .
Prayer book ook for praying

-
,
b . L i bro s a d asal .
Water gl a ss Vaso s a t11b i g i no m an

’
.
.
,
M ass gar m ents . Da m it s a p a g m i m i s a .
H a ng d n i s used both fo r ti m e and pl ace .
F ro m to day until to
- -
m orro w . B uhat n ay on hang ang ucas g b .
F ro m here to Cavite M ula dit o han g an s a Cavite

’
. .
Other
preposition s are translated according to th eir sense i n the
'
way already explai ned .
He f orced a passage a m ong the 7

Su n g m a g a s a siy a s a c a ra m i ha n
crowd ; .
b
.
Sa gu itn a ( p a g u i ta n ) na n g ahay at
Between the house an d the garden
n a n g ha la m a n a n
.
3
b
.
The path toward s the forest A n g land as f a d acong g u at . .
The dog without a tail A n g ason g u a lan g ( cu1a n g nan g )b o n to t

.
:
.
b
He speaks a out the m arri a ge
N a n go n gos a p siy a to n g co l s a p a g a a
s au a
.
The house behind th e chu rch A n g b ahay s a licod nang si m bah an . .
A m i able Delightful Ca i bi g i big

. Ca i o u a tou a ca li g a li ga y a .
, .
How de li g httu l t o listen to the sing Ca li g a li g a y a p a q u i n g an an g hun i nang

i ng of the birds . m an a ibon g .
Terrible ghastly , Horri ble . Ca ta c o t tacot Ca s i n da cs i n dac

. . .
G loo m y sorrowful
, Ca lu m b a y lu m b ay ca lu n o s lu n o s
.
, .
P ainful . Ca ha p i s ha p i s .
G allant courageous vi c torious

, Bayani, . .
To tear down to cl e ave , L u m ap a c . .
Her house i s a place of reso rt for A n g b ahay n i y a i b ahay na pinapa , ,
m any people ( to go u p ) p a n h i c a n nang m. a ra m i n g ta u o .
Hell i s a place of tor m en t for si n A n g i m p i e r n o ang p i n a g hi hi ra p a n nang

ners . m an a m a c a s a la n a n g .
Why do you not place those ch ai rs gBaq u i t hind i m o p i n a g ta ta p a t i y ang

facing each other? m an a u p o a n ? g
b
P u t also the two eds facing each Pa g ta p a ti n m o na m an ang da la u an g
other hi hi g a a n
Why had you thi s child whi pped ? gA n o t p i n a ha m p a s m o i t ong ata ? , , b
Be ca Us e he gri m aces at m e Sa p a g ca t a c o i p i n a n gi s i ha n niy a
g
.
, , , , .
H o u a g m ong p a g li b a q u i n a n g m an a
Do not scorn at the poor
duc ha
.
-
.
FI F TY SI X TH —
E X E R CI SE .
Why i s A n n a lways at the wi n dow? She i s a lways at the
w indow becau se s he likes to see peo ple passin g by Why do you '
b
.
,
change to new clothes ? I cha nge to new clothes ecause I in ns t go ,

388 THE TA GA L OG L AN GUA GE .
to ch u ch
r w
Ho ma ny ti me s oe s he un res s hi m sel f ev e ry da y ? He d d
d b w d
.
u n res s e s hi m self only o n goin g to ed Is b e e m po ere to i mp ri

w
.
s on m e ? He has no po er ( authority ) to do th a t do not fear he ca n , ,
do nothing to you How can that b e ? I t cannot be

. A m I v e ry .
s ick ? N o you can still recover

,
Is b e wi se ? N o b ut h e can still .
,
beco m e wi se H o w wi ll you re w ard m e ? I have n othing with which

w
.
to reward you What ha s happened ? . There as an ea rthquake yes

te rda y a n d o ur house t u m bled down Where i s Go d? Go d i s every .
Where i s Jesus Chri st n o w ? Jesus Christ i s n o w i n Heaven

‘
where .
at the righ t of the F ather Who i s ha ppy ? The m a n who i s i n

,
.
the grace o f Go d i s happy Where i s P eter s house ? I t i s i n the .
m iddle of the c ocoa n ut plantation Wi th what did he s e w his trowsers ?

w
-
.
He se w ed the m ith a needle and so m e thread With wha t s ha ll I .

“
m ake this ? M ake i t with an a ng e r Whose shi ps are these ? They .
are Wise Co m pany s Shall I write the letter i n pencil ? Yes

’
.
,
write the letter i n penci l How did he kill the wild bo a r? He .
killed i t with a spear What houses a re those i n your town ? A ll

b b
.
of the m ut th ree are ni p a houses Have you ought any gold ear .
rings ? N o I have bought three wooden i m ages F ro m where h ave

d
.
,
those pieces of furniture co m e ? They are Vienn a furnitu re What kin .
of shell i s that? I t i s Cavi te shell H o w m any pecks of rice did .
you sell ? I sold three pecks of rice a nd two bottles of wi n e Where

b
.
i s the ri ce pot? The rice pot i s at the corne r of the ta le

-
Which .
cat i s your friend looking for? The three legged one Which is ,
-
.
the m ost courageous a m ong you ? The m ost courageous i s Henry s

’
fri end Do yo u wish t o go by this pi rogue ? I do n o t wish to i t i s

.
,
a pirogue where m any e m bark I s there anythi ng m o re horri ble than .
an earthquake ? A n earthquake is i ndeed a horri ble thing I s Joh n s ’
w
, , .
h ouse high ? It i s very high Ho m any houses has your father

b
.
uilt? He has bu ilt three A re they n ipa o r sto ne houses ? Tw o of .

-
the m are sto ne the other is a wood house Do you like to li ve i n a

,
.
nipa h ouse ? Yes indeed ho w delightful it i s to live i n a nipa house !

-
d w
, ,
’
When o you go to your friend s ? I ill go to hi m n ext Sunday .
F I F TY S E V E N TH L E S S O N
- .
YC A L I M A N G P O U O , T, P I TO N G PA G A R A L .
TH E C O N U N C TI O N J .
words a nd particles which we are already ac quai nted wi th

M any
as adverbs o r p reposition s are likewise used as conj un ction s for co n
n e c ti n g two sentences o r wo rds i n various ways o nly thei r function ,
i n the sentence or clause serves to disti nguish which part of speech

t he y are
The followi ng m ay be classed as .
Co p u la t i v e c m ju n c t i o ns .
A nd A t a y , n i , nang , sac a
w ll
.
, .
As as both li kewi s e even

e , , ,
. P ati sa m p on sac a, sab ay ,
, ,
ca s a m a
A lso even likewise besides m ore
i N a m a11 pa
, , , ,
o v er furtherm o r e , .
N ot o nly
, .
bu t . Hind i l ama ng cund i b a gcfi s .

340 THE TA G A L O G L A N GUA GE .
m )
g ana siy a n oong 1885
N an o n ang anac
pa n oong 1886 sac a nan g

f8%%
Sh
,
r e 8”
cahuli
an e as 1“
huli ay 1900 .
,
Pa ti , as Copulative conj un ctions are m o re

s a mp on , ca s a bay , ,
e m pha tic than a t and denote an idea of a closer connectio n o f t he

words or sentences they serve as a li nk to Th ey a re so m e ti m e s u sed .
to avoid repeating a t an d for the sake of eupho ny They govern the

,
.
n o m n ativ e case unless the n ou n they lin k b e preceded by the a rfi c le ,
in which case they generally go v ern the possessive The n of s a mp on .
m a y be dropped before a word beginn ing with th e sa m e co nsonant .
Soul as well as b ody .

( Ca lo lou a pati c a t a o u an
( Ca lo lou a sa m p o n ang c a ta o u an
.
A n g guint o s a si m bahan pati n a n g

Bo t ] th s go ld l l th church and i
tl e i S] iver 1“ t he ke
ouse .
p i la c s e b ahay A n g guint o s a si 1n
bahan sa m p o nang p i la c s a b ahay

.
.
~
E ven w
hat h e eats , he borrows . P ati nang q u i n a cai n i n o ot a n g ni y a .
The coward an d even the brave P ati n a n g m a nga m a tap a n g s a m p o n a n g

g
,
all of the m fled . m a n a d ou a g a y n a gt a c b o ha n .
The night i s still and the sea i s Ta hi m i c ang gab l, a n g d agat a y p a

z
,
cal m and the bree e i s m i ld

,
. ya pa , sa m p o n ang han gi i , a m ihan , .
and p a are postpositive conj unction s a n d p a i s so m eti m es

N a m cm
'
used for expressing surpri se o r relucta n ce to do so m ething N a man i s

'
largely used where it would appear to u s r e dundan t ( 1) .
A lso y o u shall puni sh ed be . I c ao n a m a i p a ru r u s a ha n

, , .
A n d still I a m
to go there ? A c o pa ang a ro r oo n ?
d p
I could not do it and you can ? Di co nagan a, gi c ao pa ?
A lte r na t i v e c o n u nc t i o n s
j .
Or . 0, ( Sp )cay a dili cun

.
, , .
Whet her . Man .
E ither M a gu i n o
d
.
To m orrow or the ay after to Bucas <3 s a m a c a la na m a g ba b ay a d

‘
-
ay
m orro w I w ill pay . a co .
You o r I . I c ao o a co .
Ca y a
should b e used at the end i n alternative sentences . It
d enotes doubt .
This m onth or perhaps i n June . N ga y on g b ouan ,

s a J unio cay a .
D i li
as an alterna t ive conj un ction i s a lso p aced at the end It
‘
.
, , .
i nclud e s the conj uncti on and t he n eg a tive a dve rb a n d i s generally em
ployed in interrogative sentences pu tting forth a di le m m a .
Do you wish o r not? , d big m o , d ili ?

i
Shall I acco m pany you o r not? , dS a s a m a ha n quit a, dili ?
M an always a postpositive parti cle which only di fi e rs f ro m
1s ,
di li i n the latte r being used in te rrog a tively .
Whethe r he goes or not , Pa roo n m a n si y a di m a n siy a p a roo n .
Whether h e says i t or not what is Sa b i hi n m a n d i m a n niy a s a b i hi n da y

that to you ? anhi n m o ?
( 1) Se e Te n h L e s s o n. t
THE CO N J UN CTI O N .
M a g u i n (g ) i s
used i n the m anner alr e ady exp lained for the cor ,
relati ve conj unctions eith e r or

“
.
M aguing s a a q u i n g b ahay m aguin g s a

E ither at house o r at yours we
my
i y o m a g o os a p t a y o t o n g c o l s a b agay
’
shall s p eak about that m atter ,

.
n a iy an .
M ag u ing s a M ay n ila m a guing s a

E ither at M anilaor N e w York
”
-
,
N ueva York li li m b co it ong “
yp a a g
-
I shal l p rint this wo rk ,
li b ro n g i to .
A dv e rs ativ e j
c o n u nc t i o n s .
But
N gu n i , t , cundi , d a ta p ou a , su b a li ali n,
tana .
N either , no r .
M a n hi ndi rin at hi ndi ri n
, , , .
R ather than . Cu n d i b a g cfi s m ona bag o , ,

.
M an baga m an bist a _ m at ay m an,

Thou gh
' ,
,
although .
c a hi t , c a hi m a n
,
.
,
In spite of ,
w ith all that .
Man
y an m a n
, g a n oo n
.
m an, gay on man, gan i
Whereas .
Pa li b ha s a , i , .
N evertheless h o w e v e r n otw i th
, ,
Subali d a ta p ou a
standing yet still
.
,
.
, ,
A lthough if .
Su c dan , m a y ap a t , m at ay .
O r else o therwi se
,
. Cu n df
the adversati ve conj u nctions e nding i n a vowel cu n di an d

A ll ,
excepted take the contracted fo r m of after the m P

’
p a h bh as a at
,
a .
li bha s a i s followed by y z i the contracti n of the verbal liga m ent a y ,

o .
N g u m cu n di d a tap ou a _s u ba li a li n ta n a a re all used fo r every

‘ ’
, , , ,
“ ’
N gu m is u se d
'
s ense of the E nglish ad v ersative co nj u n cti on but

“
w
.
i n the subordinate sentence generally i n a ns ers and i s n ot p rope r , ,
to start a sentence .
I should like to eat b ut I can ,

Ibig co sanang cu m a i n , n g u ni t h ind i
n ot a co m a n g y a ri
di
. .
I saw hi m but I di d n ot speak , N a q u i t a co siy a, n

g u n i ,t , hi n co
to hi m . siy a i n os a p .
o
Ca n di
i s also for the su bordi nate sentence and generally re q u ires
th at the p ri ncipal on e e n e g ative b .
Itis not a m ale but a fe m ale ch ild Hindi lalaqui cund i ba aye a n g bata b
b
.
, .
,
Th i s 18 not a fi b ut the very , I t o i hi ndi ca s i n o n ga li nga n cund i ca

, , ,
truth . t o to ha n an g ganap .
D a tap é u a is w
so m e hat e m phati c and i s use d to m ake the con
tr a st m ore n oticea b le .
3H agg
M man S iy a da ta p é u a i t f 0111
30 8 P4
He i s ri ch but unhappy
”
,
, .
Do n o t d espise old people ,

b ut honor o u ag
man g
ca n g m a g p a u a lan g ha la g a s a
a m a g fi la n g d a ta p ou a t p u
t he m .
, , ,
ri hi n m o sil a .
“
Su ba li
”
and
”
li n ta na have
a a w
so m e hat co n itio nal i mp or t d as
b ut for ,
“
except , i n E nglish .
b
I would uy so me cloth i ng b ut ,
I b igco san ang b u m i li n a u g da m it ,
for m y not havi ng any m oney . s u b a li t ual a a c on g salap i

, ,
H e w a s c u re d b u t with a lltha t he died

,
G u i n a m o t siy a a li n ta n a t n a m at ay
,
.
M a n and hi n di r i n
are correlative conj unctions used p o s tp o s
i t i ve ly ; ma n , ge nerally , i n
t he fi rst m e m ber ; a nd hi n di r i n i n the ,
last ; it being e m ployed as correlative of ma n and for the sake of a greater

e mphasi s .
N either I
nor even he A c o m a n siy a m a n hi nd i ri n
b
. .
,
We have neither betel n or even

'
U al a ca m ing m a m i n =hi cho m a n ta a

b
.
to acco . co m a n .
H i ndi r i n m a y co m e at the b eginn ing of a sentence whe n used

as an e m phatic neg ative adverb .
w
Ho wise soever we m a y be we , Ca hi t an e ng m a r11n o n g ca m i a y hi n
'
can not concei ve ( sound ) the e s di rin n a t i n m ataroe ang p a g ca d l o s

sen ce of G o d . n a ng Dios .
Ca n di and ba g ong m ore especia lly the latter are used i n t he sense of
b
, ,
rather , and oth of the m m a y j oi n i n the sa m e sentence .
Whatever you r condition m a y e Gahit a n o a g p a g ca la g ay m u h indi b '
do not give y o u rs e lf u p to despai r m o p a g p a t i u a ca l cund i b a g c11s m a

’
, ,
b u t rather trust in G o d ni ua i a s a Dios

. .
N o t only h e does not gai n ( earn ) Hi nd i l am ang di n a q u i q u i n ab a n g

'
, ,
but rather he loses by the trade cundi n a ngu ngu lu g u i pa s iy a . .
Hi ndi l am ang m a g a li n g b a c s n a g
N o t only not s o
.
un d b u t r a t he r i ll ,
ca ca s a q m t
, .
B a g a mci n bi s td ma tdy ma n , ca hi t= ca hi t, and the co m pound

w
, , ,
ca hi ma n o r ca hi ma , t , co m e before ; ma n , after the ord they refer to .
Jo hn though poor i n
, m oney is rich Baga m an si Juan a y d u o ha -
, s a p u rl
1n honesty . na m a i m aya m an siy a .

, ,
B i s ta , bi s ta , t , bi s ta t i s m ore ,
fo rmal an d its use 18 rapidly dy ing a way .
Bista t siy a i n a g da da lang p oot s a

Th ough he is angry with m e he , , , , '
,
aquin a y b i b i g u i an di n n iy a a co
will give m e th e m oney ,
.
nang salap i .
M a tay ma n i s e m phati c and m ay stand for “

m uch ,
’
ev er s o
w ith a verb .
Thi nk I ever so m uch abo ut i t I ,

M at ay co m a n i s i p i n , hind i a co nacata
cannot understand i t ta la s tas
w
. .
Though m y earnest desire as to

M a t ay m a n a co n a ca i b i g p a ri t oz p u
-
co me here I could n ot gather

s tr e n th e nou g h
g
,
.
m a ri to, a y i co m aca ya na n d
If t he b
senten ce i s oth interrogative an neg a ti ve an
“
d d the for m
with a no is e m ployed th e l atter m a y e suppressed
,
'
b .
,
Why di d he not co m e ? dA t di siy a n a p a ri to?
“
At a n d, ay a t, a y a nd are i n quisitive expression s for what of?
what a ou t? b ” “
ho w i s i t abo ut ?
What about you r law suit ? -
g A t a n o an g os a p m o ?
A n d as to the m arri a e what? A t a n g t u n g co l s a p a g ca s a l, da y an o ?
w b
-
,
Ho i s it a ou t the m oney ? gA y a n o ang sala p i ?

C
“ ” “ ’
B aq ni t t lSO denotes as ,
how .
AS you are also a rogue . B eq u i t i c ao ay ta m p a la s a n na m an .
A n d so ho w do yo u not do i t ?
,
A
d y b a q u i n di g u i n a g a u a m o?
mo n a q u i ta ng ly s
lY
i
N ow ,
do y Ou not see i t i s nonsense ? , ,
a ma ng
Si nce
( whereas )you b roke the plate y a y a m a n g b i na s a g m o ang
s
,
pay for i t p i n g an , i y on g bayaran .
Because I laughed he beca m e ,

Sa p a g ca , t ac c, i , n a p a t au a , n a g a li t
,
angry a
.
siy .
H di
. 0
o n a ca p a p a roo n , at aco , 1 m a y
I cannot go fo r I am sic k gl a
p
,
.
,
z
u
She re fuses ecause he i s old ,

b . N a n a y ao
siy a ang siy a i m a ta n d i na , , , .
He does n o t pay for he is poor Di siy a n a g ba b ay a d at siy a i m a hi ra p

b
.
, , , .
You d i d n o t elieve m e hence you r , Di m o a c o p i na n i u a la a n m an aa ang ,
m isfortune . c a hi r a p a n mo .
Sa m a y also b e a causativ e co j unction n .
he did not co me , I w ent there S di siy a a ri to, n a p a roo n aco

’
As .
p . a na .
Co n d i t i o n a l j
Cu n .
Cu n l am ang , ho u a g l am ang .
Cundi l am ang liban , s a cun diri

, la
U n 1e s s .
m ang
g
.
L est .
Were i t not for . M ac a, bac a Dan an .
, c u n da n g an .
Ca n and cu n d a ng a n
‘
etc generally co m e efo re the no m inati ve case

. b ‘
I f he scolds you , do not b eco m e Cu n i c ao a y auayan n iya hou a g ,

cang
angry . m a g ali t .
I f he looks for you Cu n ha n a p i n ca niy a

g
. .
Were i t not for hi m I should have , Gundan an siy a, ha ha m p a s i n sana

beat you . cat a .
Were it n o t fo r ni r L o rd Je s us
Ch rist having redee m ed us all
Gu ndan gan ang ating Pa n gi n oo n si
, ,
Jesucri sto a y s u n g m a c o p s a ati ng
of us wou ld certainly have been ,
t a yong lahat a y n a p a ca s a m a r m
da m ned .
.
THE CON J UN Cr roN '
.
dd
In a ition to the a ove m entioned con i tione b d d i m port ca n is
d w w
,
too i n the follo ing ays

‘
us e
With the force of a relative pronou n .
A n d t hey shal l call hi s nam e

E m m an uel , whi ch i s b e i p g i n
At ang pa n galan g -
y ta t au a g s a ca
n i y a, i , E m m anuel n a cun s a s a y s a
G o d wi th u s ( S
,
t e r p r e te d t
yi n a y s u n g m a s a a t i n ang Dios
. .
,
Math .
,
chapt . l, vers .
I t is
frequ e ntly u sed expletively at the beginni ng of the senten ce ,
or it be considered that i t connects what i s sai d i n th e sequel

m ay
to so me unspoken thought .
Whosoever m a y e i n n eed o f let b -
i Cu n si no m an ang ibi g m ag s a bi
,
ay
hi m say so ( I f any one etc )
. .
. .
He who m a y be l n want ( i f any one Cu n si no m an n a g ca ca i la n ga n n a n g

.
b
e i n want) of a Tagalog gra m is ang g ra m ati ca n g ( ba la ri la )t a g alog ,
m a r let hi m c om e to m e or let
, , a y p u m a ri tb siy a s a aquin o p u m a r o ,
hi m go to E dgar s for it
’
. on s i y a ca y E dg a r at s i y a i b i bi g y an , , ,
-
.
It i s so m eti m es used as an alternative conj unctio n .
Plural i s the nu m er of either two b A n g plural a y b

ang ilang cun d a la u a
or m ore ( m any )person s or t hings ,
6 m a ra m i n g tau t) o b agay cay a .
So m eti m es
t oo t he clause o r t he sen tence depending o n a p re
, ,
ceden t one with a verb ei ther expressed o r u nders tood setting forth an
b
, .
act of cognition y t he m ind i s i ntroduced by ca n i f 1n q u i ry doub t ,
or t he result of any suc h m enta l activi ty i s to be indica t ed .
( A sto ) who co m posed The F lo “

Cung sino ang cu m a tha na ng Flo
ran te ( a poe m ). . rante .
I do no t know who ha s told it Di ac o n a ca ca ala m c u n c a n m o n g s m a b i

w g g
. .
I now kno q uite well who i s N a la la m a n co n a n ay on cun si no

th e thief . ang m a g n a n aca o .
”
The
conj un ction co rrespon ding to th e E ngli sh as “
whi ch i s
d
, ,
use i n the first of t wo co m parati ve clauses co rrelative to so m ay

be preceded y ca n i n Tagalog b .
,
As the m aster so the servant

Cu n p a a n o ang p a n gi n o o n ay gay on
,
.
din na m an ang alila

g
.
as i n h e aven so on earth . cun p a a n os a lan it gay on di n

( St . M ath cha pt 6 vers .
, .
, . na m an s a l upa .
followi ng illustration s will show the

The us e of the other con
j unctions of thi s group .
I s hall give it to you provided you ,

Bi b i g u i an cat a ho u a g , l am ang sabi
do not say i t hin m o
w
. .
He ill n ot go unless I order ,

Hind i siy a p a ro ré on ,
liba n n a s a
hi m so . siy a i , ,
o to s a n co .
H ou a g cang tu m a cb o m ac a m a holog
Do n ot run lest you fall down ,
,
ca or m ac a ic ao a y m a holo g
.
, ,
Go qui ckly l e st , d ark surprise Pa ro on cang m a da li m ac a m a g a b i ha n ,
you on the road . ca s e d aan .

i lla t i v e j
Well then that is the reaso n w hy

, . Cay a cay a n a , y a y a m a n g
, g .
Con sequen tly . D i y a ta s a m a ca to u i r

,
.
I nas m uc h i n so far as , . Ya y a m a n g .
That i n order that That

,
. . N ang upang N a . . .
You have been called since you , Ti n au a g c a , y a m a n g ic ao a y m a g a li ng ,
are well go , .
p a roo n e a .
Pa hb ha s a I a s 1y an g b fi q m d ’ ung
As he has no far m he leases on e ual .
,
m u u p a S1y a
.
Isaw hi m yesterday consequently ,

N a q u i ta co siy a ca ha p o n , s a m a ca to u i r
( therefore )he did not e m bar k . hi ndi siy a s u n g m a cay zn a ca s a c ay .
He can do i t i nas m uch as he is M a n g y a y a ri n g g a o i n niy a y a y a m a n g

king
- . siy a, i , hari .
The m os t i m portant conj unctions of this group a re n a ng and na .
He says that I slept . N a g s a s a bl siy a na a co i n a tolo g , , .
E ndeavo r to be vi rtuous that you M a g p a ca b a n a l cay o n a n g = u p a n m a g '
m a y be h a ppy here and i n the life c a p ala d cay o dit o s a lupa at sa c a s a

to co m e cabil ang b 11ha y
’
. .
A llow yourself to b e cured i n M a g p a g a m o t ca , n ang ic ao a y g u

order that you m a y recover . m aling .
the contracted for m of the article a ny i s prefixed to the

A, ,
possessive case of nouns o r personal p ronoun s a n d used the sa m e ,
as u i ca when quo tatio n of o r reference to the words or sayi ngs of

,
such persons o r texts as i ndicated by the word to wh ich i s prefixed

”
I t so m ewhat co m pares wi th the defective “
are to be expressed quoth .
in E nglish .
G o d says or said , . A nang Dios .
P eter says o r sai d ,

. A n i P edro .
The Holy Scripture says . A nang San to ng Sti la t .
Says or sai d he
, . A n iy a .
J esus Christ says said ,

. A n i Jesucristo .
Says , sai d the A postle . A nang ap ostol .
I say sai d
, They say sai d .
, . A naq u in A nil a . .
We say said , . A n a m i n a n a ti n ,
I ssue result consequence

, , . Ca s a p i ta n .
N i s inserted for e u phony s sake ’

when the possessive b egins
W 1th a vowel as seen i n a n a q u i n etc , ,
.
F I F I Y SE V E N TH E X E RCI S E
‘
-
.
Who went to school ? Clara an d M atilde went to school ,

.
you taste the wine I sent you ? Yes I ha v e alre a dy tasted i t A nd ,
what do y o u think i t good ?

, N o I think i t bad Where do you ,
.
,
go ? I a m going do w n to the garden if you give m e per m i ssion ,

.
Do you per m it m e to go ? Yes but do not g a ther any fruit for , ,
i t is still green ; lest you feel pai n i n your teeth Where sh all I si t?
b w d
.
Do n o t e seated o n that chair for i t i s broken Ho id L i n col n , .

A r oy za r a y
t
1s e x c lu s l v e ly f o r sudden or i ntense p am .
i A r oy ! ar ay !
A r oy ! ( m a s a q u i t l
i
I na (30 is an excla m ation i m porting su rpri se or wonder .
Oh m oth er ! I( na co !
Oh m other , ! the rain ( how hard it
j I co ! an g 01 an
.
na
.
'
rains ! )
.
A m ong other excla m ation s ,

t he following are frequently u s ed
Oh how A
( y aa l .
( always postponed )
Oh ,
how p retty ! i Bu tl a y aa !
I t is a pity ! i Sé y a n g !
What a pity so ,
m uch m oney lost ! js ay a n g ang salapi gay ong m ara m i !
Would to G o d ! [ C a hi m a n a u a r i l i n a u a! m aa n o n !
i g
Ca hi ma n a n a r i and m a a nong are used efore b , n a na after the ver b .
Would to G o d he m ight attai n Ca hi m a n a u a ri m a ca m té n
Heaven . g
lan it .
Would to G o d he would die . M aa n o n g siy a, i m a m atay , .
Would to G o d he m a y C m e o . D u m a t i n g siy a nau a .
Be quick ! A way ! jD a li ! S long !

’
j ll
Back ! Beware ! j O r o n g ! i T a b i !
Hush ! silence ! H
j o u a g m a g u i ngay !
Be si lent ! i Ho u a g cang m a g m gay !
g
-
Bravo ! P oor thing ! ! But i n a ! [ C a au a au a !
Oh G o d ! F ury ! jA y Dio s co ! iL i n t i c !
and bap da have rare use nowadays and are postposi tive
A y da
i n terj ection s proper to express wonder A y ct a i s m ore i n use by
’
wo m en bap d a by m e n
,
Both o f the m m a y concur in the ph rase bap da
.
,
preceding to render the expressio n m ore e m p hatic

,
.
How pretty ! i D i q u i t a y a!
How great ! L
j q a u i bap s a ! l
i q u l hap aa
a ay é a !
H o w beautiful to see ! i G a n da b a p aa p a n o ori n !
When the thing obj ect o f wonder i s ex p ressed the secon d a of ,
bap d a , and a y aa i s transferr e d to th e end of the ad m i rati ve clause .
Oh how good thi s i s ! [ G aling bap a nito a !

Oh how sweet that is ! i Ta m is a y a n iy ang a !
Hyperbolical expressions can be m ade with p a g ca a nd and ca

,
, ,
pu t befo re the roo t i n th e possessive case Ca and p a g ca are prefixed .

.
The root m a y be repeated for the sake of greate r exaggerative sense The .
t on e of the voice an d even the gesture serve so m eti m es to render the

i nterj ec tion .
How i m m ense the sea is ! jPa g ca la q u i n ang d Ag a t !

p m g
j t gi i
i g l q t d l q u ‘ t n i tong m an a bu
H o w Pretty these flowers a re !
l l
A g
i
j n ong
p a g ca n m g n m g na n g m an a
H ow the stars sh i ne in a s tl ll n l g ht .
b 1to u i n s a i s ang g a lu g ta hi mi c ! b
Wha t a cro wd ! ( C a ra mi n
g ta u t)!
THE I N TERJ EOTI ON . 349
excla mati ve expression s m ay also e consi ere those for me

As b d d d
w ith t he prefix ca a n d the redupli cation of an (adj ective o r ver al root b
expressing an action of an a ffective kind i n th e w a y to e e x p la m e d b .
b
,
i n su sequent lessons .
How ta ll ! Ho long ! w j Ca t a a s ta a s l i C a ha b a h a b a l
How pit iful ! H o w gloo my ! iCaa u a au a ! i Ca lu n o s lu n o s l
How a m iable Jane i s ! ( Ca i b i g i big
-
si Juan a !
How horrible i s death ! C
j qa u i la q u i lab o t ang ca m at a yan !
I m precation s are greatly i n fashi on a m ong n atives E very ten se .

,
bu t especially the pas t o r t he i m pera tive i s used for t he purpose ,

.
M ay a cai m an sw a llo thee ! w jC a n i n ca nang b oa y a l

M ay the sea swallow hi m ! L a m o n i n siy a n ang d aga t !
j
M ay a flash ( thunderbol t )strike you ! j T i n a m aa n ca nang li n tic !
Would to G o d they would die ! [ M a a n o n g m a m a ay s il al

t
M a y a snake sting thee
’
.
i l u q u i n ca n ang a bas i
To b ury . Burying place . M a g li b i n g , m a g b a é n . Pa gb a b a o n a n .
Coffin Cab ao n g
‘
. .
To th ru s t i n , to d rive i n to . Tu m i ri c , m a g to lo s .
To carry on one s back M a m as an , m apas an

'
- -
. .
To endeavo r to force ? , P u m i li t , m a g p i li t .
To m el t away , t o m el t . M a t ti n a o , t u m fi n a o .
M el ted lead Tri n a o n a t ing a

b
. .
Decrea s e o f the m oon . Tunao n a ou an .
To open t o lay Open t o u ncover

, , . M a m u cas m a g b u c as , .
Order t ha t I be ad m itted in . Pa b u ca s a n m o a c o .
Order the m to uncover the i m a ge . Pa b u c s an m o s a ca n ila ang laraua n .
To j oin to collect to put together

, , . M a g ti p on m a g ipon ,
-
.
To a m ass to put on over again M a g s os o m

b
.
, .
To m i x ( certa in su stances to m ake

M a g s a la b a t
,
u p a beve rage called sala hat

)
.
A n a m ass m ent of m isfortunes Su s o n s u s o n g ca hi ra p a n

d
. .
A m edley of curses an foul words Sa las a la b a t na su m p a t t u n gay a o

b
. .
,
To bend to bend ack M a m a lo c to t

g
, . .
Twi sted horns . Ba lob a lo c to t n a s an ay .
To twine to twist to curl u p, , . M a gli ca o .
Wi nding way or passage . L i co li co n g d aan .
Tw is te d thorn s . L i ca o li ca o n a tini o .
M is ce laneous things . Sa ri s a r i n g b agay .
Variety of colors . Sa ri s a ri n g c ulay .
Trap snare slipknot

, , . Silo .
To lay traps for . M an ilo .
Bait Pain
w
.
.
To walk for a m usem ent .

M a gp a s i a l ( corr of Sp
“
to ta ke a
.ord p a s .
. ea r ,
Th pu b lic place for walking

e Pa s i a la n
Su b stitute d elegate successor
. .
, , . Ca ha li li .
The priest i s the delegate of G o d . A n g pare , i , ang ca ha lili n ang Dios .
To substit u te to act i n behalf of other H u m a li li

d
, . .
To plea for . M a g p i n ta e a s i .
i nte rce s s or, med i ato r .

Pi nta ca s ‘
i .
850 THE TA GA t OG LA N GUA GE .
The patron sain t A n g p i n t a ca s i .
To feign to personate others , .

M agp a nga p .
To disse m ble to counterfeit , .

M a g b a li n tu n a .
To please . M a g b i g ay lOo b .
To despise to scorn , .
M a gp a n a lé n g ha la g a, m a g a li p o s ta .
To a u g m ent . M a g d a g dag .
To elate to beco m e pro u d

, . M a g p a la lo .
To exalt oneself , M a g m a la q u i , m a g m a taa s .
A n g tan ong u n g m i i b i g m a g b i g ay lOo b

He w ho W i shes to please G Od m ust ) s a Dios d apat m a
gp u mi l i t u m i la g s a
endeavor to shun sin
p g a ca s a la
.
a c .
To 1n s p i re co m passion .
M a ca au a .
To cli n g to . Cu m u y é p i t m a n gu y ap i t , .
To cling to to grasp at , .
Cu m ap i t . m a n gé p i t
To be downcast To tran spi re . .
M a n go li la M a n ga n i n a g
. .
Bush Sickle
. .
Siit L i li c p a n g a p a s
.
,
.
To m o w To m o w . rice .
Gu m a p a s M ag e m .
-
.
To clear a wood .
M a g ca i n gi n .
To transport to carry , . H u m aco t .
To bite to sting to p e e k
, ,
. Tu m u ca m anuc a , .
To sting by gnats . Su m i g u i d m a n i g u i d , .
To n ibble ( by fish at the bai t)

. . Cu m i b i t .
A s n ake stung m e A c o i tinne a nang a h as

g
. .
’
G nats are going about stinging N a n i n i g u i d an g m an a la m oe
g
. .
Do m osqui toes sting you ? gS i n i s i g u i d ca nang m an a la m oc?

Yes a n d they hurt m e
, . 0 0 at a c o i s i n as a c tan
, .
Tortoise shell Se a tortoi se . . Cala P auican

. .
To tuck up the sleeves or pettic o ats . M a g li li s .
Why d o y o u tu ck u p y o u r p a n ta loo n s ? gB a q u i t ca n a g li li li s nang s a la u a l?

To b reak th rough to run over down , , . Su m a g a s a .
To h ol d t o wield to han dle

, , . Hu m au a c .
To tra m ple to tr ead on , . Tu m o n g tOn g .
F I FTY E I GH TH E X E R CI SE -
.
Who are there ? The chi ldren of ou r n eighbour Why did you .
ad m i t the m ? A way ! m y m as ter i s angry back ! be quick ! H o w ,
Beware ! the buffaloes are co m ing on Have th ey already fi nished .
the work ? They h ave Bravo ! Do you know what ha s happened ? .
N o what? The China m an s horse ran over your friend s chi ld an d ’ ’
he i s dead P oor thing ! wh at a pity not to have m y g u n at hand

. .
Where are the children roa m i ng about? I n the corral You n aughty .
,
people b e silent !
, Drive the m ou t fury ! they are tra m pling u pon ,
m y plants !
‘
Di d you notice how beautiful hi s fe m ale cousi n i s ? Yes -
and ho w m o dest she i s too ! Have the labourers already planted

the stakes for the enclosure ? They are sti ll carrying th e m Where .
d id you bury your child ? Thi s i s the place where we buried i t Who
bore the coffin ? His sch ool m ate s bore i t What is that the China .
m e n is m e lting there ? He i s m elting wax Have you already laid .
your ches t open ? N o t ye t Order i t to be lai d open i m m ediatel y . .
Why are so m any p eople gathering together ? They asse m ble to wel
co m e the j udge Why do es t he lacks m ith end dow n the point of b b
b d dw
-
th a t s p e a r? He en s it o n to m ake a sickle out of it Wher e .

'
35 2 TE E TA GA LO G L A N GUA GE .
A D E CTI J V E . A BST A CT R . ROO T . R

A B ST A CT N O UN .
Quiet Quietness Ta hi m i c » Ca t a hi m i ca n
b d ear
. . .
N o le , . N oblenes s . M ahal . Ca m a ha la n .
L iar . Lie . Bul aan . Ca b u la a n an .
M ad M adness 010 1 Ca o lola n

d
. . . .
Ba n aughty n e s s N a u ghti
l
)
, , ( ,
Ta m p a la s an Ca ta m p a la s a na n
cruel S cruelty
. .
g
. .
Foolish F oolishness . . Hung hang ~

. Ca h u ng han an -
.
In du s tri ou s Industry . . Si p a g . Casi p a gan .
F ir m . F 1r m n e s s . Ti b a y . Ca t i b a y a n .
Strong Strength . . L ac as . Ca la ca s a n .
Deep Depth . L ali m . Ca la li m a n .
Broad Brea d th
. . L apad . Ca la p a ra n .
Heavy Heavi n es s
. . Bigat . Ca b i g a ta n
L igh t L i g ht n e s s
. G aan . Ca g a a n a n .
M eek . M eekness , A rn o . Ca a m o a n .
R ound R oundness. . B i log . Ca b i log a n

Beautiful Beauty . . G and a . Ca g a n da ha n .
L arge long great L ength greatness

, , .
,
. L aqui . Ca la q u i ha n .
L ordly N o bili ty . G uino b . Ca g u i n o o ha n .
Ca ba taa n =p a g ca
Youn g Youth Bata
l b ata
,
. . .
.
Th is co m position i s like wise use d to fo r m collective n ouns .
Bo y . Yo ung people Bata . Ca b a ta a n .
Christian Chri sten do m . . Cri s ti a no .

( p)
S Ca c ri s ti a n o ha n .
v
I sland A rc hipelago
. . P olo . Ca p o lo a n .
E arth ( m aterial ) E arth , world

. . L up a . Ca lu p aa n .
A n = ha n
wi thou t ca i s appended t o a roo t havi n g a no m i nal
b
, ,
or ver al force to for m t he place or t he appliance o r u tensi l On whic h

w
,
t he ork i s acco m plished and i n the case of a root de noting a p roduct ,
or a co mm odity the place w here s u ch a product o r co m m odity i s found

b
.
,
The firs t sylla le i s repea ted as if fo r the futu re tense with t hose roo t s
'
w
, ,
ad m i t ting of con trac tion o r b e g 1nn 1n g ith I .
To b athe . Ba th roo m
-
.
To pu t in to a
harbour
Wharf
. l . DOon g .
To spi t Spi t ti ng b ox
.
-
. L ura .
To ea t Din ing roo m

.
-
. Cai n .
To drink Drinking vessel . . Ih om .
To s trike fire by S t e e l o r i n s t r u
percussion or m en t of s trik Pi n q u i . Pi n q u i a n .
rubbing i ng fi re . .
To lie down Bed couch .

, . Higa .
To p u t in t o Store roo m . . Si li d .
To wors hi p Te m ple . . Si m b a .
To m ake cocks
fi ght
Cock p 1t
.
-
. Sa b ong .
To pas ture M eadow . . Sabsa b .
M u d dirti ness
,
Quag m i re . . F us e l i .
Suga r C ne -
Sugar plan tation
a . . Tu b e .
R E CA PI TUL A TI O N PA R TI CL ES 35 3
‘
or .
Ba m oo grove ; b -
Cauayan .
Cocoa n u t planta
l
-
N 10g
tion
'
Banana plantation . s aguing .
P illow bolster , . Olo .
( Pedestal foot
d Pa a
,
2 s tan
.
F ore front -
.
Back hinder m ost

j place
,
Bundle
The reduplication also takes place wi th such nouns as i n icate not d

b b
,
the actual , ut the ass i gned places for the action s to e perfor m ed
thereon .
To b apti se . Baptistery . Bi n y a g . Pa g bi b i ny a g a n .
To preach . Pu l p it . Pa n gara l . Pa n ga n ga ra lan .
To sentence to Hall wh e re a court 1

,
M a gho co m Pa g ho hocom an
pass j udg m ent I
.
or a j udge sits
.
. .
Sl a u g h t e r i n g
To k i ll M a g p a tay
p la c e
. .
bb
.
To hang . G i et . M a g b i ta y .
But if the verbal root i s i ntransitive ca should be use d and

b
,
the first sylla le of the root repeate d
z
.
St u m b l i n g -
place
To tu m le b .
gdgifig l b
r
e
a
r t
a
g
.
M a ti s od . Ca ti ti s o ra n .
s t a c le .
P1 m any
3$3
23 2
9
To fal l . M a hdlo g . Ca holo g a n .
To
gh
d
e, to Shp
Slippery place M arul as Ca roro la s an
d
. .
vl
The student should notice that i n m ost n ouns thus for m ed fro m
b
a ver al root the stress of the accen t i s on the last vowel
, Thi s .
i s i n m any cases to d raw a distinction bet w een the person and the
,
place Th us p a ng a ng a r a la n m eans “
the perso n or persons to who m
‘ ‘
,
.
”
so m ething i s to be p reached ( the audience ) while a nga nga r a lan
'
; p
m eans “
the place th at i s to say “
t he pulpi t
, ,
A n co m es at the end o f a di m i nutive nou n or of those things ,
being n o t real but represented by any graphic m eans o r of whi ch ,
one speaks in conte m pt
z
.
Lil b n d , or a drawn o r p a i nted

ildge I b o n i b on a n .
H x a r flg u re pa i nted or d e s p lc a b le
gg i Tau o ta u o ha n
,
.
rs r
Petty king or person who plays the

H a r i ha ri a n
role of a king .
g g
. .
Canopy ceili ng ,
. L an it lan itan .
Quack e m pi ric i n p hys i o

, . M ed i m e d i c oha n ,
G o d idol, . D i os di os a n .
applie to a no m i nal root co nv e rts it in to a n

So m eti mes an d
dj
a ective of a characteristic quality i n a so m e what espectiv o s e nse , d .
Clu b headed
-
. 0 10 .
La nosed p er
i ggi y
-
I lo ng
snouted
L on g N oso g .
Br o ad shouldered Ba li ca t . .
L arge m o uthe d
j Bi bi g Bi bi g an
,
charlatan l .
.
i s an i m portant prefix
Ca , or uild ing particle w db ‘
Ca as has been said co m es before roots i m porting co m pani on

d
, ,
ship likeness reci procity or confor m ity to i ndicate o ne of the correspo n

, , ,
in g parties .
Co m panion gues t ( at a m eal )

. . . Ca s a m a . Casalo .
F ellow passenger
-
. Casac ay .
I n m ate , one of the persons living

Ca s a n g b aha y
at the sa m e h ouse
.
Contra ry , foe , one of the q u a rre hn g

parties l Ca an a y .
A ssistant aiding party Co m petitor

, . . Ca tOlo n g . Catalo .
P layi n g fellow -
. Ca lar é .
E qual fello w offi cer officer of the

l Ca p ara
, ,
sa m e rank
g
.
N a m esake Ca n a lan , casan gay

b
.
F ace rese m ling person

-
. Ca m u c ha .
E qual si m ilar
,
. Ca p a n tay , ca ha li m b au a .
R ese m b ling thing or party .

ca
dgiig
ti
is
ca ha li n tfrla d , ca ha m b i n g
’ ,
F ellow passenger
-
.
( o n a j ourney) . Ca la cb ay .
Conte m porary , of the sa m e age . Ca p a n a hOn .
Drinki ng party . Ca i n o m .
To scorn s co rn i n g p a r ty
,
~
. Tu m uy a, ca tu y a .
The fi rst syllable of the root i s so meti m es repeated .
F ellow vi llager , co m patri ot . Ca b a b a y a n .
Scorni n g party . Ca b i b i ro , ca b i ro .
i s used i n connec tion with y a before the root of qu ality the

Ca ,
obj ect of co m parison , if i t i s put at the end i n co m para tive sen tences .
As hard as stone . G abat o ca ti g as .
As lo n g as thi s . G a n i tOng cahaba .
Astall as that A s swee t as sugar G a n i y an ca t aa s G a a s d ca l c a ta m i s

w
. . . .
Ho old is he ? gG a a n o siy a catand a ? ‘
Ca is also used as a particle exp ressing past ti m e with so m e

roo ts i m porting ti m e .
Yesterday L ast night Ca ha p o n Ca g a bl

b
. . . .
The day efore yesterday . Ca ma ca lau a .

Thi s sa m e arrange m ent for m s certai n adver s or adver ial e xpres b b

sions of ti m e .
Suddenly A ll . at o nce . Ca a la m a la m . Ca g u i n s a g u i n s a .
Off ha nd . Ca ra ca ra ca .
thus e m p loyed denotes intension i n a h igh degree a n d

Ca , , ,
i t is even a pplied to so m e roots of thing s as i n ca ta locta loctoca n , ,

” ” “
which m eans : the very su mm it o f the m ou ntai n “
the peak ; fro m
’
“
,
,
”
ta loctoc
“
the su m m it
,
.
Is there any s p r1ng yon der at the D Oo n s a c a t a lo c ta lo c to ca n n ang on b

su mm it of that m ountain ? doc n a y a On , dm a y batis bag a?
Ca , with the suffix a nzha n for m s the superla tive degree of

adj ectives ,
the root bei ng repeated as already explai ned ,
.
Thisi s v ery precio us Very savory ; . Ca m a ha lma ha la n i to Ca s a ra p s ara p a n . .
Very obscene Very good . . Ca ha la y ha la y a n Ca b u ti b u ti ha n

. .
So m e b
adver s of ti m e are for m ed i n the sa m e m an ner .
L astly . F inally Ca ta p u s ta p u s an Cau a ca s u aca s a n
The
repetitio n o f the root m a y be dis pen s ed with i f so m e adver b
o r word i m porting ti m e co m es i n the sentence N ote the follo ing . w
e xpressions .
To leave for to go away , . P ai n ao m a m ana o

, .
To c arry away To exile . . M a g p an a o M a gp a p an a o

. .
This very week I shall le ave . Ca p a n a o a n co it ong lingo .
When he was on the point of dying N i y On g ca m atayan n a n iy a

b
. .
When he was a out to kill the m . N i y On g ca p a ta y a n n a s a c a n i la .
F I FTY N I N TH E X E R CI SE
-
.
w
Do you ish t o acco m pany m e ? Yes I will acco m pany you ,
.
W here do you go ? I a m going to fi s h wi th a r o d Why do you

scorn at your fellow citi z
.
ens ? I do n ot scorn at t he m But you fin d .
fault with t he m do you not kn o w i t i s i m proper to fin d faul t with

,
other people ? Wha t do you ad m i re m ost? I ad m ire t he m arvelous

th ings m ade by G od and especi ally I ad m ire the beauty o f the ,
stars in the skies Ca n t hey be trusted ? They can not be trusted

b
.
M a y they not then e intrusted with that business ? I do not know .
M ay I yet recov e r? You m a y yet recover Ca n you go to .
M an 1la? I cannot go to M anila fo r I a m sick

.
Ca n you r b rother , .
g o to M anila? He can not go to M anila because he i s very busy ,

.
M a y thi s m edicine alleviate the suffering o f t he pat i ent? I t may

allevia te hi m Where i s the nobility ( aristo cracy ) o f this town ? They
.
a re at church Has thi s house a ny bath roo m ? There i s here a -
w b
.
ba t h roo m for g ro n u p p e ople ; y o u n g p e opl e a t he at the ri v er What . ,

R ECAPTTUL ATTON or PA R TI CL E S . 357
do native s u se for d rinking ? N atives use cocoa nuts as drinki ng -
vessels Where i s the pedestal o f t his i m age ? I t i s i n the cell

b
. .
Where do native p eople asse m le ? They asse m ble a t the cock pit -
.
Does your frien d o w n any s ugar plantations ? He does not own any
s u ga r plantations but h e own s two cocoa nu t far m s When did yo u
,
-
.
arri v e ? I have j ust arri ved Where is your m aster? M y m aster i s .
j u st go ne out Di d you see her husband ?

. He had j ust got i n to
the house when I saw hi m Do you wish to dine with us ? N o I .
,
have j ust dined What shal l we do ? Think o n i t carefull y and be

.
o n your guard What has happened to you ? N o sooner did I s tart

.
walking t han I stu m bled Where d id you slip do w n ? There there ,
i s a sli ppery place and I ca m e across a place full o f stones Did .
y o u fi nd the book ? A s soon as I s tarted looking for i t I found i t

w
.
I s that wood hard ?

'
Ho long i s i t? I t i s as long as this It is .
as hard as ston e What i s a ba t like ? It is like a bird when flyi ng

. .
With who m are you conversing ? I a m conversing with m y fellow i n m ates .
Who m a re you going to take as a co m panio n for the journey ? You r

’
ene m y .A r e they orphans ? They are ; how sad i t i s to b e an orphan .
Did you taste pine apples ? Yes ho w swee t they are ! What do those
-
people do at the beach ? They a re _b 1thi n g ho w i ndecorous to see

w
. .
,
m ale and fe m ale people bathing toge ther ! Did you s i m? Yes I
w w
.
,
d i d ho
, a m using s i m m ing i s ! .
S I XTI E TH L E S S O N . YC A A N I M N A P OU O N G P A G A R A L .
R E CA P I TU L A TI O N O F P A R TI C L E S conti nued
.
( )
I
i s a prefix a su f fi x o r a n i n fi x hi n is al ways a su f fi x
n , , .
I
n i s prefixed to or i nserted i n no m i nal roots to for m partici pial
b
, ,
nouns denoting rese m lance o r sharing of the pro perties expressed by

the root .
A nything cut U p
A b e rry oc t )
go
.
i a e i g ht sided Baling ing b Bi n a li ng b i n g

pp
-
na1 i n shape .
. .
s l al e
Ni g h t scenti ng A nything b Sa m pag a
re s e m ‘
Si na m p a g a
flo w er li ng such a flower S . .
. .
Verdure culi n A nything sh aring

,
a ry v e g e ta b le s
)
i n t h e g r e e n G ulay Gu i n ula y
l
, . .
garden stu ff . colou r .
N e e d l e p o i n ted
N eedle
To boil rice
.
ri ce
Boiled rice food
.
Ca r é y o m
E ,
. Sit ing . .
$
pin
0 s . , Yarn . Sli li d .
o b oil meal A sort of fritt ers

L O L 1n Og a o
, ,
flou r any soft pap l g ao . .
d
. .
To knea Bre a d . Tap a y . Ti napa y

THE TA GAL O G LA N GI I A GE
’
'
I f the condition t hu s acqui red i s to e represente as p e r manently b d

i ncorpo rated ,
the first syllable of the root should e repea ted b .
G odfather .
G o d m other .
j
Step son or step
-
A n ac I na a n a c
d aughte r
’
St e p b r o t h e r o r
j
-
Brother or Si ster
step sister -
.
Ca p a ti d .
Q u i n a ca p a ti d .
3
So m e wo m an who
A unt A li I n a a li
stands for a n aun t
. . .
w
’
On e s b rot h er s
j
’
Si ster -
in la Hi p ag H i n i hi p a g
m i stress
. . .
either p refixed or i nserted i s the well kno n particle for m i n g

I n, ,
w
that past participle which generally refers to the d i rect obj ect of the
ver b .
The sweetheart or the eloved person b . A ng i n i s i n ta

s .
The estee m ed pers o n . A ng m i n a m a ha l .
The already known person . A ng q u i n o coa n .
M y property what i s held as m ine , . A ng i na a q u in .
Others p roperty thei r p ro perty u i n a ca n i la

’
, . A ng q .
What i s yours ( plur ) . . A ng i n i i ny o .
The sa m e arrange m ent i s also use d d

to i n icate the passive effect
of so m e destructive agent .
What i s destroyed by m i ce . A n g d i n a da g a .
ants A ng li n a la n g a m
w
. .
Bananas are dest ro y e d b y cro s ,

I n oou a c an g Sa gu i ng
ravens t
.
E very
pre s ent or past stage o f a odily co m plaint i s expresse b d
b y the root i ndicative of the latter ith i n either prefixed o r i n fi xe d w .
P6 fi e ri n g
383i tph j
s
Itch m ange
,
. Gal i s A n g g u i na g a li s .
Person who h as
Sm all p ox . s uffered f r om Bol otong : A n g b i n o loton g .
s m all pox -
.
The sa m e i s the case with roots expressive of any li m b or pa rt

of the b ody capable o f i ts b ei n g affected w i th disease .
Sto m ach Si c m u ra
J oh n suffers fro m the sto m achach e J uan
. .
Si n i s i cm u ra si
'
b
. .
Breast Di dib
I su ff er f ro m pai n i n m y b reast
. .
.
'
Di n i d i b di b a co .
I n = hi n i s to roots of the a ove co m plai nts to express

s u fi xe d b
w
.
the person ho for a long past ti m e has en dured the m .
Person w ho ill e w b ,
or i s perm anently Piy o . Pi p i y o hi n .
afflicted with gout .
Itchy scab , .
A sthma tic .
THE TA GA L O G L A N GUA GE :
If the root a mi ts of eing co n tracte d b e g i n s d

ith l or i f a n b w
b b
.
, ,
, ,
i ntensive degree i s to e denoted the first sylla le of the root m a y ,

b
,
e repeated .
e m o ry ,
‘
Sh f r
t
3p p n
r
F orgetfulness L i m ot M a li li m u ti n
ol g tf u l
.
. .
Joyful . L og o d .
F aint hearted -
. Tacot .
I n fi rm sickly ,
. Sa q u i t .
P e r s o n liable t o
F ever . frequent fits of L a g na t . M a la la g n a ti n .
fever .
Bashfulness . Bashful d if fi de nt ,
. Hiya . M a s ihi y i n .
Mi s the well known p refix whi ch form s adj ectives

a
'
of those
roots that a re not adj ectives y the m selves b .
The
adj ectives th us for m ed m a y e m ade verbs with ma y to i n b
d i ca te the affecting or boasting by the subj ect of such quality as the
adj ectives denote the co m pou nd being rendered oxytone for the purpose
, .
'
A nthony affects to be b rave N a g m a m a ta p a n g si A nto nio

b
. .
John oas ts of wisdo m . N a g m a m a ru n on g s i Juan .
they are m ade ver s with u m and are us ed i n the i n p as sive

If b ,
the sense is that of holding o r reputing the obj ect as possessing the
quality expressed y the adjective b .
I M n a m a b u tl co iy an
consider that good .
i .
I hold vice to e b an ev il
°
l
M i na m a s a m a co ang m a s a m ang q u 1
n a o g a ha n .
He reputes as j udicious what Peter M i n a m a g a li n g niy a ang s i n a s a bi n i

says . P edro .
M
i s also j oined a to a no m inal root indicative of a thing ca
pa hle of being m ade an obj ect of possession having then the m eaning ,
of the subj ect aboundin g i n such co m m odity as i s denoted by the root .
Ma in this case i s but

, ,
the contraction of ma y .
Thereis plenty of rice i n this town . M a p ala y it ong bayan i to .
Henry possesses a great deal of gold . M a g u i n t o si E nrique .
Th li i s e i s p rov i ded Wi th m any

jgo llp
l é M asilid i t ong b aha y .
as th e particle denoting poten tiality co m es before a ve rbal

M a , ,
root and for m s adj ectives indic a tive of the possi b i lity or capabi lity of
“ ” “
the action being perfor m ed E nglish adj ect i ves ending i n able i ble .
‘
,
and the L atin i n bilis m a y be exp ressed i n this way

“
.
Su fferab le P ronou nceable

. . M atu s , m abat a . M anica .
F e asible , p racticable . M agan a m aari

,
.
E asy E atable
. . M a d a li m a g a an
, . M a cai n .
R E CA PI TU L A TI ON or PA R TI CL E S . 36 1 .
The
repeti tion of the first syllable of the root ( as fo r the passi ve
f u ture ten se of ma ca verbs ) m a y be e m ployed especially i f an idea ,
of futuri ty is m eant both for m s bein g used al m os t i n di ff erently ,

“
F easible M a g a g a u a, m a n gy a y a ri ng g a oi n
b b le d rinkable
. .
E ata le . Pota , . M a c a ca i n M ai i nom. .
P ossible M a n g y a y a ri
percepti b le at sight
. .
Visible M a q u i q u i ta
b
. .
,
Speaka le . M a s a s a bi .
But i f negation o r i nversion of the m eaning of the root is to

b “
e expressed as when the L ati n prefixes in ” “
dis o r the Saxon u h
“ ”
, ,
are used i n E nglish the sense i s m ade by the si m ple root ( as fo r

b b
,
the i m perative ) prefixed y ma and preceded by the n egative adver .
In suff era le U ntolerable b . . Di m atus Di m a at a

. b .
I nco m prehensible . Di m a ti n g ca la , di m a a b u t nang i sip .
I ndissoluble Di m a c a la g
b
. .
I naccessible u napp roacha le , . Di m a la p i ta n .
I nter m inable U nserviceable . . Di m a ta p u s Di m a g a m i t . .
U neatable I m possi ble . . Di m a ca i n Dili m a n g y a y a ri

.
, .
I nexplicable unexplainable , . Di m a s a y s ay .
If the capability i s expressed by an adj ecti ve o r an ad j ectival

clause the verb should be p ut i n the p roper passive
,
.
E a sy to b e done Di f fi i c u lt to say M a d a h ng g ao i n M a li u a g
’
s a b i hi n
to b e attained
. . . .
Di fficult . M ahira n c a m tan .
U napproachable . Di m alapit .
E asily p ron u n c e a b le M a da li n g u i ca i n .
Susceptible pu n cti lli o u s , . Di m a u i ca a n .
It to say i t ’ b u t difficult
t? l
M a da li n g sabihi h ,
m a hi ra p g a o i n .
M be assi m ilated to ma as a particle for m in g a dje c

a ca may
ti v e s ,
i f prefixed to verbal roots What ma is for the potential sense .
,
ma ca i s fo r the c a usati ve one .
A greeabl e w hat causes ple a sure,

. M a ca to tou a .
Ca u sative of sha m e . M a ca hi hi y a .
M or tal d estructive of li fe
,
. M a ca m a m a tay .
L a ughable , causing laugh ter . M a c a ta taua .
M a ca i s al s o p refixed to the cardi n al n u m bers to fo r m the a d

v e rb i a l nu m erals of ti m e the first being wholly and the seco nd and
, ,
th ird partly ,
i rregular as already explained
,
Once Twi ce
. . M i n s an M a ca la u a
. .
Thrice th ree ti m es
, . M a ca i tlo m a ca ta tlo
, .
F ive ti m es A h undred . ti m es . M a ca li m a M a ca s a n g da a n .
( 1) M a ca a nd m a m a y b e c o m p a r e d , r e s p e c t i v e l y w i t h t he G e r m a n
"
.
”
. s u f fi xe s
ba r and 8a m , i n f 11rc hlb a r , ma ca td co t; f u r c h t s a m , ma ta co tt n
'
‘
.
Spark Qu i s la p alipato p ilan ti c

w
.
.
, ,
To cause earin ess . M a ca y a m o t .
To di sgust to cause di sgust M acas ana

d
. .
,
To i nfla m e to ca u s e to be i nfla m e
,
~
. M a ca s on o g .
To produce a nxiety . M a ca b a li s a .
To produc e n ausea . M a ca s u cla m , m a ca ri m a ri m .
To cause the disgust of satie ty . M a ca s u y a .
If cannot be . Hindi m a n gy a y a ri .
Ca n but H i ndi m a n g y a y a r i d i
I can ut go b Hi ndi m a n gy a y a ri di a co p u ma roo n
b
. .
I t m ay e M a n g y a y a r i din
b
- .
I t m a y n ot e Hindi m a n g y a y a ri
b
. .
I t m a y e happen ,
. Sucat m a n g y a ri .
I t can h ardly be happen ,

. Di s ucat m a n gy a ri .
To exa m ine to look int o the qual,

Su m uli t
i fi ca ti o n s of so m e candidate
.
M y brother passed exa m ination b e

Si n uli d ang c a p a ti d co nang m aestro
fo re the m aster and ca m e out
at siy a i n a ca s uli t
q ualified .
, ,
N obody knows i t . U al ang n a c a ca ala m .
N obody understands i t . U al an g n a ca ta ta la s tas .
Do you understand i t .
gN a ta ta la s tas m o bag a?
He feels war m Siy a i n a i i n i ta n
w b
. .
, ,
He was s ayed ( lind )with wrath . N a b u la g a n siy a nang g alit .
L est . M ac a, s a ca li , m ac a s a c a li .
SI X TI E TH E X E R CI SE .
Shall I do i t? Do not do it , lest you e da m ned Sha ll l g o b .
out then ? G o out and be w are ; do not fail to do what I told you .
Shall I go u pstai rs ? Do no t go upstairs , lest there m a y be so m e people

there What are you going to do ? I a m goi ng to fish and see whe ther
.
I can hook so m e fi sh Why does he n ot lift the bag ? H e is going to try

.
.
whether he can lift i t Did they shoot arrows at the b irds ? Yes they ,
did and they shot down so m e Did you r u n after hi m ? I ran after hi m .
,
but I could not overtake hi m Do you wish m e to go out n ow? .
Do not go out at presen t lest yo u m a y be a ffecte d by sunshine

b
,
and feel war m Shall I stay here any longer ? No egone lest
b
.
, ,
you m a y e overtaken by darkness i n the wood What happened .
to the m ? They were sailing an d they were overtaken by a s tor m

at sea What has happened to you ?
. Ou r house was burnt down .
What has happened ?

'
The thread parted What has ha p pened to .
your brother i n law ? Hi s strength failed his sen ses vanish ed and hi s
- -
, ,
m ind darkened hi s breath was cut short and he breathed his l a st

, ,
.
How was it? His walking stick split and his ankle was spr a i ned -
.
W hy do you laugh ? I laugh because that fello w stu m bled an d fell ,
down .Shall I lead hi m on ? N o m ak e hi m walk s lowly lest h e , ,
m a y slip Do yo u fear?
. Yes I do What are you a fraid of? ,
.
I a m afraid of the souls o f the dead Why do you fear the ghosts ? .
F ear G o d and do no t fear ghosts as they will do n othi n g to yo u ,

.
Where did you stu m ble ? I s tu m b e d against thi s sto ne I n which

'
house did your m other di e ? I n our grandfather s ho use W hat did ’
w w
.
s he die of ? She died o f fever Why does tha t o m an eep ? Be .

364
‘
THE TA G A L O G L A N GUA GE .
If the parties are m ore th a n t wo , ca should be repeated .
M ore than two rothers b . M a g ca c a c a p a ti d .
s »
1 co m panions . M a g ca c a s a m a .
frien ds . M a g c a ca i b i g a n .
Correlative
nouns are expressed by ma g prefixed to the noun of
the principal correla tive par t y .
F a ther and child .
M o ther a n d child .
F a ther o r m o ther and son or

daughter i n la -
w
M as ter and servant . M a gp a n gi n oo n .
Hence these co m poun d nouns m ay be m ade b

ver s i n re feren ce
to the secondary party .
Paul is a devo ted son ( that is

w w
.
to say he kno s ho to honor

,
Si Pa b 10 1 m a runo n g m aga ma .
his parents ) .
Patrick i s no t a devo ted son to

Hindi m a runo ng m a g i na -
si Patricio
his m other .
.
To keep up Wi th a m other i n law is -
M a li u a g ang m ag b i a n an
a difficult thing
.
If the secon d correlati ve is n a m ed conj ointly with the pri ncipal o ne ,
the latte r i s prefixed by mag ang the for m er put i n the p o s s e s s s i v e case .
J esus an d His M other . M a g i n a n i Jesus

-
F lora and her father i n law ~ ~
. M a g bi a n an n i F lora .
Peter and his father . M a g a m a n i Pedro

-
.
M ag d enotes totality with so m e roots i m p orti ng t i me

The w hole
day thro u ghout the day 2
M a g ha p on
, ,
all the day long 8

.
A ll the night long the whole night M a g da m a g

, . .
i s prefixed to a m an d ma g roots to for m the ver al noun

M ag b ,
i ndicative of the agent or doer of the action expressed by the a m o r the ma g

v er b The first syllable of the root shou ld be repeated as i f to f o rm
.
the future tense .
F ar m er , b
la orer hus and m an b
bb
. .
R o er .
i s a nother i m portant prefix

M an M a n drops the n an causes .
“
d
the i nitial consonan t o f t he root to und rgo the sa m e changes as
’
have been explained for it as a verbal parti cle .
M an as alrea d y said i f j oi n ed to a root denotin g a unity

, , ,
‘
of m easure for m s distributive exp ressions of the s tandard uni ty

,
.
w
T enty five cents m oney piece ’
Gab ati
w w
. .
T enty five cent s ea ch , at t enty five

M a nga ha tI
ce nts e a ch
.
.
R E CA PI TUL A TI CN OF PA R TI CL E S . 365
Doll a r On e dollar each. P iso M a m iso . . .
R eal . Si c ap a t .
On e real each at one real each M a n i c ap a t ,

. .
Half real Half real each Si c o lo s i c a u a lo

. Ma n i co lo .
,
.
Yard ell , . B a r a ( corr of Sp wo rd v a r a ) . . .
On e yard each M a m ara . .
P eck ganta On e p eck each Salop M a n a lo p :

'
b g
.
, . .
Bushel On e ushel each . Cab an M an a b an . .
j
Pal m ( a m easure of length fro m the
.
thu m b to the little fi nger extended ) .
On e p a l m each M a n a n g ca l . .
F atho m On e fatho m each Dip a M a n di p a . .
I nch On e i nch each

. Sandali M a n a n d a li . . .
Hundred On e hundred each . Daan M a n a a n . . .
p roper and usual th an mag to express the agent o r

M an is m ore
doer especially if trade o r habitu i l engaging i n the action i s to be m eant
,
.
To sew . Tailo r . Tahi .
To write . Write r . Sulat .
To weave . Weaver . Habi .
To redee m . R edee m er . Tu b es .
To spin Spinner Suli d

b
. . .
SO
Sf “ gold ea
re -
To solder . Hinang . M a nhihi n a n g .
To f o re s a y to
j eaper
‘
Sooth -
sayer
foretell .
.
To reap to m o w , . R .
To te m pt . Te m pter .
To con quer Con queror .
also co m es before a root denoting the i nstru m ent th rough

M an
which so m ething i s obtained o r before that of a thing to e ob tain ed b

i n a cu s to m a ry o r m ercenary ay for ming the ver al noun i ndi cative
'
w ,
b
o f the person engage d i n th e trade .
Sa w . Sa w er ,
sawy er . L agari .
(10 m erch a n
3g? Trades m an . Ca laca l .
Se a . Sea m an . D agat .
F i sh . F isher m an . I s da .
Dog . Hunter with a dog . As o .
M edicin e root
jQuack hysician G a m ot
, ,
radix , P . .
a heres to a verbal root to for m like ma n the ver al

-
M ap a g d , ,
b
noun i ndicative of the agent or doer if the action i s represented as ,
occasion a l o r i s of such a n ature as not to appear as m ercenary o r

'
life supporti ng
-
.
To dra w i nterest
fro m t o i n v e s t
U su rer gri per
,
Pa g tu b o M a gp a tu b o
m oney on ln
. .
, .
t e res t .
TE E TA G A L O G L A N GUA GE .
To Bo ll fl’ l i beral
gglil
a n t, gran t
gg B1y a y a M a p a g b ly a y a
,
.
fr
.
il
Res e c ti n g hon
p ,
Ob e dient
ori ng .
To elate . Ov e rb e a r i n g .
Destroyin g . Destroyer .
Sc o ffi n g . Scoffer j eerer , .
Jesting . Jester .
L a vi shing . Squ a nderer .
Observing . Observer .
G ru dging . Detractor .
To get a m orsel stoppe th roat d i n th e . M a hi ri n .
He had a fi n ( tho rn)s tuck in his throat M a hi ri n a n siy a nang ti n i c

b
. .
To eco m e to be proper M a b ag a y
b
. .
,
g A n g isip m o ag a a y n a b a b é g a y s a
Do you think i s i t p roper fo r a gi rl to is ang dalag a, ang p a g la laca d na
go alon e about th e streets ?
g
‘
m a g i s a s a m an a la n s a nga n?
-
To hold to be sufficie n t ,
. M a g ca s i y a .
To m istake to err to m ake a m istake , ,

. M a g ca m a li .
Wi ll it be perchance true ? gM a g u i g u i n g to t o o cay a iy a n g ?

Why m ight not that e true ? b g s a a n di m a g u i g u i n g t o to o n a iy an ? g
A fter a certai n n u m er of days b . N an g m aguin g il ang arao -
\A he n one m on th m a y be elapsed . Cu n m aguing is ang bouan na .
To m eddle with M a n hi m a s o c ( fro m p as oc )

d
. . .
Why do you m e dle to look in to other B a i n m o i n a n hi hi m a s o ca n a ng

g q u p
people s usiness ? '
’
b b uhay nang i ang tau o? b
To laug h agai n a n d a ga 1n . Taua nan g taua .
He prays again an d again . Dasal n a ng dasal siy a .
To walk an d walk over agai n . L a laca d n a n g la laca d .
R ead on and on . Bu m a s a ca n ang b u m as a .
R epeat constantly the n a m e of Go d . A n g Dios n ang Dios ang u i c ai n m o .
They const a ntly call for m e as if A ce nang a co ang t i n a tau a g nil a

b
, ,
were no other ut m e . d i u a i ual ang i b a cund i a co

, ,
.
I m ean I say , . Sa m a ca tou i d .
A n g M a ca p a n gy a ri ha n s a “
lahat s a
The A l m ighty th at is to say Go d
M
,
m a ca t ou i r a y ang Dios
.
, ,
.
,
So to say as it were A la lao n g a la lao n g

b
, . .
,
A n g ca lo lou a a la laon g a n g dili a ga

The soul , the vital principle as it were
b
,
nang uhay
.
The diversity of m eanings which the pron oun a m) may e m ody b

is illustrated i n the follo ing phrases w .
W hat? gA n o ? ga n o ag a? b
What i s your usiness h ere ? b dA n o ca r i te ? a u n g m a a no ca rit o?
What i s hi s usines s there ? b d A a n o siy a r oon ?

What i s the m atter w ith P eter that gI n a a n o bag a si P edro ,
at n a g y
11 a c 0
he cries so m uch . siy a p a g a n oo n ?

They do nothing to hi m . Hind i siy a i n a a n o .
5 A h i m bag a iy an ? an o ng m
’
d n n o g a
A nd what does that m a tter to you ?
s aq u i t s a i y o
d b what
.
What do I nee that ook for?

1s th a t ook to me ? b gA n hi n co iy an g li ro ? b
S I X TY- S E CO N D L E S SO N .
YC A A N I M NA P O U O , T, DA L A U A N G PA G A RA L .
R E C A P I TU L A TI O N ‘
O F P A R TI C L E S .
( continued ) ,
is pre fi xed to a no m inal o r verbal roo t i n dicative of such

Pa
thing or action as can be assig n ed to a person to for m verbal no un s ,
denoting contents or the po rtion thus assigned to or h anded over

, , ,
by an agent The change or dropping o f the i nitial con son ant of

.
the root also takes place so m eti m es with thi s co m position .
Pu n i s hm e n t,
P enalty inflicted Dus a Pa ru s a
penance
. . .
I n he r1ta n c e . L eg a cy . M an a . P a m an a .
wh at ) The conten ts
M fi e s mJ ,
gggé gts i s written on a L a m an Pala m an

’
.
(
paper
o
l .
Tu m o r abscess Swellin g
,
. . Pa m a g a .
Off ering of the first

N ew .
frui ts tithe l , .
Pa m a g o .
F ood k e pt fro m
t he p r o v i o u s
Breakfas t Bahao Pa m al ao
night for the
. . .
m orning .
H o u s e h o l d fu rn
House B ahay Pa m a ha y
i tu re ch attels
. . .
.
,
Po
ihhgb i is flid
d Of
N ote , regi stry .
( Tand a . P a m and a .
L m
kdi gg
oa t e i t ta n c e ,
To carry . P a da l a .
s e
To conceal . Thing conceale d . Tago .
To borrow things . Thing borrowed . Hi ra m .
for the gove rn m ent o f se n te n ces in which a co m p ou nd of th i s

As
ki n d enters the agent should be p ut i n the possessive c a se the th ing
, ,
obj ect of the action i f e x p ressed i n the no m ina ti ve and the person
, , ,
to who m i t is a apportioned i n the d a tive The follo w i ng exa m ples , .
wi ll illustrate the rule .
Ib equeath this to my n ephe w Pa m an a co it o s a a q u ing p a m angq u i n
b equeathed to m
. .
Th by my
i ci
S e
f i I to i ,
,
pa m an a s a aqui n n ang a m a co .
What do i s a penance i m posed to

I A n g g u i n a g a u a co ,
i , p a r u s a s a a q ui n
m e by the priest . n a ng pare
Thi s b ook I borrowed fro m m y m other . I t ong li b ro i p a hi ra m s a aqui n n i i n a
, ,
.
That is what I m ade hi m carry . Ya o i ang padal a co s a caniy a

, ,
.
RE CA PI TUL ATI oN or PA R TI CL E S . 369
d
If p a _i s prefixe to a root expr e ssive of a cer tain m an ner o f
placing the posture without any reference to the cause i s ex p ressed
, , , .
Seated ( status ) Sta nding

. . Pa u p o P a ti n d i g
. .
L ying down L engthwise . . P a hi g a P a ha b a

. .
Sidewise i nciden tally Cross wise Pa ta g u i li d Pa ha la n g

w
-
. . . .
,
Knelt down F ace do n wards . . P a lo ho d Pa ta ob . .
F ace upwards . Pa ti ha y a .
But if such a posture i s represented as the effect of so m e cause '
and stress i s lai d o n the latter p a then should be p refixed by n a , , , .
He fell and re m ai ned face downwards -

. N a p a ra p a siy a .
I fell down and re mained seated . N apau p o a co .
has already been fully treated as th e pro per prefix to for m

Pag ,
t he verbal nouns expressi ve of the action i n a m an d ma g verbs the

b
,
first syllable of the root for the latter eing repeated as already stated , .
The eating th e actio n of eating

,
. A n g p a gca l n .
The killing The weeping . . A n g p a g p a tay . A n g p a g ta n gi s .
The weeping m uch the actio n of

jA A ng p a g ta ta ngi s
,
weeping a good deal

.
The giving The thr owing away

. . ng a
p g bi b i g ay . A n g p a g ta ta p o n .
P ag,
as a particle for m ing either alon e or wi th 3a p rece di ng ,
adverbial expressio ns of ti m e has also been so fully treated i n fore ,
going lesson s as to dispense with the need of furthe r explanation s .
On his wri ting . Sa p a g s ula t niy a .
A fte r m y reading t he b ook .

Pa b a s a CO
( gasa etc
nang hb ro , or , pag oa
w orking b
, .
On m y fi nishing Pa g ta p u s co nang tra aj o .
By n a prefixed to the a n p a s s i v e w i th p a g of a verb denoti ng

‘
b
an actio n capa le of yielding a return expression s i ndicative of th e
b b
,
way y which the earning has een ob tai n ed are fo r m ed .
Thi s m o ney I secured by servi ng

j N a p a g li co ra n co i tong salapi
.
( renderi ng m enial s ervices )

.
Th s m oney he got by his selling

i N a p a gb i g a s an n iy a itong salap i
r i ce .
.
P a g ca i s fo r i nstran si ti v e i nvolun tary acti ons what p ag is f or

t ra n s 1t 1v e , o r fo r i ntransitive b ut volun tary ones ,
.
The dying The fa lling A n g p a g ca m a tay A n g p a gc a holo g

b
.
. .
.
The stu m ling The slip ping down . . A n g p a g c a ti s o d . A n g p a g c a ru las .
The sleepi ng . A n g p a g c a tulo g .

870 THE TA GA L O G L AN GUA GE .
When p a g oa is prefixe to a n acti v e v er al root or to a ver d b b

d enoting a vo lu ntary action it i ndicates m a n ner m o e fash ion , , d , .
Yo ur fashio n of
'
w alking . A n g p a g ca laca d mo .
Your m an ner o f pronouncing A n g p a g ca u i ca m o .
Thei r m anner of expressio n . A n g p a g ca s a bi zp a g c a s a li ta nil a .
Her hand w riting pen m a nship , . A ng p a g ca s ula tzp a g ca ti ti c niy a .
for m s a stract nou ns expressive of what co nstitutes the

Pa g ea b
essence of a thing o r a quali ty the co m po u nd thus for m ed bearing ,
a closer reference to the actio n than the o ne for m ed w i t h ca and a n .
Divini ty . A n g p ag ca d i o s .
The attrib u tes of Go d A n g p a g ca d i o s nang Di os

d
. .
What i s i nherent in m ankin . A n g p a g ca ta u o

M anhood Wo m anhood . . A n g p a g ca la la q u i A ng p a g ca b a b a y e
. .
Phi losophy . A ng p a g ca d un o n g .
PA L A .
i s p refixed to a verbal or no m inal roo t denoti ng an actio n

P a la
or a thing capable o f being converte d i nto a habit o r vice and for m s ,
the co m pound expressive of th e perso n i ndulging i n the habi t .
I dol . Heathen . A nito . Pa laa n i to .
Curse Cu rs e r, m o r d a c i o u s Su m p a Pa la s u m p a
w
. . . .
la
j
L 1t1g a t 10 n ,
B a r ra t o r Csap Pa la o s a p
su i t
. . .
P a la i n o m nang
Drinking Drunkard I nom
alac
. . .
E ating . G lut to n . Pa la ca i n .
L ove . Wooer . Pa la s i n ta .
Chat , speaking . Chatterer . Pa la os a p

( P e e v i s h q a re l
u
Quarreling ,
Pa la au a y
so m e
. .
P a n is prefixed to ver al o r n o m I n a l roots to fo r m nouns of b

the i nstru m ent with w hi ch the action o r the thing i s effected .
Pa n being the passive particle for m a n d rops a and causes

, ,
the i nitial consonan t of the root to u ndergo the sa m e changes which

have been noted i n the conj ugation of ma n verbs I f i s by pa ying .
attention to the signification an d character of the root that deri vati ves
with p a n can i n so m e cases be distinguished fro m those for m ed
, ,
with p a .
To seal Seal . Tata o . .
Hole . A u ger Butas . .
To m o w Sic k le G apas
Raz
. . .
To shave or A bit
. . .
To dig Pi ckax hoe B ucay

b
. . .
,
To cart Pannier asket

. I I aco t , .
i dolater I s your friend a d runkard ? H e is not a d ru nka rd b u t

'
~
.
,
he i s a glut to n I s your cousi n a wooer ?

. H e i s a wooer and a
chatterer I s he also peevish ? He is peevi sh and a barrator What
.
'
.
~
i s that your writer has i n his hand ? I t i s a seal I s i t not an

z
.
auger? N o i t i s a ra or Where did the serva nt p ut the dishclout?

w
.
,
He has put i t ith the pincers What are you going to do

w
.
i th this sickle ? I a m going to m o w grass Who has found the .
carpenter s ha m m er? ’
P eter foun d i t i n the basket Who has the .
sou nding lead ? The sailo r ha s it and the scratcher as well Where .
i s m y pen ? Your pen an d the hook have been carried away Have .
you no ruler for ruling this p aper? I have one Where i s the .
tying rope for these logs of wood ? The tying rope is i n the house .
S I X TY THI R D —
L E S SO N .
YCA A N I M N A PO UO T , , TA TL O NG PA G A R A L .
R E CA P I TU L A TI O N O F PA R TI CL E S .
( conti nue ) d .
P I N A CA .
i s prefixed to no m inal o r adj ectival

Pi n a ca roots for ming co m poun s d
expressive o f what serves as a substitute o r i s reputed to s tan d fo r
the thing or quality de noted y the root b The use o f the partic le
w
.
i n the following p hrases ill better illustrate the m a tter .
Boiled rice stan for read with d b A ng canin ang siy ang p i naca ti
n atives . n apay n a n g m an a ta g alog g .
We cons i der you our leader . Ic ao ang p i n a ca p o n o na m i n .
The lion i s considered the king P i n a ca ha ri ang leé n ( Sp ) ha li m a o

of ani m als .
( T ag
) nang m an a h a o
y p g .
Sm ls reputed to e the greatestb evI l

.
A n g p i n a ca m a la q u l s a lahat na
l ca s a m a a i ang c a s a la na n
b
, , .
What accidentally serves as a roo m Pi n a ca u a li s

w
. .
He ho stands for one of the parents A n g p i n a ca m a g ula n g

w b
. .
He ho m so m e ody reputes as hi s Pi n a ca p a n gi n oo n
lord
.
W hat serves as a pen i n case of need . P i n a ca p a n ula t .
A nybody acting as a servan t . A ng p i n a ca a li la .
The mistress the m inion a nybody , ,
who m one reputes as husband o r A n g p i n a ca a s au a

w
.
ife .
SA N G .
Sa ng i s b ut the for m w hich the nu meral a n takes b efore a

nou n I s a m a y st nd alone
a g i s al w ays j oi ne d to the thi n g o r
s an
d d or counte d
.
,
u nit
y eter m i n e .
RE CA PI TUL A TI CN or PA R TI CLE S . 373
It precedes the denaries and the other expressions for o un d

r
n um b ers .
A d ena ry hundred. A . San g p ou b Sang d aan .
A thousand A ten thousand . . San g lib o San g lacs a

. .
A hundred thousan d Sang yot a

gao
. .
A m i llion . Sang p o u o n g y o ta s a n g anga o an ,

-
.
It expresses totality , length o f ti m e .
He ca m e one day . N a p a r i to siy a i s ang arao .
A ll the day long . Sang arao .
F o r a whole hour . San g o ra s /

Throughout the week Sang lingo
b
.
A ll the m onth roun d . Sang ouan .
The length o f the year . Sa n g ta on .
It d eno tes the contents of so m e thi ng not the vessel or container ,

.
A ti naja
( large earthen pot) o f
l = s a t1i b i g
or ,
w l s ang tapayang
,
na ng
for a ter
.
g is
.
On e t i n a ja f u l o f cocoa nu t oi ] Sang t a p a y a n g lan

b
-
. .
On e ottle of a r rack . Sang bo teng alac . v
One Spoon ful of hon ey . Sang ca cha r a ng ( Sp .

) polot V .
Sa ng p rece es nouns d
to ns m eeting places o r resorts to i n of w ,
-
d i ca t e the whole population or attendance .
A ll t he i nha b i ta n ts o f M anila Sang M a y nila

b b
. .
'
The whole population of Ce u . Sang Se u

The full attendance at chu rch . Sang si m bahan .
The spectators of a play . Sang teatro .
The whole offspring . Sang a n a c an .
The lit ter the nu m ber

farrowed
,
a t once
of pigs ?
Sang
(
a n a ca n g b ab uy .
d
.
Broo o f a she dog -

. Sang a n a ca n g aso .
The whole crew o f a shi p Sang d auong

b
.
,
The people sailing on a pi rogue . Sang ang oa .
Collective nouns for med w i th w

or ithout ca prefixe d an d an zha n
s u f fi xe d ad m it o f s a ng e f o re b the m to i n dicate totali ty .
The full house all the tenan ts , . Sa n g b a ha y a n .
The whole t o wn all the vi llagers , . Sa n g b a y a n a n .
A ll the heavenly legions Sa n g ca la n gi t a n

w
. .
The hole of m anki nd . Sa n g ca tau o ha n .
A ll the world ( people ) . . Sa n g ca li b o ta n .
The w ho le C hri s te n do m Sa n g ca cri s ti a n o ha n

w
. .
The hole A rchi pelago Sa n g ca p o loa n

”
. .
A ll the Sai nts i n Heaven . Sa n g ca la ngi ta n santos .

TE E TA GA L O G LAN GUA GE .
TA G .
Ta g is ut b a con t racted fo r m of ta g a It serves to f orm the .
s easons , m onsoons or the designation s for the p revalent atm ospherica l

occurrences .
Sprin g Su m m er
. . Ta g arao Ta gb i s i ta g ara o ta g init
.
, ,
-
.
A utu m n Ta g o lan ( rai ny seaso n )

d
. .
Wi nter Ta g gu i nao ta g la m i g ( col season )

w
-
. . .
,
Pr evailing ti m e o f the south est

w l
-
Ta g ha b aga t
in d m on soon .
.
The portion of the year du ring which

north east winds p revai l
-
l T g a a m 1ha n .
w
.
Space o f ti m e during hich typhoons

are p revalen t . l
TA GA .
Ta g a b esi d es
the sense o f origi n a n i the others which have
b b
,
een already explained for m s like ma n freque n tati v e ver al n ou ns , , , ,
generally i ndicating the trade the person i s e ngaged i n for a sal a ry

b b
,
and i s put efore ver s .
To tend to Wa tchm a n f te nd ‘
Tano d
,
Ta ga ta no d
w a tch er
. .
Cook m a n charged
w b
,
ith oiling the Saing : Ta g ap a g s ai n g .
r1e e
watch over to
.
To
b e on the look
,
Sentry . Bant ay . Ta g a p a gb a ntay .
out for .
To look out to
Overseer
,
be careful .
.
To haunt . Haunter .
Herds man swine keeper ( fo r o ther

people s herd)
’
,
.
.
Ta ga ta n o r nang b ab uy .
Ti g for ms w
ith the car inal n u m erals the distri ute n u m erals, d b
b b w
, ,
the first s ylla le o f t he cardinal eing repeated fro m five U p ards in

the w
ay wich ha s already been explained I t differs fro m ma n 1n
w
.
the latter being only applie d to unities of m easure hile ti g i s used

w
,
ith cardinal nu m erals .
On e each Tw o e a ch . . Ti g i s a Ti g d a lau a ti ga la u a
-
.
,
.
F ive to every one . Ti g li li m a

Te n to ea ch . Ti g s a ng p ou o ti gs a s an gp o u o ,
.
376 THE TA GA L O G L AN GUA GE .
e vil dd
What i your serv a n t m ake u s e o f as a ro om to s e e p b w
w
.
the door sill ? He m ade a cane serve as a broo m to s ee p it Why

do you respect your uncle so m uch ? I respect hi m so m uch ecause , b
he sta nds as a f a t he r to m e What stands for forks i n t he m an ner
'
na tives swallow food Thei r fingers Stand for forks

. How di d you .
wri te the letter? I had no steel pen at ha n d a nd m ade this quill

w
-
serve as a pen .In what condi ti o n did he hold his nep he ? He

considered hi m as a m enial servant H o w lo ng were you at M anila ? .
I was there a whole day H ave you waited fo r m e a long ti m e ?

. I
wai te d for you a full hour How long i s he going to s tay with us ?
b
.
He is going to e he re one enti re week How m any years rent i s .

’
'
our far m er going to pay ? He i s going to p ay one year s rent

w
.
What did the population of M anila do m any years ago hen they were
visited with an earthquake ? The whole of population M anila wen t away
to the Open country How m any puppies does the b rood cons i st of?
.
I t consi st of seven puppies Where i s the ship ? The shi p sank all ,
the crew were drowned How m any passengers o f the pi rogue ca m e

b
.
on shore? A ll the passengers ca m e on S hore A r e there no i nha i ta nts .
i n thi s town ? A ll the vill a gers are n o w attending m ass Has t his
Who redee m ed manki nd ?
.
house no tenants? A ll the tenants died

'
J
.
esus Christ redee m ed all m anki nd and he i s revered by all chri sti an
people Did the plague spread largely ? P lague Spread over the whole
.
What season are we now i n We are n o w i n su mm er ti m e . .
Do you like wi nter? I do n o t like winter it is a ve ry cold season

w
.
,
In what m on ths of th e year do th e north e a st m o nsoo n inds preva il ? -
N orth eas t wi n ds prevail i n the P h ilippines fro m N ove m ber to June

-
In .
wha t part o f the year do typ hoons occur m ost freque ntly i n M anila ?
F ro m the m idd le of Oc tober u ntil the e n d of Dec e m ber H o w m uc h .
salary does he p a y to the herder of hi s cattle ? He pays h is herder

ten dollars m onthly H o w did he distri u te the candles?
. He gave b
o ne to every m a n two to every wo m an and th ree to every child
w
, , , , .
Who as the fi rst m a n? A dan was th e fi rst m a n and E v a the fi rst

wo m a n . b
What ook i s that? I t is the thi rd volu me .
S I X TY —
F O U R TH L E S SO N .
YCA A N I M N A P O U O , T, A PA T N A P AG A R A L .
HO W TO E X P R E S S I D E A S N OT H A V I N G N A TI V E TE R M S .
The student m ust not this ti m e have failed to notice the by

b
a sence of ter m s fo r such abstract notions an d delicate f eeli ngs as
acco m pany the attain m ent by the hu m an m ind of a high degree
z
of crv d i a ti o n and refine m ent and i t m a y perhaps appear superfluous ,
to s a y here that the language a fi ord s no n ative words fo r the expression

of n o tl o n s of this kind Spanish has been hitherto an d is still drawn upon
.
, ,
for term s designating such m aterial thi ngs and such obj ects of thought
as nati ve s were not and could not be acquainted ith i n their isolated w
cond i t1on of life be f ore the conquest ; b u t this source see m s n o w liable to
be d 1s co n t1n u e d and superseded by that of the E nglish language when the
l tter co m es to
a , b
e spoken as ex tensively as Sp a ni sh i s n o w a thin g
,
,
’
How To E XPR E SS I DE A S N CT HA V I N G N A TI v E TE R M S . 377
wh1ch, un d er
the prese n t e ucational syste m an o f fi CI a l i n uce m e n t s ; d d d
ca n bu t occur wi thi n a co m para t ively sho r t space of ti m e
b
.
In the m eanti m e the learner i s to select fro m the voca ulary

b
,
at hi s co m m and s u ch wo rd s and express ions as m a y est tally wi th

the characteris tics o f the thing o r actio n t h e notio n o f whic h he wants
to co nvey I f he i s conversant with S p anish
. he wi ll do we ll first ,
to try w hether by using the pro per Spanish word he succeeds i n m aking
hi m self unders tood I f he fails he m ust then tax his own resources for
.
,
the m ost i ntelli g i ble possible descri ption o r defin itio n of the ter m or th 1ng ,
and m an a ge i n t he sa m e m anner as i f to convey a n o t i o n to a pupil which - '
the latter i s ha v i ng for the firs t t i m e

A m ong the S panish words adopted i n Taga log the following
b
,
. . .
see m to e entitled to special m ention i n view of the fact th at t hey

b
,
are frequen t ly m ade use o f y natives and tha t to all appearance , ,
they have been perm anen tly i ncorporated i n the language : de mon i o g us to , ,
lo co; ma s q u e , p a r a , p u r o , s eg u r o , a nd y
s iga c .
“ ” “ ” “
i s the Spanish word fo r de m on
D e moni c devil an evi l
b
, ,
”
s
p i ri t which
,
i s used y natives as an interj ectio n i n the sense of a
conte m ptuous reproach .
Thedevi l wi t h theel iD e m o n i o ca !
What a devil of a cook thi s here . A n g de m on io n ang co s i n e ro s i to .
s tands i n Spanish for liki ng

G us to pleasure “
,
” "
, e tc .
,
b ut na
ti v e s use i t as a syno ny m fo r the i m perso nal i bi g .
What you r wish ?18 g A n on g i b i =

g g u s to m o ?
M y W i sh i s i t i s my wish I big co : gusto co
z m
. .
,
I f you like . Cu n i bi g g u s to o .
cra z
y ( m asculine singular); but i t i s used by
[ 3006 m eans : “
ma d ,
” “
“
the lo w er classes for fool a m eaning which i t ha s only secondarily
d
,
i n Spanish an i s i n tended as an affro nt which n ati ves greatly resen t

, .
Tho u , fool . L o c o; loc o ca .
the Spani sh mas q u e a n i m proper expressio n for a a n qu e

M as q ue,
b
,
”
“
i s_used y natives i n the se nse of though “
although “
even so ”
, , ,
”
“
no m at te r e tc , .
Though thou be wealt hy M asque m aya m an ca

b
. .
thou shalt be killed y m e I

p a p a ta y i n ca t a M
[ as q u e l
. .
w i ll k i ll thee E ven so !
.
. .
N o m atter whether he dies or n ot . M asque m a m at ay S iy a , m asque dili .
“ ”
Pa r a ( )
the Spanish preposition for for
1 i s i n o rder ,
“
” “
to ,
towards etc ; used i n connectio n wi th the dativ e case when
, .
,
the latter deno tes the purpose for which so m ething i s i ntended I ts .
adoption i n Tagalog has been rather a m atter o f necessity than of

choice i n view of the different and m par t contradictory m ean i ngs e m bodied
, , ,
i n its Tagalog counterpart 3a and the i m possibility of thereby discri m

i na ti n g b
etween the g i v i ng to and the i n te n di ng f or action without a - -
( 1) S t u d e nts s h o u ld not co nfo u n d t he re

p po s t
i i o n p a ra w i th the i mper -
a ti ve p ar a , s t0 p , a w or d a ls o f r e q u e n t ly us e d b y na t i e s v J
TE E TA GA L OG L AN GUAGE .
c h a n g e i n the f or m o f the ver or the e m pl oy me n t o f other o r s e i n g b w d b

m ade Thus bi lhi n mo s o a ga i n ma y e q ually m ea n : buy i t fro m
.
,
“
,
“ ”
me or buy i t for m e ; and if the latter sense i s m eant with this
b b
, ,
for m of t he ver it eco m es necessary to say : bi lhi n mo p a r a s a

,
-
a ga i n ; or else y bi li m o a co A,
ng d aa n 3 a P as ig a y bn cas na m eans .
,
strictly : the road at Pa sig i s open al ready

“
To say “
the road to .
,
Pasig i s open already would re q uire either a ng d aa n p a tong o s a ‘
, ,
Pas i g a y ba cas n a or a ng daa n p a r a s a P as i g a y ba cas n a

, , .
“
i s the Spanish adj ecti v e f o r pu re i n the si ngular m a s
P u ro
culine
" “
but i s used adver ially i n Tagalog for m erely
for m ,
” “
“ ” “
absolutely "
b ”
, ,
“
wholly altogeth e r all along ; a nd gene rally where an idea of
b b
, ,
rese m lance or continuance i s to e deno ted .
A llof the m are wealthy P u ro sil a m aya m an

g
. .
The cocoa trees are utterly destroyed P uro sira ang m an a punong niog
g g
. .
The work m en were all still young P uro m an a bata pa ang m an a

boys m a ng a ga u a
b w
. .
There is no res t for the m ut ork U al a sil ang d es ca ns o, cund i pu ro

w
,
and ork con tinually n a g ta tra b a o

.
j .
“
the Spanish sure i n the m asculi ne singular has also
Seg u r o ,
’
, .
in Ta galog the ad v erbial s ense o f c e rta i n ly f

“ “
surely with the ac
b
, ,
“ ” “ ” “ ”
c e s s o ry m eanings of likely perhaps i t m ay e i t m y happen
“
, , , .
Will you go to the cook pi t? -
gP a r o r oo n s aca b ag a s a bon
g a n?
Certai nly . Seguro
I t m a y be that he stole it . N i n ac a o niy a seguro .
W
I m ay perhaps co m e . Pa ri ri to a co seguro .
i s the i m perative of the S p anish verb s eg a i r

Si g u e to follow ,
“
.
” “
“
to p roceed
, to go o n ,
I t i s i n this latter sense that s i g ns is .
'
used i n Tagalog .
Go on ( proceed )wi th the work . Sigue ang trabaj o .
Go on as far as Cavite . Si gue s a Cavi te .
There
are other Spa n ish wo rds freque ntly used i n Ta g alog an d
apparently a lso per m anently incorporated i n the language bu t they a re , ,
o f such a nature that i t will not be con v enient that th ey should appea r
i n this gra m m ar .
AS
hi nted else w here this lack o f ethical ter m s on on e side i s , ,
co u pled o n the other to a profusive vocabulary o f such other w o i d s as

,
'
the m eaning of which ha s to do wi th every shadow of nati ves food pursuits '
, ,
favo rite sports etc Sets of words and e x p r e s i o ns follow pur p orting
, .
to show thi s copiousness as well as scantiness a n d in the latter case the , , ,
words or descriptions whic h m a y be used as sub s ti tute s therefor An .
E nglish translation as literal as i t can be of the Taga log words is given

, ,
o n a t hird colu m n i n which the rules of syn tax and the propriety of
,
expression are so m eti m es dis regarded that t he st u dent m a y thus derive

m ore valuable infor m ation .
I n the Tagalog exercise too the for m is g 1v e n m which m ost

'
, , ,
probabl y the E nglish words used i n the voca b ula ry will co m e to be

z
,
t a g a li e d when they are eventually adop ted by the language .

THE TA G A L O G L A N GUA GE .
I
To give .
( generical ter m ) Big a y m a g b i g ay .
, .
Do . to grant per m ission Pa hi n tolo t m a g p a hi n tolo t .

, .
Do . the first fruit s P a m ag h . .
Do . an account lesson Si i li t m a g p a s uli t

,
.
, .
Do . money on i nterest M a g p a tu b o . .
Do . ple dge .M a g s a n la .
Do a salary M ag o p a
w
.
. .
Do . arni ng U m a la m
. .
Do . satisfaction M a gb i g ay loob . .
Do earne s t m oney i n token th at Tu ma m a

m ti ga
.
p a g p a n
a bargai n i s ratified , .
Do . word pro m ise ,

.
Do . o n cr e dit to loan ,
.
Do . bountifully .
Do . freely willingly ,
.
Do . to present w i th .
S c a n t i ne s s .
E N GL I SH . TA G A L OG . L I TE RA L TRA N SL A TI ON .
A ccident fit ,
. B i g lan g s a q u i t . Sudden co m p laint .
Sa p a n ahon g ha ha ra p i n , A t a ti m e which wi ll be
In future . or , s a p a n a hon g dara present , at a ti m e to
ting . co m e .
I solated N a pai s a L eft alone

w
. . .
Co m m on w
se er gutter , ,
Bangbang na i na a g o s a n Trench the place hich
nang m an a du m i at g serves for the filth and
,
gully ,
i h a dregs to be drai ned

.
p n a g u g a s n . .
P and ay bat o m angaga Stone artist m aker of

l b
-
Ston e m ason , ,
u é nang abay na bat o stone houses

.
. .
What i s considered as
A n g i n a a r i n g s a n to n g s u
‘
lat nang m a n a turco g

the Holy Scripture of
the Turks or book i n ,
The Ko ra n o li b ro n g q u i n a p a p a , ,
which the co m mand

g
.
,
la m n au nang m an a
m ents of M oha m ed are
ca u tu s a n n i M aho m a
con tained ( pri nte d ) .
Knocking i en
l
ra Sonorous striking at
k
g v
Pa g tog to g s a p 1uto
,
with t he kn o c er the door .
P1na g t1t i p o n a n n ang t‘i Place where rainy water

R eservoi r for rai n water
‘
b I g s a olan
.
. i s gathered .
B ahay o ca m alig na p 1 House o r construction ,
Warehouse . n a g ta t a g o a n nang sari the place where a varie

saring ca laca l ty of goods i s concealed
b
. .
A uction Pa g b i b i li s a c ahayagan Sale i n pu lic of p ro

j udicial sale of
,
.
n ang p a g a a ri na cato perty with the assist

’
property by public
auction .
lon g at ca ala m ang ance and kno ledge of w
J u s ti ci a ( Sp ) the cou rts .
Pa na n a i s ay o p a hay a g
Orat i on ,
, ,
A ccou nt or explanation ,
ad d ress ha r n a d i m a la u i , n a n

TheTagalogLanguage 10067120

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TheTagalogLanguage 10067120

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

T H E TA G A L O G L A N G U A G E .

USE OF T OS H E ENG A G ED IN GOV ER N M E N T SE R C VI E,

AND C O MME RC E IN T HES E I SL A N D S .

( ALL R IGH TS RE S ERVED ) .

p ronouns affo rd pronoun s an d the article f o r

( A n alpha etical b i ndex will be found j ust follo i ng the end w

The A rti cle

The L iga m ents an d ,

P ersonal an d P ossessive P ronoun s .

N u m eral A dj ectives ; Cardi nal an d Ordinal Num

N u m eral A dj ectives ; A dverbial ,

Degrees of Co m parison ; Co m parati ve of E quality .

XI V . Degrees of Co m parison ; Co m paratives of Su p

X . The Ve r . U m Ver s Conj ugation . .

X X . The P assive Voice . Conj ugation .

The Passive Voice ( continued ) . Conj ugati on .

XX . I nstru m ental P assive M iddle Voice . Conj ugation .

Twenty F i rst E xerci se

. L ocal Passive M iddle Voice . Conj ugation .

Tw enty Second E xercise

Us e of the Ver b al Particle Um

Twenty Thir E xercise

. U s e of the Ver al Particle U m ( co nti nued ) .

Twenty F ourth E xercise

XXV . Irre g ularities i n the Conj ugation of Um Ver s .

Twenty F ifth E xercise

XX . U s e of the Ver al P article M a g

. U s e o f the Ver al Particle M a g ( continued ) .

Twenty Seventh E xercise

. U s e o f the P article P a y i n the Pa ssi ve .

Twenty E ighth E xercise

. U s e o f the Verbal P article M a Conj ugatio n . .

Twenty N i nth E xercise .

XXX . The Partici ple .

XXX . The P ast P arti ciple .

Thirty F i rst E xercise

. I n Passive M eaning and U s e

Thirty Second E xercise

X XX I I I . Y Passive M eaning and U s e—

Thirty Thi rd E xe r cise

XXX . A n P assive M ean ing and U s e—

Thi rt y F ourth E xercise

. The P roper U s e of either Voice of the Ver .

Thirty F ifth E xercise

XXX VI . M o di ﬁ ca ti v e Verbal Particle M a n = Pa n Co n .

j ugation Verbal Co m pounds

Thirty Sixth E xercise

XXX V I I . M o di ﬁ ca ti v e Ver al b Particle M a ca

M o d i ﬁ ca ti v e Ver al b Particle M a gma —

Th i rty N i nth E xerci se

F orty F irst E xercise

Conj ugation Ca y a Cod a

F orty Second E xercise .

F o rty Thi rd E xercise

XL V . M o d iﬁ ca ti v e Verbal P arti cle M a g s a zPa gs a Co n .

Forty F ourth E xerci se .

XLV . M o diﬁ c a ti v e Verbal Particle M a n hi z zP a nhi Co n .

j ugation L 000 Ocol P 0710 t i td zCa td

F orty F i fth E xerci se .

F orty Sixth E xerci se

F orty Seventh E xercise

F orty E ighth E xerci se

Conj u gation Tap a t Ti la , T0103